JP2020093033A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of suitably increasing a degree of attention to a game.SOLUTION: A diffusion lens 425 for a backside lower part has first plural recessed parts formed by a leftward diffusion part 425a, a front direction diffusion part 425b, and a rightward diffusion part 425c at least by the width of an emission surface of an LED for a backside lower part. Accordingly, light applied from the first LED for a backside lower part is diffused by optical paths in three directions within a backside light guide plate by plural recessed parts of the diffusion lens 425 for a backside lower part. Since the diffusion part 425a for a leftward direction, the diffusion part 425b for a front direction, and the diffusion part 425c for a rightward direction are configured to have the same side length each, the width of optical paths of light to be diffused is also configured to be identical.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 14

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine.

Conventionally, a lottery such as a win is performed based on the establishment of a predetermined start condition, and for example, when a win is won, a game in which a predetermined game medium is paid out to a player according to the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition. There is an opportunity.

This gaming machine is provided with a display unit capable of changing a design or the like visible from the front of the gaming machine, and a production means such as a light emitting unit capable of changing a single color or a luminescent color. By changing the display mode of the rendering means, it is configured to enhance the rendering effect during the game (for example, Patent Document 1).

JP, 2008-126296, A

For such a gaming machine, in order to improve the interest of the game, it is necessary to raise the attention of the game by enhancing the effect of the effecting means, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

The present invention has been made in view of the above circumstances, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of appropriately increasing the degree of attention to games.

In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine according to claim 1 is provided with a production means for performing a predetermined production as a game progresses, and the production means includes at least a first light emitting portion for emitting light, and When the light is emitted from the light emitting means having the second light emitting portion arranged on the predetermined direction side with respect to the first light emitting portion and the light emitting means, the predetermined information regarding the game is made visible from the front side of the gaming machine. Light guide means, and sequential light emitting means for sequentially emitting the light emitting means from the first light emitting portion toward the predetermined direction.

A gaming machine according to a second aspect is the gaming machine according to the first aspect, in which the light emitting means sequentially emitted from the first light emitting portion toward the predetermined direction by the sequential light emitting means is predetermined from the first light emitting portion. A sequential extinguishing means for sequentially extinguishing the lights in the direction side is provided.

The gaming machine according to claim 3 is the gaming machine according to claim 1 or 2, wherein the sequential light emitting means emits light from the first light emitting portion when the second light emitting portion emits light. Emission color inheritance means for emitting light in colors is provided.

A gaming machine according to claim 4 is the gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 3, wherein the sequential light emitting means emits at least the emission colors of the first light emitting portion and the second light emitting portion. Different color light emitting means for differentiating is provided.

The gaming machine according to claim 5 is the gaming machine according to claim 4, wherein the different color light emitting means causes the second light emitting portion to operate after the predetermined first light emitting color is emitted from the first light emitting portion. The first light emitting section emits light in a first light emitting color, and the first light emitting section emits a second light emitting color different from the first light emitting color.

According to the gaming machine according to claim 1, there is provided a production means for performing a predetermined production as a game progresses, and the production means comprises at least a first light emitting portion for emitting light and the first light emitting portion. A light emitting means having a second light emitting portion arranged on the predetermined direction side; and a light guiding means for making predetermined information regarding a game visible from the front side of the gaming machine when light is emitted from the light emitting means, And a sequential light emitting unit that sequentially emits light from the first light emitting unit toward the predetermined direction. As a result, there is an effect that the degree of attention to the game can be appropriately increased.

According to the gaming machine of claim 2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine of claim 1, the following effect is achieved. That is, the light emitting means sequentially emitted from the first light emitting portion toward the predetermined direction by the sequential light emitting means is sequentially turned off from the first light emitting portion toward the predetermined direction. As a result, there is an effect that the degree of attention to the game can be appropriately increased.

According to the gaming machine of claim 3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine of claim 1 or 2, the following effects are achieved. That is, the sequential light emitting unit includes a light emission color inheriting unit that emits light in the emission color emitted by the first light emitting unit when the second light emitting unit emits light. As a result, there is an effect that the degree of attention to the game can be appropriately increased.

According to the gaming machine of claim 4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine of claims 1 to 3, the following effects are achieved. That is, the sequential light emitting means includes at least a different color light emitting means for making the emission colors of the first light emitting portion and the second light emitting portion different. As a result, there is an effect that the degree of attention to the game can be appropriately increased.

According to the gaming machine of claim 5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine of claim 4, the following effects are achieved. That is, the different color light emitting means emits the second light emitting portion with the first light emission color and emits the first light emitting portion with the first light emission portion after the predetermined first light emission color is emitted from the first light emission portion. Light is emitted in a second emission color different from the one emission color. As a result, there is an effect that the degree of attention to the game can be appropriately increased.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine in a 1st embodiment of the present invention. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine. It is a schematic diagram showing a symbol array arranged on each reel of the drum display device. It is an exploded perspective view of a game board. It is an exploded perspective view of a backboard unit. It is a rear perspective view of a light guide unit. It is a front side exploded perspective view of a light guide unit. It is a rear side exploded perspective view of a light guide unit. FIG. 8 is a diagram showing a positional relationship of the drum display device 81 and a positional relationship of a confirmation lamp and a display area forming member with respect to a schematic side sectional view of the light guide unit 400 taken along line XX of FIG. 7. It is a typical perspective view of a front side light guide plate and a back side light guide plate. It is the typical front view which showed the 1st decorative symbol group which can be lighted and displayed on the back side light guide plate, and the positional relationship of the back side upper LED of the back side upper LED unit and the back side lower LED of the lower LED unit. .. FIG. 13 is a schematic enlarged view of a portion A in FIG. 12, which is a schematic diagram showing a relationship between a rear lower diffusion lens formed on a lower end surface of a rear light guide plate and a rear lower LED of a lower LED unit. It is a front view. FIG. 14 is a schematic enlarged view of a portion B in FIG. 13, which is a diagram schematically showing an optical path of light by a rear lower diffusion lens. It is the figure which showed the lighting mode of the 1st decorative symbol group lighted and displayed on the back side light guide plate, (a) is LED for the back side upper part corresponding to the right side area of a back side light guide plate, and the back side lower It is the figure which showed typically the lighting mode of the 1st decorative design group when LED lights, (b) is for the back upper part corresponding to the center area of a back side light guide plate from the state of (a). It is the figure which showed typically the lighting mode of the 1st decorative symbol group at the time of additionally lighting LED and LED for rear side lower. It is the figure which showed the lighting mode of the 1st decorative symbol group lighted and displayed on the back side light guide plate, (a) is the state corresponding to the left side area of a back side light guide plate from the state of FIG. 15 (b). It is the figure which showed typically the lighting mode of the 1st decorative design group at the time of additionally lighting the LED for upper side, and the LED for lower rear, and (b) is a rear side from the state of (a). It is the figure which showed typically the lighting mode of the 1st decorative symbol group at the time of extinguishing the LED for rear upper and the LED for rear lower corresponding to the right side area of a light guide plate. It is the figure which showed the lighting mode of the 1st decorative symbol group lit and displayed on the back side light guide plate when a confirmation lamp is lighted, (a) is a state where a confirmation lamp is non-lighting, and It is the figure which showed typically the lighting mode of the 1st decorative symbol group in case the LED for back side upper and LED for back side lower corresponding to the right side area of a side light guide plate were lighted, (a) ) State, the rear lower LED corresponding to the central region of the rear light guide plate is additionally turned on while the confirmation lamp is lit, while the central region and the right region of the rear light guide plate are supported. It is the figure which showed typically the lighting mode of the 1st decorative symbol group in case the LED for the rear upper part is turned off. It is the figure which showed the lighting mode of the 1st decorative symbol group lighted and displayed on the back light guide plate with lighting of the confirmation lamp, (a) shows the confirmation lamp 311 from the state of FIG.17(b). While continuing to light, the rear lower LED corresponding to the left side area of the rear light guide plate is additionally turned on, while the rear lower LED corresponding to the left side area, the central area and the right side area of the rear light guide plate is additionally illuminated. It is the figure which showed typically the lighting mode of the 1st decorative design group when the LED for upper side is turned off, (b) is the state of the decision lamp from the state of (a), and, , The rear upper LED corresponding to the left region and the central region of the rear light guide plate is additionally turned on, while the rear upper LED and the rear lower LED corresponding to the right region of the rear light guide plate are turned on. It is the figure which showed typically the lighting mode of the 1st decorative symbol group at the time of turning off. A schematic showing the relationship between the second decorative symbol group, the third decorative symbol group, and the fourth decorative symbol group that can be lit and displayed on the front light guide plate, and the front lower LED unit, the front right LED unit, and the front left LED unit. It is a front view. It is the figure which showed typically the optical path of the light by each condensing lens. (A) is the figure which showed the uneven|corrugated shape which forms the 2nd decorative pattern group of a front side light guide plate, and the direction of the light which this 2nd decorative pattern group can light-display, (b) is a figure of the front side light guide plate It is the figure which showed the uneven|corrugated shape which forms the 4th decorative symbol group, and the direction of the light which this 4th decorative symbol group can light-display. It is the figure which showed the lighting mode of the 2nd decorative design group, the 3rd decorative design, and the 4th decorative design group which are lighted and displayed on the front side light guide plate, (a) is for the front right side with respect to the front side light guide plate. It is the figure which showed typically the lighting mode of the 4th decorative design group when LED and LED for front left are lit, (b) is for the front side lower part of the right end side and the left end side with respect to the front light guide plate. It is the figure which showed typically the lighting mode of the 2nd decorative symbol group when LED lights. It is the figure which showed the lighting mode of the 2nd decorative design group, the 3rd decorative design, and the 4th decorative design group which are light-displayed by the front side light guide plate, (a) is the front side of the center part with respect to the front side light guide plate. It is the figure which showed typically the lighting mode of the 3rd decorative design at the time of lighting the LED for the lower part, (b) is the 2nd decoration when all the LEDs for the front lower parts were lighted with respect to the front light guide plate. It is the figure which showed typically the lighting mode of the symbol group and the 3rd decorative symbol. It is the figure which showed the production which is done with the front side light guide plate, the back side light guide plate and the drum display, (a), 1st decorative design group, 2nd decorative design group, 3rd decorative design and 4th decorative design group It is the figure which showed the non-lighting state typically, (b) is a non-lighting of the 1st decoration symbol group, the 2nd decoration symbol group, and the 3rd decoration symbol, while the 4th decoration symbol group is a lighting state. It is the figure which showed the state typically. It is the figure which showed the production which is done with the front side light guide plate, the back side light guide plate and the drum display, (a), while the 2nd decorative design group and the 3rd decorative design are lighting state, 1st decorative design group It is the figure which showed typically the non-lighting state of the 4th decorative symbol group, (b), while the 1st decorative symbol group is a lighting state, the 2nd decorative symbol group, the 3rd decorative symbol, and 4th. It is the figure which showed the non-lighting state of the decorative symbol group typically. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of a pachinko machine. It is a figure showing typically composition of various counters, each reservation sphere storage area, and reservation sphere execution area. (A) is a figure which showed typically an example of a jackpot random number table, and (b) is a figure which showed an example of a jackpot type table. It is the figure which showed an example of the reservation number table typically. (A) is a figure which showed typically an example of A table of a stop pattern table, (b) was a figure which showed an example of B table of a stop pattern table typically, (c) is a figure. It is the figure which showed typically an example of C table of a stop pattern table. It is the figure which showed typically an example of the variation pattern table for losses. It is the figure which showed typically an example of the variation pattern table for big hits. It is a block diagram mainly showing an electric configuration of a voice lamp control device. It is the figure which showed typically an example of the light guide plate lighting pattern table. It is the figure which showed typically an example of the definite lamp lighting pattern table. It is the figure which showed typically the structure of each holding information storage area and execution information storage area. It is a flow chart which shows the starting processing performed by MPU in a main control unit. 6 is a flowchart showing a setting change process executed by an MPU in the main control device. It is a flow chart which shows the main processing performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flow chart which shows the starting winning processing executed by the MPU in the main control device. It is a flow chart which shows special figure change processing performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation|variation start process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flow chart which shows NMI interruption processing performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flow chart which shows the starting processing performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device. It is a flow chart which shows the main processing performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which shows the command determination process performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device. It is a flow chart which shows change production processing performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which shows the fixed lamp lighting setting process performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which shows the light guide pattern setting process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control device. It is the figure which showed typically the optical path of the light distributed by the rear downward diffusion lens, when 1 rear downward LED is lighted. It is a typical side sectional view of the front side light guide plate which showed the light guide mode of the light which guides the inside of the front side light guide plate when the front side lower LED is lit up. It is the figure which showed typically the light guide aspect in the front side light guide plate of the light which injected into the front side light guide plate at an angle of 45 degrees, (b) is a front side light guide plate to a front side light guide plate from a front lower side LED at a downward angle of 45 degrees. It is the figure which showed typically the light guide aspect in the front side light guide plate of the light which injected, (c) is inside the front side light guide plate of the light which injected into the front side light guide plate from the LED for front lower parts in the front direction. It is the figure which showed the light guide mode typically. It is the figure which showed the position of the switching point P in the front view of the front side light guide plate shown in FIG. It is a perspective view which showed typically the light guide aspect in the front side light guide plate of the light which injected into the front side light guide plate from the front right LED at an upward angle of 45 degrees. It is the figure which showed the positional relationship of the drum display device with respect to the typical side sectional view of the light guide unit in 2nd Embodiment. Positional relationship between the third upper decorative symbol group and the third upper LED, which can be lit and displayed on the third light guide plate in the third embodiment, and the third lower decorative symbol group and the third right LED unit It is a schematic front view showing a positional relationship with an LED for the right side, and a positional relationship between a third lower decorative pattern group and an LED for the third left side of a third left LED unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the pattern of the pseudo stop symbol which can be stopped in the variation element of "pseudo variation" in the variation production of the 3rd symbol in 4th Embodiment. It is the schematic diagram which showed the transition of the fluctuation|variation element of "pseudo fluctuation" performed with the drum display apparatus in 4th Embodiment, (a) shows the state where the pseudo stop design as "pseudo stop 1" has stopped. It is the schematic diagram shown, (b) is the schematic diagram which showed the state where the pseudo stop design as "pseudo stop 2" has stopped from the state of (a), and (c) is (b). ) Is a schematic diagram showing a state in which the "reach forming symbol" is stopped, and (d) is a schematic diagram showing a state in which "reach display" is performed from the state in (c). It is a figure. It is an exploded perspective view of the left reel unit in a 5th embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows the operation principle of the stepping motor in 5th Embodiment. It is a connection diagram which shows the drive system of the stepping motor in 5th Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the excitation data and the excitation order pointer in 5th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the drive characteristic of the stepping motor performed by a series of fluctuation productions in 5th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the drive characteristic of the stepping motor performed at the time of the production|generation of "full rotation" in 5th Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating an example of the excitation pattern of normal acceleration processing in 5th Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating an example of the excitation pattern of the special acceleration process in 5th Embodiment. It is a timing chart showing the relationship between the drive mode of each reel and the output mode of the music at the time of the effect of "full rotation" in the fifth embodiment. It is the schematic diagram which showed the transition of the production|generation of "all rotations" performed with the drum display apparatus in 5th Embodiment, (a) showed the state where the temporary jackpot result by a "1" design stopped. It is a schematic diagram, (b) is a schematic diagram which showed the state which the middle reel and the right reel started to rotate by the normal acceleration process from the state of (a), (c) is a figure of (b). From the state, the middle reel and the right reel are rotating at a high speed and a constant speed, and the left reel is a schematic diagram showing a state in which the left reel starts to rotate by a special acceleration process. It is a schematic diagram showing a state in which the left reel, the middle reel, and the right reel are rotating at a high speed and a constant speed from the state, and (e) is the same as in the state of (d). It is a schematic diagram showing a state in which the reel is rotating at a high speed and a constant speed, and (f) is a schematic diagram showing a state in which the temporary jackpot result based on the “2” symbol is stopped from the state of (e). Is. It is a flow chart which shows motor control processing performed by MPU in a display control device of a 5th embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the reel rotation start process performed by MPU in the display control apparatus of 5th Embodiment. It is a timing chart showing the relationship between the drive mode of each reel and the output mode of the music at the time of the effect of "full rotation" in the sixth embodiment. It is a timing chart showing the relationship between the drive mode of each reel and the output mode of the music at the time of the effect of "full rotation" in the seventh embodiment.

<First Embodiment>
Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, with reference to FIGS. 1 to 46, a first embodiment in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter, simply referred to as “pachinko machine”) 10 will be described. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, FIG. 2 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a front view of a game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10.

As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer frame 11 in which an outer shell is formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer shape substantially the same as the outer frame 11 with respect to the outer frame 11. And an inner frame 12 that is openably and closably supported. To support the inner frame 12, metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two upper and lower positions on the left side in a front view (see FIG. 1), and the side provided with the hinges 18 serves as an opening/closing shaft. The frame 12 is supported to be openable and closable toward the front side.

A game board 13 (see FIG. 3) having a large number of nails, winning holes 63, 64a, 64b, 65a, etc. is detachably attached to the inner frame 12 from the back side. A ball game is performed by the ball flowing down on the front surface of the game board 13. In addition, in the inner frame 12, a ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 26) that launches a ball to the front area of the game board 13 and a launch that guides the ball launched from the ball launching unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13. Rails (not shown) and the like are attached.

On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 that covers the upper side of the front and a lower plate unit 15 that covers the lower side thereof are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower tray unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached at two upper and lower positions on the left side in a front view (see FIG. 1 ), and the side on which the hinge 19 is provided serves as an opening/closing shaft. The lower plate unit 14 and the lower plate unit 15 are supported to be openable and closable toward the front side. The locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are released by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation. The pachinko machine 10 is provided with a door opening switch (not shown) that detects that either the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14 is unlocked and opened (the door is opened). ..

The front frame 14 is assembled with a decorative resin component, an electrical component, and the like, and a window portion 14c having a substantially elliptical opening is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. A glass unit 16 having two glass plates is arranged on the rear surface side of the front frame 14, and the front surface of the game board 13 can be visually recognized on the front surface side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.

On the front frame 14, an upper plate 17 for storing balls is formed in a substantially box shape with its front surface protruding and the upper surface opened, and prize balls, rental balls, etc. are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed so as to descend to the right in a front view (see FIG. 1), and the ball introduced into the upper plate 17 is guided to the ball firing unit 112a by the inclination. A frame button 22 is provided on the left side of the upper plate 17 when viewed from the front.

The frame button 22 is, for example, a button that is pressed by the player when changing the stage of the effect executed on the drum display device 81 (see FIG. 3) described later. Further, the frame button 22 is also used as an operation button for allowing the player to select effect contents such as the type of so-called notice display, which is one mode of the variable effect, and execution timing.

The variation effect is an effect displayed on the drum display device 81. As described later, the ball fired in the front area of the game board 13 has a specific winning opening (a first starting opening 64a or a second starting opening described later). Mouth 64b (see FIG. 3) is executed upon entering the ball (starting winning), and after the symbols (each third symbol printed on the drum display device 81 described later) are variably displayed for a predetermined time, stop This is an effect for presenting the result (whether or not it is a big hit) of the lottery to the starting winning by the combination of the displayed symbols to the player.

The stage is a production mode in which various productions displayed on the drum display device 81 are made uniform, and in the pachinko machine 10, three stages of “a town stage”, an “empty stage”, and an “island stage” are provided. Is provided. Various effects such as the above-described variation effect and the reach effect executed during the variation effect are designed to be performed according to the theme given to each stage.

The change of the stage is performed when the player depresses the frame button 22 during a period in which no fluctuating effect is performed or during high-speed fluctuation in which the third symbol is variably displayed at high speed invisible to the player. That is, every time the frame button 22 is operated, it is repeatedly changed in the order of “town stage”→“empty stage”→“island stage”→“town stage”→... Immediately after the power is turned on, the "town stage" is set as the initial stage.

Further, when the "normal reach" effect element described later is started in the variable effect performed on the drum display device 81, the "normal reach" effect element is developed to the "super reach" effect element also described later. At this time, the selection screen for the "super reach" effect element may be displayed on the drum display device 81 during the "normal reach" effect element.

On the selection screen, a plurality of effect element candidates that can be selected as effect elements of "super reach" are displayed, and one of the effect element candidates is selected. When the player presses the frame button 22 while the selection screen is displayed, the selected effect element candidate is changed. Then, the content of the effect element of "super reach" is determined based on the effect element candidate selected at the time of development into the effect element of "super reach" (that is, at the end of the selection screen), and according to the content, " The effect element of “super reach” is executed by the drum display device 81.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the frame button 22 is configured as a button to be pressed, but instead of the frame button 22, the player moves in a predetermined direction with respect to the pachinko machine 10 (for example, forward with respect to the pachinko machine 10). , Rearward, rightward, and leftward) and can be tilted. Then, the effect stage may be selectively changed or the effect element of "super reach" may be selected based on the direction in which the operation lever is tilted.

The front frame 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around the front frame 14 (for example, a corner portion). These light emitting means perform a change control of the light emitting mode by lighting or blinking according to a change in the game state at the time of a big hit or a predetermined reach, and play a role of enhancing the effect effect during the game. A full-color light emitting diode (“Light Emitting Diode”) capable of emitting light in seven colors (white, purple, blue, blue green, green, yellow, and red) is provided on the periphery of the window 14c. Hereinafter, it may be referred to as “LED”. Are provided). In the pachinko machine 10, these illumination parts 29 to 33 function as a production lamp such as a jackpot lamp, and when a jackpot or a reach production is performed, each illumination portion 29 to 33 is turned on by turning on or blinking the built-in LED. Alternatively, it blinks to notify that the jackpot is in progress, or that the reach before the jackpot is in progress. A display lamp 34, which has a built-in light emitting means such as an LED and is capable of displaying during payout of an award ball and when an error occurs, is provided in the upper left portion of the front frame 14 when viewed from the front.

A small window 35 is formed on the lower side of the right illumination portion 32 so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized, and a small window 35 is formed, and a pasting space K1 on the front side of the game board 13 (see FIG. 3). ), etc., is visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10. Further, in the pachinko machine 10, a plating member 36 made of ABS resin, which is plated with chrome, is attached to a region around the electric decorations 29 to 33 in order to bring out more glitter.

A ball rental operating unit 40 is disposed below the window 14c. The ball rental operation section 40 is provided with a frequency display section 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball rental operation unit 40 is operated in a state where banknotes, cards, etc. are inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the ball is operated according to the operation. Lending is done. Specifically, the frequency display unit 41 is an area in which the remaining amount information of a card or the like is displayed, and the built-in LED is turned on to display the remaining amount as a number as the remaining amount information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a loan ball based on information recorded on a card or the like (recording medium), and the loan ball is supplied to the upper plate 17 as long as the card or the like has a balance. To be done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of a card or the like inserted in the card unit.

It should be noted that the ball rental operation unit 40 is not necessary in a so-called cash machine, which is a pachinko machine in which balls are lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without a card unit, but in this case, the ball rental operation unit 40 is used. It is also possible to add a decorative seal or the like to the installation portion of to make the parts configuration common. It is possible to share a pachinko machine using a card unit with a cash machine.

In the lower plate unit 15 located below the upper plate 17, a lower plate 50 for storing balls that could not be stored in the upper plate 17 is formed in a central portion of the lower plate unit 15 in a substantially box shape with an open upper surface. There is. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 operated by the player to drive the ball into the front surface of the game board 13 is provided, and inside the operation handle 51, the driving of the ball firing unit 112a is permitted. Sensor 51a for pressing, a push-button type stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of the ball during the pressing operation, and a variable resistor for detecting the amount of rotation operation of the operation handle 51 by the change of the electric resistance. (Not shown) and are built in.

When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes in accordance with the operation amount, depending on the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51. The ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor that changes as a result, and thus the ball is driven into the front surface of the game board 13 with a jump amount corresponding to the operation of the player. The sphere firing interval in the sphere firing unit 112a is set to about 0.6 seconds. Further, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the stop switch 51b are off.

At the lower part of the front surface of the lower plate 50, a ball removing lever 52 for operating when discharging the balls stored in the lower plate 50 downward is provided. The ball-pulling lever 52 is always urged to the right, and by sliding it to the left against the urging, the bottom opening formed on the bottom of the lower plate 50 opens, and The sphere spontaneously falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball removing lever 52 is usually performed in a state in which a box (generally referred to as “thousand box”) for receiving the balls discharged from the lower plate 50 is placed below the lower plate 50. The operation handle 51 is arranged on the right side of the lower plate 50 as described above, and the ashtray 53 is attached on the left side of the lower plate 50.

Next, as shown in FIG. 2, control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 are mainly provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10. The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main control device 110), a voice lamp control board (voice lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control device 111), a firing control board (firing control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

The back pack unit 94 includes a back pack 92 forming a protective cover and a payout unit 93 as a unit. Also, each control board is used for MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port for communicating with various devices, a random number generator used in various lottery, time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generating circuit and the like are installed as needed.

The main control device 110, the audio lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the firing control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. .. The board boxes 100 to 104 each include a box base and a box cover that covers an opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other to house each control device and each board.

Further, in the board box 100 (main controller 110) and the board box 102 (payout controller 111 and launch controller 112), a box base and a box cover are connected in an unopenable manner by a sealing unit (not shown) (caulking structure). (Consolidated by). Further, a seal (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover so as to extend over the box base and the box cover. The seal sticker is made of a brittle material, and when the seal sticker is peeled off to open the board boxes 100 and 102, or when the board boxes 100 and 102 are forcibly opened, the box base side and the box cover are closed. Cut to the side and to. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing sticker, it is possible to know whether the substrate boxes 100 and 102 have been opened.

The payout unit 93 is located at the uppermost part of the back pack unit 94 and opens upward, the tank rail 131 that is connected to the lower side of the tank 130 and is gently inclined toward the downstream side, and the downstream of the tank rail 131. A case rail 132 that is vertically connected to the side, and a payout device 133 that is provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and that pays out balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 26). ing. The tank 130 is sequentially replenished with balls supplied from the island facility of the game hall, and the required number of balls is paid out by the payout device 133 as appropriate. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

Further, the payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, and the firing control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121. The state return switch 120 is operated to eliminate the ball clogging (return to the normal state) when a dispensing error occurs, such as the ball clogging of the dispensing motor 216 (see FIG. 26). The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid.

On the main board that constitutes the main controller 110, a setting key 501 used by a person related to the hall to change the set probability setting value or to check the set probability setting value, When it is desired to initialize the setting change switch 502 and the pachinko machine 10 (main control device 110) used when updating the probability setting value by being operated during the setting change, or the probability setting value during the setting change. A RAM erasing switch 503 used to confirm (determine) and a probability display device 504 capable of displaying a probability setting value are provided.

The setting key 501, the setting change switch 502, and the RAM erasing switch 503 are provided so as to project from the main board through the holes provided in the board box 100, and can be operated by persons related to the hall without opening the board box 100. It is possible. On the other hand, the probability display device 504 is provided on the main board covered by the board box 100.

The setting key 501 is an off side indicated by “OFF” and an on side indicated by “ON” by inserting a dedicated key managed by a person related to the hall into a keyhole provided in the setting key 501. It is configured to be rotatable between two positions of and. The setting key 501 is turned off when it is located on the off side, turned on when it is located on the on side, and once rotated to each state, it is rotated again by the administrator or the like. Each state is configured to be maintained unless operated.

The setting change switch 502 is a switch for updating the probability setting value by being operated when the probability setting value is changed (that is, a “setting changing mode” described later). The setting change switch 502 normally outputs an off signal, and when pressed, outputs an on signal.

The RAM erasing switch 503 is a switch for erasing the backup data stored in the pachinko machine 10 (initial state) by being operated when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on. The RAM erase switch 503 is used when updating the probability setting value (that is, ending the “setting changing mode”) when changing the probability setting value (that is, “setting changing mode” described later). To be done.

In the first embodiment, when the RAM erase switch 503 is pressed when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on (that is, when the power switch is turned on), the main control device is provided on condition that the setting key 501 is in the off state. A RAM erase signal for clearing the backup data is output to 110. The main controller 110 clears the backup data when the RAM erase signal is input when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, and the payout controller 111 also issues a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data. It is transmitted to the device 111.

Further, the MPU 201 recognizes that the update of the probability setting value is ended when the RAM erase switch 503 is pressed in the state where the probability setting value can be updated (that is, the “setting change mode” described later), and the probability setting value is set. The value updatable state is ended, and the game state shifts to the normal game state.

The probability display device 504 displays the probability setting value when confirming the probability setting value (that is, "setting confirmation mode" described later) or when changing the probability setting value (that is, "setting change mode" described later). Is configured. The probability display device 504 is turned off in a normal state (for example, when a game is possible or when the power is off), and the probability setting value is hidden, while the probability setting value should be displayed (that is, described later). In the “setting change mode” or “setting confirmation mode”), the current probability setting value is lit and displayed.

Here, the start-up mode when the power is turned on in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment will be described. In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the start-up mode of the pachinko machine 10 is determined according to the states of the RAM erase switch 503 and the setting key 501. Is configured.

There are four start-up modes of the pachinko machine 10: a "RAM clear mode", a "setting change mode", a "setting confirmation mode", and a "normal mode".

The “RAM clear mode” is a mode for erasing (clearing) the data stored in the RAM 203 in order to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

The “setting change mode” is a mode for changing the set probability setting value. When the pachinko machine 10 starts up in this “setting change mode”, the probability display device 504 displays the current probability set value and the probability set value is updated every time the setting change switch 502 is operated.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the probability setting value in the pachinko machine 10 is updated by pressing the setting change switch 502 during this “setting change mode”, and the probability is updated with the update of the probability setting value. The display on the display device 504 is also changed.

The “setting confirmation mode” is a mode for confirming the set probability setting value. When the pachinko machine 10 starts up in this “setting confirmation mode”, the current probability setting value is displayed on the probability display device 504.

The “normal mode” is a start-up mode other than these “RAM clear mode”, “setting change mode”, and “setting confirmation mode”, and when the power-off occurrence information is not stored in the RAM 203 or is stored in the RAM 203. Except when the created data is broken, in a mode for restarting the game of the pachinko machine 10 from the state before power-off by executing various startup processing while holding the data stored in the RAM 203. is there.

In the first embodiment, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on without turning on the RAM erase switch 503 (that is, in the off state) and with the setting key 501 kept in the off state, the pachinko machine 10 is Start up in "normal mode". When the RAM erase switch 503 is turned on and the pachinko machine 10 is powered on while the setting key 501 is in the off state, the pachinko machine 10 starts up in the “RAM clear mode”.

On the other hand, when the RAM erase switch 503 is turned on and the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on while the setting key 501 is turned on, the pachinko machine 10 starts up in the “setting change mode”. When the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on while the setting key 501 is turned on and the RAM erase switch 503 is turned off, the pachinko machine 10 starts up in the “setting confirmation mode”.

It should be noted that when data is erased in the “RAM clear mode”, when the probability setting value is updated in the “setting change mode” and the setting key 501 is turned off, or in the “setting confirmation mode”. When the setting key 501 is turned off, each mode is ended and the mode is shifted to the "normal mode", and the game of the pachinko machine 10 can be started.

In this way, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, if the setting key 501 is turned off, a hall person or the like can operate the pachinko machine 10 according to whether or not the RAM erase switch 503 is turned on. As the start-up mode, it is possible to select the "RAM clear mode" or the "normal mode" which is a start-up mode not related to the probability setting value.

On the other hand, if the setting key 501 is turned on when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, a hall person or the like starts up the pachinko machine 10 depending on whether or not the RAM erase switch 503 is turned on. As the mode, it is possible to select either "setting change mode" or "setting confirmation mode" which is related to the probability setting value.

That is, depending on whether the setting key 501 is turned off or on, the startup mode that is not related to the probability setting value and the startup mode that is related to the probability setting value can be selected. Then, when the start-up mode irrelevant to the probability setting value is set, whether the start-up mode is the “RAM clear mode” or the “normal mode” depending on whether or not the RAM erase switch 503 is turned on. On the other hand, when the startup mode related to the probability setting value is selected, the startup mode is set to “setting change mode” or “setting confirmation mode” depending on whether or not the RAM erase switch 503 is turned on. Can be selected.

Here, when the probability setting value is changed, the jackpot probability in the game is changed, so if the game state before the power is cut off is taken over and the game is continued, for example, the jackpot probability in the pending variable effect, The pachinko machine 10 has a predetermined game performance, such as a discrepancy with the jackpot probability of the variation effect acquired from now on, or a jackpot counted as a limit number which will be described later is accumulated while the jackpot probability is different. May not be able to exhibit. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 erases (clears) the data stored in the RAM 203 when the probability setting value is changed in the “setting change mode”. On the other hand, the "setting confirmation mode" is a start-up mode for only confirming the probability setting value, so that the data stored in the RAM 203 is retained (cleared) so that the game state before the power is cut off can be continued. do not do).

Therefore, in the first embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 is started in the "setting change mode" in which the data in the RAM 203 is cleared, the RAM erase switch 503 is turned on while the setting key 501 is turned on, and the pachinko machine 10 is turned on. When the pachinko machine 10 is started in the “setting confirmation mode” in which the data of the RAM 203 is not cleared, the setting key 501 is turned on and the RAM erase switch 503 is turned off. I decided to turn on the power.

As described above, when the pachinko machine 10 is started up in the “setting change mode” or the “setting confirmation mode” related to the probability setting value, the setting key 501 is turned on before turning on the power of the pachinko machine 10. . Then, when the pachinko machine 10 is started up in the “RAM clear mode” or the “setting change mode” for clearing the data stored in the RAM 203, the power of the pachinko machine 10 is held while the RAM erase switch 503 is being pressed (while being turned on). Turn on. In other words, if a person involved in the hall understands the meaning of each start-up mode, he/she can easily understand what kind of operation is necessary as the operation for the pachinko machine 10 necessary for the start-up mode to be started.

Further, in order to start the pachinko machine 10 in the “setting change mode” or the “setting confirmation mode”, a dedicated key that can be inserted into the setting key 501 is required, and the key is managed by the hall. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from arbitrarily checking the probability setting value to search for a pachinko machine 10 having a high probability of a big hit, or arbitrarily changing the probability setting value to a high probability (high setting). Further, since the RAM erasing switch 503 is provided at a position that the player normally does not easily touch, also in that respect, it is possible to prevent the player from arbitrarily changing the probability setting value to a high probability.

Further, since the number of switches and the like to be operated at the same time is two even in the case of starting up in the “setting change mode”, it is possible to sufficiently operate with both hands, and therefore the operability is good. As described above, a hall-related person or the like can easily and easily select the startup mode of the pachinko machine 10 by selectively turning on/off the RAM erase switch 503 and the setting key 501.

When starting up in the “setting change mode” or the “setting confirmation mode”, a door opening switch (not shown) that detects whether the inner frame 12 is opened when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on. ) Is on, that is, the inner frame 12 is open.

This is because, in order to change or confirm the probability setting value, the probability setting value displayed on the probability display device 504 on the back side of the pachinko machine 10 needs to be visually recognized by a hall person or the like. This is because 12 needs to be open. Therefore, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on without opening the inner frame 12 despite the setting key 501 being in the ON state, the "setting change mode" or the "setting confirmation mode" is not started, As in the case where the setting key 501 is in the off state, if the RAM erase switch 503 is off, the pachinko machine 10 is started in the "normal mode", and if the RAM erase switch 503 is on, the pachinko machine is in the "RAM clear mode". Start up 10. As a result, the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on and the pachinko machine 10 starts up in the “setting change mode” or the “setting confirmation mode” even though the inner frame 12 is closed while the setting key 501 remains on. It is possible to suppress that the game is not started in 10. Further, in order to open the inner frame 12, a dedicated key managed by the hall side is required. Therefore, it is possible for a player to freely open the inner frame 12 and check the probability setting value to search for a pachinko machine 10 having a high probability of a big hit, or to arbitrarily change the probability setting value to a high probability. Can be suppressed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 3, the game board 13 has a resin-made base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape in a front view, and a large number of nails and windmills for guiding balls, rails 61 and 62, and a general winning opening 63. , The first starting opening 64a, the second starting opening 64b, the normal electric power combination 64c, the variable winning a prize device 65, the through gate 67, the variable display device unit 80, and the like.

On the front surface of the game board 13, an outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted, and inside the outer rail 62, a strip-shaped metal plate similar to the outer rail 62. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed in step 1 is planted. The inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 surround the outer periphery of the front surface of the game board 13, and the front and rear are surrounded by the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1), so that the front surface of the game board 13 has a ball. A game area where a game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is a substantially circular area (a winning opening or the like is arranged and a shot ball is formed on the front surface of the game board 13 and is defined by the two rails 61 and 62 and the arc member 70. It is the area that flows down.

The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball fired from the ball firing unit 112a (see FIG. 26) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the tip portion (upper left portion of FIG. 2) of the inner rail 61 to prevent the situation where the ball once guided to the upper part of the game board 13 returns to the ball guide passage again. To be done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (the upper right portion in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flight portion of the ball, and the ball fired with a momentum higher than a predetermined value hits the return rubber 69 to generate momentum. Is attenuated and bounces back toward the center. In addition, between the lower right end of the inner rail 61 and the upper right end of the outer rail 62, a resin arc member 70 formed by forming an arc connecting the rails on the inner surface side is a base. It is fixed by being driven into the plate 60.

The general winning opening 63, the first starting opening 64a, the second starting opening 64b, the normal electric outlet 64c, the variable winning device 65, the through gate 67, and the variable display device unit 80 are through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing. And is fixed from the front side of the game board 13 with wood screws or the like. Further, the central portion of the front surface of the game board 13 can be viewed from the front surface side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14.

In the game area of the game board 13, a plurality of general winning openings 63 are provided in which 10 balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls are won.

A variable display device unit 80 is arranged in the center of the game area. In the variable display device unit 80, the first special symbol in the special symbol display device 37 as a trigger for entering the first starting opening 64a (starting winning) or entering the second starting opening 64b (starting winning) or While synchronizing with the dynamic display of the second special symbol, a drum type that produces a variation effect of a plurality of reels on which the third symbol is printed (left reel LR, middle reel CR, and right reel RR (see FIG. 4) described later) Drum display device 81 composed of a rotating device, and a normal pattern composed of LEDs for displaying a variable of a normal symbol as a trigger of passage of a ball of the through gate 67 (hereinafter, a variable display of a normal symbol is referred to as "variable display"). And a display device 83. A center frame 86 is arranged in the variable display device unit 80 so as to surround the outer periphery of the drum display device 81.

The drum display device 81 is configured by being assembled to a backboard unit 300 (see FIG. 5) described later, and has a left reel unit 81a1 having a left reel LR, a middle reel unit 81a2 having a middle reel CR, and a right reel having a right reel RR. The reel unit 81a3 has a drum unit 81a integrally configured and is variably driven by a display control device 114 (see FIG. 26), which will be described later, so that each reel LR, CR, RR is variably displayed. It should be noted that the effective line of the drum display device 81 is set on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 within a range visible from the central opening 431 of the display area forming member 430 (see FIG. 10) of the light guide unit 400 described later. To be done.

A plurality of symbols are printed on each reel LR, CR, RR, these symbols are vertically scrolled for each reel LR, CR, RR, and the third symbol is variably displayed on the drum display device 81. ing. In the pachinko machine 10, the display of the game state accompanied by the control of the main controller 110 is performed on the special symbol display device 37, while the decorative display corresponding to the display of the special symbol display device 37 is a drum display. This is performed by the device 81. Instead of the drum type rotating device, for example, a liquid crystal display or the like may be used to configure the display device of the third symbol.

Instead of the drum type rotation device, for example, a dot matrix display device or a 7-segment display device may be used to configure a display device that variably displays the third symbol.

Here, with reference to FIG. 4, a symbol array of each reel LR, CR, RR of the drum display device 81 will be described. FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram showing a symbol array arranged on each reel LR, CR, RR of the drum display device 81. As shown in FIG. 4, 16 symbol areas are formed on each reel LR, CR, RR, and with the exception of some exceptions (that is, the "543" symbol of the middle reel CR), with the third symbol. It is configured such that blank areas are alternately arranged.

For example, on the left reel LR, in order from the top, "1" symbol, blank area, "2" symbol, blank area, "3" symbol, blank area, "5" symbol, blank area, "6" symbol, blank Areas, "7" symbol, blank area, "8" symbol, blank area, "chance" symbol, blank area, each symbol is arranged. Therefore, when the left reel LR is rotated downward, the symbols are variably displayed so that the numbers are in descending order such as “8” symbol→“7” symbol→“6” symbol→....

Further, on the right reel RR, in order from the top, "8" symbol, blank area, "7" symbol, blank area, "6" symbol, blank area, "5" symbol, blank area, "3" symbol, blank Areas, "2" symbol, blank area, "1" symbol, blank area, "chance" symbol, blank area, each symbol is arranged. Therefore, when the right reel RR is rotated downward, the symbols are variably displayed so that the numbers are in ascending order such as "1" symbol→"2" symbol→"3" symbol→....

Further, in the middle reel CR, from the top, "8" symbol, blank area, "7" symbol, blank area, "6" symbol, blank area, "543" symbol, blank area, "2" symbol, blank The symbols are arranged so that the region, the "1" symbol, the blank region, the "chance" symbol, and the blank region. Therefore, when the middle reel CR is rotated downward, like the right reel RR, the symbols are arranged in ascending order such as “1” symbol→“2” symbol→“3” symbol→... It is variably displayed.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, each reel LR, CR, RR is configured so that three symbols can be visually recognized from a central opening of a display area forming member 430 (see FIG. 10) described later. Therefore, in a state where all the reels LR, CR, RR are stopped, 3×3=9 symbols are visible through the central opening of the display area forming member 430. That is, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the upper parallel line formed by the symbol on the left reel LR, the symbol on the middle reel CR, and the symbol on the right reel RR is an effective line for the variable display of the third symbol. , A pattern of the left reel LR middle part, a middle parallel line formed by a middle reel CR middle part pattern and a right reel RR middle part pattern, a left reel LR lower part pattern, a middle reel CR lower part pattern and a right reel RR lower part pattern Lower parallel line formed, left reel LR upper symbol, middle reel CR middle symbol and right reel RR lower symbol formed right downward line, left reel LR lower symbol, middle reel CR central symbol and right A total of five effective lines are set, which is a rightward rising line formed by the symbols on the reel RR.

More specifically, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, each reel LR, CR, RR has three numerical symbols (third symbol) from a central opening of a display region forming member 430 (see FIG. 10) described later. Hereinafter, it may be referred to as a "main symbol".) and a blank area are configured to be visible. Therefore, in a state in which all the reels LR, CR, RR are all stopped, 3×3=9 number symbols and blank areas are visible through the central opening of the display area forming member 430. That is, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, as the effective line of the variable display of the third symbol, the numerical symbol or blank area on the upper part of the left reel LR, the numerical symbol or blank area on the upper part of the middle reel CR, and the right reel RR. In the upper parallel line formed by the upper numerical design or blank area, the numerical design or blank area of the left reel LR middle part, the numerical design or blank area of the middle reel CR central part, and the numerical design or blank area of the right reel RR middle part Middle parallel line formed, the numerical design or blank area under the left reel LR, the numerical design or blank area under the middle reel CR, and the lower parallel line formed by the numerical design or blank area under the right reel RR, the left reel Numeral pattern or blank area in the upper part of LR, middle reel CR number part or blank area, and right lower line formed by the numeral pattern or blank area in the lower part of right reel RR, numerical pattern or blank area in the lower part of left reel LR , A number pattern or blank area in the middle part of the middle reel CR, and a rightward rising line formed by the number pattern or blank area on the upper part of the right reel RR, a total of five effective lines are set.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the lottery result by the main controller 110 (see FIG. 26) described later is a big hit, a variation display (variation effect) in which the same main symbol is arranged on any of the activated lines. ) Is done, it is configured so that the jackpot occurs after the variable display is over. When transitioning to a high probability state (probability change state) after the jackpot is over, a variable display in which main symbols with odd numbers (corresponding to “high probability symbols”) are aligned on any of the activated lines is performed. On the other hand, when transitioning to the low-probability state after the jackpot, a variable display in which the main symbols (corresponding to the “low-probability symbol”) to which even numbers are added are arranged on any of the activated lines is performed.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the third symbol is stopped and displayed in the order of the left reel LR→the right reel RR→the middle reel CR at the time of the variation effect each time. When the combination of the big hit symbols (combination of the same main symbols) is arranged on any of the activated lines when the third symbol is stopped, the big hit effect (for example, rainbow lighting display) is executed as the big hit. Further, since the symbol arrangements of the left reel LR and the right reel RR are opposite (ascending order and descending order), when the left reel LR and the right reel RR are stopped, they are the same on one or two effective lines, respectively. The design is configured so that it can be stopped. That is, a single reach in which the same symbol is stopped and displayed only on one activated line and a double reach in which the same symbol is stopped and displayed on each of two activated lines can be generated.

Returning to FIG. 3, the explanation is continued. While the drum display device 81 (special symbol display device 37) is performing the variable effect (dynamic display) of the third symbol corresponding to the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the ball is the first starting opening 64a. In case of entering the ball, the number of times of entering the ball (reserved ball number) is reserved up to 4 times. The number of reserved balls is shown by the special symbol display device 37, and the special symbol 1 of the first reserved symbol display part Db1 corresponding to the first special symbol of the reserved display part Db provided in the lower portion of the drum display device 81 when viewed from the front. It is also shown in the first to fourth reserved symbol display portions Db1a to Db1d. Special figure 1 1st-4th reservation design indicator Db1a-Db1d, 1 reservation design per 1 retention design 1 sphere of reservation sphere (the number of retention spheres 1 time) (in the normal indicatory form “○” design ( White circle symbols)) are respectively displayed, and the number of reserved balls of the variable effect of the first special symbol is displayed according to the number of reserved symbols displayed in the special symbols 1 to 4 reserved symbol display portions Db1a to Db1d. To be done.

That is, in the special figure 1 to the fourth reserved symbol display sections Db1a to Db1d, when one reserved symbol is displayed in the special figure 1 first reserved symbol display section Db1a, the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol Indicates that it is once, and when two reserved symbols are displayed, one each in the special figure 1 first and second reserved symbol display portions Db1a, Db1b, the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol Indicates that the number of times is two, and one special symbol 1 to the third reserved symbol display portions Db1a to Db1c, respectively, in each case, a total of three reserved symbols are displayed, the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol Indicates that the number of times is 3 times, and when four reserved symbols in total, one each in the special figure 1 first to fourth reserved symbol display portions Db1a to Db1d, are displayed, the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol Indicates four times. Moreover, when the reserved symbols are not displayed in the special figure 1 to 4 reserved symbol display portions Db1a to Db1d, the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol is 0 times and there is a variable effect in which the reserved symbols are suspended. Indicates not to.

Also, while the drum display device 81 (special symbol display device 37) is performing the variable effect (dynamic display) of the third symbol corresponding to the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the ball starts second. When entering the mouth 64b, the number of times of entering the ball (the number of holding balls) is reserved up to four times. The number of reserved balls is indicated by the special symbol display device 37, and the special symbol 2 of the second reserved symbol display part Db2 corresponding to the second special symbol of the reserved display part Db provided in the lower portion of the drum display device 81 when viewed from the front. It is also shown in the first to fourth reserved symbol display portions Db2a to Db2d. Special figure 2 1st-4th reservation design indicator Db2a-Db2d, in the 2nd special design 1 retention design per 1 retention sphere (the number of retention spheres 1) of the 2nd special design (in the normal indicatory mode “(○) design ( White circle symbols)) are respectively displayed, and the number of reserved balls of the variable effect of the second special symbol is displayed in accordance with the number of reserved symbols displayed in the special figure 2 first to fourth reserved symbol display portions Db2a to Db2d. To be done.

That is, in the special figure 2 first to fourth reserved symbol display sections Db2a to Db2d, when one reserved symbol is displayed in the special figure 2 first reserved symbol display section Db2a, the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol Indicates that it is once, and when two reserved symbols are displayed, one each in the special figure 2 first and second reserved symbol display portions Db2a, Db2b, the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol Indicates that the number of times is two, and when three reserved symbols in total, one each in the special figure 2 first to third reserved symbol display portions Db2a to Db2c, are displayed, the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol Indicates that the number of times is three times, and when four reserved symbols in total, one each in the special figure 2 first to fourth reserved symbol display portions Db2a to Db2d, are displayed, the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol Indicates four times. Moreover, when the reserved symbol is not displayed in the special figure 2 1st-4th reserved symbol display sections Db2a-Db2d, the number of reserved balls of the 2nd special symbol is 0 times and there is a variable effect that is reserved. Indicates not to.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the first lottery game of the first special symbol and the second lottery game of the second special symbol are not executed at the same time, and only one of the lottery games is executed. Is configured. Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when one of the lottery games being executed is completed, when the holding ball of the first special symbol and the holding ball of the second special symbol are stored respectively. Is configured to execute the second lottery game of the second special symbol preferentially over the first lottery game of the first special symbol (so-called, special figure 2 priority variation). The lottery game may be executed in the order of winning (so-called, winning order change), or the first lottery game of the first special symbol and the second lottery game of the second special symbol may be simultaneously executed (so-called, special 1) and (2) simultaneous change).

In the central portion of the hold display section Db, an execution symbol display section Db0 is provided in which an execution symbol indicating that the drum display device 81 is performing the variation effect is displayed. This execution symbol display portion Db0 is provided in the central portion of the reserved display portion Db, that is, on the right side of the special figure 1 first reserved symbol display portion Db1a, and on the left side of the special figure 2 first reserved symbol display portion Db2a, Execution symbols larger than the respective reserved symbols displayed in the respective reserved symbol display portions Db1a to Db1d and Db2a to Db2d are configured to be displayed. In addition, the execution symbol display portion Db0 is displayed as an execution symbol by moving (shifting) the reserved symbol displayed in the special figure 1 first reserved symbol display portion Db1a or the special figure 2 first reserved symbol display portion Db2a. It

The execution symbol displayed on the execution symbol display portion Db0 is erased when the variation effect is finished, and with the elimination of the execution symbol, the displayed reserved symbol is on the lower side (the right side if the first special symbol, the first, If it is 2 special symbols, it is moved and displayed as a reserved symbol on the left side). Specifically, for example, in the situation where there are no reserved symbols of the second special symbol and there are four reserved symbols of the first special symbol, the end of the variation effect of the first special symbol or the second special symbol When the execution symbol displayed on the execution symbol display unit Db0 is erased, the reserved symbol displayed on the special figure 1 first reserved symbol display unit Db1a moves as the execution symbol on the execution symbol display unit Db0. (Shifted) and displayed. In addition, the reserved symbol displayed in the special figure 1 second reserved symbol display portion Db1b is moved (shifted) and displayed as the reserved symbol in the special figure 1 first reserved symbol display portion Db1a. Further, the reserved symbol displayed in the special figure 1 third reserved symbol display section Db1c is moved (shifted) and displayed as a reserved symbol in the special figure 1 second reserved symbol display section Db1b. Further, the reserved symbol displayed in the special figure 1 fourth reserved symbol display section Db1d is moved (shifted) and displayed as a reserved symbol in the special figure 1 third reserved symbol display section Db1c.

Further, for example, in a situation where there are four reserved symbols of the second special symbol, the execution symbol displayed in the execution symbol display unit Db0 is erased with the end of the variation effect of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. When it is done, the reserved symbol displayed in the special symbol 2 first reserved symbol display unit Db2a is moved (shifted) and displayed as the execution symbol in the execution symbol display unit Db0. In addition, the reserved symbol displayed in the special figure 2 second reserved symbol display portion Db2b is moved (shifted) and displayed as a reserved symbol in the special figure 2 first reserved symbol display portion Db2a. Further, the reserved symbol displayed in the special figure 2 third reserved symbol display section Db2c is moved (shifted) and displayed as a reserved symbol in the special figure 2 second reserved symbol display section Db2b. In addition, the reserved symbol displayed in the special figure 2 fourth reserved symbol display section Db2d is moved (shifted) and displayed as a reserved symbol in the special figure 2 third reserved symbol display section Db2c.

In addition, in the first embodiment, the number of balls to be held for the variable effect based on the ball entering the first starting opening 64a or the second starting opening 64b is configured to be held up to four times, respectively, but the maximum holding is performed. The number of balls is not limited to 4 times, and may be set to 3 times or less, or to 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). Further, instead of displaying the holding symbols on the holding display portion Db, the number of holding balls is divided into four numbers by a part of a display device (for example, a liquid crystal display device) different from the holding display portion Db. The displayed area may be displayed in a different mode (for example, color or lighting pattern) by the number of reserved balls. Moreover, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the special symbol display device 37, it is not necessary to display the number of reserved balls in the reserved display portion Db. Furthermore, the variable display device unit 80 is provided with four holding lamps each showing the number of holding balls for the maximum holding number of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, and depending on the number of holding lamps in the lighting state, the holding balls. The number may be displayed.

The normal symbol display device 83 performs variable display in which the symbol "O" and the symbol "X" as display symbols (normal symbols) are alternately turned on every time the ball passes through the through gate 67. In the pachinko machine 10, when the variable display on the normal symbol display device 83 is stopped by a predetermined symbol (the symbol "○" in the first embodiment), the normal electric outlet 64c above the second starting opening 64b in a front view is predetermined. It is configured to be active (open) for a period of time.

The number of holding balls of the through gate 67 is held up to a maximum of four times, and the number of holding balls is displayed by the special symbol display device 37 and the normal symbol holding lamp 84 as well. Normally, four symbol holding lamps 84 are provided for the maximum number of holdings, and are arranged symmetrically above the drum display device 81. Then, the number of holdings is displayed by the number of the normal symbol holding lamps 84 that are turned on.

In addition, the variable display of the normal symbol is performed by switching the lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the normal symbol display device 83 as in the first embodiment, and also the special symbol display device 37 or the drum display device 81. You may make it use a part. Similarly, the normal symbol holding lamp 84 may be turned on by a part of the drum display device 81. Further, the maximum number of reserved balls for passing through the through gate 67 is not limited to four times, and may be set to three times or less, or five times or more (e.g., eight times). Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the special symbol display device 37, the normal symbol retaining lamp 84 may not be lit.

More specifically, variable display of the normal symbol may be performed by using a part other than the third symbol execution portion of the special symbol display device 37 or the drum display device 81. Similarly, the normal symbol holding lamp 84 may be turned on by a part of the drum display device 81 other than the third symbol execution portion.

On the front side in front view of the variable display device unit 80, the display area forming member 430, the front light guide plate 410, and the rear light guide plate 420 (see FIG. 8) are arranged in order from the front side of the pachinko machine 10. A light guide unit 400 is provided.

The display area forming member 430 is made of a resin having transparency (for example, polycarbonate), and has a shape (corresponding to) the outer peripheral shape of the drum display device 81 arranged on the rear side of the pachinko machine 10 of the light guide unit 400. And a shape corresponding (corresponding to) the shapes of a front light guide plate 410 and a rear light guide plate 420 which will be described later and are assembled to the light guide unit 400. Further, the display area forming member 430 is formed with a central opening 431 so that three reels LR, CR, and RR in the drum display device 81 can be visually recognized from the front side of the pachinko machine 10. . A predetermined lens cut 432 is provided on the peripheral edge of the central opening 431 so that the rear side of the lens cut 432 is invisible or difficult from the front side of the pachinko machine 10. Therefore, by the lens cut 432 around the central opening 431, the display area and the effective line of the symbol in the drum display device 81 are clearly shown to the player. The details of the display area forming member 430 will be described later.

The front light guide plate 410 is made of a transparent resin material (for example, acrylic), is formed in a shape (corresponding to) the outer peripheral shape of the drum display device 81 (corresponding), and is similar to the display area forming member 430. The display area forming member 430 and the rear light guide plate 420 that are assembled to the optical unit 400 are formed in a shape (corresponding to) the shapes. Further, the front side light guide plate 410 can visually recognize a part of the drum display device 81 and the rear side light guide plate 420 arranged on the rear side of the pachinko machine 10 of the front side light guide plate 410 through the central opening 431 of the display area forming member 430. Is configured. Further, various concave and convex lens cuts are provided on the back surface side of the front light guide plate 410 (that is, the back surface side of the pachinko machine 10), and a lower LED unit 414, a front right LED unit 415, or a front left LED described later is provided. By turning on each LED 414c, 415c, 416c of the unit 416 (see FIGS. 8 and 9), a second decorative pattern group 411, which is a pattern (a so-called cherry blossom blizzard pattern) imitating a plurality of cherry blossom petals, and a sunfish is imitated. The third decorative design 412 which is the designed design, and the fourth decorative design group 413 (see FIG. 17) which is a design imitating a plurality of bubbles (a so-called bubble group design) are respectively visibly displayed from the front side of the pachinko machine 10. Is configured to be. The details of the front light guide plate 410 will be described later.

Like the front light guide plate 410, the rear light guide plate 420 is made of a transparent resin material (for example, acrylic resin) and, like the display area forming member 430 and the front light guide plate 410, follows the outer peripheral shape of the drum display device 81. (Corresponding) shape, and is formed (corresponding) shape along the shapes of the display area forming member 430 and the front light guide plate 410 to be assembled to the light guide unit 400. Further, like the front light guide plate 410, the rear light guide plate 420 can visually recognize the drum display device 81 arranged on the rear side of the rear light guide plate 420 from the pachinko machine 10 through the central opening 431 of the display area forming member 430. Is configured. Further, various concave and convex lens cuts are made on the back side of the rear light guide plate 420 (that is, the back side of the pachinko machine 10), and a rear upper LED unit 422 and/or a lower LED unit 414 (see FIG. 8 and FIG. 9) by turning on the respective LEDs 422c and 424, the first decorative symbol group 421 (see FIG. 12), which is a pattern (so-called fish group symbol) imitating a plurality of types of fish, is located on the front side of the pachinko machine 10. It is configured to be displayed so as to be visible from each side. The details of the rear light guide plate 420 will be described later.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the first decorative symbol group 421, the second decorative symbol group during execution of the variable effect (for example, when the reach display is formed) according to the lottery result of the variable effect of the third symbol. 411, the third decorative symbol 412 and/or the fourth decorative symbol group 413 is configured to be displayed in a lighted state. Specifically, when the jackpot result appears in the variable effect, the first decorative symbol group 421, the second decorative symbol group 411 & the third decorative symbol 412, only the third decorative symbol 412, the second decorative symbol group 411. Only, the fourth decorative symbol group 413 is configured to be easily lit and displayed in the order, while in the case of a loss result appearing in the variable effect, only the fourth decorative symbol group 413 and the second decorative symbol group 411, Only the three decorative symbols 412 are configured so that the second decorative symbol group 411 & the third decorative symbol group 412 and the first decorative symbol group 421 are easily lighted and displayed in this order.

More specifically, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the first decorative symbol group 421, during execution of the variation effect (for example, when the reach display is formed), according to the lottery result of the variation effect of the third symbol. Any one of the second decorative symbol group 411, the third decorative symbol 412 or the fourth decorative symbol group 413, or the first decorative symbol group 421, the second decorative symbol group 411, the third decorative symbol 412 or the fourth. At least two or more combinations of the decorative symbol group 413 are configured to be lit and displayed. Specifically, when the jackpot result appears in the variable effect, the first decorative symbol group 421, the second decorative symbol group 411 & the third decorative symbol 412, only the third decorative symbol 412, the second decorative symbol group 411. Only, the fourth decorative symbol group 413 is configured to be easily lit and displayed in the order, while in the case of a loss result appearing in the variable effect, only the fourth decorative symbol group 413 and the second decorative symbol group 411, Only the three decorative symbols 412 are configured so that the second decorative symbol group 411 & the third decorative symbol group 412 and the first decorative symbol group 421 are easily lighted and displayed in this order.

That is, the jackpot reliability (expectation) of each decorative symbol group 411, 412, 413, 421 is the first decorative symbol group 421> the second decorative symbol group 411 & It is set in advance in the order of 3 decorative symbols 412>only the third decorative symbol 412>only the second decorative symbol group 411>the fourth decorative symbol group 413.

More specifically, the jackpot reliability (expectation) of each of the decorative symbol groups 411, 412, 413, 421 is the fourth decorative symbol group 413<the second decorative symbol by the above-mentioned appearance ratio according to the variation result of the variation effect. Only the group 411 <only the third decorative symbol 412 <second decorative symbol group 411 & third decorative symbol 412 <first decorative symbol group 421 is set to be higher in this order.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the first decorative symbol group 421, the second decorative symbol group 411, the third decorative symbol 412, and the fourth decorative symbol group 421 are set by setting the appearance ratios at the time of a big hit and at the time of losing, respectively. Although it is configured to set the jackpot expectation at the time of appearance of the decorative symbol group 413, instead of this, it may be configured to set the jackpot expectation of the decorative symbol regardless of the appearance frequency. . For example, a decorative pattern with a low appearance rate at the time of a big hit and a low appearance rate at the time of a loss and a low expectation of a big hit may be provided, or a high appearance rate at the time of a loss and a high appearance rate at the time of a big hit. A decorative pattern with a high degree may be provided.

As described above, each member 430, 410, 420 of the light guide unit 400 is formed in a shape (corresponding to) the outer peripheral shape of the drum display device 81 located on the back side in front view, and will be described later. The first decorative symbol group 421, the second decorative symbol group 411, the third decorative symbol group 412, and the fourth decorative symbol group 413 that are turned on (light guide) can be displayed. Therefore, by performing the variable effect of the third symbol on the drum display device 81 and the effect on the light guide unit 400 in a composite manner, various effects are executed to enhance the effect effects of the respective devices 81 and 400. , It is possible to raise the degree of attention to the game. Further, the light guide unit 400 is configured in a shape along the outer peripheral shape of the effect device so that the effect device (that is, the drum display device 81) arranged on the back side in front view can be arranged in the back space. As a result, it is possible to increase the degree of freedom in designing the effect device arranged on the back side of the light guide unit 400 when viewed from the front.

Further, at least the front light guide plate 410, the front lower LED 414c, the front right LED 415c and the front left LED 416c, and the rear light guide plate 420, the rear upper LED 422c and the rear lower LED 424 are connected to the light guide unit 400. As a result, by positioning the LED 414c and the like as a unit while fixing them with through holes and screws, it is possible to suppress misalignment between the LEDs 414c and the light guide plates 410 and 420, and thus to guide light from the LEDs 414c and the like. It is possible to appropriately irradiate the light plates 410 and 420, and it is possible to accurately represent each of the decorative symbol groups 411, 412, 413, 421 in the front light guide plate 410 and the rear light guide plate 420.

The first decorative pattern group 421, the second decorative pattern group 411 & the third decorative pattern 412, the third decorative pattern 412 only, the second decorative pattern group 411 only, and the fourth decorative pattern group 413 (hereinafter referred to as "big decorative pattern group 421" at the time of jackpot or loss) , May be referred to as "each decorative pattern 411, 412, 413, 421") will be described later in FIG.

On the surface of the game board 13 (base plate 60) on the right side when viewed from the front of the variable display device unit 80, a board surface first decorative symbol group having the same pattern as the first decorative symbol group 421 provided on the rear light guide plate 420. 60a is provided, on the surface of the game board 13 (base plate 60) on the left side in front view of the variable display device unit 80, the first decorative pattern group 421 and the board surface first decorative pattern group provided on the rear light guide plate 420. A board surface second decorative symbol group 60b having the same symbol as 60a is provided. The board surface first decorative symbol group 60a and the board surface second decorative symbol group 60b are configured to be lit and displayed in conjunction with lighting of the first decorative symbol group 421 of the rear light guide plate 420. Specifically, when performing the effect on the first decorative symbol group 421 in the variable effect of the third symbol, first, the panel first decorative symbol group 60a on the right side in front view of the variable display device unit 80 is first turned on. After that, the first decorative symbol group 421 of the rear light guide plate 420 is lit up and displayed in order from the right side to the left side in front view, and then the second panel symbol group 60b on the left side in front view of the variable display device unit 80 is turned on. With this configuration, in the effect regarding the first decorative symbol group 421, the effect on the rear light guide plate 420 and the effect on the game board 13 board are integrally executed, and the entire game board 13 board is used. It is possible to provide a powerful production and improve the interest of the game.

More specifically, in the variation effect of the third symbol, when the lighting lottery of the first decorative symbol group 421 is won and the timing of lighting the first decorative symbol group 421 comes, first, the game board 13 or the drum. The light emission effect on the display device 81 is stopped or suppressed, and the entire game board 13 is darkened (darkened). Then, the LED arranged on the back side of the first board surface decorative pattern group 60a as if moving the board surface first decorative pattern group 60a provided on the right side of the game board 13 from the right side to the front view (not shown). Lights). Then, at the timing when the leftmost front view of the board surface first decorative symbol group 60a is turned on, it is provided in the right side region of the rear light guide plate 420 in the first decorative symbol group 421 provided on the rear light guide plate 420. By lighting the rear upper LED 422c and the rear lower LED 424 (see FIG. 8, hereinafter, simply referred to as “LED 422c, 424”) corresponding to the rightmost end of the first decorative symbol group 421. The rightmost first decorative pattern group 421 in the right side region of the rear light guide plate 420 is visible from the front side (front side, hereinafter the same) of the pachinko machine 10.

At this time, the light emitted from the LED corresponding to the board surface first decorative pattern group 60a does not leak to the rear light guide plate 420 (front light guide plate 410) side, so that the front right base portion of the front right LED unit 415 is 415a (see FIG. 8) is configured to block light from the LED corresponding to the board surface first decorative symbol group 60a to the rear light guide plate 420 side. With this configuration, the light emitted from the LED corresponding to the board surface first decorative pattern group 60a is guided to the rear light guide plate 420 (front light guide plate 410), and the first decoration of the rear light guide plate 420. It is possible to prevent the problem that the symbol group 421 emits light at an earlier stage than the light emission timing.

Next, with the board surface first decorative symbol group 60a turned on, the rightmost end of the right side region of the LEDs 422c, 424 (see FIG. 8) corresponding to the first decorative symbol group 421 in the right side region of the rear light guide plate 420. The LEDs 422c, 424 located on the left side in front view of the LEDs 422c, 424 are sequentially turned on from the right side in front view, and the LEDs 422c corresponding to the first decorative pattern group 421 located at the leftmost end in the right side region of the rear light guide plate 420, At the timing when 424 is turned on, by turning on the LEDs 422c and 424 corresponding to the rightmost end of the first decorative symbol group 421 provided in the central region of the rear light guide plate 420, the central region of the rear light guide plate 420 is illuminated. The rightmost first decorative pattern group 421 can be visually recognized from the front side of the pachinko machine 10. As a result, the first decorative symbol group 60a on the board surface and the first decorative symbol group 421 in the right side region and the central region of the rear light guide plate 420 move a series of integrated fish symbol symbols from the right side to the left side of the pachinko machine 10. A production like is executed.

More specifically, among the LEDs 422c and 424 (see FIG. 8) corresponding to the first decorative symbol group 421 in the right side area of the rear light guide plate 420, the LEDs 422c and 424 in the rightmost side in the right side area from the LED 422c in the rightmost side area. , 424, when the LEDs 422c, 424 located on the left side in the front view (that is, the center of the right side region) are turned on, the light emission color that has been turned on by the LEDs 422c, 424 at the rightmost end is taken over, and the position on the left side in front view is further increased. Further, when the left side of the LEDs 422c and 424 in front view (that is, the leftmost end of the right side region) is turned on, the LEDs 422c and 424 located on the left side in front view are turned on so as to inherit the light emission color. For example, when the rightmost LEDs 422c and 424 in the right area are emitting red light, the LEDs 422c and 424 located on the left side of the rightmost LEDs 422c and 424 in front view are turned on in red, and The LEDs 422c, 424 located on the left side in front view (that is, the leftmost end of the right side region) of the LEDs 422c, 424 located on the left side in front view are turned on in red at the timing of turning on. With such a configuration, it is possible to execute an effect in which the same fish symbol in the first decorative symbol group 421 is displayed in a moving manner.

Next, among the LEDs 422c, 424 (see FIG. 8) corresponding to the first decorative pattern group 421 in the central area of the rear light guide plate 420, the LEDs 422c, 424 located on the left side in front view from the LEDs 422c, 424 at the right end of the central area. Are sequentially turned on from the right side, and at the timing when the LEDs 422c and 424 corresponding to the first decorative symbol group 421 located at the leftmost end in the central region of the rear light guide plate 420 are turned on, the left side region of the rear light guide plate 420 is turned on. By turning on the LEDs 422c, 424 corresponding to the rightmost end of the first decorative pattern group 421 provided in the, the first decorative pattern group 421 at the rightmost end in the left region of the rear light guide plate 420 is the front side of the pachinko machine 10. Can be seen from. At this time, at the timing when the LEDs 422c, 424 corresponding to the first decorative symbol group 421 located at the leftmost end in the central region of the rear light guide plate 420 are turned on, the LED corresponding to the board surface first decorative symbol group 60a (not shown). No.) is sequentially turned off from the right side in front view. As a result, the board surface first decorative pattern group 60a and the first decorative pattern group 421 in the right side region, the central region and the left side region of the rear light guide plate 420 are integrally integrated and have a constant width (that is, the rear light guide plate). Width of the central area and the right area of 420, and the display width of the board surface first decorative symbol group 60a combined) fish pattern is moved from the right side to the left side of the pachinko machine 10. .

Next, among the LEDs 422c, 424 (see FIG. 8) corresponding to the first decorative pattern group 421 in the left side area of the rear light guide plate 420, the LEDs 422c, 424 located on the left side in front view from the rightmost LEDs 422c, 424 in the left side area. Are sequentially turned on from the right side, and at the timing when the LEDs 422c, 424 corresponding to the first decorative symbol group 421 located at the leftmost end in the left side area of the rear light guide plate 420 are turned on, the game board 13 is provided on the left side of the board surface. By turning on the LED (not shown) corresponding to the rightmost end of the board surface second decorative symbol group 60b, the board surface second decorative symbol group 60b is lit and displayed. At this time, the LEDs 422c, 424 corresponding to the first decorative symbol group 421 in the right side region of the rear light guide plate 420 are viewed from the right side in the front view at the timing when the LED corresponding to the leftmost end of the board surface second decorative symbol group 60b is turned on. It is configured to be turned off sequentially. As a result, by the board surface second decorative pattern group 60b and the first decorative pattern group 421 in the left side region, the central region and the right side region of the rear light guide plate 420, they are integrally integrated and have a constant width (that is, the rear light guide plate). Width of the left side region of 420, the central region and the right side region combined, or the width of the left side region and the central region of the rear light guide plate 420, and the display width of the board surface second decorative pattern group 60b) The effect as if the design moves from the right side to the left side of the pachinko machine 10 is executed.

After that, the LEDs 422c and 424 corresponding to the first decorative pattern group 421 in the central region of the rear light guide plate 420 are sequentially turned off from the right side in the front view. Then, at a timing when the LEDs 422c and 424 corresponding to the first decorative symbol group 421 in the central area of the rear light guide plate 420 are turned off, then, the LED 422c corresponding to the first decorative symbol group 421 in the left area of the rear light guide plate 420. , 424 are sequentially turned off from the right side in front view. Furthermore, at a timing when the LEDs 422c and 424 corresponding to the first decorative symbol group 421 in the left side area of the rear light guide plate 420 are turned off, the LED (not shown) corresponding to the board second decorative symbol group 60b is viewed from the right side in front view. Ready Configure to turn off. With this configuration, the board surface first decorative pattern group 60a, the first decorative pattern group 421 of the rear light guide plate 420, and the board surface second decorative pattern group 60b are a single integrated fish group pattern with a fixed width. The effect as if moving from the right side to the left side of the machine 10 is executed.

At this time, the light emitted from the LEDs corresponding to the second board surface decorative pattern group 60b does not leak to the rear light guide plate 420 (front light guide plate 410) side, so that the front left base portion of the front left LED unit 416 is not leaked. 416a (see FIG. 8) is configured to block light from the LED corresponding to the board surface second decorative symbol group 60b to the rear light guide plate 420 side. With this configuration, the light emitted from the LED corresponding to the board surface second decorative pattern group 60b is guided to the rear light guide plate 420 (front light guide plate 410), and the first decoration of the rear light guide plate 420. It is possible to prevent a problem that the symbol group 421 emits light at a timing later than the light emission timing.

Thus, in the effect regarding the board surface first decorative symbol group 60a, the first decorative symbol group 421, and the board surface second decorative symbol group 60b, the effect on the rear light guide plate 420 and the effect on the game board 13 board surface are integrated. While executing each LED in turn, by eliminating the problem that a pattern different from the lighting timing is lighted by the light caused by the lighting of other LEDs, a series using the entire board 13 It is possible to provide a powerful and integrated production to improve the interest of the game.

Below the variable display unit 80, a first starting opening 64a into which a ball can enter is arranged. When a ball enters the first starting opening 64a, a first starting opening switch (not shown) provided on the back surface side of the game board 13 is turned on, and a main operation described later due to the turning on of the first starting opening switch. The control device 110 (see FIG. 26) is used to perform a jackpot lottery for the first special symbol. Then, the display according to the lottery result is shown by the upper LED group 37b1 of the special LED group 37b of the special symbol display device 37, and the variation effect of the third symbol corresponding to the first special symbol is displayed on the drum display device 81. Executed. The first starting opening 64a is also one of the winning openings through which five balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball enters.

Below the first starting port 64a, a second starting port 64b into which a ball can enter only when the normal electric power combination 64c is in an open state is provided. When a ball enters the second starting opening 64b, a second starting opening switch (not shown) provided on the back surface side of the game board 13 is turned on, and a main operation described later due to the turning on of the second starting opening switch. The control device 110 (see FIG. 26) is used to perform a jackpot lottery for the second special symbol. And the display according to the lottery result is shown by the lower LED group 37b2 of the special LED group 37b of the special symbol display device 37, and the variation effect of the third symbol corresponding to the second special symbol is displayed on the drum display device 81. Executed. The second starting opening 64b is also one of the winning openings through which one ball is paid out as a prize ball when a ball enters.

As described above, the second starting port 64b is opened above the second starting port 64b by opening and closing the two blade members that cover the opening into which the ball enters the second starting port 64b. There is provided a normal electric outlet 64c which is displaceable in an open state (enlarged state) or a closed state (reduced state). Ordinary electric power officer 64c is in a closed state in which the blades are normally closed (the blades are erected upward), and the ball cannot enter the second starting opening 64b or is difficult to enter. There is.

On the other hand, when the variable display on the normal symbol display device 83 is stopped with the symbol "O", the normal electric power combination 64c is operated for a predetermined time. From the state in which the blades of the normal electric power officer 64c are erected upward while the normal electric power officer 64c is operated. The second start port 64b is opened, and the second starting port 64b is opened. When the second starting port 64b is in the open state, the ball can enter the second starting port 64b, or the ball can enter the state more easily than in the closed state. In other words, as a result of the variable display on the normal symbol display device 83, the symbol "○" is stopped and hit, and when the second starting port 64b is in the open state, the ball enters the second starting port 64b. It is possible to make a lot of jackpot lottery.

A variable winning a prize device 65 is disposed below the first starting port 64a and the second starting port 64b, and a horizontally elongated rectangular large winning port (also referred to as a large opening or a specific winning port) 65a is formed in a substantially central portion thereof. Is provided. In the pachinko machine 10, when the lottery in the main control device 110 becomes a big hit, the special LED group 37b of the special symbol display device 37 is turned on after the predetermined time (variation time) has passed so that the big hit is stopped. , The stop symbol corresponding to the big hit is displayed on the drum display device 81, and the occurrence of the big hit is shown. After that, the game state transitions to a special game state (big hit) where the ball is easy to win. As this special game state, the special winning opening 65a which is normally closed for a predetermined number of times (10 times or 5 times) is given time (for example, until 30 seconds elapse, or 10 balls are won). It will be released).

When the special winning opening 65a is opened, it is closed when a predetermined time has elapsed from the opening or when a predetermined number of winnings are detected, and after the closing, the special winning opening 65a is opened again. The opening/closing operation of the special winning opening 65a can be repeated, for example, 10 times (10 rounds) at the maximum. The state in which this opening/closing operation is performed is one form of a special game state (big hit state) that is advantageous to the player, and the player can play a ball by winning the ball at the special winning opening 65a. As a value (game value) is added, a larger amount of prize balls than usual is paid out.

The variable winning device 65 is, specifically, a horizontally long rectangular opening/closing plate that covers the special winning opening 65a, and a big winning opening solenoid (not shown) for driving the opening/closing forward with the lower side of the opening/closing plate as an axis. It has and. Normally, the special winning opening 65a is in a closed state in which a ball cannot be won or is difficult to win. At the time of a big hit, the special winning opening solenoid is driven to tilt the opening/closing plate to the lower side of the front surface to temporarily form an open state in which the ball easily wins the big winning opening 65a, and the open state and the normal closed state. It operates so that the state and the state are repeated alternately.

The variable winning device 65 is arranged at a position where the ball can win the big winning opening 65a in both left-handed playing and right-handed playing. When the ball enters the big winning opening 65a, the back side of the game board 13 is placed. The special winning opening switch (not shown) provided in the switch is turned on, and the number of times the special winning opening switch is turned on is counted, so that the number of balls winning the special winning opening 65a is counted. The closing condition of 65a is determined. Further, 15 balls are paid out as prize balls due to the turning on of the special winning opening switch. By repeating the open state and the closed state of the special winning opening 65a due to the big hit, many balls are in a state where it is easy to win the big winning opening 65a, and the player has a gaming value (game value). As a grant, a larger amount of prize balls will be paid out than usual. This state is one form of a special game state that is advantageous to the player.

The special game state is not limited to the above-mentioned form. A special winning opening and a large opening that is opened and closed separately from the specific winning opening are provided in the game area, and when the special LED group 37b corresponding to the big hit in the special symbol display device 37 is lit, the specific winning opening is a predetermined time. A game state in which the large opening is opened for a predetermined period of time and a predetermined number of times may be formed as a special game state when the ball is released into the specific winning opening while the specific winning opening is opened. .

Through gates 67 are provided on the left side and the right side of the variable display device unit 80 as viewed from the front. The through gate 67 is provided with a through hole (not shown) through which a ball passes in the vertical direction. When the ball shot in the game area passes through the through gate 67, the through gate switch (not shown) provided in the through hole is turned on, and the main controller 110 causes the normal symbol to hit due to the turning on. A lottery will be held.

As a result of the lottery of the ordinary symbol performed on the ball that has passed through the through gate 67, when it is determined to be a hit, the symbol of "○" is stopped and displayed through the variable display of the ordinary symbol on the ordinary symbol display device 83. After this, the normal electric power combination 64c provided above the second starting port 64b in a front view operates. As a result, the ball enters the second starting port 64b for a predetermined time from the state in which the plate of the ordinary electric officer 64c, which makes it difficult for the ball to enter the second starting port 64b, closes the second starting port 64b. The ball can enter the ball more easily than the closed or closed state.

A special symbol display device 37 provided with a state LED group 37a and a special LED group 37b configured by a plurality of LEDs, which are light emitting means, is provided on the upper right side in the front view of the game area (upper right side in FIG. 3). Has been done. The special symbol display device 37 is a first special symbol (hereinafter, the first special symbol may be referred to as "special symbol 1") according to each control performed by the main controller 110 (see FIG. 2) and a second. With each variable display of the special symbol (hereinafter, the second special symbol may be referred to as “special symbol 2”) (hereinafter, the variable display of both special symbols may be referred to as “dynamic display”) The gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is displayed.

The status LED group 37a displays the number of reserved balls, which is the number of balls (reserved balls) for which variable display has not been executed, among the balls that have won (balls) in the first starting opening 64a or the second starting opening 64b described later. This is indicated by the lighting state. Further, the number of rounds for jackpots and error display are also indicated by the lighting state of the status LED group 37a corresponding to the status. In addition, the state LED group 37a is configured such that the light emission colors (for example, red, green, and blue) of the respective LEDs are different, and the combination of the light emission colors suggests various game states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs. be able to.

The "round" in the jackpot means from opening to closing of a special winning opening 65a, which will be described later, in order to divide the number of prize balls of the big hit. In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, One "round" is executed by "30 seconds" from the opening of the winning opening 65a or when 10 balls are won while the big winning opening 65a is opened.

The special LED group 37b is composed of a total of 12 LEDs including an upper LED group 37b1 composed of 6 LEDs and a lower LED group 37b2 also composed of 6 LEDs. The upper LED group 37b1 dynamically displays the first special symbol indicating the determination result of the first lottery game. Further, the lower LED group 37b2, the second special symbol showing the determination result of the second lottery game is dynamically displayed.

Specifically, the upper LED group 37b1 is dynamically operated until the variation time (dynamic display time) determined based on the winning of the first starting opening 64a provided at the center of the board surface of the game board 13 elapses. After the display (in the first embodiment, the lower LED is sequentially lit one by one from the uppermost LED of the upper LED group 37b1 and the lighting pattern is repeatedly displayed), a design showing the determination result (the first embodiment Then, depending on the combination of the respective lighting patterns of the six LEDs, one of the total 64 kinds of stop symbols) is stopped and displayed.

Further, the lower LED group 37b2 is dynamically displayed until the variable time (dynamic display time) determined based on the winning of the second start opening 64b provided on the right side of the game board 13 has elapsed ( In the first embodiment, the lower LEDs are sequentially lit one by one from the uppermost LED of the lower LED group 37b2, and the lighting pattern is repeatedly displayed), and then a pattern showing the determination result (in the first embodiment, One of a total of 64 types of stop symbols) is displayed in a stopped manner depending on the combination of the respective lighting patterns of the six LEDs.

In any of the LED groups 37b1 and 37b2, when the determination result is a loss, only the leftmost LED is lit and displayed, and when the determination result is a jackpot, it corresponds to the type (type) of the jackpot. Each LED group is lit and displayed in a lighting pattern. Details of the stop pattern of each LED group will be described later.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, whether or not to hit the first start opening 64a or the second start opening 64b a jackpot is determined (big hit lottery), and if it is a big hit, the jackpot type Is also determined.

As the jackpot type determined here, "probability variation A" corresponding to "10 round (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as "R") probability variation jackpot", "probability variation B" corresponding to "5R probability variation jackpot", "Time saving A" corresponding to "10R time saving big hit" is prepared (see FIG. 24(b)).

Here, with the jackpot type of "probability variation A" corresponding to "10R probability variation jackpot", the jackpot probability of each special symbol is one of the following jackpots (hereinafter, " May be referred to as "big hit next time") becomes a high probability state compared to the "normal game state", and the probability of hitting a normal symbol is also a high probability state compared to the "normal game state" until the next big hit occurs. It is a jackpot that shifts to the "probability fluctuation state".

In addition, the jackpot type of "probability variation B" corresponding to "5R probability variation jackpot" means that the jackpot probability of each special symbol is one of the following jackpots (hereinafter, " May be referred to as "big hit") until the occurrence of "normal game state" and high probability state, and the probability of hitting the normal symbol also becomes higher probability state than "normal game state" until the next big hit occurs It is a jackpot that shifts to a “probability fluctuation state”.

In addition, the jackpot type of "hour saving A" jackpot corresponding to "10R hourly jackpot" is a low probability that the jackpot probability of each special symbol is equal to the "normal game state" after the jackpot of the maximum round number of 10 rounds. On the other hand, the jackpot to shift to the gaming state (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "time shortening state") in which the normal symbol hit probability becomes a high probability state until the dynamic display of the special symbol is executed 100 times That is.

Here, each gaming state will be described in more detail. In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the "normal gaming state" means a time when the gaming state is not the "probability variation state" or the "time reduction state", the jackpot probability of each special symbol, and the hit of the ordinary symbol. A state in which the probability is normal (that is, a low-probability state) and a state in which the normal electric outlet 64c is opened for a short time (a so-called non-open extension state). That is, "normal game state", the probability of jackpot of each special symbol is lower than that of "probability fluctuation state", and the state of probability of hitting ordinary symbols is lower than that of "probability fluctuation state" and "time reduction state" However, since the opening time of the normal electric power combination 64c is also short, a game state in which the ball easily wins the second starting opening 64b (hereinafter, a state in which the ball easily wins the second starting opening 64b, It is not a "winning assistance state" in some cases, but a gaming state that is most disadvantageous to the player (low advantage).

Then, in the "time shortening state", the jackpot probability of each special symbol becomes a low probability state as in the "normal gaming state", but the hit probability of the ordinary symbol increases, and the opening time of the ordinary electric role 64c is increased. A state in which it becomes easy to win a ball to the second starting opening 64b for a long time (hereinafter, the probability of hitting a normal symbol is increased, and the function of opening the normal electrician 64c for a long time is referred to as "winning assistance function". In addition, the state that the winning probability of the normal symbol is increased, and the opening time of the normal electric power combination 64c is long and the ball is likely to win the second starting opening 64b, It may be referred to as a "state in which the prize winning assist function is activated"). That is, in the "time shortening state", although the big hit by the special symbol is equivalent to the "normal game state", the hit by the ordinary symbol is easily derived, and the open state of the ordinary electric role 64c is long. Therefore, in the "time-reduced state", it is easy to cause the fired ball to win the second starting port 64b, so that it is possible to continuously execute the dynamic display of the special figure 2 and to the second starting port 64b. It is possible to obtain a prize ball (for example, 1 piece/winning prize) based on the winning a prize and play a game while suppressing the reduction of the number of balls held.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, as described above, the “time reduction state” is the number of predetermined times predetermined for each jackpot after the jackpot of the jackpot type “time saving A” (see FIG. 24(b)). It is maintained until the dynamic display of the special symbol (100 times in the first embodiment) is executed. Then, after the dynamic display of the special number of times of the specified number of times is executed (that is, after "end of power support"), it is configured to shift from the "time reduction state" to the "normal game state". (See Figure 10).

Then, in the "probability fluctuation state" is a high-probability state in which the jackpot probability of each special symbol is increased as an added value after the jackpot is over, and the hit probability of the ordinary symbol is increased, and the prize for the ordinary electric officer 64c is won. The auxiliary function is activated. That is, the "probability variation state" is a state in which the big hit result due to the special symbol is easily derived, and the hit result due to the ordinary symbol is easily derived, and further, the open state of the ordinary electric power combination 64c becomes long. Therefore, in the "probability variation state", the winning assistance function is activated, and the launched ball easily wins the second starting opening 64b, so that the dynamic display of the special figure 2 can be continuously executed, and It is possible to play a game while suppressing the decrease in the number of balls held by obtaining a prize ball (for example, 1/win) based on the winning of the second starting opening 64b, and further, a jackpot game based on the dynamic display of special figure 2. It becomes possible to play the game in a state where the (special game state) is likely to occur.

Here, a display mode of the special LED group 37b for each jackpot type will be described. As the stop display (lighting display) of the upper LED group 37b1 and the lower LED group 37b2 for the first special symbol, there is one type of display pattern corresponding to the loss, 21 types of the display pattern corresponding to the jackpot type “probability variation A”, and the jackpot. There are 21 types of display patterns corresponding to the type “probability variation B” and 21 types of display patterns corresponding to the jackpot type “time saving A”, for a total of 64 types of display patterns. Each display pattern does not have a specific regularity for each jackpot type, and a random display pattern is associated in advance. Therefore, when the player looks at the display pattern of the upper LED group 37b1 or the lower LED group 37b2, it can be recognized that the stop display of the loss has been stopped, while the jackpot type “probable variation A”, “probable variation B”. It is configured such that it is difficult to identify whether the stop display is “” or “time saving A”.

With this configuration, even if each jackpot type is displayed in the stop display of the special LED group 37b of the special symbol display device 37, if all the jackpot types corresponding to each stop display are not known. It becomes difficult for the player to recognize the winning jackpot type. Therefore, for example, in the lottery of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, even if the "probability variation A" is won, the jackpot result corresponding to "time saving A" is temporarily displayed on the drum display device 81. By displaying it, it is possible to make it difficult to determine which game state it is. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game by creating playability that makes the player guess in which game state the game is being played, and perform promotion during or after the big hit. Thus, it is possible to provide a surprising game and improve the interest of the game.

In addition, instead of changing the hit probability of the ordinary symbol, depending on the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10, the time when the below-mentioned ordinary electric power combination 64c attached to the second starting opening 64b is opened, or once by the ordinary symbol Alternatively, the number of times the normal electric power outlet 64c is opened may be changed. Specifically, in the "time reduction state" or the like, the time for which the normal electric power combination 64c associated with the second starting opening 64b is opened is set longer than that in the "normal game state", or it is normal for one hit. The number of times that the electric role 64c is released may be set to be larger than that in the "normal game state". Further, in the "time shortening state", at least two of the increase of the winning probability of the ordinary symbol, the lengthening of the opening time of the normal electric outlet 64c, and the increase of the number of times of opening the ordinary electric outlet 64c are performed at the same time. You may do it.

At the left and right corners on the lower side of the game board 13, a sticking space K1 for sticking a stamp or an identification label is provided, and the sticker or the like stuck to the sticking space K1 is small on the front frame 14. It can be seen through the window 35 (see FIG. 1).

Further, the game board 13 is provided with an outlet 66. Balls that have not entered any of the winning openings 63, 64a, 64b, 65a are guided to a ball discharge path (not shown) through the outlet 66. In addition, the balls that have entered the winning openings 63, 64a, 64b, and 65a are guided to the ball discharge path after passing through a switch for detecting the entering of the balls provided for each winning opening. The ball guided to the ball discharging path passes through an out switch (not shown) for detecting the guided ball, and then is discharged to an island facility (not shown) in which the pachinko machine 10 is installed.

The game board 13 is provided with a large number of nails in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the balls, and various members (features) such as a wind turbine are provided.

Here, with reference to FIG. 5 and FIG. 6, a base plate 60 that constitutes the game board 13, a board back unit 300 that also constitutes the game board 13 and is arranged on the rear side of the pachinko machine 10 of the base board 60, and The light guide unit 400 assembled to the backboard unit 300 and the drum display device 81 arranged on the rear side of the pachinko machine 10 of the light guide unit 400 will be described. FIG. 5 is an exploded perspective view of the game board 13, and FIG. 6 is an exploded perspective view of the backboard unit 300.

First, as shown in FIG. 5, the game board 13 is composed of a base plate 60, a backboard unit 300, and a drum display device 81, and the base plate 60 forming a game area with respect to the back side of the pachinko machine 10. The rear panel unit 300 is assembled, and the drum display device 81 is assembled to the rear panel unit 300.

Next, as shown in FIG. 6, the backboard unit 300 includes a backboard unit base 301, a light guiding unit 400, a right-side notification lamp LED board 302, a right-side notification lamp member 303, a left-side notification lamp LED board 304, and a left-side notification lamp. It includes a lamp member 305, a notification lamp assembly portion 306, and a confirmation lamp unit 310. Then, first, the light guide unit 400, the right-side notification lamp LED board 302, the left-side notification lamp LED board 304, and the confirmation lamp unit 310 are fixed by screws to the front side of the board unit base 301 of the pachinko machine 10. After being assembled, the right-side notification lamp member 303 is assembled so as to correspond to the right-side notification lamp LED board 302, and the left-side notification lamp member 305 is assembled so as to correspond to the left-side notification lamp LED board 304. The underside unit 300 is formed by fixing the lamp assembling portion 306 to the underside unit base 301 with screws.

The right-side notification lamp member 303 and the left-side notification lamp member 305 are lamps for suggesting to the player various game situations in the variation effect of the third symbol. In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, various kinds of information regarding the variation effect of the third symbol and information regarding the game state can be suggested to the player by the lighting pattern and the lighting color of the right side notification lamp member 303 and the left side notification lamp member 305. Is configured.

The confirming lamp unit 310 is a drive type lamp for suggesting that a big hit will occur by lighting and driving the confirming lamp 311 when a big hit occurs in the fluctuating effect. The confirmation lamp unit 310 includes a confirmation lamp 311, a confirmation lamp LED (not shown) for turning on the confirmation lamp 311 and a rotary drive motor (not shown) for rotating the confirmation lamp 311. It consists of and. In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when a big hit occurs in the variation effect of the third symbol, by turning on and rotating the confirmation lamp 311 at the timing determined by the lottery, it is possible that the big hit has occurred. It is structured to be a clear suggestion. Further, when the confirmation lamp 311 wins the jackpot that generates the “probability variation state”, the confirmation lamp 311 lights up in a long lighting pattern for a long lighting time (for example, “10 seconds”), and the “probability variation state”. When a big hit that is not a big hit occurs, the confirmation lamp 311 is configured to light in a short lighting pattern with a short lighting time (for example, “2 seconds”). The lighting timing of the confirmation lamp 311 will be described later.

Here, the detailed configuration of the light guide unit 400 and the positional relationship between the light guide unit 400 and the drum display device 81 will be described with reference to FIGS. 7 to 10. 7 is a rear perspective view of the light guide unit 400, FIG. 8 is a front side exploded perspective view of the light guide unit 400, and FIG. 9 is a rear side exploded perspective view of the light guide unit 400. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing the positional relationship of the drum display device 81 with respect to the schematic side sectional view of the light guide unit 400 taken along the line XX of FIG. 7.

As shown in FIGS. 7 to 9, the light guide unit 400 includes a front light guide plate 410, a lower LED unit 414, a front right LED unit 415, a front left LED unit 416, an upper spacer 417, a lower spacer 418, and a rear side. The light guide plate 420, the rear upper LED unit 422, and the display area forming member 430 are included.

The front light guide plate 410 is formed by continuously forming upper and lower flat plate portions extending in a direction parallel to the surface of the base plate 60 with respect to a regular R-shaped portion along the outer peripheral shape of the drum display device 81. There is. More specifically, an upper inverted R-shaped portion that is bent to the front side of the game board 13 with a size of about R32 is formed from the flat plate portion above the front light guide plate 410, and the drum display device 81 (rear side) is continuously formed from there. A regular R-shaped portion bulging in the front direction of the game board 13 is formed along the outer peripheral shape of the light guide plate 420) with a size of about R80, and further, a regular R-shaped portion is continuously formed from the game board 13 with a size of about R32. A downward inverted R-shaped portion that is bent toward the front side is formed, and a flat plate portion below the downward inverted R-shaped portion is continuously formed.

On the back side of the front light guide plate 410 (the front surface in the back direction of the pachinko machine 10), as described above, by guiding the light incident on the front light guide plate 410 from various directions, a plurality of cherry blossom petals are formed. A second decorative pattern group 411 imitating a snowstorm, a third decorative pattern 412 imitating one sunfish, and a fourth decorative pattern group 413 imitating a bubble group composed of a plurality of bubbles. Various concave and convex lens cuts are provided so that the various symbols can be visually recognized from the front side of the pachinko machine 10. The second decorative symbol group 411 is formed in both left and right front view areas of the regular R-shaped portion, the third decorative symbol is formed in the central area of the regular R-shaped portion in front view, and the fourth decorative symbol group 413 is downward. The inverted R-shaped portion and the lower flat plate portion are formed evenly throughout.

The concave and convex lens cuts (horizontal grooves) corresponding to the symbols of the second decorative symbol group 411 are formed from the front lower LEDs 414c mounted on the lower LED board 414b of the lower LED unit 414 to the lower front light guide plate 410. When light is incident upward from the lower end surface of the flat plate portion, the guided light is emitted to the front side of the pachinko machine 10. Therefore, the second decorative symbol group 411 emits light and is visible from the front side of the pachinko machine 10 by the light incident upward from both ends of the lower end surface of the flat plate portion below the front light guide plate 410.

The concave-convex lens cut (lateral groove) corresponding to the pattern of the second decorative symbol group 411, out of the light guided to the flat plate portion, only the light incident upward is emitted to the front side of the pachinko machine 10, Light incident from another direction (for example, the lateral direction) is configured not to be emitted to the front side of the pachinko machine 10 by the lens cut having the uneven shape corresponding to the second decorative symbol group 411. In other words, the second decorative pattern group 411 emits only the light incident from the lower end surface of the flat plate portion below the front light guide plate 410 to the front side of the pachinko machine 10, and the light incident from other directions is the pachinko machine. It is configured such that it does not emit to the front side of the machine 10 and does not emit light as it passes through the portion where the second decorative symbol group 411 is formed (invisible or difficult to see).

More specifically, the concave and convex lens cuts (horizontal grooves) corresponding to the symbols of the second decorative symbol group 411 are incident on the light guided to the flat plate portion from above and below in a front view. The light (light guided in the front view upward direction and the front view downward direction) is configured to be emitted to the front side of the pachinko machine 10, while the light incident in the front view lateral direction (front view left direction and The light guided in the right direction in the front view) is configured not to be emitted to the front side of the pachinko machine 10 due to the concave and convex lens cut corresponding to the second decorative symbol group 411. Here, of the light guided to the flat plate portion, either one of the light incident from the front view upper direction or the front view lower direction (light guided in the front view upper direction and the front view lower direction) Only, the lens cut may have a shape such that the light emitted to the concave-convex lens cut (lateral groove) corresponding to the pattern of the second decorative symbol group 411 is emitted to the front side of the pachinko machine 10, but in that case However, there is a possibility that the shape of the lens cut is required to be sophisticated, and the processing cost of the lens cut may increase. Therefore, of the light guided to the flat plate portion, it is the case of light that is incident from the front view upper direction and the front view lower direction (light guided in the front view upper direction and the front view lower direction). Even with the concave-convex lens cut so that the light applied to the second decorative pattern group 411 is emitted to the front side of the pachinko machine 10, it is possible to suppress an increase in the processing cost of the lens cut.

On the other hand, as described above, of the light guided to the flat plate portion, the light (light guided in the front view upper direction and the front view lower direction) incident from the front view upper direction or the front view lower direction A lens cut may be configured so that the light emitted to the second decorative symbol group 411 is emitted to the front side of the pachinko machine 10 by only one of them.

Further, since the front light guide plate 410 is arranged on the front side (front side) of the pachinko machine 10 with respect to the rear light guide plate 420, it is irradiated from the confirmation lamp 311 arranged above the front light guide plate 410. The rear light guide plate 420 is more likely to be affected by light and light emitted from indoor lighting provided on the ceiling of the game hall. Therefore, the second decorative symbol group 411 (also the third decorative symbol 412 and the fourth decorative symbol group 413) formed on the front light guide plate 410 does not react as much as possible to light from above in front view (erroneous lighting). However, it is preferable to use a concave and convex lens cut that is turned on (emits light) only by light from the lower side in the front view (or the lateral direction in the front view). Then, the front light guiding LED is not arranged above the front light guide plate 410 in the front view, but the front lower LED 414c is arranged below the front light guide plate 410 so that the second decorative symbol group 411 can be turned on by the front lower LED 414c. With this configuration, it is possible to suppress erroneous lighting of the second decorative symbol group 411 due to lighting of the confirmation lamp 311 and indoor lighting of the game hall.

In the first embodiment, with respect to the second decorative symbol group 411 of the front light guide plate 410, the second decorative symbol group 411 is turned on only by the front lower LED 414c arranged below the front light guide plate 410 in a front view. Instead of this, the front upper LED is arranged above the front light guide plate 410 in a front view, and the second decorative symbol group 411 is lit only by the front upper LED. You may comprise, and you may comprise so that the lighting display of the 2nd decorative symbol group 411 may be performed by LED for front side upper part and LED for front side lower part 414c. Further, the third decorative design 412 may be configured to perform lighting display by the front upper LED and/or the front lower LED 414c.

The concave and convex lens cuts (horizontal grooves) corresponding to the pattern of the third decorative pattern 412 are located below the front light guide plate 410 from the front lower LED 414c other than the left and right ends mounted on the lower LED board 414b of the lower LED unit 414. When light is incident upward from the lower end surface of the flat plate portion, the guided light is emitted to the front side of the pachinko machine 10. Therefore, the third decorative pattern 412 from the front side of the pachinko machine 10 by the light incident upward from other than both ends of the lower end face of the flat plate portion below the front light guide plate 410 (that is, the central portion of the lower end face). Lights up and becomes visible.

The concave-convex lens cut (lateral groove) corresponding to the pattern of the third decorative pattern 412 is the same as the concave-convex lens cut corresponding to the pattern of the second decorative pattern group 411, among the light guided to the flat plate portion. , Only the light incident upward is emitted to the front side of the pachinko machine 10, and the light incident from the other direction (for example, the lateral direction) is a pachinko machine due to the concave and convex lens cut corresponding to the third decorative pattern 412. 10 is configured not to be emitted to the front side. In other words, the third decorative pattern 412 emits only the light incident from the lower end face of the flat plate portion below the front light guide plate 410 to the front side of the pachinko machine 10, and the light incident from other directions is the pachinko machine. It is configured such that it does not emit to the front side of 10 and does not emit light as it passes through the portion where the second decorative pattern group 411 is formed (cannot be visually recognized or is difficult to visually recognize).

The concave and convex lens cuts (vertical grooves) corresponding to the symbols of the fourth decorative symbol group 413 are front right LEDs 415c mounted on the front right LED board 415b of the front right LED unit 415 (see FIG. 19). And/or from the front left LED 416c (see FIG. 19) mounted on the front left LED board 416b of the front left LED unit 416 to the left end surface of the flat plate portion below the front light guide plate 410 and/or When the light is incident in the lateral direction from the right end face, the guided light is configured to be emitted to the front side of the pachinko machine 10. Therefore, by the light incident in the lateral direction from the left end surface and/or the right end surface of the flat plate portion below the front light guide plate 410, the fourth decorative symbol group 413 emits light from the front side of the pachinko machine 10 and is visible. Become.

The concave and convex lens cuts (vertical grooves) corresponding to the symbols of the fourth decorative symbol group 413, out of the light guided to the flat plate portion, only the light incident in the lateral direction is emitted to the front side of the pachinko machine 10. However, the light incident from another direction (for example, from the lower side to the upper side) is configured not to be emitted to the front side of the pachinko machine 10 by the lens cut of the uneven shape corresponding to the fourth decorative pattern group 413. In other words, the fourth decorative symbol group 413 emits only the light incident from the left end surface or the right end surface of the flat plate portion below the front light guide plate 410 to the front side of the pachinko machine 10 and the light incident from other directions. Is not emitted to the front side of the pachinko machine 10 and passes through the portion where the fourth decorative symbol group 413 is formed and does not emit light (invisible or difficult to see). The details of the light emitting modes of the second decorative symbol group 411, the third decorative symbol group 412, and the fourth decorative symbol group 413 will be described later.

Like the front light guide plate 410, the rear light guide plate 420 has a regular R-shaped portion along the outer peripheral shape of the drum display device 81, and upper and lower flat plate portions extending in the direction parallel to the surface of the base plate 60 are continuous with each other. Is formed into a structure. More specifically, an upper inverted R-shaped portion that is bent to the front side of the game board 13 with a size of about R30 is formed from the flat plate portion above the rear light guide plate 420, and the drum display device 81 (front side) is continuously formed from the upper inverted R-shaped portion. A regular R-shaped portion bulging in the front direction of the game board 13 is formed along the outer peripheral shape of the light guide plate 410) in a size of about R75, and further, from there, a size of about R30 is continuously formed and the game board 13 is formed. A lower inverted R-shaped portion that is bent toward the front side is formed, and a flat plate portion below the lower inverted R-shaped portion is continuously formed.

In addition, on the upper end portion (surface) of the rear light guide plate 420 in front view, from the rear upper LED 422c (see FIG. 12) mounted on the rear upper LED board 422b of the rear upper LED unit 422. A rear upper diffusion lens 423 that diffuses the emitted light in a plurality of directions inside the rear light guide plate 420 is provided. Furthermore, the light emitted from the plurality of rear lower LEDs 424 mounted on the lower LED substrate 414b of the lower LED unit 414 is provided at the lower end portion (surface) of the rear light guide plate 420 in front view. A rear lower diffusion lens 425 that diffuses light in a plurality of directions inside the light guide plate 420 is provided. The details of the irradiation (passage) of light by the rear upper diffusion lens 423 and the rear lower diffusion lens 425 will be described later.

On the back side of the rear light guide plate 420 (the front surface in the back side of the pachinko machine 10), as described above, the light incident from above and/or below the rear light guide plate 420 is guided. The various decorative lens cuts are provided so that the first decorative pattern group 421 simulating a school of fish composed of a plurality of types of fish is visible from the front side of the pachinko machine 10. The first decorative symbol group 421 is formed uniformly on the whole of the regular R-shaped portion.

The concave and convex lens cuts corresponding to the symbols of the first decorative symbol group 421 are the rear lower LED 424 and/or the rear upper LED unit 422 mounted on the lower LED board 414b of the lower LED unit 414. When light is incident from the plurality of rear upper LEDs 422c (see FIG. 12) mounted on the upper side LED substrate 422b toward the lower flat plate portion and/or the upper flat plate portion of the rear light guide plate 420. In addition, the guided light is emitted to the front side of the pachinko machine 10. Therefore, the light incident from the lower end portion (face) of the lower flat plate portion of the rear light guide plate 420 and/or the upper end portion (face) of the upper flat plate portion causes the first decoration from the front side of the pachinko machine 10. The symbol group 421 emits light and becomes visible.

The concave and convex lens cuts corresponding to the symbols of the first decorative symbol group 421 are configured to emit the light, which is incident from various directions, of the light guided to the flat plate portion to the front side of the pachinko machine 10. ing. The details of the light emission mode of the first decorative symbol group 421 will be described later.

More specifically, the concave-convex lens cuts corresponding to the symbols of the first decorative symbol group 421 are, in the light guided to the flat plate portion, the front view upper direction, the front view lower direction, the front view right direction, and the front face. Light incident from a direction parallel to the flat plate portion of the rear light guide plate 420, such as the left direction when viewed, is emitted to the front side of the pachinko machine 10. When light is incident from the non-flat plate portion of the rear light guide plate 420, that is, the upper inverted R-shaped portion, the normal R-shaped portion, or the lower inverted R-shaped portion, the light repeatedly reflected in the rear light guide plate 420 is inverted upward. When reflected by the R-shaped portion of the R-shaped portion, the regular R-shaped portion, or the lower inverted R-shaped portion, the light is guided while the incident angle and the reflection angle are slightly different between the front surface and the back surface. Therefore, even if light is incident from the lateral direction of the upper inverted R-shaped portion, the normal R-shaped portion, or the lower inverted R-shaped portion in the front view, the light is not guided in the lateral direction of the front view and is obliquely upward in the front view. Light is guided in a diagonal direction or in a diagonally downward direction when viewed from the front, and the light is guided in a non-uniform (non-uniform) manner with respect to the first decorative pattern group 421 provided on the back surface side of the rear light guide plate 420, respectively. Depending on the intensity of the lighting of the first decorative symbol group 421, sparse lighting may occur. Therefore, by entering light from the end surfaces of the upper flat plate portion and the lower flat plate portion of the rear light guide plate 420, the light can be uniformly incident on the first decorative symbol group 421, and the first decorative symbol group. It is possible to keep the lighting of 421 uniform.

In the first embodiment, when the light is incident (guided) to the front light guide plate 410 and the rear light guide plate 420, the light is incident from the end face (part) of the flat plate portion of each of the light guide plates 410 and 420. The R-shaped portion (that is, the normal R-shaped portion, the upper inverted R-shaped portion, or the lower inverted R-shaped portion) does not enter light. This is because when the light is to be incident from the R-shaped portion, the advancing direction of the incident light is changed by the R-shaped portion, and it may be difficult or difficult to properly turn on the desired symbol. Further, the LEDs and the like must be arranged along the shape of the end face of the R-shaped portion, which may reduce the degree of freedom in design. Further, the R-shaped portion is formed along the outer shape of the effect member such as the drum display device 81 or the movable accessory, and when the LED substrate or the like is arranged on the side of the R-shaped portion, the effect member is designed. There is a risk of limiting the degree of freedom. Therefore, in each of the light guide plates 410 and 420 having the R-shaped portion, light is incident from the end face (portion) of one of the flat plate portions, thereby suitably solving the above problems and increasing the degree of freedom in designing each member. You can

More specifically, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the upper flat plate portion (upper flat plate portion), the upper inverted R-shaped portion, and the regular R-shaped portion that respectively configure the front light guide plate 410 and the rear light guide plate 420. Of the lower inverted R-shaped portion and the lower flat plate portion (lower flat plate portion), the upper flat plate portion and the lower flat plate portion have a front view upper side, a front view right side, a front view left side, and a front view lower side. The LEDs 414c, 415c, 416c, 422c, and 424 are configured to enter the light from the end surface (side surface).

This is because, as the first reason, the decorative pattern groups 411, 412, 413, 421 of the light guide plates 410, 420 are appropriately turned on. The non-flat plate portion of each light guide plate 410, 420, that is, the upper inverted R-shaped portion, the normal R-shaped portion, or the lower inverted R-shaped portion has an R shape on the front surface and the back surface by the thickness of each light guide plate 410, 420. The radii are slightly different. Therefore, when light is incident from the end surface (side surface) of the upper inverted R-shaped portion, the regular R-shaped portion, or the lower inverted R-shaped portion of each light guide plate 410, 420, the light repeatedly reflected in each light guide plate 410, 420 is generated. When reflected by the R-shaped portion of the upper inverted R-shaped portion, the regular R-shaped portion, or the lower inverted R-shaped portion, the light is guided while the incident angle and the reflection angle are slightly different between the front surface and the back surface. Therefore, light is guided nonuniformly (inhomogeneously) with respect to each of the decorative pattern groups 411, 412, 413, 421 applied to the back surface side of each light guide plate 410, 420, and each decorative pattern is dependent on the part. The lighting of the groups 411, 412, 413, and 421 may have different strengths, resulting in sparse lighting.

Therefore, when light is incident from the end surfaces (side surfaces) of the upper flat plate portion and the lower flat plate portion of each light guide plate 410, 420, the light repeatedly reflected in each light guide plate 410, 420 is at least the upper flat plate portion and the lower flat plate. In the state where light is guided inside the section, reflection is repeated with the front surface or the back surface of each of the planar light guide plates 410 and 420, and light is guided while the incident angle and the reflection angle are always equal. Thereby, first, light is stably guided in the upper flat plate portion and the lower flat plate portion of each light guide plate 410, 420, and each decorative pattern group 411, 412 provided on the back surface side of each light guide plate 410, 420. By guiding light uniformly (homogeneously) with respect to 413 and 421, it becomes possible to appropriately light each of the decorative symbol groups 411, 412, 413 and 421.

The second reason is to improve the degree of freedom in designing the arrangement of the LEDs 414c, 415c, 416c, 422c, 424. The R-shaped portions of the light guide plates 410 and 420 (that is, the upper inverted R-shaped portion, the normal R-shaped portion, and the lower inverted R-shaped portion) have a side surface in a front view, which has a shape along the R-shaped portion. When light is to be incident from the side end surface of the R-shaped portion, the LEDs on the LED substrate must also be arranged along the side end surface of the R-shaped portion. In particular, when the LEDs are arranged in consideration of the arrangement of each of the decorative symbol groups 411, 412, 413, 421, the adjustment regarding the position and the interval of each LED on the LED substrate becomes complicated, and the degree of freedom in design decreases. There is a risk.

Therefore, the LEDs 414c, 415c, 416c, 422c, 424 on the LED boards 414b, 415b, 416b, 422b are arranged so that light is incident from the end surfaces (side surfaces) of the upper and lower flat plate portions of the light guide plates 410, 420. The light guide plates 410 and 420 are arranged so that the LED substrate and the LEDs are not arranged on the end faces (side faces) of the R-shaped portions of the light guide plates 410 and 420. With this configuration, the LEDs 414c, 415c, 416c, 422c, 424 on the LED boards 414b, 415b, 416b, 422b can be arranged easily along the shapes of the end faces of the upper flat plate portion and the lower flat plate portion. (That is, they are arranged on a straight line and at equal intervals), and the degree of freedom in design can be improved.

Furthermore, a third reason is to improve the degree of freedom in designing the effect device (the drum display device 81, the movable accessory, etc.) on the back side and the side of each light guide plate 410, 420. On the back side or the side of each R-shaped portion of each light guide plate 410, 420, a production device relating to the variation effect of the third symbol which is the main game in the pachinko machine 10 (a drum display device 81 for performing the variation effect itself, A movable accessory etc. for executing various effects in the variable effect are arranged. Here, when the LED boards are arranged on the front side portions of the R-shaped portions of the light guide plates 410 and 420, there is a possibility that the degree of freedom in designing each production device may be limited by the amount of the LED boards installed. .

Therefore, in order to allow light to enter from the end surfaces (side surfaces) of the upper flat plate portion and the lower flat plate portion of each light guide plate 410, 420, the upper flat plate portion in the front view upper side, and the lower flat plate portion in the front view lower side, the front view. The LEDs 414c, 415c, 416c, 422c, 424 in the LED boards 414b, 415b, 416b, 422b are arranged on the right side and the left side in the front view, and the LED boards are located at the front side positions of the R-shaped portions of the light guide plates 410, 420. And the LED is not arranged. With such a configuration, when the effect devices are installed on the back side and the lateral sides of the light guide plates 410 and 420, the LED substrates and the like are not obstructed with respect to the disposition of the effect devices. The degree of freedom in designing can be improved.

The lower LED unit 414 is provided at a lower position in front view of the front light guide plate 410 and the rear light guide plate 420, and includes a lower base portion 414a and a lower LED board 414b on which a front lower LED 414c and a rear lower LED 424 are mounted. , And a front lower condensing lens 414d.

The lower base portion 414a is configured to be able to hold the lower LED substrate 414b with screws or the like, and the front light guide plate 410, the rear light guide plate 420, and the front lower light collecting lens 414d with respective positioning bosses (ribs) or the like. The front right LED unit 415, the front left LED unit 416, and the display area forming member 430 are connected and fixed to the front right LED unit 415, the front left LED unit 416, and the display area forming member 430 with screws or the like so that they can be positioned and fixed.

Further, the lower base 414a emits the light emitted from the front lower LED 414c mounted on the lower LED board 414b to only the front light guide plate 410 via the front lower condensing lens 414d. Predetermined partition ribs are formed so that the light emitted from the lower side LEDs 424 is emitted only to the lower rear diffusion lens 425 formed on the lower end portion (surface) of the rear light guide plate 420. There is. Thereby, the light emitted from each LED 414c, 424 can be accurately emitted to the front light guide plate 410 or the rear light guide plate 420, and thus the first decorative symbol group 421, the second decorative symbol group 411 or the third The decorative pattern 412 can be accurately turned on at an appropriate timing, and it is possible to suppress display abnormality such as unintended lighting of the decorative pattern. Details of the light irradiation (passage) mode by the front lower focusing lens 414d and the light irradiation (diffusion) mode by the rear lower diffusion lens 425 will be described later.

The front right LED unit 415 is provided at a front right position of the front light guide plate 410 and the rear light guide plate 420, and is equipped with a front right base 415a and a plurality of front right LEDs 415c (see FIG. 19). The front right LED board 415b and the front right condensing lens 415d are configured.

The front right base 415a is configured to be able to hold the front right LED board 415b with screws or the like, and the shape of the right end surface of each of the front light guide plate 410 and the rear light guide plate 420 (upper flat plate portion, upward Positioning ribs are provided along the reverse R-shaped portion, the normal R-shaped portion, the lower reverse R-shaped portion, and the outer shape of each end portion of the lower flat plate portion). Then, the lower LED unit 414, the rear upper LED unit 422, and the display while holding the front light guide plate 410, the rear light guide plate 420, and the front right condenser lens 415d at predetermined positions by the positioning bosses and the positioning ribs, respectively. By connecting and fixing the area forming member 430 with a screw or the like, positioning and fixing are possible.

In addition, the front right base 415a transmits light emitted from the front right LED 415c (see FIG. 19) mounted on the front right LED board 415b via the front right condenser lens 415d. Predetermined partition ribs are formed so as to emit light only to the flat plate portion below the light guide plate 410. Thereby, the light emitted from the front right LED 415c can be accurately emitted to the front light guide plate 410, so that the fourth decorative symbol group 413 can be accurately turned on at an appropriate timing, and an unintended symbol. It is possible to suppress a display abnormality such as lighting of. The details of the irradiation (passage) of light by the front right condenser lens 415d will be described later.

The front left LED unit 416 is provided at the front left position of the front light guide plate 410 and the rear light guide plate 420, and is equipped with a front left base 416a and a plurality of front left LEDs 416c (see FIG. 19). The front left LED board 416b and the front left condensing lens 416d are configured.

The front left base portion 416a is configured to be able to hold the front left LED substrate 416b with screws or the like, and the shape of each left end face of the front light guide plate 410 and the rear light guide plate 420 (upper flat plate portion, upper flat portion, upper portion). Positioning ribs are provided along the inverted R-shaped portion, the regular R-shaped portion, the lower inverted R-shaped portion, and the outer shape of each end of the lower flat plate portion. Then, the lower LED unit 414, the rear upper LED unit 422, and the display while holding the front light guide plate 410, the rear light guide plate 420, and the front left-side condenser lens 416d at predetermined positions by the positioning bosses and the positioning ribs, respectively. By connecting and fixing the area forming member 430 with a screw or the like, positioning and fixing are possible.

In addition, the front left base portion 416a transmits light emitted from the front left LED 416c (see FIG. 19) mounted on the front left LED substrate 416b via the front left condensing lens 416d. Predetermined partition ribs are formed so as to emit light only to the flat plate portion below the light guide plate 410. Accordingly, the light emitted from the front left LED 416c can be accurately emitted to the front light guide plate 410, so that the fourth decorative symbol group 413 can be accurately turned on at an appropriate timing, and an unintended symbol. It is possible to suppress a display abnormality such as lighting of. The details of the irradiation (passage) of light by the front left-side condenser lens 416d will be described later.

The rear upper LED unit 422 is provided at a front position above the front light guide plate 410 and the rear light guide plate 420, and has a rear upper base 422a and a rear upper LED 422c (see FIG. 12) mounted thereon. And an upper LED substrate 422b.

The rear upper base 422a is configured to be able to hold the rear upper LED board 422b with a screw or the like, and the front light guide plate 410 and the rear light guide plate 420 are respectively positioned at predetermined positions by respective positioning bosses (ribs) or the like. While being held, the front right LED unit 415, the front left LED unit 416, and the display area forming member 430 are connected and fixed by screws or the like, so that they can be positioned and fixed.

In addition, the rear upper base 422a is configured such that the light emitted from the rear upper LED 422c (see FIG. 12) is formed at the upper end (surface) of the rear light guide plate 420 and the rear upper diffusion lens 423 is formed. Predetermined partition ribs are formed so that light is emitted only to. Thereby, since the light emitted from the rear upper LED 422c can be accurately emitted to the rear light guide plate 420, the first decorative symbol group 421 can be accurately turned on at an appropriate timing, which is not intended. Display abnormalities such as lighting of symbols can be suppressed. The details of the irradiation (diffusion) of light by the rear upper diffusion lens 423 will be described later.

The upper spacer 417 and the lower spacer 418 have a predetermined thickness (for example, 5 mm) and are formed in a flat plate shape extending in the longitudinal direction. The upper spacer 417 and the lower spacer 418 are arranged between the front light guide plate 410 and the rear light guide plate 420 in order to provide a predetermined space between the front light guide plate 410 and the rear light guide plate 420. In this way, by providing the space between the front light guide plate 410 and the rear light guide plate 420, the light incident on one light guide plate 410, 420 is less likely to be incident on the other light guide plate 420, 410. It is possible to prevent the unintended lighting of the decorative patterns 411, 412, 413, 421 and the like.

As described above, the display area forming member 430 is disposed on the front side of the front light guide plate 410 and the rear light guide plate 420 (drum display device 81) in front view, and the drum display device 81 (the front light guide plate 410 and the rear light guide plate 410). A central opening 431 is formed so that the normal R-shaped portion of the light plate 420 can be visually recognized from the front side of the pachinko machine 10, and a lens cut 432 is formed at an outer edge portion of the central opening 431.

The lens cut 432 is provided in order to clarify the display area (effective line) of the display pattern in the drum display device 81, and the confirmation lamp 311 located in the upper part of the display area forming member 430 in front view. It is provided to suppress (prevent) the light emitted from the confirmation lamp 311 from being emitted to the front light guide plate 410 and the rear light guide plate 420 (drum display device 81) when turned on.

Here, the positional relationship between the display area forming member 430, the front light guide plate 410, the rear light guide plate 420, the drum display device 81, and the confirmation lamp 311 will be described with reference to FIG. 10. FIG. 10 shows the positional relationship of the drum display device 81 and the positional relationship of the confirmation lamp 311 and the display area forming member 430 with respect to the schematic side sectional view of the light guide unit 400 taken along line XX of FIG. 7. It is the figure shown. Note that in FIG. 10, for convenience of description, the intervals between the display area forming member 430, the front light guide plate 410, the rear light guide plate 420, and the drum display device 81 are enlarged and expressed.

As shown in FIG. 10, when the pachinko machine 10 is viewed from the front side, the display area forming member 430, the front light guide plate 410, the rear light guide plate 420, in order from the outside (the front side of the pachinko machine 10 (the left side in the drawing)). The drum display devices 81 are arranged in this order. Then, from the central opening 431 of the display area forming member 430, a total of nine symbol display areas for each of the reels LR, CR, RR of the drum display device 81 can be visually recognized, and other symbol areas (first (3 patterns) is covered with the lens cut 432, and thus is invisible or difficult to see. Further, from the central opening 431 of the display area forming member 430, the second decorative symbol group 411 and the third decorative symbol 412 of the front light guide plate 410 and the first decorative symbol group 421 of the rear light guide plate 420 are lit and displayed. It is configured to be visible when the Furthermore, since the lower side of the lens cut 432 on the lower side of the central opening 431 of the display area forming member 430 is transparent, the fourth decorative symbol group 413 formed on the flat plate portion below the front light guide plate 410 is illuminated and displayed. When it is performed, the pachinko machine 10 is configured to be visible from the front side. Therefore, the effective line of the variation effect in the drum display device 81 is clarified by the display area forming member 430, and the first decorative symbol group 421, the second decorative symbol group 411, the third decorative symbol 412, and the fourth decorative symbol group. When 413 is lit and displayed, it can be visually recognized while avoiding the lens cut 432 portion of the display area forming member 430.

Further, the lens cut 432 prevents the light emitted from the confirmation lamp 311 from being guided to the front light guide plate 410 and the rear light guide plate 420 when the confirmation lamp 311 is lit and displayed, that is, The light guide plates 410 and 420 are located at the upper portion (lower portion, both side portions) of the regular R-shaped portion so as to block the light of the confirmation lamp 311.

More specifically, the lens cut 432 is formed in a rib shape in which a plurality of ribs are continuously erected on the back surface side (the back surface side of the pachinko machine 10), and the lens cut 432 is incident on the lens cut 432. It is configured to disperse the light and reduce the amount of light transmitted through the lens cut portion 432.

In the lens cut 432, instead of a plurality of rib shapes, the lens cut 432 may be configured by knurling or mirror surface processing to reduce the amount of light transmission through the lens cut 432.

Further, the lens cut 432 may be provided on the inner surface of the standing wall (entire bulging portion) on the side of the central opening 431 of the display area forming member 430 in front view. With such a configuration, the display area indicating the effective line of the variation effect is clarified in a square shape, and the light that may be incident from the front side of the light guide unit 400 is dispersed by the lens cut 432. The lens cut portion 432 is configured to reduce the amount of light transmission.

Further, the effect by the confirmation lamp 311 located above the light guide unit 400 in the front view is an effect that suggests (notifies) that a big hit occurs in the variable display, and the first decorative symbol group 421 of the light guide unit 400, Since the second decorative symbol group 411, the third decorative symbol 412 or the fourth decorative symbol group 413 (ie, the suggestion of the jackpot expectation) has a higher importance in the game, the first decorative symbol group 421, It is configured such that the lighting brightness is stronger than the effect of the two decorative symbol groups 411, the third decorative symbol group 412, or the fourth decorative symbol group 413. This is to make it easier for the player to recognize the effect of the confirming lamp 311 having a high degree of importance when these effects are combined.

The front light guide plate 410 and the rear light guide plate 420 are formed in a shape (regular R shape portion) along the outer peripheral shape of the drum display device 81, and a lamp or the like is turned on at the vertical position of the regular R shape portion. In this case, when the light of the lamp is incident on the regular R-shaped portion and each of the decorative symbol groups 411, 412, 413, 421 is abnormally lit, the lighting pattern and variation of the decorative symbol groups 411, 412, 413, 421 There is a risk of discrepancies in the effect of changing production.

Therefore, by arranging the lens cut 432 at the vertical position of the regular R-shaped portions of the front light guide plate 410 and the rear light guide plate 420 and between the fixed lamp 311, the light incident by the lens cut 432. Can be diffused (weakened). Therefore, with respect to the front light guide plate 410 and the rear light guide plate 420, light other than the light that is incident by lighting the LEDs 414c, 415c, 416c, 422c, 424 is transmitted to the front light guide plate 410 and the rear light guide plate 420. By suppressing the incidence, it is possible to prevent the decorative pattern groups 411, 412, 413, 421 from abnormally lighting. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the production discrepancies such that the decorative symbol groups 411, 412, 413, 421 are abnormally lit.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10, since the front light guide plate 410 is arranged on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 of the first decorative pattern group 421 having the highest jackpot reliability (expectation degree), it is incident from the front side of the pachinko machine 10. The incident light on the rear light guide plate 420 can be suppressed also by the front light guide plate 410 with respect to the generated light. Therefore, by arranging the front side light guide plate 410 as a noise cover on the front side of the rear side light guide plate 420 on the pachinko machine 10 side, the light incident by the front side light guide plate 410 is diffused (weakened) to some extent, thereby erroneously. It is possible to prevent the first decorative symbol group 421, which has a large effect discrepancy, from being abnormally lit when it is lit and displayed. As a result, it is possible to suppress the production discrepancies such as the decorative pattern groups 411, 412, 413, 421 being abnormally lit.

Next, with reference to FIG. 11 to FIG. 25, traveling directions of light from the rear upper diffusion lens 423 and the rear lower diffusion lens 425 with respect to the rear light guide plate 420 (hereinafter, may be referred to as “optical path”). And the optical paths of light from the front lower condenser lens 414d, the front right condenser lens 415d, and the front left condenser lens 416d with respect to the front light guide plate 410, and the rear light guide plate 420. Of the first decorative symbol group 421 in, and the light emitting mode of the second decorative symbol group 411, the third decorative symbol 412 and the fourth decorative symbol group 413 in the front light guide plate 410, and the confirmation lamp 311 and the front light guide plate. An effect mode of 410, the rear light guide plate 420, and the drum display device 81 will be described.

First, the positional relationship between the front light guide plate 410 and the rear light guide plate 420 will be described with reference to FIG. 11. FIG. 11 is a schematic perspective view of the front light guide plate 410 and the rear light guide plate 420. In FIG. 11, for convenience of description, the second decorative symbol group 411, the third decorative symbol group 412 and the fourth decorative symbol group 413 provided on the front light guide plate 410, and the second decorative symbol group provided on the rear light guide plate 420. The arrangement of the 1 decorative symbol group 421 is expressed by being arranged differently from FIG.

As shown in FIG. 11, the front light guide plate 410 is located on the front side (left side in the drawing) of the pachinko machine 10 and the rear light guide plate 420 is located on the back side (right side in the drawing). As described above, on the front light guide plate 410, the third decorative pattern 412 imitating a sunfish is formed in the center part of the regular R-shaped portion of the front light guide plate 410, and the third decorative pattern 412 is formed. A second decorative pattern group 411 simulating cherry blossom petals is formed on both right and left sides of the regular R-shaped portion, and further, a bubble pattern is formed over the entire region of the lower inverted R-shaped portion continuous from the flat plate portion below the front light guide plate 410. A fourth decorative symbol group 413 imitating is formed.

Further, as described above, the rear light guide plate 420 is provided with the first decorative symbol group 421 simulating a fish school symbol over the entire region of the regular R-shaped portion of the rear light guide plate 420.

Therefore, when the light guide unit 400 is formed by connecting the front light guide plate 410 and the rear light guide plate 420, the second decorative pattern group 411 and the third decorative pattern 412 of the front light guide plate 410, and the rear light guide plate 420. The display area with the first decorative symbol group 421 is configured to overlap (overlap). In this way, in the effect of the light guide unit 400, various effects can be executed in one display area, the effect of the light guide unit 400 can be enhanced, and the degree of attention to the game can be increased.

Next, referring to FIGS. 12 to 16, an optical path of light from the rear upper diffusion lens 423 and the rear lower diffusion lens 425 with respect to the rear light guide plate 420, and the first decorative pattern in the rear light guide plate 420. A light emission mode (a lighting mode or a display mode; the same applies hereinafter) of the group 421 will be described. FIG. 12 shows the positional relationship between the first decorative symbol group 421 that can be lit and displayed on the rear light guide plate 420, the rear upper LED 422c and the rear lower LED 424 for the rear upper LED unit 422. It is the typical front view shown. FIG. 13 is a schematic enlarged view of the portion A of FIG. 12, showing a rear lower diffusion lens 425 formed on the lower end surface of the rear light guide plate 420 and a rear lower LED 424 of the lower LED unit 414. It is a schematic front view showing the relationship. FIG. 14 is a diagram schematically showing an optical path of light by the rear lower diffusion lens. 15: is the figure which showed the lighting mode of the 1st decorative symbol group 421 light-displayed by the rear side light guide plate 420, FIG.15(a) is the rear side corresponding to the right side area of the rear side light guide plate 420. It is the figure which showed typically the lighting mode of the 1st decorative symbol group 421 when LED 424c for upper parts and LED 424 for rear side lower parts were lighted, and FIG.15(b) is after the state of FIG.15(a). It is the figure which showed typically the lighting mode of the 1st decorative symbol group 421 when LED422c for rear upper parts and LED 424 for rear lower parts corresponding to the center area of the side light guide plate 420 were additionally lighted. 16: is the figure which showed the lighting mode of the 1st decorative symbol group 421 light-displayed by the rear light guide plate 420, FIG.16(a) shows the rear light guide plate from the state of FIG.15(b). It is the figure which showed typically the lighting mode of the 1st decorative symbol group 421 when the LED 422c for the rear upper part corresponding to the left side area of 420 and the LED 424 for the rear lower part were additionally lighted, and FIG. 16A schematically illustrates a lighting mode of the first decorative symbol group 421 when the rear upper LED 422c and the rear lower LED 424 corresponding to the right side region of the rear light guide plate 420 are turned off from the state of FIG. 16A. FIG. 12, 15 and 16, the LEDs 414c, 415c, 416c, 422c, 424 and the diffusion lenses 423, 425 are omitted or schematically represented for convenience of description.

As shown in FIG. 12, on the rear light guide plate 420, a first decorative symbol group 421 is formed on the entire regular R-shaped portion as a fish group symbol which is a symbol imitating a group of a plurality of types of fish. Further, by the rear upper LED 422c and the rear lower LED 424 provided above and below the rear light guide plate 420, the rear upper diffusion lens 423 formed on the upper end surface of the rear light guide plate 420, and When the rear lower diffusion lens 425 formed on the lower end surface of the rear light guide plate 420 is irradiated with light, one diffusion lens 423, 425 is provided in a plurality of directions (in the first embodiment, the left side Light is diffused in three directions (center and right).

Further, the rear upper LED 422c and the rear lower LED 424 are arranged such that one rear upper LED 422c and one rear lower LED 424 are paired in the vertical direction (vertical direction). ing.

Here, with reference to FIG. 13 and FIG. 14, a light diffusion mode by the rear lower diffusion lens 425 (rear upper diffusion lens 423) will be described. FIG. 13 is a schematic enlarged view of part A of FIG. 12, showing a rear lower diffusion lens 425 and a rear lower LED 424 formed on the lower end surface of the rear light guide plate 420. It is a schematic front view showing the relationship. FIG. 14 is a schematic enlarged view of a portion B of FIG. 13, and is a diagram schematically showing an optical path of light by the rear lower diffusion lens 425. The configuration of the rear-side upper diffusion lens 423 is the same as the configuration of the rear-side lower diffusion lens 425, so description thereof will be omitted.

More specifically, in the configuration of the rear upper diffusion lens 423 and the rear lower diffusion lens 425, the positions to be arranged are such that the end surface of the rear light guide plate 420 at the upper portion in front view and the end surface at the lower portion in front view are arranged. They are completely the same in shape, only different. Therefore, at the time of molding the rear upper diffusion lens 423 and the rear lower diffusion lens 425, the rear upper diffusion lens 423 and the rear lower diffusion lens are subjected to the same forming process (manufacturing process, same mold, etc.). 425, so that an increase in manufacturing cost of the rear light guide plate 420 can be suppressed.

Further, since the rear upper diffusion lens 423 and the rear lower diffusion lens 425 have the same configuration, the optical path of the light diffused from the rear upper diffusion lens 423 and the rear lower diffusion lens 425 are diffused. Since the optical paths of the reflected light are the same, the arrival points of the optical paths of the diffused light and the overlapping portions of the optical paths of the light can be easily set (understood) at the design stage. Specifically, in the case of the first embodiment, the optical path of the light emitted from the rear upper diffusion lens 423 and the optical path of the light emitted from the rear lower diffusion lens 425 are the rear light guide plate 420. There may be one or more overlaps in the regular R-shaped part. More specifically, for example, in the optical path of the light emitted from one front-direction diffusion portion 425b of the rear-side lower diffusion lens 425, the front direction on the opposite side of the rear-side upper diffusion lens 423 in all the optical path portions. It overlaps the optical path of the light emitted from the diffuser (no reference number). Further, in the optical path of the light emitted from the one leftward diffusion portion 425a of the rear lower diffusion lens 425, the leftward diffusion portion (no reference numeral) of the concave portion of the rear upper diffusion lens 423 facing each other is provided. The light path overlaps with the light path of the light emitted from, and overlaps with the light path of the light emitted from the front diffusion portion (no reference number) of the concave portion on the left of the concave portion on the opposite side. Further, in the optical path of the light emitted from the one rightward diffusing portion 425c of the rearward lower diffusing lens 425, the rightward diffusing portion (no reference numeral) of the concave portion facing the rearward upward diffusing lens 423 is provided. The light path overlaps with the light path of the light emitted from, and also overlaps with the light path of the light emitted from the front direction diffusion portion (no reference numeral) of the concave portion on the right side of the concave portion on the opposite side. As a result, it becomes easy to arrange the decorative pattern on the rear light guide plate 420, the decorative pattern on the rear light guide plate 420 is accurately turned on, and the decorative pattern to be highlighted is arranged in the overlapping portion to emphasize the decorative pattern. The display can be done.

As shown in FIG. 13, a rear lower diffusion lens 425 is formed on the lower end surface of the rear light guide plate 420 so as to correspond to the plurality of rear lower LEDs 424 of the lower LED unit 414. Then, as shown in FIG. 14, the rear lower diffusion lens 425 is formed such that a plurality of recesses are arranged in series, and one recess has the left side diffusion part 425a and the front direction diffusion part having the same side length. 425b and a rightward diffusion portion 425c.

The front direction diffusion part 425b is formed in a planar shape so as to be perpendicular to the irradiation direction of the light from the rear lower LED 424. In addition, the leftward diffusion portion 425a is formed in a planar shape inclined by about 50 degrees (θ1=50°) to the left with respect to the frontal diffusion portion 425b. The right diffusion portion 425c is formed in a planar shape inclined by about 50 degrees (θ1=50°) to the right side with respect to the front diffusion portion 425b. Then, the concave portion composed of the leftward diffusion portion 425a, the frontward diffusion portion 425b, and the rightward diffusion portion 425c is continuously formed by the width of the light emitting surface of at least one rear lower LED 424 of the rear light guide plate 420. It is formed on the lower end face.

The rear light guide plate 420 in the first embodiment is made of acrylic resin (PMMA), and when the refractive index of the acrylic resin is set to 1.49 to 1.53, the rear lower LED 424 to the front diffusion portion. The light path of the light incident on 425b is emitted straight (upper side in the drawing of FIG. 14) to the inside of the rear light guide plate 420, and the light incident on the left diffusion portion 425a from the rear lower LED 424 is The light emitted from the front diffusion unit 425b is refracted in a direction inclined to the left by about 20 degrees (θ2=20°), emitted to the inside of the rear light guide plate 420, and emitted from the rear lower LED 424 to the right. The light incident on the diffusion unit 425c is refracted in a direction inclined to the right by about 20 degrees (θ3=20°) with respect to the light emitted from the front direction diffusion unit 425b, and is emitted to the inside of the rear light guide plate 420. To be done.

In the rear lower diffusion lens 425, one recess formed by the left diffusion portion 425a, the front diffusion portion 425b, and the right diffusion portion 425c is at least the width of the light emitting surface of the rear lower LED 424. , A plurality of them are provided. Therefore, the light emitted from one rear lower LED 424 is generated in three directions (that is, with respect to the front direction and the front direction) inside the rear light guide plate 420 by the plurality of recesses of the rear lower diffusion lens 425. And the light path is inclined by 20 degrees to the left and the direction tilted by 20 degrees to the right with respect to the front direction). Further, since the leftward diffusion portion 425a, the frontward diffusion portion 425b, and the rightward diffusion portion 425c are each configured to have the same side length, the widths of the optical paths of the diffused light also have the same width. Composed. With this, by lighting one LED, it is possible to cause the plurality of first decorative symbol groups 421 respectively formed at the positions corresponding to the respective diffused light paths to emit light of the same color. By executing the effect, it is possible to enhance the effect of the rear light guide plate 420 and increase the degree of attention to the game.

Here, the rear lower diffusion lens 425 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 51 is a diagram schematically showing a light distribution mode of light by the leftward diffusion portion 425a, the frontal diffusion portion 425b, and the rightward diffusion portion 425c in the schematic enlarged view of FIG.

As shown in FIG. 51, the rear-side lower diffusion lens 425 has a predetermined concave side length (for example, a side that irradiates light in the front direction is 50 micrometers, and a side that irradiates light in the left-right direction) in one concave portion. Is 62.5 μm. Hereinafter, the micrometer may be referred to as “μm” in some cases.), a left diffusion portion 425a, a front diffusion portion 425b, and a right diffusion portion 425c. Each of the diffusing sections 425a to 425c is configured such that the optical paths of the light emitted from the diffusing sections 425a to 425c have the same width. Specifically, in each of the recesses, the side length for irradiating light in the front direction is configured to have the same length (for example, 50 μm), and the side lengths for irradiating light in the left direction and the right direction are respectively set. They are configured to have the same length (for example, 62.5 μm) and are configured such that the optical path widths of the lights emitted from the respective diffusion parts 425a to 425c are all the same. A plurality of the recesses are continuously arranged. That is, the width in the lateral direction of the concave portion 1 is 50 μm in the front direction diffusion portion 425b, and the width in the lateral direction of the leftward diffusion portion 425a and the rightward diffusion portion 425c is X (cos 50°=x/62. 5. x=40.175 and X=2x=80.35 μm), resulting in 130.35 μm. Therefore, for example, when the light emitting surface (irradiation width) of one LED 424 has a width of 3 millimeters, about 23 rear-side lower diffusion lenses 425 for the one LED 424 are formed.

Here, when one rear lower LED 424 emits light and each recess is irradiated with the light, the width of the light distributed in the front direction by the front diffusion unit 425b in one recess is 50 μm. The width of the light that is irradiated and is distributed to the left by the leftward diffusion portion 425a in one recess is also 50 μm, and is further distributed to the right by the rightward diffusion portion 425c in one recess. The width of light is also 50 μm. Then, the light distributed in the front direction, the left direction, and the right direction by the respective recesses is collected by the number of the respective recesses to form an optical path of at least a predetermined width (for example, 50 μm×26=1300 μm). In this case, for example, the front diffusion portion 425b forming the one concave portion and the front diffusion portion 425b forming the concave portion to the right of the concave portion are the right diffusion portion 425c forming the one concave portion, Since it is separated from the leftward diffusion portion 425a forming the right adjacent concave portion by the lateral distance, the frontward diffusion portion 425b forming the first concave portion and the frontward direction forming the right adjacent concave portion. The respective optical paths in the front direction distributed from the diffusion section 425b are also separated by the lateral distance, but the light distributed from the right direction diffusion section 425c and the left direction diffusion section 425a and the front direction diffusion. Due to the diffusion action of the light distributed from the portion 425b itself, the light is comprehensively distributed to the inside of the front light guide plate 410.

Thus, when one rear lower LED 424 emits light, the light diffused by the rear lower diffusing lens 425 formed by a plurality of recesses causes each optical path of the diffused light and the optical path of the diffused light. A plurality of first decorative symbol groups 421 respectively formed (arranged) at positions corresponding to the periphery can be made to emit light of the same color, and the first decorative symbol group 421 in a range wider than the light emitting surface of one rear lower LED 424. Can be turned on. As a result, even with a small number of LEDs, a wide variety of effects can be executed, the effect of the rear light guide plate 420 can be enhanced, and the attention to the game can be increased. Further, by configuring the side lengths of the diffusion sections 425a to 425c so that the optical path widths of the light emitted from the diffusion sections 425a to 425c are the same, the light emitted from the diffusion sections 425a to 425c is The optical path widths are the same, and it is easy to set (recognize) the optical path of the light guided in the rear light guide plate 420, and at the setting stage, the first decorative symbol group 421 can easily grasp the symbol arrangement that can emit light accurately. It becomes possible to do.

Returning to FIG. 12, the description will be continued. In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, nine rear upper LEDs 422c and nine rear lower LEDs 424 are provided, and one rear upper LED 422c and one rear lower LED 424 are provided. It is arranged so that it overlaps in the vertical direction. Therefore, the light emitted from one rear upper LED 422c to the lower side in the front view (lower side in the drawing) through the front direction diffusion portion (not shown) of the rear upper diffusion lens 423 and one rear lower side. The light emitted from the LED 424 to the upper side (upper side of the drawing) in front view through the front direction diffusion portion 425b (see FIG. 14) of the rear-side lower diffusion lens 425 is configured to overlap (superpose). .. Further, the light emitted (diffused) from the rear upper LED 422c to the left or the right through the left diffusion portion or the right diffusion portion (both not shown) of the rear upper diffusion lens 423 is , Light radiated in each direction from the other rear upper LED 422c through each diffusion portion (not shown) of the rear upper diffusion lens 423, and the rear lower LED 424 to the rear lower diffusion lens. It is configured such that the light emitted in each direction via each of the diffusion units 425a, 425b, 425c of 425 overlaps (superimposes) at the portion where each optical path intersects.

Specifically, for example, the LEDs of the rear upper LED 422c are sequentially arranged from the right side in the order of “red”, “blue”, “green”, “red”, “blue”, “green”, “red”, “blue”. "," green "lights in a total of three colors, and the LEDs of the rear lower LED 424 are, in order from the right side, "red", "blue", "green", "red", "blue", " When the light is turned on in a total of three colors of "green", "red", "blue", and "green", from the respective diffusion lenses 423, 425 corresponding to the rightmost LED of the rear upper LED 422c and the rear lower LED 424. The "red" light is diffused in the optical path of a predetermined width, and from each of the diffusion lenses 423 and 425 corresponding to the second LED from the right (that is, the eighth from the left) of the rear upper LED 422c and the rear lower LED 424. Indicates that the “blue” light is diffused in the optical path of a predetermined width, and the respective diffusion lenses 423, 425 corresponding to the third LED from the right (that is, the seventh LED from the left) of the rear upper LED 422c and the rear lower LED 424. From which "green" light is diffused in an optical path of a predetermined width, and each diffusion lens 423 corresponding to the fourth LED from the right (that is, the sixth from the left) of the rear upper LED 422c and the rear lower LED 424. From 425, "red" light is diffused in an optical path having a predetermined width, and corresponds to the fifth LED from the right (that is, the fifth from the left; the center) of the rear upper LED 422c and the rear lower LED 424. The “blue” light is diffused from the diffusion lenses 423 and 425 in the optical path of a predetermined width and corresponds to the sixth LED from the right of the rear upper LED 422c and the rear lower LED 424 (that is, the fourth from the left). The “green” light is diffused from each of the diffusion lenses 423 and 425 in the optical path of a predetermined width, and corresponds to the seventh LED from the right of the rear upper LED 422c and the rear lower LED 424 (that is, the third from the left). The “red” light is diffused from the respective diffusion lenses 423 and 425 in the optical path of a predetermined width, and is emitted to the eighth LED from the right of the rear upper LED 422c and the rear lower LED 424 (that is, the second LED from the left). The “blue” light is diffused from the corresponding diffusion lenses 423 and 425 in the optical path of the predetermined width, and corresponds to the ninth LED from the right side of the rear upper LED 422c and the rear lower LED 424 (that is, the leftmost LED). The “green” light is diffused from the respective diffusing lenses 423 and 425 along the optical path of a predetermined width.

In this case, the first decorative symbol group 421 formed on the rear light guide plate 420 is a portion in which the optical path of the “red” light and the optical path of the “red” light are overlapped (“dark red”). , The part displayed only by the light path of "red" light ("thin red"), the part where the light path of "red" light and the light path of "blue" overlap ("purple") , "Red" light path and "Green" light path are overlapped ("Yellow"), "Red" light path, "Blue" light path and "Green" , The part where the light path of the light is overlapped ("white"), the part where the light path of the "blue" light and the light path of the "blue" light are overlapped ("dark blue"), The part displayed only by the light path of "blue" ("light blue"), the part where the light path of "blue" and the light path of "green" overlap ("blue-green") , The part where the light path of "green" and the light path of "green" overlap ("dark green"), the part that is displayed only by the light path of "green" ("light green") ), and each of the symbols of the first decorative symbol group 421 are displayed in a total of 10 display colors. Then, each of the symbols of the first decorative symbol group 421 is arranged in each overlapping portion.

Thereby, even with a lighting pattern with a small number of colors (for example, three colors), light is diffused by the diffusion lenses 423 and 425 arranged above and below, and the optical paths of the diffused lights overlap, The luminescent colors occurring in the non-overlapping portion and the overlapping portion are made different, and more colors than the color arrangement can be displayed. Therefore, by realizing a wide variety of display colors even with a small amount of light emission color, the light emission control of the LED can be further simplified, and the control load for the light emission control of the LED can be reduced. In particular, when not using a full-color LED but arranging a plurality of types of single-color light-emitting diodes and performing the above control, cost reduction can be realized by using a single-color light-emitting diode that is lower in cost than the full-color LED, The light emission control of the LED is further simplified, and the control load on the light emission control of the LED can be reduced.

Further, with respect to one symbol of the first decorative symbol group 421, it is arranged so as to overlap with the optical path of the light of the color of 1 in a predetermined portion, while overlapping with the optical path of the light of another color in the portion other than the predetermined portion. To place. That is, by forming one symbol of the first decorative symbol group 421 so as to fit within the size of a plurality of optical path widths, the emission color of each part is changed to one symbol and the one symbol is diversified. It can be expressed in various colors.

Here, with reference to FIG. 15 and FIG. 16, a lighting (effect) mode of the first decorative symbol group 421 of the rear light guide plate 420 will be described. FIG. 15 is a diagram showing a lighting mode of the first decorative symbol group 421 that is lighted and displayed on the rear light guide plate 420, and FIG. 15A is a rear view corresponding to a right side region of the rear light guide plate 420. It is the figure which showed typically the lighting mode of the 1st decorative symbol group 421 when the LED 422c for upper side and the LED 424 for lower rear are lighted, FIG.15(b) from the state of FIG.15(a), It is the figure which showed typically the lighting mode of the 1st decorative symbol group 421 when LED422c for rear upper parts and LED 424 for rear lower parts corresponding to the center area|region of the rear side light guide plate 420 were additionally lighted. 16: is the figure which showed the lighting mode of the 1st decorative symbol group 421 light-displayed by the rear light guide plate 420, FIG.16(a) shows the rear side guide from the state of FIG.15(b). It is the figure which showed typically the lighting mode of the 1st decorative symbol group 421 in case the LED 422c for rear upper part and LED 424 for rear lower part corresponding to the left side area of the light board 420 were additionally lighted, and FIG. 16) is a lighting mode of the first decorative symbol group 421 when the rear upper LED 422c and the rear lower LED 424 corresponding to the right side region of the rear light guide plate 420 are turned off from the state of FIG. 16A. FIG.

First, as shown in FIG. 15A, when the rear upper LED 422c provided so as to correspond to the right side region of the rear light guide plate 420 is sequentially lit and displayed from the right side, the right side of the rear light guide plate 420 is displayed. The light emitted from the rear upper LED 422c corresponding to the region is transmitted through the rear light guide plate 420 in three directions (that is, the lower right direction, the lower front direction, and the lower direction) according to the shape of the rear upper diffusion lens 423. It is diffused in the left direction) with a predetermined optical path width. Similarly, when the rear lower LED 424 provided so as to correspond to the right side region of the rear light guide plate 420 is sequentially illuminated and displayed from the right side, the rear lower side corresponding to the right side region of the rear light guide plate 420 is displayed. The light emitted from the LED 424 for light diffuses in each of the three directions (that is, the upper right direction, the upper front direction, and the upper left direction) inside the rear light guide plate 420 according to the shape of the rear lower diffusion lens 425. It is diffused with a predetermined optical path width according to the lens side width of the lenses 423 and 425.

Then, for example, in the right side region of the rear light guide plate 420, the right rear upper LED 422c is “red”, the center rear upper LED 422c is “blue”, and the left rear upper LED 422c is “green”. In addition to being lit, the right rear lower LED 424 is “red”, the center rear lower LED 424 is “blue”, and the left rear lower LED 424 is “green”. In this case, the part where the “red” light path and the “red” light path overlap (intersect. The same applies below) is “dark red”, and the part where the “red” light path and the “blue” light path overlap is “purple”. , "Red" light path and "green" light path overlap part is "yellow", "red" light path and "blue" light path and "green" light path overlap part is "white", The part where the “blue” light path and the “blue” light path overlap is “dark blue”, and the part where the “blue” light path and the “green” light path overlaps is “blue green” and the “green” light path. "Green" light path overlaps "dark green", "red" light path only part is "red", "blue" light path only part is "blue", "green" light path part only “Green” is displayed in a total of 10 colors, and each first decorative symbol group 421 is lit and displayed.

More specifically, among the plurality of fish patterns constituting the first decorative pattern group 421, each fish pattern is “dark red”, “purple”, “yellow”, “white”, “dark blue”, “blue”. Each of the 10 colors of "green", "dark green", "red", "blue", and "green" is lit and displayed.

The first decorative symbol group 421 is a small symbol formed within the range of the optical path width of 1 light, or a medium symbol formed within the range of the optical path width of 2 light, 3 There is a large pattern formed in a size that fits within the range of the optical path width of the above light. Then, with respect to the first decorative symbol group 421, a small pattern formed in a size within the range of the optical path width of the display color of 1 is lit and displayed in a single display color, and the optical path widths of a plurality of display colors are displayed. When each part of the middle symbol or the large symbol is located in the range, each of the middle symbol or the large symbol is lit and displayed in the light emission color of the overlapping optical path. Therefore, in the first decorative symbol group 421 composed of a plurality of symbols, each symbol is represented by a different color, or one symbol is represented by a plurality of colors to provide a colorful and varied effect. You can

In this case, the first decorative symbol groups 421 formed in the left side region and the central region of the rear light guide plate 420 include the rear upper LED 422c and the rear upper LED 422c provided so as to correspond to the right region of the rear light guide plate 420. Since the light from the rear-side lower LED 424 does not reach, it remains in the non-lighting state, and the state in which it is difficult to see from the front side of the pachinko machine 10 is maintained.

Next, as shown in FIG. 15B, from the state of FIG. 15A, the rear upper LED 422c provided so as to correspond to the right side region of the rear light guide plate 420 is further turned on, and When the rear upper LED 422c provided so as to correspond to the central region of the rear light guide plate 420 is sequentially lit and displayed from the right side, the rear upper LEDs corresponding to the central region and the right region of the rear light guide plate 420 are displayed. The light emitted from the LED 422c has a predetermined optical path width in three directions (that is, a lower right direction, a lower front direction, and a lower left direction) inside the rear light guide plate 420 according to the shape of the rear upper diffusion lens 423. Is spread in. Further, similarly, in a state in which the rear lower LED 424 provided so as to correspond to the right side region of the rear light guide plate 420 is lit, it is further provided so as to correspond to the central region of the rear light guide plate 420. When the rear lower LEDs 424 are sequentially illuminated and displayed from the right side, the light emitted from the rear lower LEDs 424 corresponding to the central region and the right region of the rear light guide plate 420 is shaped as the rear lower diffusion lens 425. Accordingly, the light is diffused inside the rear light guide plate 420 in three directions (that is, the upper right direction, the upper front direction, and the upper left direction) with a predetermined optical path width corresponding to the lens side width of each diffusion lens 423, 425. It

Then, for example, in each of the right side region and the central region of the rear light guide plate 420, the right rear upper LED 422c is “red”, the center rear upper LED 422c is “blue”, and the left rear upper LED 422c. Lights up in “green”, the right rear lower LED 424 is “red”, the center lower rear LED 424 is “blue”, and the left rear lower LED 424 is “green”. When lighting with a luminescent color, the part where the "red" light path and the "red" light path overlap is "dark red", and the part where the "red" light path and the "blue" light path overlap is "purple", The part where the "red" light path and the "green" light path overlap is "yellow", and the part where the "red" light path and the "blue" light path overlaps with the "green" light path is "white" and "blue" The part where the optical path of "" and the optical path of "blue" overlap is "dark blue", and the part where the optical path of "blue" overlaps with the optical path of "green" is "blue-green", the optical path of "green" and "green" The part that overlaps with the optical path of "" is "dark green", the part only with the "red" optical path is "red", the part with only the "blue" optical path is "blue", and only the part with the "green" optical path is " Each of the first decorative symbol groups 421 is lit and displayed in a total of 10 colors of "green".

More specifically, among the plurality of fish patterns constituting the first decorative pattern group 421, each fish pattern is “dark red”, “purple”, “yellow”, “white”, “dark blue”, “blue”. Each of the 10 colors of "green", "dark green", "red", "blue", and "green" is lit and displayed.

In this case, the first decorative symbol group 421 formed in the left side region of the rear light guide plate 420 includes the rear upper LED 422c and the rear upper LED 422c provided so as to correspond to the central region and the right side region of the rear light guide plate 420, respectively. Since the light from the rear-side lower LED 424 does not reach, it remains in the non-lighting state, and the state in which it is difficult to see from the front side of the pachinko machine 10 is maintained.

Next, as shown in FIG. 16A, from the state of FIG. 15B, the rear upper LED 422c provided so as to correspond to the right side region and the central region of the rear light guide plate 420 is turned on. Further, when the rear upper LED 422c provided so as to correspond to the left side area of the rear light guide plate 420 is sequentially lit and displayed from the right side, the left side area, the central area and the right side area of the rear light guide plate 420 ( That is, the light emitted from the rear upper LED 422c corresponding to the entire area is generated in three directions (that is, the lower right direction, the lower direction) inside the rear light guide plate 420 according to the shape of the rear upper diffusion lens 423. The light is diffused in a predetermined optical path width in the front direction and the lower left direction. Similarly, in a state where the rear lower LED 424 provided so as to correspond to the right side region and the central region of the rear light guide plate 420 is turned on, the rear lower light guide plate 420 is further corresponded to the left region of the rear light guide plate 420. When the provided rear lower LEDs 424 are sequentially lit from the right side and displayed, the light emitted from the rear lower LEDs 424 corresponding to the left side region, the central region and the right side region of the rear light guide plate 420 is rear lower side. Depending on the shape of the diffusing lens 425, the inside of the rear light guide plate 420 is set in three directions (that is, the upper right direction, the upper front direction, and the upper left direction) according to the lens side width of each of the diffusing lenses 423 and 425. Is diffused by the optical path width of.

Then, for example, in each of the entire regions of the rear light guide plate 420 (that is, the left region, the central region, and the right region), the right rear upper LED 422c is “red”, and the center rear upper LED 422c is “blue”. The left rear upper LED 422c is lit in "green", the right rear lower LED 424 is "red", the center rear lower LED 424 is "blue", and the left rear lower LED 424 is When lighting with a total of three emission colors of "green", the part where the "red" light path and the "red" light path overlap is the "dark red", "red" light path and "blue" light path. The part where "" overlaps is "purple", and the part where the "red" and "green" paths overlap is "yellow", the "red" path, the "blue" path and the "green" path overlap. The part to be filled is "white", the part where the "blue" optical path and the "blue" optical path overlap is "dark blue", and the part where the "blue" optical path and the "green" optical path overlap is "blue green" , "Green" light path and "Green" light path overlap part is "Dark green", "Red" light path only part is "Red", "Blue" light path only part is "Blue", " Only the portion of the optical path of "green" is "green", and the respective first decorative symbol group 421 is lit and displayed in a total of 10 colors.

More specifically, among the plurality of fish patterns constituting the first decorative pattern group 421, each fish pattern is “dark red”, “purple”, “yellow”, “white”, “dark blue”, “blue”. Each of the 10 colors of "green", "dark green", "red", "blue", and "green" is lit and displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 16B, from the state of FIG. 16A, the rear upper LED 422c provided so as to correspond to the left side region and the central region of the rear light guide plate 420 is turned on. When the rear upper LED 422c provided so as to correspond to the right area of the rear light guide plate 420 is sequentially turned off from the right side, the rear upper LED corresponding to the left area and the central area of the rear light guide plate 420 is formed. The light emitted from the LED 422c has a predetermined optical path width in three directions (that is, a lower right direction, a lower front direction, and a lower left direction) inside the rear light guide plate 420 according to the shape of the rear upper diffusion lens 423. Is spread in. Similarly, the rear lower LED 424 provided so as to correspond to the left side region and the central region of the rear light guide plate 420 is provided so as to correspond to the right side region of the rear light guide plate 420 in a state of being lit. When the rear lower LED 424 is sequentially turned off from the right side, the light emitted from the rear lower LED 424 corresponding to the left side region and the central region of the rear light guide plate 420 has the shape of the rear lower diffusion lens 425. Accordingly, the light is diffused inside the rear light guide plate 420 in three directions (that is, the upper right direction, the upper front direction, and the upper left direction) with a predetermined optical path width corresponding to the lens side width of each diffusion lens 423, 425. It

Then, for example, in each of the left region and the central region of the rear light guide plate 420, the right rear upper LED 422c is "red", the center rear upper LED 422c is "blue", and the left rear upper LED 422c. Lights up in “green”, the right rear lower LED 424 is “red”, the center lower rear LED 424 is “blue”, and the left rear lower LED 424 is “green”. When lighting with a luminescent color, the part where the "red" light path and the "red" light path overlap is "dark red", and the part where the "red" light path and the "blue" light path overlap is "purple", The part where the “red” light path and the “green” light path overlap is “yellow”, and the part where the “red” light path and the “blue” light path overlaps with the “green” light path is “white” and “blue”. The part where the optical path of "" and the optical path of "blue" overlap is "dark blue", and the part where the optical path of "blue" overlaps with the optical path of "green" is "blue-green", the optical path of "green" and "green" The part that overlaps with the optical path of "" is "dark green", the part only with "red" optical path is "red", the part with only "blue" optical path is "blue", and only the part with "green" optical path is " Each of the first decorative symbol groups 421 is lit and displayed in a total of 10 colors of "green".

More specifically, among the plurality of fish patterns constituting the first decorative pattern group 421, each fish pattern is “dark red”, “purple”, “yellow”, “white”, “dark blue”, “blue”. Each of the 10 colors of "green", "dark green", "red", "blue", and "green" is lit and displayed.

In this case, the first decorative pattern group 421 formed in the right side region of the rear light guide plate 420 includes the rear upper LED 422c and the rear upper LED 422c provided so as to correspond to the left side region and the central region of the rear light guide plate 420. Since the light from the rear-side lower LED 424 does not reach, it is in a non-lighting state, and it is difficult to visually recognize it from the front side of the pachinko machine 10.

In this way, even when the rear upper LED 422c and the rear lower LED 424 are controlled to emit light with a few emission colors, the rear side is overlapped by the light diffused by the diffusion lenses 423 and 425. The first decorative symbol group 421 formed on the light guide plate 420 can express the first decorative symbol group 421 with a lighting color which is equal to or higher than the above-mentioned emission color. Therefore, it is possible to perform colorful expression even with light emission control using a small number of light emission patterns. Therefore, while reducing the control load on the rear upper LED 422c and the rear lower LED 424, a variety of effects can be executed to play a game. The interest in can be improved.

In addition, among the rear upper LED 422c and the rear lower LED 424, which are arranged three each in the right area, the central area, and the left area of the rear light guide plate 420, the rear upper LED located on the rightmost side. The LED 422c and the rear lower LED 424, the rear upper LED 422c and the rear lower LED 424 located in the center, the rear upper LED 422c and the rear lower LED 424 located in the left side are sequentially turned on, and An effect as if the group of fishes, which are the one decorative pattern group 421, swim from the right side to the left side is executed.

Furthermore, the rear upper LED 422c and the rear lower LED 424 are on the right side so as to interlock with the lighting of the board surface first decorative symbol group 60a and the board surface second decorative symbol group 60b (see FIG. 3) of the base board 60 of the game board 13. By sequentially turning on the lights, the effect on the rear light guide plate 420 and the effect on the game board 13 board are integrally performed, and a powerful effect using the entire board of the game board 13 is provided to improve the enjoyment of the game. Can be planned.

Next, with reference to FIG. 17 and FIG. 18, the optical paths of light from the rear upper diffusion lens 423 and the rear lower diffusion lens 425 to the rear light guide plate 420 when the confirmation lamp 311 is lit and displayed. The light emitting mode of the first decorative symbol group 421 in the rear light guide plate 420 will be described.

FIG. 17: is the figure which showed the lighting mode of the 1st decorative symbol group 421 lighted and displayed on the back side light guide plate 420 when the confirmation lamp 311 is lighted, and FIG. The lighting mode of the first decorative symbol group 421 when the rear upper LED 422c and the rear lower LED 424 corresponding to the right side region of the rear light guide plate 420 are in a non-lighted state is schematically shown. FIG. 17B is a diagram in which a rear lower LED 424 corresponding to the central region of the rear light guide plate 420 is added from the state of FIG. 17A with the confirmation lamp 311 lit. It is a diagram schematically showing a lighting mode of the first decorative symbol group 421 when the rear upper LED 422c corresponding to the central region and the right region of the rear light guide plate 420 is turned off while being turned on. .. FIG. 18: is the figure which showed typically the lighting mode of the 1st decorative symbol group 421 light-displayed on the back side light guide plate 420 when the confirmation lamp 311 is lighted, and FIG. From the state of FIG. 17B, while the confirmation lamp 311 continues to be lit, and the rear lower LED 424 corresponding to the left side region of the rear light guide plate 420 is additionally lit, the rear conduction It is the figure which showed typically the lighting mode of the 1st decorative symbol group 421 when the LED422c for the rear upper parts corresponding to the left side area, the center area|region, and the right side area of the light board 420 is extinguished, and FIG. 18A is a state in which the confirmation lamp 311 is turned off from the state of FIG. 18A, and the rear upper LED 422c corresponding to the left side region and the central region of the rear light guide plate 420 is additionally turned on, while It is the figure which showed typically the lighting mode of the 1st decorative symbol group 421 in case the LED 422c for rear side upper and LED 424 for rear side lower corresponding to the right side area of the side light guide plate 420 were light-extinguished.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when a big hit occurs in the fluctuating effect, the confirmation lamp 311 is turned on at any timing of the fluctuating effect to clearly indicate to the player that the big hit occurs. . Further, in order to suggest the degree of reliability of the jackpot in the variation effect to the player, the first decorative symbol group 421 formed on the rear light guide plate 420 may be lit and displayed.

Here, the notification by turning on the confirmation lamp 311 is an effect that suggests that a jackpot will be generated, and is a so-called jackpot confirmation effect. On the other hand, the notification by lighting the first decorative symbol group 421 is an effect that suggests whether or not a jackpot will occur, and does not definitely indicate that a jackpot will occur. Therefore, as the effect importance of the game in the pachinko machine 10, the notification by the confirmation lamp 311 is positioned as a more important effect than the notification by the first decorative symbol group 421.

However, when the effect by the finalization lamp 311 is executed during execution of the effect in the first decorative symbol group 421, the effect by the finalizing lamp 311 which is more important as a game is obstructed by the effect of the first decorative symbol group 421 (effect duplication). There is a risk of low visibility, low recognition, etc.). Further, when the notification by the confirmation lamp 311 is executed, it is conceivable that the effect by the first decorative symbol group 421 is not executed, or that the notification by the confirmation lamp 311 is not executed while the first decorative symbol group 421 is being executed. However, there is a possibility that the effect will be restricted, the control load will increase, and the effect variation will decrease.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when the effect by the confirmation lamp 311 is executed (at the time of execution), the scale of the effect by the first decorative symbol group 421 is reduced and executed, which is important as a game. The effect of the confirmation lamp 311 is configured to stand out. Specifically, when the first decorative symbol group 421 is executed at the timing when the confirmation lamp 311 is turned on, the effect width in the first decorative symbol group 421 is reduced and executed. In particular, in the first decorative symbol group 421, the side where the finalizing lamp 311 is arranged (that is, the upper side of the rear light guide plate 420 when viewed from the front) is turned off or turned on slightly, thereby making the first decoration. The effect of the symbol group 421 and the effect of the confirming lamp 311 can be partitioned so as not to overlap or difficult, and the effect of the confirming lamp 311 can be more prominent. Therefore, it can be configured so as not to interfere with the effect of the confirmation lamp 311 which is important as a game. Further, it becomes easy to simultaneously execute the effect by the confirmation lamp 311 and the effect by the first decorative symbol group 421 without performing complicated control, and it is possible to increase the effect variation.

From here, a concrete effect mode by the confirmation lamp 311 and the first decorative symbol group 421 will be described. First, as shown in FIG. 17A, when the confirmation lamp 311 is not turned on (turned off), the rear upper LED 422c provided so as to correspond to the right side region of the rear light guide plate 420. Is sequentially lit from the right side, the light emitted from the rear upper LED 422c corresponding to the right side region of the rear light guide plate 420 corresponds to the shape of the rear upper diffusion lens 423. Is diffused in three directions (that is, the lower right direction, the lower front direction, and the lower left direction) with a predetermined optical path width. Similarly, when the rear lower LED 424 provided so as to correspond to the right side region of the rear light guide plate 420 is sequentially illuminated and displayed from the right side, the rear lower side corresponding to the right side region of the rear light guide plate 420 is displayed. The light emitted from the LED 424 for light diffuses in each of the three directions (that is, the upper right direction, the upper front direction, and the upper left direction) inside the rear light guide plate 420 according to the shape of the rear lower diffusion lens 425. It is diffused with a predetermined optical path width according to the lens side width of the lenses 423 and 425.

Then, for example, when the confirmation lamp 311 is turned off, the right rear upper LED 422c is "red", the center rear upper LED 422c is "blue", and the left rear area is in the right region of the rear light guide plate 420. The rear upper LED 422c is illuminated with "green", the right rear lower LED 424 is "red", the center rear lower LED 424 is "blue", and the left rear lower LED 424 is "green". In the case of lighting with a total of three emission colors, the "red" light path and the "red" light path overlap (intersect. The same applies below) is the "dark red", "red" light path and "blue". The part that overlaps the optical path of "purple", the part where the optical path of "red" and the optical path of "green" overlap is "yellow", the optical path of "red" and the path of "blue" and the optical path of "green" The part where and overlap is “white”, the part where the “blue” light path and the “blue” light path overlap is “dark blue”, and the part where the “blue” light path and the “green” light path overlap is “ The part where the light paths of "blue-green" and "green" and the light path of "green" overlap is "dark green", the part where only the light path of "red" is "red", and the part where only the light path of "blue" is "blue" , And “green” only in the part of the optical path of “green”, the respective first decorative symbol groups 421 are lit and displayed in a total of 10 colors.

In this case, the first decorative symbol groups 421 formed in the left side region and the central region of the rear light guide plate 420 include the rear upper LED 422c and the rear upper LED 422c provided so as to correspond to the right region of the rear light guide plate 420. Since the light from the rear-side lower LED 424 does not reach, it remains in the non-lighting state, and the state in which it is difficult to see from the front side of the pachinko machine 10 is maintained.

Next, as shown in FIG. 17B, when the confirmation lamp 311 is turned on from the state of FIG. 17A, the rear lower LED 424 provided so as to correspond to the right side region of the rear light guide plate 420. Is lit, the rear lower LED 424 provided so as to correspond to the central region of the rear light guide plate 420 is sequentially lit from the right side and displayed, and the central region and the right region of the rear light guide plate 420 are displayed. The light emitted from the rear lower LED 424 corresponding to the inside of the rear lower light diffusion plate 425 is guided through the inside of the rear light guide plate 420 in three directions (ie, upper right direction, upper front direction, and upper left side). Direction), with a predetermined optical path width according to the lens side width of the rear-side lower diffusion lens 425. On the other hand, when the confirmation lamp 311 is turned on from the state of FIG. 17A, the rear upper LED 422c provided so as to correspond to the right side region of the rear light guide plate 420 is switched from the turned-on state to the turned-off state, and The rear upper LED 422c provided so as to correspond to the central region of the side light guide plate 420 does not light up (is off).

That is, among the rear lower LEDs 424 arranged at a position far from the confirm lamp 311, only the rear lower LEDs 424 provided in the central region and the right region of the rear light guide plate 420 are turned on, and the confirm lamp The rear upper LED 422c arranged at a position close to 311 is configured to be turned off.

In this case, the first decorative symbol group 421 arranged at the position of each light (each optical path) emitted from the rear lower LED 424 and diffused by the rear lower diffuser lens 425 is lit and displayed, while the rear side When the upper LED 422c emits light, the first decorative symbol group 421 arranged at the position of each light (each optical path) that would be diffused by the rear upper diffusion lens 423 is not turned on (turned off).

Here, the first decorative symbol group 421 arranged in the front view upper portion of the rear light guide plate 420, which is closer to the confirmation lamp 311, is not provided at a position where the rear lower LED 424 emits light (provided). The number is small), and a large number is formed at the position where the rear upper LED 422c emits light.

On the other hand, the first decorative symbol group 421 arranged in the lower part of the rear light guide plate 420 when viewed from the front, which is far from the confirmation lamp 311, is provided at least at a position where it is illuminated by the light emitted from the rear lower LED 424 (provided). There are many). The first decorative symbol group 421 arranged in the lower part of the rear light guide plate 420 as viewed from the front, which is far from the confirmation lamp 311, may be provided at a position illuminated by the light emitted from the rear upper LED 422c. It may be provided at a position where it is not turned on by the light emitted from the side upper LED 422c.

Therefore, when the rear upper LED 422c is turned on, the first decorative symbol group 421 of the rear light guide plate 420 is illuminated by the first decorative symbol group 421 formed in the front view upper portion of the rear light guide plate 420. When the rear lower LED 424 is turned on, the first decorative symbol group 421 formed on the lower portion of the rear light guide plate 420 in front view can be turned on (easy to be displayed). ). On the other hand, in the first decorative symbol group 421 of the rear light guide plate 420, the first decorative symbol group 421 formed in the front view upper portion of the rear light guide plate 420 is the case where the rear lower LED 424 is turned on. Even if there is, it is not lit (difficult to illuminate), and if the rear upper LED 422c is off, it is not lit (difficult to illuminate.

With this configuration, depending on whether or not the rear upper LED 422c is turned on, it is possible to switch on or off the first decorative symbol group 421 in the front view upper portion of the rear light guide plate 420 that is in the vicinity of the confirmation lamp 311. it can. Then, when the confirmation lamp 311 is lit and displayed, even when the first decorative symbol group 421 is being executed, by turning off the rear upper LED 422c, the emission of the determination lamp 311 and the first decorative symbol group It is possible to execute an effect that does not interfere with the lighting of 421.

Then, for example, in each of the right side region and the central region of the rear light guide plate 420, the right rear lower LED 424 is “red”, the center rear lower LED 424 is “blue”, and the left rear lower LED 424. When the lights are emitted in a total of three emission colors of "green", the part where the "red" light path and the "blue" light path overlap is the "purple", "red" light path and "green" light path. The part where "" overlaps is the "yellow", the part where the "red" light path and the "blue" light path overlap the "green" light path, the part where "white", the "blue" light path overlaps the "green" light path There are a total of 7 parts: "blue green", "red" only for the red light path, "red" for only the "blue" light path, "blue" for only the "blue" light path, and "green" only for the "green" light path. Each first decorative symbol group 421 is lit and displayed in color.

In this case, the first decorative pattern group 421 formed on the left side region of the rear light guide plate 420 is from the rear lower LED 424 provided so as to correspond to the central region and the right region of the rear light guide plate 420. Since the light does not reach, it remains in a non-lighting state, and the state in which it is difficult to visually recognize from the front side of the pachinko machine 10 is maintained.

Next, as shown in FIG. 18A, when the confirmation lamp 311 continues to be lit from the state of FIG. 17B, it is provided so as to correspond to the central region and the right region of the rear light guide plate 420. When the rear lower LED 424 is turned on and the rear lower LED 424 provided so as to correspond to the left side region of the rear light guide plate 420 is sequentially lit and displayed from the right side, the rear light guide plate 420 is displayed. The light emitted from the rear lower LED 424 corresponding to the left side region, the central region, and the right side region (that is, the entire region) is generated inside the rear light guide plate 420 depending on the shape of the rear lower diffuser lens 425. Direction (that is, the upper right direction, the upper front direction, and the upper left direction) with a predetermined optical path width according to the lens side width of the rear lower diffusion lens 425. On the other hand, when the confirmation lamp 311 continues to be lit from the state of FIG. 17B, after being provided so as to correspond to the left side region, the center region and the right side region (that is, the entire region) of the rear light guide plate 420. The upper side LED 422c is not turned on (turned off).

That is, only the rear lower LED 424 arranged at a position far from the confirmation lamp 311 is turned on, and the rear upper LED 422c arranged near the confirmation lamp 311 is turned off.

In this case, as in FIG. 17B, the first decorative symbol group 421 arranged at the position of each light (each optical path) emitted from the rear lower LED 424 and diffused by the rear lower diffuser lens 425. While being lit and displayed, the first decorative symbol group 421 arranged at the position of each light (each optical path) that will be diffused by the rear upper diffusion lens 423 when the rear upper LED 422c emits light. Not turned on (lights off).

Then, for example, in each of the left side region, the center region, and the right side region of the rear light guide plate 420, the right rear lower LED 424 is “red”, the center rear lower LED 424 is “blue”, and the left rear side. When the lower LED 424 lights up with a total of three emission colors of "green", the portions where the "red" optical path and the "blue" optical path overlap are "purple", "red" optical path and "green". The part that overlaps the optical path of "yellow", the part where the optical path of "red" and the path of "blue" and the path of "green" overlap is "white", the path of "blue" and the path of "green" The part where and overlap is "blue-green", the part where only the optical path of "red" is "red", the part where only the optical path of "blue" is "blue", only the part of the optical path where "green" is "green", Each of the first decorative symbol groups 421 is lit and displayed in a total of 7 colors.

Next, as shown in FIG. 18B, when the confirmation lamp 311 is turned off from the state of FIG. 18A, the rear side provided corresponding to the left side region and the central region of the rear light guide plate 420. When the upper LED 422c is turned on and the rear upper LED 422c provided corresponding to the right side region of the rear light guide plate 420 is sequentially turned off from the right side, the left side region and the central region of the rear light guide plate 420. The light emitted from the rear upper LED 422c corresponding to the inside of the rear upper light diffusion plate 423 has three directions (that is, the lower right direction, the lower front direction, and the lower left side) depending on the shape of the rear upper diffusion lens 423. Direction) in a predetermined optical path width. Similarly, the rear lower LED 424 provided so as to correspond to the left side region and the central region of the rear light guide plate 420 is provided so as to correspond to the right side region of the rear light guide plate 420 in a state of being lit. When the rear lower LED 424 is sequentially turned off from the right side, the light emitted from the rear lower LED 424 corresponding to the left side region and the central region of the rear light guide plate 420 has the shape of the rear lower diffusion lens 425. Accordingly, the light is diffused inside the rear light guide plate 420 in three directions (that is, the upper right direction, the upper front direction, and the upper left direction) with a predetermined optical path width corresponding to the lens side width of each diffusion lens 423, 425. It

Then, for example, in each of the left region and the central region of the rear light guide plate 420, the right rear upper LED 422c is "red", the center rear upper LED 422c is "blue", and the left rear upper LED 422c. Lights up in “green”, the right rear lower LED 424 is “red”, the center lower rear LED 424 is “blue”, and the left rear lower LED 424 is “green”. When lighting with a luminescent color, the part where the "red" light path and the "red" light path overlap is "dark red", and the part where the "red" light path and the "blue" light path overlap is "purple", The part where the “red” light path and the “green” light path overlap is “yellow”, and the part where the “red” light path and the “blue” light path overlaps with the “green” light path is “white” and “blue”. The part where the optical path of "" and the optical path of "blue" overlap is "dark blue", and the part where the optical path of "blue" overlaps with the optical path of "green" is "blue-green", the optical path of "green" and "green" The part that overlaps with the optical path of "" is "dark green", the part only with "red" optical path is "red", the part with only "blue" optical path is "blue", and only the part with "green" optical path is " Each of the first decorative symbol groups 421 is lit and displayed in a total of 10 colors of "green".

In this case, the first decorative pattern group 421 formed in the right side region of the rear light guide plate 420 includes the rear upper LED 422c and the rear upper LED 422c provided so as to correspond to the left side region and the central region of the rear light guide plate 420. Since the light from the rear-side lower LED 424 does not reach, it is in a non-lighting state, and it is difficult to visually recognize it from the front side of the pachinko machine 10.

In this way, when the effect by the confirming lamp 311 is executed (at the time of execution), the scale of the effect by the first decorative symbol group 421 is reduced and executed, and the effect by the confirming lamp 311 which is important as a game is conspicuous. To configure. Specifically, when the first decorative symbol group 421 is executed at the timing when the confirmation lamp 311 is turned on, the effect width in the first decorative symbol group 421 is reduced and executed. In particular, in the first decorative symbol group 421, the side where the finalizing lamp 311 is arranged (that is, the upper side of the rear light guide plate 420 when viewed from the front) is turned off or turned on slightly, thereby making the first decoration. The effect of the symbol group 421 and the effect of the confirming lamp 311 can be partitioned so as not to overlap or difficult, and the effect of the confirming lamp 311 can be more prominent. Therefore, it can be configured so as not to interfere with the effect of the confirmation lamp 311 which is important as a game. Further, it becomes easy to simultaneously execute the effect by the confirmation lamp 311 and the effect by the first decorative symbol group 421 without performing complicated control, and it is possible to increase the effect variation.

Next, referring to FIG. 19 to FIG. 21, the front lower condenser lens 414d, the front right condenser lens 415d, and the front left condenser lens 416d (hereinafter referred to as “each condenser”) with respect to the front light guide plate 410 will be described. The light paths of the light from the lenses 414d, 415d, 416d") and the light emission of the second decorative symbol group 411, the third decorative symbol group 412, and the fourth decorative symbol group 413 that can be displayed by lighting on the front light guide plate 410. Aspects will be described. FIG. 19 shows a second decorative symbol group 411, a third decorative symbol 412 and a fourth decorative symbol group 413 which can be lit and displayed on the front light guide plate 410, a lower LED unit 414, a front right LED unit 415 and a front left LED. It is a schematic front view showing the relationship with the unit 416. FIG. 20 is a diagram schematically showing an optical path of light by the condenser lenses 414d, 415d, 416d. 21(a) is a diagram showing a concavo-convex shape forming the second decorative symbol group 411 of the front light guide plate 410 and a light direction in which the second decorative symbol group 411 can be lit and displayed, and FIG. ) Is a diagram showing a concavo-convex shape that forms the fourth decorative symbol group 413 of the front light guide plate 410 and the direction of light that can be lit and displayed in the fourth decorative symbol group 413.

As shown in FIG. 19, on the front light guide plate 410, a second decorative pattern group 411 as a cherry blossom blizzard pattern imitating a plurality of cherry blossom petals is formed in both left and right end regions excluding the central portion of the regular R-shaped portion, A third decorative pattern 412 as a sunfish pattern simulating a fish sunfish is formed in the central portion of the regular R-shaped portion, and a fourth decorative pattern group 413 as a bubble group pattern simulating a plurality of bubbles is a flat plate portion below. And formed in the entire area of the lower inverted R-shaped portion.

Further, when the front lower LED 414c provided below the front light guide plate 410 irradiates light to the lower end surface of the front lower condenser lens 414d arranged below the front light guide plate 410, The light is not diffused from the upper end surface of the front-side lower condenser lens 414d and goes straight (upward) as it is. Further, by the front right LED 415c provided on the right side of the flat plate portion below the front light guide plate 410, the front right condensing light disposed on the right side of the flat plate portion below the front light guide plate 410 is provided. When the right end face of the lens 415d is irradiated with light, the light is not diffused from the left end face of the front right focusing lens 415d and proceeds straight (to the left) as it is. In addition, by the front left LED 416c provided on the left side of the flat plate portion below the front light guide plate 410, the front left condensing light disposed on the left side of the flat plate portion below the front light guide plate 410. When the left end face of the lens 416d is irradiated with light, the light is not diffused from the right end face of the front-side left-side condenser lens 416d and goes straight (to the right) as it is.

The front right LED 415c and the front left LED 416c are arranged such that one front right LED 415c and one front left LED 416c are paired in the left-right direction (horizontal direction). ing.

In the front light guide plate 410, each of the decorative symbol groups 411, 412, and 413 is arranged in the regular R-shaped portion, or the lower flat plate portion and the lower inverted R-shaped portion. No decorative symbol groups 411, 412, 413 are arranged at the switching point (region) with the regular R-shaped portion. This is because when a decorative pattern for light guide display is arranged at a switching point (area) between the lower inverted R-shaped portion and the normal R-shaped portion, the portion arranged in the regular R-shaped portion and the lower inverted R-shaped portion are arranged. It is difficult for light reflected (guided) inside the front light guide plate 410 to properly reach the open portion, and the appearance may be unintended depending on the position of the player's eyes. Therefore, at the switching point (region) between the lower inverted R-shaped portion and the normal R-shaped portion, by configuring not to arrange any of the decorative symbol groups 411, 412, 413, the expression of the symbol for light guide display can be expressed. Appropriate and discreet production can be performed.

The arrangement of the decorative patterns at the switching points of the front light guide plate 410 (hereinafter, referred to as “switching points P”) will be described in more detail with reference to FIGS. 52, 53, and 54. FIG. 52 is a schematic lateral cross-sectional view of the front light guide plate 410 showing a light guide mode of light guided in the front light guide plate 410 when the front lower LED 414c is turned on, and FIG. FIG. 4 is a diagram schematically showing a light guide mode in the front light guide plate 410 of light incident on the front light guide plate 410 from the front lower LED 414c at an upper angle of 45 degrees (45 degrees in the front direction of the pachinko machine 10). 52(b) schematically illustrates a light guide mode in the front light guide plate 410 of light incident on the front light guide plate 410 from the front lower LED 414c at a downward angle of 45 degrees (45 degrees in the back direction of the pachinko machine 10). 52C is a diagram shown in FIG. 52C, in which the light incident on the front light guide plate 410 from the front lower LED 414c in the front direction (vertically upward direction of the pachinko machine 10) is guided in the front light guide plate 410. It is the figure which showed typically. Further, FIG. 53 is a diagram showing the position of the switching point P in the front view of the front light guide plate 410 shown in FIG. Further, FIG. 54 schematically illustrates a light guide mode in the front light guide plate 410 of light incident on the front light guide plate 410 from the front right LED 415c at an upward angle of 45 degrees (45 degrees in the front direction of the pachinko machine 10). It is the perspective view shown. Note that, for convenience of description, the fourth decorative symbol group 413 described in FIG. 52 includes light incident in the lateral direction from the front right LED 415c and the front left LED 416c, as well as upward light from the front lower LED 414c. A case will be described in which it is configured to emit light by the light incident on. Further, in FIG. 54, the case where the fourth decorative symbol group 413 can be turned on by the light incident from the front right LED 415c in the left direction will be described, and the light incident from the front left LED 416c in the right direction will be described. Although not described, the light incident from the front left LED 416c to the right has the same action and effect as the light incident from the front right LED 415c to the left.

First, as shown in FIG. 52, the front light guide plate 410 is formed continuously from a flat plate portion (hereinafter, may be referred to as a “front lower flat plate portion 410a”) on the lower side in front view and the front lower flat plate portion 410a. Lower reverse R-shaped portion (hereinafter, may be referred to as “front lower reverse R-shaped portion 410b”) and a normal R-shaped portion continuously formed from the front lower reverse R-shaped portion 410b (hereinafter, “ It may be referred to as "front side normal R-shaped portion 410c") and an upper inverted R-shaped portion continuously formed from the front side regular R-shaped portion 410c (hereinafter, may be referred to as "front side upper inverted R-shaped portion"). ) And an upper flat plate portion (hereinafter sometimes referred to as “front upper flat plate portion”) continuously formed from the front upper inverted R-shaped portion.

Further, a fourth decorative pattern group 413 is formed on the back surface side (lower side in FIG. 52) of the front lower flat plate portion 410a and the front lower inverted R-shaped portion 410b, and the second decoration is formed on the back surface side of the front regular R-shaped portion 410c. A symbol group 411 and a third decorative symbol 412 are formed. When the front lower LED 414c is turned on, the second decorative symbol group 411 or the third decorative symbol 412 becomes visible from the front direction of the pachinko machine 10 (upper side in FIG. 52), and the front right LED 415c. When the front left LED 416c is turned on, the fourth decorative symbol group 413 is configured to be visible from the front direction of the pachinko machine 10.

Here, as shown in FIGS. 52A to 52C, an upward angle of 45 degrees (45 degrees in the front direction of the pachinko machine 10) from the front lower LED 414c with respect to the front light guide plate 410. )), a downward angle of 45 degrees (45 degrees in the back direction of the pachinko machine 10. See FIG. 52(b)), and a front direction (vertically above the pachinko machine 10. See FIG. 52(c)). Each light incident on the front light guide plate 410 is repeatedly reflected while being guided in the front lower flat plate portion 410a, but a fourth decorative pattern group provided on the back surface side of the front lower flat plate portion 410a. As described above, the 413 is configured such that it does not reflect or is difficult to reflect the light from the front lower LED 414c in the front direction of the pachinko machine (upper side in FIG. 52). The fourth decorative symbol group 413 is configured to be difficult or not visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10 depending on the light emitted (guided).

Then, the light incident on the front light guide plate 410 in the upper angle of 45 degrees, the lower angle of 45 degrees, and the front direction is repeatedly reflected in the front lower flat plate portion 410a, or directly, the front lower reverse R. The shape portion 410b is reached. In this case, the light that collides with the surface of the front-side lower inverted R-shaped portion 410b on the back surface side of the pachinko machine 10 is smaller than the reflection angle (for example, 45 degrees) when colliding with the front-side lower flat plate portion 410a (for example, 40 degrees). ) Is reflected in the front light guide plate 410. On the other hand, the light colliding with the surface of the front lower inverted R-shaped portion 410b on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 is larger than the reflection angle (for example, 45 degrees) when colliding with the front lower flat plate portion 410a (for example, 50 degrees). Is reflected in the front light guide plate 410.

Then, the light guided in the front lower reverse R-shaped portion 410b then reaches the front normal R-shaped portion 410c which is R-shaped in the direction opposite to the front lower inverted R-shaped portion 410b. In this case, the light that collides with the surface of the front regular R-shaped portion 410c on the back surface side of the pachinko machine 10 is larger than the reflection angle (for example, 40 degrees) when colliding with the front lower inverted R-shaped portion 410b (for example, 50 degrees). Is reflected in the front light guide plate 410. On the other hand, the light that collides with the surface of the front regular R-shaped portion 410c on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 has an angle (for example, 40 degrees) smaller than the reflection angle (for example, 50 degrees) when colliding with the front lower inverted R-shaped portion 410b. ) Is reflected in the front light guide plate 410.

That is, the light guided to the front lower reverse R-shaped portion 410b and the front normal R-shaped portion 410c through the front lower flat plate portion 410a is a switching point between the front lower inverted R-shaped portion 410b and the front normal R-shaped portion 410c. (Hereinafter, the switching point between the front lower R-shaped portion 410b and the front normal R-shaped portion 410c may be referred to as a "switching point P".) At the front surface of the front light guide plate 410, a collision occurs. While the amount of light that is emitted is dense, the amount of light that strikes the surface of the front light guide plate 410 on the back surface side is sparse (coarse).

Here, as shown in FIGS. 52(a) to 52(c) and FIG. 53, at the switching point (part) between the front lower flat plate portion 410a and the front lower inverted R-shaped portion 410b, the fourth decorative symbol group. 413 is arranged, on the other hand, at the switching point P between the front lower reverse R-shaped portion 410b and the front normal R-shaped portion 410c, neither of the decorative patterns 411, 412, 413 is arranged.

As described above, this is because the amount of light that collides is sparse (coarse) on the rear surface of the front light guide plate 410 at the switching point P between the front lower inverted R-shaped portion 410b and the front normal R-shaped portion 410c. Even if the decorative symbol groups 411, 412, 413 are arranged at the point P, the decorative symbol groups 411, 412, 413 do not emit light properly, and the decorative symbol group 411 is viewed from the front side of the pachinko machine 10. , 412, 413 may not be visually recognized at an appropriate timing. Further, each of the decorative symbol groups 411, 412, 413 is configured to be turned on (visible) only by light from a predetermined direction, while the decorative symbol group 411, 412, 413 is set at the point P. If arranged, there is a possibility that each decorative pattern group 411, 412, 413 can be visually recognized from the front side of the pachinko machine 10 by irradiation with light in a direction that would otherwise not be lit. There may be discrepancies in the performance contents. Therefore, by not arranging any of the decorative symbol groups 411, 412, 413 at the switching point P between the front side lower inverted R-shaped portion 410b and the front side normal R-shaped portion 410c, each of the decorative symbol groups 411, 412, 413 is appropriate. It is possible to make it visually recognizable from the front side of the pachinko machine 10 at various timings, and it is possible to make it difficult for the discrepancy in the effect contents to occur, thereby providing an appropriate game.

Next, as shown in FIG. 54, the light emitted from the front right LED 415c passes through the front right condensing lens 415d and goes upward from the front right end surface of the front lower flat plate portion 410a of the front light guide plate 410. When the light is incident at an angle of 45 degrees (45 degrees in the front direction of the pachinko machine 10, see FIG. 54 ), the front side surface and the back side surface of the front light guide plate 410 are in contact with each other while the light is guided in the front lower flat plate portion 410a. The light is guided straight to the left when viewed from the front and reaches the left side of the front light guide plate 410. Then, as described above, the fourth decorative symbol group 413 formed on the back side surface of the front light guide plate 410 is configured to reflect the light from the front right LED 415c in the front direction of the pachinko machine 10. Therefore, the fourth decorative symbol group 413 is configured to be accurately visible from the front direction of the pachinko machine 10 by the light emitted (guided) from the front right LED 415c.

On the other hand, provisionally, an LED and a condenser lens are provided on the right side of the front lower inverted R-shaped portion 410b of the front light guide plate 410 in a front view, and an upper angle of 45 degrees from the front end right side end surface of the front lower inverted R-shaped portion 410b ( When light is incident at a frontal direction of the pachinko machine of 45 degrees (see FIG. 54 ), when the light guided in the front light guide plate 410 collides with the front side surface of the front lower reverse R-shaped portion 410b, Depending on the R shape, the light is not reflected straight to the left in front view, but is reflected to the upper side in front view of the front light guide plate 410. Then, when the reflected light subsequently collides with the back side surface of the front lower inverted R-shaped portion 410b, it is not reflected straight to the left in a front view according to the R shape, and is further above the front light guide plate 410. Is reflected to. Then, the light is guided to the left side of the front light guide plate as viewed from the front while repeating the reflection a plurality of times. In such a case, if a decorative pattern is arranged near the switching point P between the front lower R-shaped portion 410b and the front normal R-shaped portion 410c of the front light guide plate 410, a portion where light is not guided may occur. However, it is difficult to accurately guide light to the decorative pattern, and it becomes difficult to realize a desired light emitting mode. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the LEDs and the condenser lens are not arranged from the front side downward inverted R-shaped portion 410b in the front view lateral direction, and the front side lower inverted R-shaped portion 410b is viewed from the front side in the lateral direction. The decorative patterns 411, 412, and 413 can be appropriately lit and displayed by not irradiating the decorative pattern and arranging the decorative pattern near the switching point P.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the decorative patterns 411, 412, 413 may not be arranged at the switching point (part) between the front side normal R shape part and the front side upper inverted R shape part. Good. With this configuration, the same effects as the above effects can be obtained.

Further, each decorative symbol group 411 is also at a switching point (section) between the front lower flat plate section 410a and the front lower reverse R-shaped section 410b, or a switching point (section) between the front upper reverse R-shaped section and the front upper flat plate section. , 412, 413 may not be arranged. At the switching point (section) between the front lower flat plate section 410a and the front lower reverse R-shaped section 410b, or at the switching point (section) between the front upper reverse R-shaped section and the front upper flat plate section, the back surface of the front light guide plate 410 Since the amount of light that collides with the side surface may be sparse (rough), each decorative pattern group 411, 412, 413 is also at a switching point (section) between the front upper inverted R shape portion and the front upper flat plate portion. By configuring so as not to arrange, the same effect as the above effect can be obtained.

Here, with reference to FIG. 20, a light condensing mode by the front lower condensing lens 414d, the front right condensing lens 415d, and the front left condensing lens 416d will be described. As shown in FIG. 20, in each of the condenser lenses 414d, 415d, 416d, one of the first end faces (the lower end face in FIG. 20) is formed in a straight line shape (or almost a straight line shape). The other second end surface (upper end surface in FIG. 20) formed on the opposite side of the one end surface is formed in a plurality of semicircular convex shapes in which semicircular shapes are continuous.

Like the rear light guide plate 420, the front light guide plate 410 in the first embodiment is made of acrylic resin (PMMA), and when the refractive index of the acrylic resin is 1.49 to 1.53, each condensing light is condensed. The light incident from the first end faces of the lenses 414d, 415d, and 416d is emitted from the second end face in a straight (or almost straight; upward direction in FIG. 20) direction. Accordingly, the light incident from the first end surface of each of the condenser lenses 414d, 415d, and 416d is condensed in a state of being condensed without being diffusedly emitted from the second end surface side formed in the plurality of semicircular convex shapes. Since it can be emitted in a direction, when the LEDs 414c, 415c, 416c corresponding to the decorative patterns 411, 412, 413 which are desired to be illuminated are illuminated, the other decorative symbols 411, 412, 413 are not illuminated, and the ornament to be illuminated is displayed. Only the symbols 411, 412, 413 can be appropriately lighted and displayed. In particular, when trying to turn on the fourth decorative symbol group 413 having the lowest jackpot reliability, the second decorative symbol group 411 formed on the same front light guide plate 410 and having a higher jackpot reliability than the fourth decorative symbol group 413. Or, if the third decorative pattern 412 is turned on, there is a possibility that the effect content may be inconsistent and the game performance according to the game specification may not be realized. Therefore, at least by configuring not to diffuse the light for the fourth decorative symbol group 413 having a low jackpot expectation by the condenser lenses 415d and 416d, only the fourth decorative symbol group 413 is displayed at an appropriate timing. It is possible to prevent the discrepancy in the production contents from occurring.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the condenser lenses 414d, 415d, 416d are provided for the decorative pattern groups 411, 412, 413 of the front light guide plate 410, and the condensed light is emitted. Is configured as follows. On the other hand, for a decorative pattern group with a high jackpot expectation, that is, for the third decorative pattern 412 and the like, a diffusion lens used for lighting the first decorative pattern group 421 is adopted instead of the condenser lens. It may be configured to do so. Since the third decorative design 412 is an effect having a higher jackpot expectation than at least the fourth decorative design group 413, and is located on the front side of the drum display device 81 in which the player pays attention during the game, It is necessary to comprehensively irradiate light on the three decorative symbols 412 with a diffusion lens so that the player can clearly recognize the third decorative symbol 412. In addition, when the fourth decorative symbol group 413 is turned on, a production discrepancy occurs when the third decorative symbol 412 having a higher jackpot expectation than the fourth decorative symbol group 413 is turned on, but the third decorative symbol is generated. When the 412 is lit up, even if the fourth decorative symbol group 413 whose jackpot expectation degree is lower than the third decorative symbol 412 is lit up, the player is more likely to execute the third ornamental symbol 412 whose jackpot expectation degree is higher. Paying attention to, and not paying so much attention to the execution of the fourth decorative symbol group 413 having a low jackpot expectation, it is difficult for the production discrepancy to occur. Therefore, by adopting the condensing lenses 415d and 416d for the fourth decorative symbol group 413 having a low jackpot expectation and using the diffusion lens for the third decorative symbol 412 having a high jackpot expectation, the front side It is possible to enhance the effect of the light guide plate 410 and increase the degree of attention to the game.

Here, with reference to FIG. 21, the decorative symbols 411, 412, and 413 that are lit and displayed in the direction of the light guided in the front light guide plate 410 will be described. In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the fourth decorative symbol group 413 is configured to illuminate and display the light in the lateral direction (left-right direction) of the front light guide plate 410 when viewed from the front, and the front light guide plate 410 is viewed from the front. The second decorative symbol group 411 and the third decorative symbol 412 are configured to light up and display with respect to light in the vertical direction (vertical direction). In addition, since the third decorative pattern 412 that can be lit and displayed with respect to the light in the vertical direction in the front view is lit and displayed by the light in the same direction as the second decorative pattern group 411, it is related to the third decorative pattern 412 for convenience of description. Description will be omitted, and only the second decorative symbol group 411 will be described.

First, as shown in FIG. 21( a ), the first foam pattern forming the fourth decorative pattern group 413 has vertical grooves (concavities and convexities) in the vertical direction in front view with respect to the front light guide plate 410. A plurality of bubbles are continuously formed along the line so that one bubble pattern can be expressed. With this configuration, the light guided in the front light guide plate 410 in the lateral direction (horizontal direction) when viewed from the front (for example, the light emitted from the front left LED 416c) collides with the vertical groove. By reflecting (emitting) to the front side of the front light guide plate 410, the bubble pattern is visibly emitted from the front side of the front light guide plate 410 (that is, the front side of the pachinko machine 10). On the other hand, the light guided in the front light guide plate 410 in the vertical direction (vertical direction) when viewed from the front (for example, the light emitted from the front lower LED 414c) does not interfere with the vertical groove. The light is not reflected or is hardly reflected to the front side of the light guide plate 410, and is not visible or difficult to be seen as a bubble pattern from the front side of the front light guide plate 410.

Next, as shown in FIG. 21B, one cherry blossom pattern forming the second decorative symbol group 411 has lateral grooves (concavities and convexities) in the lateral direction in front view with respect to the front light guide plate 410 in the pattern of the cherry blossom pattern. By forming a plurality of consecutively along, it is possible to express one cherry blossom pattern. With this configuration, the light guided in the front light guide plate 410 in the vertical direction (vertical direction) when viewed from the front (for example, the light emitted from the front lower LED 414c) collides with the lateral groove, and the front side By reflecting (emitting) to the front side of the light guide plate 410, the cherry blossom pattern is visibly emitted from the front side of the front light guide plate 410 (that is, the front side of the pachinko machine 10). On the other hand, the light guided in the lateral direction (horizontal direction) in the front light guide plate 410 in the front view (for example, the light emitted from the front left LED 416c) is front side even if the light collides with the lateral groove. The light is not reflected or is hardly reflected to the front side of the light guide plate 410, and is not visible or difficult to be seen as a bubble pattern from the front side of the front light guide plate 410.

In this way, in one front light guide plate 410, the decorative patterns 411, 412, and 413 that can be lit and displayed are different with respect to the direction (incident direction) of the light guided in the front light guide plate 410. Thus, a plurality of decorative patterns 411, 412, 413 can be individually lighted and displayed on the one front light guide plate 410, and the expressive power of one light guide plate can be improved and the degree of attention to the game can be increased. it can.

Further, by using the entire one front light guide plate 410 to perform the effect by each of the decorative symbol groups 411, 412, 413 on the front side and the periphery of the drum display device 81, it is enlarged from the arrangement part of the drum display device 81. The effect can be executed within the specified range. Therefore, it is possible to perform a powerful effect by the drum display device 81 and the front light guide plate 410, and improve the interest of the game.

In addition, in the front light guide plate 410, in the same portion (for example, a portion on the front side of the drum display device 81 (that is, the front regular R-shaped portion)), two decorative symbols (for example, the third decorative symbol 412 and the fourth decorative symbol 412). A decorative pattern group 413) is formed to be expressible, and one decorative pattern (for example, the fourth decorative pattern group 413) is turned on for light incident on the front light guide plate 410 from the lateral direction, and the front light guide plate is illuminated. The other decorative pattern (for example, the third decorative pattern 412) may be configured to be turned on with respect to light that is vertically incident on 410. However, in this way, in order to configure different decorative patterns to be lit according to light from a plurality of directions in one part, the unevenness in the part must be configured in a complicated shape. It is necessary to pay attention to the fact that the design becomes difficult as compared with the case of expressing the decorative pattern of 1 on the part.

Next, with reference to FIG. 22 and FIG. 23, a lighting (effect) mode of the second decorative symbol group 411, the third decorative symbol group 412, and the fourth decorative symbol group 413 of the front light guide plate 410 will be described. 22: is the figure which showed the lighting mode of the 2nd decorative design group 411, the 3rd decorative design 412, and the 4th decorative design group 413 light-displayed by the front light guide plate 410, FIG.22(a) is, It is the figure which showed typically the lighting mode of the 4th decorative design group 413 when the LED415c for front right and the LED416c for front left are lighted with respect to the front light guide plate 410, and FIG.22(b) is front. It is the figure which showed typically the lighting mode of the 2nd decorative symbol group 411 when the LED414c for front side lower parts on the right end side and the left end side with respect to the light guide plate 410 lighted. FIG. 23: is the figure which showed the lighting mode of the 2nd decorative symbol group 411, the 3rd decorative symbol 412, and the 4th decorative symbol group 413 light-displayed by the front side light guide plate 410, and FIG. It is the figure which showed typically the lighting mode of the 3rd decorative design 412 at the time of lighting the LED414c for front side lower parts of the center part except the right end and the left end with respect to the front side light guide plate, FIG.23(b) is a front side. It is the figure which showed typically the lighting mode of the 2nd decorative design group 411 and the 3rd decorative design 412 when all the LED 414c for lower front side is lighted with respect to the light guide plate 410.

First, as shown in FIG. 22A, when the front right LED 415c located on the right side of the lower flat plate portion of the front light guide plate 410 is lit and displayed in "light blue", the front right LED 415c emits light. The obtained light is condensed by the front right condenser lens 415d, and straightens the flat plate portion below the front light guide plate 410 in the left direction with an optical path width equivalent to the vertical width of the front right condenser lens 415d. Is irradiated. Further, when the front left LED 416c located on the left side of the flat plate portion below the front light guide plate 410 is lit and displayed in “light blue”, the light emitted from the front left LED 416c is collected by the front left LED 416c. The light is focused by the optical lens 416d, and the flat plate portion below the front light guide plate 410 is illuminated straight to the right with an optical path width in a range equivalent to the vertical width of the front left-side focusing lens 416d.

In this case, the light emitted straight to the left and right directions of the flat plate portion below the front light guide plate 410 by the front right condenser lens 415d and the front left condenser lens 416d is below the front light guide plate 410. Colliding with the vertical groove of the fourth decorative symbol group 413 formed in the flat plate portion and the lower inverted R-shaped portion, and the light in the lateral direction is emitted to the front side of the front light guide plate 410, and thus the front light guide plate 410. On the front side of, the fourth decorative symbol group 413 is lit and displayed so as to be visible in “light blue”. At this time, the light condensed by the condenser lenses 415d and 416d does not reach the second decorative symbol group 411 and the third decorative symbol 412 formed on the regular R-shaped portion of the front light guide plate 410. On the front side of the front light guide plate 410, the second decorative symbol group 411 and the third decorative symbol 412 are invisible or difficult to see.

More specifically, the light incident from the side surface of the lower flat plate portion of the front light guide plate 410 by the front right condensing lens 415d and the front left condensing lens 416d goes straight down the lower flat plate portion in the left-right direction. The light is guided, and slightly diffuses upward in the front view in the lower flat plate portion to reach the lower inverted R-shaped portion of the front light guide plate 410, while the normal R-shaped portion, the upper inverted R-shaped portion, and It does not reach or is hard to reach the upper flat plate part. As a result, the light guided into the front light guide plate 410 by the front right condensing lens 415d and the front left condensing lens 416d causes the player's eyes on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 (for example, a drum display). Only the fourth decorative symbol group 413 arranged in the flat plate portion below the front light guide plate 410 and the lower inverted R-shaped portion from the horizontal position (where the device 81 is arranged) is visibly illuminated and displayed, and the normal R-shaped The second decorative symbol group 411 and the third decorative symbol group 412 arranged in the part are invisible or difficult to see from the player's eyes on the front side of the pachinko machine 10.

The front right LED 415c and the front left LED 416c are sequentially lit and displayed from the lower side to the upper side, so that the fourth decorative symbol group 413 emits light in such a manner as to float from below the front light guide plate 410 to above. You may control.

Next, as shown in FIG. 22B, when the front lower LEDs 414c located at the right end and the left end of the front lower LEDs 414c provided below the front light guide plate 410 are lit and displayed in “pink”, The light emitted from the front lower LED 414c is condensed by the one semicircular portion at the right end portion and the left end portion of the front lower condensing lens 414d, respectively, and has a width equal to that of the one semicircular portion. The flat plate portion below the front light guide plate 410, the lower inverted R-shaped portion, the normal R-shaped portion, the upper inverted R-shaped portion, and the upper flat plate portion of the front light guide plate 410 are irradiated straight upward with an optical path width in the range.

In this case, the front lower light condensing lens 414d irradiates the lower flat plate portion, the lower inverted R-shaped portion, the normal R-shaped portion, the upper inverted R-shaped portion, and the upper flat plate portion of the front light guide plate 410 in a straight upward direction. The light collides with the lateral groove of the second decorative pattern group 411 formed in the regular R-shaped portion of the front light guide plate 410, and the light in the vertical direction is emitted to the front side of the front light guide plate 410, whereby the front guide On the front side of the light plate 410, the second decorative symbol group 411 is lit and displayed in a "pink" state so that it can be visually recognized. At this time, when the light emitted from the front lower LED 414c located at the right end and the left end is condensed by the front lower condensing lens 414d, the condensed light reaches the third decorative pattern 412. On the front side of the front light guide plate 410, the third decorative pattern 412 is invisible or difficult to see.

More specifically, the light incident from the lower side surface of the lower flat plate portion of the front light guide plate 410 and the lower side surface of the left side portion of the front lower light condensing lens 414d has a lower flat plate portion, a lower inverted R-shaped portion, and a positive portion. The R-shaped portion, the upper inverted R-shaped portion, and the upper flat plate portion are guided straight upward, and the lower flat plate portion, the lower inverted R-shaped portion, the normal R-shaped portion, the upper inverted R-shaped portion, and the upper Although it slightly diffuses in the horizontal direction in the flat plate portion when viewed from the front, the positions of the second decorative symbol group 411 and the third decorative symbol 412 arranged in the regular R-shaped portion are provided at a predetermined distance from each other. , The arrangement position of the third decorative pattern 412 in the regular R shape portion is not reached. Thereby, by the light guided into the front light guide plate 410 by the front lower condenser lens 414d, only the second decorative pattern group 411 arranged on the right side portion and the left side portion of the regular R-shaped portion of the front light guide plate 410. Is visibly illuminated, and the third decorative pattern 412 arranged in the central portion of the regular R-shaped portion becomes invisible or difficult to see.

Further, a lower flat plate portion which is an optical path of light which is straightly upwardly directed to the lower flat plate portion, the lower inverted R-shaped portion, the normal R-shaped portion, the upper inverted R-shaped portion, and the upper flat plate portion of the front light guide plate 410. A fourth decorative symbol group 413 formed of a vertical groove is formed in the lower inverted R-shaped portion. The fourth decorative symbol group 413 of the vertical groove is vertically arranged from the front lower LED 414c at the right end and the left end. It is configured in such a manner that the light emitted in the direction is not emitted or is difficult to be emitted to the front side of the front light guide plate 410. For this reason, the fourth decorative symbol group 413 is not lit and displayed on the front side of the front light guide plate 410, and is in a state where it cannot be visually recognized or is difficult to visually recognize.

Next, as shown in FIG. 23A, when the front lower LED 414c, which is located at a position other than the right end and the left end, among the front lower LEDs 414c provided below the front light guide plate 410 is lit and displayed in “green”. The light emitted from the front lower LED 414c is collected by the semi-circular portions other than the right end portion and the left end portion of the front lower condensing lens 414d and emits light in a half corresponding to the front lower LED 414c. Irradiate the lower flat plate portion, the lower inverted R-shaped portion, the normal R-shaped portion, the upper inverted R-shaped portion and the upper flat plate portion of the front light guide plate 410 straightly upward with an optical path width equivalent to the lateral width of the circular shaped portion. To be done.

In this case, the front lower light condensing lens 414d irradiates the lower flat plate portion, the lower inverted R-shaped portion, the normal R-shaped portion, the upper inverted R-shaped portion, and the upper flat plate portion of the front light guide plate 410 in a straight upward direction. The light collides with the lateral groove of the third decorative pattern 412 formed in the regular R-shaped portion of the front light guide plate 410, and the light in the vertical direction is emitted to the front side of the front light guide plate 410, whereby the front light guide plate On the front side of 410, the third decorative symbol 412 is lit and displayed so that it can be visually recognized as “green”. At this time, when the light emitted from the front lower LED 414c located at a place other than the right end and the left end is condensed by the front lower condensing lens 414d, the light is condensed to the second decorative symbol group 411. Light does not reach, and the second decorative symbol group 411 is invisible or difficult to see on the front side of the front light guide plate 410.

More specifically, the light incident from the lower side surface of the central portion of the lower flat plate portion of the front light guide plate 410 by the front lower condensing lens 414d includes the lower flat plate portion, the lower inverted R-shaped portion, and the normal R-shaped portion. In the lower flat plate portion, the lower reverse R-shaped portion, the normal R-shaped portion, the upper inverted R-shaped portion, and the upper flat plate portion, the light is guided straight upward in the upper inverted R-shaped portion and the upper flat-plate portion. Although it slightly diffuses in the left-right direction when viewed from the front, the position of the second decorative symbol group 411 and the position of the third decorative symbol 412, which are arranged in the regular R-shaped portion, are provided at a predetermined distance from each other. It does not reach the arrangement position of the second decorative symbol group 411 in the shape portion. Thereby, only the third decorative pattern 412 arranged in the central portion of the regular R-shaped portion of the front light guide plate 410 can be visually recognized by the light guided into the front light guide plate 410 by the front lower condenser lens 414d. The second decorative symbol group 411, which is lit and displayed and arranged on the right side portion and the left side portion of the regular R-shaped portion, becomes invisible or difficult to see.

In addition, a lower flat plate portion which is an optical path of light that is irradiated straight upward from the lower flat plate portion, the lower inverted R-shaped portion, the normal R-shaped portion, the upper inverted R-shaped portion, and the upper flat plate portion of the front light guide plate 410. A fourth decorative symbol group 413 formed of a vertical groove is formed in the lower inverted R-shaped portion. The fourth decorative symbol group 413 of the vertical groove is formed from the front lower LED 414c other than the right end and the left end. It is configured in such a manner that light emitted in the vertical direction is not emitted to the front side of the front light guide plate 410 or is difficult to emit. For this reason, the fourth decorative symbol group 413 is not lit and displayed on the front side of the front light guide plate 410, and is in a state where it cannot be visually recognized or is difficult to visually recognize.

Next, as shown in FIG. 23B, when the front lower LED 414c located at the right end and the left end of the front lower LED 414c provided below the front light guide plate 410 is lit and displayed in “pink”, The light emitted from the front lower LED 414c is condensed by the one semicircular portion at the right end portion and the left end portion of the front lower condensing lens 414d, respectively, and has a width equal to that of the one semicircular portion. The flat plate portion below the front light guide plate 410, the lower inverted R-shaped portion, the normal R-shaped portion, the upper inverted R-shaped portion, and the upper flat plate portion of the front light guide plate 410 are irradiated straight upward with an optical path width in the range. Further, among the front lower LEDs 414c provided below the front light guide plate 410, when the front lower LEDs 414c located at positions other than the right end and the left end are lit and displayed in "green", the light is emitted from the front lower LEDs 414c. The light is collected by the semi-circular portions other than the right end portion and the left end portion of the front lower condensing lens 414d, respectively, and has a width equivalent to that of the semi-circular portion corresponding to the front lower LED 414c that is emitting light. The plate portion below the front light guide plate 410, the lower inverted R-shaped portion, the normal R-shaped portion, the upper inverted R-shaped portion, and the upper flat plate portion of the front light guide plate 410 are irradiated straight upward in the optical path width.

In this case, the front lower light condensing lens 414d irradiates the lower flat plate portion, the lower inverted R-shaped portion, the normal R-shaped portion, the upper inverted R-shaped portion, and the upper flat plate portion of the front light guide plate 410 in a straight upward direction. The light collides with the lateral groove of the second decorative pattern group 411 formed in the regular R-shaped portion of the front light guide plate 410, and the light in the vertical direction is emitted to the front side of the front light guide plate 410, whereby the front guide On the front side of the light plate 410, the second decorative symbol group 411 is “pink” and the third decorative symbol 412 is “green” so as to be visually lit and displayed.

More specifically, the “green” light incident from the lower side surface of the central portion of the lower flat plate portion of the front light guide plate 410 by the front lower condensing lens 414d is the lower flat plate portion, the lower inverted R-shaped portion, The normal R-shaped portion, the upper inverted R-shaped portion, and the upper flat plate portion are guided straight upward, and the lower flat plate portion, the lower inverted R-shaped portion, the normal R-shaped portion, the upper inverted R-shaped portion, and the upper portion. Although it slightly diffuses in the horizontal direction in the flat plate portion in the front view, the positions of the second decorative symbol group 411 and the third decorative symbol 412 arranged in the regular R-shaped portion are provided at a predetermined distance. Therefore, it does not reach the arrangement position of the second decorative pattern 411 in the regular R shape portion. Further, the “pink” light incident from the lower side surface of the lower flat plate portion of the front light guide plate 410 and the lower side surface of the left side portion of the front lower light condensing lens 414d is the lower flat plate portion, the lower inverted R-shaped portion, The normal R-shaped portion, the upper inverted R-shaped portion, and the upper flat plate portion are guided straight upward, and the lower flat plate portion, the lower inverted R-shaped portion, the normal R-shaped portion, the upper inverted R-shaped portion, and the upper portion. Although it slightly diffuses in the horizontal direction in the flat plate portion in the front view, the positions of the second decorative symbol group 411 and the third decorative symbol 412 arranged in the regular R-shaped portion are provided at a predetermined distance. Therefore, it does not reach the arrangement position of the third decorative pattern 412 in the regular R shape portion. Thus, when different front decorative patterns 411 and 412 arranged in the regular R-shaped portion of the front light guide plate 410 are turned on by the light guided into the front light guide plate 410 by the front lower condenser lens 414d, it is different. Even if light is guided to each of the decorative patterns 411 and 412 in the lighting color, the lights can be lit in individual display colors without the lights being mixed with each other.

On the other hand, a lower flat plate portion which is an optical path of light which is straight upward from the lower flat plate portion, the lower inverted R-shaped portion, the normal R-shaped portion, the upper inverted R-shaped portion and the upper flat plate portion of the front light guide plate 410. A fourth decorative pattern group 413 formed of vertical grooves is formed in the lower inverted R-shaped portion, and the fourth decorative pattern group 413 of the vertical grooves is vertically irradiated from the front lower LED 414c. The front light guide plate 410 does not emit light to the front side or is difficult to emit. For this reason, the fourth decorative symbol group 413 is not lit and displayed on the front side of the front light guide plate 410, and is in a state where it cannot be visually recognized or is difficult to visually recognize.

In this way, when a plurality of decorative patterns 411, 412, 413 are formed on the one front light guide plate 410, the light emitted from each of the LEDs 414c, 415c, 416c is condensed and emitted, and the decorative pattern 411, It is configured such that it can be visually recognized from the front side of the pachinko machine 10 depending on the incident direction of light for each of 412 and 413. With this configuration, the decorative patterns 411, 412, 413 desired to be lighted and displayed according to the game result are turned on at appropriate timing, and the decorative patterns 411, 412, 413 that are not turned on and displayed are not reliably turned on. With the above configuration, it is possible to execute the production utilizing the entire front surface of the front light guide plate 410 while preventing the production discrepancy, enrich the variety of the production, and increase the attention to the game.

In addition, a fourth decorative symbol group 413 having the lowest jackpot expectation is formed in the portion where the optical path of the vertical light and the optical path of the horizontal light overlap (that is, the lower flat plate portion and the lower inverted R-shaped portion). The fourth decorative pattern group 413 is configured to be visible only by the light in the lateral direction. In addition, the jackpot expectation degree is higher than that of the fourth decorative symbol group 413 in the portion where the optical path of the vertical light and the optical path of the horizontal light do not overlap (that is, the normal R-shaped portion and the upper inverted R-shaped portion). The decorative design group 411 and the third decorative design 412 are formed, and the second decorative design group 411 and the third decorative design 412 are configured to be visible only by light in the vertical direction. Here, even if the fourth decorative pattern group 413 can be visually recognized from the front side of the pachinko machine 10 by the light in the vertical direction, the light in the vertical direction is a big hit from the fourth decorative pattern group 413. It is turned on when the second decorative pattern group 411 or the third decorative pattern 412 having a high degree of expectation is lit and displayed, and when the second decorative pattern group 411 or the third decorative pattern 412 is lit and displayed, Even when the four decorative symbol group 413 is displayed in a lighted state, the discrepancy in the effect is small. Therefore, the fourth decorative pattern group 413 is formed at an unintended timing by forming the fourth decorative pattern group 413 with the lowest jackpot expectation degree in the portion where the optical path of the vertical light and the optical path of the horizontal light overlap. Even if it becomes visible from the front side of the pachinko machine 10, it is possible to minimize the discrepancies in the production and provide the player with a comfortable game.

Next, with reference to FIG. 24 and FIG. 25, an effect mode by the front light guide plate 410, the rear light guide plate 420, and the drum display device 81 of the first embodiment will be described. 24: is the figure which showed the production|generation performed by the front side light guide plate 410, the back side light guide plate 420, and the drum display device 81, FIG.24(a) is the 1st decorative symbol group 421, the 2nd decorative symbol group 411. FIG. 24B is a diagram schematically showing the non-lighted state of the third decorative symbol group 412 and the fourth decorative symbol group 413, and FIG. 24B shows the first decorative symbol while the fourth decorative symbol group 413 is in the illuminated state. It is the figure which showed typically the non-lighting state of the symbol group 421, the 2nd decorative symbol group 411, and the 3rd decorative symbol 412. FIG. 25: is the figure which showed the production|generation performed with the front side light guide plate 410, the back side light guide plate 420, and the drum display device 81, and FIG.25(a) shows the 2nd decorative symbol group 411 and the 3rd decorative symbol 412. It is the figure which showed the non-lighting state of the 1st decorative design group 421 and the 4th decorative design group 413 while it is a lighting state, and FIG.25(b) is a 1st decorative design group 421 in the lighting state. On the other hand, it is a diagram schematically showing a non-lighted state of the second decorative symbol group 411, the third decorative symbol group 412 and the fourth decorative symbol group 413. 24 and 25, the LEDs 414c, 415c, 416c, 422c, 424 and the condenser lenses 414d, 415d, 416d are omitted.

First, as shown in FIG. 24A, the second decorative symbol group 411, the third decorative symbol group 412 and the fourth decorative symbol group 413 of the front light guide plate 410, and the first decorative symbol group of the rear light guide plate 420. The LEDs 414c, 415c, 416c, 422c, 424 corresponding to 421 are in a non-illuminated (unlit) state. Therefore, the first decorative symbol group 421, the second decorative symbol group 411, the third decorative symbol 412 and the fourth decorative symbol group 413 are invisible or difficult to see from the front side of the pachinko machine 10.

Further, in the state of FIG. 24A, the third decorative design 412 of the front light guide plate 410 and the first decorative design group 421 of the rear light guide plate 420 are arranged on the back side of the position. The displayed content (stop mode) of the drum display device 81 is visible. Specifically, on the left reel LR, "7" is displayed in the upper row, "blank symbol" is displayed in the middle row, and "8" is displayed in the lower row, and the middle reel CR and the right reel RR are respectively displayed with "7" in the upper row. The state in which the "blank pattern" is displayed in the middle row and "8" is stopped and displayed in the lower row can be visually recognized from the front side of the pachinko machine 10.

In the first embodiment, the jackpot expectation is the lowest in the portion of the front light guide plate 410 where the optical path of the vertical light and the optical path of the horizontal light overlap (that is, the lower flat plate portion and the lower inverted R-shaped portion). The fourth decorative symbol group 413 is formed, and the fourth decorative symbol group 413 is configured to be visible only by the light in the lateral direction. In addition, in the front light guide plate 410, the jackpot expectation is the fourth decorative symbol group 413 in the portion where the optical path of the vertical light and the optical path of the horizontal light do not overlap (that is, the regular R-shaped portion and the upper inverted R-shaped portion). Higher second decorative symbol group 411 and third decorative symbol group 412 are formed, and the second decorative symbol group 411 and the third decorative symbol 412 are configured to be visible only by light in the vertical direction. Further, the rear light guide plate 420 is provided on the rear side of the front light guide plate 410 where the vertical light path and the horizontal light path do not overlap (that is, the normal R-shaped portion and the upper inverted R-shaped portion). While forming the first decorative symbol group 421, the drum display device 81 for executing the variable effect of the third symbol which is the main effect of the game is arranged. In this way, in the portion where the optical path of the light in the vertical direction and the optical path of the light in the horizontal direction in the front light guide plate 410 do not overlap (that is, the normal R-shaped portion and the upper inverted R-shaped portion), the main effect of the game is By arranging the drum display device 81 that executes the variation effect of the three symbols and by being configured to be able to display the first decorative symbol group 421, which is the effect with the highest jackpot expectation in the variation effect, the variation effect that is important as a game It is possible to enhance the effect of the front light guide plate 410, the rear light guide plate 420, and the drum display device 81, respectively, while increasing the attention to the game, while not hindering the display result and the effect of high jackpot expectation. it can.

Next, as shown in FIG. 24(b), while the front right LED 415c and the front left LED 416c corresponding to the fourth decorative symbol group 413 of the front light guide plate 410 are both lit in "light blue", The second decorative symbol group 411 and the third decorative symbol group 412 of the front light guide plate 410, and the LEDs 414c, 422c, 424 corresponding to the first decorative symbol group 421 of the rear light guide plate 420 are in a non-illuminated (unlit) state. ing. Therefore, while the fourth decorative symbol group 413 is visible from the front side of the pachinko machine 10, the first decorative symbol group 421, the second decorative symbol group 411 and the third decorative symbol 412 are the pachinko machine 10. Is invisible or difficult to see from the front side.

Further, in the state of FIG. 24B, similar to FIG. 24A, the position where the third decorative pattern 412 of the front light guide plate 410 and the first decorative pattern group 421 of the rear light guide plate 420 are formed. The display content (stop mode) of the drum display device 81 arranged on the back side of the is visible. Specifically, on the left reel LR, "7" is displayed in the upper row, "blank symbol" is displayed in the middle row, and "8" is displayed in the lower row, and the middle reel CR and the right reel RR are respectively displayed with "7" in the upper row. The state in which the "blank pattern" is displayed in the middle row and "8" is stopped and displayed in the lower row can be visually recognized from the front side of the pachinko machine 10.

Therefore, at the time of performing the variation effect of the third symbol in the drum display device 81 arranged on the back side of the front light guide plate 410 and the rear light guide plate 420, the flat plate portion below the front light guide plate 410 and the lower reverse R-shaped portion. By performing the effect by the fourth decorative symbol group 413 formed in the, by performing an integrated and three-dimensional powerful effect by the drum display device 81 and the front light guide plate 410, the effect of each device 81,410 Each effect can be enhanced, and the degree of attention to the game can be enhanced.

Next, as shown in FIG. 25( a ), the front lower light LEDs 414 c at the right end and the left end corresponding to the second decorative symbol group 411 of the front light guide plate 410 are in a state of being turned on in “pink”, and the front light guide plate 410. While the front lower LED 414c other than the right end and the left end corresponding to the third decorative pattern 412 is in a state of being turned on in “green”, the fourth decorative pattern group 413 of the front light guide plate 410 and the rear light guide plate 420 The LEDs 415c, 416c, 422c, 424 corresponding to the first decorative symbol group 421 are in a non-lighted (unlit) state. Therefore, the second decorative symbol group 411 and the third decorative symbol group 412 are visible from the front side of the pachinko machine 10, while the first decorative symbol group 421 and the fourth decorative symbol group 413 are the pachinko machine 10. Is invisible or difficult to see from the front side.

Further, in the state of FIG. 25A, similar to FIGS. 24A and 24B, the third decorative pattern 412 of the front light guide plate 410 and the first decorative pattern group 421 of the rear light guide plate 420. The display content (stop mode) of the drum display device 81 arranged on the back side of the position where the mark is formed is visible. Specifically, on the left reel LR, "7" is displayed in the upper row, "blank symbol" is displayed in the middle row, and "8" is displayed in the lower row, and the middle reel CR and the right reel RR are respectively displayed with "7" in the upper row. The state in which the "blank pattern" is displayed in the middle row and "8" is stopped and displayed in the lower row can be visually recognized from the front side of the pachinko machine 10.

Therefore, when performing the variation effect of the third symbol in the drum display device 81 arranged on the back side of the front light guide plate 410 and the rear light guide plate 420, the second formed on the regular R shape portion of the front light guide plate 410. By performing the effect with the decorative symbol group 411 and the third decorative symbol 412, the drum display device 81 and the front light guide plate 410 perform an integrated and three-dimensional powerful effect, thereby producing each device 81, 410. Each effect can be enhanced, and the degree of attention to the game can be enhanced.

Next, as shown in FIG. 25B, the rear upper LED 422c and the rear lower LED 424 corresponding to the first decorative symbol group 421 of the rear light guide plate 420 are “red”, “blue”, and “green”. On the other hand, each LED 414c, 415c, 416c corresponding to the second decorative symbol group 411, the third decorative symbol group 412 and the fourth decorative symbol group 413 of the front light guide plate 410 is in a non-lighted (unlit) state. Is becoming Therefore, while the first decorative symbol group 421 is in a state visible from the front side of the pachinko machine 10, the second decorative symbol group 411, the third decorative symbol 412 and the fourth decorative symbol group 413 are the pachinko machine 10. Is invisible or difficult to see from the front side.

Further, in the state of FIG. 25B, similar to FIGS. 24A, 24B, and 25A, the third decorative pattern 412 of the front light guide plate 410 and the rear light guide plate 420. The display content (stop mode) of the drum display device 81 arranged on the back side of the position where the first decorative symbol group 421 is formed is in a visible state. Specifically, on the left reel LR, "7" is displayed in the upper row, "blank symbol" is displayed in the middle row, and "8" is displayed in the lower row, and the middle reel CR and the right reel RR are respectively displayed with "7" in the upper row. The state in which the "blank pattern" is displayed in the middle row and "8" is stopped and displayed in the lower row can be visually recognized from the front side of the pachinko machine 10.

Therefore, at the time of performing the variation effect of the third symbol in the drum display device 81 arranged on the back side of the front light guide plate 410 and the rear light guide plate 420, the first R shape portion of the rear light guide plate 420 is formed. By performing the effect with the first decorative symbol group 421, the effect of each of the devices 81 and 420 is enhanced by performing the integrated and three-dimensional powerful effect with the drum display device 81 and the rear light guide plate 420. , It is possible to raise the degree of attention to the game.

In this way, a variety of effects can be produced by compositely executing the variable effect of the third symbol in the drum display device 81 and the effect in the light guide unit 400 having the front light guide plate 410 and the rear light guide plate 420. By executing, the effect of the drum display device 81, the front light guide plate 410, and the rear light guide plate 420 can be increased, and the degree of attention to the game can be increased.

More specifically, in the front side (the front side of the pachinko machine 10) of the drum display device 81 that executes the variation effect of the third symbol and its peripheral region (the front view upper, lower, left, and right regions of the display region of the drum display device 81), By performing the production related to the variation production (for example, the jackpot expectation), the production area of the variation production of the third symbol is expanded two-dimensionally and three-dimensionally, and the variation of the powerful third symbol is performed. The production can be executed.

In addition, when a plurality of patterns of the effect indicating the jackpot expectation in the fluctuating effect are configured to be executable, the jackpot expectation is low (ie, the second decorative symbol group 411, the third decorative symbol group 412, and the fourth decorative symbol group 413). Are collectively provided on one light guide plate (that is, the front light guide plate 410), while a production with a high jackpot expectation degree (that is, the first decorative pattern group 421) is provided on another light guide plate (that is, the rear light guide plate 420). By providing in the case, when performing an effect with a low jackpot expectation, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of noise or effects that have a high jackpot expectation degree due to the viewing angle or the like being lit and displayed to the player, so that there is no discrepancy. Can be executed.

More specifically, provisionally, an effect with a high jackpot expectation (that is, the first decorative symbol group 421) and an effect with a low jackpot expectation (that is, the second decorative symbol group 411, the third decorative symbol 412, and the fourth ornament) When the pattern group 413) is provided on the same light guide plate, when trying to turn on a production with a low jackpot expectation level, if the visual recognition position with respect to the light guide plate is different depending on the player's height and posture, the visual confirmation Depending on the angle, the effect lighting with a low jackpot expectation may appear as if the effect with a high jackpot expectation is lit. When such an event occurs, the player expects the jackpot to be one in which an effect with a high jackpot expectation is executed, even though the jackpot expectation of the variable effect of the third symbol is low, Since the big hit does not occur in the fluctuating effect, there is a risk that the effect which is originally high in the big hit expectation is erroneously recognized as the low big hit expectation.

Therefore, in the case of configuring a plurality of patterns of the effect indicating the jackpot expectation in the fluctuating effect so that the jackpot expectation is low (ie, the second decorative symbol group 411, the third decorative symbol group 412, and the fourth decorative symbol group 413) Are collectively provided on one light guide plate (that is, the front light guide plate 410), while a production with a high jackpot expectation degree (that is, the first decorative pattern group 421) is provided on another light guide plate (that is, the rear light guide plate 420). By providing in, it is possible to prevent the misidentification due to noise and the visible position depending on the player's height or posture when performing an effect with a low jackpot expectation, and to provide the player with the effect as designed. it can.

Further, in the case where a plurality of light guide plates 410 and 420 are used to perform a plurality of patterns of a jackpot expectation degree in a fluctuating effect, one light guide plate 410 (that is, the front light guide plate 410) has a condenser lens 414d, By utilizing 415d and 416d, a plurality of types of effects (that is, the second decorative symbol group 411, the third decorative symbol group 412, and the fourth decorative symbol group 413) are individually configured to be executable, and other guidance is provided. By adopting the diffusion lenses 423 and 425 in the light plate (that is, the rear light guide plate 420), one effect (that is, the first decorative pattern group 421) can be executed in various expressions. By configuring in this way, it is possible to execute the effects more than the number of the plurality of light guide plates 410, 420, enrich the variations of the effects, and increase the attention to the game.

Next, with reference to FIG. 26, an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. FIG. 26 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10, and is a block diagram mainly showing an electrical configuration of the main controller 110.

The main controller 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer which is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 that stores various control programs executed by the MPU 201 and fixed value data, and a memory that temporarily stores various data when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. In addition to a certain RAM 203, various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission/reception circuit are built in.

The power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input to the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 when the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, and the power failure signal SG1 is input to the MPU 201. Then, the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 32) as the power failure process is immediately executed.

An input/output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. In the input/output port 205, the payout control device 111, the voice lamp control device 113, the special symbol display device 37, the ordinary symbol display device 83, the ordinary symbol holding lamp 84, the front side with the lower side of the opening/closing plate of the special winning opening 65a as an axis. Various solenoids 209 such as a special winning opening solenoid (not shown) for driving to open and close and a normal electric power solenoid for driving the normal electric power officer 64c are connected to the MPU 201, and the MPU 201 connects them via the input/output port 205. Sends various commands and control signals to the.

Note that various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device by the data transmission/reception circuit in order to instruct the sub control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113 to operate. Such a command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device only in one direction.

In the main controller 110, a jackpot lottery for each special symbol, a dynamic display setting in the special symbol display device 37, a variation effect setting in the drum display device 81, a lottery for the display result of the variable display in the normal symbol display device 83, The main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as setting the jackpot probability of each special symbol is executed. The RAM 203 is provided with a counter buffer 203c that stores various counters for controlling these processes.

In addition, the ROM 202 stores at least a big hit random number table 202a, a big hit type table 202b, a pending number table 202c, a stop pattern table 202d, and a fluctuation pattern table 202e. Main controller 110 executes the above-mentioned main control by various counters stored in RAM 203 and various tables stored in ROM 202.

Here, with reference to FIG. 27, a counter and the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 of the first embodiment will be described. These counters and the like, in order to perform a jackpot lottery, a dynamic display setting of the special symbol display device 37, a variation effect setting of the drum display device 81, a lottery of the display result of the variable display on the normal symbol display device 83, and the like, It is used by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110. Further, in the description of the various counters, various tables stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110 will also be described with reference to FIGS. 28 to 32.

In the first embodiment, the jackpot lottery, the dynamic display of the special symbol display device 37, and the variation effect of the drum display device 81 are set to the jackpot random number counter C1 used in the jackpot lottery and the jackpot symbol. The jackpot type counter C2 used for selecting the stop type, the stop pattern selection counter C3 used for selecting the effect mode of the variation effect, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 used for setting the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1, The fluctuation type counter CS1 used for fluctuation pattern selection is used.

Each counter is updated, for example, at an interval of 4 milliseconds, which is the execution interval of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 40), and some counters are updated irregularly in the main process (see FIG. 39). Then, the updated value is appropriately stored in the counter buffer 203c set in a predetermined area of the RAM 203. Although details will be described later, the RAM 203 has a first holding ball storage area 203d including four holding areas (first holding first to fourth areas) for the first special symbol, and four holdings for the second special symbol. A second holding ball storage area 203e including areas (second holding first to fourth areas) is provided. Each value of the big hit random number counter C1, the big hit random number counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the fluctuation type counter CS1 is stored in the first reserved ball storage area 203d at the timing of entering the first starting opening 64a. To be done. In addition, in the second reserved ball storage area 203e, the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the variation type counter CS1 are synchronized with the timing of entering the second starting opening 64b. Stored respectively.

Here, with reference to FIG. 28A, the details of the jackpot random number table 202a corresponding to each special symbol in the first embodiment will be described. FIG. 28(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the jackpot random number table 202a commonly used in the jackpot lottery in the first special symbol and the second special symbol stored in the ROM 202.

Big hit random number table 202a of the first embodiment, for each set value, for the low probability state used in the case of the low probability state of the special symbol whose game state is the "normal game state" or the "time reduction state", respectively And, the game state is divided into two types, one for the high probability state used in the case of "probability variation state" which is a high probability state of the special symbol having a higher probability of being a big hit than the low probability state of the special symbol.

The number of big hit random numbers included in each of the low probability state and the high probability state is set differently for each set value. In addition, the increase in the number of big hit random number values required to shift from the low probability state to the high probability state is configured to be compensated from the number of lost random number values corresponding to the loss. In this way, by changing the number of jackpot random number values according to the gaming state, the probability of a jackpot is changed between the low-probability state and the high-probability state.

As shown in FIG. 28A, in the jackpot random number table 202a of the first embodiment, when the setting value is "1", the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 which becomes a jackpot in the low probability state in the jackpot random number table 202a (jackpot) The number of random number values is 50, and the value "0 to 49" is defined (set) in the jackpot random number table 202a. That is, the jackpot probability in the low probability state of each special symbol of the setting value "1" (that is, "normal gaming state" and "time reduction state") is 50/10000=0.5/100 (ie 0.5 %) is set.

On the other hand, when the setting value is "1", the number of random number values (big hit random number values) that are big hits in the high probability state in the big hit random number table 202a is 500, and the value "0 to 499" is the big hit random number. It is defined (set) in the table 202a. In other words, the jackpot probability in the high probability state of each special symbol of the setting value "1" (that is, "probability fluctuation state") is 500/10000 = 5/100 (that is, 5%), and the high probability state of the special symbol Is set so that the player can easily win 10 times from the low probability state.

Therefore, when the setting value is "1", the number of random number values (miss random number values) that are lost in the low probability state in the jackpot random number table 202a is 9950, which is the remaining number other than the jackpot random number value. ~9999" is defined (set) in the jackpot random number table 202a. Further, the number of random number values that are lost in the high probability state (missed random number value) is the remaining 9500 other than the jackpot random number value, and the value “500 to 9999” is defined in the jackpot random number table 202a ( Has been set). That is, the loss probability in the low probability state of each special symbol of the setting value "1" (that is, "normal game state" and "time reduction state") is 9950/10000=99.5/100 (that is, 99.5). %), the probability of loss in the high probability state of each special symbol (ie, “probability variation state”) is set to be 9500/10000=95/100 (ie, 95%) There is.

Next, when the setting value is "2", the number of jackpot random number counter C1 values (jackpot random number values) that are jackpots in the low probability state in the jackpot random number table 202a is 52, and the values "0 to 51" are It is defined (set) in the jackpot random number table 202a. That is, the jackpot probability in the low probability state of each special symbol of the setting value "2" (that is, "normal game state" and "time reduction state"), 52/10000 = 0.52/100 (that is, 0.52 %) is set.

On the other hand, when the set value is "2", the number of random number values (big hit random number values) that are big hits in the high probability state in the big hit random number table 202a is 520, and the value "0 to 519" is the big hit random number. It is defined (set) in the table 202a. That is, the high probability state of each special symbol of the setting value "2" (ie, "probability fluctuation state"), the jackpot probability is 520/10000 = 5.2/100 (ie 5.2%), and the special symbol The high-probability state of is set so as to be 10 times more likely to be hit than the low-probability state.

Therefore, when the setting value is “2”, the number of random number values (miss random number values) that are lost in the low probability state in the jackpot random number table 202a is 9948, which is the remaining number other than the jackpot random number value, and the value is “52”. ~9999" is defined (set) in the jackpot random number table 202a. Further, the number of random number values that are lost in the high probability state (missed random number value) is the remaining 9480 numbers other than the jackpot random number value, and the value "520-9999" is defined in the jackpot random number table 202a ( Has been set). That is, the loss probability in the low-probability state of each special symbol of the set value "2" (that is, "normal game state" and "time reduction state") is 9948/10000=99.48/100 (that is, 99.48). %), the probability of loss in a high probability state (ie, “probability variation state”) of each special symbol is 9480/10000=94.8/100 (ie, 94.8%) Is set to.

Therefore, the jackpot random number table 202a has a slightly higher jackpot probability than the set value "1" (low probability state: 0.5%→0.52%, high probability state: 5%→5.2%), which is a setting in which a jackpot game is more likely to occur than when the setting value is “1”.

Next, when the setting value is “3”, the number of jackpot random number counter C1 values (jackpot random number values) that are jackpots in the low probability state in the jackpot random number table 202a is 54, and the value “0 to 53” is It is defined (set) in the jackpot random number table 202a. In other words, the jackpot probability in the low probability state of each special symbol of the setting value "3" (that is, "normal gaming state" and "time reduction state") is 54/10000=0.54/100 (that is, 0.54). %) is set.

On the other hand, when the setting value is “3”, the number of random number values (big hit random number values) that are big hits in the high probability state in the big hit random number table 202a is 540, and the value “0 to 539” is the big hit random number. It is defined (set) in the table 202a. That is, the high probability state of each special symbol of the setting value "3" (that is, "probability fluctuation state"), the jackpot probability is 540/10000=5.4/100 (that is, 5.4%), and the special symbol The high-probability state of is set so as to be 10 times more likely to be hit than the low-probability state.

Therefore, when the setting value is "3", the number of random number values (miss random number values) that are lost in the low probability state in the jackpot random number table 202a is 9946, which is the remaining number other than the jackpot random number value. ~9999" is defined (set) in the jackpot random number table 202a. Further, the number of random number values that are lost in the high probability state (missed random number value) is 9460, which is the remaining number other than the jackpot random number value, and the value “540 to 9999” is defined in the jackpot random number table 202a ( Has been set). That is, the loss probability in the low-probability state of each special symbol of the set value “3” (that is, the “normal gaming state” and the “time reduction state”) is 9946/10000=99.46/100 (that is, 99.46). %), the probability of loss in a high probability state (ie, “probability variation state”) of each special symbol is 9460/10000=94.6/100 (ie, 94.6%) Is set to.

Therefore, the jackpot random number table 202a has a slightly higher jackpot probability than the set value "3" (low probability state: 0.52%→0.54%, high probability state: (5.2%→5.4%), the jackpot game is more likely to occur than in the case of the set value “2”.

Next, when the setting value is "4", the number of jackpot random number counter C1 values (jackpot random number values) that are jackpots in the low probability state in the jackpot random number table 202a is 56, and the value "0 to 55" is It is defined (set) in the jackpot random number table 202a. That is, the jackpot probability in the low probability state of each special symbol of the setting value "4" (that is, "normal game state" and "time reduction state"), 56/10000=0.56/100 (that is, 0.56) %) is set.

On the other hand, when the setting value is "4", the number of random number values (big hit random number values) that are big hits in the high probability state in the big hit random number table 202a is 560, and the value "0 to 559" is the big hit random number. It is defined (set) in the table 202a. That is, the high probability state of each special symbol of the setting value “4” (ie, “probability variation state”), the jackpot probability is 560/10000=5.6/100 (ie, 5.6%), and the special symbol The high-probability state of is set so as to be 10 times more likely to be hit than the low-probability state.

Therefore, when the setting value is "4", the number of random number values (miss random number values) that are lost in the low probability state in the jackpot random number table 202a is 9944, which is the remaining number other than the jackpot random number value, and the value "56". ~9999" is defined (set) in the jackpot random number table 202a. In addition, the number of random number values that are lost in the high probability state (missed random number value) is 9440, which is the remaining number other than the jackpot random number value, and the value “560 to 9999” is defined in the jackpot random number table 202a ( Has been set). That is, the loss probability in the low probability state of each special symbol of the setting value "4" (that is, "normal game state" and "time reduction state") is 9944/10000=99.44/100 (that is, 99.44). %), the loss probability in the high probability state (ie, “probability variation state”) of each special symbol is 9440/10000=94.4/100 (ie, 94.4%) Is set to.

Therefore, the jackpot random number table 202a has a slightly higher jackpot probability than the setting value "3" (low probability state: 0.54%→0.56%, high probability state: (5.4%→5.6%), the jackpot game is more likely to occur than when the set value is “3”.

Next, when the setting value is “5”, the number of jackpot random number counter C1 values (jackpot random number values) that are jackpots in the low probability state in the jackpot random number table 202a is 58, and the value “0 to 57” is It is defined (set) in the jackpot random number table 202a. That is, the jackpot probability in the low-probability state of each special symbol of the setting value "5" (that is, "normal game state" and "time reduction state"), 58/10000=0.58/100 (that is, 0.58) %) is set.

On the other hand, when the setting value is "5", the number of random number values (big hit random number values) that are big hits in the high probability state in the big hit random number table 202a is 580, and the value "0 to 579" is the big hit random number. It is defined (set) in the table 202a. In other words, the high probability state of each special symbol of the setting value "5" (ie, "probability fluctuation state"), the jackpot probability is 580/10000=5.8/100 (ie 5.8%), and the special symbol The high-probability state of is set so as to be 10 times more likely to be hit than the low-probability state.

Therefore, when the setting value is “5”, the number of random number values (missing random number values) that are lost in the low probability state in the jackpot random number table 202a is the remaining 9942 other than the jackpot random number value, and the value is “58”. ~9999" is defined (set) in the jackpot random number table 202a. In addition, the number of random number values (missing random number values) that are lost in the high probability state is 9420, which is the remaining number other than the jackpot random number value, and the value “580 to 9999” is defined in the jackpot random number table 202a ( Has been set). That is, the loss probability in the low-probability state of each special symbol of the setting value "5" (that is, "normal game state" and "time reduction state") is 9942/10000=99.42/100 (that is, 99.42). %), and the loss probability in the high probability state (ie, “probability variation state”) of each special symbol is 9420/10000=94.2/100 (ie, 94.2%). Is set to.

Therefore, the jackpot probability of the setting value "5" in the jackpot random number table 202a is slightly improved as compared with the setting value "4" (low probability state: 0.56% → 0.58%, high probability state: (5.6%→5.8%), the jackpot game is more likely to occur than when the set value is “4”.

Next, when the setting value is “6”, the number of jackpot random number counter C1 values (jackpot random number values) that are jackpots in the low probability state in the jackpot random number table 202a is 60, and the values “0 to 59” are It is defined (set) in the jackpot random number table 202a. That is, the jackpot probability in the low probability state of each special symbol of the setting value "6" (that is, "normal game state" and "time reduction state") is 60/10000=0.6/100 (ie, 0.6 %) is set.

On the other hand, when the setting value is “6”, the number of random number values (big hit random number values) that are big hits in the high probability state in the big hit random number table 202a is 600, and the value “0 to 599” is the big hit random number. It is defined (set) in the table 202a. In other words, the jackpot probability in the high probability state of each special symbol of the setting value "6" (that is, "probability fluctuation state") is 600/10000=6/100 (that is, 6%), and the high probability state of the special symbol Is set so that the player can easily win 10 times from the low probability state.

Therefore, when the setting value is “6”, the number of random number values (missing random number values) that are lost in the low probability state in the jackpot random number table 202a is 9940, which is the remaining number other than the jackpot random number value. ~9999" is defined (set) in the jackpot random number table 202a. Further, the number of random number values that are lost in the high probability state (missed random number value) is the remaining 9400 other than the jackpot random number value, and the value “600 to 9999” is defined in the jackpot random number table 202a ( Has been set). That is, the loss probability in the low probability state of each special symbol of the setting value "6" (that is, "normal game state" and "time reduction state") is 9940/10000=99.4/100 (that is, 99.4). %), the probability of loss in the high probability state (ie, “probability variation state”) of each special symbol is set to be 9400/10000=94/100 (ie, 94%) There is.

Therefore, the jackpot random number table 202a has a slightly higher jackpot probability than the set value "5" (low probability state: 0.58%→0.6%, high probability state: (5.8%→6%), the jackpot game is more likely to occur than in the case of the setting value “5”.

In this way, by changing the jackpot winning probability for each probability setting value and changing the jackpot winning easiness, it is possible to change the payout rate for each probability setting value, which is given to the player. You can change the amount of game value you get. Therefore, it is possible to abundant variations in the game playability of the game played on the pachinko machine 10 and improve the interest of the game.

27, the description will be continued. The jackpot type counter C2 determines the jackpot type when a jackpot is hit, and is sequentially incremented by 1 within a predetermined range (for example, "0 to 99") to obtain a maximum value (for example, "0 to 99"). In the case of a counter that can take a value of "," it is configured to return to "0" after reaching "99"). The value of the jackpot type counter C2 is updated, for example, periodically (in the first embodiment, once for each timer interrupt process (see FIG. 40)).

Then, at the timing when the ball wins the first starting opening 64a, a big hit among the first holding first to fourth areas of the first holding ball storing area 203d of the RAM 203 provided corresponding to the first starting opening 64a. The random number counter C1 is stored in the jackpot type counter storage area 203d2 of the same first holding area as the first holding area. Further, at the timing when the ball wins the second starting opening 64b, a big hit among the second holding first to fourth areas of the second holding ball storing area 203e of the RAM 203 provided corresponding to the second starting opening 64b. It is stored in the jackpot type counter storage area 203e2 of the same second holding area as the second holding area in which the random number counter C1 is stored.

Here, for example, if the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the one holding area in the first holding ball storage area 203d or the second holding ball storage area 203e is not a random number that is a big hit (big hit random number value), That is, if the random number is a random number (missing random number value), the variation pattern in the variation effect and the type of the stop symbol (hereinafter referred to as “stop type”) are those at the time of loss. On the other hand, if the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the one holding area in the first holding ball storage area 203d or the second holding ball storage area 203e is a random number (a big hit random number value) that is a big hit, a variation effect The fluctuation pattern and stop type in are those at the time of a big hit. In this case, the variation pattern and the stop type at the time of the jackpot are determined corresponding to the jackpot type indicated by the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the same holding area.

As described above, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment is configured as a loop counter in the range of "0 to 99", and the jackpot type counter C2 and the jackpot type stored in the ROM 202 are stored. The jackpot type is determined based on the table 202b. The jackpot type table 202b is commonly referred to in the first lottery game of the first special symbol and the second lottery game of the second special symbol.

Here, the jackpot type table 202b will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 28B is a diagram schematically showing an example of the jackpot type table 202b corresponding to the first special symbol and the second special symbol (common) stored in the ROM 202.

As shown in FIG. 28B, the jackpot type table 202b is a table in which the jackpot type and the value of the jackpot type counter C2 are associated with each other.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, as a jackpot type, after the jackpot with the maximum number of rounds of 10 rounds, until the next jackpot, the jackpot probability of the special symbol and the hit probability of the ordinary symbol are both high probability states. "10R probability variation jackpot" corresponding to the "variable state" and the maximum number of rounds after five rounds of jackpots, until the next jackpot, both the special symbol jackpot probability and the normal symbol hit probability are high probability states. "5R probability variation jackpot" corresponding to "state", and after the jackpot of maximum round number 10 rounds, the jackpot probability of the special symbol is a low probability state, but until the dynamic display of the special symbol is executed 100 times , There is a "10R normal jackpot" corresponding to the "time reduction state" in which the probability of hitting a normal symbol is high.

In the jackpot type table 202b, each jackpot type is associated with a possible value of the jackpot type counter C2 that determines the jackpot type.

In the example of the jackpot type table 202b shown in FIG. 28(b), the value “0 to 39” of the jackpot type counter C2 is associated with “10R certainty variation jackpot”, and the jackpot type counter is associated with “5R certainty variation jackpot”. The value “40 to 59” of C2 is associated, and the value “60 to 99” of the jackpot type counter C2 is associated with “10R normal jackpot”.

That is, in the winning or failure lottery of each special symbol, the jackpot random number counter storage area 203d1 of any of the first holding areas of the first holding ball storage area 203d, or the first holding area of any of the second holding ball storage areas 203e. When the value of the big hit random number counter C1 stored in the big hit random number counter storage area 203e1 is a big hit value, the big hit type counter C2 stored in the big hit type counter storage areas 203d2 and 203e2 of the same first holding area The jackpot type associated with the value of is determined from the jackpot type table 202b, for example, if the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is "7", "10R probability variation jackpot" is determined as the jackpot type, jackpot type counter C2 If the value of is "45", "5R probability variation big hit" is determined as the jackpot type, and if the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is "78", "10R normal jackpot" is determined as the jackpot type.

Therefore, when you win the jackpot in the dynamic display of each special symbol, the jackpot type of "10R certainty variation jackpot" is 40%, the jackpot type of "5R certainty variation jackpot" is 20%, and the jackpot category of "10R regular jackpot" is You will win at a rate of 40%.

In addition, the probability that each jackpot type will be selected in the case of a jackpot is appropriately set depending on the model. Then, according to the set probability, the jackpot type table 202b defines the value of the jackpot type counter C2 associated with each jackpot type.

Further, the probability that the jackpot type is selected may be changed according to the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. In this case, the jackpot type table 202b corresponding to each gaming state may be prepared, and the number of values of the jackpot type counter C2 associated with each jackpot type table 202b may be changed.

Returning to FIG. 27, description of various counters will be continued. The stop pattern selection counter C3 is configured to be incremented by "1" in order within the range of "0 to 99", for example, and return to "0" after reaching the maximum value (that is, "99").

In the first embodiment, the rough effect mode of the variable effect at the time of a big hit and a loss is displayed on the drum display device 81 is selected by the number of pending variable effects and the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3. It Specifically, only the "non-reach (long)" effect mode or "non-reach (short)" effect mode in which "reach display" does not occur and only the variable element of "normal reach" is executed as the "reach display". "Normal reach" effect mode, "Super reach" effect mode in which the variable element of "normal reach" is developed to execute the variable element of "Super reach", and "Special reach" is also developed from the variable element of "Normal reach" Five effect modes of the "special reach" effect mode in which the variable element "" is executed are selected.

Here, each effect mode will be described in detail. Among the effect modes, the “non-reach (long)” effect mode and the “non-reach (short)” effect mode (hereinafter, “non-reach (long)” effect mode and “non-reach (short)” effect mode are collectively referred to. And "may be referred to as a "non-reach" effect mode") means that each of the drum display devices 81 in which three reels LR, CR, RR (see FIG. 4) fluctuate as a special symbol fluctuation effect. Effective of which of the two reels (eg, the left reel LR and the right reel RR) is stopped first after the variable element of “high speed fluctuation” for rotating the reels LR, CR, RR at high speed (shuffle) is performed. Even in the line, the same third symbol does not stop, and the "reach display" is not generated.

The variable element of “high-speed fluctuation” is, for example, in the variable effect of the third symbol performed on the drum display device 81, the third symbol displayed on each reel LR, CR, RR is the lower side in the vertical direction of the display screen. A variable element that is rotated and scrolled at high speed. In this "high-speed fluctuation", the third symbol is changed so that the display content of the third symbol cannot be clearly recognized by the player, and the stop result of the variable effect previously stopped and displayed is randomly mixed (shuffled). Is executed.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, after the variable element of “high speed fluctuation” is performed, the variable element of “slow speed fluctuation” is performed except for a specific effect mode (“non-reach (short)” effect mode). Is configured to be.

With the variable element of "low speed fluctuation", in the variable effect of the third symbol performed on the drum display device 81, after the variable element of "high speed fluctuation", the third symbol is scrolled slowly at a speed visible to the player. It refers to the variable factor. In this variable element of "low speed fluctuation", the reels LR, CR, RR are stopped and displayed in order while making the player recognize the display content of the third symbol. If the same 3rd symbol is stopped in the 2 symbol row that is stopped and displayed first (for example, the left reel LR and the right reel RR), the "reach display" is generated and the variable element of "normal reach" is developed. When different third symbols are stopped on the two reels LR and RR to be stopped and displayed first, the remaining reels CR are stopped and displayed, and the variation effect is finished. It should be noted that the details of each variable element including the variable element of “high speed fluctuation” or the variable element of “low speed fluctuation” will be described later.

Therefore, in the "non-reach (long)" effect mode, the variable element "low speed fluctuation" is performed after the variable element "high speed fluctuation" is performed, and each reel LR, CR, RR is stopped in order. , The different third symbol is stopped on the two reels LR, RR which are stopped first, and the remaining one reel CR is stopped, and the variation effect of 1 is finished. On the other hand, in the "non-reach (short)" effect mode, the variable element of "slow speed fluctuation" is not performed after the "high speed fluctuation" is performed, and after the variable element of "high speed fluctuation" is finished, each reel LR, CR , RR are stopped at the same time, and two different reels LR, CR, RR (for example, the two reels LR, RR that are stopped first in the "non-reach (long)" effect mode) are stopped with a different third symbol, and others. The reel CR is also stopped, and the variation effect of 1 ends.

In the effect mode, the “normal reach” effect mode means, in the variable effect of the third symbol on the drum display device 81, immediately after the same third symbol is stopped on the two reels LR and RR which are stopped and displayed first. This is one of the production modes of the "reach display" in which the variable element of "normal reach" is executed and other "reach display", that is, the variable element of "super reach" or the variable element of "special reach" is not developed.

More specifically, in the variable element of "normal reach", the middle reel CR is scroll-displayed at a low speed, and the low-speed scroll changes to a predetermined stop symbol at the start time of change, and when the stop symbol is reached. It is an effect of stopping and displaying.

Among the effect modes, the “super reach” effect mode is one of the “reach display” effect modes in which the variable element of “super reach” is developed by being developed from the variable element of “normal reach”.

More specifically, in the variable element of “super reach”, scroll display is performed at a lower speed (for example, ultra-low speed scroll or frame advance scroll) than the low speed scroll in the variable element of “normal reach”, and it is set in advance at the start point of the fluctuation. It is an effect that changes to the stop symbol by the low-speed scroll, and is stopped and displayed when the stop symbol is reached.

Among the effect modes, the “special reach” effect mode is one of the “reach display” effect modes in which the variable elements of “special reach” are developed by being developed from the variable elements of “normal reach”.

The value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 is updated, for example, periodically (in the first embodiment, once every timer interrupt process (see FIG. 40)). Then, at the timing when the ball wins the first starting opening 64a, the jackpot random number counter C1 among the first holding first to fourth areas provided in the first holding ball storing area 203d corresponding to the first starting opening 64a is It is stored in the stop pattern selection counter storage area 203d3 of the first holding area to be stored. Further, at the timing when the ball wins the second starting opening 64b, the jackpot random number counter C1 of the second holding first to fourth areas provided in the second holding ball storing area 203e corresponding to the second starting opening 64b is It is stored in the stop pattern selection counter storage area 203e3 of the stored second holding area.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the stop pattern selection counter C3 of the variation effect, the current game state, and the number of variation effects (holding ball number) of both special symbols currently held. The stop pattern tables 202d that refer to the values are configured differently. That is, the stop pattern table 202d is provided in a plurality of types, and is configured to be selected according to the number of variation effects (the number of reserved balls) of both special symbols on standby.

Further, in the first embodiment, when determining a detailed variation pattern of the variation effect, first, based on the holding number table 202c provided in the ROM 202, whether or not the variation effect is present, the current game state, and the current One of the stop pattern tables 202d corresponding to the number of variation effects (the number of reserved balls) is selected. Then, based on the selected stop pattern table 202d and the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3, an effect mode that is a rough mode of the variable effect is selected. After that, a detailed variation pattern (variation time) of the variation effect is determined based on the selected production mode and the value of the variation type counter CS1 described later.

The plurality of types of stop pattern tables 202d are set so that the range of the random number value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 whose effect mode is selected is different for each stop pattern table 202d. The plurality of stop pattern tables 202d are prepared in order to change the selection ratio of the effect mode of the variable effect depending on whether or not the variable effect is achieved, the game state, and the number of holding balls. That is, (1) a big hit occurs in the variation effect of the acquired third symbol, or (2) the current gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is a "probability variation state", a "time reduction state", or a "normal game state". This is because the selection ratio of the effect mode is changed depending on whether or not (3) the number of pending balls of the variable effect that is held is (3).

This is because, as the first reason, the degree of expectation of a big hit is changed for each effect mode. That is, depending on whether the jackpot lottery is won or the jackpot lottery is missed, stop patterns, that is, "non-reach" production mode, "normal reach" production mode, "super reach" production mode, and "special reach" production By configuring the selection ratios of the modes to be different, the expectation level of a big hit is changed for each effect mode. Specifically, for example, when the jackpot lottery is won, it is configured to easily select the "super reach" effect mode or the "special reach" effect mode, and when the jackpot lottery is not won, the "non-reach" effect is produced. A mode or a "normal reach" effect mode is easily selected.

By configuring in this way, the "super reach" effect mode and the "special reach" effect mode can be a big hit easily, and the "normal reach" effect mode and the "non-reach" effect mode are hard to hit. It can be an effect or an effect that does not hit the jackpot, and the jackpot expectation degree can be differentiated for each of the effect modes. Therefore, when a production that is likely to be a big hit appears in the fluctuating production, it suggests to the player that there is a high possibility that a big jackpot will occur while the production that is easy to make a big hit is performed, and enhances the interest of the game. There is.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, specifically, when the acquired lottery result is a big hit, the stop pattern table 202d in which it is easy to select an effect that is easy to hit and hard to select an effect that is hard to hit On the basis of the above, it is configured to select an effect mode (stop pattern) which is a rough content of the variable effect. On the other hand, when the acquired lottery result is a loss, it is difficult to select an effect that is likely to be a big hit, and the effect mode (stop pattern) of the variable effect is selected based on the stop pattern table 202d that is easy to select an effect that is not a big hit. Configure to select. Thereby, when notifying the player of the lottery result of the third symbol in the fluctuating effect, if the effect that is likely to be a big hit is being executed, a big hit is likely to occur in the fluctuating effect, and an effect that is hard to be a big hit is executed. If it is, the big hit is less likely to occur in the variation effect, and by providing a difference in the big hit expected value for each effect mode (stop pattern), it is possible to enhance the interest of the game during the execution of the variation effect.

In addition, as the second reason, in the state where the number of times of waiting for the variation production of the first special symbol reaches the upper limit, the ball enters the first starting opening 64a, or the number of times of waiting for the variation production of the second special symbol is the upper limit. This is in order to reduce as much as possible the useless balls (so-called, non-lottery of special symbols due to overflow winning) due to the balls entering the second starting opening 64b in the state of reaching.

To be more specific, the maximum number of waiting times for the variation effect of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is 4 and the upper limit is set, and the variation effect is executed for at least a certain period of time. In the gaming state in which the ball easily enters the second starting opening 64b in the "variable state" and the "time shortening state", it is easy to reach the maximum reserved ball number of the second special symbol. In these gaming states, when the variation effect of a long variation time is selected, the ball frequently enters the second starting opening 64b in the state where the maximum number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is reached, the turning angle, the second starting opening. Despite entering 64b, the lottery opportunity for the second special symbol cannot be acquired. Further, even in the "normal game state", when the variation effect of a long variation time is selected in a state where the maximum number of reserved balls of the first special symbol is reached, the first special symbol is retained while the variation effect is being executed. Since the number of balls is not digested, even if a ball enters the first starting opening 64a during that time, the lottery opportunity for the first special symbol cannot be acquired. In such a state, the player determines that the game value cannot be obtained even if the ball is inserted into the first starting opening 64a, the variation effect is digested, and the number of reserved balls can be acquired again. It stops the shooting of the ball and interrupts the game. If the game is interrupted, the operation rate of the pachinko machine 10 will be reduced, which will affect the management of the game hall.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, a game state in which it is easy to reach the maximum number of reserved balls of the third symbol (the first special symbol or the second special symbol) and the maximum number of retained balls is close (or coincides). With respect to the number of reserved balls, it is configured to select the effect mode of the variable effect based on the stop pattern table 202d in which a short variable time is easily selected. Thereby, it is possible to suppress the ball entering the first starting port 64a or the second starting port 64b in the state where the maximum number of reserved balls of the third symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) has been reached. it can.

Further, as a third reason, the execution time is set to be long and the end of the variation effect is delayed, so that the state in which the variation effect is being executed is maintained for a long time. More specifically, when the number of balls to be held for the variation effect is small (absent), a ball is newly inserted into either the first starting port 64a or the second starting port 64b within the variation time of the variation effect being executed. If the ball is not played, the next variation effect cannot be started, and the drum display device 81 must display a demo screen or the like. If the player does not perform the variable effect on the drum display device 81 while shooting a ball and playing the game, the player cannot obtain the interest of the jackpot lottery required by the player. I am excited to play. In addition, the player recognizes that the pachinko machine 10 is difficult to enter the ball into the first starting opening 64a or the second starting opening 64b because the variation display is not performed on the drum display device 81, and the gaming value is high. There is a possibility that the game is judged to be difficult to obtain and the game on the pachinko machine 10 is stopped.

Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment is configured to select the effect mode of the variable effect based on the stop pattern table 202d in which the long variable time is easily selected when the number of balls to hold the variable effect is small. There is. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for a situation in which the variation effect is not performed in the drum display device 81 to occur, and to maintain the execution state of the variation effect in the drum display device 81 for a long time.

Here, the details of the number-of-holds table 202c will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 29 is a diagram schematically showing the reservation number table 202c. As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, when the variation effect is performed based on the ball entering the first starting opening 64a or the second starting opening 64b, whether or not the variation effect is correct, Based on the game state at that time and the total pending number of the variation effects of special figure 1 and special figure 2 at that time as well, the holding number table 202c is referred to and one of the stop pattern tables 202d1 to 202d3 is selected. Is configured. Then, the rough effect mode of the variable effect is determined based on one of the selected stop pattern tables 202d1 to 202d3 and the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3.

Specifically, as shown in the reservation number table 202c of FIG. 29, when the loss is extracted from the "normal game state" and the total number of reserved balls is "1 to 3", or the "probability variation state" Or when the total number of reserved balls is “1” at the time of the loss extraction of the “time reduction state”, the A table 202d1 of the stop pattern table 202d (see FIG. 30A) is selected.

Further, when the loss is extracted in the "normal game state" and the number of holding balls is "4 to 8", or when the loss is extracted in the "probability variation state" or "time reduction state" If the number is “2 to 8”, the B table 202d2 (see FIG. 30B) of the stop pattern table 202d is selected.

Furthermore, at the time of winning the jackpot, in any game state (that is, "normal game state", "probability change state" or "time reduction state"), and in any number of reserved balls (ie, 1 to 8) Even if there is, the C table 202d3 (see FIG. 30C) of the stop pattern table 202d is selected.

That is, when one of the jackpots is won, the stop pattern table 202d (C table 202d3) is selected based on only the jackpot type regardless of the number of balls held and the gaming state at that time, and the jackpot is won. Only when it does not exist (that is, at the time of losing), the stop pattern table 202d (A table 202d1 or B table 202d2) is selected based on the number of reserved balls and the game state at that time.

Even when the jackpot is won, the stop pattern table 202d may be different depending on the number of reserved balls. For example, when the number of balls to be held is large when the jackpot is won, a relatively short variation pattern is likely to be selected. The stop pattern table 202d (e.g., a variation element of "high-speed variation" is a 5 second "super reach" effect mode or "Special reach" effect mode, etc.) may be selected.

In this case, in each effect mode in which the "reach display" is executed, the effect mode in which only the time of the variable element portion of "high speed fluctuation" is changed from 10 seconds to 5 seconds is selected. With this configuration, for example, when the variation effect is started in a state where the maximum number of reserved balls of the first special symbol is four times, even if the variation element of "high-speed variation" is performed in 5 seconds, At the time when the variable element of “high-speed fluctuation” for the 5 seconds ends (when it is recognized as the variable element of “high-speed fluctuation” for 5 seconds), “reach display” may occur in the variable effect. Therefore, even when the variable element of "high speed fluctuation" is performed for 5 seconds, a performance mode in which "reach display" is executed other than the "non-reach (short)" performance mode is executed By doing so, at the time of executing the variable element of “high speed fluctuation” for 5 seconds, it is possible to know whether the fluctuation effect is a big hit or a loss.

Here, each stop pattern table 202d will be described with reference to FIG. 30A is a diagram schematically showing an example of the A table 202d1 of the stop pattern table 202d, and FIG. 30B is a diagram schematically showing an example of the B table 202d2 of the stop pattern table 202d. FIG. 30C is a diagram schematically showing an example of the C table 202d3 of the stop pattern table 202d.

As shown in FIG. 30A, in the A table 202d1 of the stop pattern table 202d, the range of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to each "non-reach (long)" effect mode is set to "0" to "74". , The range of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to the "normal reach" effect mode is set to "75" to "94", and the range of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to the "super reach" effect mode is "95" to "94". 97, and the range of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to the "special reach" effect mode is set to "98" and "99". In the A table 202d1, the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 is not assigned to the "non-reach (short)" effect mode, and the "non-reach (short)" effect mode is set not to be selected. ing.

Next, as shown in FIG. 30B, in the B table 202d2 of the stop pattern table 202d, the range of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to the "non-reach (short)" effect mode is "0" to "74". Is set to, the range of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to the "normal reach" effect mode is set to "75" to "94", and the range of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to the "super reach" effect mode is "95". "To "97", and the range of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to the "special reach" effect mode is set to "98,99". In the B table 202d2, the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 is not assigned to the "non-reach (long)" effect mode, and the "non-reach (long)" effect mode is set not to be selected. ing.

That is, in the A table 202d1, "non-reach (long)" effect mode is 75%, "normal reach" effect mode is 20%, "super reach" effect mode is 3%, and "special reach" effect mode is 2%. It is set to be the selection ratio. Further, in the B table 202d2, the "non-reach (short)" effect mode is 75%, the "normal reach" effect mode is 20%, the "super reach" effect mode is 3%, and the "special reach" effect mode is 2%. It is set to be the selection ratio.

Therefore, in the A table 202d1, the "non-reach (long)" effect mode is selected, and in the B table 202d2, the "non-reach (short)" effect mode is selected instead of the "non-reach (long)" effect mode. Is configured.

Therefore, it can be said that the A table 202d1 tends to have a relatively long variation time of the variation effect selected as compared with the B table 202d2. In other words, it can be said that the B table 202d2 is likely to have a shorter variation time of the selected variation effect than the A table 202d1.

The selection ratios of the “normal reach” effect mode, the “super reach” effect mode, and the “special reach” effect mode with the A table 202d1 and the B table 202d2 are set to be equal.

In this way, when the lost lottery result is extracted, the effect mode of the variable effect is selected based on the number of holding balls of the pending variable effect. For example, when the number of balls to be held in the variable effect is large, the “non-reach (short)” effect mode in which the variable effect time is short is selected. As a result, when the number of holding balls of the variable effect is large, the execution time of the variable effect to be executed is shortened and the number of times of execution of the variable effect is increased, so that the execution efficiency of the variable effect can be improved.

In addition, for example, when the number of balls to be held in the variable effect is small, in order to secure the time for the ball to enter the first starting opening 64a or the second starting opening 64b, a "non-reach (short)" effect mode is used. A "non-reach (long)" effect mode having a long variable effect time is selected. As a result, it is possible to perform the "non-reach (long)" effect mode having a longer variable effect time than when the "non-reach (short)" effect mode is selected. Therefore, the first starting port 64a or the second starting port 64b can be performed. It becomes easier to secure the time for the ball to enter the ball, and by increasing the possibility that a new starting winning will occur during the execution time of the variation effect on the drum display device 81, the situation in which the variation effect is being executed is maintained. can do.

In addition, in the first embodiment, the stop pattern table 202d that is selected based on the number of balls reserved for the variation effect is configured to be different in the selection of the effect mode in the variation effect of the loss, but the first starting opening 64a. Alternatively, substantially the same effect mode is selected by the determination of the variation effect based on the time of the ball entering the second starting opening 64b and the determination of the variation effect based on the start of the variable effect based on the entry. Is configured.

Specifically, in the case of a variation effect of loss, one of the A table 202d1 and the B table 202d2 is configured to be selected based on the number of holding balls of the variation effect, but the A table 202d1 is selected. B table 202d2 and B table 202d2 have the same value of the stop pattern counter C3 allocated to the "non-reach (long)" effect mode or the "non-reach (short)" effect mode, and are allocated to other effect modes. The values of the stop pattern counters C3 are also set to be the same.

That is, only the difference is whether the "non-reach (long)" effect mode is selected or the "non-reach (short)" effect mode is selected based on the number of reserved balls in the variable effect. The same presentation mode is selected. Therefore, the effect mode selected at the time of winning a start and the effect mode selected at the start of variation are substantially the same effect mode even when the game state changes (for example, the number of reserved balls increases). Is selected. As a result, even in the case where the pre-reading notice is given based on the presentation mode selected at the time of winning the start winning, in the variable production that is the subject of the pre-reading notice, no discrepancy occurs with respect to the contents of the pre-reading notice. Can be executed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 30C, in the C table 202d3 of the stop pattern table 202d, the range of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to the "normal reach" effect mode is set to "0" to "4", The range of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to the "super reach" effect mode is set to "5" to "39", and the range of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to the "special reach" effect mode is "40" to "39". It is set to "99". In the C table 202d3, the stop pattern table 202d is selected at the time of a big hit, and since "reach display" is always generated, each "non-reach" effect mode is not selected.

That is, in the C table 202d3, the selection ratios of the "normal reach" effect mode is 5%, the "super reach" effect mode is 35%, and the "special reach" effect mode is 60%.

Therefore, the selection ratio is high in the order of "special reach" effect mode> "super reach" effect mode> "normal reach" effect mode in the variable effect when jackpot is won, and "normal reach" effect mode in the variable effect at the time of loss> The selection ratios are set to increase in the order of "super reach" effect mode> "special reach" effect mode. Therefore, the jackpot expectation at the time of appearance of each "reach display" is highly likely to show the jackpot display result in the order of "special reach" effect mode> "super reach" effect mode> "normal reach" effect mode. Is configured to be. As a result, it is possible to show the player the degree of expectation for a jackpot depending on the type of effect mode of the fluctuating effect, and it is possible to experience a feeling of uplifting to the jackpot according to the effect mode of the fluctuating effect performed by the player.

From the above, the situation in which the game is being performed by determining the effect mode of the fluctuating effect to be executed based on whether or not the fluctuating effect is true, the game state at that time, and the number of holding balls of the fluctuating effect at that time. By shortening the execution time of the fluctuating effect and increasing the number of executions of the fluctuating effect based on, it is possible to select an effect mode that improves the execution efficiency of the fluctuating effect.

When the number of balls to be held in the variable effect is large (for example, "4"), when "reach display" is selected, the stop pattern in which the effect elements of "high speed change" of each "reach display" are shortened The table 202d may be provided. Further, when the number of balls to be held in the variable effect is large, the stop pattern table 202d may be provided in which the effect element of "slow speed change" is omitted in each effect mode. Further, a stop pattern table 202d may be provided in which the selection ratios of the respective effect modes are completely different depending on the number of balls reserved for the variable effect. However, in the case where the selection rate of each effect mode varies depending on the number of holding balls of the fluctuating effect, the number of holding balls when the pre-reading notice execution is decided and the target of the pre-reading notice are made when the pre-reading notice is made The number of reserved balls at the time of execution of the variable effect may be different. In such a case, it is necessary to perform processing for maintaining consistency between the content of the prefetching notice and the content of the variation effect, which makes the processing complicated.

27, the description will be continued. The variation type counter CS1 is configured to be incremented by "1" in order within the range of "0 to 9", for example, and then return to "0" after reaching the maximum value (that is, "9"). The value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated once every time a timer interrupt process (see FIG. 40) described later is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time in the main process (see FIG. 39). Then, at the timing when the ball wins the first starting opening 64a, the first holding first to fourth areas provided in the first holding ball storage area 203d of the RAM 203 provided corresponding to the first starting opening 64a. Of these, the big hit random number counter C1 is stored in the variation type counter storage area 203d4 of the first holding area. In addition, at the timing when the ball wins the second starting opening 64b, the second holding first to fourth areas of the second holding ball storing area 203e of the RAM 203 provided corresponding to the second starting opening 64b are stored. Of these, the big hit random number counter C1 is stored in the variation type counter storage area 203e4 of the second holding area.

The variation type counter CS1 is used to determine a detailed variation pattern of the variation effect. That is, the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, in the effect mode selected by the stop pattern table 202d and the stop pattern selection counter C3, uses the value of the change type counter CS1 and the change pattern table 202e stored in the ROM 202 for detailed operation. Determine the fluctuation pattern. Specifically, the determination of the variation pattern is determination of the variation time of the variation effect. The voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, based on the variation pattern (variation time) determined by the variation type counter CS1, reach type of the third symbol displayed on the drum display device 81 and a detailed symbol variation mode. And the presence/absence of execution of the notice effect and the execution mode of the notice effect.

In this way, the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 selects a rough fluctuation pattern of fluctuation effect and determines only the fluctuation time. With such a configuration, the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 does not need to perform detailed control such as advance notice lottery necessary to execute the variation effect, and thus the processing of the MPU 201 relating to the variation effect can be reduced. it can. Further, the main controller 110 does not need to prepare the commands for all the fluctuation patterns of the fluctuation effect, and the ROM capacity of the main controller 110 can be reduced.

In addition, the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 determine the detailed variation pattern in the variation production based on the variation time (rough variation pattern) determined by the main control device 110, thereby producing the variation production. You can increase the freedom to choose. Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 10 whose game state changes every moment, it is possible to select or change the effect contents of the variable effect at any time in response to the change, and it is possible to execute an appropriate effect according to the game state. it can.

Details of the fluctuation pattern table 202e will be described with reference to FIGS. 31 and 32. This pachinko machine 10, as the variation pattern table 202e, the variation pattern table 202e1 for the loss, which is commonly used in all gaming states when the first special symbol and the second special symbol are lost, and the first special symbol and With the big hit variation pattern table 202e2 for big hits that is commonly used in all gaming states when the second special symbol is a big hit.

31: is the figure which showed typically an example of the variation pattern table 202e1 for loses memorize|stored in ROM202, FIG. 32 showed typically an example of the variation pattern table 202e2 for big hits memorize|stored in ROM202. It is a figure. As shown in FIG. 31 and FIG. 32, each variation pattern table 202e1, 202e2 is divided into groups based on the selected presentation mode.

Specifically, as an effect mode at the time of losing, "E0: non-reach (long)" for "E0: non-reach (long)" and "non-reach (short)" effect referred to when the "non-reach (long)" effect mode is determined. "E1: Non-reach (short)" referred to when the mode is determined, "E2: Normal reach" referenced when the mode of "normal reach" is determined, and "Super reach" mode of production Is divided into "E3: Super reach" referred to when "E4: Special reach" is referred to when the "special reach" effect mode is determined. Further, as an effect mode at the time of jackpot, "E5: Normal reach" for reference when the "normal reach" effect mode is determined, and "E6: Super" for when the "super reach" effect mode is determined. It is divided into one for "reach" and one for "E7: special reach" that is referred to when the "special reach" effect mode is determined. The value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is associated with each of the divided groups.

In the first embodiment, if the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the holding area having the first holding ball storage area 203d corresponding to the first special symbol is not a jackpot value (jackpot random number value), or If the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the holding area having the second holding ball storage area 203e corresponding to the second special symbol is not a jackpot value (jackpot random number value), that is, in any case, there is a loss. If it is a value, the stop number table 202c is referred to, the stop pattern table 202d is selected based on the game state at that time and the number of hold balls at that time, and stored in the same hold area. The effect mode is selected based on the value of the stopped pattern selection counter C3 and the stop pattern table 202d. Then, the group to be referred to in the variation pattern table for loss 202e1 is determined based on the selected effect mode. In the group (group) of the variation pattern table for loss 202e1, the variation pattern (variation time) associated with the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the same holding area is in the variation effect held in the holding area. It is determined as a fluctuation pattern.

Here, each variation element that constitutes the variation pattern will be described. The variable element constitutes a part of one variation effect, and each variation element is combined to form one variation effect. In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, as the variable elements, the "high speed variable" variable element, the "low speed variable" variable element, the "normal reach" variable element, the "super reach" variable element, and the "special reach" variable element. Variables and “re-variations” variables are provided.

The variable element of "high-speed fluctuation" is, as described above, a variable element that scrolls at high speed (rotationally drives) so that the player cannot clearly recognize the contents of the third symbol. When the "non-reach (short)" effect mode or the like is selected, the variable element of "high speed fluctuation" is performed at the beginning of the variable effect for "5 seconds" (hereinafter referred to as "high speed fluctuation (short)". In some cases), when a “non-reach (long)” effect mode or the like is selected, “10 seconds” is performed at the beginning of the variable effect (hereinafter, may be referred to as “high speed change (long)”). It should be noted that, when the variable element of "high-speed fluctuation" ends, the variable element of "low-speed fluctuation" described later is started (executed), or the variable effect ends as it is.

The variable element of "low speed fluctuation" is started after execution of the variable element of "high speed fluctuation" of "5 seconds" or "10 seconds", and the "reach display" is generated by scrolling the third symbol to be visually recognizable. It is a variable that shows whether or not to do it. This variable element of "low-speed fluctuation" is not executed when the "non-reach (short)" effect mode is selected, and an effect mode other than the "non-reach (short)" effect mode (for example, "non-reach (long)"). )” staging mode) is selected, “5 seconds” is performed after the variable element “high speed fluctuation”.

That is, in the "non-reach (long)" effect mode, the variable element of "slow speed fluctuation" is performed, so that the final stopped reel of the drum display device 81 (in the first embodiment, the middle reel CR (see FIG. 4)). In the "non-reach (short)" effect mode, each reel LR, CR, RR of the drum display device 81 is in the "low speed variation" state after the variable element of "high speed variation" is performed. It is configured so as to stop rapidly (so-called stop of the bite) without passing through a variable element. It should be noted that, when the variable element of "low-speed fluctuation" ends, the variable effect ends as it is.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the "non-reach (long)" effect mode includes a variable element of "high speed fluctuation" of "10 seconds" and a variable element of "low speed fluctuation" of "5 seconds". A fluctuation effect is configured with the fluctuation patterns that include. Further, in the "non-reach (short)" effect mode, the variable effect is configured by a change pattern of only the variable element of "high speed fluctuation" of "5 seconds".

The "pseudo-variation" variation element is a variation element that executes the "high-speed variation" variation element again when a predetermined stop eye is provisionally displayed in the "low-speed variation" variation element. Say. That is, in the variable element of "low speed fluctuation", when the right reel RR is stopped, the third symbol having a number "+1" larger than the third symbol stopped and displayed on the left reel LR is stopped and displayed on one of the activated lines. (For example, the third symbol "7" is displayed on the left reel LR and the right reel RR is "8" is stopped and displayed), and then the same as the third symbol stopped and displayed on the left reel LR when the middle reel CR is stopped. The third symbol of the stop display (for example, "7" on the left reel LR and the middle reel CR, the third symbol of "8" on the right reel RR is stop displayed (that is, the stop eye "778") is applicable. Hereinafter, when the combination is referred to as "opportunity symbol".), the variable element of the "low-speed knitting" becomes the variable element of "pseudo-variation", and the execution symbol displayed on the hold display section Db ( (Pending pattern) is not digested, and the variation effect will continue.

The variable element of "pseudo fluctuation" is performed for "5 seconds", similarly to the variable element of "slow fluctuation". In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when the variable element of "pseudo-variation" is executed, the symbol that always generates "reach display" (for example, the third symbol stopped and displayed on the left reel LR and the right reel RR) Is the same and the fluctuation of the middle reel CR is continued. Hereinafter, referred to as "reach forming symbol".) is displayed, and is configured to develop into a variable element of "normal reach" described later. There is. In addition, in the variable element of the "pseudo-variation", the "reach forming symbol" may not be displayed, and the "miss display" may be displayed to end the variation effect.

Therefore, as the variable element of this “pseudo fluctuation”, in the variable element equivalent to the variable element of the “slow fluctuation”, the chance pattern is stopped and displayed, so that the variable element of the “high speed fluctuation” is changed again from the chance pattern. After the start, an effect as if the variable effect was started once again is executed.

In the first embodiment, the "pseudo continuous" effect can be executed at most once in the variable effect. It should be noted that in one variation effect, the variation element of “pseudo variation” may be executed a plurality of times.

The variable element of "normal reach" is the same symbol (hereinafter, may be referred to as "reach forming symbol") on the effective line of one of the two reels LR and RR that stops first in the variable element of "low speed variation". ) Is a variable element that shows whether or not a big hit occurs depending on the variation result of the remaining reels CR when the display is stopped. This "normal reach" variation element is performed "5 seconds" after the "slow variation" variation element.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, after executing the variable element of "normal reach", the pattern of directly displaying "miss display", the pattern of directly displaying "big hit display", and the "super reach" are displayed. There are a pattern that develops into a variable element, a pattern that develops into a variable element of "Special Reach", and a pattern that executes a variable element of "re-variation" after a temporary "miss display" appears. Has been done.

The variable element of "super reach" is developed and executed when the remaining reel CR is continuously changed without stopping "miss display" in the variable element of "normal reach", and a predetermined effect is displayed on the drum display device 81. (For example, "battle effect") is a variable element that shows whether or not a big hit occurs. This "super reach" variation element is performed "10 seconds" after the execution of the "normal reach" variation element.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, after the execution of the variable element of “super reach”, a pattern of directly displaying “miss display”, a pattern of directly displaying “big hit display”, and a temporary A pattern of executing the variable element of "re-variation" after displaying "missing display" is prepared.

The variation element of "special reach" is developed and executed when the variation of "reach display" in the variation element of "normal reach" is not stopped and the remaining reel CR is continued. It is a variable element that shows whether or not a big hit occurs by performing a special effect different from the effect (for example, "competitive effect"). The variable element of "special reach" is performed "20 seconds" after the variable element of "normal reach" is executed.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, after executing the variable elements of "special reach", a pattern that directly shows "miss display", a pattern that directly shows "big hit display", and a temporary A pattern of "re-changing" after the "missing display" is displayed is prepared.

It should be noted that it is configured to develop into a "super reach" variable element or a "special reach" variable element after execution of the "normal reach" variable element, but instead of this configuration, reach formation is performed after "slow fluctuation". When the design is stopped, the variable element of "normal reach" may not be passed and the variable element of "super reach" or the variable element of "special reach" may be suddenly developed. Further, the variable element of "special reach" may be configured to be executed after the variable element of "super reach" is executed.

The variable element of "re-variation" is a variable element that is developed and executed after the "miss display" once appears in any of the "reach display" and the "big hit display" appears. The variable element of this "re-change" is performed for "5 seconds" after any "reach display".

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, a pattern in which "big hit display" appears after the variable element "re-variation" is executed is prepared.

In addition, the variable element of this "re-variation" is configured to occur only when the jackpot game is won. That is, in the case of "missing display", the changing element of "re-change" is not executed. This is because the variable element of "re-variation" is a variable element that changes the temporarily displayed "miss display" to any "big hit display", so in the case of "miss display" that is not won for big hits If you go to, there will be discrepancies in the production. Therefore, the variation element of "re-variation" is selected only in the jackpot variation pattern table 202e2 (see FIG. 32) and not selected in the loss variation pattern table 202e1 (see FIG. 31).

As shown in FIG. 31, in the variation pattern table for loss 202e1 which is referred to when the first special symbol and the second special symbol are lost, "E0: non-reach (long)" has the entire variation time of "15 seconds." “Variation element of “high-speed fluctuation (long)” + fluctuation element of “slow-speed fluctuation”” (variation time. In the following, it is naturally possible to replace “variation pattern” with “variation time”. There is) prepared.

In the example shown in FIG. 31, the association between the variation pattern in “E0: non-reach (long)” and the value of the variation type counter CS1 is the variation element of “high-speed variation (long)”+variation of “low-speed variation”. “0 to 9” for “element”, and only “variable element of “high speed fluctuation (long)”+variable element of “slow speed fluctuation”” is set to be selectable.

That is, in any game state, if the "non-reach (long)" effect mode is selected in the variation pattern table for loss 202e1 that is referred to when the variation effect of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is selected, the variation type counter “Variable elements of “high-speed fluctuation (long)”+variable elements of “low-speed fluctuation”” are associated with all possible values of CS1 (“0 to 9”). That is, in the case of the "non-reach (long)" effect mode in the variation effect of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the variation pattern is always the variation element of "high-speed variation (long)" + variation of "low-speed variation" Element” is selected.

Next, in the variation pattern table for losing 202e1, one variation pattern of "E1: non-reach (short)" is "only variation element of "high-speed variation (short)" with overall variation time of "5 seconds". Is prepared.

In the example shown in FIG. 31, the correspondence between the variation pattern in “E1: non-reach (short)” and the value of the variation type counter CS1 is “0 for “only the variation element of “high-speed variation (short)””. It is set to be selectable only "only variable elements of "high speed fluctuation (short)"".

That is, in any gaming state, if the "non-reach (short)" effect mode is selected in the variation pattern table for loss 202e1 that is referred to when the variable effect of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is executed, the fluctuation type counter “Only variable elements of “high speed fluctuation (short)” are associated with all possible values of CS1 (“0 to 9”). That is, in the case of the "non-reach (short)" effect mode in the variable effect of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, "only the variable element of "high speed fluctuation (short)" is always selected as the fluctuation pattern.

Next, in the variation pattern table for loss 202e1, "E2: normal reach" has a variation element of "high-speed variation (long)" + variation element of "slow-speed variation" + "normal reach" in which the overall variation time is "20 seconds". "Fluctuation element" and "Variation element of "Fast fluctuation (long)" + "Pseudo fluctuation" + "Fast fluctuation (short)" + "Slow fluctuation" fluctuation element + Two variation patterns of "variation element of "normal reach"" are prepared in a selectable manner, and the value of the variation type counter CS1 is associated with each variation pattern.

In the example shown in FIG. 31, the variation pattern in “E2: normal reach” and the value of the variation type counter CS1 are associated with each other by “variation element of “high-speed variation (long)”+variation element of “low-speed variation”+“normal reach”. “Variation factor” of “0 to 6”, “Fast fluctuation (long)” fluctuation factor + “Pseudo fluctuation” fluctuation factor + “High speed fluctuation (short) fluctuation factor + “Low speed fluctuation” “7-9” for “variable element+variable element of “normal reach””.

That is, in any gaming state, when the "normal reach" effect mode is selected in the variation pattern table for loss 202e1 which is referred to when the variable effect of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is executed, ""high speed fluctuation (long) 70% of the fluctuation pattern of "variable element + variable element of "slow fluctuation" + variable element of "normal reach", variable element of "high speed fluctuation (long)" + variable element of "pseudo fluctuation" + "high speed fluctuation" The variation pattern of “variable element of “(short)”+variable element of “low-speed variation”+variable element of “normal reach” is set to be selected at a rate of 30%.

Therefore, in the "normal reach" effect mode selected at the time of losing, the variation pattern of "variation element of "high speed variation (long)" + variation element of "slow variation" + variation element of "normal reach" is easily selected (overall 70%). In addition, "variation of "fast fluctuation (long)" + variation of "pseudo fluctuation" + variation of "fast variation (short)" + variation of "slow variation" + variation of "normal reach" By being configured so that the patterns are also selected, it is possible to provide a gaming property in which a deviation can occur from any of the fluctuation patterns.

Next, in the variation pattern table for loss 202e1, "E3: super reach" has a variation element of "high-speed variation (long)" + variation element of "low-speed variation" + "of the entire variation time of "30 seconds". "Variable factors of "Super reach"" and "Variable factors of "Fast fluctuation (long)" + "Pseudo fluctuation" + "High speed fluctuation (short)" + "Slow fluctuation" with total fluctuation time of "40 seconds" Two variation patterns “element+variable element of “super reach”” are selectably prepared, and the value of the variation type counter CS1 is associated with each variation pattern.

In the example shown in FIG. 31, the variation pattern in “E3: super reach” and the value of the variation type counter CS1 are associated with each other by a variation element of “high-speed variation (long)”+a variation element of “low-speed variation”+“ "Variable factors of "Super reach"", "0 to 7", "Fast variable (long)" variable + "Pseudo variable" + "High speed (short)" variable + "Low speed variable" “Variation factor of “+variation factor of “Super reach”” is “8,9”.

That is, in any gaming state, if the "super reach" effect mode is selected in the variation pattern table for loss 202e1 that is referred to when performing the effect effect of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, ""high speed fluctuation (long )” + “slow fluctuation” fluctuation element + “super reach” fluctuation element” fluctuation pattern is 80%, “high speed fluctuation (long)” fluctuation element + “pseudo fluctuation” fluctuation element + “ The variation pattern of “variation element of “high-speed variation (short)”+variation element of “slow variation”+variation element of “super reach”” is set to be selected at a rate of 20%.

Therefore, in the "super reach" effect mode selected at the time of losing, the variation pattern of "variation element of "high speed variation (long)" + variation element of "slow variation" + variation element of "super reach" is easily selected. (80% of the total). In addition, "variable elements of "fast fluctuation (long)" + variable elements of "pseudo fluctuation" + variable elements of "fast fluctuation (short)" + variable elements of "slow fluctuation" + variable elements of "super reach" By being configured such that the variation pattern is also selected, it is possible to provide a gaming property in which a loss can occur from any variation pattern.

Then, in the variation pattern table for loss 202e1, "E4: Special reach" has a variation element of "high-speed variation (long)" + variation element of "low-speed variation" + "of the entire variation time of "40 seconds". "Variation factors of "Special reach"" and fluctuation factors of "high speed fluctuation (long)" + "pseudo fluctuation" + "high speed fluctuation (short)" + "low speed fluctuation" with total fluctuation time of "50 seconds" Two variation patterns “element+variable element of “special reach”” are prepared in a selectable manner, and the value of the variation type counter CS1 is associated with each variation pattern.

In the example shown in FIG. 31, the variation pattern in “E4: Special reach” and the value of the variation type counter CS1 are associated with each other by “variation element of “high-speed variation (long)”+variation element of “low-speed variation”+“ 0 to 8", "Fast fluctuation (long)" fluctuation element + "Pseudo fluctuation" fluctuation element + "High speed fluctuation (short) fluctuation coefficient + "Slow fluctuation" “Variation factor of “+variation factor of “Special reach”” is “9”.

That is, in any game state, if the "special reach" effect mode is selected in the variation pattern table for loss 202e1 that is referred to when executing the effect effect of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, ""high speed fluctuation (long )” variable element + “low speed variable element” + “special reach” variable element” 90%, “high speed (long) variable element + “pseudo variable” variable element + The variation pattern of “variation element of “fast variation (short)+variation element of “slow variation”+variation element of “special reach””” is set to be selected at a rate of 10%.

Therefore, in the "special reach" effect mode selected at the time of losing, the variation pattern of "variation element of "high-speed variation (long)" + variation element of "low-speed variation" + variation element of "special reach" is easily selected. (90% of the total). In addition, "variable elements of "high-speed fluctuation (long)" + variable elements of "pseudo fluctuation" + variable elements of "fast fluctuation (short)" + variable elements of "slow fluctuation" + variable elements of "special reach" By being configured such that the variation pattern is also selected, it is possible to provide a gaming property in which a loss can occur from any variation pattern.

It should be noted that in the predetermined variation patterns at the time of losing (for example, the "non-reach (long)" effect mode and the "non-reach (short)" effect mode), the effect mode is directly determined as the change pattern, and therefore the fluctuation type counter CS1 Alternatively, the variation pattern may be determined without using. Further, although the variation type counter CS1 alone is used for selection, a plurality of variation type counters may be used in combination for selection (presence or absence of advance notice display or the like).

Next, with reference to FIG. 32, the variation pattern table 202e2 for big hits which is referred to when the big hit of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is described. In the first embodiment, when the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the holding area having the first holding ball storage area 203d corresponding to the first special symbol is a big jackpot value, and in the second special symbol When the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in a holding area of the corresponding second holding ball storage area 203e is a big hit value, the holding state table 202c is referred to, and the game state at that time, The stop pattern table 202d is selected based on the number of reserved balls at that time, and the effect mode is selected based on the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the same reserved area and the stop pattern table 202d. Then, the group to be referred to in the jackpot variation pattern table 202e2 is determined based on the selected effect mode. In the group (group) of the jackpot variation pattern table 202e2, the variation pattern (variation time) associated with the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the same holding area is in the variation effect held in the holding area. It is determined as a fluctuation pattern.

In the jackpot variation pattern table 202e2, "E5: normal reach" includes a variation element of "high-speed variation (long)" + variation element of "slow-speed variation" + "normal reach" of overall variation time of "20 seconds". "Fluctuating element" and "Variable element of "high-speed fluctuation (long)" + variable element of "slow-speed fluctuation" + variable element of "normal reach" + variable element of "re-fluctuation" with total fluctuation time of "25 seconds" And "variable elements of "high-speed variation (long)" + variation elements of "pseudo-variation" + variation elements of "high-speed variation (short)" + variation elements of "slow-variation" with overall variation time of "30 seconds" + "Variable elements of "normal reach"" and "variable elements of "high-speed variation (long)" + variation elements of "pseudo variation" + variation elements of "high-speed variation (short)" with overall variation time of "35 seconds" There are four fluctuation patterns selectable, "variation element of "low-speed fluctuation", fluctuation element of "normal reach", and fluctuation element of "re-variation", and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is set for each fluctuation pattern. It is associated.

In the example shown in FIG. 32, the variation pattern in “E5: normal reach” and the value of the variation type counter CS1 are associated with each other by “variation element of “high-speed variation (long)”+variation element of “low-speed variation”+“normal reach”. “Variable element” of “0”, “Variable element of “fast fluctuation (long)” + variable element of “Slow speed fluctuation” + variable element of “Normal reach” + variable element of “Re-fluctuation” "1, 2", "Fast fluctuation (long)" fluctuation element + "Pseudo fluctuation" fluctuation element + "High speed fluctuation (short) fluctuation coefficient + "Slow fluctuation" fluctuation element + "Normal reach" fluctuation element “3 to 5” for “element”, “high speed fluctuation (long)” fluctuation element + “pseudo fluctuation” fluctuation element + “high speed fluctuation (short)” fluctuation element + “slow fluctuation” fluctuation element + It is “6 to 9” for “variable element of “normal reach”+variable element of “re-variation””.

That is, in any gaming state, when the "normal reach" effect mode is selected in the special pattern 1 jackpot fluctuation pattern table 202e2 which is referred to when the fluctuation effect of the first special symbol is executed, "high speed fluctuation (long)" 10% of the variation pattern of “variation element + variation element of “slow variation” + variation element of “normal reach”, variation element of “fast variation (long)” + variation element of “slow variation” + variation of “normal reach” 20% of the variation pattern of “element + “variation variation””, “high-speed variation (long)” variation element + “pseudo-variation” variation element + “high-speed variation (short) variation element + “slow rate” The variation pattern of "variation" + "normal reach" variation is 30%, "high-speed variation (long)" variation element + "pseudo-variation" variation element + "high-speed variation (short) variation element" The variation pattern of “variation element of “low-speed variation”+variation element of “normal reach”+variation element of “revariation” is set to be selected at a rate of 40%.

Therefore, in the "normal reach" effect mode selected at the time of jackpot, "variable elements of "high speed variation (long)"+variable elements of "pseudo variation"+variable elements of "high speed variation (short)"+"slow variation" The variation pattern of “variation element+variation element of “normal reach”+variation element of “re-variation”” is easily selected (40% of the whole). In addition, "variable elements of "high speed fluctuation (long)" + variable elements of "low speed fluctuation" + variable elements of "normal reach", variable elements of "high speed fluctuation (long)" + variable elements of "low speed fluctuation" + "Normal reach" fluctuation element + "re-change" fluctuation element", "High speed fluctuation (long)" fluctuation element + "Pseudo fluctuation" fluctuation element + "High speed fluctuation (short) fluctuation element + "Slow fluctuation By being configured such that the variation pattern of “variation element+variation element of “normal reach”” is also selected, it is possible to provide a game performance in which a jackpot can be expected from any of the variation patterns.

In the jackpot variation pattern table 202e2, "E6: super reach" has a variation element of "high-speed variation (long)" + variation element of "low-speed variation" + "super reach" with an overall variation time of "30 seconds". "Variable element" and the total variation time of "35 seconds" "high-speed variation (long) variation element + "slow variation" variation element + "super reach" variation element + "re-variation" "Fluctuating element" and "Variable element of "high-speed fluctuation (long)" + variable element of "pseudo fluctuation" + variable element of "high-speed fluctuation (short)" + "low-speed fluctuation" with total fluctuation time of "40 seconds" "Variable element + "super reach" variable element" and "45 seconds" total variation time "high speed variation (long) variation element + "pseudo variation" variation element + "high speed variation (short) “Variation element + “Slow fluctuation” fluctuation element + “Super reach” fluctuation element + “Re-fluctuation fluctuation element”” are prepared in a selectable manner, and the fluctuation type for each fluctuation pattern The value of the counter CS1 is associated.

In the example shown in FIG. 32, the variation pattern in “E6: super reach” and the value of the variation type counter CS1 are associated with each other by a variation element of “high-speed variation (long)”+a variation element of “slow-speed variation”+“ "Variable factors of "Super reach"", "0,1", "Fast fluctuation (long)" + "Slow fluctuation" + "Super reach" fluctuation + "Re-fluctuation" fluctuation "2-4", "Fast fluctuation (long)" fluctuation element + "Pseudo fluctuation" fluctuation element + "High speed fluctuation (short) fluctuation coefficient + "Slow fluctuation" fluctuation element + "Variable factors of "Super reach"", "5, 6", "Fast variable (long)" variable + "Pseudo variable" + "High speed (short)" variable + "Low speed" "7-9" for "variable" variable + "super reach" variable + "re-variable".

That is, in any gaming state, when the "super reach" effect mode is selected in the special pattern 1 jackpot fluctuation pattern table 202e2 that is referred to when the fluctuation effect of the first special symbol is executed, ""high speed fluctuation (long)" 20% of the fluctuation pattern of "variable element of + slow variable" + variable of "super reach", variable of "fast fluctuation (long)" + variable of "slow fluctuation" + "super reach" The fluctuation pattern of "variable element + variable element of re-variation" is 30%, variable element of "high speed fluctuation (long)", variable element of "pseudo fluctuation" + variable element of "high speed fluctuation (short)" 20% of the fluctuation pattern of "variable element of "low speed fluctuation" + variable element of "super reach", fluctuation element of "high speed fluctuation (long)" + fluctuation element of "pseudo fluctuation" + "high speed fluctuation (short)" The variation pattern of “variation element of “+variation element of “slow variation”+variation element of “super reach”+variation element of “re-variation”” is set to be selected at a rate of 30%.

Therefore, in the "super reach" effect mode selected at the time of jackpot, "variable elements of "high-speed fluctuation (long)" + variable elements of "slow fluctuation" + variable elements of "super reach" + variable element of "re-fluctuation" , Or "variable elements of "fast fluctuation (long)" + variable elements of "pseudo fluctuation" + variable elements of "fast fluctuation (short)" + variable elements of "slow fluctuation" + variable elements of "super reach" The variation pattern of “+variation element of “revariation”” is easily selected (both are 30% of the total). In addition, "variable elements of "high-speed fluctuation (long)" + variable elements of "slow-speed fluctuation" + variable elements of "super-reach"" or "variable elements of "high-speed fluctuation (long)" + "pseudo-variation" Each of the fluctuation patterns of “variable element+variable element of “high speed variation (short)”+variable element of “slow variation”+variable element of “super reach” is configured to be selected. It is possible to provide a game that can expect a big hit from the pattern.

In the jackpot variation pattern table 202e2, "E7: Special reach" includes "variable elements of "high-speed variation (long)", variation elements of "low-speed variation", and "special reach" with an overall variation time of "40 seconds". "Variable element" and "45 seconds" total variation time "variable element of "high speed variation (long)" + variable element of "slow variation" + variable element of "special reach" + "revariation" "Fluctuating element" and "Variable element of "high-speed fluctuation (long)" + variable element of "pseudo fluctuation" + variable element of "high-speed fluctuation (short)" + "slow-speed fluctuation" with total fluctuation time of "50 seconds" "Variable element + "special reach" variable element" and "55 seconds" total variation time "high speed variation (long)" variation element + "pseudo variation" variation element + "high speed variation (short) "Fluctuation element + "Slow fluctuation" fluctuation element + "Special reach" fluctuation element + "Re-change" fluctuation element" are prepared in a selectable manner, and the fluctuation type for each fluctuation pattern The value of the counter CS1 is associated.

In the example shown in FIG. 32, the association between the variation pattern in “E7: Special reach” and the value of the variation type counter CS1 is “variation element of “high-speed variation (long)”+variation element of “low-speed variation”+“ 0 to 2", "Fast fluctuation (long)" fluctuation element + "Slow fluctuation" fluctuation element + "Special reach" fluctuation element + "Re-fluctuation fluctuation" "3,4", "Fast fluctuation (long)" fluctuation element + "Pseudo fluctuation" fluctuation element + "Fast fluctuation (short) fluctuation coefficient + "Slow fluctuation" fluctuation element + “Variable factors of “Special reach””, “5 to 7”, “Fast variable (long)” variable + “Pseudo variable” + “Fast variable (short)” + Low speed "8,9" for "variable" variable + "special reach" variable + re-variable variable".

That is, in any gaming state, when the "special reach" effect mode is selected in the special pattern 1 jackpot fluctuation pattern table 202e2 that is referred to when the fluctuation effect of the first special symbol is executed, ""high speed fluctuation (long)" 30% of the fluctuation pattern of "variable element of + slow variable" + variable of "special reach", variable of "fast fluctuation (long)" + variable of "slow fluctuation" + "special reach" The fluctuation pattern of "variable element + variable element of re-variation" is 20%, the variable element of "high speed fluctuation (long)", the variable element of "pseudo fluctuation" + the variable element of "high speed fluctuation (short)" 30% of the fluctuation pattern of “variable element of “low speed fluctuation” + variable element of “special reach”, fluctuation element of “high speed fluctuation (long)” + fluctuation element of “pseudo fluctuation” + “high speed fluctuation (short)” The variable pattern of “variable element+variable element of “low-speed variation”+variable element of “special reach”+variable element of “revariation”” is set to be selected at a rate of 20%.

Therefore, in the "special reach" effect mode selected at the time of jackpot, "variable elements of "high speed fluctuation (long)" + variable elements of "low speed fluctuation" + variable elements of "special reach"" or ""high speed fluctuation It is easy to select the fluctuation pattern of "(long) fluctuation element + "pseudo fluctuation" fluctuation element + "high speed fluctuation (short) fluctuation element + "slow fluctuation" fluctuation element + "special reach fluctuation coefficient" (Both 30% of the total). In addition, "variable elements of "high-speed fluctuation (long)" + variable elements of "slow-speed fluctuation" + variable elements of "special reach" + variable elements of "re-fluctuation" or "high-speed fluctuation (long)" Variables + Variables of "pseudo fluctuations" + Variables of "fast fluctuations (short)" + Variables of "slow fluctuations" + Variables of "special reach" + Variables of "re-changes" By being configured so that each is also selected, it is possible to provide a gaming property in which a big hit can be expected from any variation pattern.

In this way, when the jackpot is won, by constructing a relatively long variation pattern so that it is easy to be selected, the enjoyment of the game is improved by enhancing the effect contents of the variation effect in which the jackpot occurs. be able to. In addition, when the jackpot is not won, that is, in the case of losing, by configuring so that a relatively short fluctuation pattern is easily selected, the effect contents of the fluctuation effect at the time of losing can be shortened and the fluctuation effect can be changed. Can be efficiently digested.

27, the description will be continued. The random number counter C4 per ordinary figure is configured as a loop counter that is incremented by 1 in the range of, for example, "0 to 99", and returns to "0" after reaching the maximum value (that is, "99"). Further, when the random number counter C4 per universal figure makes one cycle, the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the random number counter C4 per universal figure.

It should be noted that the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the random number counter C4 per universal figure (value=“0 to 99”), and for each timer interrupt process (see FIG. 40). It is updated once and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 39).

The value of the random number counter C4 per ordinary figure is updated, for example, periodically (in the first embodiment, once every timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 40)), and it is detected that the ball has passed through the through gate 67. At a timing, it is stored in any of the public figure holding first to fourth public figure holding areas provided in the public figure holding ball storage area (not shown) of the RAM 203. Then, the data is sequentially shifted to the public figure holding sphere execution area (not shown) in the order of being stored in the public figure holding sphere storage area, and the random number per public figure counter C4 stored in the public figure holding sphere execution area is stored. A hit judgment is performed on the value.

The value of the random number that normally hits the symbol is set by a random number table (not shown) per universal figure stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110 for each game state (for example, 1/100 in the low probability state, high probability). The value of the per-university figure counter C4 stored in the general-university-figure holding sphere execution area (not shown) of the RAM 203 is the hit set by the random number table per general figure. When it matches the value of the random number, it is determined to be a hit. Then, the universal figure fluctuation table (not shown) is referred to according to the gaming state, and the variable display time of the normal symbol is set (for example, 30 seconds when the prize assist function is not activated, 3 seconds when the prize assist function is activated). Etc.), and after the variable display time elapses in the normal symbol display device 83, the symbol "○" is lit up and displayed as a stop symbol (ordinary symbol). After that, the electric power releasing table (not shown) is referred to according to the game state, and the opening time of the normal electric power 64c is set (for example, 0.1 seconds when the winning assistance function is not activated, the winning assistance function is operating). 5 seconds), and the normal electric power combination 64c is opened during the opening time, and during that time, the ball is configured to be able to win the second start opening 64b.

On the other hand, if the value of the per-universal-drawing counter C4 stored in the general-universal-drawing holding area does not match the value of the random number set as a random number per general-purpose drawing table (not shown), it is determined as a loss. To be done. Then, the variable display time is set by referring to the universal figure fluctuation table (not shown) according to the game state, and after the variable display time has passed in the normal symbol display device 83, "x" as the stop symbol (ordinary symbol) The symbol “” is displayed in a lit state.

Returning to FIG. 26, the description will be continued. The RAM 203 includes, in addition to the counter buffer 203c shown in FIG. 27, a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 201 are stored, various flags and counters, and input/output. It has a work area (work area) in which values such as output (Input/Output; hereinafter abbreviated as “I/O”) are stored. It should be noted that the RAM 203 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 and data can be retained (backup) even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. ..

When the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the RAM 203 stores the stack pointer at the time of the power shutdown (including the occurrence of a power failure. The same applies to the following) and the value of each register. On the other hand, at the time of power-on (including power-on by eliminating power failure. The same applies to the following), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is returned to the state before power-off based on the information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed by the main process (see FIG. 39) when the power is turned off, and restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is performed by the startup process when the power is turned on (see FIG. 37). The power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 when the power is shut off due to a power failure or the like. When the power failure signal SG1 is input to the MPU 201, The NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 44) as the power failure process is immediately executed.

The RAM 203 further includes at least a first reserved sphere number counter 203a, a second reserved sphere number counter 203b, a first reserved sphere storage area 203d, a second reserved sphere storage area 203e, and a reserved sphere execution area 203f.

The first reserved ball number counter 203a detects the ball entering the first starting opening 64a (hereinafter referred to as the first starting) detected in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 40) that is executed periodically every 4 milliseconds. Based on the entry of the ball into the mouth 64a or the second starting opening 64b may be referred to as "starting prize"), the dynamic display of the first special symbol performed on the special symbol display device 37 (in the drum display device 81) It is a counter that counts the number of holding balls (the number of waiting times) of the variation effect of the third symbol corresponding to the first special symbol that is performed up to four times.

The first reserved ball number counter 203a is set to "0" as an initial value by the initial setting process of the RAM 203 after the power is turned on (see S117 in FIG. 37). Then, each time the winning award to the first starting opening 64a is detected and the number of retained balls of the dynamic display (variable effect) regarding the first special symbol is increased, 1 is added up to the maximum value "4" (FIG. 41). See S303). On the other hand, the first reserved ball number counter 203a is decremented by 1 each time the dynamic display (variable effect) of the first special symbol is executed (see S408 in FIG. 42).

The second holding ball number counter 203b is, like the first holding ball number counter 203a, the second starting opening 64b detected in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 40) which is regularly executed every 4 milliseconds. Based on the starting winning prize to, the dynamic display of the second special symbol performed on the special symbol display device 37 (variation effect of the third symbol corresponding to the second special symbol performed on the drum display device 81) This is a counter that counts (wait count) up to 4 times.

Like the first holding ball number counter 203a, the second holding ball number counter 203b is set to "0" as an initial value by the initial setting process of the RAM 203 after the power is turned on (see S117 in FIG. 37). Then, each time the winning a prize for the second starting opening 64b is detected and the number of retained balls of the dynamic display (variable effect) regarding the second special symbol is increased, 1 is added up to the maximum value "4" (FIG. 41). S307). On the other hand, the second holding ball number counter 203b is decremented by 1 each time the dynamic display (fluctuation effect) of the second special symbol is executed (see S405 in FIG. 42).

The value of the first reserve sphere counter 203a (that is, the reserve sphere number of the first special symbol) or the value of the second reserve sphere number counter 203b (that is, the reserve sphere number of the second special symbol) is the reserve sphere number command. Is notified to the audio lamp control device 113 (see S310 in FIG. 41). This hold ball number command is transmitted from the main controller 110 to the voice lamp controller 113 every time the start winning is detected and the first hold ball number counter 203a or the second hold ball number counter 203b is incremented by one. The command includes data regarding the value of the first reserved sphere number counter 203a and data regarding the value of the second reserved sphere number counter 203b.

The voice lamp control device 113 can acquire the value of the number of reserved balls itself of the dynamic display (fluctuation effect) of the first special symbol or the second special symbol suspended in the main control device 110 by the number of reserved balls command. it can. Thereby, in the voice lamp control device 113, it is possible to manage the number of times of suspension of the dynamic display (variable effect) of each special symbol without accessing the main control device 110. In addition, each time the start winning is detected, the main control unit 110 transmits a reserve ball number command to the voice lamp control unit 113, thereby dynamically displaying (changing) the special symbols managed by the voice lamp control unit 113. Even if the number of holding balls for (production) deviates from the number of holding balls for actual dynamic display (fluctuation production) held in main controller 110 due to the influence of noise or the like, the next received hold The deviation can be corrected by the sphere number command.

In addition, in the first embodiment, when the main control device 110 transmits a holding ball number command to the voice lamp control device 113, the holding ball number command is incremented by 1 to the first holding ball number counter 203a or the first holding ball number counter 203a. The buffer 203c for the counter (see FIG. 27) in accordance with the above-mentioned start winning that triggered addition of not only the value of the 2 reserved sphere number counter 203b but also the 1st reserved sphere number counter 203a or the 2nd reserved sphere number counter 203b. The values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the variation type counter CS1 obtained by the above are also included.

That is, when there is a start winning, each value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the variation type counter CS1 acquired from the counter buffer 203c by the main control device 110 is a holding ball. A few commands are transmitted to the voice lamp controller 113.

In the voice lamp control device 113, the variation effect based on the respective values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the variation type counter CS1 transmitted by the hold ball number command is executed. Before the change effect is performed, it is pre-read to determine what the change effect will be (whether it is a big hit, what the change time will be, etc.). Then, based on the result of the pre-reading judgment, it is decided to execute various effects, or the "holding change notice" effect content for changing the holding symbol (execution symbol) displayed on the holding display portion Db of the drum display device 81 is executed. Also, the execution timing (timing) can be determined.

In addition, you may comprise so that the command of the number of holding balls which shows the number of balls of change production and the command which shows the value of big hit random number counter C1 etc. may be transmitted separately. As the command indicating the value of the big hit random number counter C1 or the like different from the reserved ball number command, the reserved ball number command is generated at the timing of the ball entering the first starting opening 64a or the second starting opening 64b, and A command similar to the variation pattern command and the stop type command based on the ball entering (the advance variation pattern command and the advance stop type command) may be generated and transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. In this case, regarding the program for generating the advance variation pattern command and the advance stop type command, by diverting the program of the variation pattern command and the stop type command, it is possible to easily create the program.

As described above, the first reserved ball storage area 203d has the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the stop pattern selection counter C3, which are obtained from the counter buffer 203c in accordance with the detection of the start winning to the first start opening 64a. , A memory for storing each value of the fluctuation type counter CS1. When the MPU 201 detects in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 40) that the ball has won the first starting opening 64a (starting winning), the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 are output from the counter buffer 203c. It is acquired and stored in the first reserved ball storage area 203d. The first holding sphere storage area 203d has four holdings so that the data (each value of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1) corresponding to one start winning of the first special symbol can be stored (holding) up to four times. It has an area (1st reservation 1st-4th area) (refer FIG. 27).

As described above, the second holding ball storage area 203e has the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the stop pattern selection counter C3, which are obtained from the counter buffer 203c in accordance with the detection of the start winning to the second start opening 64b. , A memory for storing each value of the fluctuation type counter CS1. When the MPU 201 detects that the ball has won the second starting opening 64b (start winning) in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 40), the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 are output from the counter buffer 203c. It is acquired and stored in the second reserved ball storage area 203e. The second hold sphere storage area 203e is four hold so that the data (each value of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1) corresponding to the start winning of one of the second special symbols can be stored (hold) up to four times. It has an area (2nd reservation 1st-4th area) (refer FIG. 27).

As described above, the reserved ball execution area 203f starts the execution, or the jackpot lottery of the first special symbol or the second special symbol which is being executed, and the dynamic display of the special symbol display device 37 and the drum display device 81. And a memory for storing data (each value of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1) to be referred to in the process of setting the variation effect.

When the MPU 201 detects that it is the execution start timing of the variation effect of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the jackpot lottery of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the special symbol display device 37 and the drum display device 81. In order to execute processing such as dynamic display and setting of variable effect, data (counter C1) corresponding to each starting prize stored in the above-mentioned first reserved ball storage area 203d or second reserved ball storage area 203e. ~C3, each value of CS1), if the data corresponding to the starting prize relating to the second special symbol is stored in the second reserved ball storage area 203e, the data corresponding to one starting prize of the data is stored. , And shifts to the reserved ball execution area 203f. On the other hand, the data corresponding to the starting prize relating to the second special symbol is not stored in the second reserved ball storage area 203e, and the data corresponding to the starting prize relating to the first special symbol is stored in the first retaining ball storage area 203d. If so, the data corresponding to one of the starting prizes is shifted to the reserved ball execution area 203f. That is, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the dynamic display (fluctuation effect) regarding the second special symbol is preferentially executed, and the dynamic display (fluctuation effect) regarding the first special symbol relates to the second special symbol. It is configured to be executed on condition that the dynamic display (variable effect) is not held. The shift in the first embodiment refers to moving the data stored in one area to another area.

Here, with reference to FIG. 27 again, details of the first reserved ball storage area 203d, the second reserved ball storage area 203e, and the reserved ball execution area 203f will be described. The first reserve sphere storage area 203d, the second reserve sphere storage area 203e, and the reserve sphere execution area 203f are jackpot lottery for the first special symbol or the second special symbol, and dynamic display of the special symbol display device 37 and the drum display device 81. It is used by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 to set the variable effect and the like.

As described above, the jackpot random number counter C1 used in the jackpot lottery is used for the jackpot lottery of the first special symbol or the second special symbol and the dynamic display of the special symbol display device 37 and the drum display device 81 and the setting of the variable effect. The jackpot type counter C2 used for determining the jackpot type, the stop pattern selection counter C3 used for determining the effect mode of the variation effect, and the variation type counter CS1 used for determining the variation pattern are used. The first reserved sphere storage area 203d stores the respective values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 acquired from the counter buffer 203c by the MPU 201 when the sphere wins the first starting opening 64a (start winning). The second reserved ball storage area 203e stores the respective values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 acquired from the counter buffer 203c by the MPU 201 when the ball wins the second starting opening 64b (start winning).

The first reserved sphere storage area 203d is composed of four reserved areas (first reserved first to fourth areas). Each of the four holding areas (first holding first to fourth areas) has a jackpot random number counter storage area 203d1 that stores the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 and a jackpot type counter storage area that stores the value of the jackpot type counter C2. 203d2, a stop pattern selection counter storage area 203d3 for storing the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3, and a variation type counter storage area 203d4 for storing the value of the variation type counter CS1 are provided.

Further, the second reserved sphere storage area 203e is composed of four reserved areas (second reserved first to fourth areas) like the first reserved sphere storage area 203d. Each of the four holding areas (second holding first to fourth areas) has a jackpot random number counter storage area 203e1 for storing the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 and a jackpot type counter C2, like the first holding ball storage area 203d. The jackpot type counter storage area 203e2 for storing the value of the stop pattern selection counter, the stop pattern selection counter storage area 203e3 for storing the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the variation type counter storage area 203e4 for storing the value of the variation type counter CS1 are provided. Has been.

In the first embodiment, the jackpot random number counter storage areas 203d1 and 203e1, the jackpot type counter storage areas 203d2 and 203e2, the stop pattern selection counter storage areas 203d3 and 203e3, and the fluctuation type counter storage areas 203d4 and 203e4 are set to one. Although they are collectively provided in the one reserved ball storage areas 203d and 203e, a plurality of reserved ball storage areas may be provided for each of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1.

As described above, in the first reserved ball storage area 203d, the data (each value of each counter C1 to C3, CS1) acquired at the timing when the ball wins (start winning) in any one of the first starting openings 64a. Up to four times are stored, but in that case, in the vacant areas of the four holding areas (first holding first to fourth areas), the area number (first to fourth) is the smallest. The data is stored in. That is, as the area number is smaller, the data corresponding to the starting winning in the first starting opening 64a that is older in time is stored, and in the first reserved first area, the first starting opening 64a that is older in time is stored. The data corresponding to the starting winning a prize will be stored.

Further, in the second reserved ball storage area 203e, data (each counter C1 to C3, each value of CS1) acquired at the timing when the ball wins the second starting opening 64b (start winning) is stored up to a maximum of four times. In that case, data is stored in order from the area having the smallest area number (first to fourth) among the vacant areas of the four holding areas (second holding first to fourth areas). It That is, as the area number is smaller, the data corresponding to the start winning in the second starting opening 64b that is older in time is stored, and in the second holding first area, the second starting opening 64b that is the oldest in time is stored. The data corresponding to the starting winning a prize will be stored.

On the other hand, the reserved ball execution area 203f is composed of only one area. The holding ball execution area 203f includes a jackpot random number counter storage area 203f1 for storing the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 and a jackpot type counter C2, like the first holding ball storage area 203d or the second holding ball storage area 203e. A jackpot type counter storage area 203f2 for storing a value, a stop pattern selection counter storage area 203f3 for storing a value of the stop pattern selection counter C3, and a variation type counter storage area 203f4 for storing a value of the variation type counter CS1 are provided. There is.

When the MPU 201 determines that it is time to start execution of the variable effect, data (each value of each counter C1 to C3, CS1) is stored in the second holding first area of the second holding ball storage area 203e. In this case, the data stored in the second holding first area is shifted to each of the areas 203f1 to 203f4 of the holding ball execution area 203f. On the other hand, the MPU 201 does not store data in the second holding first storage area 203e of the second holding ball storage area 203e at the execution start timing of the fluctuating effect, and the first holding ball storage area 203d first When data is stored in the holding first area, the data stored in the first holding first area is shifted to each of the areas 203f1 to 203f4 of the holding ball execution area 203f.

Then, the data shifted to the holding ball execution area 203f is referred to in the variation start process (see FIG. 43), a jackpot lottery is performed based on the reference data and the game state, and a variation pattern corresponding to the lottery result. And the stop type. In the special symbol display device 37, under the control of the main control device 110, dynamic display is performed based on the determined variation pattern and stop type.

The fluctuation pattern and the stop type determined here are notified to the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 by the change pattern command and the stop type command. Then, under the control of the audio lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the drum display device 81 produces the variation effect based on the variation pattern and the stop type notified by the variation pattern command and the stop type command.

Details of data shift will be described. When the MPU 201 determines that the execution start timing of the variable effect has come, it determines whether or not data is stored in the second holding first area of the second holding ball storage area 203e. When it is determined that the data is stored in the second holding first area, the random number of the big hit random number counter storage area 203e1 of the second holding first area is set to the big hit random number of the holding ball execution area 203f. Shift to the counter storage area 203f1. Similarly, the random number value of the jackpot type counter storage area 203e2 of the second hold first area is shifted to the jackpot type counter storage area 203f2, and the random number value of the stop pattern selection counter storage area 203e3 of the second hold first area is changed to It shifts to the stop pattern selection counter storage area 203f3, and shifts the random number value of the variation type counter storage area 203e4 of the second holding first area to the variation type counter storage area 203f4.

Then, when the shift of the data to the holding ball execution area 203f is completed, the second holding first area becomes empty, so that the second holding ball storage area 203e is stored in each area (second to fourth) (holding). The shift processing is performed so that the data stored in (1) to (3) is packed in an area having a smaller area number by 1 (first to third areas). In the first embodiment, in the second storage area 203e for storing reserved balls, data is shifted only for the second storage areas (first to fourth) in which data is stored (held).

Here, the data shift performed for each holding area in the second holding ball storage area 203e will be described. For example, the value of the second holding ball number counter 203b when the start of the variation effect is determined is "4", and data is stored in all areas (first to fourth) of the second holding ball storage area 203e. It has been done. In this state, when the data of the second holding first area is shifted to the holding ball execution area 203f and the second holding first area becomes empty, the MPU 201 sets the data of other areas (second to fourth). Are respectively shifted to areas having smaller area numbers by 1 (first to third). That is, the data in the second reserved second area is shifted to the second reserved first area, the data in the second reserved third area is shifted to the second reserved second area, and the data in the second reserved fourth area. To the second reserved third area.

Further, for example, when the value of the second holding ball number counter 203b at the time when the start of the variation effect is determined to be “2”, the MPU 201 sets only the data of the second holding second area to the second holding second. Shift to one area and finish shifting the data. As described above, in the first embodiment, since the data shift processing is not performed for the second holding areas (third to fourth) in which the data is not stored (held), the number of data shifts is reduced. Therefore, the control load can be reduced.

It should be noted that each data in the second holding area (second to fourth) may be configured to be shifted to an area having a smaller area number by 1, regardless of the presence or absence of data. In that case, it is unnecessary to determine whether or not the data is stored (held) in the second holding area (second to fourth), and thus it is possible to easily create the program.

On the other hand, when the MPU 201 determines that no data is stored in the second hold first area of the second hold ball storage area 203e at the execution start timing of the variable effect, then the first hold It is determined whether or not data is stored in the first holding first area of the sphere storage area 203d. As a result of the determination, if the data is stored in the first holding first area, the random number value of the big hit random number counter storage area 203d1 of the first holding first area is set to the big hit random number counter storage area 203f1 of the holding ball execution area 203f. Shift to. Similarly, the random number value of the big hit type counter storage area 203d2 of the first hold first area is shifted to the big hit type counter storage area 203f2, and the random number value of the stop pattern selection counter storage area 203d3 of the first hold first area is changed to The stop pattern selection counter storage area 203f3 is shifted, and the random number value of the variation type counter storage area 203d4 of the first holding first area is shifted to the variation type counter storage area 203f4.

Then, when the shift of the data to the reserved ball execution area 203f is completed, the first reserved first area becomes empty, so that the first reserved ball storage area 203d is stored (reserved in each area (second to fourth)). The shift processing is performed so that the data stored in (1) to (3) is packed in an area having a smaller area number by 1 (first to third areas). In the first embodiment, in the first storage area 203d for storing reserved balls, data is shifted only for the first storage areas (first to fourth) in which data is stored (held).

Here, the data shift performed for each holding area in the first holding ball storage area 203d will be described. For example, the value of the first reserved sphere number counter 203a at the time of the start judgment of the variation effect is "4", and the data is stored in all the areas (first to fourth) of the first reserved sphere storage area 203d. It has been done. In this state, when the data of the first holding first area is shifted to the holding ball execution area 203f and the first holding first area becomes empty, the MPU 201 sets the data of other areas (second to fourth). Are respectively shifted to areas having smaller area numbers by 1 (first to third). That is, the data in the first reserved second area is shifted to the first reserved first area, the data in the first reserved third area is shifted to the first reserved second area, and the data in the first reserved fourth area. Is shifted to the first reserved third area.

Further, for example, when the value of the first holding ball number counter 203a at the time when the start of the variation effect is determined to be “2”, the MPU 201 sets only the data of the first holding second area to the first holding second. Shift to one area and finish shifting the data. As described above, in the first embodiment, since the data shift processing is not performed for the first holding areas (third to fourth) in which the data is not stored (held), the number of data shifts is reduced. Therefore, the control load can be reduced.

It should be noted that each data in the first holding area (second to fourth) may be configured to be shifted to an area having a smaller area number by 1, regardless of the presence or absence of data. In that case, since it is unnecessary to determine whether or not data is stored (held) in the first storage area (second to fourth), it is possible to easily create a program.

Returning to FIG. 26, the description will be continued. The input/output port 205 includes, as an input side, a switch for detecting a ball that has won the winning holes 63, 64a, 64b, and 65a and a ball that has been guided to the ball discharge path through the outlet 66. Various switches 208 including a switch group and a sensor group, a setting key 501 for setting a start-up mode when the power is turned on, and a setting for updating the probability set value by being pressed in the “setting change mode” The change switch 502 and the RAM erasing switch 503 for erasing the data stored in the RAM 203 are connected. Further, to the input/output port 205, as an output side, various solenoids 209 including a special winning opening solenoid (not shown), a special symbol display device 37, a normal symbol display device 83, and a normal symbol holding lamp 84 are connected. ing. The MPU 201 executes various processes based on the signals output from the various switches 208, 502, 503 and the state of the setting key 501.

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to perform payout control of prize balls and rental balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 212 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory and the like.

The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area in which the contents of the internal register of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and various flags and counters. , I/O and the like are stored in the work area (work area). The RAM 213 is configured to be able to retain (backup) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Note that, like the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is also configured to receive the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is shut off due to a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, an NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 44) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

An input/output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main controller 110, the payout motor 216, the firing controller 112, etc. are connected to the input/output port 215. Although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected with a prize ball detection switch for detecting the paid prize balls. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111 but not to the main control device 110.

The firing control device 112 controls the ball firing unit 112a so that when the main control device 110 issues an instruction to fire a ball, the ball launching unit 112a has a ball launching strength corresponding to the amount of rotational operation of the operation handle 51. The ball firing unit 112a includes a firing solenoid and an electromagnet, which are not shown, and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when a predetermined condition is satisfied. Specifically, the touch handle 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of the ball is turned off (not operated) on condition that the operation handle is not operated. The firing solenoid is excited corresponding to the amount of rotation of 51, and the ball is fired at an interval corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51 at intervals of approximately 0.6 seconds.

The voice lamp control device 113 outputs the voice in the voice output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, the lamp display device (illumination parts 29 to 33, the display lamp 34, the confirmation lamp 311, the notification lamps 303a and 305a, the lower front side). LED 414c, front right LED 415c, front left LED 416c, rear upper LED 422c, rear lower LED 424, etc.) output of turning on and off, and a drum display device 81 such as a variation effect and a continuous notice effect. This is for controlling the setting of the display mode of the effect shown.

The MPU 221 which is an arithmetic unit has a ROM 222 which stores a control program executed by the MPU 221 and fixed value data and the like, and a RAM 223 which is used as a work memory and the like. Details of the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 will be described later.

An input/output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, the display control device 114, the audio output device 226, the lamp display device 227, the frame button 22, and the like are connected to the input/output port 225. In the first embodiment, the command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 only in one direction, and the command is not transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 to the main control device 110. ing. On the other hand, the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 are configured to be able to send and receive commands to and from each other.

Further, the audio lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, the stage of the effect displayed on the drum display device 81 is changed, or the “supermarket” is displayed. The voice output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are controlled so as to change the rear image such as the “reach” effect mode, and the contents based on the depression of the frame button 22 to the display control device 114 are displayed on the drum display device 81. Tell it to run.

The display control device 114 is connected to the voice lamp control device 113 and the drum display device 81, and based on the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, a variation effect of the third symbol on the drum display device 81 and a continuous notice effect. To control.

The power supply device 115 has a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each unit of the pachinko machine 10, and a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to power failure or the like. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies a necessary operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As its outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in a voltage of 24 V AC supplied from the outside, and 12 V voltage for driving various switches such as various switches 208, solenoids such as the solenoid 209, and motors, A 5 volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and the 12 volt voltage, 5 volt voltage, and backup voltage are supplied to the control devices 110 to 114 and the like as necessary.

The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout controller 111 when the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the voltage of DC stable 24V which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power interruption, power interruption) occurs when this voltage becomes less than 22V. Then, the power failure signal SG1 is output to the NMI terminals of the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 44). The power supply unit 251 outputs the voltage of 5 V which is the drive voltage of the control system for a sufficient time to execute the NMI interrupt processing even after the voltage of DC stable 24 V becomes less than 22 V. Is maintained at a normal value. Therefore, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process.

Here, with reference to FIG. 33, a detailed electrical configuration of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 33 is a block diagram mainly showing the electrical configuration of the audio lamp control device 113. In the ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113, in addition to various control programs executed by the MPU 221, as fixed value data, a big hit random number table 222a, a big hit type table 222b, a stop pattern table 222c, a change pattern table 222d, and a light guide plate lighting. At least a pattern table 222e, a confirmation lamp lighting pattern table 222f, and a reel control table 222g are stored.

Of these tables 222a to 222g, the tables 222a to 222d are the same as the jackpot random number table 202a, the jackpot type table 202b, the stop pattern table 202d, and the variation pattern table 202e provided in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110. is there.

The voice lamp control device 113 is a jackpot random number counter C1, a jackpot type counter C2, a stop pattern selection counter C3, and a variation type, which are acquired from the counter buffer 203c by the main controller 110 in response to the start winning and are transmitted by the hold ball number command. The prefetching process is configured to be executable based on each value of the counter CS1 and the jackpot random number table 222a, the jackpot type table 222b, the stop pattern table 222c, and the variation pattern table 222d.

Then, by this pre-reading process, what kind of effect the pending variable effect that is the target of the pre-reading process will be as a result (whether it is a big hit, whether it is a "reach display", etc.) Before the execution of the variable effect, to decide the execution of various effects, or to change the display mode of the hold symbol displayed on the hold display section Db "holding change notice" effect contents (and execution time (Timing)) is executed.

The voice lamp control device 113 also suggests a jackpot probability setting value to the player based on the variation pattern and the probability setting value corresponding to the variation pattern command transmitted by the main control device 110. And the contents (type and timing) of the “setting suggestion effect” are selected by lottery.

The light guide plate lighting pattern table 222e includes the first decorative symbol group 421 of the front light guide plate 410 and the rear light guide plate 420, based on whether or not the change effect is generated, the change pattern, and the value of the light guide pattern lottery counter 223d described later. Is a table referred to for determining whether or not to execute the second decorative symbol group 411, the third decorative symbol group 412, and the fourth decorative symbol group 413 and their contents. The details of the light guide plate lighting pattern table 222e will be described later.

Further, the fixed lamp lighting pattern table 222f is referred to in order to determine the lighting timing of the fixed lamp 311 during execution of the variable effect, based on whether or not the variable effect is hit and the value of the fixed lamp timing lottery counter 223e described later. It is a table that is played. The details of the fixed lamp lighting pattern table 222f will be described later.

Further, the reel control table 222g is referred to in order to determine the drive patterns of the left reel LR, the middle reel CR, and the right reel RR of the drum display device 81 according to the variation pattern of the variation effect of the third symbol and the stop symbol. It is a table that is played.

In the RAM 223, the variation start flag 223a, the sub first reserved ball number counter 223b, the sub second reserved ball number counter 223c, the light guide pattern lottery counter 223d, the fixed lamp timing lottery counter 223e, the first reserved information storage area 223f, the At least a 2 hold information storage area 223g and an execution information storage area 223h are provided.

The fluctuation start flag 223a is a flag indicating that the fluctuation effect should be started in the ON state. The fluctuation start flag 223a is set to OFF as an initial value when the power is turned on, and is turned ON when the stop type command output from the main controller 110 is received (see S1206 in FIG. 47). Then, it is turned off when the variation effect is set on the drum display device 81 (see S1402 in FIG. 48).

The MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113, when the variation start flag 223a is turned on, when there is a variation effect in the standby state, the variation effect setting process for executing the variation effect in the standby state. (See S1402 to S1415 in FIG. 48).

The sub-first reserve sphere counter 223b, similarly to the first reserve sphere counter 203a of the main controller 110, the variation effect of the first special symbol (dynamic) performed on the drum display device 81 (special symbol display device 37). It is a display), and is a counter that counts up to 4 times the number of holding balls (the number of waiting times) of the variation effect of the first special symbol that is held in the main control device 110.

As described above, the voice lamp control device 113 cannot directly access the main control device 110 to acquire the value of the first reserved ball number counter 203a stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 stores/updates the number of holding balls based on the command (holding ball soot command) transmitted from the main control device 110, and the sub first holding ball number counter 223b stores the holding ball. It is designed to manage numbers.

Specifically, the voice lamp control device 113 adds the holding ball number of the variation effect of the first special symbol by the ball entering the first starting opening 64a, and the main holding device 110 of the first holding ball number counter 203a. When the number of holding balls command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received when the values are added, the value after addition of the first holding ball number counter 203a of the main control device 110 included in the holding ball number command ( That is, the number of reserved balls of the variation effect of the first special symbol which is reserved in the main controller 110) is stored in the sub first reserved ball number counter 223b (see S1211 of FIG. 47).

Further, the voice lamp control device 113 is a variation pattern command corresponding to the variation effect of the first special symbol transmitted from the main control device 110 when the value of the first holding ball number counter 203a is subtracted in the main control device 110. And, when receiving the stop type command and setting the mode of the variation effect of the first special symbol in the drum display device 81 in accordance with the reception thereof, the value of the sub first reserved ball number counter 223b is decremented by 1 (updated). (See S1406 in FIG. 48). In this way, the voice lamp control device 113 updates the value of the sub first holding ball number counter 223b in accordance with the command transmitted from the main control device 110 in accordance with the update of the first holding ball number counter 203a. The value of the sub first reserved ball number counter 223b can be updated while synchronizing with the first reserved ball number counter 203a of the device 110.

Sub second reserve sphere counter 223c, similarly to the second reserve sphere counter 203b of the main controller 110, the variation effect of the second special symbol (dynamic symbol display) performed on the drum display device 81 (special symbol display device 37) (dynamic) It is a display), and is a counter that counts the number of holding balls (the number of waiting times) of the variation effect of the second special symbol that is held in the main controller 110 up to a maximum of four times.

As described above, the voice lamp control device 113 cannot directly access the main control device 110 to acquire the value of the second held ball number counter 203b stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. Therefore, in the voice lamp control device 113, the number of reserved balls is stored and updated based on the command transmitted from the main control device 110, and the number of reserved balls is managed by the sub second reserved number of balls counter 223c. Is becoming

Specifically, the voice lamp control device 113 adds the number of reserved balls of the variation effect of the second special symbol by the ball entering the second starting opening 64b, and the main controller 110 displays the second reserved ball number counter 203b. When the number of holding balls command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received when the value is added, the value after addition of the second holding ball number counter 203b of the main control device 110 included in the holding ball number command ( That is, the number of holding balls of the variation effect of the second special symbol held in the main controller 110 is stored in the sub second holding ball number counter 223c (see S1211 of FIG. 47).

Further, the voice lamp control device 113 is a variation pattern command corresponding to the variation effect of the second special symbol transmitted from the main control device 110 when the value of the second holding ball number counter 203b is subtracted in the main control device 110. And, when the stop type command is received, and the mode of the variation effect of the second special symbol in the drum display device 81 is set in accordance with the reception thereof, the value of the sub second reserved ball number counter 223c is decremented by 1 (updated). (See S1409 of FIG. 48). In this way, the voice lamp control device 113 updates the value of the sub second holding ball number counter 223c in accordance with the command transmitted from the main control device 110 in accordance with the update of the second holding ball number counter 203b. The value of the sub second reserved sphere number counter 223c can be updated while synchronizing with the second reserved sphere number counter 203b of the device 110.

The values of the sub first holding ball number counter 223b and the sub second holding ball number counter 223c are used for displaying the holding symbol and the execution symbol on the drum display device 81. That is, the voice lamp control device 113 stores the number of holding balls indicated by the command in the sub first holding ball number counter 223b or the sub second holding ball number counter 223c in response to the reception of the holding ball number command (FIG. 47) (S1211), at the timing of updating the value of the sub first reserved sphere number counter 223b or the sub second reserved sphere number counter 223c in response to the reception of the variation pattern command and the stop type command (S1406 of FIG. 48 or (See S1409), a display reserved device number command is issued to notify the display control device 114 of the values of the sub first reserved ball number counter 223b and the sub second reserved ball number counter 223c after storage or update. Send to.

When the display control device 114 receives the display holding sphere number command, the value of the holding sphere number indicated by the command, that is, the sub first holding sphere number counter 223b and the sub second holding sphere of the voice lamp control device 113 are received. The drawing of the image is controlled so that the hold symbol for the value of the number counter 223c and the execution symbol indicating the variation effect being executed are displayed on the hold indicator Db (see FIG. 3) of the drum display device 81.

As described above, the value of the sub first reserved sphere counter 223b is changed in synchronization with the first reserved sphere counter 203a of the main controller 110, and the sub second reserved sphere counter 223c is The value is changed in synchronization with the second reserved ball number counter 203b of the main controller 110. Therefore, the number of holding symbols displayed on the holding display portion Db (see FIG. 3) of the drum display device 81 is also synchronized with the values of the first holding ball number counter 203a and the second holding ball number counter 203b of the main controller 110. You can change it while doing it. Therefore, the drum display device 81 can accurately display the number of holding balls for which the variation effect is held.

Does the light guide pattern lottery counter 223d turn on and display the first decorative symbol group 421, the second decorative symbol group 411, the third decorative symbol 412 or the fourth decorative symbol group 413 on the front light guide plate 410 or the rear light guide plate 420? This is a counter used for lottery.

The value of the light guide pattern lottery counter 223d is set to "0" as an initial value when the power is turned on, and thereafter, in a counter updating process (see S1112 of FIG. 46) of the main process of the voice lamp control device 113, a predetermined range is set. (For example, "0 to 99") are sequentially incremented by one, and after reaching a maximum value (for example, "99" in the case of a counter that can take a value of "0 to 99"), the configuration returns to "0" Has become. The value of the light guide pattern lottery counter 223d is updated once (for example, incremented by 1) every time the main process loops once.

As described above, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives the command (fluctuation pattern command and display type command) related to the variation effect of the third symbol, the content of the variation effect (for example, win/loss, effect mode, variation element, etc.). ) According to the light guide pattern lottery counter 223d and the light guide plate lighting pattern table 222e, the first decorative symbol group 421, the second decorative symbol group 411, the third decorative symbol group 421, the third decorative symbol group 411, and the third decorative symbol group 411 in the front light guide plate 410 or the rear light guide plate 420. Whether or not to display the decorative design 412 or the fourth decorative design group 413 is displayed by lottery (see FIG. 50).

Here, with reference to FIG. 34, details of the light guide plate lighting pattern table 222e in the first embodiment will be described. FIG. 34 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the light guide plate lighting pattern table 222e stored in the ROM 222. When the voice lamp controller 113 receives the variation pattern command and the stop type command from the main controller 110, it refers to the light guide plate lighting pattern table 222e based on the value of the light guide pattern lottery counter 223d at that time, The lighting mode of the second decorative symbol group 411, the third decorative symbol 412 or the fourth decorative symbol group 413 of the front light guide plate 410, or the first decorative symbol group 421 of the rear light guide plate 420 is determined.

As shown in FIG. 34, in the light guide plate lighting pattern table 222e, the variation effect of each special symbol is divided into a case of "miss" and a case of "big hit". Then, with respect to the divided group, it is further divided for each effect mode, in which, the second decorative symbol group 411, the third decorative symbol group 412 or the fourth decorative symbol group 413 of the front light guide plate 410, or the rear side. The value of the light guide pattern lottery counter 223d corresponding to the lighting mode of the first decorative symbol group 421 of the light guide plate 420 is assigned.

Specifically, at the time of the "miss" of the variable effect, the "non-reach" effect mode, the "normal reach" effect mode, the "super reach" effect mode, which can be selected at the "miss" time, It is divided into groups for "Special Reach" performance mode. In addition, at the time of a big hit, it is divided into a group for "normal reach" effect mode, a "super reach" effect mode, and a "special reach" effect mode. Then, in the divided groups, “foam” indicating the fourth decorative symbol group 413, “Sakura” indicating the second decorative symbol group 411, “Sunfish” indicating the third decorative symbol group 412, second decorative symbol group 411 and The possible values of the light guide pattern lottery counter 223d are associated with the respective lighting symbols of “cherry blossoms & sunfish” showing the third decorative symbol 412 and “fish group” showing the first decorative symbol group 421.

In the light guide plate lighting pattern table 222e, any of the first decorative symbol group 421, the second decorative symbol group 411, the third decorative symbol group 412, and the fourth decorative symbol group 413 are included in the "non-reach" effect mode at the time of "missing". (Hereinafter, the first decorative symbol group 421, the second decorative symbol group 411, the third decorative symbol group 412, and the fourth decorative symbol group 413 may be collectively referred to as "each decorative symbol 411, 412, 413, 421". The value of the light guide pattern lottery counter 223d is associated only with "none" that does not light up, and light is guided for "bubble", "cherry tree", "sunfish", "cherry tree & sunfish", and "fish school". The value of the pattern lottery counter 223d is not assigned.

In the example shown in FIG. 34, the correspondence between the value of the light guide pattern lottery counter 223d and the lighting pattern in the “non-reach” effect mode at the time of “miss” is “0 to 99” for “none”. ing. In addition, since no value is assigned to “bubble”, “sakura”, “sunfish”, “cherry & sunfish”, and “fish school”, it is described as “−”.

That is, when the "non-reach" effect mode at the time of "miss" is selected, the lighting (non-lighting) mode of "none" in which any of the decorative patterns 411, 412, 413, 421 is not lighted and displayed is 100%, It is set to be selected in proportion, and the lighting mode of "bubble", "cherry blossom", "sunfish", "cherry & sunfish" and "fish school" is set to be selected in proportion of 0%. ..

Therefore, in the lighting mode of each decorative design 411, 412, 413, 421 selected in the "non-reach" effect mode at the time of "miss", the lighting mode (non-lighting) of "none" is selected without exception (100%). The other decorative patterns 411, 412, 413, 421 are not turned on.

In the light guide plate lighting pattern table 222e, the value of the light guide pattern lottery counter 223d is associated with "none", "bubbles", "cherry blossoms" and "sunfish" in the "normal reach" effect mode at the time of "miss". The value of the light guide pattern lottery counter 223d is not assigned to “Sakura & Sunfish” and “Fish School”.

In the example shown in FIG. 34, the correspondence between the value of the light guide pattern lottery counter 223d and the lighting pattern in the "normal reach" effect mode at the time of "miss" is "0 to 39" or "bubble" for "none". “40-69”, “Sakura” is “70-89”, and “Sunfish” is “90-99”. It should be noted that no value is assigned to "Sakura & Sunfish" and "School of fish", so it is indicated as "-".

That is, when the "normal reach" effect mode at the time of "loss" is selected, the lighting (non-lighting) mode of "none" is 40%, the lighting mode of "bubble" is 30%, and the lighting mode of "cherry blossom" is The lighting mode of 20% and "Sunfish" is set to be selected at a rate of 10%, and the lighting mode of "Sakura & Sunfish" and "Fish school" is set to be selected at a rate of 0%. There is.

Therefore, in the lighting mode of each decorative pattern 411, 412, 413, 421 selected in the "normal reach" effect mode at the time of "miss", the lighting (non-lighting) mode of "none" is easily selected (40%). , "Bubble", "cherry blossom" or "Sunfish" is also configured to be selected.

In addition, in the "non-reach" effect mode at the time of "miss" and the "normal reach" effect mode at the time of "miss" described later, the lighting mode of "Sakura & Sunfish" and "fish school" should not be selected. The value of the light pattern lottery counter 223d is not associated. In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when "Sakura & Sunfish" or "Fish School" is lit, the "Super Reach" effect mode or the "Special Reach" effect mode (hereinafter, " This may be referred to as a “super reach or more” presentation mode”). Therefore, in the “non-reach” effect mode in which “super reach or higher” does not appear and in the “normal reach” effect mode, the lighting modes of “Sakura & Sunfish” and “fish school” are set not to be selected.

In the light guide plate lighting pattern table 222e, the light guide pattern lottery counter 223d is set to "foam", "cherry tree", "sunfish", "cherry tree & sunfish", and "fish school" in the "super reach" effect mode at the time of "miss". The value of the light guide pattern lottery counter 223d is not assigned to “none”.

In the example shown in FIG. 34, the correspondence between the value of the light guide pattern lottery counter 223d and the lighting pattern in the “super reach” effect mode at the time of “miss” is “0 to 39” and “cherry blossom” for “foam”. "40 to 69", "Sunfish" to "70 to 89", "Sakura & Sunfish" to "90 to 97", and "Fish School" to "98,99" There is. It should be noted that no value is assigned to “none”, so it is indicated as “−”.

That is, when the "super reach" effect mode at the time of "miss" is selected, the "foam" lighting mode is 40%, the "sakura" lighting mode is 30%, and the "Sunfish" lighting mode is 20%. The lighting mode of "Sakura & Sunfish" is set to be selected at a rate of 8%, the lighting mode of "Fish School" is set at a rate of 2%, and the lighting (non-lighting) mode of "None" is selected at a rate of 0%. It is set to be done.

Therefore, in the lighting mode of each decorative pattern 411, 412, 413, 421 selected in the “super reach” effect mode at the time of “miss”, the lighting (non-lighting) mode of “bubble” is easily selected (40%). However, "cherry blossom", "sunfish", "cherry blossom & sunfish", or "fish school" can be selected.

In the light guide plate lighting pattern table 222e, the light guide pattern lottery counter 223d for "foam", "cherry tree", "sunfish", "cherry tree & sunfish", and "fish school" is included in the "special reach" effect mode at the time of "miss". The value of the light guide pattern lottery counter 223d is not assigned to “none”.

In the example shown in FIG. 34, the correspondence between the value of the light guide pattern lottery counter 223d and the lighting pattern in the "special reach" effect mode at the time of "miss" is "0 to 49" or "cherry tree" for "foam". "50 to 79", "Sunfish" to "80 to 94", "Sakura & Sunfish" to "95 to 98", and "Fish School" to "99". It should be noted that no value is assigned to “none”, so it is indicated as “−”.

That is, when the "special reach" effect mode at the time of "miss" is selected, the lighting mode of "bubble" is 50%, the lighting mode of "Sakura" is 30%, the lighting mode of "Sunfish" is 15%, The lighting mode of "Sakura & Sunfish" is set to be selected at a rate of 4%, the lighting mode of "Fish School" is set at a rate of 1%, and the lighting (non-lighting) mode of "None" is selected at a rate of 0%. It is set to be done.

Therefore, in the lighting mode of each decorative pattern 411, 412, 413, 421 selected in the "special reach" effect mode at the time of "miss", the lighting (non-lighting) mode of "bubble" is easily selected (50%). However, "cherry blossom", "sunfish", "cherry blossom & sunfish", or "fish school" can be selected.

The value of the light guide pattern lottery counter 223d is not associated with the "super reach" effect mode and the "special reach" effect mode so that the "none" lighting mode is not selected. This is because in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when the "super reach or higher" effect mode is executed, it is determined that some effect is executed in the front light guide plate 410 or the rear light guide plate 420. is there. As a result, when the "super reach or higher" effect mode is executed, some effect is always executed in the front light guide plate 410 or the rear light guide plate 420, and the "reach display" effect and the front light guide plate 410 or the rear light guide plate are performed. By combining with the effect of 420, the jackpot expectation degree in the variable effect is set to be able to be suggested to the player in a composite manner.

In the light guide plate lighting pattern table 222e, the light guide pattern lottery counter 223d is set to "none", "bubbles", "cherry blossoms", and "sunfish" in the "normal reach" effect mode at the time of "big hit" as in the case of "miss". The value of the light guide pattern lottery counter 223d is not assigned to “Sakura & Sunfish” and “Fish School”.

In the example shown in FIG. 34, the correspondence between the value of the light guide pattern lottery counter 223d and the lighting pattern in the "normal reach" effect mode at the time of "big hit" is "0 to 9" and "bubble" for "none". “10-29”, “Sakura” is “30-59”, and “Sunfish” is “60-99”. It should be noted that no value is assigned to "Sakura & Sunfish" and "School of fish", so it is indicated as "-".

That is, when the "normal reach" effect mode at the time of "big hit" is selected, the lighting (non-lighting) mode of "none" is 10%, the lighting mode of "bubble" is 20%, and the lighting mode of "sakura" is The lighting mode of 30% and "Sunfish" is set to be selected at a rate of 40%, and the lighting mode of "Sakura & Sunfish" and "Fish school" is set to be selected at a rate of 0%. There is.

Therefore, in the lighting mode of each of the decorative patterns 411, 412, 413, 421 selected in the "normal reach" effect mode at the time of "big hit", the lighting mode of "Sunfish" is easily selected (40%), but "none" , "Bubble", "cherry blossom" or "Sunfish" is also configured to be selected.

The value of the light guide pattern lottery counter 223d is not associated with the "normal reach" effect mode at the time of "big hit" so that the lighting modes of "Sakura & Sunfish" and "Fish School" are not selected. In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when "Sakura & Sunfish" or "Fish School" is lit, the "Super Reach" effect mode or the "Special Reach" effect mode (hereinafter, " This may be referred to as a “super reach or more” presentation mode”). Therefore, even if a big hit occurs, the lighting mode of "Sakura & Sunfish" and "School of fish" is set not to be selected in the "normal reach" effect mode when the "big hit" does not show "super reach or above". ing.

In the light guide plate lighting pattern table 222e, the “super reach” effect mode at the time of “big hit” is the same as that at the time of “miss”, that is, “bubble”, “sakura”, “sunfish”, “cherry & sunfish” and “fish school”. Is associated with the value of the light guide pattern lottery counter 223d, and the value of the light guide pattern lottery counter 223d is not assigned to “none”.

In the example shown in FIG. 34, the correspondence between the value of the light guide pattern lottery counter 223d and the lighting pattern in the "super reach" effect mode at the time of "big hit" is "0, 1" for "foam" and "cherry blossom". "2-9", "Sunfish" is "10-19", "Sakura & Sunfish" is "20-49", and "Fish School" is "50-99". There is. It should be noted that no value is assigned to “none”, so it is indicated as “−”.

That is, when the "super reach" effect mode at the time of "big hit" is selected, the lighting mode of "bubble" is 2%, the lighting mode of "Sakura" is 8%, the lighting mode of "Sunfish" is 10%, The lighting mode of "Sakura & Sunfish" is set to be selected at a rate of 30%, the lighting mode of "Fish School" is set at a rate of 50%, and the lighting (non-lighting) mode of "None" is selected at a rate of 0%. It is set to be done.

Therefore, in the lighting mode of each decorative pattern 411, 412, 413, 421 selected in the "super reach" effect mode of "big hit", the lighting mode of "fish school" is easily selected (50%) ", "Sakura", "Sunfish" or "Sakura & Sunfish" is also configured to be selected.

In the light guide plate lighting pattern table 222e, the "special reach" effect mode at the time of "big hit" is "foam", "cherry tree", "sunfish", "cherry tree & sunfish", and "fish school" as in the case of "miss". Is associated with the value of the light guide pattern lottery counter 223d, and the value of the light guide pattern lottery counter 223d is not assigned to “none”.

In the example shown in FIG. 34, the correspondence between the value of the light guide pattern lottery counter 223d and the lighting pattern in the "special reach" effect mode at the time of "big hit" is "0 to 4" and "cherry tree" for "bubbles". "5-19", "Sunfish" is "20-39", "Sakura & Sunfish" is "40-59", and "Fish School" is "60-99". There is. It should be noted that no value is assigned to “none”, so it is indicated as “−”.

That is, when the "special reach" effect mode during "big hit" is selected, the "foam" lighting mode is 5%, the "sakura" lighting mode is 15%, and the "Sunfish" lighting mode is 20%. 20% of the lighting mode of "Sakura & Sunfish" and 40% of the lighting mode of "Fish School" are set to be selected, and the lighting (non-lighting) mode of "None" is set to 0%. It is set to be done.

Therefore, in the lighting mode of each decorative pattern 411, 412, 413, 421 selected in the "special reach" effect mode during the "big hit", the "fish school" lighting mode is easily selected (40%) ", "Sakura", "Sunfish" or "Sakura & Sunfish" is also configured to be selected.

As described above, by combining the production of the "reach display" and the production of the front light guide plate 410 or the rear light guide plate 420, the jackpot expectation degree in the variation production can be configured to be suggested to the player in a composite manner, and a plurality of By executing the variable effect in the effect device, it is possible to enrich the variation of the effect and improve the interest of the game.

Returning to FIG. 33, the description will be continued. The confirmation lamp timing lottery counter 223e is a counter used for lottery to determine whether or not the confirmation lamp 311 is turned on and the lighting timing in the variation effect of the third symbol.

The value of the fixed lamp timing lottery counter 223e is set to "0" as an initial value when the power is turned on, and then, in a counter updating process (see S1112 of FIG. 46) of the main process of the audio lamp control device 113, a predetermined range is set. (For example, "0 to 99") are sequentially incremented by one, and after reaching the maximum value (for example, "99" in the case of a counter that can take a value of "0 to 99"), the configuration returns to "0". Has become. The value of the fixed ramp timing lottery counter 223e is updated once (for example, incremented by 1) every time the main processing loops once.

As described above, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives the command (fluctuation pattern command and display type command) related to the variation effect of the third symbol, the content of the variation effect (for example, win/loss, effect mode, variation element, etc.). ), the fixed lamp timing lottery counter 223e and the fixed lamp lighting pattern table 222f are referred to, and whether or not the fixed lamp 311 is turned on and the lighting timing are randomly selected in the variable effect (see FIG. 49).

Here, with reference to FIG. 35, details of the finalized lamp lighting pattern table 222f in the first embodiment will be described. FIG. 35 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the confirmed lamp lighting pattern table 222f stored in the ROM 222. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the variation pattern command and the stop type command from the main control device 110, when a “big hit” occurs in the variation effect, the value of the fixed lamp timing lottery counter 223e at that time is set. Based on the confirmation lamp lighting pattern table 222f, the lighting timing of the confirmation lamp 311 is determined. In the first embodiment, when the fluctuating effect is lost, the confirmation lamp 311 is configured not to light at any timing, while when the jackpot is won in the fluctuating effect, any timing in the fluctuating effect is generated. The confirmation lamp 311 is always turned on. Even if the jackpot is won, there may be a pattern in which the confirmation lamp 311 is not turned on.

As shown in FIG. 35, in the fixed lamp lighting pattern table 222f, the variation effect of each special symbol is divided into a case of “miss” and a case of “big hit”. Then, the divided groups are further divided for each effect mode, in which the timing of "from the start of fluctuation to the end of high speed fluctuation" during execution of the variable element of "high speed fluctuation", "pseudo fluctuation" Of the variable of "reach formation-before development", the variable of "super reach" or the variable of "special reach" during the execution of the variable of "low speed fluctuation" or the variable of "low speed fluctuation" The value of the fixed ramp timing lottery counter 223e corresponding to the timing of "after development-before re-change" being executed, the timing of "re-change-fixed" when the variable element of "re-change" is being executed or when the symbol is fixed Are allocated respectively.

Specifically, at the time of a big hit, it is divided into a group for a "normal reach" effect mode, a "super reach" effect mode, and a "special reach" effect mode. Then, in the divided groups, for each lighting timing of "from start of change to end of high-speed change", "from reach formation to before development", "after development-before re-change", and "re-change-confirm" The possible values of the confirmed ramp timing lottery counter 223e are associated with each other. Since the confirmation lamp 311 is configured so as not to be lit at the time of the “miss” of the fluctuating effect, for all the effect modes that can be selected at the time of the “miss”, the lighting timing is set to “none”. All possible values of the fixed lamp timing lottery counter 223e are associated with each other.

In the fixed lamp lighting pattern table 222f, the value of the fixed lamp timing lottery counter 223e is associated only with "re-fluctuation-determined" in the "normal reach" effect mode at the time of "big hit", and "from fluctuation start to high-speed fluctuation end" The values of the fixed ramp timing lottery counter 223e are not allocated to "," "from reach formation to before development" and "after development to before re-change".

In the example shown in FIG. 35, the correspondence between the value of the fixed lamp timing lottery counter 223e and the lighting timing in the "normal reach" effect mode at the time of "big hit" is "0 to 99" for "re-fluctuation-confirmation", Has become. It should be noted that values are not assigned to “from start of change to end of high-speed change”, “from reach formation to before development” and “after development to before re-change”, and thus are represented by “−”.

That is, when the "normal reach" effect mode at the time of "big hit" is selected, the lighting timing of "re-change-confirm", which is just before the change effect ends, is set to be selected at a rate of 100%. Set so that the lighting timing of "from start of change to end of high-speed change", "from reach formation to before development", and "after development to before re-change" is 0%, which is in the middle of change production. Has been done.

Therefore, in the lighting timing of the confirmation lamp 311 selected in the "normal reach" effect mode at the time of "big hit", the lighting timings of "re-variation to confirmation" are all selected (100%), and at other lighting timings. The confirmation lamp 311 is set not to be turned on.

In the confirmation lamp lighting pattern table 222f, the "super reach" effect mode at the time of "big hit" is "from fluctuation start to high speed fluctuation end", "from reach formation to pre-development", "after development-before re-variation", and The value of the fixed ramp timing lottery counter 223e is associated with "re-fluctuation to fixed".

In the example shown in FIG. 35, the correspondence between the value of the fixed lamp timing lottery counter 223e and the lighting timing in the "super reach" effect mode at the time of "big hit" is "0" for "from fluctuation start to high speed fluctuation end". ~9", "10-29" for "reach formation-before development", "30-59" for "after development-before re-change", and "60-" for "re-change-confirmation". It is 99".

That is, when the "super reach" effect mode at the time of "big hit" is selected, the lighting timing of "from fluctuation start to high speed fluctuation end" is 10%, and the lighting timing of "from reach formation to before development" is 20%. The lighting timing of "after development-before re-change" is set to 30%, and the lighting timing of "re-change-confirmation" is set to 40%.

Therefore, in the lighting timing of the confirmation lamp 311 selected in the "super reach" performance mode during "big hit", the lighting timing of "re-fluctuation-confirmation", which is the final part of the variation performance, is easily selected (40%). However, “from start of change to end of high speed change”, “from reach formation to before development” or “after development to before re-change” can be selected.

In the confirmation lamp lighting pattern table 222f, the "special reach" effect mode at the time of "big hit" is "from fluctuation start to high speed fluctuation end", "from reach formation to pre-development", "after development-before re-variation", and The value of the fixed ramp timing lottery counter 223e is associated with "re-fluctuation to fixed".

In the example shown in FIG. 35, the correspondence between the value of the fixed lamp timing lottery counter 223e and the lighting timing in the "special reach" effect mode at the time of "big hit" is "0" for "from fluctuation start to high speed fluctuation end". ~19", "20-39" for "reach formation-before development", "40-69" for "post-development-before re-change", and "70-" for "re-change-confirmation". It is 99".

That is, when the "special reach" effect mode at the time of "big hit" is selected, the lighting timing of "from fluctuation start to high speed fluctuation end" is 20%, and the lighting timing of "from reach formation to before development" is 20%. The lighting timing of "after development-before re-change" is set to 30%, and the lighting timing of "re-change-confirmation" is set to 30%.

Therefore, in the lighting timing of the confirmation lamp 311 selected in the "special reach" effect mode during "big hit", the lighting timing of "after development-before re-change" or "re-change-decision", which is the latter half of the variation effect. Is configured to be easily selected (30%), but the first half part of the variation effect, "from variation start to high-speed variation end" or "reach formation to pre-development" is more easily selected than the "super reach" effect mode. To be done.

In this way, when the jackpot is won in the variation effect, the confirmation lamp 311 is turned on at various timings to indicate to the player that the jackpot will be generated, thereby creating a surprising game and playing the game. The interest can be improved.

Further, the lottery regarding the lighting of the confirmation lamp 311 and the lottery regarding the lighting of the first decorative symbol group 421, the second decorative symbol group 411, the third decorative symbol 412 or the fourth decorative symbol group 413 are separately performed. Therefore, according to each lottery result, the confirmation lamp 311 is turned on, and the first decorative symbol group 421, the second decorative symbol group 411, the third decorative symbol group 412, or the fourth decorative symbol group 413 is illuminated, the confirm lamp. A pattern in which 311 and the first decorative symbol group 421, the second decorative symbol group 411, the third decorative symbol 412 or the fourth decorative symbol group 413 are turned on together, and the finalizing lamp 311 is not illuminated in the first decorative symbol group 421, A pattern in which the second decorative symbol group 411, the third decorative symbol group 412, or the fourth decorative symbol group 413 is turned on is configured to exist. With such a configuration, the jackpot expectation degree can be easily calculated for each effect, and the design of the game specification can be facilitated.

Returning to FIG. 33, the description will be continued. The first hold information storage area 223f is information for performing a variation effect of the first special symbol that is being held, that is, is acquired from the counter buffer 203c with the start winning in the main control device 110, and is a hold ball number command. This is an area for storing the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the variation type counter CS1 related to the variation effect of the first special symbol transmitted by.

The voice lamp control device 113 uses the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the first holding information storage area 223f and the tables 222a to 222d stored in the ROM 222 to change the first special symbol. It is configured to execute a performance.

The second hold information storage area 223g is information for performing a variation effect of the second special symbol that is being held, that is, is acquired from the counter buffer 203c according to the start winning in the main control device 110, and is a hold ball number command. This is an area for storing the values of the big hit random number counter C1, the big hit type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the change type counter CS1 related to the variation effect of the second different symbol transmitted by.

The voice lamp control device 113 uses the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the second holding information storage area 223g and the tables 222a to 222d stored in the ROM 222 to change the second special symbol. It is configured to execute a performance.

The execution information storage area 223h is information on the variation effect of the first special symbol or the second special symbol that is being executed on the drum display device 81, that is, is acquired from the counter buffer 203c with the start winning in the main controller 110 and is held. This is an area for storing the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the fluctuation type counter CS1.

When the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 detects that it is the execution start timing of the variation effect, in order to execute the setting of the variation effect of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the above-mentioned first hold information storage Information for performing a variable effect stored in the first holding information storage first area of the area 223f or the second holding information storage second area of the second holding information storage area 223g (counters C1 to C3, CS1, etc.). Value of each) is shifted to this execution information storage area 223h.

Here, with reference to FIG. 36, details of the first suspension information storage area 223f, the second suspension information storage area 223g, and the execution information storage area 223h will be described. FIG. 36 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the first suspension information storage area 223f, the second suspension information storage area 223g, and the execution information storage area 223h.

The first hold information storage area 223f has four areas, that is, first hold information storage first to fourth areas. A jackpot random number counter storage area 223f1 in which the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 is stored and a jackpot type counter storage area in which the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is stored in each of the first to fourth information storage first to fourth areas. 223f2, a stop pattern selection counter storage area 223f3 in which the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 is stored, and a variation type counter storage area 223f4 in which the value of the variation type counter CS1 is stored are provided at least.

The second hold information storage area 223g, like the first hold information storage area 223f, has four areas, that is, second hold information storage first to fourth areas. A jackpot random number counter storage area 223g1 in which the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 is stored, and a jackpot type counter storage area in which the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is stored in each of the second pending information storage first to fourth areas. 223g2, a stop pattern selection counter storage area 223g3 in which the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 is stored, and a variation type counter storage area 223g4 in which the value of the variation type counter CS1 is stored are provided at least.

Furthermore, in the execution information storage area 223h, a jackpot random number counter storage area 223h1 in which the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 corresponding to the variation effect of the currently executed first special symbol or the second special symbol is stored, and a jackpot type counter Jackpot type counter storage area 223h2 in which the value of C2 is stored, stop pattern selection counter storage area 223h3 in which the value of stop pattern selection counter C3 is stored, and variation type counter storage area in which the value of variation type counter CS1 is stored 223h4 is provided at least.

Specifically, the execution information storage area 223h is an area corresponding to the variation effect of the first special symbol or the second special symbol which is currently being executed. Further, the first hold information storage first area is an area corresponding to the variation effect of the first special symbol that is temporally held first in the variation effect of the first special symbol that has been suspended, and the first suspension The information storage second area is an area corresponding to the variation effect of the first special symbol which has been secondly retained in the oldest temporally in the variation effect of the suspended first special symbol, and the first suspension information storage third The area is an area corresponding to the variation effect of the first special symbol that was held in the third oldest temporally among the variable effects of the held first special symbol, and the first reserved information storage fourth area is reserved. This is an area corresponding to the variation effect of the first special symbol that was held in the fourth oldest time in the variation effect of the first special symbol. Further, the second hold information storage first area is an area corresponding to the change effect of the second special symbol which is temporarily held first in the change effect of the held second special symbol, and the second hold The information storage second area is an area corresponding to the variation effect of the second special symbol that is secondly held in the second oldest temporally among the variation effects of the second special symbol that has been held, and the second holding information storage third The area is an area corresponding to the variation effect of the second special symbol which is held in the third oldest time temporally among the variation effects of the held second special symbol, and the second reserved information storage fourth area is reserved. This is an area corresponding to the variation effect of the second special symbol that has been held in the fourth oldest in terms of time of the variation effect of the performed second special symbol.

When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the number-of-holding-balls command from the main control device 110, each value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, the variation type counter CS1 and the corresponding special symbol. Is extracted from the reserved ball number command. Then, the voice lamp control device 113 sets the extracted values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 in the corresponding first holding information storage first to fourth areas or the second holding information storage first to fourth areas, respectively. The jackpot random number counter storage areas 223f1, 223g1, the jackpot type counter storage areas 223f2, 223g2, the stop pattern selection counter storage areas 223f3, 223g3, the variation type counter storage area 223f4 corresponding to the number of reserved balls included in the number of reserved balls , 223g4.

Specifically, if the number of holding balls included in the holding ball number command is X (1≦X≦4) and corresponds to the first special symbol, the first special held at that time is held. The number of variable effects of the symbol is X, and the values of the respective counters C1 to C3 and CS1 included in the number-of-holding-ball command are suspended in the X-th time of the suspended variable effect of the first special symbol. Since it corresponds to the variation effect of the first special symbol, the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 corresponding to the respective counter storage areas 223f1 to 223f4 of the first reserved information storage X area are stored. At this time, the main controller 110 stores the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 included in the reserved ball number command in the first reserved X area of the first reserved ball storage area 203d. That is, the same value as each of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the first reserved X area of main controller 110 is stored in the first reserved information storage X area.

On the other hand, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives from the main control device 110 a variation pattern command and a stop type command meaning the start of variation effect, it is stored in the first suspension information storage area 223f or the second suspension information storage area 223g. A process of shifting the stored information to the execution information storage area 223h is executed. In other words, if there is the hold information regarding the second special symbol, the execution of the variation effect of the second special symbol that has been held first in time is started, so the second special symbol that is held first Value of each of the counters C1 to C3, CS1 stored in each of the storage areas 223g1 to 223g4 of the second holding information storage first area corresponding to the variation effect of the execution information storage area 223h corresponding to the variation effect currently being executed. To each storage area 223h1 to 223h4. On the other hand, if there is no hold information regarding the second special symbol and only there is hold information regarding the first special symbol, the execution of the variation effect of the first special symbol that has been temporally held first is started. Therefore, the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the storage areas 223f1 to 223f4 of the first reserved information storage first area corresponding to the variation effect of the first special symbol that is suspended first are It is moved to each of the storage areas 223h1 to 223h4 of the execution information storage area 223h corresponding to the variation effect being executed.

When the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the storage areas 223g1 to 223g4 of the second hold information storage first area are moved to the storage areas 223h1 to 223h4 of the execution information storage area 223h, The values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the storage areas 223g1 to 223g4 of the second suspension information storage second area are moved to the storage areas 223g1 to 223g4 of the second suspension information storage first area, respectively. 2 The values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the respective storage areas 223g1 to 223g4 of the second suspension information storage third area are moved to the respective storage areas 223g1 to 223g4 of the second suspension information storage second area, and the second The values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the storage areas 223g1 to 223g4 of the suspension information storage fourth area are moved to the storage areas 223g1 to 223g4 of the second suspension information storage third area.

Furthermore, when the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the storage areas 223f1 to 223f4 of the first reserved information storage first area are moved to the storage areas 223h1 to 223h4 of the execution information storage area 223h, The values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the storage areas 223f1 to 223f4 of the first suspension information storage second area are moved to the storage areas 223f1 to 223f4 of the first suspension information storage first area, respectively. The values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the storage areas 223f1 to 223f4 of the first suspension information storage third area are moved to the storage areas 223f1 to 223f4 of the first suspension information storage second area, respectively. The values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the storage areas 223f1 to 223f4 of the hold information storage fourth area are moved to the storage areas 223f1 to 223f4 of the first hold information storage third area.

As a result, the same value as the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the reserved ball execution area 203f of the main controller 110 is stored in the execution information storage area 223h. Further, the first holding information storing first to fourth areas and the second holding information storing first to fourth areas respectively include the first holding first to first holding areas 203d of the first holding ball storage area 203d of the main controller 110. The same values as the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the four areas and the second holding first to fourth areas of the second holding ball storage area 203e are stored. That is, in the voice lamp control device 113, the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 corresponding to the variation effects of the first special symbol and the second special symbol that are being executed and are being held by the main controller 110 are the execution information storage areas. 223h and the first reservation information storage area 223f and the second reservation information storage area 223g.

In the voice lamp control device 113, when performing the prefetching process (not shown), the first special symbol and the second special symbol which are suspended from the sub first reserved ball number counter 223b and the sub second reserved ball number counter 223c. Understand the number of variable effects (number of reserved balls). Then, based on the number of reserved balls, the variation effect of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is reserved among the first reserved information storing first to fourth areas and the second reserved information storing first to fourth areas. The values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the area are pre-read, and it is determined whether or not the jackpot is a big hit in the variation effect, the variation time, and the like. For example, if the value of the sub first holding ball number counter 223b is "1" and the value of the sub second holding ball number counter 223c is "0", the holding ball number of the variation effect of the first special symbol is Since it is once and the number of holding balls of the variation effect of the second special symbol is 0, the stored values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 are prefetched for the first holding information storing first area, and the determination is made. I do. Moreover, if the value of the sub first holding ball number counter 223b is "0" and the value of the sub second holding ball number counter 223c is "4", the holding ball number of the variable effect of the first special symbol is Since it is 0 times and the number of reserved balls in the variation effect of the second special symbol is 4, the values of the respective counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored for the second reserved information storing fourth area are prefetched and determined. I do.

The pachinko machine 10 is configured so that the command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 only in one direction, and the voice lamp control device 113 can access the RAM 203 or the like of the main control device 110. I can't. On the other hand, the voice lamp control device 113 is provided with the first holding information storage area 223f and the second holding information storage area 223g, and the fluctuation of the first special symbol and the second special symbol held by the main control device 110. Since the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 corresponding to the effects are also stored in the voice lamp control device 113, the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the first holding information storage area 223f and the second holding information storage area 223g are stored. By referring to, the pre-reading process can be executed by the voice lamp control device 113. That is, when the variation effect of the first special symbol or/and the second special symbol that has been held is executed, what is the result of the variation effect (whether it is a big hit, the variation time is Etc.) can be determined before execution of the variable effect, and execution of various effects can be determined.

The shift processing in the first holding information storage area 223f or the second holding information storage area 223g and the execution information storage area 223h is performed by the number of holding balls when the variation pattern command and the stop type command are received (variation pattern. First reserve information storage first to fourth areas based on the values of the sub first reserve sphere counter 223b and the sub second reserve sphere counter 223c) before the update based on the reception of the command and the stop type command In addition, the data is moved (shifted) only in the areas corresponding to the pending variable effect among the first to fourth areas for storing the second pending information.

For example, when the variation pattern command and the stop type command are received, the value of the sub-first reserved ball number counter 223b before updating is “4”, and the entire first reserved information storage area 223f (first reserved information storage It is assumed that data is stored in the first to fourth areas). In this case, the data in the first holding information storing first area is shifted to the execution information storing area 223h, the data in the second holding information storing second area is shifted to the first holding information storing first area, and the first holding information is stored. The data in the storage third area is shifted to the first reservation information storage second area, and the data in the first reservation information storage fourth area is shifted to the first reservation information storage third area.

On the other hand, if the value of the sub first reserved ball number counter 223b before updating when the variation pattern command and the stop type command is received is “2”, the data in the first reserved information storage first area is changed to the execution information storage area. 223h, the data in the first reserved information storage second area is shifted to the first reserved information storage first area, and the data shift is completed. As described above, in the present embodiment, since the data shift processing is not performed for the first and second hold information storage third and fourth areas in which the variation effect is not held, the number of data shifts can be reduced. The control load can be reduced.

Regardless of the presence/absence of data, the data of the first to fourth areas for storing the first hold information or the first to fourth areas of the second hold information are stored in the area with the area number smaller by 1 (the execution information storage area 223h or It may be configured to shift to the first to third areas for storing the first hold information or the first to third areas for storing the second hold information, respectively. In that case, it is unnecessary to determine whether or not data is stored (held) for each of the first to fourth areas for storing the first holding information or the first to fourth areas for storing the second holding information. Therefore, it is possible to easily create a program.

Returning to FIG. 33, the description will be continued. The RAM 223 also has a command storage area (not shown) for temporarily storing the command received from the main control device 110 until the process corresponding to the command is performed.

The command storage area is composed of a ring buffer, and data is read and written by a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination process (see FIG. 47) of the voice lamp control device 113 is executed, the command stored first among the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area is read out, and the command determination process causes The command is analyzed, and processing according to the command is performed.

The display control device 114 is connected to the voice lamp control device 113 and the drum display device 81, and controls the variation effect of the special symbol and the continuous notice effect on the drum display device 81 based on the command received from the voice lamp control device 113. Alternatively, the lighting control of the various lamps 311 and the like in the lamp display device 227 is executed during the execution of the fluctuating effect, and the audio output control from the audio output device 226 is executed in accordance with the progress of the fluctuating effect. ..

Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 37 to 44. The process of the MPU 201 is roughly classified into a startup process that is started when the power is turned on, a main process that is executed after the startup process, and a regular process (in this embodiment, a cycle of 2 milliseconds). There are a timer interrupt process and an NMI interrupt process activated by the input of the power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal.

FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing a startup process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. This startup processing is started by a reset when the power is turned on.

In this start-up process, first, an initial value setting process associated with power-on is executed (S101). For example, the access permission to the RAM 203 is set, and the stack pointer is set to a predetermined value. Next, in order to wait until the sub-side control device (peripheral control device such as the voice lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) becomes operable, a wait process (“1 second” in this embodiment) is performed. Is executed (S102). Then, access to the RAM 203 is permitted (S103).

After that, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 503 (see FIG. 26) provided in the main controller 110 is turned on (S104). As a result of the determination, if the RAM erasing switch 503 is not turned on (S104: No), it is further determined whether or not the power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S105). If it is not stored (S105: No), it is possible that the previous process at the time of power shutoff did not end normally. In this case, the process proceeds to S116 to initialize the RAM 203. To do.

If the power failure information is stored in the RAM 203 (S105: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (S106), and the calculated RAM determination value is not normal (S107: No), that is, the calculated RAM. If the judgment value does not match the RAM judgment value saved at the time of power-off, the backed up data is destroyed, and in such a case, the process proceeds to S116.

Note that the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 203, as described later in the process of S156 of FIG. Instead of this RAM judgment value, the validity of the backup may be judged by whether or not the keyword written in a predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly stored.

On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 503 is not turned on (S104: No), the information on the occurrence of power failure is stored (S105: Yes), and if the RAM determination value (checksum value or the like) is normal ( (S107: Yes), the power-off occurrence information is cleared while the data backed up in the RAM 203 is held (S108). Next, it is determined whether or not the setting key 501 is turned on (S109).

In the process of S109, when it is determined that the setting key 501 is turned on (S109: Yes), the RAM erase switch 503 is turned off and the setting key 501 is turned on when the power is turned on. In order to start the raising mode in the "setting confirmation mode", first, the probability display device (not shown) starts displaying the probability setting value (S110), and then it is determined whether or not the setting key 501 is turned off. (S111), the "setting confirmation mode" is maintained until the setting key 501 is turned off (S111: No). On the other hand, when the setting key 501 is turned off (S111: Yes), the display of the probability setting value on the probability display device is ended (S112), the “setting confirmation mode” is ended, and the process proceeds to S113. .. In the process of S109, if the setting key 501 is not turned on (S109: No), the processes of S110 to S112 are skipped and the process proceeds to S113 in order to start the startup mode in the “normal mode”. To do.

In the process of S113, a setting value command is generated based on the probability setting value, and is set in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203 (S113), and then the interrupt is permitted (S114). Then, the process shifts to a main process (see FIG. 39) described later.

The set value command set here is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113 in the external output process (see S201 of FIG. 40) of the timer interrupt process described later. Upon receiving this set value command, the voice lamp control device 113 is configured to store (store) the probability set value indicated by the set value command in the memory for storing the probability set value provided in the RAM 223.

On the other hand, in the process of S104, when it is determined that the RAM erase switch 503 is turned on (S104: Yes), it is determined whether the startup mode is the "RAM clear mode" or the "setting change mode". In order to make the determination, it is determined whether or not the setting key 501 is turned on (S115).

In the processing of S115, when it is determined that the setting key 501 is not turned on (S115: No), the processing is shifted to S116 in order to start the startup mode in the “RAM clear mode”.

In the processing of S116, the initialization processing (S116, S117) of the RAM 203 is executed.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when the RAM data is initialized when the power is turned on regardless of the setting change, such as when the hall is opened for business, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch 503. It Therefore, if the RAM erase switch 503 is pressed at the time of executing the start-up process, the RAM initialization process (S116, S117) is executed. Similarly, when the power-off occurrence information is not set (S105: No), or when a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value or the like) (S107: No), the initial state of the RAM 203 is similarly set. The conversion processing (S116, S117) is executed.

In the RAM initialization processing (S116, S117), that is, in the "RAM clear mode", the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to "0" (S116), and then the RAM 203 is initialized (for example, the first reserved sphere number counter 203a). (“0” clear, etc.) is set (S117). After the initialization process of the RAM 203 is performed, the process proceeds to S113.

On the other hand, in the process of S115, when it is determined that the setting key 501 is turned on (S115: Yes), the setting changing process is performed so that the startup mode is set to the “setting changing mode” (S118).

Here, the setting change processing (S118) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing this setting change processing (S118). This setting change process (S118) is a process executed when the start-up mode is the "setting change mode", and since the change (update) of the probability setting value from a person related to the hall is accepted and confirmed. Processing.

In this setting change process (S118), first, the start of displaying the current probability setting value is set on the probability display device (not shown) (S121), and the process proceeds to S122. The display of the probability setting value is started on the probability display device by the start setting of the display of the probability setting value.

Note that the probability setting value displayed here is not necessarily the probability setting value set before the power is turned off, and may be fixed to a specific value without fail. That is, when the startup mode is the “setting change mode”, the probability display device may always start displaying with a specific probability setting value. The specific probability setting value may be, for example, "1" which is the minimum value of the probability setting values ("1" to "6"), or "3" or "which is an intermediate value of the probability setting values. It may be "4" or "6" which is the maximum value of the probability setting value. As a result, regardless of the probability setting value that was set before the power was turned off, the hall parties can change the probability setting value from the specific probability setting value.

On the other hand, when the startup mode is the “setting change mode”, the probability display device may start displaying the probability setting value that was set before the power was turned off. As a result, the hall person or the like can change the probability setting value while considering the probability setting value that was set before the power was turned off.

Further, when the startup mode is the “setting change mode”, the probability display device sets the probability setting value to “3” if the probability setting value set before the power is turned off is “3” or more. If the probability setting value that was set before the power was turned off is less than “3”, the probability setting value that was set before the power was turned off is displayed as it is. You may do it. For example, when the probability setting value set before the power is turned off is high such as “5” or “6”, there are many cases where it is desired to reduce the probability setting value a little (for example, 1). In such a case, if the probability setting value is displayed without changing the probability setting value set before the power is turned off, the following problem occurs. That is, the update of the probability setting value is incremented by one each time the RAM erasing switch 503 is turned on, and when the RAM erasing switch 503 is turned on when the probability setting value is "6", the probability setting value is set to " It is done by returning to "1". Therefore, for example, when it is desired to change the probability setting value from “6” to “5”, the probability setting value has to be substantially rotated once while the RAM erase switch 503 is repeatedly turned on. On the other hand, when the probability setting value set before the power is turned off is high, the probability setting value is started to be displayed as “3”, thereby suppressing the number of times the RAM erase switch 503 is turned on and setting the probability setting value. You can update the value.

Next, in the process of S122, it is determined whether or not the probability setting value is in the range of "1" to "6" (S122), and it is not within the predetermined range, that is, the probability setting value is abnormal. If so (S122: No), the probability setting value is changed to the initial value (S123), and the process proceeds to S124. The initial value may be "1" which is the minimum value of the probability setting values ("1" to "6") or "3" or "4" which is the intermediate value of the probability setting values. Alternatively, the maximum probability setting value may be “6”. On the other hand, as a result of the process of S122, when it is determined that the probability setting value is within the range of “1” to “6” (S122: Yes), the probability setting value is a normal value, and thus the process of S123. Is skipped, and the process proceeds to S124.

In the process of S124, it is determined whether the RAM erase switch 503 is turned on (S124). As a result, if it is determined that the RAM erase switch 503 is not turned on (S124: No), then it is determined whether the setting change switch 502 is turned on (S125).

As a result of S125, if it is determined that the setting change switch 502 is not turned on (S125: No), the process returns to S122, while if it is determined that the setting change switch 502 is turned on (S125: Yes), the probability. The set value is updated (S126), and the process returns to S122.

In the update of the probability setting value, which is the process of S126, if the probability setting value up to that time is "1" to "5", 1 is added to the probability setting value, and the probability setting value up to that time is "6". If it is “”, the probability setting value is returned to “1”. The probability setting value updated by the process of S126 is displayed on the probability display device.

The loop process of S122→S123→S124: No→S125 (and S126)→S122 is continuously executed until it is determined in the process of S124 that the RAM erase switch 503 is turned on (S124: Yes). Then, when it is determined by the process of S124 that the RAM erase switch 503 is turned on (S124: Yes), the probability setting value displayed on the probability display device 504 is set to the probability setting value used in the game from now on. (S127), and the jackpot random number table 202a corresponding to the probability setting value is set (S128).

After the processing of S128, it is then determined whether or not the setting key 501 is in the off state (S129). In the process of S129, when it is detected that the level of the signal output from the setting key 501 has changed from the ON state to the OFF state, it may be determined that the setting key 501 is in the OFF state. It may be determined that the setting key 501 is in the off state by detecting that the level of the signal output from is in the off state.

As a result of the processing of S129, while it is determined that the setting key 501 is not in the off state (S129: No), the processing of S129 is repeatedly executed. Then, as a result of the processing in S129, when it is determined that the setting key 501 is in the off state (S129: Yes), the display of the probability setting value on the probability display device is set to end (S130), and this setting change processing is performed. (S118) ends.

After the setting change process is completed, the process returns to the startup process (see FIG. 37), the process proceeds to S116, the RAM 203 initialization process is executed (S116, S117), and the data in the RAM 203 is erased (cleared). .. As described above, in the processing of S124, it is strongly recognized by the hall-related persons that the data in the RAM 203 will be erased thereafter by turning on the RAM erasing switch 503 for the hall-related persons to confirm the probability setting value. Can be made

Further, in the process of S124, the probability setting value is fixed by detecting the ON of the RAM erasing switch 503, but the probability setting value may be fixed by detecting the OFF of the setting key 501.

Next, with reference to FIG. 39, a main process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 after the above-described startup process will be described. FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing this main processing. In the main process, the counter update process and the power-off process are roughly performed.

In the main process, first, it is determined whether or not the power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S151). Then, if the power outage occurrence information is not stored in the RAM 203 (S151: No), the power outage monitoring circuit 252 does not output the power outage signal SG1 and the power is not shut off. Therefore, in such a case, the update of the first initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and the variation type counter CS1 is repeatedly executed (S152, S153).

First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S152). Specifically, when 1 is added to the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and the counter value reaches the maximum value (“9999”, “99” in this embodiment), Clear to "0". Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are respectively stored in the corresponding counter buffers 203c of the RAM 203. Next, the variation type counter CS1 is updated by the same method as the process of S207 (see FIG. 40) of the timer interrupt process described later (S153), and the process proceeds to S151.

Here, while this main processing is being executed, a timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 40) described later is activated and executed at predetermined time intervals (2 milliseconds in this embodiment). In the timer interrupt process, different processes are executed depending on the game state. For example, during the big hit, the execution to control the opening and closing of the special winning opening 65a is performed, and if the ball passes through the through gate 67, the normal symbol display device 83 controls the display of the normal symbol. Further, in the jackpot lottery executed when the variable display on the special symbol display device 37 is started, the number of jackpot random number values to be compared with the obtained jackpot random number counter C1 is different depending on whether it is a high probability state or a low probability state. come. Therefore, the time required to execute the timer interrupt process once changes depending on the state of the game. Therefore, the remaining time from the end of one timer interrupt process to the execution timing of the next timer interrupt process is not constant, and changes depending on the state of the game at that time.

The processes of S152 and S153, which are one of the main processes, are executed within the remaining time of the timer interrupt process. That is, since the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are repeatedly updated using the remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI1 are updated. The counter CINI2 (that is, the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1 and the initial value of the universal figure random number counter C4) can be randomly updated, and similarly, the fluctuation type counter CS1 can also be randomly updated. In particular, by updating the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at random, to update the jackpot random number counter C1 and the universal figure random number counter C4 that use these as initial values for updating, It can have randomness.

In the processing of S151, if the information on the occurrence of power failure is stored in the RAM 203 (S151: Yes), the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the power is turned off, and the result of the power failure monitoring circuit 252 outputting the power failure signal SG1. Since the NMI interrupt processing described later in FIG. 44 has been executed, the processing at the time of power shutdown after S154 is executed.

In the process of S154, the generation of each interrupt process is prohibited (S154), and a power-off command indicating that the power is cut off is issued to another control device (a peripheral control device such as the payout control device 111 or the voice lamp control device 113). ) Is sent (S155). Then, the RAM judgment value is calculated, the value is stored (S156), access to the RAM 203 is prohibited (S157), and the endless loop is continued until the power is completely cut off and the processing cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the stack area and work area of the RAM 203 that are backed up.

The process of S151 is executed at the timing when one cycle of the processes of S152 and S153 performed within the remaining time of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 40) is completed. As a result, in the main process of the main controller 110, various settings by the timer interrupt process are completed, and the power-off occurrence information is confirmed at the timing when the counters CINI1, CINI2, CS1 are updated. .. Therefore, when returning from the power-off state, the process can be started from the process of S151 after the start-up process is completed. That is, the process can be started from the process of S151 as in the case where the process is initialized in the startup process.

Therefore, even if the contents of the registers used by the MPU 201 are not saved in the stack area or the value of the stack pointer is not saved in the power-off process, the stack pointer is not saved in the initial setting process (S101). By setting to a predetermined value (initial value), the process can be started from S151. As a result, the control load on the main control device 110 can be reduced, and accurate control can be performed without causing the main control device 110 to malfunction or run away.

Next, with reference to FIG. 40, a timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 of the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment will be described. FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing the timer interrupt processing of the first embodiment.

In this timer interrupt process, first, an external output process is executed (S201). In the timer interrupt process and the main process (see FIG. 39), a command or signal to be transmitted to the payout control device 111, the voice lamp control device 113, a hall computer (not shown), etc. is generated based on various processes. When a command is generated, it is temporarily stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and when a signal is generated, a device corresponding to the signal (for example, a hall computer and a pachinko machine 10 are connected). For outputting a signal to an external output terminal board (not shown) or the like. In the external output processing of S201, the output data such as the command stored in the command transmission ring buffer is transmitted to each control device (peripheral control device) on the sub side, and at the same time, the signal is output to various devices.

After the process of S201, next, the prize ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S202), and then the hit process for executing the process at the time of hitting each special symbol is executed ( S203).

After S203, the normal electric power combination control process for executing the drive control process of the normal electric power combination 64c is executed (S204). Briefly, the variable display of the normal symbol is carried out on the normal symbol display device 83 on condition that the sphere has passed through the through gate 67, and as a result of the variable display of the normal symbol, the winning symbol of the normal symbol (for example, " When the "○" symbol appears and is in a hit state, the normal electric outlet 64c is opened for a predetermined time, while the normal symbol lost symbol (for example, "x" symbol) appears, the normal electric officer 64c. Keep closed.

After the process of S204, next, a process of reading various winning switches is executed (S205). That is, the states of the various switches 208 connected to the main controller 110 are read, the states of the switches 208 are determined, and the detection information (winning detection information) is stored. Further, a prize ball command corresponding to the number of acquired balls to be transmitted to the payout control device 111 based on the winning detection information is set in the command transmitting ring buffer provided in the RAM 203. As a result, a predetermined prize ball command is transmitted to the payout control device 111 by the external output process (S201) of the timer interrupt process that is executed next.

Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S206). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (“9999” in the first embodiment), it is cleared to “0”. Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is stored in the corresponding counter buffer 203c area of the RAM 203. Similarly, the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (“99” in the first embodiment), it is cleared to “0” and the second initial value thereof is set. The updated value of the random number counter CINI2 is stored in the corresponding counter buffer 203c area of the RAM 203.

Next, the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, the variation type counter CS1, and the universal figure random number counter C4 are updated (S207). Specifically, the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, the variation type counter CS1 and the universal figure random number counter C4 are each incremented by 1 and their counter values are set to the maximum value (first embodiment). In the form, when each reaches "9999", "99", "99", "9", "99"), each is cleared to "0". When the jackpot random number counter C1 or the universal figure random number counter C4 makes one round, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 or the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is set to the jackpot random number counter C1 or the universal figure random number. It is read as an initial value of the counter C4, and the initial value is set to the jackpot random number counter C1 or the universal figure random number counter C4. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding counter buffer 203c area of the RAM 203.

Next, a start winning process associated with winning the first start opening 64a or the second start opening 64b is executed (S208). The details of this start winning process (S208) will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, a gate passage process for determining whether or not a ball has passed through the through gate 67 is executed (S209). When it is determined that the sphere has passed through the through gate 67 in the gate passing process (S209), the value of the counter C4 for universal figure is acquired from the counter buffer 203c, and the value of the counter C4 for universal figure is acquired. While being stored in a storage area for holding balls (not shown), the normal symbol holding lamp 84 displays the number of held variable displays of the normal symbols.

After performing the gate passage process (S209), the process for dynamically displaying the special symbol by the special symbol display device 37 and the third by the drum display device 81 based on the content of the start winning process (S208). A special figure variation process for setting a variation pattern of symbols and the like is executed (S210). The details of the special figure variation process (S210) will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, based on the processing contents of the gate passage processing (S209), it is determined whether or not the normal symbol is valid, and the variable display of the normal symbol based on the determination result is a setting process for performing the normal symbol display device 83. The diagram variation process is executed (S211). In the universal figure variation process (S211), the probability of hitting a normal symbol is performed with either a high probability (for example, 9/10) or a low probability (1/10). Then, the normal symbols are variably displayed on the basis of the result of hit or not, and the display result according to the result of the hit or not is displayed on the normal symbol display device 83.

After executing the universal figure changing process (S211), the firing control process is executed (S212), and other processes that should be executed periodically are executed (S213), and the timer interrupt process is ended. ..

In the firing control process (S212), the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the stop switch 51b for stopping the firing is not operated. This is a process for determining on/off of the firing of a sphere. Then, when the sphere launch is on, the information of the sphere launch signal is set in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203 in order to transmit the sphere launch signal to the launch control device 112. As a result, the ball firing signal is transmitted to the firing control device 112 via the payout control device 111 by the external output process (S201) of the timer interruption process to be executed next.

Further, in the present embodiment, the process to be executed periodically is executed by the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 40), and in the main process, each counter CINI1, CINI2, CS1 is updated in the remaining time of the timer interrupt process. Although a case has been described, a part or all of the processing executed in the timer interrupt processing may be executed every predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) in the main processing. .. For example, the prize ball count signal, the payout abnormality signal reading process (S202), the hitting process (S203), the normal electric power combination control process (S204), and the switch reading process (S205) that were executed in the timer interrupt process in the present embodiment. It may be configured such that a part or all of the above) is executed every 2 milliseconds in the main process instead of the timer interrupt process.

In this case, a step of determining whether or not a predetermined time (2 milliseconds) has elapsed in the main process is provided, and only when it is determined that the predetermined time has elapsed, the process to be executed every predetermined time is executed. The counters CINI1, CINI2, CS1 may be updated regardless of whether or not a predetermined time has elapsed. As a result, the update of each counter CINI1, CINI2, CS1 will be executed in the remaining time of the process executed every predetermined time, but the process executed every predetermined time is executed depending on the state of the game. Since the time required for the above changes, each counter CINI1, CINI2, CS1 can be updated at random even with such a configuration.

Next, with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 41, a start winning process (S208) which is one process of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 40) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing the starting winning process (S208).

In the starting winning process (S208), it is determined whether or not there is a ball winning the first starting opening 64a or the second starting opening 64b. If there is a winning, the value of each of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 is won. A process of storing (holding) the first reserve ball storage area 203d or the second reserve ball storage area 203e corresponding to the mouths 64a and 64b is executed. In addition, the processing for transmitting the values of the respective held counters C1 to C3, CS1 to the voice lamp control device 113 together with the number of holding balls is executed.

In the starting winning process (S208), the MPU 201 first determines whether or not the ball has won the first starting opening 64a (starting winning) (S301). Here, based on the output signal of the special figure 1 ball entrance switch (not shown) that is detected in the switch reading process (see S205 of FIG. 40) and detects the ball entering the first starting opening 64a (prize). , Detecting a ball entering the first starting opening 64a over three timer interruption processes (see FIG. 40).

When it is determined that the ball has won the first starting opening 64a (there is a starting winning) (S301: Yes), then the value of the first reserved ball number counter 203a (the main controller 110 holds the first winning ball). It is determined whether or not the number of operation holding balls N1 of the dynamic display (variable effect) of the 1 special symbol is less than the upper limit value (“4” in the first embodiment) (S302). Then, even if there is a winning in the first starting opening 64a, if the number N1 of operation reserve balls is not <4 (S302: No), the starting winning process (S208) is ended, and the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 40). Return to.

On the other hand, if the number N1 of operation reserve balls <4 (S302: Yes), the value of the first number of reserve balls counter 203a (the number N1 of operation reserve balls) is incremented by 1 (S303). Then, this time, since it is a prize to the first starting opening 64a corresponding to the first special symbol, the first reserved ball storage area 203d is set as the storage destination of each random number value C1 to C3, CS1 (S304), and the processing. To S309.

In the processing of S301, if it is determined that the ball has not won the first starting opening 64a (S301: No), then it is determined whether or not the ball has won (starting winning) the second starting opening 64b. (S305). Here, as with the first starting opening 64a, the special figure 2 entrance opening switch (not shown) for detecting the entry (winning) into the second starting opening 64b read in the switch reading process (see S205 in FIG. 40). Based on the output signal of (1), the ball entering the second starting opening 64b is detected over three times of the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 40).

If it is determined that the ball has won the second starting opening 64b (there is a starting winning) (S305: Yes), then the value of the second holding ball number counter 203b (the main holding device 110 holds the number). It is determined whether or not the number of operation-holding balls N2 of the dynamic display (fluctuation effect) of the two special symbols is less than the upper limit value (“4” in the first embodiment) (S306). If there is no winning in the second starting opening 64b (S305: No), or if there is a winning in the second starting opening 64b but the number N2 of operation suspension balls is not less than 4 (S306: No), this The start winning process (S208) is terminated, and the process returns to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 40).

On the other hand, if the number N2 of operation reserve balls<4 (S306: Yes), the value of the second number of reserve balls counter 203b (the number N2 of operation reserve balls) is incremented by 1 (S307). Then, this time, since it is a prize to the second starting opening 64b corresponding to the second special symbol, the second reserved ball storage area 203e is set as the storage destination of each random number value C1 to C3, CS1 (S308), and the processing. To S309.

In the process of S309, the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the variation type counter CS1 are read from the counter buffer 203c (see FIG. 27) and set as the storage destination in S304 or S308. Of the first reserved first to fourth areas or the second reserved first to fourth areas provided in the first reserved sphere storage area 203d or the second reserved sphere storage area 203e, the first reserved sphere storage area 203d is When designated as the storage destination, the jackpot random number counter storage area 203d1, the jackpot type counter storage area 203d2, the stop pattern selection counter storage area 203d3, and the variation type counter of the area corresponding to the value indicated by the first reserved sphere number counter 203a Each is reserved (stored) in the storage area 203d4 (S309). If the second reserved ball storage area 203e is designated as the storage destination, the jackpot random number counter storage area 203e1, the jackpot type counter storage area 203e2, and the area corresponding to the value indicated by the second reserved ball number counter 203b are stopped. It is reserved (stored) in each of the pattern selection counter storage area 203e3 and the variation type counter storage area 203e4 (S309).

Specifically, for example, the first reserved ball storage area 203d is set as the storage destination in the process of S304 based on the winning of the first starting opening 64a, and the first reserved ball number counter after the addition in the process of S303 is performed. If the value of 203a is "1", the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 are reserved in the respective storage areas of the first reservation first area. If the value of the first reserved sphere number counter 203a after addition is "2", the value of the first reserved sphere number counter 203a after addition is "3" in each storage area of the first reserved second area. If there is, the storage areas of the first reservation third area, if the value of the first reservation ball counter 203a after addition is "4", the storage areas of the first reservation fourth area, the counters C1 to C3, respectively. , CS1 values are reserved.

In addition, for example, in the process of S308 based on the winning of the second starting opening 64b, the second reserved ball storage area 203e is set as the storage destination, and the value of the second reserved ball number counter 203b after addition by the process of S307. Is "1", the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 are reserved in the respective storage areas of the second reservation first area. If the value of the second holding sphere number counter 203b after addition is “2”, the value of the second holding sphere number counter 203b after addition is “3” in each storage area of the second holding second area. If there is, the storage area of the second storage third area, if the value of the second storage number counter 203b after addition is "4", the storage areas of the second storage fourth area, the counters C1 to C3 respectively. , CS1 values are reserved.

Next, the value of the first holding ball number counter 203a or the second holding ball number counter 203b (the operation holding ball number N1 or the operation holding ball number N2) after the addition in the process of S303 or S307 and the first by the process of S309. A reservation ball number command including the respective values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the fluctuation type counter CS1 stored (held) in the holding ball storage area 203d or the second holding ball storage area 203e is voiced. In order to transmit the command to the lamp control device 113, the reserved ball number command is set in the command transmitting ring buffer provided in the RAM 203 (S310). As a result, the reserved ball number command is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 by the external output process (see S201 of FIG. 40) of the timer interrupt process to be executed next. When the process of S310 is finished, the start winning process (S208) is finished and the process returns to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 40).

Note that the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 included in the number-of-holding-balls command in the process of S310 may be the values themselves read from the counter buffer 203c in the process of S309, or the first hold in the process of S309. You may use what read the value stored (held) in the sphere storage area 203d or the 2nd reservation sphere storage area 203e.

In addition, in the processing of S301 and S305, when balls are simultaneously won in the first starting opening 64a and the second starting opening 64b, the winning processing of the ball in the first starting opening 64a is preferentially executed and the second starting is performed. Wait for the ball winning process to the opening 64b, and execute the waiting ball winning process to the second starting opening 64b in the starting winning process (S208) in the next timer interrupt process (see FIG. 40). You may comprise.

Next, with reference to FIG. 42, the special figure variation process (S210) which is one process of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 40) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing the special figure changing process (S210).

This special figure fluctuation processing (S210), the dynamic display in the special symbol display device 37 regarding the first special symbol and the second special symbol, and performs the control regarding the variation effect performed in the drum display device 81.

In the special figure variation process (S210), the MPU 201 first determines whether or not one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is currently a big hit (S401). As the big hit, during the big hit game displayed on the drum display device 81 and the special symbol display device 37 at the time of big hit, during the predetermined time before the big hit game starts (that is, big hit opening), and the big hit game. After the end (that is, during the predetermined time after the big hit ending) is included. As a result of the determination in S401, if any of the special symbols is in the big hit (S401: Yes), the special symbol variation process (S210) is finished as it is, and the process returns to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 40).

In the process of S401, if it is determined that the jackpot is not in progress (S401: No), then it is determined whether or not the display mode of the special symbol display device 37 is dynamically displayed (S402), and the special symbol. If the display mode of the display device 37 is not during dynamic display (S402: No), then, after the dynamic display on the special symbol display device 37 is stopped, it is determined whether or not a predetermined time has elapsed (S403). As a result, if the predetermined time has not elapsed after the stop of the dynamic display (S403: No), the process returns to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 40). Thereby, the stop symbol in the dynamic display (variable effect) is displayed on the special symbol display device 37 and the drum display device 81 for a predetermined time, so that the player can visually recognize the stop symbol.

On the other hand, as a result of the processing in S403, if a predetermined time has elapsed after the stop of the dynamic display (S403: Yes), the value of the second reserved ball number counter 203b (the second special reserved in the main controller 110). It is determined whether or not the number of operation-holding balls N2) of the dynamic display (variable effect) relating to the symbol is larger than "0" (S404). As a result, if the value of the second holding ball number counter 203b (operation holding ball number N2) is not "0" (S404: Yes), it is the execution start timing of the dynamic display (fluctuation effect) regarding the second special symbol. First, the value of the second holding ball number counter 203b (the operation holding ball number N2) is decremented by 1 (S405). This is because the change start process (S410) described later starts execution of one dynamic display (fluctuation effect) of the suspended dynamic display (fluctuation effect) regarding the second special symbol. This is because the number of reserved balls related to the special symbol decreases by one.

Next, the data stored in the second reserved ball storage area 203e is shifted (S406). This data shift process (S406) is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the second holding first to fourth areas of the second holding ball storage area 203e toward the holding ball execution area 203f, 2 hold 1st area -> hold ball execution area 203f, 2nd hold 2nd area -> 2nd hold 1st area, 2nd hold 3rd area -> 2nd hold 2nd area, 2nd hold 4th area -> 2nd hold The data in each area is shifted such as the third area.

On the other hand, in the processing of S404, when it is determined that the value of the second holding ball number counter 203b (the operation holding ball number N2) is "0" (S404: No), then the first holding ball number counter 203a is set. Value (the number N1 of operation reserve balls of the dynamic display (variable effect) regarding the first special symbol which is held in the main controller 110) is determined to be larger than "0" (S407). As a result, if the value of the first reserved ball number counter 203a (the operation reserved ball number N1) is not "0" (S407: Yes), it is the execution start timing of the dynamic display (variable effect) regarding the first special symbol. First, the value of the first reserved ball number counter 203a (the operation reserved ball number N1) is decremented by 1 (S408). This is because the execution of one dynamic display (fluctuation effect) of the dynamic display (fluctuation effect) that has been suspended is started by the fluctuation start process (S410) described later, and thus the holding ball This is because the number decreases by one.

Next, the data stored in the first reserved ball storage area 203d is shifted (S409). The data shift process (S409) is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the first reserved first to fourth areas of the first reserved ball storage area 203d toward the reserved ball execution area 203f, 1 hold 1st area → hold ball execution area 203f, 1st hold 2nd area → 1st hold 1st area, 1st hold 3rd area → 1st hold 2nd area, 1st hold 4th area → 1st hold The data in each area is shifted such as the third area.

After the data shift process of S406 or S409, based on the values of various counters stored in the reserved ball execution area 203f by the data shift process, the variation start process for the special symbol display device 37 and the drum display device 81 is executed ( S410), and returns to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 40). The fluctuation start process (S410) will be described later with reference to FIG.

In the process of S407, when it is determined that the value of the first reserved ball number counter 203a (the operation reserved ball number N1) is “0” (S407: No), the demonstration effect is performed on the drum display device 81 and the like. It is determined whether or not the current state is present, that is, whether or not the demonstration is being performed (S411). In this determination processing, after the demo command is transmitted to the display control device 114 via the voice lamp control device 113, the value of the first holding ball number counter 203a or the second holding ball number counter 203b (operation holding ball number N1 or operation It is determined that the demonstration is in progress until any value of the number of reserved balls N2) is determined to be larger than “0”.

If it is determined that the demo is not in progress (S411: No), a demo command to be transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 is set (S412), and the process returns to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 40). On the other hand, if it is determined that the demonstration is in progress (S411: Yes), the process directly returns to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 40). The demo command set in the process of S412 is stored in the command transmitting ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output process of the timer interrupt process to be executed next (see S201 of FIG. 40), It is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113.

When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the demo command, the voice lamp control device 113 transmits the display demo command to the display control device 114, and the display control device 114 performs a demonstration effect on the drum display device 81 or the like based on the reception of the display demo command. Is controlled to display.

Here, as described above, the demo command is set when there is no holding ball when a predetermined time has elapsed after the fluctuation stop. Therefore, if the fluctuation effect is not started even after a lapse of a predetermined time after the fluctuation is stopped, the demonstration effect is displayed on the drum display device 81.

In addition, when it is determined that the demonstration is not in progress in the process of S411 (S411: No), a process of further determining whether or not a second predetermined time longer than the predetermined time has elapsed after the fluctuation stop is performed. After executing the change and stopping the fluctuation, the process of S412 may be executed and the demo command may be set when the second predetermined time has elapsed. Accordingly, after the fluctuation stop, when there is no holding ball, it is possible to show the stopped symbol of the stopped fluctuation effect to the player for a relatively long time without immediately starting the demonstration effect.

In the process of S402, when it is determined that the display mode of the special symbol display device 37 is being dynamically displayed (S402: Yes), it is determined whether the dynamic display time (variation time) has passed (S413). ). The display time during the dynamic display of the special symbol display device 37 is determined according to the variation pattern selected by the variation type counter CS1 (determined according to the variation pattern command), and this dynamic display time If (variation time) has not elapsed (S413: No), the display of the special symbol display device 37 is updated (S414), and the process returns to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 40).

In the first embodiment, in the special LED group 37b of the special symbol display device 37, until the change time elapses after the dynamic display is started, for example, the special LED group 37b (corresponding to the changing special symbol). That is, the display mode in which the upper LED group 37b1 or the lower LED group 37b2) is turned on or off in a predetermined lighting pattern is set.

On the other hand, if the dynamic display time (variation time) of the dynamic display on the special symbol display device 37 has passed (S413: Yes), the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol is set for the special symbol display device 37. Yes (S415). The stop symbol is preset by a fluctuation start process (S410) described later with reference to FIG. In the fluctuation start process (S410), whether or not it is a big hit is determined according to the value of the big hit random number counter C1 stored in the holding ball execution area 203f by the process of S406 or S409, and if it is a big hit, the big hit type counter The value corresponding to C2 determines the symbol corresponding to the jackpot type.

In the first embodiment, when the determination result is a loss, only the leftmost LED is lit and displayed, and when the determination result is a big hit, each of the lighting patterns corresponds to the type of the big hit. The LED group is lit up and displayed.

When the display mode of the special symbol display device 37 corresponding to the stop symbol is set in the process of S415, the stop symbol of the variable effect on the drum display device 81 is synchronized with the display of the special LED group 37b on the special symbol display device 37. In order to confirm and display, the confirmation command is set (S416), and the process proceeds to S417. The confirmation command is a command for confirming and displaying the variation effect being executed on the drum display device 81.

Upon receiving this confirmation command, the voice lamp control device 113 transmits the display confirmation command to the display control device 114. The display control device 114 is configured to stop the variation effect of the third symbol on the drum display device 81 by receiving the display confirmation command, and confirm and display the stop symbol.

In the processing of S417, it is determined whether or not the value of the time saving counter (not shown) provided in the RAM 203 is larger than "0" in order to determine whether or not it is the "time reduction state" (S417).

In the process of S417, if the value of the time saving counter is not "0" (S417: Yes), it is a "time shortening state", and in that state, one of the dynamic display of any special symbol (fluctuation effect) is once. Since the processing has been completed, the value of the time saving counter is decremented by 1 (S418), the special figure variation processing (S210) is completed, and the processing returns to the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 40).

On the other hand, in the process of S417, if the value of the time saving counter is “0” (S417: No), it is not the “time reduction state” but the “normal game state” or the “probability variation state”, so the process of S418. Skip, the special figure changing process (S210) is terminated, and the process returns to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 40).

Next, with reference to FIG. 43, a fluctuation start process (S410) which is one process of the special figure fluctuation process (S210) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing the fluctuation start process (S410). This variation start process (S410), based on the values of various counters stored in the holding ball execution area 203f according to the game state, depending on the game state jackpot or lost lottery (jackpot lottery), along with a special symbol The dynamic pattern (variation pattern and stop type) of the dynamic display and the variation effect performed on the display device 37 and the drum display device 81 are determined.

In the fluctuation start process (S410), first, it is determined whether or not the game state is a "probability fluctuation state" (S501). As a result of the determination, when it is determined that it is not the “probability variation state” (S501: No), the gaming state is the “normal gaming state” or the “time reduction state”, and the jackpot probability of the special symbol is the low probability state. Therefore, the jackpot random number table 202a for low probability state (see FIG. 28A) is set (S502), and the process proceeds to S504. On the other hand, when it is determined that the "probability fluctuation state" (S451: Yes), the jackpot probability of the special symbol is a high probability state, so the jackpot random number table 202a for the high probability state is set (S503), The process proceeds to S504.

In the process of S504, a jackpot lottery for determining whether or not it is a jackpot based on the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the reserved ball execution area 203f and the jackpot random number table 202a set in S502 or S503 ) Processing is performed (S504).

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, whether or not it is a big hit is determined by referring to the big hit random number table 202a set on the basis of the probability setting value, and the value of the big hit random number counter C1 stored in the reserved ball execution area 203f. And the game state (mode) at that time. As described above, when the gaming state (mode) that the pachinko machine 10 can take is the normal low-probability state (“normal gaming state” or “time shortening state”), the jackpot probability table 202a sets the jackpot probability. The jackpot random number value is defined such that the value “1” is 50/10000 and the setting value “6” is 60/10000. When the gaming state (mode) that the pachinko machine 10 can take is in the high-probability state (“probability fluctuation state”), the jackpot random number table 202a sets the jackpot probability at the set value “1” to 500/10000. The jackpot random number value is defined such that the value “6” is 600/10000.

In the process of S504, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the reserved ball execution area 203f is compared with the jackpot random number values defined in these jackpot random number table 202a, and when they match, the jackpot is determined. It is determined that As a result of the processing in S504, when it is determined that the jackpot is a jackpot (S504: Yes), then the jackpot type table 202b2 (see FIG. 28B) and the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the reserved ball execution area 203f. The display mode at the time of a big hit is set based on the value of (S505).

In this processing, the jackpot classification table 202b indicates that the jackpot classification associated with the value of the jackpot classification counter C2 stored in the holding ball execution area 203f, that is, after the jackpot with the maximum round number of 10 rounds, until the next jackpot is special. The symbol becomes a high-probability state and the winning assistance function continues to the "probability fluctuation state" that transitions to "probability variation jackpot" or the maximum number of rounds after 5 big jackpots, and the special symbol becomes a high-probability state until the next jackpot. With the "5R probability variation jackpot" that the winning assistance function continues with, or after the jackpot with the maximum number of rounds of 10 rounds, the special symbol is in a low probability state but the winning assistance function is effective until the special symbol changes 100 times "10R normal It is determined whether it is a "big hit. Then, based on the determined jackpot type, the display mode (display mode of the special LED group 37b) at the time of the jackpot in the special symbol display device 37 is set.

Specifically, it is determined whether the data stored in the reserved ball execution area 203f is data shifted from the first reserved ball storage area 203d or data shifted from the second reserved ball storage area 203e. Of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the reserved ball execution area 203f when the data is stored in the shift source buffer (not shown) and is shifted from the first reserved ball storage area 203d. The jackpot type is determined from the jackpot type table 202b. When the data stored in the reserved ball execution area 203f is the data shifted from the second reserved ball storage area 203e, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the reserved ball execution area 203f and the jackpot. The jackpot type is determined based on the type table 202b.

Next, the variation pattern at the time of a big hit is determined (S506), and the process proceeds to S509. Specifically, in the special symbol display device 37 and the drum display device 81, effects are produced based on the display mode (stop type) at the time of a big hit and the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the reserved ball execution area 203f. A mode is selected, and the dynamic time (fluctuation time) of the dynamic display (fluctuation effect) is determined based on the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 from the selected effect modes. In determining the variation pattern at the time of the big hit, first, the stop pattern table 202d (see FIG. 30) to be used is selected according to the stop type of the big hit.

Specifically, in the process of S457, the rendering mode associated with the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the reserved ball execution area 203f in the C table 202d3 of the stop pattern table 202d provided for the big hit. Select. Then, in the variation pattern table 202e provided for each selected effect mode, the variation pattern associated with the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the reserved ball execution area 203f is selected. Then, the variation time is set based on the relationship between the variation pattern and the variation time that are defined in advance.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S504 that it is not a big hit (S504: No), the display mode at the time of losing is set (S507). In the process of S507, the display mode of the special symbol display device 37 is set to the display mode corresponding to the lost symbol, and the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 and the first reserved ball number counter stored in the reserved ball execution area 203f are set. 203a or (and) based on the value of the second holding ball number counter 203b and the current game state, as a performance mode to be displayed on the drum display device 81, "non-reach (shortening)" performance mode, "non-reach (normal) )” effect mode, “normal reach” effect mode, “super reach” effect mode, and “special reach” effect mode. In the first embodiment, depending on whether the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is the “normal gaming state” or the “probability variation state” or the “time reduction state”, the stop pattern corresponding to each effect mode. The stop pattern table 202d is set so that the value range of the selection counter C3 is different.

Next, the variation pattern at the time of losing is determined (S508), and the process proceeds to S509. In the process of S508, in the special symbol display device 37 and the drum display device 81, the variable time until stop display with the lost symbol is determined. Specifically, it corresponds to the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 stored in the reserved ball execution area 203f in the fluctuation pattern table 202e provided for each display mode (effect mode) at the time of losing determined in the process of S507. Select the attached fluctuation pattern. Then, the variation time is set based on the relationship between the variation pattern and the variation time that are defined in advance.

In this way, the effect mode and the variation pattern setting process at the time of a big hit and the effect mode and the variation pattern setting process at the time of losing are determined and determined by the same determination program using the same random number values C3 and CS1. Thus, the programs can be shared and the development man-hours at the time of development can be reduced.

In the process of S509, based on the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern determined in the processes of S506 and S508, the variation that notifies the display controller 114 of the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern via the voice lamp control device 113. A pattern command is set (S509). Specifically, for example, when the jackpot lottery is won, the jackpot is "10R certainty variation jackpot", and a variation pattern of "super reach" of "25 seconds" is selected, the jackpot A fluctuation pattern command indicating "super reach" of "10R probability variation jackpot" and "25 seconds" is set. In addition, if the player loses the jackpot lottery and a "super reach" variation pattern of "25 seconds" is selected, a variation pattern command indicating "miss" "25 seconds" "super reach" is set. ..

In this way, even if the fluctuation effects have the same fluctuation time, the voice lamp control device 113 sets the fluctuation pattern command together with whether or not the fluctuation effect is correct and the contents of the rough fluctuation pattern, so that the sound lamp control device 113 includes the effect mode. By grasping the content and the variation time, it is possible to determine the variation pattern of the variation effect in detail based on the information.

Further, a stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 via the voice lamp control device 113 of the stop type set in the process of S505 or S507 is set (S510), and the special figure variation process (see FIG. 42). ) Return to.

Specifically, for example, if you win the jackpot, if the content of the jackpot is "10R probability variation jackpot", without specifying a specific stop mode of the third symbol (for example, "7" symbol, etc.), A stop type command indicating "10R probability variation jackpot" is set. Also, if you win the jackpot, if the content of the jackpot is "10R normal jackpot", "10R regular jackpot" without specifying the specific stop mode of the third symbol (for example, "4" symbol etc.) Set a stop type command indicating that

On the other hand, if the jackpot is not won, and if the "super reach" effect mode is selected, the specific stop mode of the third symbol (for example, "787" etc.) is not specified, and " A stop type command indicating the "super reach" effect mode is set. If the "normal reach" effect mode is not selected and the jackpot is not won, the "normal reach" mode at the time of loss is specified without specifying the specific stop mode of the third symbol (for example, "737" etc.). A stop type command indicating that it is a performance mode is set. Furthermore, if the jackpot is not won, and if the "non-reach" effect mode is selected, the specific stop mode of the third symbol (for example, "258" etc.) is not specified, and " A stop type command indicating the "non-reach" effect mode is set.

In this way, by setting the rough stop type based on whether the variation effect is valid or not in the stop type command, the audio lamp control device 113 (display control device 114) grasps the stop type based on the validity and The stop result of the fluctuating effect can be determined in detail based on this information.

These fluctuation pattern commands and stop type commands are stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and these are output in the external output process (see S201 in FIG. 40) of the timer interrupt process to be executed next. The command is sent to the voice lamp controller 113. Upon receiving the variation pattern command and the stop type command, the voice lamp control device 113 generates a display variation pattern command and a display type command based on the variation pattern command and the stop type command, and transmits the display variation pattern command and the display type command to the display control device 114.

Next, with reference to FIG. 44, the NMI interrupt processing executed in main controller 110 when a power failure or the like occurs will be described. FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing the NMI interrupt processing executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110.

The NMI interrupt process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 when the pachinko machine 10 is powered off due to a power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, the information on the occurrence of power failure is stored in the RAM 203. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control being executed and starts the NMI interrupt processing, stores the power-off occurrence information in the RAM 203 as the setting of the power-off occurrence information (S601), and ends the NMI interrupt processing. To do.

Note that the NMI interrupt processing described above is similarly executed in the payout control device 111, and the power interruption occurrence information is stored in the RAM 213 by the NMI interrupt processing. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control being executed. Then, the NMI interrupt processing is started.

Next, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIGS. 45 to 50. The processing of the MPU 221 is roughly classified into a start-up processing (see FIG. 45) started when the power is turned on and a main processing (see FIG. 46) executed after the start-up processing.

First, with reference to FIG. 45, a startup process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing this startup processing. This startup process is started when the power is turned on.

When the start-up process is executed, first, an initial setting process accompanying power-on is executed (S1001). Specifically, the stack pointer is set to a predetermined value. After that, depending on whether or not the power-off processing in progress flag is turned on, the power-up processing of S1116 (see FIG. 46) occurs due to a momentary voltage drop (instantaneous power failure, so-called “instantaneous stop”) in the startup processing of this time. It is determined whether or not the process is started during the execution of () (S1002). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 46, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives a power-off command from the main control device 110 (see S1113 in FIG. 46), the power-off process in S1116 is executed. The power-off processing flag is turned on before the power-off processing is executed, and the power-off processing flag is turned off after the power-off processing is completed. Therefore, whether or not the power-off processing in S1116 is being executed can be determined by the state of the power-off processing in progress flag.

If the power-off processing in progress flag is off (S1002: No), the startup processing of this time is started after the power is completely cut off, or after a momentary power failure occurs, and the power-off in S1116 is performed. It is started after completing the execution of the process, or is started (without receiving a power-off command from the main control unit 110) only on the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control unit 113 due to noise or the like. is there. Therefore, in these cases, it is confirmed whether or not the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1003).

The confirmation of the data destruction of the RAM 223 is performed as follows. That is, the data as the keyword “55AAh” is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 by the processing of S1006. Therefore, it is possible to check the data stored in the specific area, and if the data is “55AAh”, there is no data destruction in the RAM 223, and conversely, if it is not “55AAh”, it is possible to confirm the data destruction in the RAM 223. If the data destruction of the RAM 223 is confirmed (S1003: Yes), the process proceeds to S1004 and the initialization of the RAM 223 is started. On the other hand, if the data destruction of the RAM 223 is not confirmed (S1003: No), the process proceeds to S1008.

If the startup process this time is started after the power is completely cut off, the keyword “55AAh” is not stored in the specific area of the RAM 223 (the memory of the RAM 223 is lost due to power shutdown). Therefore, it is determined that the data in the RAM 223 has been destroyed (S1003: Yes), and the process proceeds to S1004. On the other hand, the startup process of this time is started after the momentary power failure occurs and after the execution of the power-off process of S1116 is completed, or only the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like. If it is started due to the trouble, since the keyword “55AAh” is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, the data of the RAM 223 is determined to be normal (S1003: No), and the process proceeds to S1008.

Further, in the process of S1002, if the power-off process in progress flag is on (S1002: Yes), the current startup process is after the momentary power failure has occurred, and the power-off process of S1116 is being executed. Then, the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is reset and started. In such a case, since the power-off process is being executed, the storage state of the RAM 223 is not always correct. Therefore, in such a case, control cannot be continued, so the process moves to S1004, and the initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

In the process of S1004, the entire storage area of the RAM 223 is checked (S1004). As a checking method, first, "0FFh" is written for each byte, it is read for each byte, and it is confirmed whether it is "0FFh". If "0FFh", it is determined to be normal. Such writing and confirmation for each byte is performed in the order of “55h”, “0AAh”, and “00h” after “0FFh”. By this read/write check of the RAM 223, all the storage areas of the RAM 223 are cleared to “0”.

If the read/write check is determined to be normal for all the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S1005: Yes), the keyword “55AAh” is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 to set the RAM destruction check data (S1006). By checking the keyword "55AAh" written in this specific area, it is checked whether or not there is data destruction in the RAM 223. On the other hand, if a read/write check abnormality is detected in any of the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S1005: No), the abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified (S1007), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is cut off. The abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified by the display lamp 34. The sound output device 226 may output sound to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or an error command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 to display an error message on the drum display device 81 or the like. May be.

In the processing of S1008, it is determined whether or not the power-off flag is turned on (S1008). The power-off flag is turned on when the power-off process of S1116 is executed (see S1115 of FIG. 46). That is, since the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off process of S1116 is executed, the process of S1008 with the power-off flag turned on is that the startup process of this time is instantaneous. This is the case after the power failure has occurred and is started in the state where the execution of the power-off processing in S1116 is completed. Therefore, in such a case (S1008: Yes), the work area of the RAM 223 is cleared to initialize each process of the voice lamp control device 113 (S1009), the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S1010), and then the interruption is performed. The permission is set (S1011), and the process proceeds to S1012. The work area of the RAM 223 is an area other than the area for storing commands and the like received from the main controller 110.

On the other hand, the process of S1008 with the power-off flag turned off is that the present startup process is started after the power is completely cut off, for example, so that the process of S1004 to S1006 is performed and the process of S1008 is performed. This is the case where the processing has been started, or only the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 has been reset (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110) and started due to noise or the like. Therefore, in such a case (S1008: No), S1009, which is a work area clear process of the RAM 223, is skipped, the process proceeds to S1010, the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S1010), and then the interrupt permission is set. Then (S1011), the process proceeds to S1012.

It should be noted that the clear processing of S1009 is skipped because all the storage areas of the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the processing of S1004 when the processing of S1008 is reached through the processing of S1004 to S1006. When only the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control unit 113 is reset due to noise or the like and the start-up process is started, the data in the work area of the RAM 223 is saved without being cleared. This is because the control of can be continued.

In the process of S1012, it is determined whether or not a setting value command has been received from the main control device 110 (S1012), and the process of S1012 is repeatedly executed and stands by until the setting value command is received (S1012: No). Then, when the setting value command is received from the main controller 110 (S1012: Yes), the probability setting value indicated by the setting value command is stored in the RAM 223, and the process proceeds to the main process (see FIG. 46).

As described above, in the startup process of the voice lamp control device 113, the main process (see FIG. 46) is executed until the set value command generated at the end of the startup process of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 37) is received. By waiting for the transition, the probability setting value set by the main control device 110 can be surely grasped by the voice lamp control device 113 side, and the processes after the main process can be executed based on the probability setting value. Further, when the set value command is not received from the main control device 110, the end of the startup process of the main control device 110 has not been reached, and the startup process of the main control device 110 has not been normally completed. The startup process of the lamp control device 113 is not normally terminated and the main process is not performed. With such a configuration, it becomes possible for the voice lamp control device 113 side to know whether or not the startup processing of the main control device 110 has been normally executed, and the main control device 110 has normally started up. It is possible to prevent runaway of the voice lamp control device 113 in the absence.

In the process of S1012, the process of waiting until the setting value command is received from the main control device 110 is performed, but in this case, due to a momentary power failure (so-called momentary blackout), only the voice lamp control device 113 is performed. If the power is cut off and the main controller 110 continues to keep the power on, the voice lamp controller 113 may repeatedly execute the processing of S1012 and may not be able to return to normal control. Therefore, in the process of S1012, for example, when the setting value command is not received from the main control device 110 for a predetermined period, the control regarding the setting value is not executed, and the other control is started in the safe mode. May be configured to be activated.

Next, with reference to FIG. 46, a main process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 after the startup process of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing this main processing.

When the main processing is executed, first, it is determined whether or not 1 millisecond or more has elapsed since the processing of S1101 was executed last time (S1101), and if 1 millisecond or more has not elapsed (S1101: No). , S1102 to S1109 are not performed, and the process proceeds to S1110. In the processing of S1101, it is not necessary to perform processing in a short cycle (within 1 millisecond) in S1102 to S1109 to determine whether or not 1 millisecond has elapsed, whereas in S1110, the variation effect processing is performed. This is because it is preferable to execute the command determination process in S1111 or S1111 in a short cycle. Specifically, by executing the processing of S1111 in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent omission of reception of a command transmitted from the main control device 110, and by executing the processing of S1110 in a short cycle, the command determination processing is executed. Based on the command received by, it is possible to make the setting regarding the variation effect without delay.

In the process of S1101, when it is determined that 1 millisecond or more has elapsed since the process of S1101 was executed last time (S1101: Yes), the process proceeds to S1102. When the process of S1101 is executed for the first time after the startup process shown in FIG. 45, the process directly proceeds to S1102.

In the process of S1102, various commands for the display control device 114 set by the processes of S1103 to S1112 are transmitted to the display control device 114 (S1102). Next, the output of each lamp is set so as to set the lighting mode of the display lamp 34 and the lighting mode of the lamp edited in the process of S1107 described later (S1103), and then the power-on notification process is executed (S1104). The power-on notification process is to notify that the power is turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) when the power is turned on, and the notification is performed by the voice output device 226 or the lamp display device 227. Be seen. In addition, a command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 to notify that power is supplied on the screen of the drum display device 81. If it is not when the power is turned on, the notification by the power-on notification process is not performed, and the process proceeds to S1105.

Next, in the process of S1105, a jackpot effect process for executing an effect related to the jackpot set by the command determination process of S1111 described later is performed (S1105), and the process proceeds to S1106.

Next, in the processing of S1106, frame button input monitoring/effect processing is executed (S1106). In this frame button input monitoring/production process, the input of whether or not the frame button 22 operated by the player in order to enhance the production effect is monitored and the input of the frame button 22 is confirmed is dealt with. It is a process of setting to produce an effect. In this processing, when the player's operation on the frame button 22 is detected, a frame button operation command for notifying the display control device 114 that the frame button 22 has been operated is set.

Further, when the frame button 22 is pressed during the period when the change effect is not executed or during the period of the variable element of “high speed change”, the process of changing the stage is performed, and the display control is performed instead of the frame button operation command. Set the stage change command for device 114. The display control device 114 performs a process of changing to an effect mode according to the stage executed by the drum display device 81 by including information on the effect mode corresponding to the changed stage in the stage change command. In addition, when the notice character appears at the start of the variation production, the frame button 22 is pressed to display the expected value of the jackpot due to this variation, or the frame button 22 is pressed during the "reach display" to expect the jackpot. It is also possible to change to a feeling effect and to use the frame button 22 as an enter button for selecting one reach effect from a plurality of reach effects. When the frame button 22 is not provided, the process of S1106 is omitted (skip).

When the frame button input monitoring/effect process (S1106) is finished, the ramp edit process is then executed (S1107), and then the sound edit/output process is executed (S1108). In the lamp editing process, the lighting pattern of the decorative portions 29 to 33, the lighting pattern of the front light guide plate 410 and the rear light guide plate 420, or the lighting process of the confirmation lamp 311 corresponding to the display performed on the drum display device 81. Etc. are set. In the sound editing/output processing, the output pattern of the audio output device 226 is set so as to correspond to the display performed on the drum display device 81, and the sound is output from the audio output device 226 according to the setting.

After the process of S1108, the liquid crystal effect execution management process is executed (S1109), and the process proceeds to S1110. In the liquid crystal effect execution management process, a time synchronized with the time required for the variable effect performed on the drum display device 81 is set based on the variable pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110. The lamp edit process of S1107 is executed based on the time set in the liquid crystal effect execution monitoring process, and the sound edit/output process of S1108 is also a time synchronized with the time required for the variable effect performed by the drum display device 81. Executed.

In the process of S1110, in order to display the fluctuation effect on the drum display device 81, the fluctuation effect process which is a process for starting the fluctuation effect based on the fluctuation pattern command and the stop type command received from the main control device 110 is executed. To do. Details of this variation effect processing will be described later with reference to FIG. Then, after the variation effect process, a command determination process for performing a process according to the command received from the main control device 110 is performed (S1111), and the process proceeds to S1112. Details of this command determination processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

In S1112, a counter updating process of updating various counters such as the light guide pattern lottery counter 223d and the fixed lamp timing lottery counter 223e provided in the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 is executed (S1112). Specifically, the light guide pattern lottery counter 223d and the fixed lamp timing lottery counter 223e are each incremented by 1, and the counter values thereof are maximum values (in the present embodiment, the light guide pattern lottery counter 223d and the fixed lamp timing lottery counter). 223e, when both reach "99"), clear "0".

The light guide pattern lottery counter 223d updated here is used to select whether or not to perform (lighting) the front light guide plate 410 or the rear light guide plate 420 during the variable effect, and the fixed lamp timing lottery counter 223e is used. It is used to select whether or not the confirmation lamp 311 is turned on (lighting timing) during the variation effect.

After the processing of S1112 is finished, it is determined whether or not the power-off occurrence information is stored in the work RAM 233 (S1113). The power-off occurrence information is stored when a power-off command is received from main controller 110. If the power-off occurrence information is stored in the processing of S1113 (S1113: Yes), the power-off flag and the power-off processing in-progress flag are both turned on (S1115), and the power-off processing is executed (S1116). After the power-off process is executed, the power-off process in progress flag is turned off (S1117), and then the process is infinitely looped. In the power-off process, the generation of the interrupt process is prohibited, each output port is turned off, and the outputs from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are turned off. In addition, the storage of the information on the occurrence of power failure is also erased.

On the other hand, if the power-off occurrence information is not stored in the process of S1113 (S1113: No), it is determined whether the RAM 223 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (S1114), and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (S1114: No), the process returns to S1101 and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1114: Yes), the process is infinitely looped to stop the execution of the subsequent processes.

Here, if it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and the loop is infinite, the main process is not executed, and thereafter, the display by the drum display device 81 does not change. Therefore, since the player can know that the abnormality has occurred, he or she can call a clerk in the hall or the like to request the pachinko machine 10 to be repaired. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, the voice output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 may be used to notify the RAM destruction.

Next, with reference to FIG. 47, the command determination processing (S1111) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing this command determination processing (S1111). This command determination process (S1111) is performed in the main process (see FIG. 46) performed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and as described above, determines the command received from the main control device 110. ..

In the command determination process (S1111), first, it is determined whether or not a command storage area provided in the RAM 223 has received a command from the main controller 110 (S1201). As a result of the determination, if the command is received from the main control device 110 (S1201: Yes), the first command received from the main control device 110 among the unprocessed commands is read and analyzed, and is changed from the main control device 110. It is determined whether or not a pattern command is received (S1202). If it is determined that the fluctuation pattern command is received (S1202: Yes), the fluctuation pattern type is extracted from the fluctuation pattern command (S1203).

The variation pattern type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223, and in a variation effect process (see FIG. 48) described later, a display variation pattern that notifies the display control device 114 of the start of the variation effect and the variation pattern type. Used when setting a command. After that, this command determination processing (S1111) is ended, and the processing returns to the main processing (see FIG. 46).

On the other hand, when it is determined that the variation pattern command is not received (S1202: No), it is then determined whether or not the stop type command is received from the main control device 110 (S1204). When it is determined that the stop type command is received (S1204: Yes), the stop type is extracted from the stop type command (S1205).

The stop type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223, and when a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type of the variable effect is set in the variable effect process (see FIG. 48) described later. Used for. After that, the variation start flag 223a indicating that the variation effect is started is set to ON (S1206), the command determination processing (S1111) is terminated, and the processing returns to the main processing (see FIG. 46).

The stop type command indicates the stop type of the fluctuating effect whose fluctuation pattern is indicated by the fluctuation pattern command after the main control device 110 transmits the fluctuation pattern command when starting the fluctuating effect. This command is always sent from 110. By setting the variation start flag 223a to ON in the process of S1206, in the variation effect process (see FIG. 48) executed later, the variation start flag 223a is extracted based on the value of each counter C1 or the like included in the reserved ball number command first. It is determined whether or not the variation pattern type of the variation effect and the variation pattern type of the variation effect extracted from the received variation pattern command match. Further, whether or not the stop type of the fluctuating effect extracted based on the value of each counter C1 or the like included in the reserved ball number command previously matches the stop type of the fluctuating effect extracted from the received stop type command Is determined. As a result of these determinations, in the variation effect of 1, when the variation pattern based on the hold ball number command does not match the variation pattern based on the change pattern command, or the stop type and the stop type command based on the hold ball number command When the stop type based on the above does not match, it is determined that some abnormality (for example, command reception abnormality due to noise) has occurred, and error processing for indicating the abnormality is performed.

As a result of the processing in S1204, if it is determined that the stop type command has not been received (S1204: No), then it is determined whether or not the confirmation command has been received from the main control device 110 (S1207). The confirmation command is a command for confirming and displaying the variation effect being executed on the drum display device 81. If it is determined that the confirmation command has been received (S1207: Yes), the display confirmation command is set (S1208), the command determination process (S1111) is terminated, and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 46). ..

The display fixed pattern command set here is temporarily stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223 and is transmitted to the display control device 114 by the command output process of the main process (see S1102 in FIG. 46). It In the display control device 114, display control is performed so that the variable display of the third symbol is confirmed and displayed on the drum display device 81 at the confirmation timing indicated by this display confirmation pattern command.

As a result of the processing in S1207, when it is determined that the confirmation command has not been received (S1207: No), it is then determined whether or not the reserved ball number command has been received (S1209). When it is determined that the reserved ball number command is received (S1209: Yes), the first reserved ball number counter 203a and/or the second reserved ball number counter 203b of the main control device 110 included in the reserved ball number command ( (See FIG. 26) value (that is, the number of reserved balls of the variable effect of the first special symbol and/or the second special symbol that is retained in the main control device 110) is extracted, and this is the sub-second of the voice lamp control device 113. The value is stored in the 1-holding ball number counter 223b and/or the sub second holding ball number counter 223c (S1210). Then, the values of the big hit random number counter C1, the big hit type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the fluctuation type counter CS1 which are also included in the holding ball number command, are updated in S1210 to the sub first holding ball number counter 223b. Alternatively, the first to fourth storage areas of the first suspension information storage area 223f indicated by the value of the sub second suspension ball number counter 223c, or the second storage area of the second suspension information storage area 223g. ~ Stored in the fourth area (S1211), the command determination process (S1111) is terminated, and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 46).

Here, since the number of reserved balls command is transmitted from the main control device 110 when the balls win the first starting opening 64a or the second starting opening 64b (start winning), every time there is a starting winning. , S1212, the value of the sub first holding ball number counter 223b and/or the sub second holding ball number counter 223c of the voice lamp control device 113 is set to the first holding ball number counter 203a or the second holding ball counter 203a of the main control device 110. It can be adjusted to the value of the reserved ball number counter 203b. Therefore, due to the influence of noise or the like, the value of the sub first holding ball number counter 223b and/or the sub second holding ball number counter 223c of the voice lamp control device 113 is the first holding ball number counter 203a and/or the main control device 110. Alternatively, even if the value deviates from the value of the second reserved ball number counter 203b, the value of the sub first reserved ball number counter 223b and/or the sub second reserved ball number counter 223c of the voice lamp control device 113 is corrected at the time of detecting the winning a prize. , And can be adjusted to the value of the first holding sphere number counter 203a and/or the second holding sphere number counter 203b of the main controller 110.

Further, the voice lamp control device 113 can perform the prefetching process by referring to the counters C1 to C3 and CS stored in the first holding information storage area 223f or the second holding information storage area 223g. There is. That is, when the suspended variable effect is executed, the result of the variable effect is determined (whether or not it is a big hit, what is the change time, etc.) before execution of the variable effect, Execution of various effects can be decided.

As a result of the processing of S1209, when it is determined that the number of reserved balls command has not been received (S1209: No), processing according to other commands is executed (S1212), and this command determination processing (S1111) ends. Then, the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 46). If the received other command is a command used by the voice lamp control device 113, the process corresponding to the command is performed, the processing result is stored in the RAM 223, and if the command is used by the display control device 114, the command is executed. Is set to the display control device 114. For example, the demo command received from the main controller 110 is set as a display demo command by the process of S1212, is temporarily stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 223, and then the command output of the main process is output. It is transmitted to the display control device 114 by the processing (S1102).

Next, with reference to FIG. 48, a variation effect process (S1110) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing the variation effect process (S1110). The variation effect process (S1110) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 46), and various processes for executing the variation effect in the drum display device 81 are executed.

In the variation effect process (S1110), first, it is determined whether or not the variation start flag 223a provided in the RAM 223 is on (S1401). If it is determined that the variation start flag 223a is not on (that is, it is off) (S1401: No), it means that at least the stop type command has not been received from the main control device 110. The process (S1110) is ended, and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 46).

On the other hand, when it is determined that the variation start flag 223a is on (S1401: Yes), both the variation pattern command and the stop type command are received, so the variation start flag 223a is turned off to start the variation effect. (S1402), then, it is determined whether or not the variation effect to be executed this time relates to the first special symbol (S1403). As a result of the determination, if it is a variation effect related to the first special symbol (S1403: Yes), the data included in the first reserved information storage first area provided in the first reserved information storage area 223f is transferred to the execution information storage area 223h. Shifting (S1404), further shifting the data contained in the first to second information storing first to third information storage areas 223f to the first to third information storing areas. (S1405), the value of the sub first reserved ball number counter 223b is decremented by 1 (S1406), and the process proceeds to S1410.

That is, in this case, the variation effect of the first special symbol that has been suspended is reduced by one, and the execution of the variation effect of the first special symbol that has been suspended first in time is started, so it is suspended first. The values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the respective storage areas 223f1 to 223f4 of the first hold information first area corresponding to the generated variation effect are stored in the execution information storage area 223h corresponding to the variation effect being executed. It moves to each storage area 223h1-223h4. Further, the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the storage areas 223f1 to 223f4 of the first reservation information storage second area are moved to the storage areas 223f1 to 223f4 of the first reservation information storage first area. , The values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the storage areas 223f1 to 223f4 of the first reservation information storage third area are moved to the storage areas 223f1 to 223f4 of the first reservation information storage second area, The values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the storage areas 223f1 to 223f4 of the first reservation information storage fourth area are moved to the storage areas 223f1 to 223f4 of the first reservation information storage third area.

As a result, the same value as that of each of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the reserved ball execution area 203f of the main controller 110 is stored in the execution information storage area 223h, and the first reserved information storage first ~ The fourth area stores the same values as the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the first holding first to fourth areas of the first holding ball storage area 203d of the main controller 110, respectively. become.

On the other hand, in the processing of S1403, if it is determined that it is not a variable effect related to the first special symbol, that is, if it is determined that it is a variable effect related to the second special symbol (S1403: No), the second holding information storage area The data included in the second holding information storage first area provided in 223g is shifted to the execution information storage area 223h (S1407), and the second holding information storage second provided in the second holding information storage area 223g is further shifted. ~ The data included in the fourth area is shifted to the second to third reserved information storage areas 1 to 3 (S1408), the value of the sub second reserved ball number counter 223c is decremented by 1 (S1409), and the process proceeds to S1410. Transition.

That is, in this case, the variation effect of the second special symbol that has been suspended is reduced by one, and the execution of the variation effect of the second special symbol that has been suspended first in time is started, so that it is suspended first. The values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the respective storage areas 223g1 to 223g4 of the second hold information first area corresponding to the generated fluctuating effect are stored in the execution information storage area 223h corresponding to the fluctuating effect being executed. It moves to each storage area 223h1-223h4. Further, the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the storage areas 223g1 to 223g4 of the second reservation information storage second area are moved to the storage areas 223g1 to 223g4 of the second reservation information storage first area. , The values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the storage areas 223g1 to 223g4 of the second reservation information storage third area are moved to the storage areas 223g1 to 223g4 of the second reservation information storage second area, The values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the storage areas 223g1 to 223g4 of the second suspension information storage fourth area are moved to the storage areas 223g1 to 223g4 of the second suspension information storage third area.

As a result, the same value as that of each of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the reserved ball execution area 203f of the main controller 110 is stored in the execution information storage area 223h, and the second suspension information storage first The same value as each of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the second holding first to fourth areas of the second holding ball storage area 203e of the main controller 110 is stored in the fourth area. become.

Next, in the process of S1410, the variation pattern of the variation effect to be executed now is acquired based on the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the execution information storage area 223h (S1410). After that, in order to display the variation effect on the drum display device 81, a variation pattern command for display is set based on the obtained variation pattern (S1411), and the process proceeds to S1412.

The display variation pattern command set here is temporarily stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is transmitted to the display control device 114 by the command output process of the main process (see S1102 in FIG. 47). It In the display control device 114, the display control of the fluctuating effect is started so that the fluctuating display of the third symbol is performed on the drum display device 81 with the fluctuating pattern indicated by the changing pattern command for display.

Next, in the processing of S1412, the stop type of the variable effect to be executed now is acquired based on the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the execution information storage area 223h (S1412). Then, the display stop type command is set based on the acquired stop type of the variable effect (S1413), and the process proceeds to S1414.

The display stop type command set here is temporarily stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is transmitted to the display control device 114 by the command output process of the main process (see S1102 in FIG. 47). It In the display control device 114, when the variation effect executed by the display variation pattern command set by the processing of S1411 is confirmed and displayed, the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type indicated by this display stop type command is set. To do.

In the process of S1414, in the variation effect to be executed this time, a fixed lamp lighting setting process for setting whether or not to turn on the fixed lamp 311 and the lighting timing thereof is performed (S1414), and the process proceeds to S1415. The finalized lamp lighting setting process (S1414) will be described later with reference to FIG.

In the process of S1415, in the variation effect to be executed this time, the second decorative symbol group 411, the third decorative symbol 412 or the fourth decorative symbol group 413 of the front light guide plate 410, or the first decorative symbol of the rear light guide plate 420. A light guide pattern setting process for setting whether or not to turn on the group 421 is performed (S1415), and thereafter, this variation effect process (S1110) is ended and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 46). The light guide pattern setting process (S1415) will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, the confirmed lamp lighting setting process (S1414) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing the finalized lamp lighting setting process (S1414). The confirmation lamp lighting setting process (S1414) is executed in the fluctuating effect process (see FIG. 48), and it is determined whether or not a big hit occurs in the changing effect to be executed. If a big hit occurs, At which timing of the fluctuating effect, it is determined whether or not the confirmation lamp 311 should be turned on.

In the confirmation lamp lighting setting process (S1414), first, it is determined whether or not a big hit occurs based on the variation effect stored in the execution information storage area 223h (S1501). As a result of the determination, when it is determined that the big hit does not occur (S1501: No), the confirmation lamp 311 is not turned on, the confirmation lamp lighting setting process (S1414) is ended, and the variation effect process (see FIG. 48) is performed. Return.

On the other hand, in the processing of S1501, when it is determined that a big hit occurs (S1501: Yes), the confirmation lamp lighting pattern table 222f (see FIG. 35) is executed according to the value of the confirmation lamp timing lottery counter 223e. The lighting timing of the confirmation lamp 311 in the variable effect is set (S1502), and the process proceeds to S1503.

In the process of S1503, it is determined whether or not the “probability fluctuation state” occurs based on the jackpot that has been won this time (S1503). As a result of the determination, when it is determined that the “probability fluctuation state” occurs (S1503: Yes), the confirmation lamp 311 has a long lighting time at the confirmation lamp 311 lighting timing set in the process of S1502 (for example, “ 10 seconds") The long lighting pattern is set (S1504), the fixed lamp lighting setting process (S1414) ends, and the process returns to the variation effect process (see FIG. 48).

On the other hand, in the process of S1503, when it is determined that the "probability fluctuation state" does not occur based on the jackpot that has been won this time, that is, when the jackpot that the "time reduction state" occurs is won (S1503: No ), at the lighting timing of the confirming lamp 311 set in the process of S1502, it is set that the lighting time of the confirming lamp 311 is short (for example, “2 seconds”) (S1505). The setting process (S1414) is terminated, and the process returns to the variation effect process (see FIG. 48).

When the lighting time of the confirmation lamp 311 set in the process of S1504 or S1505 exceeds the fluctuation time of the fluctuating effect being executed, for example, execution of the long lighting pattern is started when the fluctuating effect is fixed. In such a case, the lighting time of the confirmation lamp 311 may be configured to end when the variation effect is confirmed, or the lighting timing of the confirmation lamp 311 may be moved forward from the timing that is initially set (for example, “10 seconds from the confirmation time”). It may be configured to start from the “before” timing). Furthermore, the short lighting pattern may be turned on even when the “probability variation state” is won.

In this way, when a jackpot is won in the fluctuating effect, it is possible to suggest to the player that the jackpot is generated by the confirmation lamp 311 at various timings of the fluctuating effect, thereby providing a surprising game. Therefore, the interest of the game can be improved. Further, by changing the lighting time of the confirmation lamp 311 according to the type of the jackpot that is won, it is possible to enrich the variation of the effect and appropriately increase the degree of attention to the game.

Next, the light guide pattern setting process (S1415) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing the light guide pattern setting process (S1415). This light guide pattern setting process (S1415) is executed in the variation effect process (see FIG. 48) to check whether or not each decorative pattern 411, 412, 413, 421 on the front light guide plate 410 or the rear light guide plate 420 is turned on. In addition to performing various processes for determining, when the confirmation lamp 311 is lit and displayed, a process of changing the lighting region of the first decorative symbol group 421 is executed.

In the light guide pattern setting process (S1415), first, in the variable effect to be executed from now on, the first decorative symbol group 421, the second decorative symbol group 411, the third decorative symbol 412 or the front light guide plate 410 or the rear light guide plate 420 is formed. It is determined whether or not the execution lottery of the fourth decorative symbol group 413 is won (S1601). This determination is made by referring to the light guide plate lighting pattern table 222e (see FIG. 34) according to the value of the light guide pattern lottery counter 223d and whether or not the front light guide plate 410 or the rear light guide plate 420 is turned on in the variation effect to be executed. Lottery.

In the process of S1601, the first decorative symbol group 421, the second decorative symbol group 411, the third decorative symbol group 412, or the fourth decorative symbol group 413 in the front light guide plate 410 or the rear light guide plate 420 is not won. When it is determined that (S1601: No), the light guide pattern setting process (S1415) is ended, and the process returns to the variation effect process (see FIG. 48). On the other hand, in the case of winning the execution lottery of the first decorative symbol group 421, the second decorative symbol group 411, the third decorative symbol group 412 or the fourth decorative symbol group 413 in the front light guide plate 410 or the rear light guide plate 420 ( S1601: Yes), then, the decorative patterns 411, 412, 413, 421 of the front light guide plate 410 or the rear light guide plate 420 to be turned on are determined (S1602).

As a result of the determination in S1602, when the bubble group symbol, which is the fourth decorative symbol group 413 of the front light guide plate 410, is selected as the lighting target (S1602: “bubble”), “reach display” is formed in the variable effect. At the timing (that is, at the end of the variable element of "low speed fluctuation" and at the start of the variable element of "normal reach". The same applies hereinafter), the front right LED 415c and the front left LED 416c are set to "blue". It is set to turn on (S1603), the light guide pattern setting process (S1415) ends, and the process returns to the variation effect process (see FIG. 48).

As a result of the determination in S1602, when the Sakurabuki pattern which is the second decorative pattern group 411 of the front light guide plate 410 is selected as the lighting target (S1602: “Sakura”), the “reach display” is formed in the variable effect. The front lower LED 414c of the front lower LED 414c is set to turn on in "pink" at the timing (S1604), and the light guide pattern setting process (S1415) ends, and the variation effect process. Return to (see FIG. 48).

As a result of the determination in S1602, when the sunfish symbol, which is the third decorative symbol 412 of the front light guide plate 410, is selected as the lighting target (S1602: “Sunfish”), the timing at which the “reach display” is formed in the variable effect. In the front lower LED 414c, the front lower LED 414c other than the right end and the left end is set to be turned on in "green" (S1605), the light guide pattern setting process (S1415) is ended, and the variation effect process ( Return to FIG. 48).

As a result of the determination in S1602, if the cherry blossom snowstorm pattern that is the second decorative symbol group 411 of the front light guide plate 410 and the sunfish symbol that is the third decorative symbol 412 are selected as lighting targets (S1602: "Sunfish & Sakura”), at the timing when the “reach display” is formed in the variable effect, the front lower LED 414c at the right end and the left end of the front lower LED 414c is turned on in “pink” and the front lower LED other than the right end and the left end The LED 414c is set to be turned on in “green” (S1606), the light guide pattern setting process (S1415) ends, and the process returns to the variation effect process (see FIG. 48).

As a result of the determination in S1602, when the fish pattern that is the first decorative pattern group 421 of the rear light guide plate 420 is selected as the lighting target (S1602: “fish group”), first, when the “reach display” is started, That is, it is determined whether or not the confirmation lamp 311 is turned on during reach formation (S1607). This determination is that while the first decorative symbol group 421 is being executed, the lighting timing and lighting time of the finalizing lamp 311 set in S1502 and S1504 and S1505 of the finalizing lamp lighting setting process (see FIG. 49) have come (overlap). It is performed by determining whether or not As a result of the determination, when it is determined that the confirmation lamp 311 does not turn on during the execution of the first decorative symbol group 421 at the time of reach formation (S1607: No), at the timing when the "reach display" is formed in the variable effect, The rear upper LED 422c and the rear lower LED 424 are respectively arranged in the order of the right side region of the rear light guide plate 420, the central region, and the left side region, and the three LEDs 422c and 424 provided for each region from the right side. It is set to turn on red, blue, and green (S1608), the light guide pattern setting process (S1415) ends, and the process returns to the variation effect process (see FIG. 48).

On the other hand, in the process of S1607, when it is determined that the confirmation lamp 311 is turned on during the execution of the first decorative symbol group 421 at the time of reach formation (S1607: Yes), the timing at which the "reach display" is formed in the variation effect. In the state where the confirmation lamp 311 is turned on, only the LEDs 424 for the lower rear side are arranged in the order of the right side area→the central area→the left side area of the rear light guide plate 420, and the three LEDs 424 provided for each area. Is set to be turned on by “red”, “blue”, and “green” from the right side, and when the confirmation lamp 311 is turned off, the rear upper LED 422c and the rear lower LED 424 are respectively set to the rear. Setting is made in the order of the right side region→the central region→the left side region of the side light guide plate 420, and the three LEDs 422c and 424 provided for each region are lit from the right side with “red”, “blue”, and “green”. (S1609), the light guide pattern setting process (S1415) ends, and the process returns to the variation effect process (see FIG. 48).

In this way, during the execution of the variation effect that is performed by the drum display device 81, in the variation effect by using the front light guide plate 410 and the rear light guide plate 420 that are arranged on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 of the drum display device 81. By executing the jackpot expectation suggesting effect, it is possible to execute a variety of effects and appropriately increase the degree of attention to the game. Further, in the drum display device 81 different from the liquid crystal display device in which additional notice production can be easily performed, the notice display is performed by the front light guide plate 410 and the rear light guide plate 420 on the front side of the drum display device 81. Even in the case of using the drum display device 81 for which it is difficult to display an advance notice, it is possible to enrich the effect contents of the variable effect and appropriately increase the attention degree of the game. Furthermore, during execution of the confirmation lamp 311 having the highest degree of importance in the variation effect, the scale of the effect by the first decorative symbol group 421 having a lower degree of importance of the game than the determination lamp 311 is reduced and executed, and the important determination as the game. It is configured so that the effect produced by the lamp 311 is conspicuous. With such a configuration, the effect of the first decorative symbol group 421 and the effect of the confirmation lamp 311 can be partitioned so that they do not overlap or are difficult to perform, and the effect by the confirmation lamp 311 can be made more prominent. . Therefore, it can be configured so as not to interfere with the effect of the confirmation lamp 311 which is important as a game. Further, it becomes easy to simultaneously execute the effect by the confirmation lamp 311 and the effect by the first decorative symbol group 421 without performing complicated control, and it is possible to increase the effect variation.

<A: A plurality of display parts are displayed by lighting one LED with a diffusion lens>
As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the rear-side lower diffusion lens 425 (same for the rear-side upper diffusion lens 423) includes the leftward diffusion portion 425a and the frontward diffusion portion 425b. A plurality of 1 concave portions formed by the right diffusion portion 425c are provided at least by the width of the light emitting surface of the rear lower LED 424. Therefore, the light emitted from one rear lower LED 424 is generated in three directions (that is, with respect to the front direction and the front direction) inside the rear light guide plate 420 by the plurality of recesses of the rear lower diffusion lens 425. And the light path is inclined by 20 degrees to the left and the direction tilted by 20 degrees to the right with respect to the front direction). Further, since the leftward diffusion portion 425a, the frontward diffusion portion 425b, and the rightward diffusion portion 425c are each configured to have the same side length, the widths of the optical paths of the diffused light also have the same width. Composed. With this, by lighting one LED, it is possible to cause the plurality of first decorative symbol groups 421 respectively formed at the positions corresponding to the respective diffused light paths to emit light of the same color. By executing the effect, it is possible to enhance the effect of the rear light guide plate 420 and increase the degree of attention to the game.

<B: Design placement on the optical path, placement of design on the part where the optical paths of different colors overlap>
The first decorative pattern group 421 formed on the rear light guide plate 420 is a portion in which the optical path of "red" light and the optical path of "red" light are overlapped ("dark red"), "red". The part displayed only by the light path of ""("lightred"), the part where the light path of "red" and the light path of "blue" overlap ("purple"), "red" The part where the light path of “” and the light path of “green” overlap each other (“yellow”), the light path of “red” and the light path of “blue” and the light of “green” The part where the light path is displayed overlapping (“white”), the part where the light path of “blue” and the light path of “blue” are displayed overlapping (“dark blue”), “blue” Part that is displayed only by the light path of "light"("lightblue"), the part where the light path of "blue" and the light path of "green" overlap ("cyan"), "green" The part where the light path of "" and the light path of "green" overlap and are displayed ("dark green"), the part that is displayed only by the light path of "green"("lightgreen"), Each of the symbols of the first decorative symbol group 421 is displayed in a total of 10 display colors. Then, each of the symbols of the first decorative symbol group 421 is arranged in each overlapping portion.

Thereby, even with a lighting pattern with a small number of colors (for example, three colors), light is diffused by the diffusion lenses 423 and 425 arranged above and below, and the optical paths of the diffused lights overlap, The luminescent colors occurring in the non-overlapping portion and the overlapping portion are made different, and more colors than the color arrangement can be displayed. Therefore, by realizing a wide variety of display colors even with a small amount of light emission color, the light emission control of the LED can be further simplified, and the control load for the light emission control of the LED can be reduced. In particular, when not using a full-color LED but arranging a plurality of types of single-color light-emitting diodes and performing the above control, cost reduction can be realized by using a single-color light-emitting diode that is lower in cost than the full-color LED, The light emission control of the LED is further simplified, and the control load on the light emission control of the LED can be reduced.

Further, with respect to one symbol of the first decorative symbol group 421, it is arranged so as to overlap with the optical path of the light of the color of 1 in a predetermined portion, while overlapping with the optical path of the light of another color in the portion other than the predetermined portion. To place. That is, by forming one symbol of the first decorative symbol group 421 so as to fit within the size of a plurality of optical path widths, the emission color of each part is changed to one symbol and the one symbol is diversified. It can be expressed in various colors.

<C: Different LEDs are sequentially lit for each horizontal section area, and move display & colorful display>
Of the rear upper LED 422c and the rear lower LED 424, which are arranged three each in the right region, the central region, and the left region of the rear light guide plate 420, the rear upper LED 422c located on the rightmost side and From the rear lower LED 424, the rear upper LED 422c and the rear lower LED 424 located in the center, the rear upper LED 422c and the rear lower LED 424 located on the left side are sequentially lighted in this order, and thus the first decoration An effect as if the group of fish that is the symbol group 421 swims from the right side to the left side is executed.

Further, the rear upper LED 422c and the rear lower LED 424 are on the right side so as to interlock with the lighting of the board surface first decorative symbol group 60a and the board surface second decorative symbol group 60b (see FIG. 3) of the base board 60 of the game board 13. By sequentially turning on the lights, the effect on the rear light guide plate 420 and the effect on the game board 13 board are integrally performed, and a powerful effect using the entire board of the game board 13 is provided to improve the enjoyment of the game. Can be planned.

<D: When a plurality of effects overlap, one effect is given priority over the other effect (reducing lighting method of the fish school display area when the confirmation lamp is lit)>
When the effect by the confirm lamp 311 is executed (at the time of execution), the scale of the effect by the first decorative symbol group 421 is reduced and executed, and the effect by the confirm lamp 311 which is important as a game is configured to stand out. .. Specifically, when the first decorative symbol group 421 is executed at the timing when the confirmation lamp 311 is turned on, the effect width in the first decorative symbol group 421 is reduced and executed. In particular, in the first decorative symbol group 421, the side on which the finalizing lamp 311 is arranged (that is, the upper side of the rear light guide plate 420 when viewed from the front) is turned off or slightly turned on. The effect of the symbol group 421 and the effect of the confirming lamp 311 can be partitioned so as not to overlap or difficult, and the effect of the confirming lamp 311 can be more prominent. Therefore, it can be configured so as not to interfere with the effect of the confirmation lamp 311 which is important as a game. Further, it becomes easy to simultaneously execute the effect by the confirmation lamp 311 and the effect by the first decorative symbol group 421 without performing complicated control, and it is possible to increase the effect variation.

<E: 1 light guide plate for weak/medium notice, and separate light guide plate for strong notice>
In the case of configuring a plurality of patterns of the effect indicating the jackpot expectation in the variable effect so that the jackpot expectation is low (ie, the second decorative symbol group 411, the third decorative symbol group 412, and the fourth decorative symbol group 413) is 1 While the light guide plate (that is, the front light guide plate 410) is provided collectively, the performance (that is, the first decorative pattern group 421) with a high jackpot expectation degree is provided to another light guide plate (that is, the rear light guide plate 420). By doing so, when performing an effect with a low jackpot expectation, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of noise or an effect with a high jackpot expectation degree that is displayed to the player due to the viewing angle, etc., and execute an effect that does not cause discrepancies. be able to.

<A plurality of display objects on the light guide plate of F:1, and the optical path directions of the LEDs are different for each display object. Within one light guide plate, a small-direction area (one direction, sunfish, cherry blossoms) and a multi-direction area ( 2 directions, bubbles), small direction is strong effect (weak effect in the place where the optical paths overlap)>
In the front light guide plate 410, the fourth decorative pattern group having the lowest jackpot expectation in the portion where the optical path of the vertical light and the optical path of the horizontal light overlap (that is, the lower flat plate portion and the lower inverted R-shaped portion). 413 is formed, and the fourth decorative pattern group 413 is configured to be visible only by the light in the lateral direction. In addition, the jackpot expectation degree is higher than that of the fourth decorative symbol group 413 in the portion where the optical path of the vertical light and the optical path of the horizontal light do not overlap (that is, the normal R-shaped portion and the upper inverted R-shaped portion). The decorative design group 411 and the third decorative design 412 are formed, and the second decorative design group 411 and the third decorative design 412 are configured to be visible only by light in the vertical direction. Here, even if the fourth decorative pattern group 413 can be visually recognized from the front side of the pachinko machine 10 by the light in the vertical direction, the light in the vertical direction is a big hit from the fourth decorative pattern group 413. It is turned on when the second decorative pattern group 411 or the third decorative pattern 412 having a high degree of expectation is lit and displayed, and when the second decorative pattern group 411 or the third decorative pattern 412 is lit and displayed, Even when the four decorative symbol group 413 is displayed in a lighted state, the discrepancy in the effect is small. Therefore, the fourth decorative pattern group 413 is formed at an unintended timing by forming the fourth decorative pattern group 413 with the lowest jackpot expectation degree in the portion where the optical path of the vertical light and the optical path of the horizontal light overlap. Even if it becomes visible from the front side of the pachinko machine 10, it is possible to minimize the discrepancies in the production and provide the player with a comfortable game.

<G: a plurality of display objects on the light guide plate, and the optical path directions of the LEDs are different for each display object. In one light guide plate, a small direction area (one direction, sunfish, cherry blossoms) and a multi-direction area ( 2 directions, bubbles group), small direction is in front of the display (main display, main drum, main liquid crystal)>
In the first embodiment, the jackpot expectation is the lowest in the portion of the front light guide plate 410 where the optical path of the vertical light and the optical path of the horizontal light overlap (that is, the lower flat plate portion and the lower inverted R-shaped portion). The fourth decorative symbol group 413 is formed, and the fourth decorative symbol group 413 is configured to be visible only by the light in the lateral direction. In addition, in the front light guide plate 410, the jackpot expectation is the fourth decorative symbol group 413 in the portion where the optical path of the vertical light and the optical path of the horizontal light do not overlap (that is, the regular R-shaped portion and the upper inverted R-shaped portion). Higher second decorative symbol group 411 and third decorative symbol group 412 are formed, and the second decorative symbol group 411 and the third decorative symbol 412 are configured to be visible only by light in the vertical direction. Further, the rear light guide plate 420 is provided on the rear side of the front light guide plate 410 where the vertical light path and the horizontal light path do not overlap (that is, the normal R-shaped portion and the upper inverted R-shaped portion). While forming the first decorative symbol group 421, the drum display device 81 for executing the variable effect of the third symbol, which is the main effect of the game, is arranged. In this way, in the portion where the optical path of the light in the vertical direction and the optical path of the light in the horizontal direction in the front light guide plate 410 do not overlap (that is, the normal R-shaped portion and the upper inverted R-shaped portion), the main effect of the game is By arranging the drum display device 81 that executes the variation effect of the three symbols and by being configured to be able to display the first decorative symbol group 421, which is the effect with the highest jackpot expectation in the variation effect, the variation effect that is important as a game It is possible to enhance the effect of the front light guide plate 410, the rear light guide plate 420, and the drum display device 81, respectively, while increasing the attention to the game, while not hindering the display result and the effect of high jackpot expectation. it can.

<H: One light guide plate in a planar shape and an R shape, and in any shape, light is guided from a planar shape portion (no light is guided from the R shape portion)>
In the first embodiment, when the light is incident (guided) to the front light guide plate 410 and the rear light guide plate 420, the light is incident from the end face (part) of the flat plate portion of each of the light guide plates 410 and 420. The R-shaped portion (that is, the normal R-shaped portion, the upper inverted R-shaped portion, or the lower inverted R-shaped portion) does not enter light. This is because when the light is to be incident from the R-shaped portion, the advancing direction of the incident light is changed by the R-shaped portion, and it may be difficult or difficult to properly turn on the desired symbol. Further, the LEDs and the like must be arranged along the shape of the end face of the R-shaped portion, which may reduce the degree of freedom in design. Further, the R-shaped portion is formed along the outer shape of the effect member such as the drum display device 81 or the movable accessory, and when the LED substrate or the like is arranged on the side of the R-shaped portion, the effect member is designed. There is a risk of limiting the degree of freedom. Therefore, in each of the light guide plates 410 and 420 having the R-shaped portion, light is incident from the end face (portion) of one of the flat plate portions, thereby suitably solving the above problems and increasing the degree of freedom in designing each member. You can

<I: R shape/reverse R shape, display 1 advance notice up to the switching point (design display area confirmation part), do not place the pattern at the part where the R shape switches>
In the front light guide plate 410, each of the decorative symbol groups 411, 412, 413 is arranged in the normal R-shaped portion, or the lower flat plate portion and the lower inverted R-shaped portion, but the lower inverted R-shaped portion and the normal R-shaped portion No decorative pattern groups 411, 412, 413 are arranged at a switching point (region) with the shape portion. This is because when a decorative pattern for light guide display is arranged at a switching point (area) between the lower inverted R-shaped portion and the normal R-shaped portion, the portion arranged in the regular R-shaped portion and the lower inverted R-shaped portion are arranged. It is difficult for light reflected (guided) inside the front light guide plate 410 to properly reach the open portion, and the appearance may be unintended depending on the position of the player's eyes. Therefore, at the switching point (region) between the lower inverted R-shaped portion and the normal R-shaped portion, by configuring not to arrange any of the decorative symbol groups 411, 412, 413, the expression of the symbol for light guide display can be expressed. Appropriate and discreet production can be performed.

<J: Cover for preventing abnormal lighting due to light from the front side of the strong notice light guide plate (sunfish/foam light guide plate, slit portion of display area forming member)>
By arranging the lens cut 432 at the vertical positions of the regular R-shaped portions of the front light guide plate 410 and the rear light guide plate 420 and between the confirmation lamp 311, the light incident by the lens cut 432 is diffused. Can be made (weakened). Therefore, with respect to the front light guide plate 410 and the rear light guide plate 420, light other than the light that is incident by lighting the LEDs 414c, 415c, 416c, 422c, 424 is transmitted to the front light guide plate 410 and the rear light guide plate 420. By suppressing the incidence, it is possible to prevent the decorative pattern groups 411, 412, 413, 421 from abnormally lighting. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the production discrepancies such that the decorative symbol groups 411, 412, 413, 421 are abnormally lit.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10, since the front light guide plate 410 is arranged on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 of the first decorative pattern group 421 having the highest jackpot reliability (expectation degree), it is incident from the front side of the pachinko machine 10. The incident light on the rear light guide plate 420 can be suppressed also by the front light guide plate 410 with respect to the generated light. Therefore, by arranging the front side light guide plate 410 as a noise cover on the front side of the rear side light guide plate 420 on the pachinko machine 10 side, the light incident by the front side light guide plate 410 is diffused (weakened) to some extent, thereby erroneously. It is possible to prevent the first decorative symbol group 421, which has a large effect discrepancy, from being abnormally lit when it is lit and displayed. As a result, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a production discrepancy such that the decorative symbol groups 411, 412, 413, 421 are abnormally lit.

<K:1 light guide plate with strong and weak effect, at least weak area irradiation has high anisotropy (good straightness, no diffusion, condenser lens)>
Like the rear light guide plate 420, the front light guide plate 410 in the first embodiment is made of acrylic resin (PMMA), and when the refractive index of the acrylic resin is 1.49 to 1.53, each condensing light is condensed. The light incident from the first end faces of the lenses 414d, 415d, and 416d is emitted from the second end face in a straight (or almost straight; upward direction in FIG. 20) direction. Accordingly, the light incident from the first end surface of each of the condenser lenses 414d, 415d, and 416d is condensed in a state of being condensed without being diffusedly emitted from the second end surface side formed in the plurality of semicircular convex shapes. Since it can be emitted in a direction, when the LEDs 414c, 415c, 416c corresponding to the decorative patterns 411, 412, 413 desired to be lit up are illuminated, the other decorative patterns 411, 412, 413 are not illuminated, and the decoration to be illuminated is displayed. Only the symbols 411, 412, 413 can be appropriately lighted and displayed. In particular, when trying to turn on the fourth decorative symbol group 413 having the lowest jackpot reliability, the second decorative symbol group 411 formed on the same front light guide plate 410 and having a higher jackpot reliability than the fourth decorative symbol group 413. Or, if the third decorative pattern 412 is turned on, there is a possibility that the effect content may be inconsistent and the game performance according to the game specification may not be realized. Therefore, at least by configuring not to diffuse the light for the fourth decorative symbol group 413 having a low jackpot expectation by the condenser lenses 415d and 416d, only the fourth decorative symbol group 413 is displayed at an appropriate timing. It is possible to prevent the discrepancy in the production contents from occurring.

<L:1 light guide plate with strong and weak effect, at least high intensity irradiation is isotropic (diffuse lens, three-way lens)>
For a decorative symbol group with a high expectation for jackpots, that is, for the third decorative symbol 412 and the like, a diffusion lens used for lighting the first decorative symbol group 421 is adopted instead of the condenser lens. You may. The third decorative symbol 412 is a production with a higher jackpot expectation degree than at least the fourth decorative symbol group 413, and is located on the front side of the drum display device 81 that the player focuses on during the game. It is necessary to comprehensively irradiate light on the three decorative symbols 412 with a diffusion lens so that the player can clearly recognize the third decorative symbols 412. In addition, when the fourth decorative symbol group 413 is turned on, a production discrepancy occurs when the third decorative symbol 412 having a higher jackpot expectation than the fourth decorative symbol group 413 is turned on, but the third decorative symbol is generated. When the 412 is lit, even if the fourth decorative symbol group 413 having a lower jackpot expectation than the third decorative symbol 412 is lit, the player is more likely to execute the third jackpot decorative symbol 412 having a higher jackpot expectation. Paying attention to, and not paying so much attention to the execution of the fourth decorative symbol group 413 having a low jackpot expectation degree, it is difficult to cause a production discrepancy. Therefore, by adopting the condensing lenses 415d and 416d for the fourth decorative symbol group 413 having a low jackpot expectation and using the diffusion lens for the third decorative symbol 412 having a high jackpot expectation, the front side It is possible to enhance the effect of the light guide plate 410 and increase the degree of attention to the game.

<M: A plurality of light guide plates, at least separate light guide plates with diffusing means>
When the plurality of light guide plates 410 and 420 are used to perform a plurality of patterns of the effect indicating the jackpot expectation in the fluctuating effect, in one light guide plate 410 (that is, the front light guide plate 410), the condenser lenses 414d and 415d, By utilizing 416d, a plurality of types of effects (that is, the second decorative symbol group 411, the third decorative symbol group 412 and the fourth decorative symbol group 413) are individually configured to be executable, and other light guide plates ( That is, by adopting the diffusion lenses 423 and 425 in the rear light guide plate 420), one effect (namely, the first decorative symbol group 421) can be executed in various expressions. With such a configuration, it is possible to perform the effect more than the number of the plurality of light guide plates 410, 420, and by executing the flashy effect in the light guide plate that employs the diffusion lenses 423, 425, variations of the effect It is possible to enrich the game and increase the attention to the game.

<Second Embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 55.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the front light guide plate 410, the rear light guide plate 420, and the display area forming member 430 are provided with a plurality of R-shaped portions (that is, a downward inverted R shape) along the outer peripheral shape of the drum display device 81. Portion, a normal R-shaped portion and an upper inverted R-shaped portion), and from the side (upper, lower, right or left) end surface of the flat plate portion of the front light guide plate 410 and the rear light guide plate 420. The decorative patterns 411, 412, 413, 421 were illuminated to display light.

On the other hand, in the second embodiment, the second front light guide plate 440, the second rear light guide plate 450, and the second display area forming member 460 are formed in a shape different from the outer peripheral shape of the drum display device 81. In addition, from the lower end surface of the second front lower reverse R-shaped portion 440a, which is the only R-shaped portion formed in the lower portion of the second front light guide plate 440, the second front lower LED 441 is used for the second front light guide plate 440. To illuminate. Further, the second rear lower LED is provided by the second rear lower LED from the lower end face of the second rear lower regular R-shaped portion 450a which is the only R-shaped portion formed in the lower portion of the second rear light guide plate 450. The light plate 450 is configured to emit light.

Hereinafter, the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment will be described focusing on the points different from the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment. In the following description, the same elements as those in the first embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and their illustration and description will be omitted.

FIG. 55 is a diagram showing a positional relationship of the drum display device 81 with respect to a schematic side sectional view of the light guide unit 400 in the second embodiment. In FIG. 55, for convenience of description, the second front light guide plate 440, the second rear light guide plate 450, the second display area forming member 460, and the drum display device 81 that configure the light guide unit 400 of the second embodiment are illustrated. The interval is expanded and expressed.

As shown in FIG. 55, the light guide unit 400 of the second embodiment is arranged on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 of the drum display device 81, and the second display area forming member 460 and the second display area forming member 460 are arranged in order from the front side of the pachinko machine 10. The second front light guide plate 440 and the second rear light guide plate 450 are included.

Like the display area forming member 430, the second display area forming member 460 is made of a resin having transparency (for example, polycarbonate), and of the drum display device 81 arranged on the rear side of the pachinko machine 10 of the light guide unit 400. It is formed in a flat plate shape (irrelevant) different from the outer peripheral shape. The second front light guide plate 440 and the second rear light guide plate 450 assembled to the light guide unit 400 are formed in a shape different from that of the second light guide plate 440. In addition, the second display area forming member 460 is arranged so that three reels can be visually recognized on each reel LR, CR, RR (see FIG. 4) of the drum display device 81 from the front side of the pachinko machine 10. Two central openings 461 are formed. A predetermined second lens cut 462 is provided on the peripheral edge of the second central opening 461 so that the rear side of the second lens cut 462 is invisible or difficult from the front side of the pachinko machine 10. There is. Therefore, the second lens cut 462 on the periphery of the second central opening 461 clearly indicates to the player the display area and the effective line of the symbol in the drum display device 81. In addition, from the second central opening 461, a second front upper decorative pattern 442 provided on the second front light guide plate 440 and a second rear upper decorative pattern 452 provided on the second rear light guide plate 450, The pachinko machine 10 is configured to be visible from the front side. Furthermore, from the lower portion of the lower second lens cut 462, the second front lower decorative pattern 443 provided on the second front light guide plate 440 and the second rear side provided on the second rear light guide plate 450. The lower decorative pattern 453 is configured to be visible from the front side of the pachinko machine 10.

Like the front light guide plate 410, the second front light guide plate 440 is made of a transparent resin material (for example, acrylic) and has a shape different from the outer shape of the drum display device 81. A second front lower reverse R-shaped portion 440a that is a shape that is contrary to the shape (that is, an R shape that is the reverse of the R shape that is the outer peripheral shape of the drum display device 81), and is continuous from the second front lower reverse R-shaped portion 440a. And a second front upper flat plate portion 440b that is formed in a specific shape and is along the second display region forming member 460.

In addition, the second front light guide plate 440 includes a drum display device 81 and a part of the second rear light guide plate 450 arranged on the rear side of the second front light guide plate 440 on the pachinko machine 10 as a second display area forming member. It is configured to be visible from the second central opening 461 of 460.

Further, on the back surface side of the second front light guide plate 440 (that is, the back surface side of the pachinko machine 10), various concave and convex lens cuts corresponding to the second front upper decorative pattern 442 and the second front lower decorative pattern 443 are provided. The second front lower decorative pattern 443 formed on the back surface of the second front lower inverted R-shaped portion 440a is lit by turning on the second front lower LED 441 arranged below the second front light guide plate 440 in a front view. Is configured to be visibly displayed from the front side of the pachinko machine 10, and a second front upper LED (not shown) arranged on the front side of the second front light guide plate 440 is turned on. As a result, the second front upper decorative pattern 442 formed on the back surface of the second front upper flat plate portion 440b is configured to be visible from the front side of the pachinko machine 10. It should be noted that a condensing lens for condensing the light emitted from the second front upper LED and the second front lower LED 441 and irradiating the end surface of the second front light guide plate 440 is arranged. Good.

Here, the lens cut (concavo-convex shape) forming the second front upper decorative pattern 442 allows light incident from the second front upper LED (not shown) from the lateral direction in front view to the front side of the pachinko machine 10. It is a shape that can be reflected, and is configured to have a shape (for example, a vertical groove) that does not reflect or is difficult to reflect the light incident from the second front lower LED 441 from the upper direction in front view to the front side of the pachinko machine 10. Further, the lens cut (concave and convex shape) forming the second front lower decorative pattern 443 reflects the light incident from the second front lower LED 441 from the front direction (vertical vertical direction) in the front view to the front side of the pachinko machine 10. It is a possible shape, and is configured such that light incident from the second front upper LED (not shown) from the lateral direction in front view is not reflected on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 or is difficult (for example, a lateral groove). Has been done. With this configuration, when it is desired to appropriately light each decorative pattern 442, 443 of the second front light guide plate 440, in the direction (incident direction) of the light guided in the second front light guide plate 440. By configuring the decorative patterns 442 and 443 that can be lit and displayed differently from each other, a plurality of decorative patterns 442 and 443 can be individually lit and displayed on the one second front light guide plate 440. It is possible to improve the expressive power of the light plate 440 and increase the degree of attention to the game.

In addition, a second front lower decorative pattern 443 is arranged on the back surface side of the second front lower inverted R-shaped portion 440a of the second front light guide plate 440, and the second front lower part for lighting and displaying the second front lower decorative pattern 443. The light emitting surface of the LED 441 for use is arranged so as to face the lower end surface of the second front lower inverted R-shaped portion 440a. Since the second front lower inverted R-shaped portion 440a is configured in an R shape, when the light guided in the second front light guide plate 440 is weak, the second front lower decorative pattern 443 is appropriately turned on. May not be done. Therefore, in order to properly light up and display the second front lower decorative pattern 443 arranged on the back surface side of the second front lower reverse R-shaped portion 440a, the end face far from the second front lower reverse R-shaped portion 440a (that is, , Not the upper end surface of the second front upper flat plate portion 440b) but the end surface near the second front lower inverted R-shaped portion 440a, that is, the lower front end surface of the second front lower inverted R-shaped portion 440a. The lower LED 441 guides light to the second front lower decorative pattern 443. With such a configuration, the second front lower decorative pattern 443 can be accurately displayed by lighting, and the degree of attention to the game can be increased.

Like the rear light guide plate 420, the second rear light guide plate 450 is made of a transparent resin material (for example, acrylic) and has a shape different from the outer peripheral shape of the drum display device 81. From the second rear lower normal R-shaped portion 450a having a shape corresponding to the outer peripheral shape of (i.e., the R shape in the same direction as the outer peripheral shape of the drum display device 81). The second rear upper flat plate portion 450b is formed continuously and has a shape along the second display area forming member 460 (the second front upper flat plate portion 440b).

In addition, the second rear light guide plate 450 is configured such that a part of the drum display device 81 arranged on the rear side of the second rear light guide plate 450 on the pachinko machine 10 side is provided with a second central opening of the second display area forming member 460. It is configured to be visible from 461.

Further, on the back surface side of the second rear light guide plate 450 (that is, the back surface side of the pachinko machine 10), various concave-convex shaped lenses corresponding to the second rear upper decorative pattern 452 and the second rear lower decorative pattern 453. By cutting the second rear lower LED 451 which is cut and arranged below the second rear light guide plate 450 in a front view, the second rear lower regular R-shaped portion 450a formed on the rear surface side is cut. The second lower rear decorative pattern 453 is configured to be visibly displayed from the front side of the pachinko machine 10 and is arranged on the second rear upper side of the second rear light guide plate 450 when viewed from the front. By turning on the LED (not shown), the second rear upper decorative pattern 452 formed on the back side of the second rear upper flat plate portion 450b is displayed so as to be visible from the front side of the pachinko machine 10. Composed. In addition, a condenser lens for condensing the light emitted from the second rear upper LED and the second rear lower LED 451 and irradiating the end surface of the second rear light guide plate 450 is arranged. You may comprise.

Here, the lens cut (concavo-convex shape) forming the second rear upper decorative pattern 452 is a front surface of the pachinko machine 10 that receives light incident from the second rear upper LED (not shown) in the front view lateral direction. It is a shape that can be reflected to the side, and is configured to have a shape (for example, a vertical groove) that does not reflect or is difficult to reflect the light that is incident from the second rear lower LED 451 from the upper direction in a front view to the front side of the pachinko machine 10. ing. Further, the lens cut (concave and convex shape) forming the second rear lower decorative pattern 453 allows the light incident from the second rear lower LED 451 from the front direction (vertical vertical direction) to be incident on the front side of the pachinko machine 10. A shape that can be reflected on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 that is difficult or difficult to reflect to the front side of the pachinko machine 10 by a second rear upper LED (not shown). ). With this configuration, when it is desired to appropriately light each of the decorative patterns 452 and 453 of the second rear light guide plate 450, the direction of light guided in the second rear light guide plate 450 (incident direction) ), the decorative patterns 452 and 453 that can be lit and displayed are different from each other, so that the plurality of decorative patterns 452 and 453 can be individually lit and displayed on the second rear light guide plate 450. It is possible to improve the expressiveness of the first light guide plate 450 and increase the degree of attention to the game.

Further, a second rear lower decorative pattern 453 is arranged on the rear surface of the second rear lower regular R-shaped portion 450a of the second rear light guide plate 450, and the second rear lower decorative pattern 453 is lit and displayed. The light emitting surface of the second rear lower LED 451 is arranged so as to face the lower end surface of the second rear lower regular R-shaped portion 450a. Since the second rear lower regular R-shaped portion 450a is configured in an R shape, when the light guided in the second rear light guide plate 450 is weak, the second rear lower decorative pattern 453 is turned on. May not be performed properly. Therefore, in order to accurately light up and display the second rear lower decorative pattern 453 arranged on the back surface side of the second rear lower regular R-shaped portion 450a, it is far from the second rear lower regular R-shaped portion 450a. Not the end face (that is, the upper end face of the second rear upper flat plate portion 450b), but the end face near the second rear lower regular R-shaped portion 450a, that is, the lower side of the second rear lower regular R-shaped portion 450a. Light is guided from the side end surface to the second rear lower decorative pattern 453 by the second rear lower LED 451. With such a configuration, the second lower rear decorative pattern 453 can be accurately displayed in a lighted state, and the degree of attention to the game can be increased.

Further, the second front lower reverse R-shaped portion 440a of the second front light guide plate 440 and the second rear lower regular R-shaped portion 450a of the second rear light guide plate 450 are formed by bending in directions away from each other. Then, between the second front lower decorative pattern 443 formed on the second front lower inverted R-shaped portion 440a and the second rear lower decorative pattern 453 formed on the rear lower regular R-shaped portion 450a, a predetermined amount is provided. Space is formed. With such a configuration, even when the second front lower decorative pattern 443 and the second rear lower decorative pattern 453 are simultaneously turned on, the second front lower decorative pattern 443 and By forming a predetermined space between the second rear lower decorative pattern 453, the second front lower decorative pattern 443 and the second rear lower decorative pattern 453 can be lit and displayed so as to be recognizable with each other, and 2 By the front lower decorative pattern 443 and the second rear lower decorative pattern 453, it is possible to perform a stereoscopic effect.

In addition, in order to light the second lower front decorative pattern 443 in the second front light guide plate 440 (hereinafter, the same applies to the second rear light guide plate 450), the second front lower inverted R-shaped portion 440a may be extended. 2 By arranging the LEDs 441 for the lower front side, it is not necessary to arrange the LEDs for lighting on the extension of the second upper front flat plate portion 440b of the second front light guide plate 440, so that the restrictions on the arrangement of the LEDs are relaxed. Therefore, the degree of freedom in designing the light guide unit 400 can be improved.

In addition, the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment has the same configuration as that of the first embodiment and has the same effect.

Third Embodiment Next, with reference to FIG. 56, a pachinko machine 10 according to a third embodiment of the present invention will be described.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, light from the LEDs 414c, 415c, 416c is guided (irradiated) to the front light guide plate 410 through the condenser lenses 414d, 415d, 416d. ), the light from the LEDs 422c and 424 is guided (irradiated) to the rear light guide plate 420 through the diffusion lenses 423 and 425, and the one light guide plate 410 and 420 is irradiated. The same kind of lens was adopted for. On the other hand, in the third embodiment, the diffusion lens 473 and the condenser lenses 475b and 476b are used in combination for the first third light guide plate 470 formed in a shape along the outer peripheral shape of the drum display device 81. .

Specifically, on the back side of the third regular R-shaped portion 470c of the third light guide plate 470, a third upper decorative pattern group 471 that is equivalent (or the same) as the first decorative pattern group 421 of the first embodiment is formed. In addition, on the back surface side of the third lower flat plate portion 470a and the third lower inverted R-shaped portion 470b of the third light guide plate 470, the third lower portion equivalent (or the same) to the fourth decorative symbol group 413 of the first embodiment. A decorative pattern group 474 is formed. Then, in order to light up and display the third upper decorative symbol group 471, the light from the third upper LED 472 is configured to be radiated to the third light guide plate 470 via the third upper diffusion lens 473. Further, in order to light up and display the third lower decorative symbol group 474, light from the third right LED 475a provided in the third right LED unit 475 is passed through the third right condensing lens 475b. The third light guide plate 470 is irradiated, and the light from the third left LED 476a provided in the third left LED unit 476 is irradiated to the third light guide plate 470 via the third left condensing lens 476b. To configure. The relationship between the third upper decorative symbol group 471 and the third lower decorative symbol group 474 in the third embodiment is similar to that in the first embodiment when the third upper decorative symbol group 471 is lit and displayed. It is set as an effect with a higher jackpot expectation than when the third lower decorative symbol group 474 is lit and displayed.

Hereinafter, the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment will be described focusing on the differences from the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment or the second embodiment. In the following description, the same elements as those of the first or second embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and the illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 56 is a positional relationship between the third upper decorative pattern group 471 and the third upper LED 472 that can be lit and displayed on the third light guide plate 470 in the third embodiment, and the third lower decorative pattern group 474 and the third. A schematic view showing the positional relationship between the third LED LED 475a for the right side of the right LED unit 475, and the third lower LED 476a of the third lower decorative pattern group 474 and the third left LED unit 476. It is a front view. In FIG. 56, the third upper LED 472, the third right LED 475a, the third left LED 476a, the third upper diffusion lens 473, the third right condensing lens 465b, and the third left side are illustrated. The light collecting lens 476b is schematically represented for convenience of description.

As shown in FIG. 56, a third upper decorative pattern group 471 is formed on the third regular R-shaped portion 470c of the third light guide plate 470 as a fish group pattern that is a pattern simulating a school of a plurality of types of fish. The concave-convex lens cut (lateral groove) corresponding to the third upper decorative pattern group 471 is a pachinko machine for the light incident in the vertical direction and the oblique direction among the light guided to the third regular R-shaped portion 470c. Light emitted from the front side or the front side of the pachinko machine 10 is easily emitted from the front side of the pachinko machine 10 by the lens cut having the uneven shape corresponding to the third upper decorative pattern group 471. It is configured not to be emitted or difficult to be emitted. Therefore, the light diffused downward or obliquely from the upper end surface of the third light guide plate 470 causes the third upper decorative pattern group 471 to be visible and visible from the front side of the pachinko machine 10.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment, the plurality of third upper LEDs 472 provided above the third light guide plate 470 in the front view configures a plurality of recesses in the upper end surface of the third light guide plate 470 in the front view. When the third upward diffusion lens 473 is irradiated with light, the light is diffused from each one diffusion lens 473 in a plurality of directions (in the third embodiment, three directions of left side, center, and right side). It is configured. Since the third upper diffusion lens 473 has the same configuration as the rear lower diffusion lens 425 in the first embodiment, the description thereof will be omitted.

More specifically, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment, nine third upper LEDs 472 are provided, and one of the third upper diffusion lenses 473 corresponds to one third upper LED 472. The concave portion of is arranged. Further, in the third upper diffusion lens 473 at the rightmost end or the leftmost end of the third light guide plate 470, the rightward diffusion part or the leftward diffusion part is not formed, and the frontward diffusion part and the leftward diffusion part, or The third upward diffusion lens 473 is formed only by the front diffusion portion and the right diffusion portion. With this configuration, the light is not diffused in the direction in which the third upper decorative pattern group 471 is not arranged, and the light emitted by the third upper LED 472 is emitted to the third light guide plate 470 without waste. be able to.

Then, the light emitted from one third upper LED 472 to the lower side in the front view (lower side in the drawing) via the front direction diffusion portion (not shown) of the first concave portion of the third upper diffusion lens 473 is 1 Irradiation from the adjacent third upper LED 472 to the left or right via the leftward diffusion portion (not shown) or rightward diffusion diagram (not shown) of the concave portion of the third upper diffusion lens 473. It is configured such that the (diffused) light and the respective optical paths intersect at the intersection. Further, the light radiated downward from the first third upper LED 472 via the leftward diffusion portion or the rightward diffusion portion of the concave portion of the third upper diffusion lens 473 in the front view is the next adjacent third light. A portion where each optical path intersects with the light emitted (diffused) from the upper LED 472 to the right or the left through the rightward diffusion portion or the leftward diffusion portion of the one concave portion of the third upward diffusion lens 473. Are configured to overlap.

Specifically, for example, the LEDs of the third upper LED 472 are sequentially arranged from the right side in the order of “red”, “blue”, “green”, “red”, “blue”, “green”, “red”, “blue”. When lit in a total of three colors, “green”, “red” light is diffused in the optical path of a predetermined width from the third upper diffusion lens 473 corresponding to the rightmost LED of the third upper LED 472. The “blue” light is diffused through the optical path of a predetermined width from the third upper diffusion lens 473 corresponding to the second LED from the right of the third upper LED 472 (that is, the eighth LED from the left). The “green” light is diffused from the third upper diffusion lens 473 corresponding to the third LED from the right of the LED 472 (that is, the seventh LED from the left) in the optical path of the predetermined width, and from the right of the third upper LED 472. The “red” light is diffused from the third upward diffusion lens 473 corresponding to the fourth (that is, the sixth from the left) LED in the optical path of the predetermined width, and the third upward LED 472 is the fifth from the right (that is, the fifth). , The fifth from the left, the center.) The third upward diffusion lens 473 corresponding to the third upward LED diffuses the “blue” light in the optical path of a predetermined width, and the third upward LED 472 is the sixth from the right (that is, the left). The “green” light is diffused from the third upper diffusion lens 473 corresponding to the fourth LED from the left) in the optical path of the predetermined width, and the third upper LED 472 is seventh from the right (that is, third from the left). ) LED from the third upper diffusion lens 473 is diffused "red" light in the optical path of a predetermined width, and the third upper LED 472 is the eighth LED from the right (that is, the second LED from the left). The “blue” light is diffused from the corresponding third upper diffusion lens 473 in the optical path of a predetermined width, and the third upper LED corresponding to the ninth upper LED (ie, the leftmost) LED of the third upper LED 472. The “green” light is diffused from the diffusing lens 473 in an optical path having a predetermined width.

In this case, the third upper decorative pattern group 471 formed on the third regular R-shaped portion 470c of the third light guide plate 470 is at least a portion (“red”) displayed only by the optical path of “red” light, The part where the light path of "red" light and the light path of "blue" overlap are displayed ("purple"), and the light path of "red" and the light path of "green" overlap. Displayed part (“yellow”), part displayed only by “blue” light path (“blue”), “blue” light path and “green” light path overlapped Each fish pattern in the third upper decorative pattern group 471 is displayed in a total of 6 display colors including a part ("blue-green") and a part ("green") displayed only by the optical path of "green" light. Displayed respectively. Then, one fish symbol of the third upper decorative symbol group 471 is arranged on each optical path or each overlapping portion.

As a result, even if the lighting pattern has a small number of colors (for example, three colors), the third upward diffusion lens 473 diffuses the light, and the optical paths of the diffused lights overlap with each other. The color of light emitted is different from that of the overlapping portion, and more colors than the color arrangement can be displayed. Therefore, by realizing a wide variety of display colors even with a small amount of light emission color, the light emission control of the LED can be further simplified, and the control load for the light emission control of the LED can be reduced. In particular, when not using a full-color LED but arranging a plurality of types of single-color light-emitting diodes and performing the above control, cost reduction can be realized by using a single-color light-emitting diode that is lower in cost than the full-color LED, The light emission control of the LED is further simplified, and the control load on the light emission control of the LED can be reduced.

Further, with respect to one fish pattern of the third upper decorative pattern group 471, while being arranged so as to overlap the optical path of the light of the color of 1 in a predetermined portion, the optical path of the light of another color is provided in the portion other than the predetermined portion. Arrange them so that they overlap. That is, by forming one fish pattern of the third upper decorative pattern group 471 so that the fish pattern fits within the range of the plurality of optical path widths, the emission color of each part is changed to one fish pattern, One fish pattern of the upper decorative pattern group 471 can be expressed in various colors.

Note that, in the third embodiment, as in the first embodiment, the rightmost one of the third upper LEDs 472 arranged in the right-side area, the central area, and the left-side area of the third light guide plate 470 is three in number. From the third upper LED 472 located at, the third upper LED 47 located at the center, and the third upper LED 472 located at the left side are sequentially turned on, so that there is a fish group that is the third upper decorative pattern group 471. An effect as if swimming from the right side to the left side is executed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 56, in the third light guide plate 470, a third lower decorative pattern group 474 as a bubble group pattern imitating a plurality of bubbles, a third lower flat plate portion 470a and a third lower inverted R shape. It is formed in the entire region of the portion 470b. The third lower decorative pattern group 474 is arranged at least in the third lower inverted R-shaped portion 470b at a position (avoid position) that does not overlap with the optical path of the light diffused from the third upper diffusing lens 473 described above. Therefore, even when the third upper LED 472 is lit and displayed, the third lower decorative symbol group 474 is configured to be difficult to be lit.

Further, by the third right LED 475a provided on the right side of the third lower flat plate portion 470a of the third light guide plate 470, the third lower flat plate portion 470a of the third light guide plate 470 is arranged on the right side in front view. When the right end surface of the third right-side condenser lens 475b provided is irradiated with light, the light is not diffused from the left-side end surface of the third right-side condenser lens 475b and straightened (left direction). Is configured to proceed. Further, by the third left LED 476a provided on the left side of the third lower flat plate portion 470a of the third light guide plate 470 in front view, the third lower flat plate portion 470a of the third light guide plate 470 is viewed from the left side in front view. When the left end surface of the third left-side condenser lens 476b arranged in the above is irradiated with light, the light is not diffused from the right end surface of the third left-side condenser lens 476b and is straightened as it is ( It is configured to go to the right).

Further, the positions of the third right LED 475a and the third left LED 476a are such that one third right LED 475a and one third left LED 476a form a pair in the left-right direction (horizontal direction). Are arranged as follows.

The concave-convex lens cut (vertical groove) corresponding to the third lower decorative pattern group 474 is laterally incident on the light guided to the third lower flat plate portion 470a and the third lower inverted R-shaped portion 470b. The emitted light is emitted or easily emitted to the front of the pachinko machine 10, and the light incident from another direction (for example, the vertical direction or the diagonal direction) is a lens cut having an uneven shape corresponding to the third lower decorative pattern group 474. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 is configured such that it is not emitted or is difficult to be emitted to the front side of the pachinko machine 10. Therefore, the third lower decorative pattern group 474 emits light from the front side of the pachinko machine 10 by the light incident in the lateral direction from the left end surface and/or the right end surface of the third lower flat plate portion 470a of the third light guide plate 470. Will be visible.

Here, as described above, in the third light guide plate 470, each of the decorative symbol groups 471, 474 is provided in the third normal R-shaped portion 470c, or the third lower flat plate portion 470a and the third lower inverted R-shaped portion 470b. However, similar to the front light guide plate 410 of the first embodiment, any decorative symbol group 471, at the switching point P between the third lower inverted R-shaped portion 470b and the third normal R-shaped portion 470c. 474 is also configured not to be arranged. This is because when a decorative pattern for performing light guide display is arranged at a switching point P between the third lower inverted R-shaped portion 470b and the third normal R-shaped portion 470c, a portion arranged on the third normal R-shaped portion 470c and It is difficult for light reflected (guided) inside the third light guide plate 470 to properly reach the portion arranged in the lower 3D inverted R-shaped portion 470b, which may be intended depending on the position of the player's eyes. Not visible. Therefore, at the switching point P between the third lower inverted R-shaped portion 470b and the third normal R-shaped portion 470c, similarly to the first embodiment, no decorative symbol groups 471, 74 are arranged. , Appropriate expression of the pattern to be displayed by the light guide, and it is possible to execute the production without any discrepancy.

The third light guide plate 470 in the third embodiment is made of acrylic resin (PMMA), and when the refractive index of the acrylic resin is 1.49 to 1.53, the first of the condenser lenses 475b and 476b is the first. The light incident from the end face is emitted from the second end face in a straight (or almost straight; leftward or rightward direction in the drawing of FIG. 56) direction. Thus, the light incident from the first end surface of each condenser lens 475b, 476b is not diffusedly emitted from the second end surface side formed in the plurality of semicircular convex shapes but is condensed in one direction. Since it can be emitted, when it is desired to turn on the third lower decorative symbol group 474, other decorative symbols (that is, the third upper decorative symbol group 471) are not turned on when the corresponding LEDs 475a, 476a are turned on. , Only the third lower decorative symbol group 474 can be appropriately lighted and displayed. In particular, since the third lower decorative symbol group 474 has a lower jackpot reliability than the third upper decorative symbol group 471, when the third lower decorative symbol group 474 is lit, it is formed on the same light guide plate 470. When the third upper decorative symbol group 471, which has a higher jackpot expectation than the third lower decorative symbol group 474, lights up, there is a risk of discrepancies in the effect contents, and it may not be possible to achieve the game performance according to the game specification. Therefore, by configuring not to diffuse the light for the third lower decorative symbol group 474, which has a low jackpot expectation degree, by the condenser lenses 475b and 476b, it is possible to display only the third lower decorative symbol group 474 at an appropriate timing. It is possible to prevent the discrepancy in the production contents from occurring.

On the other hand, the light incident on the third light guide plate 470 from the third upper LED 472 through the third upper diffusion lens 473 is guided in the downward direction and the oblique downward direction, and thus the third upper decorative pattern group. There is a risk that the third lower decorative symbol group 474, which is disposed below the front view 471 in the front view, comes to an arrangement position, and the third lower decorative symbol group 474 is lit and displayed. However, the third lower decorative symbol group 474 is an effect with a lower jackpot expectation than the third upper decorative symbol group 471, and if the third upper decorative symbol group 471 is lit up, the third upper decorative symbol group Even if the third lower decorative symbol group 474 whose jackpot expectation degree is lower than 471 lights up, the player pays attention to the execution of the third upper decorative symbol group 471 whose jackpot expectation degree is high, and the jackpot expectation degree is low. Since attention is not paid so much to the execution of the third lower decorative symbol group 474, the production discrepancy is unlikely to occur. Therefore, the condensing lenses 475b and 476b are adopted for the third lower decorative pattern group 474 having a low jackpot expectation, and the diffusion lens 473 is adopted for the third upper decorative symbol group 471 having a high jackpot expectation. As a result, it is possible to enhance the effect of the third light guide plate 470 and increase the degree of attention to the game, while making it possible to prevent the occurrence of discrepancies in the effect.

In addition, the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment has the same configuration as that of the first and second embodiments and has the same effect.

<Fourth Embodiment>
57 and 58, a pachinko machine 10 according to a fourth embodiment of the present invention will be described.

Hereinafter, the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment will be described focusing on differences from the pachinko machine 10 according to the first to third embodiments. In the following description, the same elements as those in the first to third embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and their illustration and description will be omitted.

In the fourth embodiment, first, with reference to FIG. 57, the details of the pattern of the pseudo stop symbol that can be adopted in the variation element of the “pseudo variation” performed in the variation effect of the third symbol will be described. FIG. 58 is an explanatory diagram showing a pattern of pseudo stop symbols that can be stopped in the variable element of “pseudo variation” in the variation effect of the third symbol in the fourth embodiment.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth embodiment, as described in the first embodiment, in the drum display device 81, the respective symbol arrays of the left reel LR, the middle reel CR, and the right reel RR are different from each other. .. More specifically, roughly, first, (1) in the left reel LR in the descending order (that is, "8" → "7" → "6" → ...) with respect to the changing direction (downward), the third symbol On the other hand, the third symbols are arranged in the ascending order (that is, “1”→“2”→“3”→...) in the changing direction (downward) on the middle reel CR and the right reel RR. ing. Further, (2) a third symbol of "345" symbol in which a plurality of symbols are integrated is arranged on the middle reel CR which is the final stop symbol sequence. Furthermore, (3) on the left reel LR and the right reel RR, the third symbol corresponding to the "4" symbol (a part of the "345" symbol) arranged on the middle reel CR is not arranged. Further, (4) in the left reel LR, the "chance" symbol is arranged at a position where it can be visually recognized next to the "1" symbol, while in the middle reel CR and the right reel RR, the "chance" symbol is "8". It is arranged in a position where it can be seen next to the design.

The configuration of (1) is mainly a so-called single reach which is a “reach display” on one activated line on each activated line, and a “reach on two activated lines” in the variation effect of the third symbol. This is to enrich the variety of so-called double reach, which is "display". If all the reels LR, CR, and RR are formed in the same order arrangement (for example, ascending order arrangement) in the drum display device 81 in which three third symbols are visually recognizable in each reel. In this case, the so-called single reach occurs only on the middle effective line, and the so-called double reach occurs only on the upper effective line and the lower effective line. In such a case, the variation of “reach display” may become obsolete, and the player may be excited about the game. Therefore, as in the fourth embodiment, at least the symbol arrangements of the left reel LR and the right reel RR capable of forming the "reach display" are set in the reverse order (that is, the descending order and the ascending order), so that the upper stage, the middle stage, and the lower stage. The so-called single reach can be generated on each of the effective lines, and the so-called double reach can be generated on the right-downward effective line and the right-upward effective line. With such a configuration, it is possible to enrich the variations in which "reach display" can occur and to improve the interest of the game.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth embodiment, the configuration of the above (2) can be changed to the jackpot result when the "345" symbol is stopped on the middle reel CR, regardless of whether the "reach display" is formed. In such a case, the "345" symbol is set as a so-called chance eye symbol, and "reach display" does not appear due to the different stop symbols of the left reel LR and the right reel RR. Even if there is, it is configured so that you can leave a sense of expectation for the jackpot until the final stop symbol sequence has stopped. More specifically, when the drive of the middle reel CR is stopped (temporarily stopped), if the “345” symbol is stopped, the “re-fluctuation” variation element that causes all the reels LR, CR, RR to be varied again. To be able to develop into. This "re-fluctuation" variation element can be selected only when the jackpot lottery result is derived, so that the "re-variation" variation element is executed when the "345" symbol is stopped in the variation effect. Thus, the so-called one-shot reversal effect can be executed, and the interest of the game can be improved.

Further, in the above configuration (3), the "4" symbol is not arranged on the left reel LR and the right reel RR while the "4" symbol is included only in the "345" symbol which is arranged only on the middle reel CR. Thus, although the "reach display" itself with the "4" symbol cannot occur, the "345" symbol of the middle reel CR is conspicuous and its peculiarity is emphasized, and the "345" symbol is stopped in the middle reel CR. It is possible to enhance the interest of the game by making the game property of whether or not it remarkable.

Further, the configuration of the above (4), the numerical symbols of the left reel LR in which the numerical symbols (that is, "8" symbol → "7" symbol → ... → "1" symbol) are arranged in descending order are switched. A part, that is, a part between the "1" symbol and the "8" symbol is arranged with a "chance" symbol (hereinafter, the "chance" symbol may be abbreviated as ""C" symbol"). Together with the numerical symbols (that is, "1" symbol → "2" symbol → ... → "8" symbol) arranged in ascending order, the switching portion of the numerical symbols of the middle reel CR and the right reel RR, that is, " The "chance" symbol is arranged in the region between the "8" symbol and the "1" symbol. In the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth embodiment, when a "chance" symbol that is not a numerical symbol is stopped and displayed, a "pseudo-variation" variation element, a "re-variation" variation element, or a "special" with the highest jackpot expectation The variable element of "reach" is configured to be performed, and the "chance" symbol is stopped and displayed so that the variable effect is continuously executed and a big hit can be expected in the variable effect. In this way, in the variable effect, in each reel LR, CR, RR that changes downward, by arranging the “chance” symbols having different properties from the number symbols in the middle of the number symbols arranged in the descending order or the ascending order. , It is easy to recognize the numerical symbols that fluctuate on each reel LR, CR, RR, and to arrange the symbols of "chance" symbols, which are different in character from the numerical symbols, to enrich the variations of the game and improve the enjoyment of the game. Can be planned.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth embodiment, in the (5) variation effect, when the "reach display" with the "7" symbol occurs, a jackpot result that can generate a "probability variation state" (that is, "777"). )) is designed to be easy to appear. In other words, if you win the jackpot lottery, "reach display" with the "7" symbol can be selected, while if you do not win the jackpot lottery, "reach display" with the "7" symbol Is difficult to select. With such a configuration, the player's expectation for the jackpot can be amplified when the "reach display" with the "7" symbol appears, and the interest of the game can be improved.

Here, in the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth embodiment, in the variation element of "pseudo variation", an effect in which the "reach forming symbol" is gradually changed is provided. More specifically, in the variable element of the “pseudo fluctuation” of the fourth embodiment, a symbol change effect in which the “reach forming symbol” is changed stepwise (in ascending order) is provided, and for example, “low speed variation” When the variable element of “” is finished, the pseudo “1” symbol is stopped in the middle stage of the left reel LR, and the pseudo “1” symbol is also stopped in the middle stage of the right reel RR. In the situation where "reach display" occurs on the activated line (hereinafter, the situation may be referred to as "pseudo stop 1"), when the variable element of "pseudo fluctuation" is executed, the pseudo stop pattern is displayed. The "reach display" of a certain "1" symbol changes to the "reach display" of the "2" symbol which is also a pseudo stop symbol, and is temporarily stopped (hereinafter, this situation may be referred to as "pseudo stop 2"). ), and from there, change to "reach display" of the "3" symbol (hereinafter, this situation may be referred to as "reach formation"), and then execute various "reach display" from the variable elements of "normal reach". To be done. By configuring in this way, whether or not "reach display" occurs in which numerical symbol in the variable element of "pseudo-variation", that is, "reach display" that can generate "probability fluctuation state" occurs It is possible to execute the effect of whether or not to enrich the variations of the game and improve the interest of the game. Note that the number of steps that can be changed stepwise in the "pseudo-variation" variation element may be any number as long as it can be executed in the "pseudo-variation" variation element, and it may be two or less (including once). Good, or four or more steps.

However, in performing the variable element of "pseudo fluctuation", the left reel LR, the middle reel CR, and the right reel RR are configured as in the above (1) to (4), and further, the game as in the above (5). In the pachinko machine 10 configured to perform the variation effect in the specification, in the symbol change effect executed by the variation element of the "pseudo variation", "pseudo stop 1" at the variation element of the "pseudo variation", There are certain restrictions on the stop patterns of each of the "pseudo stop 2" and "reach formation" pseudo stop symbols.

Here, with reference to FIG. 57 and FIG. 58, a pattern of a pseudo stop symbol that can be executed by a variable element of “pseudo fluctuation” will be described. FIG. 57 is an explanatory diagram showing a pattern of a pseudo stop symbol that can be stopped in the variable element of “pseudo variation” in the variation effect of the third symbol in the fourth embodiment. Further, FIG. 58 is a schematic diagram showing the transition of the variation element of “pseudo variation” performed in the drum display device 81 in the fourth embodiment, and FIG. 58(a) is a pseudo diagram as “pseudo stop 1”. It is a schematic diagram showing a state where the stop symbol is stopped, and FIG. 58(b) shows a state in which the pseudo stop symbol as “pseudo stop 2” is stopped from the state of FIG. 58(a). 58(c) is a schematic diagram showing a state in which the "reach forming pattern" is stopped from the state of FIG. 58(b), and FIG. 58(d) is a schematic diagram of FIG. It is the schematic diagram which showed the state where "reach display" is performed from the state of (c). In FIG. 57, “” indicates the changing middle reel CR, and the numbers on the left and right thereof indicate stop symbols on the left reel LR and the right reel RR. Further, in FIG. 58, the configuration of the drum display device 81 and the display mode of the third symbol are omitted (schematically) represented.

As shown in FIG. 57, first, "pseudo stop 1" which is "pattern 1" is a "1" symbol, "pseudo stop 2" is a "2" symbol, and "reach formation" is a "3" symbol "pseudo". The variable element of “variation” (that is, “1●1”→“2●2”→“3●3”) is not restricted by the configurations of (1) to (5) above, and thus can be executed. It is configured.

More specifically, as shown in FIG. 58A, in the variable element of “pseudo fluctuation”, when the variable element of “slow fluctuation” is finished, the left reel of the drum display device 81 is set as “pseudo stop 1”. In the middle part of the LR and the right reel RR, the "1" symbol is pseudo-stopped, and the "reach display" by the "1" symbol is generated. Then, the variation effect proceeds in a state where the "reach display" with the "1" symbol is maintained for a predetermined period (for example, "2 seconds").

Then, from the state of FIG. 58A, the left reel LR and the right reel RR rotate downward, and "2" is displayed in the middle portion of the left reel LR and the right reel RR of the drum display device 81 as "pseudo stop 2". The symbol is pseudo-stopped, and the state is as if the "reach display" by the "2" symbol is generated from the "reach display" by the "1" symbol (see FIG. 58(b)). Then, the variation effect proceeds while the "reach display" of the "2" symbol is maintained for a predetermined period (for example, "2 seconds").

Then, from the state of FIG. 58(b), the left reel LR and the right reel RR rotate downward, and the "3" symbol is displayed in the middle part of the left reel LR and the right reel RR of the drum display device 81 as "reach formation". Is stopped, and the "reach display" of the "2" symbol to the "reach display" of the "3" symbol is generated (see FIG. 58(c)). Then, from this state, a "reach display" (for example, a variable element of "normal reach") shown in FIG. 58D is executed, and an effect as to whether or not the jackpot display result appears in the "reach display". Is executed.

Returning to FIG. 57, the description will be continued. Then, the "pattern 2" "pseudo stop 1" is a "2" symbol, the "pseudo stop 2" is a "3" symbol, and the "reach formation" is a "4" symbol. , "2●2" → "3●3" → "4●4") is a restriction due to the configuration of (3), that is, the left reel LR and the right reel RR do not include the "4" symbol. It is configured so that it cannot be executed.

Then, "pseudo stop 1" which is "pattern 3" is a "3" symbol, "pseudo stop 2" is a "4" symbol, and "reach formation" is a "5" symbol "pseudo-fluctuation" variation element (ie, , “3●3”→“4●4”→“5●5”) is the same as the above “Pattern 2” due to the restriction by the configuration of (3), that is, “4” for the left reel LR and the right reel RR. It is configured so that it cannot be executed because no symbols are included.

Then, the "pattern 4" "pseudo stop 1" is a "3" symbol, the "pseudo stop 2" is a "5" symbol, and the "reach formation" is a "6" symbol. , "3●3" → "5●5" → "6●6") does not include the "4" symbol, so the constraint due to the configuration of (3) above does not affect, but "pseudo stop 1" Although the "reach display" (that is, the reach by the "3" symbol) that can generate the "probability fluctuation state" in "reach display" that does not generate the "probability fluctuation state" in the "reach formation" ( In other words, the reach is changed to "6" symbol), and this is a so-called downfall effect in which the profit that can be given seems to have decreased, so that it cannot be executed so that the player does not become aroused in the game. Is configured.

Then, "Pseudo stop 1" which is "Pattern 5" is a "4" symbol, "Pseudo stop 2" is a "5" symbol, and "Reach formation" is a "6" symbol. , “4●4”→“5●5”→“6●6”) is the same as the above “Pattern 2” and “Pattern 3”, that is, the restriction due to the configuration of (3), that is, the left reel LR and the right reel. Since the reel RR does not include the "4" symbol, it is configured so that it cannot be executed.

Next, the "pattern 6" "pseudo stop 1" is a "5" symbol, the "pseudo stop 2" is a "6" symbol, and the "reach formation" is a "7" symbol. , “5●5”→“6●6”→“7●7”) is not restricted by the configurations of the above (1) to (5) and is thus configured to be executed.

Next, the "pattern 7" "pseudo stop 1" is a "6" symbol, the "pseudo stop 2" is a "7" symbol, and the "reach formation" is an "8" symbol. , “6●6”→“7●7”→“8●8”) is a “reach display” (that is, “7”) that is likely to cause a big hit in “pseudo stop 2” due to the restriction of (5) above. Despite the fact that the reach was based on the design, the "reach formation" has changed to the normal "reach display" (that is, the reach based on the "8" design), and the profit that can be given seems to have decreased. Since it is a fall production, it is configured so that it cannot be executed so that the player is not awakened to the game.

Then, the "pattern 8" "pseudo stop 1" is a "7" symbol, the "pseudo stop 2" is an "8" symbol, and the "reach formation" is a "C" symbol. , "7●7" → "8●8" → "C●C") is a "reach display" (that is, "7") that is likely to cause a big hit at "pseudo stop 1" due to the restriction of (5) above. Despite being a "reach by design", the "pseudo stop 2" has changed to a normal "reach display" (that is, reach by "8" design), which is a so-called downfall that arouses the player. Since it is a production, it is configured so that it cannot be executed. Further, when the "C" symbol is stopped, the variable element of "re-variation" can be executed, so that it cannot be said that it is a so-called falling effect in the case of the pattern, but when the "C" symbol is stopped, Since the "pseudo-variation" variation element can be executed, and the "pseudo-variation" variation element is executed again from the "pseudo-variation" variation element, the "pattern 8" can be executed. Configured to not.

Then, "pseudo stop 1" which is "pattern 9" is an "8" design, "pseudo stop 2" is a "C" design, and "reach formation" is a "1" design variation element of "pseudo variation" (that is, , “8●8”→“C●C”→“1●1”) is a “reach display” (that is, a reach display) that can generate a variable element of “re-variation” or “pseudo-variation” in “pseudo stop 2”. "Reach display" (that is, reach by "1" symbol) that does not generate variable elements of "re-variation" or "pseudo-variation" in "reach formation", although it was "C" reach. Since this is a so-called "falling down" effect in which the profit that can be given is changed and which seems to have been reduced, it is configured so that it cannot be executed so that the player is not awakened to the game.

Then, "pseudo stop 1" which is "pattern 10" is an "8" symbol, "pseudo stop 2" is a "1" symbol, and "reach formation" is a "2" symbol "pseudo-fluctuation" variation element (ie, , "8●8" → "1●1" → "2●2") skips the "reach display" by the "C" symbol from "pseudo stop 1" to "pseudo stop 2", and It is configured to change from the symbol to the “1” symbol, and is not restricted by the configurations of the above (1) to (5), so that it can be executed. In the case of this "Pattern 10", the "C" symbol is omitted (skip) and the variable element of "pseudo-variation" is executed, so the symbol control in each of the "Pattern 1" and "Pattern 6" (each reel The acceleration/deceleration patterns of LR, CR, and RR, change of time scale of constant speed fluctuation, fine adjustment of sliding return, etc.) are different.

It should be noted that, like this "Pattern 10", it may be configured not to execute a pattern that skips any of the continuous symbols and executes the variable element of "pseudo fluctuation". With this configuration, it is possible to simplify the control pattern of each reel LR, CR, RR relating to the "pseudo-variation" variation element, and reduce the control load relating to the symbol control.

Next, the "pattern 11" "pseudo stop 1" is a "C" symbol, the "pseudo stop 2" is a "1" symbol, and the "reach formation" is a "2" symbol. , “C●C”→“1●1”→“2●2”) is a “reach display” (that is, a reach display) that can generate a variable element of “re-variation” or “pseudo-variation” in “pseudo stop 1”. Even though it was a "C" reach, a "reach display" (that is, a reach based on the "2" design) that does not generate a variable element of "re-variation" or "pseudo-variation" in "reach formation" It is changing, and it is a so-called falling production that arouses the player, so it is configured so that it cannot be executed.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment, in the “pseudo-variation” variation element, the “pseudo-variation” variation element is selected from among “pattern 1”, “pattern 6”, and “pattern 10”. The pseudo stop symbol in is selected, and other patterns (that is, "pattern 2", "pattern 3", "pattern 4", "pattern 5", "pattern 7", "pattern 8", "pattern 9" and " The pattern 11") is configured so as not to be executed by the variation element of "pseudo variation". By configuring in this way, it is possible to perform variable production while accurately maintaining various game specifications, and to suppress the occurrence of discrepancies in production and to make the player feel uncomfortable and awaken. Can be suppressed and the interest in the game can be improved. Also, in the variable element of "pseudo-variation", the execution of the so-called falling effect in which the profit is temporarily stopped is changed from the large third symbol to the third symbol with the small profit is suppressed, and the player plays the game. By suppressing the excitement, it is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game.

In addition, the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment has the same effects as the first embodiment to the third embodiment with the same configuration.

<Fifth Embodiment>
Next, a pachinko machine 10 according to a fifth embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS. 59 to 70.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth embodiment, when a big hit result by a predetermined numeral pattern appears in the variable effect, the so-called "whole rotation" effect in which the numeral pattern changes while maintaining the big hit result in the variable effect. Symbol control and voice output control in FIG.

Hereinafter, the pachinko machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment will be described focusing on the differences from the pachinko machine 10 according to the first to fourth embodiments. In the following description, the same elements as those in the first to fourth embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and their illustration and description will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 59, the configurations of the left reel LR, the center reel CR, and the right reel RR in the left reel unit 81a1, the middle reel unit 81a2, and the right reel unit 81a3 that form the drum display device 81 will be described. The configurations of the left reel unit 81a1, the middle reel unit 81a2, and the right reel unit 81a3 are the same or equivalent, and therefore, in FIG. 59, the left reel unit 81a1 (left reel LR) will be described as an example.

The left reel unit 81a1 includes a cylindrical member 610 that is a cylindrical base body, and a left reel LR that is wound endlessly on the outer peripheral surface of the cylindrical member 610. The cylindrical member 610 is provided with a pair of seal portions (not shown) formed along both long sides of the left reel LR so that the left reel LR is kept wound around the cylindrical member 610. The left reel LR is attached to 610.

On the outer peripheral surface of the left reel LR, as described above, the numerical symbol and the "chance" symbol as the identification information are printed at equal intervals (see FIG. 4). A mounting recess 610a is formed in the center of the cylindrical member 610, and the drive shaft of the stepping motor 600 is mounted to the mounting recess 610a via a disc-shaped connecting plate 611. As a result, when the drive shaft of the stepping motor 600 is rotated, the cylindrical member 610 is rotated about the drive shaft, and by the rotation, the number of the left reel LR visible from the display area forming member 430 (see FIG. 6). The design and the "chance" design are configured to change.

The stepping motor 600 is fixed by a fixing member (not shown) such as a screw to a side surface of a fixing plate (not shown) arranged in a standing state in the drum display device 81. A reel position detection sensor 620 in which a light emitting element 621 and a light receiving element 622 are held at a predetermined interval is fixed to the fixing plate.

Further, the base plate 632 of the initial position member 630 extending in the radial direction is fixed to the connecting plate 611 integrated with the cylindrical member 610 with a fixing member (not shown) such as a screw.

The front end portion 631 of the initial position member 630 is bent at a substantially right angle from the base end portion 632, and is aligned so that it can pass between the light emitting element 621 and the light receiving element 622 of the reel position detection sensor 620. Then, each time the left reel LR makes one rotation, the reel position detection sensor 620 detects the passage of the tip portion 631 of the initial position member 630, and a detection signal is sent to the display control device 114 (see FIG. 33) each time the detection is made. Is output. The display control device 114 can confirm and correct the angular position of the left reel LR for each rotation based on this detection signal.

The stepping motor 600 is set so that the left reel LR is rotated once by giving an excitation signal of 400 pulses, for example, and the rotation position of the stepping motor 600, that is, the left reel LR is set according to the output mode of this excitation signal. The display control device 114 drives and controls the rotational position of the.

More specifically, on the left reel LR, a plurality of symbols and regions in the long side direction (circulation direction) (in the fifth embodiment, a number symbol and a “chance” symbol, and a total of 16 blank regions) Is drawn. Therefore, in order to switch from the symbol (region) at a predetermined position to the next region (symbol), that is, in order to change the symbol for one frame, 25 pulses (=400÷16 symbol=16 frames) are required. Then, depending on the number of pulses from the time when the detection signal of the reel position detection sensor 620 is output, which symbol and area are visible from the central opening 431 (see FIG. 6) of the display area forming member 430. It is possible to recognize or control a symbol to make an arbitrary symbol and region visible from the central opening 431 of the display region forming member 430.

Therefore, as described above, among the symbols and regions attached to the left reel LR, the middle reel CR, and the right reel RR, the symbols and the number of regions visible through the central opening 431 of the display region forming member 430 are: It is determined by the size of the design (area) and the length of the central opening 431 in the vertical direction, and in the fifth embodiment, each reel LR, CR, RR is configured to have three pieces. Therefore, in a state where all the reels LR, CR, and RR are all stopped, 3×3=9 symbols and areas are visible to the player.

Next, a more detailed configuration of the stepping motor 600 will be described with reference to FIGS. 60 to 66.

First, the operating principle of the stepping motor 600 will be described with reference to FIGS. 60 and 61. FIG. 60 is a schematic diagram showing the operating principle of the stepping motor 600 in the fifth embodiment. Further, FIG. 61 is a connection diagram showing a drive system of the stepping motor 600 in the fifth embodiment.

The stepping motor 600 of the fifth embodiment employs a hybrid type two-phase excitation drive type stepping motor that employs a 1-2 phase excitation drive system. Note that the stepping motor 600 is not limited to a hybrid type or a two-phase stepping motor, and various stepping motors such as a four-phase excitation drive type or a five-phase excitation drive type stepping motor or a one-phase excitation drive type stepping motor are adopted. May be.

As shown in FIG. 60, the hybrid type stepping motor 600 includes a rotating unit 602 arranged in the center, a first shaft unit 603, a second shaft unit 604, and a third shaft unit arranged around the rotating unit 602. 605 and a fixed portion 601 having a fourth shaft portion 606.

The rotating portion 602 is composed of a front rotating portion 602a magnetized to the N pole and a rear rotating portion 602b magnetized to the S pole, and is provided around the front rotating portion 602a (outer periphery). It is attached to the rotary shaft in a state of being relatively displaced by 1/2 pitch so that the teeth provided around (the outer periphery) of the back side rotation portion 602b are located between the teeth. A tubular magnet (not shown) is attached between the front side rotating portion 602a and the rear side rotating portion 602b.

As shown in FIG. 61, the exciting coil L1 and the exciting coil L3 are bifilar wound on the first shaft portion 603 and the third shaft portion 605, and the winding end end of the exciting coil L1 and the winding start end of the exciting coil L3 are formed. Is connected, and a predetermined DC power source +B (for example, 24 V) is applied thereto. Similarly, the exciting coil L2 and the exciting coil L4 are also bifilar wound around the second shaft portion 604 and the fourth shaft portion 606, and the winding end end of the exciting coil L2 and the winding start end of the exciting coil L4 are connected. The DC power source +B described above is also applied here.

Here, a phase in which an excitation signal is applied to the exciting coil L1 of the first shaft portion 603 to excite the first shaft portion 603 to the S pole and the third shaft portion 605 to the N pole is referred to as “A phase”. . In contrast to the “A phase”, a phase in which an exciting signal is applied to the exciting coil L3 of the third shaft portion 605 to excite the first shaft portion 603 to the N pole and the third shaft portion to the S pole. Is referred to as “reverse A phase” (in FIG. 61, “−” is written above “A”).

Similarly, a phase in which an excitation signal is applied to the exciting coil L2 of the second shaft portion 604 to excite the second shaft portion 604 to the S pole and the fourth shaft portion 606 to the N pole is referred to as “B phase”. . In contrast to the “B phase”, an exciting signal is applied to the exciting coil L4 of the fourth shaft 606 to excite the second shaft 604 to the N pole and the fourth shaft 606 to the S pole. The phase is referred to as “reverse B phase” (in FIG. 61, “−” is written above “B”).

In the fifth embodiment, in the 1-2 phase excitation drive system stepping motor 600, in the case of the 1 phase excitation drive system, “A phase”, “B phase”, “reverse A phase” and “reverse B phase”. By sequentially applying an excitation signal to, the rotating unit 602 can be driven to rotate clockwise or counterclockwise.

That is, for example, first, when the “A phase” is applied (energized), the protrusion of the first shaft portion 603 that has become the S pole, the teeth of the front side rotation portion 602a, and the third shaft portion 605 that has the N pole. The protrusions and the teeth of the back side rotation portion 602b face each other by a suction force. Next, when the “B phase” is applied (energized), the protrusion of the second shaft portion 604 that has become the S pole, the tooth of the front side rotation portion 602a, and the protrusion of the fourth shaft portion 606 that has the N pole. And the teeth of the back side rotation unit 602b face each other by the suction force. Further, when the "reverse A phase" is applied (energized) next, the protrusion of the first shaft portion 603 which has become the N pole, the teeth of the rear side rotation portion 602b, and the third shaft portion 605 which has the S pole. The protrusions and the teeth of the front side rotation unit 602a face each other by the suction force. In addition, next, when the “reverse B phase” is applied (energized), the protrusion of the second shaft portion 604 that has become the N pole, the teeth of the inner rotation portion 602b, and the fourth shaft portion 606 that has the S pole. The protrusions and the teeth of the front side rotation unit 602a face each other by the suction force. By exciting in this order, the rotating unit 602 rotates clockwise in FIG.

Here, the excitation sequence of the stepping motor 600 of the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 62 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the excitation data and the excitation forward pointer in the fifth embodiment. In the fifth embodiment, a 1-2 phase excitation drive system that alternately performs 1 phase excitation and 2 phase excitation is adopted. In one-phase excitation, only one set of first to fourth shaft portions 603 to 606 is excited, and in two-phase excitation, two adjacent sets of first to fourth shaft portions 603 to 606 are excited. .. In the 1-2 phase excitation drive method, the excitation is performed according to the following excitation sequence (excitation order) from (a) to (h).

Specifically, the 1-2 phase excitation drive method is as follows: (a) energize only "A phase" (1 phase excitation), and then (b) both "A phase" and "B phase". Is energized (2-phase excitation), then (c) only "B phase" is energized (1 phase excitation), and then (d) both "B phase" and "reverse A phase" are energized (2 Phase excitation), then (e) energizing only "reverse A phase" (1 phase excitation), then (f) energizing both "reverse A phase" and "reverse B phase" (2 phase excitation) Then, (g) energize only the "reverse B phase" (1 phase excitation), then (h) energize both "reverse B phase" and "A phase" (2 phase excitation), and then ( It is a drive system that returns to a).

In the fifth embodiment, the left reel LR makes one revolution by the excitation signal of 400 pulses, and therefore the angle change based on the excitation signal of one pulse, that is, the angle change per step is 9 degrees.

The excitation signal for the stepping motor 600 is given to the motor driver 607 (see FIG. 61) as the excitation data shown in FIG. This excitation data is stored in the RAM (not shown) of the display control device 114, and the MPU (not shown) of the display control device 114 performs a periodic process in the main process of the audio lamp control device 113 (S1102 in FIG. 46). Appropriate excitation data is output to the input/output port 608 of the display control device 114 by the timer interrupt process executed every 2 milliseconds, which is an equal multiple of (1 to S1109). The excitation phase for the stepping motor 600 is determined by this excitation data, and the excitation signal (current) is applied to the excitation phase. The timer interrupt process of the display control device 114 may be performed every 1 millisecond, which is the same interval as the regular process in the main process of the audio lamp control device 113.

The excitation phase at the time of initial excitation of the stepping motor 600 is configured to perform two-phase excitation. In the case of one-phase excitation, the rotational torque generated is smaller than that in two-phase excitation, so there is a possibility that a sufficient initial speed cannot be obtained. If a sufficient initial velocity is not obtained, the possibility of step-out increases, so two-phase excitation is preferable for initial excitation.

Further, when the stepping motor 600 is stopped, the four-phase excitation is performed immediately after the two-phase excitation is performed. When the braking process is performed only by the two-phase excitation, the rotation speed may be rapidly reduced by the strong braking force, and the player may feel uncomfortable with the movement of each reel LR, CR, RR during braking. To be done. On the other hand, by performing the 4-phase excitation immediately after the 2-phase excitation, the reels LR, CR, RR can be smoothly stopped.

When the stepping motor 600 of the fifth embodiment is used, drive characteristics as shown in FIG. 63 or 64 are required. FIG. 63 is a diagram showing an example of drive characteristics of the stepping motor 600 executed in a series of variable effects in the fifth embodiment. In addition, FIG. 64 is a diagram showing an example of drive characteristics of the stepping motor 600 executed at the time of producing "full rotation" in the fifth embodiment.

In the example shown in FIG. 63, the drive characteristics of the stepping motor 600 in the "non-reach (long)" effect mode are shown, and the stepping motor 600 starts rotating after the variable effect is started, making it difficult for the player to see the symbol. Acceleration period Ta up to constant speed rotation at a high speed of some extent, high speed constant speed rotation (for example, one frame change in 100 ms) and high speed constant speed period Tb, and a pattern from the high speed constant speed rotation to the player The first deceleration period Tc in which the vehicle is decelerated at a low speed until it reaches a constant speed, the low speed constant speed period Td in which the vehicle rotates at a constant speed at the low speed, and the low speed constant rotation to the stop. Second deceleration period Te.

That is, the period composed of the acceleration period Ta and the high-speed constant velocity period Tb matches the execution time of the variable element of “high-speed fluctuation (long)” in the variable effect, and is set so that Ta+Tb=10 seconds. Has been done. Further, the period including the first deceleration period Tc, the low speed constant speed period Td, and the second deceleration period Te is until the left reel LR is stopped during the execution time of the variable element of "low speed fluctuation" in the variable performance. Is set so that Tc+Td+Te≦5 seconds.

In the example shown in FIG. 64, the drive characteristic of the stepping motor 600 at the time of the effect of "full rotation", which is a kind of the "re-variation" effect mode, is shown. In the production of "total rotation", the jackpot pattern (for example, a jackpot result by the "5" symbol) appears on any of the activated lines, and the jackpot symbol is changed again, and each reel LR, CR, Each RR makes about one rotation, and an effect of changing to another jackpot symbol (for example, a jackpot result by the "6" symbol) is executed. Then, the re-change and the temporary stop are executed a plurality of times, and the jackpot pattern corresponding to the jackpot result finally won in the jackpot lottery (for example, the jackpot result by the “7” symbol) is stopped.

In the example shown in FIG. 64, the stepping motor 600 starts rotating after the effect of “total rotation” of the symbols that have been temporarily stopped in various variable elements is started, and the symbols are constant at a high speed that makes it difficult for the player to see the symbols. The first acceleration period T1 until the high-speed rotation is reached, the first high-speed constant-speed period T2 in which the high-speed constant-speed rotation is performed, and all the reels LR, CR, RR that have been in the high-speed constant-speed rotation are stopped simultaneously (so-called, The first temporary stop period T3, which is a temporary stop period until the rotation starts again, the second acceleration period T4 until the high speed constant speed rotation is resumed, and the second high speed constant speed rotation is performed. It is divided into a constant speed period T5.

That is, in the period composed of the first acceleration period T1 and the first high-speed constant speed period T2, the first temporary stop symbol (for example, the jackpot of the "1" symbol) that has appeared before the production start of "full rotation" ) Changes to the next second temporary stop symbol (for example, a jackpot of the "2" symbol), the second temporary stop symbol is shown to the player in the first temporary stop period T3, and the second acceleration period T4 and the second. In a period configured with the high-speed constant speed period T5, the second temporary stop symbol is set to change to the next main stop symbol (for example, a jackpot of the "3" symbol).

In the fifth embodiment, the first acceleration period T1 and the first high-speed constant speed period T2 of all reels LR, CR, RR are 2 seconds (2000 milliseconds, hereinafter, milliseconds) in the performance of "full rotation". , May be referred to as “ms”), and the first temporary stop period T3 in which the second temporary stop symbols are displayed on all reels LR, CR, RR is 0.5 seconds (500 ms). Further, the second acceleration period T4 and the second high speed constant speed period T5 of all the reels LR, CR, RR are configured to be executed in 2 seconds (2000 ms). Therefore, in the variable element of "re-variation", when the effect of "total rotation" is executed, the execution time from the first temporary stop symbol to the appearance of the main stop symbol is 4.5 seconds (4500 ms). Then, after that, the final stop symbol is configured to be displayed for a fixed time of 0.5 seconds (500 ms), so that the variable element of "re-fluctuation" ends.

Here, as described above, the left reel LR, the middle reel CR, and the right reel RR have the symbols arranged in the opposite order, so during the production of "full rotation", all reels from the first temporary stop symbol LR, CR, RR is driven around one rotation (that is, about 16 symbols before and after = around 16 frames (about ±2 frames). Hereinafter, it is necessary to rotate all reels LR, CR, and RR for 14 to 18 frames. When it is changed to the second temporary stop symbol, the amount of change of the symbol on the left reel LR is different from the amount of change of the symbol on the middle reel CR and the right reel RR. Has been done.

Specifically, for example, as a result of "reach display", "full rotation" in the state where the jackpot symbol of "1" symbol is temporarily stopped as the first temporary stop symbol at the middle position of each reel LR, CR, RR. When the effect is executed, in order to stop the jackpot symbol of the "2" symbol as the second temporary stop symbol at the middle position of each reel LR, CR, RR, the left reel LR arranged in the symbol descending order, 16 frames for one rotation-2 frames=14 frames, the symbols need to be changed, while the middle reel CR and the right reel RR arranged in ascending order are 16 frames for one rotation+2 frames=18 frames , It is necessary to change the design. That is, in the effect of "full rotation", when changing from one temporary stop symbol to the next temporary stop symbol, in the left reel LR and the middle reel CR and the right reel RR, the left reel LR is the middle reel CR and The configuration is such that the fluctuation amount is smaller than that of the right reel RR by four frames.

In this case, in order to change the reels LR, CR, and RR, which were changing at high speed in the first acceleration period T1 or the first high-speed constant speed period T2, simultaneously to the second temporary stop symbol, During the acceleration period T1 or the first high speed constant speed period T2, it is necessary to rotate all reels LR, CR, RR in a state where they are aligned with the second temporary stop symbol. In order to align all reels LR, CR, RR during the first acceleration period T1 and the first high-speed constant speed period T2, (1) a first temporary stop symbol (for example, a jackpot symbol of the "1" symbol) is stopped and displayed. While all the reels LR, CR, RR are started to rotate at the same time, the fluctuation pattern (acceleration pattern, high-speed constant speed time, high-speed constant speed, etc.) of the middle reel CR and right reel RR is changed only in the left reel LR. Different from the pattern (acceleration pattern, high-speed constant speed time, or high-speed constant speed, etc.), after about one rotation of all reels LR, CR, RR, the second temporary stop symbol (for example, a jackpot symbol of "2" symbol) ) Simultaneously, or (2) out of all reels LR, CR, RR stopped and displayed by the first temporary stop symbol, the middle reel CR and the right reel RR with a large amount of change to the second temporary stop symbol The rotation is started first, and the numerical symbol corresponding to the second temporary stop symbol of the middle reel CR and the right reel RR (for example, "2" symbol of the middle reel CR and the right reel RR) is the second temporary stop symbol of the left reel LR. The rotation of the left reel LR is started at the timing when it reaches the vicinity of the numerical symbol (for example, the "2" symbol of the left reel LR), and all reels LR are at least in any period of the first high speed constant speed period T2. , CR, RR with the second temporary stop symbols aligned, and with the rotational speed matched, all reels LR, CR, RR are stopped at the same time at the end of the first high-speed constant speed period T2. The drive control pattern can be considered.

However, in the case of the drive control pattern (1), although the rotation start timings of all reels LR, CR, RR are synchronized, it is necessary to prepare a plurality of acceleration patterns for each reel LR, CR, RR in the first acceleration period T1. Or, it is necessary to prepare a plurality of patterns of the rotation speed of each reel LR, CR, RR during the first high speed constant speed period T2, or it is necessary to perform control for adjusting the execution timing of the acceleration pattern and the rotation speed. However, the drive control of each reel LR, CR, RR for adjusting the acceleration pattern and the rotation speed becomes complicated. Further, since blank areas are formed between the numerical symbols on the respective reels LR, CR, RR, the respective reels LR, CR, which are rotated at a constant speed for a relatively long time of the first high speed constant speed period T2. In RR, the rotation speeds are different (shifted) that the number symbols are not aligned, so that the blank regions are arranged in the lateral direction of the number symbols so that the numbers are changed as if the number symbols are aligned, and the player is affected. There is a risk of giving a sense of incongruity and making the game arousing in the production of "full rotation".

On the other hand, in the case of the drive control pattern (2), it is necessary to prepare a plurality of acceleration patterns by each reel LR, CR, RR in the first acceleration period T1, and the execution timing of the acceleration pattern and the rotation speed is set. Although adjustment control is necessary, it is not necessary to prepare a plurality of patterns of rotation speeds of the reels LR, CR, RR during the first high speed constant speed period T2. Therefore, although a sense of discomfort arises due to the rotation start timing of the left reel LR being deviated from the rotation start timing of the middle reel CR and the right reel RR, a relatively early stage of the first high speed constant speed period T2 of each reel LR, CR, RR. Thus, it becomes possible to change all reels LR, CR, RR in a uniform state and at a constant speed. As a result, the drive control of the reels LR, CR, RR can be made simpler than the drive control pattern of (1), the control load can be reduced, and the first high speed constant speed period T2 is relatively early. In (at least the latter half portion), it is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game without giving the player a feeling of incongruity, suppressing the excitement of the game. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth embodiment is configured to drive-control each reel LR, CR, RR at the time of the effect of "full rotation" by the drive control pattern of (2).

Further, as described above, the stepping motor 600 is configured to transition to the state of constant speed rotation after a predetermined acceleration period. Since it is the transition time to the state in which the variable effect is clearly executed (that is, the high-speed constant-speed rotation in the variable element of “high-speed fluctuation”), the stepping motor 600 changes from the acceleration state to the constant-speed rotation state as soon as possible. It is desirable to make a transition. For that purpose, the switching of the excitation phase of the stepping motor 600 may be performed quickly, but this may cause step-out and instability of rotation.

In particular, in the stepping motor 600, when the teeth of the rotating portion 602 are attracted to the protrusions of the shaft portions 603 to 606 during the initial excitation, the initial rotation wobbling of the rotating portion 602 (the minute vibration accompanied with the reciprocating motion). ) Occurs. The rotation fluctuation varies depending on each specification, but for example, there is a case in which one round trip of 30 ms causes about 5 to 6 round trips. Therefore, it is necessary to set the excitation phase switching mode during the acceleration period while taking such an initial rotational fluctuation into consideration.

Each of the reels LR, CR, and RR in the fifth embodiment has the acceleration pattern at the time of the effect of "full rotation" while suppressing the influence of the above-described initial rotation fluctuation, the left reel LR, the middle reel CR, and the right reel RR. And are set to be different. Specifically, the middle reel CR and the right reel RR are started to rotate in a normal acceleration pattern (see S2015 in FIGS. 65 and 70) similar to that at the start of normal fluctuation, while the left reel LR is rotated to the normal acceleration. The rotation starts with a special acceleration pattern different from the pattern.

Here, with reference to FIG. 65 to FIG. 68, each excitation pattern at the time of acceleration of each reel LR, CR, RR at the time of producing “full rotation” will be described. FIG. 65 is an explanatory diagram for explaining an example of the excitation pattern of the normal acceleration process in the fifth embodiment, and FIG. 66 is an explanatory diagram for explaining an example of the excitation pattern of the special acceleration process in the fifth embodiment. It is a figure. Further, FIG. 67 is a timing chart showing the relationship between the drive mode of each reel LR, CR, RR and the output mode of the music at the time of the effect of “full rotation” in the fifth embodiment. Further, FIG. 68 is a schematic diagram showing the transition of the effect of “full rotation” performed on the drum display device 81 in the fifth embodiment, and FIG. 68(a) is a temporary jackpot result based on the “1” symbol. 68B is a schematic diagram showing a state in which the middle reel CR and the right reel RR have started to rotate in the normal acceleration process from the state of FIG. 68A. 68(c) is a schematic diagram. FIG. 68(c) shows that from the state of FIG. 68(b), the middle reel CR and the right reel RR are rotating at a high speed and at a constant speed, and the left reel LR is subjected to a special acceleration process. FIG. 68(d) is a schematic diagram showing a state in which the left reel LR, the middle reel CR, and the right reel RR are rotating at a high speed and a constant speed from the state of FIG. 68(c). 68E is a schematic diagram showing a state, and FIG. 68E shows a state in which the left reel LR, the middle reel CR, and the right reel RR are rotating at a high speed and a constant speed, as in the state of FIG. 68D. 68(f) is a schematic diagram showing a state in which the provisional jackpot result based on the "2" symbol has stopped from the state in FIG. 68(e). 68, the configuration of the drum display device 81 and the display mode of the third symbol are omitted (schematically) represented.

First, in the example of the normal acceleration process shown in FIG. 65, the acceleration process is the same as that at the time of starting the fluctuation of each reel LR, CR, RR in the fluctuation effect, and the initial excitation is “acceleration sequence 1” (for one pulse). The state set to 2-phase excitation is held for 67 interrupts (that is, 67 times of timer interrupt processing=134 ms). After that, as “acceleration sequence 2”, the one-phase excitation is switched to, and the state is held for 8 interrupts (that is, 16 ms). After that, as “acceleration sequence 3”, the mode is switched to the two-phase excitation, and the state is held for 7 interrupts (that is, 14 ms). After that, the switching of the excitation phases is alternately performed, and the switching intervals of the excitation phases are set to be gradually shortened. As a result, up to “acceleration sequence 1 to 25” of the normal acceleration process, that is, a period in which 25 pulses, which is one symbol change, is output, 150 interrupts=2 ms×150=300 ms is set as the excitation period, and during that period, It is possible to eliminate the initial rotational shake. Further, by diverting the acceleration pattern used at the start of fluctuation, the types of the acceleration pattern can be reduced and the drive control of each reel LR, CR, RR can be simplified.

On the other hand, in the example of the special acceleration processing shown in FIG. 66, there are 17 interrupts when the initial excitation is “acceleration sequence 1” (one pulse) and two-phase excitation is set (that is, 17 times of timer interrupt processing=34 ms). Held for After that, as the “acceleration sequence 2”, like the normal acceleration process, the mode is switched to the one-phase excitation, and the state is held for 8 interrupts (that is, 16 ms). After that, as “acceleration sequence 3”, the mode is switched to the two-phase excitation, and the state is held for 7 interrupts (that is, 14 ms). After that, the switching of the excitation phases is alternately performed, and the switching intervals of the excitation phases are set to be gradually shortened. As a result, up to “acceleration order 1 to 25” of the special acceleration process, that is, a period in which 25 pulses, which is one symbol change, is output, 100 interrupts=2 ms×100=200 ms is set as the excitation period, and during that period, The initial rotational fluctuation can be eliminated.

That is, in the special acceleration process, the left reel LR is drive-controlled so as to accelerate to high-speed constant-speed rotation in a period shorter than the normal acceleration process by 100 ms. Therefore, in the effect of "full rotation", the left reel LR can be rotated at a high speed and a constant speed in a relatively short time.

More specifically, as shown in FIG. 67 and FIG. 68, at the time of producing “full rotation”, first, the middle reel CR and the right that are stopped and displayed in the first temporary stop symbol (that is, the “1” symbol). The reels RR are simultaneously started to rotate by the normal acceleration process (at the start of rotation of the middle reel CR and the right reel RR in FIG. 67, and see FIGS. 68A and 68B). Then, when a predetermined high speed which is a constant speed is reached, the middle reel CR and the right reel RR are rotated while maintaining the high speed constant speed rotation. Then, the second temporary stop symbol (that is, "2" symbol) of the middle reel CR and the right reel RR that is rotated at a high speed and constant speed corresponds to the second temporary stop symbol (that is, "2" symbol) on the left reel LR. At the timing of reaching the front side of the position (at the start of rotation of the left reel LR in FIG. 67, and also in FIG. 68(c)), the first temporary stop symbol (that is, the “1” symbol) is stopped and displayed. The left reel LR is started to rotate by the special acceleration process. Then, at the timing when the left reel LR reaches the high-speed constant speed rotation (constant speed state of all reels LR, CR, RR in FIG. 67, and FIG. 68(d) and (e)), the left reel LR The second temporary stop symbol (that is, "2" symbol) and the second temporary stop symbol of the middle reel CR and the right reel RR (that is, "2" symbol) are fast aligned while maintaining a horizontal alignment. It is set to rotate at high speed. After that, at a timing when the second temporary stop symbol (that is, the "2" symbol) reaches the middle effective line, all reels LR, CR, RR that were being rotated at high speed and constant speed are stopped at the same time and the so-called bitter stop. Then, the second temporary stop symbol (that is, “2” symbol) is stopped and displayed on the activated line of the middle stage (the timing when all reels LR, CR, RR in FIG. 67 are stopped, and FIG. 68 ( See f)).

With such a configuration, the drive control of each reel LR, CR, RR can be simplified, the control load can be reduced, and at least the latter half of the first high speed constant speed period T2 has a numerical pattern. Since it is possible to rotate while aligning the numerical symbols in the state where there is no blank area in the horizontal direction, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable and to suppress the excitement of the game and to improve the interest of the game. it can.

Here, in the fifth embodiment, the player's sense of discomfort caused by the difference between the rotation start timing of the middle reel CR and the right reel RR and the rotation start timing of the left reel LR is suppressed during the "full rotation" effect. In order to do so, by adjusting the output timing of the predetermined music in the period from the change of one temporary stop symbol (for example, “1” symbol) to the next temporary stop symbol (for example, “2” symbol), It is configured to reduce the above-mentioned discomfort.

Specifically, from the first temporary stop symbol (that is, "1" symbol) to the second temporary stop symbol (that is, "2" symbol) at the time of production of "full rotation" until it appears in a stopped state. It is configured to output a predetermined music piece in synchronization with the period. Further, the rotation start timing of each reel LR, CR, RR is configured to match the beats (rhythms) output (struck) at equal intervals in the music.

More specifically, in the example shown in FIG. 67, the middle reel CR and the right reel RR that change by 18 frames are displayed from the first temporary stop symbol (that is, the “1” symbol) at the time of the effect of “full rotation”. 2 Temporary stop symbol (that is, "2" symbol) change time is set to 2 seconds, and the tempo of the music output during the change time is a beat per minute (Beats. Per·Minute (hereinafter sometimes referred to as “BPM”) is 120, that is, a music piece with a tempo of one beat every 0.5 seconds, and one bar of the music piece is output in four quarters. To configure. The middle reel CR and the right reel RR, which change by 18 frames, start to rotate at the same time as the start of the first beat in the first measure, and the left reel LR, which changes by 14 frames, change the second beat in the first measure. It is configured to start rotation at the timing of.

In this case, the middle reel CR and the right reel RR which are displaced by 18 frames rotate the first one frame (that is, from the "1" symbol to the blank region one level above) by the normal acceleration process in which the acceleration is changed in 300 ms. While performing, the remaining 17 frames (that is, from the blank area to the "2" symbol) for one frame is performed by high-speed constant-speed rotation that rotates in 100 ms, so from the first temporary stop symbol to the second in a total of 2000 ms. It changes to a temporary stop design. That is, the rotation of the middle reel CR and the right reel RR is started so as to be synchronized with the start of the first beat (strong beat) of one bar in the BPM 120 and the music of four quarters.

On the other hand, the left reel LR displaced by 14 frames rotates the first one frame (that is, from the "1" symbol to the blank region one level above) by the special acceleration process of 200 ms, and the remaining 13 frames (that is, , From the blank area to the "2" symbol) is performed at a high-speed constant speed rotation in which the frame is rotated in 100 ms, so that the first temporary stop symbol changes to the second temporary stop symbol in a total of 1500 ms. . That is, the rotation of the left reel LR is started so as to be synchronized with the start of the second beat (weak beat) of one measure in the BPM 120 and the music of four quarters.

When all reels LR, CR, and RR are rotating at a high speed and constant speed, the third beat (weak beat) and the fourth beat (weak beat) of one bar are output, and then at the end of the one bar. (After the end of the fourth beat. After 2000 ms from the start of rotation of the middle reel CR and the right reel RR) The rotations of all the reels LR, CR, RR are stopped at the same time, and the second provisional line is placed on the middle effective line. The stop symbol (that is, the "2" symbol) is stopped and displayed.

With this configuration, in the production of "full rotation", the deviation of the rotation start timing of each reel LR, CR, RR that can be visually recognized by the player can be recognized by the player's hearing. By adjusting the above, the deviation due to the visual recognition is canceled (suppressed) by the harmony (synchronization) of the tempo by the auditory sense, the player does not feel uncomfortable in the production of the "full rotation", and the expectation of the highest jackpot in the game is high. It is possible to suppress the excitement of the game in the "all revolutions" effect and improve the interest of the game.

Next, each control process executed by the MPU (not shown) in the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIGS. 69 and 70. As the processing of the MPU, a motor control processing (see FIG. 69) for driving and controlling the stepping motor 600 and a reel rotation start processing (see FIG. 70) executed in the motor control processing are mainly performed.

FIG. 69 is a flowchart showing a motor control process executed by the MPU in the display control device 114 of the fifth embodiment. The motor control process may be executed by a control device other than the display control device 114, for example, the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 or the MPU 201 of the main control device 110.

The motor control process shown in FIG. 69 is executed in the main process that is periodically executed after the predetermined startup process in the display control device 114 is completed, and mainly the drive control for the stepping motor 600 in the drum display device 81 is performed. Execute.

In this motor control process, first, it is determined whether control of the stepping motor 600 corresponding to any of the reels LR, CR, RR is necessary (S2001). As a result of the determination, if it is determined that the control of the stepping motor 600 corresponding to any of the reels LR, CR, RR is not necessary (S2001: No), that is, when all the reels LR, CR, RR are stopped. If this is the case, this motor control process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the processing of S2001, when it is determined that the stepping motor 600 corresponding to one of the reels LR, CR, and RR needs to be controlled (S2001: Yes), the detection result of the reel position detection sensor 620 and the excitation Based on the number of times the data is output, a process of grasping the rotational position of the reels LR, CR, RR to be processed is executed (S2002).

Next, it is determined whether or not the braking start timing of the reels LR, CR, RR to be processed has arrived (S2003). If it is determined that the braking start timing of the reels LR, CR, RR to be processed has arrived (S2003: Yes), the rotation of the reels LR, CR, RR to be processed is started. Therefore, the process proceeds to the reel rotation process (S2004), and after the process of the reel rotation process (S2004) is performed, the process proceeds to S2005. On the other hand, if it is determined that the braking start timing of the reels LR, CR, RR to be processed has not arrived (S2003: No), the process of S2004 is skipped and the process proceeds to S2005.

Here, the reel rotation start process (S2004) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 70 is a flowchart showing the reel rotation start processing (S2004) executed by the MPU in the display control device 114 of the fifth embodiment.

In the reel rotation start process (S2004), first, it is determined whether or not the braking start timing of each reel LR, CR, RR is the start time of the variable effect (S2011). As a result of the determination, when it is determined that it is the start time of the variable effect (S2011: Yes), all the reels LR, CR, and RR are started to rotate by the normal acceleration process (S2012), and this reel rotation start process (S2004). To end the motor control process (see FIG. 69). If it is determined that it is the start time of the variation effect, it is further determined whether it is the normal variation executed when the number of holding balls is small, or the shortening variation executed when the number of holding balls is large, and the normal variation is determined. If it is, the rotation of each reel LR, CR, RR is started by the normal acceleration processing, while if it is shortening variation, the rotation of each reel LR, CR, RR is started by the special acceleration processing. Good.

On the other hand, in the process of S2011, when it is determined that it is not the start time of the variation effect (S2011: No), it is then determined whether or not the effect is "full rotation" (S2013). As a result of the determination, if it is not the time of the effect of "full rotation" (S2013: No), the reel rotation start processing (S2004) is ended and the processing returns to the motor control processing (see FIG. 69). On the other hand, if it is determined that it is the time of the effect of "full rotation" (S2013: Yes), then all reels LR, CR, RR are in the state of being temporarily stopped, and the temporary stop time has elapsed. It is determined whether or not the timing, that is, the rotation start timing of the middle reel CR and the right reel RR (S2014).

As a result of the determination in S2014, when it is determined that all reels LR, CR, and RR are in the temporarily stopped state and the timing when the temporary stop time has elapsed (S2014: Yes), the medium reel CR and The right reel RR is started to rotate by the normal acceleration process (see FIG. 65) (S2015), and at this timing, 1 in 1 bar of the music (that is, BPM 120 and 4/4 beat) corresponding to the effect of “full rotation”. The beat is output from the audio output device 226 (S2016), the reel rotation start processing (S2004) ends, and the process returns to the motor control processing (see FIG. 69).

On the other hand, as a result of the determination in S2014, when it is determined that all reels LR, CR, and RR are in the temporary stop state and it is not the timing when the temporary stop time has elapsed (S2014: No), next, In the state where the left reel LR is temporarily stopped, it is determined whether or not the timing when the temporary stop time has elapsed, that is, the rotation start timing of the left reel LR (S2017).

As a result of the determination in S2017, when it is determined that the left reel LR is in the temporarily stopped state and the timing when the temporary stop time has elapsed (S2017: Yes), the left reel LR is subjected to the special acceleration process ( 66), the rotation is started (S2018), and at this timing, the second beat in the first measure of the music corresponding to the effect of "full rotation" is output from the audio output device 226 (S2019), and the reel rotation start processing is performed. The process ends (S2004) and returns to the motor control process (see FIG. 69). In the process of S2017, when it is determined that the left reel LR is in the temporary stop state and it is not the timing when the temporary stop time has elapsed (S2017: No), the reel rotation start process (S2004). ) Is ended, and the process returns to the motor control process (see FIG. 69).

Returning to FIG. 69, the description will be continued. In the process of S2005, the reel control process is performed (S2005), and the process proceeds to S2006. In this reel control process (S2005), a process of generating excitation data for controlling rotation of the stepping motor 600 is performed. Further, in order to realize the excitation pattern of the fifth embodiment, the ROM (not shown) of the display control device 114 stores a plurality of acceleration tables (see FIGS. 65 and 66). In the use table, at least the data of the acceleration counter and the data of the switching interval which is in one-to-one correspondence with the data of the acceleration counter are set.

In the reel control process of S2005, the switching interval counter, the acceleration counter, and the excitation order pointer provided in the RAM (not shown) of the display control device 114 are used. In the switching interval counter, the number of timer interrupts corresponding to the excitation phase switching interval is set. The excitation forward pointer is a pointer used when determining the excitation phase for the stepping motor 600. When the stepping motor 600 of 1-2 phase excitation is used, 1-phase excitation and 2-phase excitation are performed alternately, and the phase excitation pattern at that time is 8 patterns as shown in FIG. 62. Which excitation data at any phase excitation is acquired as output excitation data and is temporarily stored in the RAM of the display control device 114 is designated by the value (0 to 7) of this excitation order pointer. To be done.

In this reel control process, it is determined whether or not each reel LR, CR, RR is being braked. If the reels are not being braked, on the condition that the numerical information of the switching interval counter is "1" or more, The numerical value information of the switching interval counter is decremented by 1, and it is determined whether or not the numerical value information after the subtraction is "0". If the numerical information is not "0", the reel control process is ended, while if the numerical information is "0", the acceleration table is read from the ROM (not shown) of the display control device 114, Data of the switching interval corresponding to the current value of the acceleration counter in the acceleration table is set in the switching interval counter. For example, at the start of rotation of each reel LR, CR, RR, the reel rotation start processing (see FIG. 70) is executed, so that the numerical information of the acceleration counter corresponds to the first acceleration order in the acceleration table. 25”. In this case, the numerical information of "2" is set in the switching interval counter.

Next, the process of updating the excitation order pointer is executed. Specifically, one is added to the numerical information of the excitation order pointer, and when the added numerical information exceeds the maximum value "7" of the excitation order pointer, the numerical information is cleared to "0". Then, the excitation data table as shown in FIG. 62 is read from the ROM of the display control device 114, and the excitation data corresponding to the numerical information of the current excitation order pointer is read. Then, the read excitation data is stored in the RAM as the current excitation data for the reels LR, CR, RR which are the targets of the reel control process.

Next, on the condition that the numerical information of the acceleration counter is “1” or more, the numerical information of the acceleration counter is decremented by 1. As a result, when the next excitation phase switching is executed for the reels LR, CR, and RR that are the current processing targets, the switching interval data corresponding to the numerical information of the acceleration counter after this subtraction is set. In this case, since it is executed on condition that the numerical value information of the acceleration counter is "1" or more, if the numerical value information of the acceleration counter is already "0", that state is maintained. Also, when the numerical information of the acceleration counter is "0", the switching interval is 1 interrupt. Therefore, when the numerical information of the acceleration counter once becomes "0", the excitation phase is switched according to the numerical information of the excitation forward pointer every time the timer interrupt processing is executed once. This state is the constant speed state.

In the process of S2006, it is determined whether or not the control of the stepping motor 600 has been completed for all the spinning reels LR, CR, RR (S2006), and for all the spinning reels LR, CR, RR. When the control of the stepping motor 600 is completed (S2006: Yes), the excitation data for the spinning reels LR, CR, and RR is output to the input/output port 608 (see FIG. 61) of the display controller 114 (S2007). ), and this motor control process is completed. On the other hand, in the process of S2006, when the control of the stepping motor 600 has not been completed for all the spinning reels LR, CR, RR (S2006: No), the process of S2007 is skipped and this motor is skipped. The control process ends.

Since the output to the input/output port 608 of the display control device 114 is a data writing process to the output port (not shown) corresponding to the input/output port 608, the motor driver 607 (see FIG. 61) receives the excitation data. Excitation data is supplied at the same time as writing to the input/output port 608. As a result, the stepping motor 600 immediately performs energization processing for the excitation phase specified by the excitation data, and the rotation section 602 is energized.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment, the middle reel CR and the right reel RR that are stopped and displayed with the first temporary stop symbol are simultaneously processed by the normal acceleration process at the time of the effect of "full rotation". Start rotating. Then, when a predetermined high speed which is a constant speed is reached, the middle reel CR and the right reel RR are rotated while maintaining the high speed constant speed rotation. Then, the second temporary stop symbol of the middle reel CR and the right reel RR that is rotated at a high speed at a constant speed is the second temporary stop symbol of the left reel LR, and the special acceleration of the left reel LR stopped and displayed by the first temporary stop symbol is performed. The rotation is started by the processing. Then, at the timing when the left reel LR reaches the high-speed constant speed rotation, the second temporary stop symbol of the left reel LR and the second temporary stop symbols of the middle reel CR and the right reel RR are aligned in a horizontal row. It is set to rotate at high speed and constant speed while maintaining. After that, at the timing when the second temporary stop symbol reaches the effective line of the middle stage, all reels LR, CR, RR that were rotated at high speed at a constant speed are stopped simultaneously and so-called, and on the effective line of the middle stage. At, the second temporary stop symbols are stopped and displayed. With such a configuration, the drive control of each reel LR, CR, RR can be simplified, the control load can be reduced, and at least the latter half of the first high speed constant speed period T2 has a numerical pattern. Since it is possible to rotate while aligning the numerical symbols in the state where there is no blank area in the horizontal direction, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable and to suppress the excitement of the game and to improve the interest of the game. it can.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth embodiment, during the production of "full rotation", the middle reel CR and the right reel RR that change by 18 frames have a change time from the first temporary stop symbol to the second temporary stop symbol. The tempo of the music output during the change time is set to 2 seconds and the tempo of the music is set to the music of BPM 120 indicating the number of beats per minute, and one bar of the music is output in 4/4 beats. .. The middle reel CR and the right reel RR, which change by 18 frames, start to rotate at the same time as the start of the first beat in the first measure, and the left reel LR, which changes by 14 frames, change the second beat in the first measure. It is configured to start rotation at the timing of. With this configuration, in the production of "full rotation", the deviation of the rotation start timing of each reel LR, CR, RR that can be visually recognized by the player can be recognized by the player's hearing. By adjusting the above, the deviation due to the visual recognition is canceled (suppressed) by the harmony (synchronization) of the tempo by the auditory sense, the player does not feel uncomfortable in the production of the "full rotation", and the expectation of the highest jackpot in the game is high. It is possible to suppress the excitement of the game in the "all revolutions" effect and improve the interest of the game.

In addition, the pachinko machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment has the same configuration as that of the first to fourth embodiments and has the same effect.

<Sixth Embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 71, a pachinko machine 10 according to a sixth embodiment of the present invention will be described.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth embodiment, during the production of "full rotation", while changing from the first temporary stop design to the second temporary stop design, the sound for one bar of the music is output and the one bar is generated. The rotation of the middle reel CR and the right reel RR is started at the first beat, and the rotation of the left reel LR is started at the second beat of the first measure, the rotation start timing of each reel LR, CR, RR and the tempo of the music. Was synchronized with. In this case, the acceleration pattern at the start of rotation of the middle reel CR and the right reel RR is made different from the acceleration pattern at the start of rotation of the left reel LR, so that the start of rotation of each reel LR, CR, RR and that of the music It is configured to synchronize the timing with the tempo.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 of the sixth embodiment, during the production of "full rotation", while changing from the first temporary stop symbol to the second temporary stop symbol, the main sound (for example, a loud sound, a main melody, a female voice) A tonic forming a part (soprano or alto), a melody line, etc., and an auxiliary sound to the tonic (for example, a volume lower than a loud volume or a submelody (accompaniment), a male part (tenor or bass), a bass line, etc. ) Is output, the main sound is output when the middle reel CR and the right reel RR start rotating, and the sub sound is output when the left reel LR starts rotating. To configure. Then, in this case, the acceleration pattern of the middle reel CR and the right reel RR and the acceleration pattern of the left reel LR are executed in the same pattern (that is, the normal acceleration process).

Hereinafter, the pachinko machine 10 according to the sixth embodiment will be described focusing on the points different from the pachinko machines 10 according to the first to fifth embodiments. In the following description, the same elements as those in the first to fifth embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and their illustration and description will be omitted.

In the sixth embodiment, with reference to FIG. 71, the drive mode and timing of each reel LR, CR, RR and the output mode and timing of a music composed of a main sound and a sub sound will be described in the "full-rotation" effect. To do. FIG. 71 is a timing chart showing the relationship between the drive modes of the reels LR, CR, and RR and the music output modes during the "full-rotation" effect in the sixth embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 71, in the production of "full rotation" of the sixth embodiment, first, the middle reel CR and the right reel RR stopped and displayed in the first temporary stop symbol (that is, "1" symbol) are displayed. The normal acceleration process starts the rotation at the same time (when the middle reel CR and the right reel RR in FIG. 71 start to rotate). Then, when a predetermined high speed which is a constant speed is reached, the middle reel CR and the right reel RR are rotated while maintaining the high speed constant speed rotation. Then, the second temporary stop symbol (that is, "2" symbol) of the middle reel CR and the right reel RR that is rotated at a high speed and constant speed corresponds to the second temporary stop symbol (that is, "2" symbol) on the left reel LR. At the timing of reaching the front side of the position (at the time of starting the rotation of the left reel LR in FIG. 71), the left reel LR stopped and displayed in the first temporary stop symbol (that is, “1” symbol) is set to the middle reel CR and Like the right reel RR, the rotation is started by the normal acceleration process. Then, at the timing when the left reel LR reaches the high-speed constant-speed rotation (constant-speed state of all reels LR, CR, RR in FIG. 71), the second temporary stop symbol of the left reel LR (that is, “2” symbol) , And the second temporary stop symbols (that is, “2” symbols) of the middle reel CR and the right reel RR are set to rotate at a high speed and constant speed while maintaining a state where they are aligned in a horizontal row. After that, at a timing when the second temporary stop symbol (that is, the "2" symbol) reaches the middle effective line, all reels LR, CR, RR that were being rotated at high speed and constant speed are stopped at the same time and the so-called bitter stop. Then, the second temporary stop symbol (that is, the "2" symbol) is stopped and displayed on the activated line in the middle stage (timing at which all reels LR, CR, RR in FIG. 71 are stopped).

With this configuration, the acceleration process at the start of rotation of each reel LR, CR, RR can be made common to simplify the drive control, the control load can be reduced, and the first high-speed constant speed can be reduced. In at least the latter half of the period T2, since it is possible to rotate while aligning the numerical symbols in a state where there is no blank area in the lateral direction of the numerical symbols, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable and restraining the game from being aroused. However, the interest in the game can be improved.

Here, in the sixth embodiment, the player's sense of discomfort caused by the difference between the rotation start timing of the middle reel CR and the right reel RR and the rotation start timing of the left reel LR is suppressed during the "full rotation" effect. In order to do so, by adjusting the output timing of the predetermined music in the period from the change of one temporary stop symbol (for example, “1” symbol) to the next temporary stop symbol (for example, “2” symbol), It is configured to reduce the above-mentioned discomfort.

Specifically, from the first temporary stop symbol (that is, "1" symbol) to the second temporary stop symbol (that is, "2" symbol) at the time of production of "full rotation" until it appears in a stopped state. It is configured to output a predetermined music piece in synchronization with the period. Further, the music is composed of a main sound and a sub sound, and the rotation start timing of each reel LR, CR, RR is matched with the output start timing of the main sound and the output start timing of the sub sound.

More specifically, in the example shown in FIG. 71, the middle reel CR and the right reel RR, which change by 18 frames, are displayed from the first temporary stop symbol (that is, the “1” symbol) during the production of “full rotation”. The change time of the two temporary stop symbols (that is, the "2" symbol) is set to 2 seconds, and the music output during the change period is also output for 2 seconds. Then, the middle reel CR and the right reel RR, which change by 18 frames, start to rotate at the same time as the output of the main sound in the music, and the left reel LR, which changes by 14 frames, start the output of the auxiliary sound in the music. It is configured to start rotation at a timing.

In this case, the middle reel CR and the right reel RR which are displaced by 18 frames rotate the first one frame (that is, from the "1" symbol to the blank region one level above) by the normal acceleration process in which the acceleration is changed in 300 ms. While performing, the remaining 17 frames (that is, from the blank area to the "2" symbol) for one frame is performed by high-speed constant-speed rotation that rotates in 100 ms, so from the first temporary stop symbol to the second in a total of 2000 ms. It changes to a temporary stop design. That is, the rotation of the middle reel CR and the right reel RR is started so as to be synchronized with the output of the main sound of the music for 2 seconds.

Further, the left reel LR displaced by 14 frames, the first one frame (that is, from the "1" symbol to the blank area one above) is the normal acceleration process of 300 ms, like the middle reel CR and the right reel RR. While rotating with, the remaining 13 frames (that is, from the blank area to the "2" symbol) for one frame is performed at a high-speed constant speed rotation that rotates for 100 ms, so the first temporary stop symbol within a total of 1600 ms. Changes to the second temporary stop design. That is, the rotation of the left reel LR is started in synchronization with the output of the auxiliary sound which is output 400 ms after the start of the music for 2 seconds.

Then, in a state where all the reels LR, CR, RR are rotating at a high speed and a constant speed, the tones and sub tones of the music are continuously output, respectively, and then, at the end of the music (the middle reel CR and the right reel RR). The rotation of all reels LR, CR, RR is stopped at the same time so as to be synchronized with 2000 ms after the start of the rotation), and the second temporary stop symbol (that is, the "2" symbol) is stopped and displayed on the middle effective line. It

With such a configuration, in the production of "full rotation", a deviation of the rotation start timing of each reel LR, CR, RR that can be visually recognized by the player can be configured to be recognized by the player's hearing. By driving in accordance with the output of each element, the shift due to the above-mentioned visual recognition is canceled (suppressed) by the harmony (synchronization) of the music by the auditory sense, and the player does not feel uncomfortable in the production of the "full rotation", and the game is played. It is possible to suppress the excitement of the game in the "full-rotation" production, which has the highest expectation for a big hit, and improve the interest of the game.

Further, by performing the acceleration process at the time of starting the rotation of each reel LR, CR, RR during the "full-rotation" effect in common with the normal acceleration process, it is not necessary to provide a special acceleration pattern such as a special acceleration process. The drive control of each reel LR, CR, RR can be simplified, and the control load related to the symbol control can be reduced.

In addition, the pachinko machine 10 according to the sixth embodiment has the same configuration as that of the first to fifth embodiments and has the same effect.

<Seventh Embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 72, a pachinko machine 10 according to a seventh embodiment of the present invention will be described.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth embodiment, during the production of "full rotation", while changing from the first temporary stop design to the second temporary stop design, the sound for one bar of the music is output and the one bar is generated. The rotation of the middle reel CR and the right reel RR is started at the first beat, and the rotation of the left reel LR is started at the second beat of the first measure, the rotation start timing of each reel LR, CR, RR and the tempo of the music. Was synchronized with. In this case, the acceleration pattern at the start of rotation of the middle reel CR and the right reel RR is made different from the acceleration pattern at the start of rotation of the left reel LR, so that the start of rotation of each reel LR, CR, RR and that of the music It is configured to synchronize the timing with the tempo.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 of the seventh embodiment, during the effect of "full rotation", while changing from the first temporary stop symbol to the second temporary stop symbol, three or more sounds (for example, Doremi (code C )) is composed of at least one tone (for example, domi) that constitutes a chord (chord), and a second tone (for example, So) which is the remaining tone of the chord. The first sound is output when the rotation of the middle reel CR and the right reel RR is started, and the second sound is output when the rotation of the left reel LR is started. To configure. Then, in this case, similarly to the sixth embodiment, the acceleration pattern of the middle reel CR and the right reel RR and the acceleration pattern of the left reel LR are executed in the same pattern (that is, normal acceleration processing).

Hereinafter, the pachinko machine 10 according to the seventh embodiment will be described focusing on the points different from the pachinko machines 10 according to the first to sixth embodiments. In the following description, the same elements as those in the first to sixth embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and their illustration and description will be omitted.

In the seventh embodiment, with reference to FIG. 72, a drive mode and timing of each reel LR, CR, RR at the time of "full-rotation" effect, and a song (sound effect) composed of a first sound and a second sound. The output mode and timing of will be described. FIG. 72 is a timing chart showing the relationship between the drive mode of each reel LR, CR, and RR and the output mode of the music during the "full-rotation" effect in the seventh embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 72, during the production of "full rotation" in the seventh embodiment, first, the middle reel CR and the right reel RR that are stopped and displayed in the first temporary stop symbol (that is, the "1" symbol) are displayed. The normal acceleration processing starts the rotation at the same time (when the middle reel CR and the right reel RR in FIG. 72 start to rotate). Then, when a predetermined high speed which is a constant speed is reached, the middle reel CR and the right reel RR are rotated while maintaining the high speed constant speed rotation. Then, the second temporary stop symbol (that is, "2" symbol) of the middle reel CR and the right reel RR that is rotated at a high speed and constant speed corresponds to the second temporary stop symbol (that is, "2" symbol) on the left reel LR. At the timing of reaching the front side of the position (at the start of rotation of the left reel LR in FIG. 72), the left reel LR stopped and displayed in the first temporary stop symbol (that is, the “1” symbol) is set to the middle reel CR and Similar to the right reel RR, the rotation is started by the normal acceleration process. Then, at the timing when the left reel LR reaches the high speed constant speed rotation (constant speed state of all reels LR, CR, RR in FIG. 72), the second temporary stop symbol of the left reel LR (that is, “2” symbol) And, the second temporary stop symbols (that is, “2” symbols) of the middle reel CR and the right reel RR are set to rotate at a high speed and constant speed while maintaining a state where they are aligned in a horizontal row. After that, at a timing when the second temporary stop symbol (that is, the "2" symbol) reaches the middle effective line, all reels LR, CR, RR that were being rotated at high speed and constant speed are stopped at the same time and the so-called bitter stop. Then, the second temporary stop symbol (that is, the "2" symbol) is stopped and displayed on the activated line in the middle stage (timing at which all reels LR, CR, RR in FIG. 72 are stopped).

Here, in the seventh embodiment, the player's discomfort caused by the difference between the rotation start timing of the middle reel CR and the right reel RR and the rotation start timing of the left reel LR is suppressed during the "full rotation" effect. In order to do so, by adjusting the output timing of a predetermined music in the period from the change of one temporary stop symbol (for example, “1” symbol) to the next temporary stop symbol (for example, “2” symbol), It is configured to reduce the above-mentioned discomfort.

More specifically, in the example shown in FIG. 72, the middle reel CR and the right reel RR, which change by 18 frames, are displayed from the first temporary stop symbol (that is, the “1” symbol) during the production of “full rotation”. The change time of the two temporary stop symbols (that is, the "2" symbol) is set to 2 seconds, and the music output during the change time is also output for 2 seconds. Then, the middle reel CR and the right reel RR, which change by 18 frames, start to rotate at the same time when the output of the first sound (the domi of the three chords of Domiso in the seventh embodiment) in the music that is the chord starts. , The left reel LR, which changes by 14 frames, is configured to start rotation at the timing of starting the output of the second sound (in the seventh embodiment, of the Doremi's three chords) in the above-mentioned music piece. .

In this case, the middle reel CR and the right reel RR which are displaced by 18 frames rotate the first one frame (that is, from the "1" symbol to the blank region one level above) by the normal acceleration process in which the acceleration is changed in 300 ms. While performing, the remaining 17 frames (that is, from the blank area to the "2" symbol) for one frame is performed by high-speed constant-speed rotation that rotates in 100 ms, so from the first temporary stop symbol to the second in a total of 2000 ms. It changes to a temporary stop design. That is, the rotation of the middle reel CR and the right reel RR is started in synchronization with the output of the first sound of the music for 2 seconds.

Further, the left reel LR displaced by 14 frames, the first one frame (that is, from the "1" symbol to the blank area one above) is the normal acceleration process of 300 ms, like the middle reel CR and the right reel RR. While rotating with, the remaining 13 frames (that is, from the blank area to the "2" symbol) for one frame is performed at a high-speed constant speed rotation that rotates for 100 ms, so the first temporary stop symbol within a total of 1600 ms. Changes to the second temporary stop design. That is, the rotation of the left reel LR is started in synchronization with the output of the second sound output 400 ms after the start of the music for 2 seconds.

Then, while all the reels LR, CR, RR are rotating at high speed and constant speed, a chord is formed by continuously outputting the first and second tones of the music, and then the music ends. At the same time (2000 ms after the start of rotation of the middle reel CR and the right reel RR), the rotation of all the reels LR, CR, RR is stopped at the same time, and the second temporary stop symbol (that is, "2" symbol) is stopped and displayed.

With such a configuration, in the production of "full rotation", the deviation of the rotation start timing of each reel LR, CR, RR that can be visually recognized by the player can be recognized as harmony by the player's hearing. By driving in accordance with the output of the first sound and the second sound constituting the above, the deviation due to the above-mentioned visual recognition is canceled (suppressed) by the harmony (harmonicity) of the music by the auditory sense, and the player in the "full rotation" effect. It is possible to improve the interest of the game by suppressing the excitement of the game in the "all-rotation" effect, which has the highest expectation of a big hit in the game, without giving a feeling of strangeness.

In the seventh embodiment, when each reel LR, CR, RR from the second temporary stop symbol to the main stop symbol rotates, each reel LR, CR, RR from the first temporary stop symbol to the second temporary stop symbol. It may be configured to output a chord (for example, reciprocal (chord G)) that does not cause a feeling of strangeness in combination with the chord (for example, Doremi (chord C)) that was output during rotation. With this configuration, the symbol control and the voice output control during the "whole rotation" effect are performed as an integrated and harmonious effect, and the player feels uncomfortable in the "whole rotation" effect. Instead, it is possible to suppress the excitement of the game in the "all-rotation" effect, which has the highest jackpot expectation in the game, and to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, in the seventh embodiment, when the "full-rotation" effect is produced, it is configured so as to output the triad of Domiso in accordance with the rotation of each reel LR, CR, RR, but instead of this, other Three chords (major triad, minor triad, minor triad, augmented triad, diminished triad) and four chords (long seven chord) (Major Sevens), short seven chords (Minor Sevens), short three major seven chords (Minor Major Sevens), reduced five short seven chords (half diminished), reduced seven chords (diminished)・Sevens), additional seven chords (Augmented Major Sevens), five chords (genuine nine chords (Nine), Genuine seven nine nine chords (Major Nine)) Good.

In addition, the pachinko machine 10 according to the seventh embodiment has the same configuration as the first embodiment to the sixth embodiment, and has the same effect.

Although the present invention has been described based on the above embodiment, the present invention is not limited to the above embodiment, and various modifications and improvements can be easily made without departing from the spirit of the present invention. It can be inferred. For example, in each embodiment, a part or a plurality of parts of the configuration of another embodiment is added to the embodiment or a part or a plurality of parts of the configuration of the embodiment is exchanged, thereby The embodiment may be modified and configured. Further, the numerical values mentioned in the above embodiment are examples, and it is naturally possible to adopt other numerical values.

<Modification 1>
In the first embodiment, the front light guide plate 410 and the rear light guide plate 420 are made of an acrylic material (acrylic resin, refractive index of about 1.49 to 1.53). On the other hand, the front light guide plate 410 and the rear light guide plate 420 are made of polycarbonate (polycarbonate resin, refractive index of about 1.59) or optical plastic (polymethylmethacrylate resin, refractive index of about 1.491 to 1.57). , Nylon (nylon-based resin, refractive index about 1.53), or polyester (polyester-based resin, refractive index about 1.60). In this case, the shapes of the rear upper diffusion lens 423 and the rear lower diffusion lens 425 (that is, the left diffusion portion 425a, the front diffusion portion 425b, the right diffusion portion 425c) are set in accordance with the refractive index of each resin. It may be configured to be appropriately changed and configured to reliably irradiate (diffuse) light with respect to the first decorative pattern group 421.

<Modification 2>
In the first embodiment, one concave portion in the rear upper diffusion lens 423 and the rear lower diffusion lens 425 has three sides of the left diffusion portion 425a, the front diffusion portion 425b, and the right diffusion portion 425c. The LED 422c and 424 are configured to diffuse the light in three directions of the left direction, the front direction, and the right direction with respect to the light irradiation direction of the LEDs 422c and 424. On the other hand, one concave portion in the rear-side upper diffusion lens 423 and the rear-side lower diffusion lens 425 is configured with two sides or four or more sides, and the light diffusion direction is two directions or four. You may comprise so that it may become more than the direction.

<Modification 3>
In the above-described first embodiment, the rear upper LED 422c and the rear lower LED 424 of the rear light guide plate 420 are positioned so as to form a pair in the vertical direction (positions that overlap in the vertical vertical direction). Was installed in. Further, one LED of the front right LED 415c and the front left LED 416c of the front light guide plate 410 is provided so as to be paired in the left-right direction (position that overlaps in the horizontal left-right direction). On the other hand, one LED of the rear upper LED 422c and the rear lower LED 424, or one LED of the front right LED 415c and the front left LED 416c does not overlap vertically or horizontally or horizontally. You may comprise so that it may shift and it may provide. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent a blank area where light is not emitted from occurring in the front light guide plate 410 or the rear light guide plate 420, and to decorate each decoration on the entire surface of the front light guide plate 410 or the rear light guide plate 420. The symbols 411, 412, 413, 421 can be surely displayed, and the degree of attention to the game can be increased.

<Modification 4>
In the first embodiment, the upper rear diffusion lens 423 and the lower rear diffusion lens 425 are formed on the upper and lower end surfaces of the rear light guide plate 420 by the width of the light emitting surface of one LED 422c, 424. Was configured as. On the other hand, the upper rear diffusion lens 423 and the lower rear diffusion lens 425 may be formed on the entire upper and lower end surfaces of the rear light guide plate 420. With this configuration, the rear upper diffusion lens 423 and the rear lower diffusion lens 425 can be formed without considering the positions of the LEDs 422c and 424, and the production efficiency of the rear light guide plate 420 can be improved. In addition to the improvement, the degree of freedom in designing the arrangement of the LEDs 422c and 424 can be increased.

<Modification 5>
In the above-described first embodiment, the left-side diffusion portion 425a, the front-side diffusion portion 425b, and the right-side diffusion portion 425c, which form one concave portion of the rear-side upper diffusion lens 423 and the rear-side lower diffusion lens 425, are formed on the respective sides. It was configured to have a uniform length. On the other hand, the left diffusion portion 425a, the front diffusion portion 425b, and the right diffusion portion 425c may have different sides. In particular, when the sizes of the decorative patterns to be displayed on the rear light guide plate 420 are different from each other, the length of each side may be formed according to the size of the display target. Specifically, for example, if there is a first display target whose display target size is a predetermined size and a second display target that is twice the size of the first display target, the second display target The length of the side corresponding to the optical path toward the first display object is configured to be twice the length of the side corresponding to the optical path toward the first display target. Thus, by forming the length of each side of the diffusion lens so as to correspond to the size of the display target, each display target can be appropriately turned on.

<Modification 6>
In the above-described first embodiment, the light guide unit 400 is configured by the front light guide plate 410 and the rear light guide plate 420 having a shape along the outer periphery of the drum display device 81 having a cylindrical outer shape. On the other hand, the light guide unit 400 is configured by a light guide plate that follows the outer peripheral shape of the cylindrical drum display device 81 and a light guide plate that has a shape irrelevant to the outer peripheral shape of the drum display device 81 (for example, a flat plate shape). You may. Further, the light guide unit 400 may be configured by a plurality of light guide plates having a shape (for example, a flat plate shape) irrelevant to the outer peripheral shape of the cylindrical drum display device 81. Further, when the display unit such as a liquid crystal display device instead of the drum display device 81 is a flat display device and the variation effect of the third symbol is performed, a light guide plate (eg, a light guide plate along the outer shape of the flat liquid crystal display device, for example, The light guide unit 400 may be configured by a light guide plate having a flat plate shape) and a light guide plate having a shape unrelated to the outer shape of the liquid crystal display device (for example, a shape having an R-shaped portion in part). When the display unit such as a liquid crystal display device is a flat display device instead of the drum display device 81 and the variation effect of the third symbol is performed, a shape unrelated to the outer shape of the flat liquid crystal display device (for example, The light guide unit 400 may be composed of a plurality of light guide plates each having a shape having an R-shaped portion.

<Modification 7>
In the first embodiment, the front light guide plate 410 is configured to be able to display three types of decorative designs (that is, the second decorative design group 411, the third decorative design group 412, and the fourth decorative design group 413), and the rear guide One type of decorative design (that is, the first decorative design group 421) can be displayed on the light plate 420, and the two light guide plates 410, 420 can perform four types of effects, which are larger than the number of light guide plates 410, 420. Was configured into. On the other hand, three or more light guide plates may be configured to be able to execute a plurality of types (for example, four or more types) of effects that are larger than the number of light guide plates.

<Modification 8>
In the first embodiment, the front light guide plate 410 and the rear light guide plate 420 are both configured to have a regular R-shaped portion that follows the outer peripheral shape of the drum display device 81. On the other hand, while the light guide plate on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 is formed in a shape having a regular R shape, the light guide plate on the back side is formed in a shape portion having an inverted R shape portion which is opposite (paired) to the regular R shape. It may be configured to be formed. In this case, a predetermined effect device (for example, a movable accessory or a liquid crystal display device) is provided in the space between the light guide plate having a regular R shape on the front side and the light guide plate having an inverted R shape on the back side. Good. By configuring in this way, the light guide plate on the front side and the light guide plate on the back side perform an integrated and three-dimensional powerful effect, thereby enhancing the effect of each light guide plate, and the degree of attention to the game. Can be increased.

<Modification 9>
In the first embodiment, when the confirmation lamp 311 is turned on, the vertical width of the first decorative symbol group 421 is reduced and executed. On the other hand, you may comprise so that the execution mode of the 1st decorative symbol group 421 at the time of execution of the confirmation lamp 311 may be reduced laterally and executed. Further, when the first decorative symbol group 421 is displayed when the confirmation lamp 311 is executed, the board surface first decorative symbol group 60a and the board surface second decorative symbol group 60b may not be executed. With this configuration, the effect of the first decorative symbol group 421 and the effect of the confirmation lamp 311 can be partitioned so that they do not overlap or are difficult to perform, and the effect of the confirmation lamp 311 can be more prominent. . Therefore, it can be configured so as not to interfere with the effect of the confirmation lamp 311 which is important as a game. Further, it becomes easy to simultaneously execute the effect by the confirmation lamp 311 and the effect by the first decorative symbol group 421 without performing complicated control, and it is possible to increase the effect variation.

<Modification 10>
In the first embodiment, when the first decorative symbol group 421 is executed when the finalizing lamp 311 is executed, the fish group symbol on the upper part of the first decorative symbol group 421 is not illuminated. On the other hand, when the first decorative symbol group 421 is executed when the finalizing lamp 311 is executed, the display color of the first decorative symbol group 421 on the finalizing lamp 311 side is the display color of the finalizing lamp 311 (for example, “red”). May be configured to be executed in a display color (for example, “blue”) that is distinctly different from the above. With this configuration, the effect of the first decorative symbol group 421 and the effect of the confirmation lamp 311 can be partitioned so that they do not overlap or are difficult to perform, and the effect of the confirmation lamp 311 can be more prominent. . Therefore, it can be configured so as not to interfere with the effect of the confirmation lamp 311 which is important as a game. Further, it becomes easy to simultaneously execute the effect by the confirmation lamp 311 and the effect by the first decorative symbol group 421 without performing complicated control, and it is possible to increase the effect variation.

<Modification 11>
In the above-described first embodiment, the effect by the front light guide plate 410 and the effect by the rear light guide plate 420 are separately executed so as not to overlap. On the other hand, by performing the effects by the front light guide plate 410 and the rear light guide plate 420 at the same time, various effects are executed, and the effect effects of the front light guide plate 410 and the rear light guide plate 420 are enhanced, respectively, to the game. You can increase the attention of.

<Modification 12>
In the first embodiment, when the confirmation lamp 311 is executed, when the first decorative symbol group 421 is executed, the effect scale of the first decorative symbol group 421 is reduced. On the other hand, when the confirmation lamp 311 is executed, when the second decorative symbol group 411, the third decorative symbol 412 or the fourth decorative symbol group 413 is executed, or the variation effect performed by the drum display device 81 is executed. In the case of, the second decorative symbol group 411, the third decorative symbol 412 or the fourth decorative symbol group 413, or the effect scale of the variable effect may be reduced and executed. Examples of the reduction of the production scale include a case where the production width or the production range is reduced, a case where the production color or the production brightness is reduced, and a case where the production time is reduced.

<Modification 13>
In the first embodiment, the drum display device 81 is used to execute whether or not the big hit is drawn by the variation effect of the third symbol. On the other hand, whether or not the liquid crystal display device, the 7-segment display device, and the rotary belt display device perform a variable effect to perform a jackpot lottery, or whether a ball wins a predetermined winning opening provided in the lottery device with clune It may be configured to perform a lottery as to whether or not a jackpot is awarded.

<Modification 14>
In the first embodiment, when the confirmation lamp 311 is turned on, when the first decorative symbol group 421 is executed, the effect width of the first decorative symbol group 421 is reduced and executed. On the other hand, the movable range of the movable accessory is provided when the movable range of the movable effect that can suggest the game result in the variable effect in advance is overlapped with the effect site of the first decorative symbol group 421. The effect width of the first decorative symbol group 421 may be reduced so as not to overlap. Further, the movable range of the movable accessory may be reduced so as not to overlap with the effect width of the first decorative symbol group 421. In this case, it is configured to give priority to the effect having a higher jackpot expectation for the variable effect. With such a configuration, it is possible to distinguish a plurality of effects so that they do not overlap or are difficult to perform, and it is possible to make an effect with a high jackpot expectation degree stand out. Therefore, it is possible to configure so as not to interfere with an important effect as a game.

<Modification 15>
In the first embodiment, in the front light guide plate 410, light is allowed to enter through the flat plate portion below the front light guide plate 410 and the lateral end faces of the lower inverted R-shaped portion, and the fourth decorative symbol group 413 is turned on. The second decorative symbol group 411 and the third decorative symbol 412 can be turned on by allowing light to enter from the lower end surface of the flat plate portion below the front light guide plate 410. On the other hand, any of the decorative symbol groups 411, 412, 413 may be configured to allow light to enter from the end face in the lateral direction, and the decorative symbol groups 411, 412, 413 may be configured to be lightable. Specifically, light is allowed to enter from the flat plate portion below the front light guide plate 410 and the lateral end faces of the lower inverted R-shaped portion so that the fourth decorative symbol group 413 can be turned on, and the front light guide plate is also provided. The light may be incident from the lateral end surface of the regular R-shaped portion 410, and the second decorative symbol group 411 and the third decorative symbol 412 may be lighted.

In this case, regarding the lighting of the fourth decoration design group 413 whose jackpot expectation is low, when a condenser lens is adopted and the fourth decoration design group 413 is desired to be lit, the decoration design group 411 other than the fourth decoration design group 413. , 412 is configured not to be lit, while the jackpot expectation degree is higher than the fourth decorative symbol group 413, regarding the lighting of the second decorative symbol group 411 and the third decorative symbol 412, a diffusion lens is adopted, and the second decorative symbol is used. When it is desired to turn on the group 411 and the third decorative symbol 412, the second decorative symbol group 411 and the third decorative symbol 412 may be clearly turned on. Even if the fourth decorative symbol group 413 is lit and displayed when the second decorative symbol group 411 or the third decorative symbol group 412 is lit and displayed, the discrepancies in the effect are small. Therefore, when the second decorative symbol group 411 or the third decorative symbol 412 is turned on, the fourth decorative symbol group 413 having the lowest jackpot expectation degree can be visually recognized from the front side of the pachinko machine 10. Also, the discrepancies in the production can be minimized, and the player can be provided with a comfortable game.

In addition, the arrangement position of the second decorative symbol group 411 and the third decorative symbol 412 formed so as to correspond to the position where the drum display device 81 showing the result of the variable effect of the third symbol is arranged is the variable effect. It is also a part in which a movable accessory or the like for executing the effect is stored and arranged. In this case, the LED board for lighting the second decorative symbol group 411 and the third decorative symbol 412 and the like must be arranged so as to avoid the arrangement position and the movable range of the movable accessory, and the movable accessory or the LED. There is a risk that the degree of freedom in designing the board will be reduced. Therefore, an LED board for lighting the second decorative symbol group 411 and the third decorative symbol 412 formed so as to correspond to the position where the drum display device 81 showing the result of the variation effect of the third symbol is arranged. By forming the movable accessory in a position that does not interfere with the arrangement position and the movable range (for example, the upper side or the lower side of the front light guide plate 410), the degree of freedom in designing the movable accessory or the LED substrate can be increased. .

<Modification 16>
In the first embodiment, in the rear light guide plate 420, the LEDs 422c and 424 are turned on as if the first decorative symbol group 421 is moved and displayed from the right side to the left side in front view. On the other hand, the first decorative symbol group 421 may be configured to light up the LEDs 422c and 424 as if moving and displaying the first decorative symbol group 421 from below or above. In this case, the LEDs 422c, 424 are arranged in the left-right direction of the rear light guide plate 420, and the LEDs 422c, 424 arranged in the left-right direction are sequentially turned on in any direction from the first decoration. An effect as if moving and displaying the symbol group 421 from below or above to above or below may be executed.

<Modification 17>
In the first embodiment, the front side light guide plate 410 adopts the condenser lenses 414d, 415d, 416d so that each decorative pattern group 411, 412, 413 can be turned on, and the rear side light guide plate 420 has a diffusion lens. By adopting 423 and 425, the first decorative symbol group 421 was configured to be able to be turned on. On the other hand, in one light guide plate, a condensing lens and a diffusing lens may be adopted so that each decorative pattern can be turned on. Specifically, for example, a low-reliability decorative pattern with a low jackpot expectation is placed at a position where it can be seen by turning on the condenser lens, and a high-reliability decorative pattern with a high jackpot expectation is turned on by turning on the diffusion lens. It is arranged to be visible. In this case, when the low-reliability decorative pattern is turned on, while the high-reliability decorative pattern is prevented from being turned on by the condensing light by the condenser lens, the high-reliability decorative pattern is turned on. Is configured so that the low-reliability decorative pattern can be turned on by the diffusion of light by the diffusion lens. Even if the high-reliability decorative pattern is lit and displayed, even if the low-reliability decorative pattern is lit and displayed, the discrepancy in the production is small. Therefore, even when the low-reliability decorative pattern having the lowest jackpot expectation when the high-reliability decorative pattern is turned on can be visually recognized from the front side of the pachinko machine 10, the discrepancy in the production is minimized. It is possible to provide the player with a game that does not feel uncomfortable as long as possible.

<Modification 18>
In the first embodiment, the fourth decorative pattern group 413 having the lowest jackpot expectation degree, the second decorative symbol group 411 and the third decorative symbol 412 having the jackpot expectation degree higher than the fourth decorative symbol group, Formed collectively on the light plate 410, the first decorative symbol group 421 having a higher jackpot expectation than the fourth decorative symbol group 413, the second decorative symbol group 411 and the third decorative symbol group 412 is different from the front light guide plate 410 on the rear side. It was formed on the light guide plate 420. On the other hand, only the fourth decorative symbol group 413 with the lowest jackpot expectation is formed on the front light guide plate 410, and the first decorative symbol group 421 and the second decorative symbol with the jackpot expectation higher than that of the fourth decorative symbol group 413. The group 411 and the third decorative pattern 412 may be formed on the rear light guide plate 420.

<Modification 19>
In the above-described first embodiment, the decorative patterns 411, 412, 413 are arranged so that none of the decorative patterns 411, 412, 413 are located at the site where the lower inverted R-shaped portion and the normal R-shaped portion of the front light guide plate 410 are switched. Had formed. On the other hand, a portion where the upper flat plate portion and the upper inverted R-shaped portion switch, a portion where the upper inverted R-shaped portion and the regular R-shaped portion switch, a portion where the regular R-shaped portion and the lower inverted R-shaped portion switch, or The decorative pattern 411, 412, 413, 421 may be located at a portion where the lower inverted R-shaped portion and the lower flat plate portion are switched.

<Modification 20>
In the first embodiment, the light is incident from the upper flat plate portion or the lower flat plate portion of each light guide plate 410, 420. On the other hand, the light may be incident from the end surface of any of the R-shaped portions.

<Modification 21>
In the first embodiment, when performing the variation effect of the third symbol on the drum display device 81, the symbol arrays of the left reel LR are arranged in descending order, and the symbol arrays of the middle reel CR and the right reel RR are arranged in ascending order. It was Further, on the middle reel CR, "4" symbols which are not arranged on the left reel LR and the right reel RR are arranged. For this reason, since there is no jackpot pattern including the “4” symbol as the jackpot forming symbol, the reach forming symbol including the “4” symbol cannot be generated as the “reach display”. Therefore, in a production such as "pseudo-variation", when stepping up the reach forming symbol, for example, when increasing the numbers of the reach forming symbol in ascending order, the step-up producing including "4" cannot be performed. Specifically, as a three-step step-up effect, "1" → "2" → "3" or "5" → "6" → "7" is possible, but "2" → "3"->"4" and "3"->"4"->"5" cannot be produced. Therefore, when performing the step-up effect of the reach formation symbol by "pseudo-variation" or the like, it is configured to perform the step-up effect from a symbol that does not include "4". With such a configuration, it is possible to execute a production that does not cause production discrepancies and that does not cause discomfort.

<Modification 22>
In the first embodiment, when performing the variation effect of the third symbol on the drum display device 81, the symbol arrays of the left reel LR are arranged in descending order, and the symbol arrays of the middle reel CR and the right reel RR are arranged in ascending order. It was For this reason, when performing a so-called full-rotation effect in which the symbols of all reels LR, CR, and RR are aligned and varied in the variation effect, the symbols of the middle reel CR and the right reel RR, both of which are in ascending order, are aligned. When the symbols of the middle reel CR and the right reel RR which are started to rotate and are to be temporarily stopped during the entire rotation are lined up with the symbols of the left reel LR, the symbols of the left reel LR and the middle reel CR and the right reel RR Start the rotation so that the patterns are aligned. Then, the above-mentioned symbols are temporarily stopped on any of the activated lines (for example, the middle line) and are repeated a plurality of times to execute the full rotation effect. In this case, by outputting the music (sound effect) at the timing of the temporary stop, and by outputting the music (sound effect) at the start and during the rotation of each reel LR, CR, RR, It is possible to execute a powerful rhythmical production with a good tempo.

<Modification 23>
In the first embodiment, the game board 13 is provided with a board surface first decorative pattern group 60a and a board surface second decorative pattern group 60b that imitate a fish school pattern, and the rear light guide plate 420 has a first decoration of the same shape as the fish school pattern. The symbol group 421 is provided, and the game board 13 and the rear light guide plate 420 are configured to perform an integrated effect. In this case, the board surface first decorative symbol group 60a or the board surface second decorative symbol group 60b of the game board 13, and the first decorative symbol group 421 of the rear light guide plate 420 so as to complete one fish symbol. May be arranged. Specifically, for example, a pattern in which a part of the fish is interrupted is arranged in the board surface first decorative pattern group 60a, and the remaining pattern part of the fish is arranged on the rear light guide plate 420, and viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 10. In this case, the fish pattern of 1 is formed. With such a configuration, the game board 13 and the rear light guide plate 420 can continuously perform an integrated effect in the left-right direction, and the boundary between the game board 13 and the rear light guide plate 420 can be executed. Unnaturalness due to the discontinuity of the fish pattern 1 in the part can be suitably suppressed. In consideration of the difference in height between the board surface position of the game board 13 and the rear light guide plate 420 (the height in the front-back direction of the pachinko machine 10), the size of each divided fish pattern is formed, and the pachinko machine 10 is formed. It is preferable that the fish pattern 1 can be recognized without any discomfort (when it is viewed from the front direction) so as not to be unnatural.

<Modification 24>
In the above-described first embodiment, the decorative pattern or the like is not arranged on the display area forming member 430, and the effective line in the drum display device 81 is clarified. On the other hand, a decorative pattern may be arranged on the display area forming member 430, and the light guide unit 400 or the game board 13 may be configured to be able to perform an integrated effect. Specifically, for example, in the display area forming member 430 as well, a fish group decorative pattern having the same form as the fish group pattern of the first decorative symbol group 421, the board surface first decorative symbol group 60a and the board surface second decorative symbol group 60b is formed, The game board 13, the rear light guide plate 420, and the display area forming member 430 may be configured to perform an integrated effect. In this case, for example, a pattern in which a part of the fish is interrupted is arranged in the board surface first decorative pattern group 60a, the rear light guide plate 420, or the rear light guide plate 420, and the remaining pattern part of the fish is arranged in the display area forming member 430. Then, the fish pattern 1 is formed when viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 10. With this configuration, the game board 13 or the rear light guide plate 420 and the display area forming member 430 can continuously and integrally produce an effect in the left-right direction.

<Modification 25>
In the first embodiment, the lens cut 432 of the display area forming member 430 has a plurality of rib shapes. On the other hand, the lens cut 432 is configured by light diffusion processing (for example, embossing) having a fine concavo-convex shape so that light from the outside does not easily enter the front light guide plate 410 and the rear light guide plate 420. May be.

<Modification 26>
In the first embodiment, the light emitted from the LEDs 414c, 415c, 416c is condensed by the condenser lenses 414d, 415d, 416d, and the directivity of the LEDs 414c, 415c, 416c with respect to the front direction is obtained. The front light guide plate 410 is configured to irradiate the existing light and cause the light to enter. On the other hand, a light emitting means having a directivity different from that of the above configuration may be used to allow the light to enter the front light guide plate 410. Specifically, for example, a lens that absorbs light other than in the front direction and irradiates only the light in the front direction in the front direction of each of the LEDs 414c, 415c, 416c may be used.

<Modification 27>
In the above-described first embodiment, the left-side diffusion portion 425a, the front-side diffusion portion 425b, and the right-side diffusion portion 425c of the rear-side upper diffusion lens 423 and the rear-side lower diffusion lens 425 are formed in the same shape, and the respective diffusions are formed. The light radiated to the lenses 423 and 425 is configured to diffuse the light at the same angle. On the other hand, the rear upper diffusion lens 423 and the rear lower diffusion lens 425 are formed so that the shapes of the respective diffusion portions 425a and the like are different, and the rear upper diffusion lens 423 and the rear lower diffusion lens 425 are formed. You may comprise so that the angle of the light diffused may differ with. With this configuration, the light is guided from various directions into the rear light guide plate 420, and the light is comprehensively guided into the rear light guide plate 420 so that all the first decorations are formed. The symbol group 421 can be appropriately turned on. Further, by making the angle of the traveling direction of the light diffused by the rear upper diffusion lens 423 different from the angle of the traveling direction of the light diffused by the rear lower diffusion lens 425, the first decorative symbol group. The lighting (light emission) display of 421 can have randomness, and the light emission display of the first decorative symbol group 421 can be suppressed from becoming monotonous.

<Modification 28>
In the first embodiment, in the rear lower diffusion lens 425, the leftward diffusion portion 425a, the frontward diffusion portion 425b, and the rightward diffusion portion 425c are formed in common in all the recesses, and the rear light guide plate 420 is provided. The rear lower diffusion lens 425 at the rightmost end or the leftmost end is also configured to have the rightward diffusion portion 425c or the leftward diffusion portion 425a. On the other hand, in the rear lower diffusion lens 425 at the rightmost end or the leftmost end of the rear light guide plate 420, the rightward diffusion portion 425c or the leftward diffusion portion 425a is not formed, but the frontward diffusion portion 425b and the leftward diffusion portion 425b. The rear lower diffusion lens 425 may be formed only by the directional diffuser 425a or the front diffuser 425b and the right diffuser 425c. With such a configuration, light is not diffused in the direction in which the first decorative symbol group 421 is not arranged, and the light emitted by each LED 424 can be emitted to the rear light guide plate 420 without waste.

<Modification 29>
In the above-described first embodiment, the front light guide plate 410 and the rear light guide plate 420 notify the big hit expectation degree suggestion in the fluctuating effect, the confirmation lamp 311 notifies the big hit occurrence suggestion in the fluctuating effect, and each suggestion is made by different display devices. Was configured to run. In contrast, one display device, for example, one light guide plate, drum display device 81, or liquid crystal display device may be configured to execute the jackpot expectation suggestion and the jackpot occurrence suggestion. In this case, when the execution timings of the jackpot occurrence suggestion and the jackpot expectation degree suggestion are combined, the execution area of the jackpot expectation suggestion in execution is set as in the case of turning on the confirmation lamp 311 when the first decorative symbol group 421 is executed. It is preferable to reduce and execute the jackpot occurrence suggestion.

<Modification 30>
In the first embodiment, the front light guide plate 410 and the rear light guide plate 420 are arranged on the front surface side of the drum display device 81 that executes the variation effect of the third symbol, and the light guide plates 410 and 420 change the variation effect. It was configured to execute the notice production. On the other hand, one or a plurality of movable accessory members such as shutter accessory members may be arranged on the front side of the drum display device 81, and the notice effect in the variation effect may be executed by the movable accessory members.

<Modification 31>
In the first embodiment, the display area forming member 430 is disposed on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 of the drum display apparatus 81, and the area of the drum display apparatus 81 visible from the central opening 431 of the display area forming member 430 is an effective line. Was configured as. On the other hand, the display area forming member 430 may be configured to be drivable, and the display area of the drum display device 81 visible from the central opening 431 may be configured to be variable so that the number of effective lines can be changed. .

<Modification 32>
In the above-described first embodiment, the variable winning a prize device 65 is provided below the game board 13 when viewed from the front (the lower side when viewed from the front of the first starting port 64a), and the variable winning device 65 can be opened and closed only during a big hit. It was equipped with only the function as a game ball winning device. On the other hand, in the variable winning a prize device 65, the first special symbol lamp and the second special symbol that are variably displayed corresponding to the variation effect of the first special symbol that can inform the execution state of the variation effect of the first special symbol. A second special symbol lamp that is variably displayed in accordance with the variation effect, a first number of reserved lamps that corresponds to the number of reserved first special symbols, a second number of reserved lamps that corresponds to the number of second special symbols reserved, game balls A so-called fourth symbol display, such as a launch mode notification lamp (so-called right-handed notification lamp) that suggests the launch mode to the player, an error notification lamp that notifies the player that a normal game cannot be executed on the pachinko machine 10, and the like. Functions such as a device and a game situation suggesting device may be added. With such a configuration, the state of the game can be grasped only by the variable winning device 65. Therefore, even if the drum display device 81 or various notification lamps are out of order, the variable winning device 65 The notification function enables the player to accurately indicate the game situation and the like. In addition, the variable winning a prize device 65, the through gate 67 and the second starting opening 64b are arranged on the right side of the game board 13 when viewed from the front, so that a game state advantageous to the player (ie, "probability variation state" or "time reduction state"). ), in the case of a pachinko machine that allows the player to play a so-called right-handed game, the above-mentioned game is realized by adding a function such as a so-called fourth symbol display device or game situation suggesting device to the variable winning device 65. By confirming the variable winning device 65 in the state, it is possible to briefly suggest the game content (result) to the player.

<Modification 33>
In the first embodiment, the rear upper diffusion lens 423 and the rear lower diffusion lens 425 provided on the rear light guide plate 420 are formed in the same shape. On the other hand, the shape of the rear upper diffusion lens 423 may be different from the shape of the rear lower diffusion lens 425. Specifically, for example, the angle of the light path of the light diffused by the rear upper diffusion lens 423 and the angle of the light path of the light diffused by the rear lower diffusion lens 425 are set to different angles. The shapes of the upper side diffusion lens 423 and the rear lower diffusion lens 425 are configured. With such a configuration, randomness is created in the overlapping portion of the optical path of the light diffused from the rear upper diffusion lens 423 and the optical path of the light diffused from the rear lower diffusion lens 425, which is unexpected. It is possible to realize the lighting display of a certain decorative pattern and execute various effects.

<Modification 34>
In the first embodiment described above, the optical path widths of the light emitted from the leftward diffusion portion 425a, the frontward diffusion portion 425b, and the rightward diffusion portion 425c forming one concave portion of the rear-side lower diffusion lens 425 are the same. As described above, the side lengths of the leftward diffusion portion 425a, the frontward diffusion portion 425b, and the rightward diffusion portion 425c are formed. On the other hand, the light path widths of the light emitted from the left diffusion portion 425a, the front diffusion portion 425b, and the right diffusion portion 425c may be different from each other. Specifically, for example, the left diffusion portion 425a, the front diffusion portion 425b, and the right diffusion portion 425c have the same side length (for example, all 50 μm), and light emitted from the front diffusion portion 425b. The optical path width may be different from the optical path width of the light emitted from the leftward diffusion portion 425a and the rightward diffusion portion 425c. With such a configuration, randomness is created in the optical path of the light diffused from each of the diffusing sections 425a to 425c, and it is possible to realize a surprisingly lit display of the decorative pattern, and it is possible to perform various effects.

<Modification 35>
In the first embodiment, the front right LED 415c and the front left LED 416c corresponding to the fourth decorative symbol group 413 in the front light guide plate 410 are arranged so that the fourth decorative symbol group 413 can be lit and displayed. I was composed. On the other hand, the LED (for example, the front right LED 415c) corresponding to the fourth decorative symbol group 413 is arranged only on one side (for example, rightward), and the fourth decorative symbol group 413 is lit and displayed. You may comprise. With this configuration, the installation cost of the LED can be reduced.

<Modification 36>
In the first embodiment, in order to light up and display the decorative symbol groups 411, 412, 413 on the front light guide plate 410, the condenser lenses 414d, which condense the light emitted from the LEDs 414c, 415c, 416c, respectively. 415d and 416d were arranged. On the other hand, at least one or more condenser lenses 414d, 415d, 416d of the condenser lenses 414d, 415d, 416d are not arranged, and the light emitted from the LEDs 414c, 415c, 416c may be condensed depending on the part. Alternatively, the front light guide plate 410 may be directly irradiated with light without using the above. In particular, for an LED corresponding to a part (for example, a decorative pattern in which different decorative patterns are not adjacent to each other (that is, the fourth decorative pattern group 413)) where it is not necessary to collect light from the LEDs 414c, 415c, 416c. Is configured so that no condenser lens is provided. With such a configuration, it is possible to eliminate the condenser lens in the portion where the production discrepancies are unlikely to occur, reduce the number of parts of the light guide unit 400, and reduce the manufacturing cost.

<Modification 37>
In the first embodiment, in the rear light guide plate 420, the diffusion lenses 423 and 425 are respectively formed on the upper end surface of the rear upper flat plate portion and the lower end surface of the rear lower flat plate portion, and the diffusion lenses 423 are formed. , 425, the first decorative symbol group 421 can be illuminated and displayed. On the other hand, the diffusion lens 425 is formed only on one of the end surfaces (for example, the lower end surface of the rear lower flat plate portion), and the diffusion lens 425 is formed on the other end surface (for example, the upper end surface of the rear upper flat plate portion). It may be configured such that the first decorative symbol group 421 can be turned on only by the diffusion lens 425 formed on the one end face without forming a lens. With this configuration, the number of parts of the light guide unit 400 can be reduced, and the manufacturing cost can be reduced.

<Modification 38>
In the second embodiment, in the two light guide plates 440 and 450, a second front light guide plate 440 having a second front lower reverse R shape part 440a which is the only R shape part in the second front light guide plate 440, The light guide unit 400 is formed by the second rear light guide plate 450 having the second rear lower regular R shape part 450a which is the only R shape part in the second rear light guide plate 450. On the other hand, as the light guide unit 400, a forward R light guide plate located on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 has a regular R shape portion as the only R shape portion (that is, the same direction as the front side outer peripheral shape of the drum display device 81). And a rear light guide plate located on the back side of the front light guide plate, and an inverted R shape part (that is, a front side outer peripheral shape of the drum display device 81) as the only R shape part. A rear light guide plate having a reverse R-shaped portion) may be provided. With such a configuration, it is possible to form a predetermined space between the upper flat plate portions of the front light guide plate and the rear light guide plate, so, for example, an effect by another effect device in the predetermined space (for example, By configuring the movable accessory to appear and disappear, it is possible to perform various effects by the light guide unit 400 and other effect devices, and improve the interest of the game. Further, in the second embodiment, the light guide plates 440 and 450 each having a unique R-shaped portion are provided on the lower side of the drum display device 81. On the other hand, the light guide plate having only one R-shaped portion may be provided on the upper side, the left side, or the right side of the drum display device 81.

<Modification 39>
In the second embodiment, each of the two light guide plates 440 and 450 has the R-shaped portion. On the other hand, the R-shaped portion is formed only on one of the light guide plates 440 and 450, and the R-shaped portion is not formed on the other light guide plate 450 or 440, that is, the light guide plate is formed of only the flat plate portion. Good. Also, various effects may be executed using only one light guide plate having one R-shaped portion.

<Modification 40>
In the second embodiment, the second front lower decorative pattern 443 (second rear lower decorative pattern 453) provided on the second front lower inverted R-shaped portion 440a (second rear lower normal R-shaped portion 450a) is used. The second front lower LED 441 (second rear lower LED 451) is arranged below the second front lower inverted R-shaped portion 440a (second rear lower normal R-shaped portion 450a) in order to be able to light. It was On the other hand, the second front lower LED 441 (second rear lower LED 451) may be configured to be able to light the second front upper decorative pattern 442 (second rear upper decorative pattern 452). With such a configuration, restrictions on the arrangement of the LEDs in the light guide unit 400 can be relaxed, and the degree of freedom in designing the light guide unit 400 can be improved.

<Variation 41>
In the first embodiment, two light guide plates 410 and 420 are provided, and one light guide plate 410 is irradiated with light via the condenser lenses 414d, 415d, and 416d, and diffused to the other light guide plate 420. It is configured to emit light via the lenses 423 and 425. In addition, in the third embodiment, one light guide plate 470 is provided, and the light guide plate 470 is irradiated with light via the condenser lenses 475b and 476b and is also irradiated with light via the diffusion lens 473. I was composed. On the other hand, when two light guide plates are provided, only one condenser lens, a plurality of condenser lenses, and one condenser lens are provided for one light guide plate depending on the type or mode of the decorative pattern to be turned on. The diffuser lens only, a plurality of diffuser lenses, a combination of the condenser lens and the diffuser lens, or both the condenser lens and the diffuser lens are not irradiated, and one condenser lens is provided for the other light guide plate. Only, a plurality of condensing lenses, one diffusing lens, a plurality of diffusing lenses, a combination of a condensing lens and a diffusing lens, or no condensing lens and a diffusing lens may be used to irradiate light. .. When one light guide plate is provided, only one condenser lens, a plurality of condenser lenses, and one diffusion lens are provided for the light guide plate depending on the type or mode of the decorative pattern to be turned on. Only, a plurality of diffusing lenses, a condensing lens and a diffusing lens may be combined, or the condensing lens and the diffusing lens may not be provided and light may be emitted. With such a configuration, by appropriately adopting a condenser lens or a diffusion lens according to the type or mode of the decorative pattern to be lighted, it is possible to perform desired lighting display for the decorative pattern on the light guide plate. , It is possible to enhance the effect of production on the light guide plate and increase the degree of attention to the game.

<Variation 41>
In the fourth embodiment, the "chance" symbols are arranged on the reels LR, CR, RR, respectively, and a game of whether or not the "chance" is stopped is created. On the other hand, the "chance" symbol may not be arranged on each reel LR, CR, RR, and the symbol arrangement may be configured by only the numerical symbols. By configuring in this way, the acceleration/deceleration pattern and the constant speed that were necessary for skipping the "chance" symbol when the "chance" symbol was arranged in the variable element of "pseudo-fluctuation" and all revolutions. It is possible to simplify the symbol control such as the change of the time scale of fluctuation and the fine adjustment of sliding return, and the acceleration/deceleration pattern of each reel LR, CR, RR, the fluctuation time and the variation of sliding return are made common. It is possible to reduce the control load of the symbol control of each reel LR, CR, RR.

<Modification 42>
In the fourth embodiment, the symbol control including the pseudo stop symbol in the variable element of “pseudo fluctuation” has been described. On the other hand, the symbol control of the pseudo stop symbol may be adopted in the re-lottery effect or the all-rotation effect in which the jackpot pattern changes during the variable effect. With such a configuration, it is possible to simplify the pattern control pattern in the re-lottery effect and the pattern control pattern in the "whole rotation" effect, and reduce the control load related to the symbol control.

<Modification 43>
In the said 5th-7th embodiment, the symbol control and audio|voice output control in "all rotations" production were demonstrated. On the other hand, the above-mentioned symbol control and voice output control are performed with other variable elements in the variable effect, for example, a “pseudo variable” variable element, a “re-fluctuation” variable element, or any of the “reach display”. It may be configured to be adopted in a part of the production. With such a configuration, by interlocking the symbol control and the voice output control in the fluctuating effect, the sense of discomfort based on the symbol control is canceled (suppressed) by the harmony of the music by hearing, and the player in the fluctuating effect is produced. It is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game by suppressing the excitement of the game without giving a feeling of strangeness.

<Modification 44>
In the above-described first embodiment, in each reel LR, CR, RR, a big hit is not given by just aligning them, and "chance" symbols, which are symbols that develop into any "reach display", are arranged. On the other hand, in each reel LR, CR, RR, the "chance" symbol which does not directly give the jackpot is not arranged, but the symbol arrangement is constituted only by the numerical symbols which can be directly given the jackpot when aligned. You may. With such a configuration, when performing a so-called symbol step-up effect during the "variable" variable element or "full rotation" effect, it is possible to perform symbol control without considering the "chance" symbol. As a result, by simplifying the symbol control, the control load related to the symbol control can be reduced.

<Modification 45>
In the fourth embodiment, the "345" symbols that are not arranged on the other reels LR and RR are arranged on the middle reel CR. On the other hand, the middle reel CR may also have the same symbol arrangement as the other reels LR and RR, and may be constituted by an arrangement not including a special symbol such as the "345" symbol. With such a configuration, when performing a so-called symbol step-up effect at the time of "variable" variable elements and "total rotation" effect, it is possible to perform symbol control without considering the "345" symbol. As a result, by simplifying the symbol control, the control load related to the symbol control can be reduced.

<Modification 46>
In the fifth to seventh embodiments, the output and non-output of the music are repeated for each temporary stop during the "full rotation" effect. On the other hand, a predetermined music may be continuously output during the "all rotation" effect, and another music may be output at each temporary stop and rotation start.

<Modification 47>
In the above-described first embodiment, the light emitted by each LED 414c or the like is made incident from either end of the front light guide plate 410 or the rear light guide plate 420. On the other hand, for example, by providing a predetermined recess in the flat plate portion or the R-shaped portion of the front light guide plate 410 or the rear light guide plate 420 and irradiating the recess with light, the front light guide plate 410 or the rear light guide plate 410 Light may be emitted toward the inside of the light guide plate 420, and the light may be guided to the front light guide plate 410 or the rear light guide plate 420. With this configuration, the degree of freedom in designing the arrangement of the LEDs 414c and the like can be improved.

<Variation 48>
In the upper first embodiment, the reels LR, CR, RR are rotationally driven by the drum display device 81 having the reels LR, CR, RR as the display means (effect means), so that the reels LR, CR, It was configured to execute the variation effect of the third symbol attached to the RR. On the other hand, each belt member is rotatably driven by a rotary belt type reel mechanism that is wound around a plurality of pulleys in a loop and is composed of a plurality of belt members on which a plurality of third patterns are printed. The variation effect of the third symbol attached to each belt member may be executed.

<Modification 49>
In the first embodiment, in the rear light guide plate 420, the LEDs 422c and 424 are sequentially lit and displayed from the right end in front view to the left direction in front view, so that the first decorative symbol group 421 moves from the right side in front view to the left side in front view. It was configured to perform an effect as if moving. On the other hand, the LEDs 422c and 424 are sequentially lit and displayed from the right end of the rear light guide plate 420 in the front view to the left direction in the front view, and the LEDs 422c and 424 are sequentially lit from the left end of the rear light guide plate 420 in the front view to the right direction in the front view. You may display and perform the effect as if the 1st decorative symbol group 421 moves to the center direction from the both ends of the back side light guide plate 420.

<Modification 50>
In the first embodiment, when execution of a plurality of effects overlaps, that is, when the lighting display of the first decorative symbol group 421 on the rear light guide plate 420 and the lighting display by the confirmation lamp 311 can be simultaneously performed. In order to clearly execute the effect by the confirming lamp 311, which has a high importance for the game (indicating that the jackpot base is high), the effect area of the first decorative symbol group 421 is configured to be reduced. On the other hand, when the executions of a plurality of effects are overlapped, a predetermined predetermined order of priority (for example, the high or low of the expected effect level, the size or small of the effect execution area, and the high speed of the order of the effects). 1 based on the length or shortness, the length or shortness of the presentation time, the large or small amount of the suggestion information (information transmitted to the player), the front side or the rear side in the front-rear direction of the pachinko machine 10). The effect may be preferentially executed (reduction of other effects). With such a configuration, it is possible for the player to accurately recognize the effect to be prioritized based on a predetermined rule set in advance.

<Variation 51>
In the first embodiment, the light emitted from the LEDs 414c and the like is collected by the condenser lenses 414d and the like, and the light whose directivity is increased by the condenser lenses 414d and the like is emitted from the front surface of the LEDs 414c and the like. It is configured to irradiate toward the front light guide plate 410 in the lateral direction. On the other hand, the light emitted from each LED 414c or the like is configured to have higher directivity than that when the light is emitted (diffused) only by the LED 414c or the like, and the light is emitted toward the front light guide plate 410. Good. Specifically, for example, the light from each LED 414c or the like is condensed by using a condensing lens capable of diffusing the light in the front direction of each LED 414c or the like and the oblique direction of the front direction (for example, about ±15 degrees). Alternatively, the front light guide plate 410 may be slightly diffused and irradiated.

<Modification 52>
In the first embodiment, the light emitted from each LED 424 or the like is diffused by each diffusion lens 425 or the like, and the light whose diffusivity is increased by the diffusion lens 425 or the like is transmitted from each LED 424 or the like in the front direction or the front surface. The light is guided in three directions, that is, the left direction tilted to the left side by about 20 degrees from the direction and the right direction tilted about 20 degrees to the right side from the front direction. On the other hand, the light emitted from each LED 424 or the like may be configured to be guided in the rear light guide plate 420 with higher diffusivity than when the light is emitted (diffused) only by the LED 424 or the like. Good. Specifically, for example, three directions of a front direction of each LED 424, a left direction inclining to the left from the front direction within about 15 degrees, and a right direction inclining to the right from the front direction within about 15 degrees. A light diffusing lens capable of diffusing light may be used to diffuse the light from each LED 424 or the like and irradiate the rear light guide plate 420.

<Modification 53>
In the fourth embodiment, the variable element of "pseudo-variation" in the pattern including the "4" symbol included in the "345" symbol arranged only on the medium reel CR is configured not to be executed. That is, non-common "4" symbols such as "2" → "3" → "4", "3" → "4" → "5", "4" → "5" → "6" are directly It is configured not to execute a pattern that includes a symbol, and skips non-common "4" symbols such as "2" → "3" → "5" and "3" → "5" → "6" ( (Omitted), the variable element of "pseudo-variation" in the pattern in which the "4" symbol is indirectly included is not executed. On the other hand, although the variable element of "pseudo fluctuation" in the pattern directly including the non-common "4" symbol is not executed, "2" → "3" → "5" or "3" → "5" The pattern that indirectly includes the non-common “4” symbol such as “→6” may be executed as the pattern of the variation element of “pseudo variation”. In this case, the pattern that does not include the “4” symbol is stored in advance, and the amount of change (variation amount) of the symbol is different from the pattern that changes in a permutation (eg, “1”→“2”→“3”). Therefore, although the symbol control different from the symbol control in the permutation is required, it is possible to enrich the variation of the variable element of "pseudo-variation" and improve the interest of the game.

In each of the above-described embodiments, the probability setting value can be changed in six stages of "1" to "6", and the jackpot probability and/or the winning probability of the second symbol can be changed, but the probability setting value can be changed. The number of stages is not limited to 6 and may be changeable to any stage.

In each of the above-described embodiments, the case where the jackpot probability is changed by changing the probability setting value has been described, but the winning probability of a normal symbol or the winning probability of a small hit may be changed.

Further, when it is determined that the probability setting value is not within the normal range during the startup process, the probability setting of a specific probability setting value (for example, “1”) from the range of “1” to “6” is performed. You may make it set as a value compulsorily. In addition, when it is determined that the probability setting value is not within the normal range during the game (for example, in the timer interrupt process), it is better not to forcibly set the probability setting value to the specific probability setting value. This is because the jackpot probability is suddenly changed during the game to prevent the player from suffering any disadvantage.

In the above embodiment, the case where the probability setting value is included in the calculation of the RAM determination value (checksum) has been described, but the probability setting value may be excluded from the calculation of the RAM determination value. In this case, before determining whether the RAM determination value is normal (S107 in FIG. 20), it is determined whether the probability setting value is within the normal range. To execute a setting change process to change the probability setting value to those involved in the hall, to encourage people involved in the hall to restart the pachinko machine 10 in the setting change mode, and to set the probability setting value to normal. A specific probability setting value within the range may be forcibly set.

In the above embodiment, the case where the probability setting value is not included in the calculation of the RAM determination value (checksum) has been described, but the probability setting value may be included in the calculation of the RAM determination value.

In the above embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 is started up in the “setting change mode”, the probability setting value is updated by turning on the RAM erasing switch 503 or turning on the setting changing switch. Although described, this may be performed using the setting key 501. Specifically, the setting key 501 is made rotatable from the on state to a setting change position provided in the direction opposite to the off side, and when the setting key 501 is turned to the setting change position, the setting key 501 is automatically turned on. The setting key 501 is configured to be urged to return. Then, each time the setting key 501 is turned from the ON state to the setting change position, the probability setting value is updated. Also by this, the probability setting value can be easily changed.

In the above embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 is started up in the “setting change mode”, the probability setting value is fixed by turning off the setting key 501 or turning on the RAM erasing switch 503. Although the case has been described, this may be performed by operating a separately provided switch, for example, a setting confirmation switch. The setting confirmation switch is, for example, a switch for confirming the probability setting value by being operated in the “setting change mode”, and is provided so as to protrude from the main board through the hole provided in the board box 100, Even if the board box 100 is not opened, it may be operable by a person related to the hall. Also by this, the probability setting value can be easily determined.

In the above-described embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 is turned on in the “setting change mode” or the “setting confirmation mode”, the startup mode is set according to the detection mode of the RAM erase switch 503 and the setting key 501. Was. On the other hand, at least the opening of the inner frame 12 may be set as an indispensable condition, and the startup mode may be set depending on the detection modes of the RAM erase switch 503 and the setting key 501. Further, it may be configured such that the hole can be set to be selectable as to whether the opening of the inner frame 12 is a condition for setting change or setting confirmation.

In each of the above embodiments, the RAM erase switch 503 is mounted on the main controller 110. On the other hand, the RAM erase switch 503 may be mounted on the power supply device 115 or the payout control device 111.

In each of the above-described embodiments, the jackpot probability and the like can be changed with the setting key 501. On the other hand, by the setting key 501, the number of prize balls to be paid out when one winning hole is won (for example, changing from 3 to 5 balls), and the driving of a movable accessory that assists the winning of the winning hole. The time (change from 3 seconds to 5 seconds), drive width (for example, change from 20 mm to 30 mm), or the member (for example, stage or clune on which the ball can roll) that affects the flow mode of the ball. It is possible to change the setting regarding the degree of advantage to the player in multiple stages, such as the inclination mode (for example, change from 1 degree to 3 degrees) and the inclination mode of the pachinko machine 10 itself (for example, change from 1 degree to 3 degrees). You may comprise.

In each of the above-described embodiments, the key hole of the setting key 501 is configured to face the back side of the pachinko machine 10. On the other hand, the keyhole of the setting key 501 is configured to face the lateral direction (left direction or right direction) of the pachinko machine 10, the oblique direction of the pachinko machine 10, or the front side of the pachinko machine 10. May be.

In the above-mentioned embodiment, the big hit random number values, the small hit random number values, and the lost random number values are set as continuous values, and a range judgment is made as to whether or not it is a big hit and whether it is a small hit (for example, "0" or more). It is possible to reduce the control load on the main control device 110 by setting it to "49" or less). On the other hand, each random number value (that is, the big hit random number value and the small hit random number value) to which the game value is given may be distributed (dissipated) instead of being arranged continuously. Specifically, for example, in the case of the jackpot random number counter C1 updated with "0 to 999", the jackpot random number value is "7,341, 555, 777, 831" and the jackpot random number value is "77,175". , 223, 315, 415, 526, 634, 717, 845”.

Here, when a value that is a big hit random number value (for example, a big hit if it is “0 to 50” in a low probability state and a high probability state) continuously exists regardless of the state of the pachinko machine 10, It is possible that the value can be predicted from the outside, and there is a high possibility that fraudulent jackpots will be assigned. Therefore, by configuring as in the above modification, it is possible to make it difficult to predict each random number value to which a game value is given from the outside, enhance the effect of suppressing fraud, and improve the security performance of the pachinko machine 10.

Further, in the above-described modified example, the jackpot random number value for the low probability state and the jackpot random number value for the high probability state defined (set) in the jackpot random number table 202a are respectively set so as not to overlap with each other. A big hit random number value may be set. With such a configuration, the value of the random number to be a big hit is changed by changing the value of the random number to be a big hit depending on the situation (that is, depending on whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the high probability state or the low probability state). Can be made difficult to predict, so that the security performance of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved.

In the above embodiment, the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type random number C2, and the like are updated by software processing such as timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 23) (so-called soft random number). On the other hand, the jackpot random number counter C1 and the like may be configured to be updated by a random number generation IC whose update cycle is faster than the soft random number (so-called hard random number). With this configuration, it is difficult to grasp the random number value being updated from the outside, and the security performance can be improved.

In the above embodiment, the jackpot random number value is uniformly increased as the set value is increased. On the other hand, each time the set value increases, the big hit random number value (or the small hit random number value) may be increased at an unequal or predetermined ratio. Specifically, for example, the jackpot random number value is increased by "2" for each of the setting values "1" to "3", while the jackpot random number value is "5" for each of the setting values "4" to "6". Increment by one. With such a configuration, the game value that can be given due to the setting difference greatly changes, it is possible to provide a game with intonation (sharpness) due to the setting difference, and the enjoyment of the game can be improved.

In the above embodiment, the corresponding role in the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 is changed for each set value. On the other hand, the jackpot type corresponding to the value of the jackpot type counter C2 or the jackpot type counter (not shown) for determining the content of the jackpot is changed for each set value, and the selection ratio of the jackpot type or the jackpot type is changed. It may be configured to cause a setting difference due to the change.

In the above embodiment, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are configured to count the number of executions of each special symbol in the "time reduction state" using the common time saving counter. On the other hand, by using the special figure 2 time reduction counter that counts only the number of times of variation effects of the second special symbol, and the total time reduction counter that counts the total number of times of variation effects of the first special symbol and the second special symbol It may be configured to count the number of times of dynamic display of each special symbol in the "time-reduced state", and determine the ending condition of the "time-reduced state", or only the number of times of the variation effect of the first special symbol. A special figure 1 hour/hour counter for counting is provided so that the "time reduction state" may be terminated depending on the number of times the first special symbol is executed, and the termination condition of the "time reduction state" may be determined. .. With such a configuration, a variety of games can be enriched and amusement of the game can be improved.

In the above embodiment, the dynamic display of the second special symbol is configured to be executed with priority over the dynamic display of the first special symbol. On the other hand, the dynamic display may be configured to be executed in the order in which the dynamic display is obtained (the order in which the display is suspended), or the dynamic display of the first special symbol and the dynamic display of the second special symbol. It may be configured to be executed with higher priority.

In the above-described embodiment, the random number value that gives the game value (that is, the big hit random number value) is changed in accordance with the setting change, and the changed amount is compensated from the random value value that does not give the game value (that is, the lost random number value). Was configured as. On the other hand, when a random number value that gives a game value (for example, a big hit random number value) is changed due to a setting change, the changed value is used as a random number value that gives another game value (for example, a small hit random number value). ). With this configuration, it is possible to provide a difference in game value that can be given for each setting, provide a game with intonation (sharpness) for each setting, and improve the enjoyment of the game.

In the second embodiment, in the jackpot random number table 202a, each random number value is defined (set) so as to be in a sequence of "range of jackpot random number values", "range of small hit random number values", and "range of lost random number values". )Was. On the other hand, in the jackpot random number table 202a, "range of jackpot random number value", "range of small hit random number value", "range of jackpot random number value (hereinafter referred to as "range of re-jackpot random number value")," Each random number value may be defined (set) so as to be arranged in the “range of random number values for loss”. Here, the "range of re-jackpot random number values" is configured to correspond to the increment of the jackpot random number value due to the setting change. With this configuration, the random number value that increases due to the setting difference (that is, the increase in the jackpot random number value) is made adjacent to the random number value that decreases due to the setting difference (that is, the lost random number value), and the setting changes accordingly. It is possible to fix the range of the random number value that does not change (that is, the big hit random number value and the small hit random number value that do not change even when the setting is changed). Thus, for example, in a control program for determining whether or not to win or lose, the basic hit/miss determination of a fixed random number value is made common to all the set values, and the increase in the jackpot random number value due to the setting change is added according to the set value. Therefore, the control program can be easily designed, and the development man-hours can be reduced.

In the above embodiment, in the jackpot random number table 202a, each random number value is defined (set) so as to be in a sequence of "range of jackpot random number value", "range of small hit random number value", and "range of lost random number value". Was there. On the other hand, each random number value may be defined (set) in the order of increasing (or decreasing) number of random values.

In the above embodiment, in the jackpot random number table 202a, each random number value is defined (set) so as to be in a sequence of "range of jackpot random number value", "range of small hit random number value", and "range of lost random number value". Was there. On the other hand, the jackpot random number table 202a is defined (set) so that the “range of jackpot random number values” that is increased due to the setting change is adjacent (adjacent) to the “range of lost random number values” that is reduced due to the setting change. ) May be configured. Specifically, in the big hit random number table 202a, each random value is defined (set) so as to be in the sequence of "range of small hit random number value", "range of big hit random number value", and "range of lost random number value". .. With this configuration, the random number value that increases due to the setting difference (that is, the increase in the jackpot random number value) is made adjacent to the random number value that decreases due to the setting difference (that is, the lost random number value), and the setting changes accordingly. The range of the random number value that is not changed (that is, the small random number value) can be fixed. Thereby, for example, in a control program for determining whether or not to win a small hit, the determination of the small hit random number value is made common to all the set values, and the increment of the big hit random number value due to the setting change is additionally determined according to the set value. Therefore, it is possible to facilitate the design of the control program and reduce the development man-hours.

In the above-described embodiment, when the "normal game state" is changed to the "probability variation state", the jackpot probability of the special symbol is improved (up by 10 times). On the other hand, when transitioning from the "normal game state" to the "probability variation state", the small hitting probability of the special symbol may be improved. Further, when shifting from the "normal game state" to the "probability variation state", the degree of increase in the special symbol jackpot probability may be set to 10 times or less (for example, twice). Further, when the "normal game state" is transitioned to the "probability fluctuation state", both the jackpot probability and the jackpot probability are improved (for example, the jackpot probability is 5 times and the jackpot probability is also 5 times). Good.

In the second embodiment, the winning probability of the small hit game in the second special symbol is higher than the winning probability of the small hit game in the first special symbol. On the other hand, the winning probability of the small hit game in the first special symbol may be configured to be higher than the winning probability of the small hit game in the second special symbol, and the first special symbol and the second special symbol. The winning probability of the small hit game in may be configured to be the same.

In the above-described embodiment, when the "probability fluctuation state" is entered, the game specification is a so-called loop type that maintains the "probability fluctuation state" until the next big hit. On the other hand, a game in which a "probability fluctuation state" (so-called ST type) is given, which is a condition for ending the execution of the dynamic display a predetermined number of times after the jackpot, regardless of which jackpot is won after the jackpot. It may be configured according to specifications. With this configuration, it is possible to enrich the variations of the game and contribute to the interest of the game.

In the above-mentioned embodiment, in all the setting values, when changing from the low probability state of the special symbol to the high probability state, the jackpot probability is increased uniformly (all 10 times up). On the other hand, the increase rate of the jackpot probability is changed for each set value (for example, the set value “1” is 5 times, the set value “2” is 6 times,... The set value “6” is 10 times, etc.). It may be configured as follows. With this configuration, the higher the setting, the easier it is to win the jackpot in the high probability state of the special symbol, and the phenomenon itself of winning the jackpot game earlier in the high probability state is a setting suggestion. Therefore, in the high-probability state, the playability of how quickly to win the jackpot is born, and the interest of the game can be improved.

In the above embodiment, in the low probability state and the high probability state of the special symbol, the setting difference occurs in the jackpot probability in any state. On the other hand, the jackpot probability setting difference in one of the states (low probability state or high probability state) is eliminated, and the jackpot probability setting difference in the other state (high probability state or low probability state) is provided. You may.

In the second embodiment, the jackpot random number value is increased for each set value, and the increase in the jackpot random number value is compensated for from the lost random number value. On the other hand, the jackpot random number value may be increased for each set value, and the increment of the jackpot random number value may be supplemented from the small hit random number and the lost random number value. With this configuration, the change in the number of big hit random number values based on the setting change can be compensated from each of the small hit random number value and the lost random number value, and the change in the big hit random number value can be fixed. It is not necessary to compensate from the predetermined random number value of 1. Therefore, since it is not necessary to secure the number of the predetermined random number values from the predetermined random number value of 1 for the change of the big hit random number value, there is no restriction at the time of designing the game specifications, and the degree of freedom in designing the game specifications is increased. The interest of the game can be improved.

In the first embodiment, when there is no jackpot round selected as the execution timing of the "setting suggestion effect", the "setting suggestion effect" is performed at another timing (ending effect). On the other hand, when the jackpot round selected as the execution timing of the “setting suggestion effect” does not exist, the “setting suggestion effect” may be executed in another round existing in the jackpot. In this case, if it is determined that the "setting suggestion effect" is executed in a round other than the round that matches the probability setting value, but the relevant round does not exist, the rounds that match the probability setting value are excluded. Alternatively, the "setting suggestion effect" may be performed in another round.

In the above embodiment, a "setting suggestion effect" is provided as an effect that suggests a probability setting value that can be set in multiple stages, and is configured to suggest to the player in the "setting suggestion effect" based on the probability setting value and the lottery result. Was. On the other hand, a plurality of stages of events that may occur in the pachinko machine 10 may be suggested to the player based on the lottery result. For example, any state (stage) of the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 provided in a plurality of stages (for example, “normal gaming state”, “latent probability variation state”, “probability variation state” and “time reduction state”). May be suggested, which state (step) of the multi-stage production may be suggested, or the state of the multi-stage jackpot expectation may be suggested. May be.

In the above-described embodiment, each command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113, and the voice lamp control device 113 instructs the display control device 114 to display. The command may be directly transmitted from the control device 110 to the display control device 114. Further, a voice lamp control device may be connected to the display control device, and the display control device may be configured to transmit to the voice lamp control device a command instructing output of each voice and lighting of the lamp. Further, the voice lamp control device and the display control device may be configured as one control device. By using these as one control device, the number of parts can be reduced and the increase in cost of the pachinko machine can be suppressed.

In the above-described embodiment, in the command determination process (S911) executed by the voice lamp control device 113, the case where the fluctuation start flag is set to ON always when the stop type command is received has been described. The fluctuation start flag may be set to ON when the stop type command is received after that. As a result, when a variation pattern command is not received but a stop type command is received, it is possible to prevent a strange variation effect from being executed.

Further, the fluctuation start flag may be set to ON at the timing when the fluctuation pattern command is received. In this case, in the fluctuation display process (S910) executed by the voice lamp control device 113, a display for notifying the display control device 114 of the fluctuation pattern extracted by the fluctuation pattern command based on that the fluctuation start flag is turned on. The variation pattern command for use may be generated and transmitted to the display control device 114. As a result, the display control device 114 can cause the drum display device 81 to execute the variation effect based on the display variation pattern command without waiting for the voice lamp control device 113 to receive the stop type command. . In this case, the voice lamp control device 113 generates a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type extracted from the stop type command at the timing of receiving the stop type command, It may be transmitted to the display control device 114. Then, in the display control device 114, the stop design of the variation effect executed by the drum display device 81 may be determined based on the display stop type command.

In the above embodiment, the continuous announcement effect may be executed on the drum display device 81 in which the variable effect is performed, or a fourth symbol display device different from the drum display device 81 may be provided and executed on the drum display device 81. The continuous notice effect may be executed by displaying the fourth symbol on the fourth symbol display device together with the variable effect. In this case, the control of the fourth symbol display device may be performed by the display control device 114 or the voice lamp control device 113. In addition, the pachinko machine 10 may be provided with an accessory that operates according to various effects, and the accessory may be operated in a predetermined mode together with the variable effect to execute the continuous announcement effect. Further, the sound lamp control device 113 may control the sound output device 226 of the pachinko machine 10 to output a sound for the continuous notice effect, thereby executing the continuous notice effect, or the illumination portion of the pachinko machine 10. The continuous notice effect may be executed by lighting or blinking 29 to 33 together with the variable effect.

More specifically, as the fourth symbol display device, a first special symbol lamp that is variably displayed corresponding to the variation effect of the first special symbol, and a second special variable display that is corresponding to the variation effect of the second special symbol. A design lamp, a first holding number lamp corresponding to the first special symbol, and a second holding number lamp corresponding to the second special symbol are provided, and the first holding number lamp corresponding to the winning of the first starting opening 64a. Lighting control (for example, an increase/decrease display according to the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol) is performed, and the lighting control of the second reserved number lamp according to the winning of the second starting opening 64b (for example, of the second special symbol) Increase/decrease display according to the number of reserved balls), and with the execution of the variation effect of the third symbol corresponding to the first special symbol (to correspond), the lighting control of the first special symbol lamp (for example, the first special symbol). Flashing display of the symbol lamp), and with the execution of the variation effect of the third symbol corresponding to the second special symbol (corresponding to) lighting control of the second special symbol lamp (for example, of the second special symbol lamp) Blinking). In this way, by informing the type of the special symbol that is being executed, etc. on the fourth symbol display device, it is possible to suggest the execution mode of the variation effect to the player.

As a result, every time a variation effect is performed on the drum display device 81 (and the special symbol display device 37), symbols are continuously displayed on the fourth symbol display device, or the accessory operates in a predetermined mode, By outputting a sound from the sound output device 226, or by lighting or blinking the illumination portions 29 to 33, the player can be expected to have a big hit. Further, the player usually looks at the drum display device 81 in which the variation effect is performed and continues the game, but the display of the symbol by the fourth symbol display device different from the drum display device 81, the character product Since the continuous notice effect is performed by the operation, the sound output from the sound output device 226, or the lighting/blinking of the illumination portions 29 to 33, it is easy for the player that the effect different from the normal one is performed. Can be recognized. Further, the continuous notice effect can be easily continued by simple control such as the display of the symbols by the fourth symbol display device, the operation of the accessory, the voice output from the voice output device 226, or the lighting/blinking of the illumination portions 29 to 33. A notice production can be performed.

Further, if the continuous notice effect is performed by voice output from the voice output device 226 or lighting or blinking of the illumination portions 29 to 33, the control of the continuous notice effect is performed by the voice lamp control device 113. In the pachinko machine 10, the pachinko machine 10 is continuously operated by causing the main control device 110 to perform the win/no determination and the lottery process at the start of the variation, to cause the voice lamp control device 113 to perform the continuous announcement effect, and to cause the display control device 114 to perform the variation effect. When the notice production is performed, each control device can share each process. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the load from being concentrated on one control device, so that the performance required for the MPU of each control device can be suppressed low.

It should be noted that display of a symbol for continuous notice effect on the drum display device 81, display of a symbol for continuous notice effect on the fourth symbol display device, operation in a predetermined mode of the accessory, voice output from the voice output device 226, Further, among the lighting or blinking of the illumination portions 29 to 33, at least two or more may be combined, and the continuous notice effects may be executed by controlling them in conjunction with each other. As a result, it is possible to execute more various continuous announcement effects. In addition, a method of executing the continuous notice effect (display by the drum display device 81, display by the fourth symbol display device, operation of the accessory, voice output from the voice output device 226, lighting or blinking of the illumination parts 29 to 33, or , A combination of them, a plurality of continuous notice effect modes may be prepared which are selected according to the game state (10R probability change big hit, 5R probability change big hit, 10R normal big hit, miss) after the end of the continuous notice effect. ..

Further, when the continuous notice effect is performed, an image for the continuous notice effect different from the variable effect may be displayed on the drum display device 81, or the continuous notice effect is displayed when the variable effect is finished. As a stop symbol to be used, a so-called “chance eye”, which is a combination of predetermined symbols, may be displayed. In this case, when it is determined that the continuous notice command is received in the command determination process (S1602 of FIG. 27C) executed by the MPU 221 of the display control device 114, the stop symbol determination flag corresponding to the chance eye is turned on. The other stop symbol discrimination flags may be set to OFF. In the command determination process, the process corresponding to the continuous notice command is executed in the other command processes after the stop identification command process, so instead of the stop design set by the reception of the display stop identification command, the second chance is stopped. It is set as a design. Therefore, the chance eye can be confirmed and displayed when the fluctuation is stopped. Then, in the drum display device 81, if the chances are continuously displayed as a stop symbol for each variation effect, it is possible to give the player an expectation that a jackpot will be finally obtained.

In the above-described embodiment, the main controller 110, when there is a prize (start prize) in the first starting opening 64a and the second starting opening 64b, the number of reserved balls to which "1" is added is changed to the voice lamp controlling device 113. The case of transmitting to the voice lamp control device 113, including the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 acquired from the counter buffer in accordance with the starting winning award, as they are, is described with respect to the hold ball number command notified to The type of the counter included in the ball count command may be a part of the counters C1 to C3, CS1 or may include the values of other counters. When the main controller 110 notifies the voice lamp controller 113 of the values of the respective counters acquired in association with the start winning, the information indicating the values of the respective counters is included in the reserved ball number command and notified. Instead of this, the command other than the reserved ball number command may include information indicating the value of each counter, and the voice lamp control device 113 may be notified of these values. The other command may be a dedicated command for notifying the voice lamp control device 113 of the value of each counter acquired with the start winning, or a different pattern such as a variation pattern command or a stop symbol command may be voiced. The value of each counter acquired along with the start winning may be added to the command for notifying the lamp control device 113. As another command, when notifying the voice lamp control device 113 of the value of each counter acquired in association with the start winning, the value of each counter notified to the command is a variable effect corresponding to any of the number of holdings. It may include information indicating whether it is related. Thereby, the voice lamp control device 113, based on the information on the number of times of holding included in the command, each of the prefetch information corresponding to the number of times of holding is included in the command in any one of the first to fourth areas. The value of the counter can be stored.

In the above-described embodiment, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command, the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 indicated by the reserved ball number command may be stored in the RAM 223. , When receiving a command of the number of held balls (or a command indicating the value of each counter), based on the value of each counter indicated by the command, whether or not it is a jackpot, the jackpot type in the case of a jackpot, out In the case of, a part or all of the out-of-range type etc. is judged, and these judgment results are replaced with the values of the respective counters indicated by the command, or combined with a part or the whole of the value of the counter, It may be stored in the RAM 223.

Further, for example, the fluctuating effect based on the starting winning for the second starting opening 64b may be prioritized over the fluctuating effect based on the starting winning for the first starting opening 64a. Alternatively, the fluctuating effect based on the starting winning for the first starting opening 64a may be prioritized over the fluctuating effect based on the starting winning for the second starting opening 64b. As a result, it is possible to make the player pay more attention to the starting opening in which the variation effect is preferentially performed.

In the above-described embodiment, the case where the first starting opening 64a and the second starting opening 64b and the two starting openings are provided on the game board 13 as the starting openings for which the jackpot lottery is started when the ball is entered will be described. However, the number is not necessarily limited to this, and the number of starting ports may be one, or may be three or more. When there are two or more starting ports, a corresponding holding ball number counter is prepared in the RAM 203 for each starting port, and the holding balls are held for each starting port with the winning of the corresponding starting port. You may make it count a number. In addition, the maximum number of balls that can be reserved may be set for each starting opening in association with the starting winning at the corresponding starting opening.

In addition, when there are two or more starting ports, the holding ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 in order to notify that the holding has been performed in association with the winning at the starting port is Information may be included that indicates whether or not a hold was made by winning a prize at the starting opening. Further, the variation pattern command transmitted from main control device 110 to voice lamp control device 113 when the variation is started may include information indicating which starting port the variation effect is held. As a result, in the voice lamp control device 113, a holding ball number counter is prepared for each starting port, and when a holding ball number command is received, a holding ball number counter for the starting port indicated by the holding ball number command. When the number of holding balls is set to and the fluctuation pattern command is received, the number of holding balls can be counted for each starting opening by decrementing the holding ball number counter for the starting opening indicated in the fluctuation pattern command.

Further, when a plurality of starting openings are provided on the game board 13, the voice lamp control device 113 may be notified of the counter value acquired in association with the winning (starting winning) at each starting opening. In this case, the command for the main control device 110 to notify the voice lamp control device 113 of the counter value acquired along with the start winning is the one acquired along with the start winning for any start opening. Information indicating whether there is any may be included. Further, the variation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 when the variation is started may include information indicating which of the starting openings is the variation effect associated with the start winning. .. Further, in the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113, a pre-reading information storage area is prepared for each starting opening, and each counter value transmitted from the main control device 110 in association with the starting winning to the corresponding starting opening is made to correspond. It may be stored in the prefetch information storage area. As a result, every time a variation pattern command is received, a shift process can be performed on the prefetch information storage area corresponding to the starting mouth that has detected the starting winning that triggered the execution of the variation effect indicated by the variation pattern command. it can. Therefore, the value of each counter corresponding to the pending change effect for each starting opening can also be held in the voice lamp control device 113. Therefore, depending on the starting winning opening, if the probability of being a big hit, the distribution probability of the big hit type, the distribution probability of the outlying type, etc. are different, in the prefetch process, for each variation effect, whether it is a big hit It is possible to correctly determine the type of jackpot when the jackpot is a jackpot, the type of the jackpot when a jackpot is missed, and the like, based on which starting port the starting prize is. In addition, when the variation effect based on the starting prize for one starting opening is prioritized to the variation effect based on the starting winning for another starting opening, the variation based on the starting winning for the one starting opening. The pre-reading process can be performed in order from the value of the counter corresponding to the effect, and the number of times of holding the variable effect that is the most recent big hit can be correctly determined.

In addition, when a plurality of starting openings are provided, the voice lamp control device 113 continuously gives notice when the values of the respective counters obtained based on the starting winnings to the starting openings are received from the main control device 110 by a command. When the start of the effect is determined, the continuous notice effect may be executed over all the variable effects (holding balls) that are held at that time, regardless of the starting opening where the start winning is made. Further, in the case of a pachinko machine, which is provided with a plurality of starting openings, the variation effect for winning at one starting opening is executed preferentially over the variation effect for winning at another starting opening. The start of the continuous notice effect may be determined only based on the pre-reading result of the counter value acquired for the winning of the starting opening in which the variable effect is executed. As a result, it is not determined whether or not the continuous notice effect is set to be executed for the variable effect corresponding to the winning of the starting opening having a low priority, and the continuous notice effect is not started for this variable effect. If the continuous announcement effect is started for the variable effect corresponding to the winning of the starting opening with the low priority, and the continuous variable effect is continuously held for the starting opening with the high priority, the continuous announcement effect is quite finished. There is a risk of not doing so. On the other hand, in this modified example, it is not judged whether or not the setting of execution of the continuous notice effect is set for the change effect corresponding to the winning of the starting opening having the low priority, and the continuous notice effect is set for this change effect. Is not started, so that such a situation can be suppressed.

In the above-described embodiment, the winning of the first starting opening 64a and the second starting opening 64b and the passage of the through gate 67 are configured to be reserved up to four times, respectively, but the maximum number of reserved balls is four times. The number is not limited, and may be set to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). In addition, for the winning in the first starting opening 64a and the second starting opening 64b, the maximum holding ball number may be set separately by the starting opening, and the maximum holding ball number in each starting opening is "4. It may be any number other than ". Further, the maximum number of reserved balls at each starting port does not necessarily have to be the same value, but may be different values. Further, the number of balls to be held for variable display based on winning in the first start opening 64a and the second start opening 64b is a numeral in a part of the drum display device 81, or an area divided into four is reserved balls. You may make it display in a different mode (for example, a color or a lighting pattern) for several minutes, and a light emitting member such as a lamp is provided separately from the special symbol display device 37, and the number of holding balls is notified by the light emitting member. It may be configured to do so.

Further, as shown in the above embodiment, the variable display, which is a kind of dynamic display, is not limited to the vertical rotation reel drive by the drum display device 81, but the horizontal rotation reel drive by the drum display device 81. Alternatively, the pattern as the identification information may be moved and displayed on the display screen of the liquid crystal display device along a predetermined path such as the vertical direction, the horizontal direction, or the L shape. Further, the dynamic display of the identification information is not limited to the variable display of the symbols, and, for example, one or a plurality of characters may be displayed together with the symbols, or in a variety of different motion displays or changed displays. It also includes display effects that are displayed. In this case, one or more characters are used as the third symbol.

The present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine or the like of a type different from the above embodiment. For example, once a big hit occurs, a pachinko machine (commonly called a 2nd right thing, a 3rd right thing, etc.) that can increase the expected value of a big hit until a big hit state occurs multiple times (for example, 2 or 3 times) including that. May be implemented as). Further, after the jackpot pattern is displayed, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game that gives a predetermined game value to a player on condition that a ball is won in a predetermined area. In addition, it may be implemented in a pachinko machine which is in a special game state, having a winning device having a special area such as a V zone, and winning a ball in the special area is a necessary condition. Further, in addition to the pachinko machine, various game machines such as arepaches, sparrow balls, slot machines, game machines in which so-called pachinko machines and slot machines are integrated may be implemented.

In the slot machine, for example, the symbol is changed by operating the operation lever in the state where the coin is inserted and the symbol effective line is determined, and the symbol is stopped and confirmed by operating the stop button. It is a thing. Therefore, the basic concept of the slot machine is that "a display device that variably displays an identification information sequence consisting of a plurality of identification information and then confirms the identification information is provided, and is caused by the operation of a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). The variable display of the identification information is started by the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or when a predetermined time elapses, the variable display of the identification information is stopped and confirmed, and then stopped. It becomes a slot machine that generates a special game that gives a predetermined game value to the player, provided that the combination of identification information at the time is a specific one. In this case, the game medium is typically a coin, medal, or the like. Take as an example.

Further, as a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, a display device for fixedly displaying the symbols after variably displaying a symbol row consisting of a plurality of symbols is provided, and a handle for ball launching is provided. Some are not. In this case, after throwing in a predetermined amount of balls based on a predetermined operation (button operation), the fluctuation of the symbol is started due to the operation of the operation lever, for example, due to the operation of the stop button, or the predetermined By the passage of time, the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game that gives a predetermined game value to the player is generated as a necessary condition that the definite symbol at the time of stopping is a so-called jackpot symbol, and the player is given a special game value. Is a large amount of balls dispensed to the lower tray. If such a gaming machine is used in place of a slot machine, only balls can be treated as a gaming value in the gaming hall, which is the gaming value seen in the current gaming hall in which pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed. It is possible to solve the problems such as the burden on the equipment and the restriction on the place where the game machine is installed due to the separate handling of the medal and the ball.

The concept of various inventions included in the above-described embodiment in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention will be shown below.

<Group A: Displaying a plurality of display parts by lighting one LED with a diffusion lens>
Conventionally, a lottery such as a win is performed based on the establishment of a predetermined start condition, and for example, when a win is won, a game in which a predetermined game medium is paid out to a player according to the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition. There is an opportunity.

This gaming machine is provided with a display unit capable of changing a design or the like visible from the front of the gaming machine, and a production unit such as a light emitting unit capable of changing a single color or a luminescent color. By changing the display mode of the rendering means, it is configured to enhance the rendering effect during the game (for example, Patent Document 1 (JP-A-2018-126296)).

For such a gaming machine, in order to improve the interest of the game, it is necessary to raise the attention of the game by enhancing the effect of the effecting means, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

The invention of the group A is made in view of the above circumstances, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of appropriately increasing the degree of attention to the game.

The production means (for example, the light guide unit 400) for performing a predetermined effect (for example, lighting or non-lighting of the first decorative symbol group 421) as the game progresses,
The production means is
A light emitting unit (for example, a lower LED unit) having a light emitting unit (for example, a rear lower LED 424) that emits light;
When the light emitted from the light emitting means is incident from a predetermined portion, a light guide means (for example, a rear side) that makes the predetermined information regarding the game (for example, the first decorative symbol group 421) visible from the front side of the gaming machine. A light guide plate 420),
A gaming machine A0 comprising: a diffusing unit (for example, a rear-side lower diffusing lens 425) for diffusing light from the light emitting unit beyond the width of the light emitting unit.

According to the gaming machine A0, the effect means gives a predetermined effect as the game progresses. Further, when the light emitting means provided in the production means has a light emitting portion for emitting light and the light emitted from the light emitting means enters the light guiding means from a predetermined portion, predetermined information regarding the game is played. Can be seen from the front side of the gaming machine. Then, the diffusion means diffuses the light from the light emitting means from the width of the light emitting portion. As a result, the predetermined information having a range larger than the width of the light emitting portion of the light emitting means can be accurately visible, and the effect of the effecting means having the light guiding means can be enhanced, thereby increasing the attention to the game. There is an effect that you can.

In gaming machine A0,
The predetermined part is
A predetermined end of the light guide means,
The diffusion means is
A game machine A1 which is integrally formed at a predetermined end of the light guide means.

The gaming machine A1 has the following effect in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A0. That is, the predetermined portion is the predetermined end portion of the light guide means, and the diffusion means is integrally formed at the predetermined end portion of the light guide means. Thus, in the rendering means, the light guide means and the diffusing means are integrally formed, and the number of parts is reduced, so that the degree of freedom in designing the rendering means can be increased.

In gaming machine A0 or A1,
The diffusion means is
At least a first direction irradiation unit (for example, a leftward diffusion unit 425a) that irradiates light from the light emitting unit in a predetermined first direction (for example, a leftward direction), and a second direction different from the first direction (a leftward diffusion unit 425a). For example, a multi-direction irradiation unit (for example, one concave portion of the rear lower diffusion lens 425) having a second direction irradiation unit (for example, front direction diffusion unit 425b) that irradiates in the front direction is provided. A gaming machine A2 characterized by the above.

According to the gaming machine A2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A0 or A1, the following effects are produced. That is, at least the first direction irradiation unit that irradiates the light from the light emitting unit in the first direction and the second direction irradiation unit that irradiates the light in the second direction are provided in the multi-direction irradiation unit provided in the diffusion unit. Be done. As a result, the predetermined information arranged in a plurality of directions can be made visible accurately, and the effect of the effector having the light guide means can be enhanced, so that the degree of attention to the game can be increased. effective.

In any of the gaming machines A0 to A2,
The gaming machine A3, wherein the first direction and the second direction do not intersect.

According to the gaming machine A3, the following effects are produced in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines A0 to A2. That is, it is configured so that the first direction and the second direction do not intersect. Accordingly, at least the light emitted from the light emitting unit is emitted while being diffused by the diffusing unit in two directions, so that predetermined information having a range larger than the width of the light emitting unit of the light emitting unit, or a plurality of information provided at different positions. There is an effect that the predetermined symbol can be accurately visually recognized, and the effect of the effector having the light guide means is enhanced, so that the degree of attention to the game can be increased.

In gaming machine A2 or A3,
The diffusion means is
A gaming machine A4 comprising a plurality of the plural-direction irradiating means at the predetermined end portion.

According to the gaming machine A4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A2 or A3, the following effects are produced. That is, at a predetermined end, the diffusing means is provided with a plurality of multi-directional irradiation means. Thereby, the light can be made to be bundled and diffused in the first direction and the second direction by each of the plural-direction irradiating means, so that the predetermined information arranged in the first direction and the predetermined information arranged in the second direction. And can be made to be accurately visible, and the effect of the effector having the light guide means can be enhanced, so that the degree of attention to the game can be increased.

In the gaming machine A4,
The diffusion means is
A gaming machine A5, wherein a plurality of the plural-direction irradiation means are continuously formed at the predetermined end portion.

According to the game machine A5, in addition to the effect of the game machine A4, the following effect is achieved. That is, a plurality of plural-direction irradiation means are continuously formed on the diffusion means at a predetermined end portion. Accordingly, even when the light emitting unit of the light emitting unit is arranged at any part on the predetermined end side, the light emitting unit is provided in the light guiding unit by the multi-direction irradiation unit continuously provided at the predetermined end. It is possible to continuously diffuse the light from and make the predetermined information visible. Therefore, there is an effect that the degree of freedom in designing the arrangement of the light emitting section of the light emitting means can be increased.

In any of the gaming machines A2 to A5,
The multi-direction irradiation means,
A third direction irradiation unit (for example, rightward diffusion unit 425c) for irradiating light from the light emitting unit in a third direction (for example, rightward direction) different from the first direction and the second direction. A gaming machine A6 characterized by having.

According to the gaming machine A6, the following effects are produced in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines A2 to A5. That is, the light from the light emitting means is emitted in the third direction different from the first direction and the second direction by the third direction emitting portion provided in the multi-direction emitting means. As a result, the predetermined information arranged in at least three directions can be made visible accurately, and the effect of the effector having the light guide means can be enhanced, so that the degree of attention to the game can be increased. effective.

In the gaming machine A6,
The third direction is
A gaming machine A7, which does not intersect the first direction and the second direction.

According to the gaming machine A7, the following effects are produced in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A6. That is, the third direction is configured not to intersect the first direction and the second walking. With this, at least the light emitted from the light emitting unit is emitted while being diffused in the three directions by the diffusing unit, so that it is possible to accurately make visible the predetermined information having a range larger than the width of the light emitting unit of the light emitting unit. By increasing the effect of the effector having the light guide means, it is possible to increase the degree of attention to the game.

In any of the gaming machines A0 to A7,
The diffusion means is
A gaming machine A8, which is formed at least at two ends of the light guide means (for example, an upper end and a lower end of the rear light guide plate 420).

According to the gaming machine A8, the following effects are produced in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines A0 to A7. That is, the diffusing means is formed at least at the two ends of the light guiding means. Accordingly, by diffusing the light from each of the plurality of end portions, the light can be diffused comprehensively with respect to the light guide unit. Therefore, the predetermined information provided in the light guide means can be made visible accurately, and the effect of the effect means having the light guide means can be enhanced, so that the degree of attention to the game can be increased. There is.

In the gaming machine A8,
The diffusion means is
A predetermined first end (for example, a lower end of the rear light guide plate 420) of the light guide means and a second end (for example, an upper side of the rear light guide plate 420) paired with the first end. A gaming machine A9, which is formed respectively on a side end portion).

According to the gaming machine A9, the following effects are produced in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A8. That is, the diffusing means is formed at each of the predetermined first end of the light guide means and the second end that is paired with the first end. Thus, by diffusing light from one end and the end that is paired with the end, it is possible to comprehensively diffuse the light to the light guide unit. Therefore, the predetermined information provided in the light guide means can be made visible accurately, and the effect of the effect means having the light guide means can be enhanced, so that the degree of attention to the game can be increased. There is.

<Group B: symbols are arranged on the light path, and patterns are also arranged on the portions where the light paths of different colors overlap each other>
Conventionally, a lottery such as a win is performed based on the establishment of a predetermined start condition, and for example, when a win is won, a game in which a predetermined game medium is paid out to a player according to the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition. There is an opportunity.

This gaming machine is provided with a display unit capable of changing a design or the like visible from the front of the gaming machine, and a production unit such as a light emitting unit capable of changing a single color or a luminescent color. By changing the display mode of the rendering means, it is configured to enhance the rendering effect during the game (for example, Patent Document 1 (JP-A-2018-126296)).

For such a gaming machine, in order to improve the interest of the game, it is necessary to raise the attention of the game by enhancing the effect of the effecting means, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

The invention of the group B is made in view of the above circumstances, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of suitably increasing the degree of attention to the game.

The production means (for example, the light guide unit 400) for performing a predetermined effect (for example, lighting or non-lighting of the first decorative symbol group 421) as the game progresses,
The production means is
A first light emitting unit (for example, one LED of the rear lower LED 424) that emits light, and a second light emitting unit (for example, another LED of the rear lower LED 424) different from the first light emitting unit. A light emitting means (for example, a lower LED unit) having,
When the light emitted from the light emitting means is incident from a predetermined portion, a light guide means (for example, a rear side) that makes the predetermined information regarding the game (for example, the first decorative symbol group 421) visible from the front side of the gaming machine. And a light guide plate 420),
The predetermined information is
At least a gaming machine B0, which is formed at a position overlapping with an optical path of light emitted from the first light emitting section or an optical path of light emitted from the second light emitting section.

According to the gaming machine B0, the effect means provides a predetermined effect as the game progresses. Further, the light emitting means provided in the effecting means is provided with a first light emitting portion that emits light and a second light emitting portion different from the first light emitting portion. Then, when the light emitted from the light emitting means enters the light guiding means from a predetermined portion, predetermined information regarding the game can be visually recognized from the front side of the gaming machine. Here, the predetermined information is formed at least at a position overlapping with the optical path of the light emitted from the first light emitting unit or the optical path of the light emitted from the second light emitting unit. As a result, the predetermined information can be accurately visually recognized by the light emitted from the first light emitting unit or the second light emitting unit of the light emitting unit, and the effect of the effect unit having the light guiding unit can be enhanced, thereby playing the game. There is an effect that the degree of attention to can be increased.

The production means (for example, the light guide unit 400) for performing a predetermined effect (for example, lighting or non-lighting of the first decorative symbol group 421) as the game progresses,
The production means is
A first light emitting portion that emits light (for example, one LED of the rear lower LED 424 or the front direction diffusion portion 425b of the rear lower diffusion lens 425) and a second light emitting portion different from the first light emitting portion. (For example, another LED of the rear lower LED 424, or the leftward diffusion portion 425a or the rightward diffusion portion 425c of the rear lower diffusion lens 425), and a light emitting unit (for example, the lower LED unit 414). ,
When the light emitted from the light emitting means is incident from a predetermined portion, as the predetermined effect, predetermined information regarding a game (for example, a plurality of fish symbols in the first decorative symbol group 421 or the first decorative symbol group 421). (1 fish pattern) of the light guide means (for example, the rear side light guide plate 420) that can be viewed from the front side of the gaming machine,
The predetermined information is
A gaming machine B1 formed at least at a position overlapping with an optical path of light emitted from the first light emitting unit or an optical path of light emitted from the second light emitting unit.

According to the gaming machine B1, the effect means performs a predetermined effect as the game progresses. Further, the light emitting means provided in the production means has a first light emitting portion for emitting light and a second light emitting portion different from the first light emitting portion, and the light emitted from the light emitting means is provided to the light guiding means. When is incident from a predetermined portion, predetermined information regarding the game becomes visible from the front side of the gaming machine. Then, the predetermined information is formed at a position at least overlapping with the optical path of the light emitted from the first light emitting unit or the optical path of the light emitted from the second light emitting unit. Thereby, the predetermined information can be accurately made visible from the front side of the gaming machine by either the first light emitting unit or the second light emitting unit, so that the effect of the effecting unit having the light guide unit is enhanced, and the game is played. There is an effect that the degree of attention to can be increased.

In gaming machine B1,
The predetermined information is
A gaming machine B2, which is formed to have a size within a range of an optical path width of light emitted from the first light emitting section or an optical path width of light emitted from the second light emitting section.

According to the gaming machine B2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine B1, the following effects are achieved. That is, the predetermined information is formed with a size within the range of the optical path width of the light emitted from the first light emitting unit or the optical path width of the light emitted from the second light emitting unit. Thereby, the predetermined information can be accurately made visible from the front side of the gaming machine by the first light emitting portion or the second light emitting portion, so that the effect of the effecting means having the light guide means is enhanced and the degree of attention to the game is increased. The effect is that it can be increased.

In the gaming machine B1 or B2,
The predetermined information is
A gaming machine B3, which is formed with a size within a range of an optical path width formed by an optical path of light emitted from the first light emitting section and an optical path of light emitted from the second light emitting section.

According to the gaming machine B3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine B1 or B2, the following effects are produced. That is, the predetermined information is formed with a size within the range of the optical path width formed by the optical path of the light emitted from the first light emitting unit and the optical path of the light emitted from the second light emitting unit. Thereby, the predetermined information can be accurately made visible from the front side of the gaming machine by the first light emitting portion and the second light emitting portion, so that the effect of the effecting means having the light guide means is enhanced and the game is focused. The effect is that the degree can be increased.

In any of the gaming machines B1 to B3,
The predetermined information is
A gaming machine B4, wherein an optical path of light emitted from the first light emitting unit and an optical path of light emitted from the second light emitting unit are formed at a position where they overlap with each other.

According to the gaming machine B4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines B1 to B3, the following effects are produced. That is, the predetermined information is formed at a position where the optical path of the light emitted from the first light emitting unit and the optical path of the light emitted from the second light emitting unit overlap. Thereby, the predetermined information can be accurately made visible from the front side of the gaming machine by the first light emitting portion and the second light emitting portion, so that the effect of the effecting means having the light guide means is enhanced and the game is focused. The effect is that the degree can be increased.

In any of the gaming machines B1 to B4,
The light emitting means is
A second emission color (for example, “blue”) different from the first emission color from the second emission unit when the first emission unit emits light of a predetermined first emission color (for example, “red”). A gaming machine B5, which is provided with a different color light emitting means for emitting the light.

According to the gaming machine B5, the following effects are produced in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines B1 to B4. That is, when the different color light emitting means provided in the light emitting means emits the light of the predetermined first emission color from the first light emitting portion, the second light emitting portion emits the light of the second emission color different from the first emission color. Is configured as follows. As a result, the predetermined information can be emitted in various display colors, and the effect of the effect means having the light guide means can be enhanced and the degree of attention to the game can be increased.

In gaming machine B5,
The predetermined information is
A predetermined first predetermined portion and a second predetermined portion different from the first predetermined portion,
The different color light emitting means,
A gaming machine B6, characterized in that the first predetermined portion is irradiated with light emitted from the first light emitting unit, and the second predetermined portion is irradiated with light emitted from the second light emitting unit. ..

According to the game machine B6, in addition to the effect of the game machine B5, the following effect is achieved. That is, the predetermined information is composed of a predetermined first predetermined portion and a second predetermined portion different from the first predetermined portion. Then, the different-color light emitting means irradiates the first predetermined portion with the light emitted from the first light emitting portion and the second predetermined portion with the light emitted from the second light emitting portion. As a result, the predetermined information can be emitted in different colors, and the predetermined information can be emitted in various display colors. Therefore, the effect of the production means having the light guide means is enhanced, and the attention to the game is increased. Has the effect of being able to

In any of the gaming machines B1 to B6,
A gaming machine comprising: a diffusing unit (for example, a rear lower diffusing lens 425) for diffusing light from the light emitting unit from the width of the first light emitting unit or the second light emitting unit. B7.

According to the gaming machine B7, the following effects are produced in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines B1 to B6. That is, the diffusion means diffuses the light from the light emitting means from the width of the first light emitting portion or the second light emitting portion. As a result, the predetermined information having a range larger than the width of the first light emitting portion or the second light emitting portion of the light emitting means can be accurately visible, and the effect of the effecting means having the light guiding means can be enhanced, thereby playing the game. There is an effect that the degree of attention to can be increased.

In gaming machine B7,
The predetermined part is
A predetermined end of the light guide means,
The diffusion means is
A game machine B8, which is integrally formed at a predetermined end of the light guide means.

According to the gaming machine B8, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine B7, the following effects are produced. That is, the predetermined portion is the predetermined end portion of the light guide means, and the diffusion means is integrally formed at the predetermined end portion of the light guide means. Thus, in the rendering means, the light guide means and the diffusing means are integrally formed, and the number of parts is reduced, so that the degree of freedom in designing the rendering means can be increased.

<Group C: Different LEDs are sequentially turned on for each defined area in a predetermined direction to display movement and colorful display>
Conventionally, a lottery such as a win is performed based on the establishment of a predetermined start condition, and for example, when a win is won, a game in which a predetermined game medium is paid out to a player according to the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition. There is an opportunity.

This gaming machine is provided with a display unit capable of changing a design or the like visible from the front of the gaming machine, and a production unit such as a light emitting unit capable of changing a single color or a luminescent color. By changing the display mode of the rendering means, it is configured to enhance the rendering effect during the game (for example, Patent Document 1 (JP-A-2018-126296)).

For such a gaming machine, in order to improve the interest of the game, it is necessary to raise the attention of the game by enhancing the effect of the effecting means, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

The invention of the group C is made in view of the above circumstances, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of appropriately increasing the degree of attention to the game.

The production means (for example, the light guide unit 400) for performing a predetermined effect (for example, lighting or non-lighting of the first decorative symbol group 421) as the game progresses,
The production means is
A first light emitting portion (for example, the right end LED of the rear lower LED 424) that emits light, and a second light emitting portion (for example, the right end of the rear lower LED 424) arranged on the predetermined direction side of the first light emitting portion. One LED on the left side) and a third light emitting section (two LEDs on the left side of the rightmost LED of the rear lower LED 424) arranged further on the predetermined direction side than the second light emitting section. A light emitting means (for example, a lower LED unit) having,
When the light emitted from the light emitting means is incident from a predetermined portion, a light guide means (for example, a rear side) that makes the predetermined information regarding the game (for example, the first decorative symbol group 421) visible from the front side of the gaming machine. And a light guide plate 420),
A gaming machine C0 comprising a sequential lighting means (for example, a voice lamp control device 113) for sequentially lighting the light emitting means from a predetermined direction side.

According to the gaming machine C0, the effect means provides a predetermined effect as the game progresses. In addition, the light emitting means provided in the production means includes a first light emitting portion that emits light, a second light emitting portion that is arranged on the predetermined direction side of the first light emitting portion, and a predetermined direction from the second light emitting portion. And a third light emitting unit arranged on the side. Then, when the light emitted from the light emitting means enters the light guiding means from a predetermined portion, predetermined information regarding the game can be visually recognized from the front side of the gaming machine. Here, the sequential lighting means sequentially lights the light emitting means from the predetermined direction side. As a result, the predetermined information provided on the light guide means can be sequentially viewed from the predetermined direction side, and the effect of the effect means having the light guide means can be enhanced, so that the degree of attention to the game can be increased. There is an effect that you can.

The production means (for example, the light guide unit 400, or the light guide unit 400 and the game board 13) for performing a predetermined effect (for example, lighting or non-lighting of the first decorative symbol group 421) as the game progresses,
The production means is
At least a first light emitting portion that emits light (for example, a rear lower LED 424 corresponding to the right side region of the rear light guide plate 420 or a board surface first decorative pattern group 60a) and a predetermined direction from the first light emitting portion. A light emitting unit having a second light emitting portion (for example, the rear lower LED 424 corresponding to the central region of the rear light guide plate 420 or the rear light guide plate 420) arranged on the left side (for example, front view). (For example, the lower LED unit 414 or the game board 13),
When light is emitted from the light emitting means (at least the second light emitting portion), light guiding means (for example, first predetermined pattern group 421) relating to the game can be visually recognized from the front side of the game machine (for example, A rear light guide plate 420),
Sequential light emitting means for sequentially emitting the light emitting means from the first light emitting portion toward the predetermined direction (for example, lighting control of the first decorative symbol group 421 by the voice lamp control device 113, or the first control by the voice lamp control device 113). 1 decorative symbol group 421, the lighting control of the board surface first decorative symbol group 60a and the board surface second decorative symbol group 60b), a gaming machine C1.

According to the gaming machine C1, the effect means performs a predetermined effect as the game progresses. Further, the light emitting means provided in the effecting means is provided with a first light emitting portion that emits light and a second light emitting portion arranged on the predetermined direction side of the first light emitting portion. Then, when light is emitted from the light emitting means to the light guide means, predetermined information regarding the game becomes visible from the front side of the gaming machine. Here, the light emitting means sequentially emits light from the first light emitting portion toward the predetermined direction. As a result, the predetermined information provided in the rendering means can be made visible sequentially from the position where the first light emitting portion is disposed in the predetermined direction side, and the rendering effect of the rendering means having the light guide means can be enhanced, thereby playing the game. There is an effect that the degree of attention to can be increased.

In gaming machine C1,
Sequential extinguishing means for sequentially extinguishing the light emitting means sequentially emitted from the first light emitting portion toward the predetermined direction by the sequential light emitting means toward the predetermined direction side (for example, by the voice lamp control device 113). A gaming machine C2, which is provided with a turn-off control).

According to the gaming machine C2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C1, the following effects are produced. That is, the light emitting means sequentially emitted from the first light emitting portion toward the predetermined direction by the light emitting means is sequentially turned off toward the predetermined direction after the first light emission by the sequential light emitting means. As a result, after the predetermined information provided on the rendering means is made sequentially visible from the disposition position of the first light emitting portion toward the predetermined direction side, the predetermined information is sequentially invisible or difficult to be seen from the first light emitting portion toward the predetermined direction side. By doing so, it is possible to execute a powerful effect as if the predetermined information moves from the arrangement position of the first light emitting unit toward the predetermined direction. As a result, there is an effect that the degree of attention to the game can be increased by increasing the effect of the effect means.

In gaming machine C1 or C2,
The sequential light emitting means,
A gaming machine C3, characterized in that, when the second light emitting portion is caused to emit light, the light emitting color takeover means for emitting the light emitting color emitted by the first light emitting portion is provided.

According to the gaming machine C3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C1 or C2, the following effects are produced. That is, when the second light emitting unit emits light, the emission color inheriting unit provided in the light emitting unit sequentially emits the emission color emitted by the first light emitting unit. As a result, it is possible to perform a powerful effect as if the predetermined information that was visible in the predetermined light emission color moves from the arrangement position of the first light emitting unit toward the predetermined direction. As a result, there is an effect that the degree of attention to the game can be increased by increasing the effect of the effect means.

In any of the gaming machines C1 to C3,
The sequential light emitting means,
At least a different color light emitting means for making the emission colors of the first light emitting portion and the second light emitting portion different, and a gaming machine C4.

According to the gaming machine C4, the following effects are produced in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines C1 to C3. That is, at least the emission colors of the first light emitting portion and the second light emitting portion are made different by the different color light emitting means provided in the light emitting means in sequence. Thereby, it is possible to execute a colorful effect as if the predetermined information which is visible in a plurality of colors moves from the position where the first light emitting unit is arranged to the predetermined direction side. As a result, there is an effect that the degree of attention to the game can be increased by increasing the effect of the effect means.

In gaming machine C4,
The different color light emitting means,
After a predetermined first emission color (for example, “red”) is emitted from the first emission section, the second emission section emits the first emission color and the first emission section is changed to the first emission section. A gaming machine C5, which emits light in a second emission color (for example, "blue") different from the emission color.

According to the gaming machine C5, the following effects are produced in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C4. That is, after the predetermined light emission color is emitted from the first light emission unit by the different color light emission unit, the second light emission unit emits the first light emission color and the first light emission unit is different from the first light emission color. The light is emitted in the second emission color. Thereby, it is possible to execute a colorful effect as if the predetermined information which is visible in a plurality of colors moves from the position where the first light emitting unit is arranged to the predetermined direction side. As a result, there is an effect that the degree of attention to the game can be increased by increasing the effect of the effect means.

In any of the gaming machines C1 to C5,
The production means is
At least a predetermined first effect means (for example, a board surface first decorative symbol group 60a) provided on a game area forming member (for example, a game board 13) through which a game ball can flow down,
The second effect means (for example, provided on the front side of the game machine of the display means (for example, the drum display device 81), which is on the predetermined direction side of the first effect means and is capable of dynamically displaying the identification information. A rear light guide plate 420),
The sequential light emitting means,
A gaming machine C6, which emits light to the first rendering means and then emits light to the second rendering means.

According to the gaming machine C6, the following effects are produced in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines C1 to C5. That is, as the effect means, at least a predetermined first effect means is provided in the game area forming member on which the game balls can flow down, and the dynamic display of the identification information is performed on the predetermined direction side of the first effect means. The second effect means is provided on the front side of the game machine of the possible display means. Then, the sequential light emitting means emits light to the first rendering means, and then emits light to the second rendering means. As a result, the first effect means in the game area forming member and the second effect means provided on the front side of the game machine of the display means for dynamically displaying the identification information perform integrated effect, There is an effect that it is possible to increase the degree of attention to the game by constructing a powerful effect by the dynamic display of the identification information and the predetermined effect by the predetermined information and enhancing the effect of the effect means.

In gaming machine C6,
As the predetermined information, a gaming machine C7, wherein the same type of symbol is visually displayed by the first effect means and the second effect means.

According to the gaming machine C7, the following effects are produced in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C6. That is, as the predetermined information, the symbols of the same type are visually displayed by the first effect means and the second effect means. Thereby, by performing a series of integrated productions by the first production means and the second production means, a powerful production can be executed, and by increasing the production effect of the production means, the degree of attention to the game The effect is that it can be increased.

In gaming machine C7,
A game machine C8, wherein one symbol is formed by the first effect means and the second effect means as the predetermined information.

According to the gaming machine C8, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine C7, the following effects are produced. That is, as the predetermined information, one symbol is formed by the first effect means and the second effect means. Thereby, when performing an effect that straddles the first effect means and the second effect means, it is possible to suppress a feeling of strangeness and execute a series of integrated effects so that a powerful effect can be executed. There is an effect that it is possible to increase the degree of attention to the game by increasing the effect of the effect means.

In any of the gaming machines C1 to C8,
The light guide means,
A game machine C9, wherein the predetermined information is made visible from the front side of the game machine when the light emitted from the light emitting means is incident from a predetermined end portion.

According to the gaming machine C9, the following effects are produced in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines C1 to C8. That is, when the light emitted from the light emitting means enters from a predetermined end portion, the predetermined information provided in the light guide means can be visually recognized from the front side of the gaming machine. Thereby, there is an effect that the effect of the effector having the light guide means can be enhanced and the degree of attention to the game can be increased.

In any of the gaming machines C1 to C9,
A game machine comprising: a diffusing unit (for example, a rear lower diffusing lens 425) for diffusing light from the light emitting unit from a width of the first light emitting unit or the second light emitting unit. C10.

The gaming machine C10 has the following effect in addition to the effects of the gaming machines C1 to C9. That is, the diffusion means diffuses the light from the light emitting means from the width of the first light emitting portion or the second light emitting portion. As a result, the predetermined information having a range larger than the width of the first light emitting portion or the second light emitting portion of the light emitting means can be accurately visible, and the effect of the effecting means having the light guiding means can be enhanced, thereby playing the game. There is an effect that the degree of attention to can be increased.

In gaming machine C9 or C10,
The diffusion means is
A game machine C11, which is integrally formed at a predetermined end of the light guide means.

The gaming machine C11 has the following effect in addition to the effects of the gaming machine C9 or C10. That is, the diffusing means is integrally formed at a predetermined end of the light guiding means. Thus, in the rendering means, the light guide means and the diffusing means are integrally formed, and the number of parts is reduced, so that the degree of freedom in designing the rendering means can be increased.

<Group D: When a plurality of effects overlap, one effect is given priority over the other effect>

Conventionally, a lottery such as a win is performed based on the establishment of a predetermined start condition, and for example, when a win is won, a game in which a predetermined game medium is paid out to a player according to the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition. There is an opportunity.

This gaming machine is provided with a display unit capable of changing a design or the like visible from the front of the gaming machine, and a production unit such as a light emitting unit capable of changing a single color or a luminescent color. By changing the display mode of the rendering means, it is configured to enhance the rendering effect during the game (for example, Patent Document 1 (JP-A-2018-126296)).

The invention of the group D is made in view of the above circumstances, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of suitably increasing the degree of attention to the game.

A first effect means (for example, a light guide unit 400) that performs a first effect (for example, lighting or non-lighting of the first decorative symbol group 421) as the game progresses,
A second effect means (for example, the confirmation lamp 311) for performing a second effect (for example, lighting or non-lighting of the confirmation lamp 311) which is more important for the game than the first effect as the game progresses,
The first effect means,
A light emitting unit (for example, a lower LED unit) having a light emitting unit (for example, a rear lower LED 424) that emits light;
When the light emitted from the light emitting means is incident from a predetermined portion, a light guide means (for example, a rear side) that makes the predetermined information regarding the game (for example, the first decorative symbol group 421) visible from the front side of the gaming machine. And a light guide plate 420),
When the second effect is executed by the second effect means and the first effect is executed by the first effect means, the second effect is preferentially executed over the first effect. A gaming machine D0, which is provided with a production priority means (for example, the rear upper LED 422c is turned off).

According to the gaming machine D0, the first effect is performed by the first effect means as the game progresses. In addition, the second effect, which is more important to the game than the first effect, is performed as the game progresses. And, when the light emitting means provided in the first effecting means has a light emitting portion for emitting light, and the light emitted from the light emitting means enters the light guiding means from a predetermined portion, it is related to the game. The predetermined information becomes visible from the front of the gaming machine. Here, when the second effect is executed by the second effect means and the first effect is effected by the first effect means, the second effect priority means gives the second effect priority over the first effect. Executed. Thereby, even when the first effect and the second effect overlap, the second effect, which is more important to the game than the first effect, is preferentially executed so that the second effect is more prominent than the first effect. You can Therefore, the effect contents of the second effect, which is important as a game, can be clearly executed, information about the game can be accurately suggested to the player, and the attention to the game can be increased.

A first effect means (for example, a light guide unit 400) that performs a first effect (for example, lighting or non-lighting of the first decorative symbol group 421) as the game progresses,
A second effect means (for example, the confirmation lamp 311) that performs a second effect (for example, the confirmation lamp 311 is turned on or off) different from the first effect as the game progresses,
When the second effect can be executed by the second effect means and the first effect can be executed by the first effect means, the first effect reduction is executed by reducing the effect scale of the first effect. A gaming machine D1 including means (for example, the rear upper LED 422c is turned off).

According to the gaming machine D1, the first effect is performed by the first effect means as the game progresses. Also, the second effect means performs a second effect different from the first effect as the game progresses. Here, when the second effect can be performed by the second effect means and the first effect effect can be performed by the first effect effect, the first effect decrease means reduces the effect size of the first effect and executes the effect. To be done. As a result, even when the first effect and the second effect are executed in parallel, the second effect can be relatively highlighted by reducing the effect scale of the first effect. Therefore, at least the effect contents of the second effect can be clearly executed, the information regarding the game can be accurately suggested to the player, and the attention to the game can be increased.

It should be noted that "reduce and execute the production scale" means, for example, when the execution area of the production is reduced, or when the size and amount of the symbols appearing as the production are reduced or reduced, the attention level (the jackpot expectation degree). ) Higher performances are replaced with lesser ones, light emission brightness of performances is decreased (transparency is increased), volume of performances is decreased, or other performances are executed preferentially (front side). By doing so, a case where it becomes relatively difficult to visually recognize is exemplified.

In gaming machine D1,
The second effect is
A gaming machine D2, which is an effect having a higher expectation that a predetermined game value is given to the first effect.

According to the game machine D2, in addition to the effect of the game machine D1, the following effect is achieved. That is, the second effect is set as an effect having a higher expectation that a predetermined game value is given than the first effect. This allows
Even when it is executed in parallel with the first effect and the second effect, the effect scale of the first effect, which is lower in the degree of expectation that a predetermined game value is given than the second effect, is reduced, and the first effect is relatively moved. By executing the second effect with priority, the second effect can be made conspicuous. Therefore, the effect contents of the second effect, which is important as a game, can be clearly executed, information about the game can be accurately suggested to the player, and the attention to the game can be increased.

In the gaming machine D1 or D2,
A first effect lottery means (for example, a light guide plate lighting pattern table 222e and a light guide pattern lottery counter 223d) that draws whether or not to execute the first effect,
A second effect lottery means (for example, a fixed lamp lighting pattern table 222f and a fixed lamp timing lottery counter 223e) for randomly selecting whether or not to execute the second effect,
When executing the second effect based on the lottery result of the second effect lottery means, a first effect that determines whether or not to execute the first effect based on the lottery result of the first effect lottery means. A determining unit (for example, a light guide pattern setting process (S1415)),
The first effect reducing means,
A gaming machine D3, which reduces the production scale of the first effect when the first effect determining means determines that the first effect is to be executed.

According to the game machine D3, in addition to the effect produced by the game machine D1 or D2, the following effect is produced. That is, the first effect lottery means performs a lottery as to whether or not the first effect is executed, and the second effect lottery means makes a lottery as to whether or not the second effect is executed. Further, when executing the second effect based on the lottery result of the second effect lottery means, whether the first effect is to be executed by the first effect determination means based on the lottery result of the first effect lottery means. To be determined. When the first effect determining unit determines that the first effect is to be executed, the first effect reducing unit reduces the effect scale of the first effect. As a result, even if the first effect and the second effect in which the execution lottery is performed separately can be executed in parallel, the effect of the first effect depends on whether or not the first effect is executed. By reducing the scale, the second effect can be relatively highlighted. Therefore, at least the effect contents of the second effect can be clearly executed, the information regarding the game can be accurately suggested to the player, and the attention to the game can be increased.

In any of the gaming machines D1 to D3,
The first effect is
The game machine D4, which can be executed in a wider area than the effect area of the second effect.

According to the gaming machine D4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines D1 to D3, the following effects are produced. That is, the first effect can be executed in a wider area than the effect area of the second effect. That is, even when the second effect and the first effect having an effect area wider than that of the second effect are executed in parallel, by reducing the effect scale of the first effect to be executed, the first effect is reduced. As the production scale of the production is reduced, the second production can be made conspicuous. Therefore, the effect contents of the second effect can be clearly executed, information about the game can be accurately suggested to the player, and the attention to the game can be increased.

In any of the gaming machines D1 to D4,
The first effect means,
A light emitting unit including a first light emitting unit (for example, a rear lower LED 424) that emits light and a second light emitting unit (for example, a rear upper LED 422c) that emits light,
As the first effect, when at least one of the first light emitting portion and the second light emitting portion is irradiated with light, the irradiated means (for example, the rear light guide plate) that makes it easy to visually recognize the predetermined information regarding the game. 420) and
The first effect reducing means,
When the second effect can be executed by the second effect means and the first effect can be executed by the first effect means, either the first light emitting unit or the second light emitting unit can be used. A gaming machine D5 comprising: an irradiation reducing unit that reduces or stops the irradiation of light to reduce the visible range of the predetermined information.

According to the gaming machine D5, the following effects are produced in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines D1 to D4. That is, as the first effect means, light is emitted from the first light emitting portion provided in the light emitting means, and light is emitted from the second light emitting portion also provided in the light emitting means. Further, as the first effect, at least when the light is emitted from either the first light emitting unit or the second light emitting unit, the irradiation target means makes it easy for the predetermined information regarding the game to be visually recognized. Here, when the second effect can be executed by the second effect means and the first effect means can execute the first effect, the irradiation reducing means provided in the first effect reducing means causes the first light emitting unit. Alternatively, the irradiation of light from either one of the second light emitting units is reduced or stopped, and the visible range of the predetermined information is reduced. Thereby, even when the first effect and the second effect are executed in parallel, reduction of light emission from either the first light emitting unit or the second light emitting unit used for the first effect, or By stopping and reducing the visible range of the predetermined information as the first effect, the second effect can be relatively highlighted. Therefore, at least the effect contents of the second effect can be clearly executed, the information regarding the game can be accurately suggested to the player, and the attention to the game can be increased.

It should be noted that "to reduce or stop the irradiation of light" means, for example, when the light emission area is reduced, when the light emission brightness is reduced, when light emission is stopped or interrupted, and light emission time And a case where light emission is intermittently performed and the like.

In gaming machine D5,
The irradiation reducing means,
A gaming machine D6, characterized in that the irradiation of light from the first light emitting unit or the second light emitting unit corresponding to the predetermined information on the second effecting means side is reduced or stopped.

According to the gaming machine D6, the following effects are produced in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine D5. That is, the irradiation reducing unit reduces or stops the irradiation of light from the first light emitting unit or the second light emitting unit corresponding to the predetermined information on the second rendering unit side. Thereby, among the predetermined information, by reducing the visible range of the predetermined information on the second effect means side, at least the first effect executed near the second effect is made inconspicuous, and the second effect is relatively emphasized. Can be made. Therefore, at least the effect contents of the second effect can be clearly executed, the information regarding the game can be accurately suggested to the player, and the attention to the game can be increased.

In gaming machine D5 or D6,
The irradiated means is
Light guide means (for example, a rear light guide plate 420) that allows the predetermined information to be visually recognized from the front side of the gaming machine when light is emitted from the light emitting means,
And a diffusing unit (for example, a rear lower diffusing lens 425) for diffusing light from the first light emitting unit or the second light emitting unit from the width of the first light emitting unit or the second light emitting unit. A gaming machine D7 characterized by having.

According to the gaming machine D7, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine D5 or D6, the following effects are produced. That is, when the light emitting means emits light, the light guide means as the irradiated means allows the predetermined information to be visually recognized from the front of the gaming machine. Then, the light from the first light emitting portion or the second light emitting portion is diffused by the diffusing means from the width of the first light emitting portion or the second light emitting portion. As a result, the predetermined information having a range larger than the width of the first light emitting portion or the second light emitting portion of the light emitting means can be accurately visible, and the effect of the effecting means having the light guiding means can be enhanced, thereby playing the game. There is an effect that the degree of attention to can be increased.

In gaming machine D7,
The predetermined part is
A predetermined end of the light guide means,
The diffusion means is
A game machine D8, which is integrally formed at a predetermined end of the light guide means.

According to the gaming machine D8, the following effects are produced in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine D7. That is, the predetermined portion is the predetermined end portion of the light guide means, and the diffusion means is integrally formed at the predetermined end portion of the light guide means. Thus, in the rendering means, the light guide means and the diffusing means are integrally formed, and the number of parts is reduced, so that the degree of freedom in designing the rendering means can be increased.

<E group: 1 light guide plate for weak/medium notice, and separate light guide plate for strong notice>
Conventionally, a lottery such as a win is performed based on the establishment of a predetermined start condition, and for example, when a win is won, a game in which a predetermined game medium is paid out to a player according to the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition. There is an opportunity.

This gaming machine is provided with a display unit capable of changing a design or the like visible from the front of the gaming machine, and a production unit such as a light emitting unit capable of changing a single color or a luminescent color. By changing the display mode of the rendering means, it is configured to enhance the rendering effect during the game (for example, Patent Document 1 (JP-A-2018-126296)).

For such a gaming machine, in order to improve the interest of the game, it is necessary to raise the attention of the game by enhancing the effect of the effecting means, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

The invention of the group E is made in view of the above circumstances, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of appropriately increasing the attention degree to the game.

An acquisition unit (for example, the reserved ball execution area 203f) that acquires lottery information (for example, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1) upon the establishment of a predetermined starting condition.
Determination means (for example, MPU201) that makes a determination based on the lottery information acquired by the acquisition means,
Based on the determination result by the determination means, in a gaming machine that gives a player a predetermined game value,
Based on the determination result by the determination means, first suggestion information (for example, a fourth decorative symbol group 413) capable of suggesting a degree of expectation that the predetermined game value is given to the player, from the first suggestion information The second suggestion information (for example, the third decorative pattern 412) capable of suggesting to the player that the degree of expectation that the predetermined game value is imparted is high, or the predetermined game value is imparted from the second suggestion information. With a suggestion information lottery means (for example, MPU 221) for randomly selecting execution of any of the third suggestion information (for example, the first decorative symbol group 421) capable of suggesting to the player that the expectation level is high.
First production means (for example, the front light guide plate 410) capable of executing the first suggestion information or the second suggestion information based on the lottery result of the suggestion information lottery means,
A game machine E0 comprising: a second effecting device (for example, a rear light guide plate 420) capable of executing the third suggestion information based on a lottery result of the suggestion information lottery device.

According to the gaming machine E0, the acquisition means acquires the lottery information when the predetermined start condition is satisfied, and the determination means makes the determination based on the lottery information acquired by the acquisition means. Then, a predetermined game value is given to the player based on the judgment result by the judging means. Here, by the suggestion information lottery means, the first suggestion information capable of suggesting to the player the degree of expectation that a predetermined game value is given based on the determination result by the determination means, and the predetermined game value from the first suggestion information The second suggestion information capable of suggesting to the player that the expectation to be given is high, or the third suggestion capable of suggesting to the player that the expectation of giving a predetermined game value is higher than the second suggestion information. Either run of the information is drawn. Then, based on the lottery result of the suggestion information lottery means, the first suggestion means is configured to be able to execute the first suggestion information or the second suggestion information. Similarly, based on the lottery result of the suggestion information lottery means, the second effect. The third suggestion information is executable by the means. As a result, a third suggestion effect capable of suggesting to the player that a predetermined game value is given a higher expectation than the first suggestion information and the second suggestion information is given a predetermined game value from the third suggestion information. Execution is performed by a production means different from the first suggestion production and the second suggestion production, which can suggest that the degree of expectation to be given is low, so that the production discrepancies are large when the game is mistakenly executed due to noise or malfunction. 3 It is possible to prevent abnormal execution of the suggestion information. As a result, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of production discrepancies, to accurately suggest information about the game to the player, and to increase the attention to the game.

An acquisition unit (for example, the reserved ball execution area 203f) that acquires special information (for example, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1) upon the establishment of a predetermined start condition,
Determination means (for example, MPU 201) that makes a determination based on the special information acquired by the acquisition means,
Based on the determination result by the determination means, in a gaming machine that gives a player a predetermined game value,
Based on the determination result by the determination means, a suggestion information lottery means (for example, MPU221) for performing an execution of suggestion by suggestive information that can suggest the degree of expectation that a predetermined game value is given to the player,
The suggestive information is at least
The first suggestion information (for example, the fourth decorative symbol group 413) capable of suggesting a predetermined degree of expectation that the predetermined game value is given to the player, and the predetermined game value is given from the first suggestion information. The second suggestion information (for example, the third decorative pattern 412) capable of suggesting to the player that the expectation degree is high, and the expectation degree that the predetermined game value is given to the second suggestion information is higher than the expectation degree. With third suggestion information (for example, the first decorative pattern group 421) that can be suggested to the person,
A first effecting means (for example, the front light guide plate 410 and each LED 414c) capable of executing the first suggestion information or the second suggestion information based on the lottery result of the suggestion information lottery means,
Based on a lottery result of the suggestion information lottery means, a second effecting means capable of executing the third suggestion information (for example, the rear light guide plate 420 and each LED 424, etc.), and a game characterized by the above-mentioned. Machine E1.

According to the gaming machine E1, the acquisition means acquires the special information triggered by the establishment of the predetermined starting condition, and the determination means makes the determination based on the special information acquired by the acquisition means. Then, a predetermined game value is given to the player based on the judgment result by the judging means. In addition, the suggestion information lottery means draws lots of suggestion based on suggestion information capable of suggesting to the player the degree of expectation that a predetermined game value will be given, based on the determination result by the determining means. Here, as the suggestion information, at least the first suggestion information capable of suggesting to the player a predetermined expectation level to which a predetermined game value is imparted and the expectation degree to which the predetermined game value is imparted from the first suggestion information. There is provided second suggestion information capable of suggesting to the player that it is high, and third suggestion information capable of suggesting to the player that the degree of expectation that a predetermined game value is given is higher than that of the second suggestion information. Then, based on the lottery result of the suggestion information lottery means, the first suggestion means is configured to be able to execute the first suggestion information or the second suggestion information. Similarly, based on the lottery result of the suggestion information lottery means, the second effect. The third suggestion information is executable by the means. As a result, a third suggestion effect capable of suggesting to the player that a predetermined game value is given a higher expectation than the first suggestion information and the second suggestion information is given a predetermined game value from the third suggestion information. Execution is performed by a production means different from the first suggestion production and the second suggestion production, which can suggest that the degree of expectation to be given is low, so that the production discrepancies are large when the game is mistakenly executed due to noise or malfunction. 3 It is possible to prevent abnormal execution of the suggestion information. As a result, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of production discrepancies, to accurately suggest information about the game to the player, and to increase the attention to the game.

In the gaming machine E1,
The first effect means,
A first light emitting unit (for example, front right LED 415c or front left LED 416c) that emits light in a predetermined first direction (for example, front view left direction or front view right direction);
A second light emitting unit (for example, front lower LED 414c) that emits light in a second direction different from the first direction (for example, an upward direction in front view);
When the light emitted from the first light emitting unit is incident from a predetermined first portion, the first suggestion information is made visible from the front side of the gaming machine, and the light emitted from the second light emitting unit is A first light guide means (for example, a front light guide plate 410) that allows the second suggestion information to be visually recognized from the front side of the gaming machine when the light is incident from a second part different from the first part,
The first light guide means,
Light emitted toward the first direction is easily emitted to the front side of the gaming machine, and light emitted toward the second direction is not emitted to the front side of the gaming machine or is difficult to emit. A part (for example, a vertical groove forming each bubble pattern of the fourth decorative symbol group 413),
Light emitted toward the second direction is easily emitted to the front side of the gaming machine, and light emitted toward the first direction is not emitted to the front side of the gaming machine or is difficult to emit. A part (for example, a sunfish symbol of the third decorative symbol 412, or a lateral groove that forms each cherry symbol symbol group of the second decorative symbol group 411), and a gaming machine E2.

The gaming machine E2 has the following effect in addition to the effect of the gaming machine E1. That is, the first light emitting section provided in the first effecting means emits light in a predetermined first direction, and the second light emitting section provided in the first effecting means provides a second light different from the first direction. Light is emitted in the direction. Further, when the light emitted from the first light emitting unit is incident on the first light guide means from a predetermined first portion, the first suggestion information becomes visible from the front side of the gaming machine, and the second light emitting unit. The second suggestion information can be visually recognized from the front side of the gaming machine when the light emitted from is incident from the second portion different from the first portion. Then, the light emitted in the first direction is easily emitted to the front side of the gaming machine or emitted in the second direction by the first emitting portion provided in the first light guide means. Light is not emitted to the front side of the game machine or is hard to be emitted. Moreover, the light emitted toward the second direction is easily emitted or emitted toward the front side of the gaming machine by the second emission portion provided in the first light guide unit, and is emitted toward the first direction. Light is not emitted to the front side of the game machine or is hard to be emitted. That is, in the first rendering means, the first suggestion information is made visible by the light from the first direction, while the second suggestion information is made invisible or difficult, and the second suggestion information is made visible by the light from the second direction. By making the first suggestion information invisible or difficult while making it possible, a plurality of suggestion information can be expressed even by one first rendering means. Thereby, even when a plurality of suggestion information is provided in the first rendering means, each suggestion information can be visually recognized by controlling the light emission of the first light emitting unit or the second light emitting unit. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the effect of the first effect means by making it possible to express a plurality of suggestion information in the first effect means, thereby increasing the degree of attention to the game.

In the gaming machine E2,
At least the first effect means,
Directivity improving means for increasing the directivity of the light emitted from the first light emitting unit or the second light emitting unit (for example, the front lower focusing lens 414d, the front right focusing lens 415d, or the front left LED 416c). ), and a gaming machine E3.

The gaming machine E3 has the following effect in addition to the effects of the gaming machine E1 or E2. That is, at least the directivity of the light emitted from the first light emitting unit or the second light emitting unit is enhanced by the directivity improving unit provided in the first rendering unit. Thereby, even when a plurality of suggestion information is provided in the first rendering means, it is possible to make only the suggestion information of the irradiation target visible accurately. Therefore, in the case where the second suggestion effect capable of suggesting to the player that the expectation that a predetermined game value is given is higher than that of the first suggestion information is executed by the same first effect means as the first suggestion information. Also, by controlling the light emission of the first light emitting unit or the second light emitting unit, it is possible to distinguish each suggestive information and make it visible. As a result, it is possible to make the desired suggestion information visually recognizable, and to suggest the game information to the player appropriately, thereby increasing the attention to the game.

In any of the gaming machines E1 to E3,
The second effect means,
A third light emitting portion that emits light (for example, a rear lower LED 424),
A second light guide means (for example, a rear light guide plate) that allows only the third suggestion information to be visually recognized from the front side of the gaming machine when the light emitted from the third light emitting unit is incident from a predetermined third portion. 420),
A gaming machine E4 comprising: a diffusing unit (for example, a rear lower diffusing lens 425) for diffusing light from the third light emitting unit from the width of the third light emitting unit.

The gaming machine E4 has the following effect in addition to the effects of the gaming machines E1 to E3. That is, when light is emitted from the third light emitting portion and light emitted from the third light emitting portion is incident from a predetermined third portion as the second effect means, the second light guide means causes the third suggestion information. Is visible from the front side of the gaming machine. Then, the light from the third light emitting portion is diffused by the diffusing means from the width of the third light emitting portion. Thereby, in the second light guide means provided with only one piece of suggestion information, the light emitted from the third light emitting portion is diffused from the width of the third light emitting portion so that the third light emitting portion is arranged more than the arranged portion. It is possible to irradiate light over a wide range. As a result, for example, even when a large amount of third suggestion information is provided in the second light guide means, the third suggestion information can be made visible accurately, and the effect of the production means having the light guide means By increasing the effect, it is possible to increase the degree of attention to the game.

In the gaming machine E4,
The diffusion means is
A game machine E5, which is formed integrally with the third portion of the second light guide means.

The gaming machine E5 has the following effect in addition to the effects of the gaming machine E4. That is, it is formed integrally with the third portion of the second light guide means. As a result, in the second rendering means, the second light guide means and the diffusing means are integrally formed, and the number of parts is reduced, so that the degree of freedom in designing the second rendering means can be increased. There is.

In any of the gaming machines E1 to E5,
The first rendering means and the second rendering means,
A gaming machine E6, wherein the gaming machine E6 is arranged so as to be overlapped with respect to the front direction of the gaming machine.

The gaming machine E6 has the following effect in addition to the effects of the gaming machines E1 to E5. That is, the first effect means and the second effect means are arranged so as to overlap with each other in the front direction of the gaming machine. As a result, by making a plurality of suggestion information visible in one effect area, it is possible to enhance the effect of the effect means and thereby to increase the degree of attention to the game.

In the gaming machine E6,
The first effect means,
A game machine E7, which is arranged on the front side of the game machine front direction with respect to the second effect means.

According to the gaming machine E7, the following effects are produced in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine E6. That is, the first effect means is arranged closer to the front side of the game machine than the second effect means. That is, the first suggestion information and the second suggestion, which are less likely to be given a predetermined game value than the third suggestion information, are provided on the front side of the game machine of the second effect means configured so that the third suggestion information can be visually recognized. The first effect means is arranged so that the information can be visually recognized. As a result, for example, even when light is emitted from the front side of the gaming machine such as indoor lighting in the game hall, it is possible to reduce the amount of light that reaches the second rendering means by the first rendering means, There is an effect that it is possible to suppress erroneous lighting of the third suggestion information, which is more affected by the production discrepancy than the other suggestion information.

<F group: a plurality of display objects on the light guide plate of 1, and the optical path directions of the LEDs are different for each display object. A small direction area (one direction, sunfish, cherry blossoms) and a multi-direction area within one light guide plate. (2 directions, bubbles), strong effect in a few directions (weak effect in locations where optical paths overlap)>
Conventionally, a lottery such as a win is performed based on the establishment of a predetermined start condition, and for example, when a win is won, a game in which a predetermined game medium is paid out to a player according to the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition. There is an opportunity.

This gaming machine is provided with a display unit capable of changing a design or the like visible from the front of the gaming machine, and a production unit such as a light emitting unit capable of changing a single color or a luminescent color. By changing the display mode of the rendering means, it is configured to enhance the rendering effect during the game (for example, Patent Document 1 (JP-A-2018-126296)).

For such a gaming machine, in order to improve the interest of the game, it is necessary to raise the attention of the game by enhancing the effect of the effecting means, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

The invention of group F has been made in view of the above circumstances, and an object of the invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of appropriately increasing the degree of attention to games.

An acquisition unit (for example, the reserved ball execution area 203f) that acquires lottery information (for example, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1) upon the establishment of a predetermined starting condition.
Determination means (for example, MPU201) that makes a determination based on the lottery information acquired by the acquisition means,
Based on the determination result by the determination means, in a gaming machine that gives a player a predetermined game value,
Based on the determination result by the determination means, at least first suggestion information (for example, a fourth decorative symbol group 413) capable of suggesting to the player the degree of expectation that the predetermined game value is given, or the first. Suggestion information lottery means (for example, MPU 221) that draws the execution of the second suggestion information (for example, the third decorative pattern 412) capable of suggesting to the player that the degree of expectation that the predetermined game value is given is higher than the suggestion information. )When,
Based on the lottery result of the suggestion information lottery means, the production means capable of executing the first suggestion information or the second suggestion information (for example, the light guide unit 400),
The production means is
A first light emitting means (for example, front right LED 415c and front left LED 416c) that emits light in a predetermined first direction (for example, left-right direction);
Second light emitting means (for example, front lower LED 414c) that emits light in a second direction (for example, an upward direction) different from the first direction;
When the light emitted from the first light emitting unit is incident from a predetermined first portion (for example, the flat plate portion below the front light guide plate 410 and the end faces in the left-right direction of the lower inverted R-shaped portion), the first suggestion information. Is visible from the front side of the game machine, and the light emitted from the second light emitting means is different from the first portion (for example, the lower end surface of the flat plate portion below the front light guide plate 410). A light guide means (for example, a front light guide plate 410) that allows the second suggestion information to be visually recognized from the front side of the gaming machine when the light is incident,
At least the second suggestion information is
In the effect production means, the gaming machine F0 is provided at a position where the first direction and the second direction do not overlap (for example, a regular R-shaped portion of the front light guide plate 410).

According to the gaming machine F0, the acquisition means acquires the lottery information when the predetermined start condition is satisfied, and the determination means makes the determination based on the lottery information acquired by the acquisition means. Then, a predetermined game value is given to the player based on the judgment result by the judging means. Here, the suggestion information lottery means, based on the determination result by the determining means, at least the first suggestion information capable of suggesting to the player the degree of expectation that a predetermined game value is given, or a predetermined value based on the first suggestion information. The execution of the second suggestion information capable of suggesting to the player that the degree of expectation that the game value will be given is high is drawn. Then, based on the lottery result of the suggestion information lottery means, the effector is configured to execute the first suggestion information or the second suggestion information. Here, the first light emitting means provided in the production means emits light in a predetermined first direction, and the second light emitting means also provided in the production means emits light in a second direction different from the first direction. Is irradiated. Then, in the light guide means, when the light emitted from the first light emitting means is incident from a predetermined first portion, the first suggestion information becomes visible from the front side of the gaming machine and emitted from the second light emitting means. When the emitted light is incident from the second portion different from the first portion, the second suggestion information becomes visible from the front side of the gaming machine. Here, in the rendering means, the second suggestion information is provided at least at a position where the first direction and the second direction do not overlap each other. That is, the second suggestion effect capable of suggesting to the player that the expectation that a predetermined game value is given is higher than that of the first suggestion information is provided at a position where the lights of the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means do not overlap. .. As a result, it is possible to prevent abnormal execution of the second suggestion information having a large effect discrepancy when the second suggestion information is erroneously executed due to noise or malfunction. As a result, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of production discrepancies, to accurately suggest information about the game to the player, and to increase the attention to the game.

An acquisition unit (for example, the reserved ball execution area 203f) that acquires special information (for example, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1) upon the establishment of a predetermined start condition,
Determination means (for example, MPU 201) that makes a determination based on the special information acquired by the acquisition means,
Based on the determination result by the determination means, in a gaming machine that gives a player a predetermined game value,
A suggestion information lottery means (for example, MPU 221) that draws the suggestion by suggestive information that can suggest the degree of expectation that a predetermined game value is given to the player based on the determination result by the determination means,
Based on the lottery result of the suggestion information lottery means, the production means capable of executing the suggestion by the suggestion information (for example, the light guide unit 400),
The suggestive information is at least
The first suggestion information (for example, the fourth decorative symbol group 413) capable of suggesting a predetermined degree of expectation that the predetermined game value is given to the player, and the predetermined game value is given from the first suggestion information. And second suggestion information (for example, a third decorative pattern 412) capable of suggesting to the player that the degree of expectation is high.
A first light emitting unit (for example, front right LED 415c and front left LED 416c) that emits light in a predetermined first direction (for example, left-right direction);
A second light emitting unit (for example, front lower LED 414c) that emits light in a second direction (for example, an upward direction) different from the first direction;
When the light emitted from the first light emitting unit is incident from a predetermined first portion (for example, the flat plate portion below the front light guide plate 410 and the end faces in the left-right direction of the lower inverted R-shaped portion), the first suggestion information. Is visible from the front side of the gaming machine, and the light emitted from the second light emitting portion is from a second portion different from the first portion (for example, the lower end surface of the flat plate portion below the front light guide plate 410). A light guide means (for example, a front light guide plate 410) that allows the second suggestion information to be visually recognized from the front side of the gaming machine when the light is incident,
The second suggestion information is
In the light guide means, it is provided at a position where the optical path of the light emitted in the first direction and the optical path of the light emitted in the second direction do not intersect (for example, a regular R-shaped portion of the front light guide plate 410). A gaming machine F1 characterized by the above.

According to the gaming machine F1, the acquisition unit acquires the special information triggered by the establishment of the predetermined start condition, and the determination unit makes the determination based on the special information acquired by the acquisition unit. Then, a predetermined game value is given to the player based on the judgment result by the judging means. In addition, the suggestion information lottery means draws lots of suggestion based on suggestion information capable of suggesting to the player the degree of expectation that a predetermined game value will be given, based on the determination result by the determining means. Then, based on the lottery result of the suggestion information lottery means, the suggestion information is configured to be executable by the rendering means. Here, as the suggestion information, at least the first suggestion information capable of suggesting to the player a predetermined expectation level to which a predetermined game value is imparted and the expectation degree to which the predetermined game value is imparted from the first suggestion information. The second suggestion information capable of suggesting the high price to the player is provided. Then, the first light emitting unit provided in the rendering unit emits light in a predetermined first direction, and the second light emitting unit also provided in the rendering unit emits light in a second direction different from the first direction. To be done. Further, the light guide means provided in the rendering means is configured to make the first suggestion information visible from the front side of the gaming machine when the light emitted from the first light emitting portion is incident from the predetermined first portion, When the light emitted from the second light emitting unit is incident from the second part different from the first part, the second suggestion information is visible from the front side of the gaming machine. Here, the second suggestion information is provided in the light guide means at a position where the optical path of the light emitted in the first direction and the optical path of the light emitted in the second direction do not intersect. That is, the second suggestion information capable of suggesting to the player that the degree of expectation that a predetermined game value is given is higher than that of the first suggestion information is emitted from at least one of the first light emitting unit and the second light emitting unit. It is formed at a position visible only by the light. With this, even when light is accidentally emitted from the first light emitting unit due to noise or malfunction, it is possible to prevent the second suggestion information having a large production discrepancy from being visible. As a result, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of production discrepancies, to accurately suggest information about the game to the player, and to increase the attention to the game.

In the gaming machine F1,
The production means is at least
And a directivity improving unit (for example, a front right condenser lens 415d or a front left condenser lens 416d) that enhances the directivity of the light emitted from the first light emitting unit. Gaming machine F2.

According to the gaming machine F2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine F1, the following effects are achieved. That is, the directivity of the light emitted from the first light emitting unit is at least enhanced by the directivity improving unit provided in the rendering unit. Thus, when a plurality of suggestion information is provided in the effector, at least the first suggestive effect that can suggest to the player that the degree of expectation that a predetermined game value is given is lower than that of the second suggestion information is generated by the effector. Even if it is executed, the light emitted from the first light emitting unit is accurately emitted to the position where the first suggestion information is provided so that the position where the second suggestion information is provided does not reach or is difficult to reach. Thus, it is possible to prevent the second suggestion information from being visible due to the light emitted from the first light emitting unit. As a result, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of production discrepancies, to accurately suggest information about the game to the player, and to increase the attention to the game.

In the gaming machine F1 or F2,
The first suggestion information is
In the light guide unit, a position where an optical path of light emitted in the first direction and an optical path of light emitted in the second direction intersect (for example, a lower flat plate portion of the front light guide plate 410 and a lower inverted R shape). Part) is provided in the gaming machine F3.

According to the gaming machine F3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine F1 or F2, the following effects are produced. That is, the first suggestion information is provided at the position where the optical path of the light emitted in the first direction and the optical path of the light emitted in the second direction intersect in the light guide means. That is, the first suggestion information capable of suggesting to the player that the degree of expectation that a predetermined game value is given is lower than the second suggestion information is the light emitted from both the first light emitting unit and the second light emitting unit. Is formed on the optical path of. Here, even if the first suggestion information is made visible by the light for the second suggestion information, the light for the second suggestion information is given a predetermined game value from the first suggestion information. This is to make the second suggestion information with high expectation visible, and even if the first suggestion information becomes visible when the second suggestion information becomes visible, there is little discrepancy in the production. .. Thereby, the degree of expectation that a predetermined game value is given to the portion where the optical path of the second direction light for the second suggestion information and the optical path of the light for the first direction corresponding to the first suggestion information intersect are the second expectation value. By providing the first suggestion information lower than the suggestion information, even when the first suggestion information becomes visible from the front side of the gaming machine at an unintended timing, the discrepancy in the production is minimized, There is an effect that it is possible to provide the player with a game that is comfortable to the player.

In any of the gaming machines F1 to F3,
The production means is
A gaming machine F4, comprising a second directivity improving means (for example, a front lower condensing lens 414d) that enhances the directivity of the light emitted from the second light emitting section.

According to the gaming machine F4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines F1 to F3, the following effects are produced. That is, the directivity of the light emitted from the second light emitting unit is enhanced by the second directivity improving unit provided in the rendering unit. Thereby, when a plurality of suggestion information is provided in the effector, the effector executes the second suggestive effect capable of suggesting to the player that the degree of expectation that a predetermined game value is given is higher than that of the first suggestive information. Even in the case, by irradiating the light emitted from the second light emitting unit to the position where the second suggestion information is provided accurately and making the second suggestion information visible from the front side of the game machine, There is an effect that information can be accurately suggested to the player and the degree of attention to the game can be increased.

In any of the gaming machines F1 to F3,
The production means is
A gaming machine F5, comprising a diffusing unit (for example, a third upward diffusing lens 473) that diffuses the light emitted from the second light emitting unit from the width of the second light emitting unit.

According to the gaming machine F5, the following effects are produced in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines F1 to F3. That is, the light emitted from the second light emitting unit is diffused by the diffusing unit provided in the rendering unit, from the width of the second light emitting unit. Here, even if the first suggestion information becomes visible due to the light for the second suggestion information emitted from the second light emitting unit via the diffusing means, the light for the second suggestion information is The first suggestion information is made visible when the second suggestion information has a higher expectation that a predetermined game value is given to the first suggestion information, and the second suggestion information becomes visible. Even if you do, the discrepancies in production are small. With this, by diffusing the light from the second light emitting unit and irradiating the diffused light comprehensively with respect to the second suggestion information, the second suggestion information can be clearly recognized. Even if the first suggestion information becomes visible from the front side of the gaming machine at an unintended timing, it is possible to minimize the discrepancies in the production and provide the player with a comfortable game. The effect is that you can.

In any of the gaming machines F1 to F5,
The light guide means,
Light emitted toward the first direction is easily emitted to the front side of the gaming machine, and light emitted toward the second direction is not emitted to the front side of the gaming machine or is difficult to emit. A part (for example, a vertical groove forming each bubble pattern of the fourth decorative symbol group 413),
Light emitted toward the second direction is easily emitted to the front side of the gaming machine, and light emitted toward the first direction is not emitted to the front side of the gaming machine or is difficult to emit. A part (for example, a sunfish symbol of the third decorative symbol 412 or a lateral groove forming each cherry symbol symbol group of the second decorative symbol group 411), and a gaming machine F6.

According to the gaming machine F6, the following effects are produced in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines F1 to F5. That is, the light emitted in the first direction is easily emitted or emitted toward the front side of the gaming machine by the first emission portion provided in the light guide unit, and the light emitted in the second direction is emitted. It is configured so that it does not emit to the front side of the gaming machine or is hard to be emitted. In addition, the light emitted in the second direction is easily emitted or emitted toward the front side of the gaming machine by the second emitting portion provided in the light guide unit, and the light emitted in the first direction is emitted. It is configured so that it does not emit to the front side of the gaming machine or is hard to be emitted. That is, the rendering means makes the first suggestion information visible while making the second suggestion information invisible or difficult by the light from the first direction, and makes the second suggestion information visible by the light from the second direction. While making the first suggestion information invisible or difficult, a plurality of suggestion information can be expressed even by one effect means. Thereby, even when a plurality of suggestion information is provided in the rendering means, by controlling the light emission of the first light emitting unit or the second light emitting unit, the respective suggestion information can be distinguished and made visible. There is an effect that it is possible to raise the degree of attention to the game by increasing the effect of the effecting means by making it possible to express a plurality of suggestion information in the effecting means.

<Group G: a plurality of display objects on the light guide plate of 1, and the optical path directions of the LEDs are different for each display object. Within the light guide plate of 1 is a small-direction area (one direction, sunfish, cherry blossoms) and a multi-direction area. (2 directions, bubble group), small direction is in front of the display (main display, main drum, main liquid crystal)>
Conventionally, a lottery such as a win is performed based on the establishment of a predetermined start condition, and for example, when a win is won, a game in which a predetermined game medium is paid out to a player according to the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition. There is an opportunity.

This gaming machine is provided with a display unit capable of changing a design or the like visible from the front of the gaming machine, and a production unit such as a light emitting unit capable of changing a single color or a luminescent color. By changing the display mode of the rendering means, it is configured to enhance the rendering effect during the game (for example, Patent Document 1 (JP-A-2018-126296)).

For such a gaming machine, in order to improve the interest of the game, it is necessary to raise the attention of the game by enhancing the effect of the effecting means, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

The invention of the G group has been made in view of the above circumstances, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of appropriately increasing the degree of attention to a game.

An acquisition unit (for example, the reserved ball execution area 203f) that acquires lottery information (for example, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1) upon the establishment of a predetermined starting condition.
Determination means (for example, MPU201) that makes a determination based on the lottery information acquired by the acquisition means,
Dynamic execution means (for example, display control device 114) for dynamically displaying the identification information on the display means (for example, drum display device 81) based on the determination result by the determination means;
In a gaming machine that gives a predetermined game value to a player when a predetermined display result appears in the dynamic display executed by the dynamic execution means,
Based on the determination result by the determination means, at least first suggestion information (for example, a fourth decorative symbol group 413) capable of suggesting to the player the degree of expectation that the predetermined game value is given, or the first. Suggestion information lottery means (for example, MPU 221) that draws the execution of the second suggestion information (for example, the third decorative pattern 412) capable of suggesting to the player that the degree of expectation that the predetermined game value is given is higher than the suggestion information. )When,
Based on the lottery result of the suggestion information lottery means, the production means capable of executing the first suggestion information or the second suggestion information (for example, the front light guide plate 410),
The production means is
A first light emitting means (for example, front right LED 415c and front left LED 416c) that emits light in a predetermined first direction (for example, left-right direction);
Second light emitting means (for example, front lower LED 414c) that emits light in a second direction (for example, an upward direction) different from the first direction;
When the light emitted from the first light emitting unit is incident from a predetermined first portion (for example, the flat plate portion below the front light guide plate 410 and the end faces in the left-right direction of the lower inverted R-shaped portion), the first suggestion information. Is visible from the front side of the game machine, and the light emitted from the second light emitting means is different from the first portion (for example, the lower end surface of the flat plate portion below the front light guide plate 410). A light guide means (for example, a front light guide plate 410) that allows the second suggestion information to be visually recognized from the front side of the gaming machine when the light is incident,
The display means is
In the effecting means, the gaming machine G0 is arranged on the back side in front view at a position where the first direction and the second direction do not overlap (for example, a regular R-shaped portion of the front light guide plate 410). ..

According to the gaming machine G0, the acquisition means acquires the lottery information when the predetermined start condition is satisfied, and the determination means makes the determination based on the lottery information acquired by the acquisition means. Then, based on the determination result by the determination unit, the dynamic execution unit dynamically displays the identification information on the display unit. In addition, when a predetermined display result appears in the dynamic display executed by the dynamic execution means, a predetermined game value is given to the player. Here, the suggestion information lottery means, based on the determination result by the determining means, at least the first suggestion information capable of suggesting to the player the degree of expectation that a predetermined game value is given, or a predetermined value based on the first suggestion information. The execution of the second suggestion information capable of suggesting to the player that the degree of expectation that the game value will be given is high is drawn. Then, based on the lottery result of the suggestion information lottery means, the effector is configured to execute the first suggestion information or the second suggestion information. Here, the first light emitting means provided in the production means emits light in a predetermined first direction, and the second light emitting means also provided in the production means emits light in a second direction different from the first direction. Is irradiated. Then, in the light guide means, when the light emitted from the first light emitting means is incident from a predetermined first portion, the first suggestion information becomes visible from the front side of the gaming machine and emitted from the second light emitting means. When the emitted light is incident from the second portion different from the first portion, the second suggestion information becomes visible from the front side of the gaming machine. Here, in the effect production means, at least the display means is provided on the rear side in the front view at a position where the first direction and the second direction do not overlap each other. That is, the display means for displaying the display result of the dynamic display is provided at a position where the lights of the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means do not overlap. As a result, even if the first light emitting means or the second light emitting means emits light accidentally due to noise or malfunction, the first suggestion due to malfunction at the position where the display means showing the result of the game is arranged. The probability that the information or the second suggestion information will be executed can be reduced. As a result, there is an effect that the information about the game can be accurately suggested to the player and the degree of attention to the game can be increased.

An acquisition unit (for example, the reserved ball execution area 203f) that acquires special information (for example, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1) upon the establishment of a predetermined start condition,
Determination means (for example, MPU 201) that makes a determination based on the special information acquired by the acquisition means,
A display unit (for example, a drum display device 81) capable of executing a predetermined effect related to the game based on the determination result of the determination unit,
Based on the determination result by the determination means, in a gaming machine that gives a player a predetermined game value,
A suggestion information lottery means (for example, MPU 221) that draws the suggestion by suggestive information that can suggest the degree of expectation that a predetermined game value is given to the player based on the determination result by the determination means,
Based on the lottery result of the suggestion information lottery means, the production means capable of executing the suggestion information (for example, the light guide unit 400),
The suggestive information is at least
The first suggestion information (for example, the fourth decorative symbol group 413) capable of suggesting a predetermined degree of expectation that the predetermined game value is given to the player, and the predetermined game value is given from the first suggestion information. And second suggestion information (for example, a third decorative pattern 412) capable of suggesting to the player that the degree of expectation is high.
A first light emitting unit (for example, front right LED 415c and front left LED 416c) that emits light in a predetermined first direction (for example, left-right direction);
A second light emitting unit (for example, front lower LED 414c) that emits light in a second direction (for example, an upward direction) different from the first direction;
When the light emitted from the first light emitting unit is incident from a predetermined first portion (for example, the flat plate portion below the front light guide plate 410 and the end faces in the left-right direction of the lower inverted R-shaped portion), the first suggestion information. Is visible from the front side of the gaming machine, and the light emitted from the second light emitting portion is from a second portion different from the first portion (for example, the lower end surface of the flat plate portion below the front light guide plate 410). A light guide means (for example, a front light guide plate 410) that allows the second suggestion information to be visually recognized from the front side of the gaming machine when the light is incident,
The display means is
In the light guide means, a game machine at a position where the optical path of the light emitted in the first direction and the optical path of the light emitted in the second direction do not intersect (for example, a regular R-shaped portion of the front light guide plate 410). A gaming machine G1 characterized in that it is arranged on the back side in front view.

According to the gaming machine G1, the acquisition unit acquires the special information triggered by the establishment of the predetermined start condition, and the determination unit makes the determination based on the special information acquired by the acquisition unit. Further, based on the determination result by the determination means, the display means is configured to be able to execute a predetermined effect regarding the game. Then, a predetermined game value is given to the player based on the judgment result by the judging means. Here, based on the determination result by the determination means, the suggestion information lottery means performs a lottery to perform suggestion by suggestive information capable of suggesting a degree of expectation that a predetermined game value is given to the player, and the suggestion information lottery means. Based on the lottery result, the suggestion information is configured to be executable by the rendering means. Then, as the suggestion information, at least the first suggestion information capable of suggesting to the player a predetermined expectation degree that a predetermined game value is imparted, and the expectation degree that a predetermined game value is imparted from the first suggestion information. Second suggestion information capable of suggesting a high price to the player is provided. Here, light is emitted in a predetermined first direction by the first light emitting unit provided in the rendering means, and light is emitted in a second direction different from the first direction by the second rendering means also provided in the rendering means. Is irradiated. Then, when the light emitted from the first light emitting unit is incident from the predetermined first portion, the light guide unit provided in the rendering unit makes the first suggestion information visible from the front side of the gaming machine. When the light emitted from the two light emitting parts is incident from the second part different from the first part, the second suggestion information is visible from the front side of the gaming machine. Here, the display means is disposed on the rear side of the gaming machine front view at a position where the optical path of the light emitted in the first direction and the optical path of the light emitted in the second direction do not intersect in the light guide means. .. Thereby, by arranging the display means capable of executing the predetermined effect related to the game on the back side of the gaming machine at the position where the optical path of the light in the first direction and the optical path of the light in the second direction do not intersect with each other, the display is performed. While the predetermined effect related to the game executed by the means is configured not to hinder the effect, the effect information of the display means and the effect means is enhanced by configuring the effect information so that the predetermined information can be visually recognized. This has the effect of increasing the degree of attention.

In the gaming machine G1,
Dynamic execution means (for example, display control device 114) that dynamically displays identification information in a predetermined display area of the display means based on the determination result by the determination means,
In the dynamic display executed by the dynamic execution means, a game value giving means (for example, a variable winning device 65) capable of giving the game value to the player when a predetermined display result appears. ,,
Equipped with
The display area is
In the light guide means, a game machine at a position where the optical path of the light emitted in the first direction and the optical path of the light emitted in the second direction do not intersect (for example, a regular R-shaped portion of the front light guide plate 410). A gaming machine G2, which is arranged on the back side when viewed from the front.

The gaming machine G2 has the following effect in addition to the effect of the gaming machine G1. That is,
The dynamic execution means dynamically displays the identification information in a predetermined display area of the display means based on the determination result by the determination means, and the predetermined display result in the dynamic display executed by the dynamic execution means. When is displayed, the game value can be given to the player by the game value giving means. The display area of the display means is disposed on the rear side of the gaming machine when viewed from the front when the light guide means does not intersect the optical path of the light emitted in the first direction and the optical path of the light emitted in the second direction. To be done. Thereby, the dynamic display of the identification information indicating whether or not to give the game value is displayed on the rear side of the gaming machine at the position where the optical path of the light in the first direction and the optical path of the light in the second direction do not intersect in the rendering means. By arranging the display means to be performed, while the dynamic display executed by the display means is configured not to hinder the performance, the predetermined information indicating the degree of expectation that the game value is given in the performance means can be visually recognized. By doing so, there is an effect that the effect of the display means and the effect of the effect means can be enhanced respectively, and the degree of attention to the game can be increased.

In the gaming machine G1 or G2,
The production means is at least
And a directivity improving unit (for example, a front right condenser lens 415d or a front left condenser lens 416d) that enhances the directivity of the light emitted from the first light emitting unit. Gaming machine G3.

The gaming machine G3 has the following effect in addition to the effect of the gaming machine G1 or G2. That is, the directivity of the light emitted from the first light emitting unit is at least enhanced by the directivity improving unit provided in the rendering unit. Thus, when a plurality of suggestion information is provided in the effector, at least the first suggestive effect that can suggest to the player that the degree of expectation that a predetermined game value is given is lower than that of the second suggestion information is generated by the effector. Even if it is executed, the light emitted from the first light emitting unit is accurately emitted to the position where the first suggestion information is provided so that the position where the second suggestion information is provided does not reach or is difficult to reach. Thus, it is possible to prevent the second suggestion information from being visible due to the light emitted from the first light emitting unit. As a result, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of production discrepancies, to accurately suggest information about the game to the player, and to increase the attention to the game.

In any of the gaming machines G1 to G3,
The first suggestion information is
In the light guide unit, a position where an optical path of light emitted in the first direction and an optical path of light emitted in the second direction intersect (for example, a lower flat plate portion of the front light guide plate 410 and a lower inverted R shape). Part) is provided in the gaming machine G4.

The gaming machine G4 has the following effect in addition to the effects of the gaming machines G1 to G3. That is, the first suggestion information is provided at the position where the optical path of the light emitted in the first direction and the optical path of the light emitted in the second direction intersect in the light guide means. That is, the first suggestion information capable of suggesting to the player that the degree of expectation that a predetermined game value is given is lower than the second suggestion information is the light emitted from both the first light emitting unit and the second light emitting unit. Is formed on the optical path of. Here, even if the first suggestion information is made visible by the light for the second suggestion information, the light for the second suggestion information is given a predetermined game value from the first suggestion information. This is to make the second suggestion information with high expectation visible, and even if the first suggestion information becomes visible when the second suggestion information becomes visible, there is little discrepancy in the production. .. Thereby, the degree of expectation that a predetermined game value is given to the portion where the optical path of the second direction light for the second suggestion information and the optical path of the light for the first direction corresponding to the first suggestion information intersect are the second expectation value. By providing the first suggestion information lower than the suggestion information, even when the first suggestion information becomes visible from the front side of the gaming machine at an unintended timing, the discrepancy in the production is minimized, There is an effect that it is possible to provide the player with a game that is comfortable to the player.

In any of the gaming machines G1 to G4,
The second suggestion information is
In the light guide means, a position where the optical path of the light emitted in the first direction and the optical path of the light emitted in the second direction do not intersect (for example, a regular R-shaped portion of the front light guide plate 410). A gaming machine G5, which is provided on the front side of the display means when viewed from the front of the gaming machine.

The gaming machine G5 has the following effect in addition to the effects of the gaming machines G1 to G4. That is, the second suggestion information is a position where the optical path of the light emitted in the first direction and the optical path of the light emitted in the second direction do not intersect in the light guide means, and the game machine front view of the display means. It is provided on the front side. Thereby, in the portion on the back side of the gaming machine at the position where the optical path of the light in the first direction and the optical path of the light in the second direction in the effecting means do not intersect, a display means capable of executing a predetermined effect related to the game, and a predetermined game. By making it possible to execute together with the suggestion information indicating the degree of expectation of adding value, the predetermined effect and the suggestion information are configured to be visually recognizable in the same visual field, and the effect of the display means and the effect of the effect means, respectively. There is an effect that it is possible to raise the degree of attention to the game.

In any of the gaming machines G1 to G5,
The production means is
A gaming machine G6, characterized by comprising a second directivity improving means (for example, a front lower condensing lens 414d) for enhancing the directivity of the light emitted from the second light emitting section.

The gaming machine G6 has the following effect in addition to the effects of the gaming machines G1 to G5. That is, the directivity of the light emitted from the second light emitting unit is enhanced by the second directivity improving unit provided in the rendering unit. Thereby, when a plurality of suggestion information is provided in the effector, the effector executes the second suggestive effect capable of suggesting to the player that the degree of expectation that a predetermined game value is given is higher than that of the first suggestive information. Even in the case, by irradiating the light emitted from the second light emitting unit to the position where the second suggestion information is provided accurately and making the second suggestion information visible from the front side of the game machine, There is an effect that information can be accurately suggested to the player and the degree of attention to the game can be increased.

In any of the gaming machines G1 to G6,
The light guide means,
Light emitted toward the first direction is easily emitted to the front side of the gaming machine, and light emitted toward the second direction is not emitted to the front side of the gaming machine or is difficult to emit. A part (for example, a vertical groove forming each bubble pattern of the fourth decorative symbol group 413),
Light emitted toward the second direction is easily emitted to the front side of the gaming machine, and light emitted toward the first direction is not emitted to the front side of the gaming machine or is difficult to emit. A part (for example, a sunfish symbol of the third decorative symbol 412 or a lateral groove forming each cherry symbol symbol group of the second decorative symbol group 411), and a gaming machine G7.

The gaming machine G7 has the following effect in addition to the effects of the gaming machines G1 to G6. That is, the light emitted in the first direction is easily emitted or emitted toward the front side of the gaming machine by the first emission portion provided in the light guide unit, and the light emitted in the second direction is emitted. It is configured so that it does not emit to the front side of the gaming machine or is hard to be emitted. In addition, the light emitted in the second direction is easily emitted or emitted toward the front side of the gaming machine by the second emitting portion provided in the light guide unit, and the light emitted in the first direction is emitted. It is configured so that it does not emit to the front side of the gaming machine or is hard to be emitted. That is, the rendering means makes the first suggestion information visible while making the second suggestion information invisible or difficult by the light from the first direction, and makes the second suggestion information visible by the light from the second direction. While making the first suggestion information invisible or difficult, a plurality of suggestion information can be expressed even by one effect means. Thereby, even when a plurality of suggestion information is provided in the rendering means, by controlling the light emission of the first light emitting unit or the second light emitting unit, the respective suggestion information can be distinguished and made visible. There is an effect that it is possible to raise the degree of attention to the game by increasing the effect of the effecting means by making it possible to express a plurality of suggestion information in the effecting means.

<Group H: One light guide plate in a planar shape and an R shape, and in any shape, light is guided from a planar portion (no light is guided from the R shaped portion)>
Conventionally, a lottery such as a win is performed based on the establishment of a predetermined start condition, and for example, when a win is won, a game in which a predetermined game medium is paid out to a player according to the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition. There is an opportunity.

This gaming machine is provided with a display unit capable of changing a design or the like visible from the front of the gaming machine, and a production unit such as a light emitting unit capable of changing a single color or a luminescent color. By changing the display mode of the rendering means, it is configured to enhance the rendering effect during the game (for example, Patent Document 1 (JP-A-2018-126296)).

For such a gaming machine, in order to improve the interest of the game, it is necessary to raise the attention of the game by enhancing the effect of the effecting means, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

The invention of the H group is made in view of the above circumstances, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of appropriately increasing the degree of attention to the game.

The production means (for example, the light guide unit 400) for performing a predetermined effect (for example, lighting or non-lighting of the first decorative symbol group 421) as the game progresses,
The production means is
A light emitting unit (for example, a lower LED unit) having a light emitting unit (for example, a rear lower LED 424) that emits light;
When the light emitted from the light emitting means is incident from a predetermined portion, a light guide means (for example, a rear side) that makes the predetermined information regarding the game (for example, the first decorative symbol group 421) visible from the front side of the gaming machine. And a light guide plate 420),
The light guide means,
At least a predetermined flat plate portion (for example, an upper flat plate portion or a lower flat plate portion),
A bent shape portion bent from the flat plate shape portion in a predetermined direction (for example, an upper inverted R shaped portion, a normal R shaped portion or a lower inverted R shaped portion),
The light emitting means is
A gaming machine H0, which is arranged at a position corresponding to the predetermined portion in the flat plate-shaped portion.

According to the gaming machine H0, the effect means provides a predetermined effect as the game progresses. Further, when the light emitting means provided in the production means has a light emitting portion for emitting light and the light emitted from the light emitting means enters the light guiding means from a predetermined portion, predetermined information regarding the game is played. Can be seen from the front side of the gaming machine. Further, the light guide means is provided with at least a predetermined flat plate-shaped portion and a bent shape portion bent in a predetermined direction from the flat plate-shaped portion, and the light emitting means is arranged at a position corresponding to a predetermined portion in the flat plate-shaped portion. To be done. Thereby, the light can be made incident on the light guide means from a predetermined portion of the flat plate-shaped portion of the light guide means to make the predetermined information visible, and the degree of freedom in designing the light emitter is improved, and the game is played. There is an effect that it is possible to accurately suggest information about the game to the player and to raise the degree of attention to the game.

A first effect means (for example, a drum display device 81) capable of executing a first effect (for example, a variable effect of the third symbol) related to a game,
And a second effect means (for example, light guide unit 400) capable of executing a second effect (for example, lighting or non-lighting of the first decorative symbol group 421) related to the first effect,
The second effect means,
A light emitting means (for example, a lower LED unit 414) having a light emitting portion (for example, a front lower LED 414c) that emits light;
When the light emitted from the light emitting means is incident from a predetermined portion, light guide means (for example, front side guide) that makes predetermined information about the game (for example, the second decorative symbol group 411) visible from the front side of the gaming machine. And an optical plate 410),
The light guide means,
At least a predetermined flat plate portion (for example, an upper flat plate portion or a lower flat plate portion),
A front side portion that is formed continuously from the flat plate-shaped portion and is located on the front side of the gaming machine with respect to the first effect means (for example, an upper inverted R-shaped portion, a normal R-shaped portion, or a lower inverted R-shaped portion), Equipped with
The light emitting means is
A gaming machine H1 arranged at a position corresponding to the predetermined portion in the flat plate-shaped portion.

According to the gaming machine H1, the first effect means makes it possible to execute the first effect relating to the game, and the second effect means makes it possible to execute the second effect related to the first effect. Further, the light emitting means provided in the second rendering means is provided with a light emitting section for emitting light, and the light guiding means also provided in the second rendering means causes the light emitted from the light emitting means to enter from a predetermined portion. In this case, the predetermined information regarding the game is configured to be visible from the front side of the gaming machine. Here, the light guide means is provided with at least a predetermined flat plate-shaped portion and a front side portion which is formed continuously from the flat plate-shaped portion and is located on the front side of the game machine with respect to the first effect means. Then, the light emitting means is arranged at a position corresponding to a predetermined portion of the flat plate-shaped portion. That is, the light is configured to be incident on the light guide means from a predetermined portion of the flat plate-shaped portion instead of the portion corresponding to the front side portion existing on the front side of the first rendering means. This is because when light is attempted to enter the light guide means from the front side portion, the traveling direction of the incident light changes depending on the front side portion, and it is difficult or impossible to express the predetermined information in a desired manner. There is a risk. Further, the light emitting portion and the like must be arranged (correspondingly) along the shape of the front side portion, which may reduce the degree of freedom in design. Further, the front side portion is located on the front side of the game machine of the first effect means, and when the light emitting portion and the like are arranged so as to correspond to the front side portion, the design of the second effect means (light guiding means). There is a risk of limiting the degree of freedom. Therefore, in the second effect means having the front side portion, the above problem is preferably solved by making the light enter from the part of the flat plate-shaped portion which is not the front side portion, and the degree of freedom in designing the second effect means is increased. The effect is that you can.

In the gaming machine H1,
The front side is
A gaming machine H2, which is an outer shape-related portion related to the outer shape of the first effect means.

According to the gaming machine H2, the following effects are produced in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine H1. That is, the front side portion is formed as an outer shape-related portion related to the outer shape of the first rendering means. This is because when light is made to enter the light guide means from the external shape-related portion, the advancing direction of the incident light is changed by the external shape-related portion, and the predetermined information cannot be expressed in a desired manner. It may be difficult to do. In addition, the light emitting portion and the like must be arranged (correspondingly) along the shape of the outer shape related portion, which may reduce the degree of freedom in design. Furthermore, the external shape-related part is located on the front side of the game machine of the first effect means, and when the light emitting part and the like are arranged so as to correspond to the external shape-related part, the second effect means (light guide means). There is a risk that the degree of freedom in designing may be restricted. With this, in the second rendering means having the outer shape-related portion related to the outer shape of the first rendering means, the light is incident from the portion of the flat plate-shaped portion that is not the outer shape-related portion, so that the above problem is preferably solved. However, there is an effect that the degree of freedom in designing the second effect means can be increased.

In the gaming machine H1 or H2,
The first effect means,
A gaming machine H3, characterized by comprising display means (for example, a drum display device 81) capable of dynamically displaying identification information based on the determination result by the determination means.

The gaming machine H3 has the following effect in addition to the effects of the gaming machine H1 or H2. That is, the display means provided in the first effecting means is capable of dynamically displaying the identification information based on the determination result by the determining means. As a result, when the outer shape-related portion of the second effecting means that executes the second effect related to the dynamic display of the identification information is formed in a shape related to the outer shape of the display means capable of executing the dynamic display. In addition, in the second rendering means having the outer shape-related portion, it is possible to suitably solve the above-mentioned problems and increase the degree of freedom in designing the second rendering means by allowing light to enter from the portion of the flat plate-shaped portion. effective.

In the gaming machine H3,
The display means is
A reel (for example, a left reel LR) in which a plurality of types of identification information that can be identified on the peripheral surface are arranged,
A cylindrical rotating body (for example, a left reel unit 81a1) that is rotatable about a rotating shaft that is concentric with the reel;
A game machine H4, comprising: a drive unit capable of rotationally driving the rotating body.

The gaming machine H4 has the following effect in addition to the effect of the gaming machine H3. That is, as the display means, a plurality of types of identification information, which can be respectively identified on the peripheral surface, are arranged on the reel, and are configured to be rotatable about a rotation axis that is concentric with the reel by a cylindrical rotating body. The rotating body is configured to be rotationally driven by the drive means. That is, since the display means is formed in a cylindrical shape around the rotation axis for rotating the reel, the outer shape-related portion of the second effecting means also has a shape related to the cylindrical shape (for example, a bent shape). ) Is formed. In this case, when an attempt is made to allow light to enter the light guide from the cylindrical outer shape-related portion, the incident light changes its traveling direction due to the outer shape-related portion, and the predetermined information is transmitted in a desired manner. It may not be possible or difficult to express. Therefore, in the second rendering means having the cylindrical outer shape-related portion, the above problem is preferably solved and the degree of freedom in designing the second rendering means is increased by making light enter from the portion of the flat plate-shaped portion. There is an effect that you can.

In any of the gaming machines H1 to H4,
An acquisition unit (for example, the reserved ball execution area 203f) that acquires special information (for example, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1) upon the establishment of a predetermined start condition,
A determining unit (for example, MPU 201) that makes a determination based on the special information acquired by the acquiring unit,
A gaming machine that gives a predetermined gaming value to a player based on a determination result by the determination means,
The external shape-related portion,
As the second effect, the first suggestion information (for example, the second decorative symbol group) as the predetermined information that can suggest the degree of expectation that a predetermined game value is given to the player based on the determination result by the determination means. 411) is configured to be executable, and a gaming machine H5.

According to the gaming machine H5, the following effects are produced in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines H1 to H4. That is, the acquisition unit acquires the special information triggered by the establishment of the predetermined starting condition, and the determination unit makes the determination based on the special information acquired by the acquisition unit. Further, a predetermined game value is given to the player based on the judgment result by the judgment means. Here, in the external shape-related portion, first suggestion information as predetermined information that can suggest the degree of expectation that a predetermined game value is given to the player is executed as the second effect based on the determination result by the determination means. Configured to be possible. Thereby, while performing the first effect in the first effect means, in the outer shape-related portion of the second effect means related to the outer shape of the first effect means, as a second effect indicating the degree of expectation that the game value is given. By arranging the first suggestion information to be executable, the effect of the first effect means and the effect of the second effect means can be enhanced respectively, and the attention to the game can be increased.

In the gaming machine H5,
The flat plate-shaped portion,
As the second effect, it is possible to execute the second suggestion information (for example, the fourth decorative symbol group 413) that can suggest that the degree of expectation that a predetermined game value is given to the player is higher than the first suggestion information. A gaming machine H6 characterized by being configured.

According to the gaming machine H6, the following effects are produced in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine H5. That is, in the flat plate-shaped portion, second suggestion information capable of suggesting that the degree of expectation that a predetermined game value is given to the player is higher than the first suggestion information can be executed as the second effect. As a result, it is possible to enhance the effect of the effect means by allowing the second effect means to express a plurality of suggestion information, thereby increasing the attention level of the game.

<Group I: R shape/reverse R shape, display 1 notice display up to switching point (design display area determination part), do not place design at the location where R shape is switched>
Conventionally, a lottery such as a win is performed based on the establishment of a predetermined start condition, and for example, when a win is won, a game in which a predetermined game medium is paid out to a player according to the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition. There is an opportunity.

This gaming machine is provided with a display unit capable of changing a design or the like visible from the front of the gaming machine, and a production unit such as a light emitting unit capable of changing a single color or a luminescent color. By changing the display mode of the rendering means, it is configured to enhance the rendering effect during the game (for example, Patent Document 1 (JP-A-2018-126296)).

For such a gaming machine, in order to improve the interest of the game, it is necessary to raise the attention of the game by enhancing the effect of the effecting means, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

The invention of the group I is made in view of the above circumstances, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of appropriately increasing the degree of attention to the game.

The production means (for example, the light guide unit 400) for performing a predetermined effect (for example, lighting or non-lighting of the first decorative symbol group 421) as the game progresses,
The production means is
A light emitting unit (for example, a lower LED unit) having a light emitting unit (for example, a rear lower LED 424) that emits light;
When the light emitted from the light emitting means is incident from a predetermined portion, a light guide means (for example, a rear side) that makes the predetermined information regarding the game (for example, the first decorative symbol group 421) visible from the front side of the gaming machine. And a light guide plate 420),
The light guide means,
At least a predetermined flat plate portion (for example, an upper flat plate portion or a lower flat plate portion),
A first bent shape part (for example, an upper inverted R shape part or a lower inverted R shape part) bent in a predetermined direction from the flat plate shape part;
A second bent shape portion (for example, a regular R shape portion) bent from the first bent shape portion in a direction opposite to the predetermined direction,
The predetermined information is
A gaming machine I0, which is provided at a position avoiding a switching portion between the first bent shape portion and the second bent shape portion.

According to the gaming machine I0, the effect means gives a predetermined effect as the game progresses. Further, when the light emitting means provided in the production means has a light emitting portion for emitting light and the light emitted from the light emitting means enters the light guiding means from a predetermined portion, predetermined information regarding the game is played. Can be seen from the front side of the gaming machine. The light guide means includes at least a predetermined flat plate-shaped portion, a first bent-shaped portion bent from the flat-plate shaped portion in a predetermined direction, and a second bent-shaped portion bent from the first bent-shaped portion in a direction opposite to the predetermined direction. The bent shape portion is provided, and the predetermined information is provided at a position avoiding a switching portion between the first bent shape portion and the second bent shape portion. As a result, by not arranging the predetermined information in the switching portion between the first bent shape portion and the second bent shape portion where the reflection of the light emitted into the light guide means may change irregularly, from the front side of the gaming machine. It is possible to prevent the predetermined information from appearing unintentionally. As a result, it is possible to appropriately express the predetermined information, execute a production without discrepancies, and accurately suggest information about the game to the player, so that the attention of the game can be increased. There is.

The production means (for example, the light guide unit 400) for performing a predetermined effect (for example, lighting or non-lighting of the first decorative symbol group 421) as the game progresses,
The production means is
A light emitting unit (for example, a lower LED unit) having a light emitting unit (for example, a rear lower LED 424) that emits light;
When the light emitted from the light emitting means is incident from a predetermined portion, a light guide means (for example, a rear side) that makes the predetermined information regarding the game (for example, the first decorative symbol group 421) visible from the front side of the gaming machine. And a light guide plate 420),
The light guide means,
At least a predetermined flat plate portion (for example, an upper flat plate portion or a lower flat plate portion),
A first bent shape portion (for example, an upper inverted R shape portion or a lower inverted R shape portion) which is continuously formed from the flat plate shaped portion and is bent in a predetermined direction (for example, the front side of the gaming machine);
A second bent shape portion (for example, a normal R shape portion) that is continuously formed from the first bent shape portion and is bent in a direction opposite to the predetermined direction (for example, the rear side of the gaming machine),
The light guide means,
A game machine I1 characterized in that the predetermined information is arranged at a position avoiding a switching portion (for example, a switching point P) between the first bending shape portion and the second bending shape portion.

According to the gaming machine I1, the effect means provides a predetermined effect as the game progresses. Further, when the light emitting means provided in the production means has a light emitting portion for emitting light and the light emitted from the light emitting means enters the light guiding means from a predetermined portion, predetermined information regarding the game is played. Can be seen from the front side of the gaming machine. Then, in the light guide means, at least a predetermined flat plate-shaped portion, a first bent-shaped portion which is continuously formed from the flat-plate-shaped portion and bent in a predetermined direction, and continuously from the first bent-shaped portion. A second bent shape portion that is formed and bent in a direction opposite to the predetermined direction is provided. Here, the predetermined information is arranged at a position avoiding the switching part between the first bent shape part and the second bent shape part in the light guide means. This is because the reflection angle of the light guided in the light guide means is not uniform on either surface of the light guide means at the switching portion between the first bent shape portion and the second bent shape portion, and the colliding light is collided. Is likely to be sparse (coarse), and even if the predetermined information is arranged in the switching part, the predetermined information is not properly expressed and the predetermined information cannot be visually recognized from the front side of the gaming machine at an appropriate timing. There is a risk. Further, the predetermined information is configured to be visible only by the light from the specified direction, whereas if the predetermined information is arranged in the switching portion, the direction in which it is originally not visible There is a possibility that the predetermined information can be visually recognized from the front side of the game machine by irradiating the light, and the predetermined information can be visually recognized at an unintended timing, which may cause a discrepancy in the effect contents. Therefore, the predetermined information is not placed in the switching portion between the first bent shape portion and the second bent shape portion where the reflection of the light irradiated into the light guide means may change irregularly, and the position where the switching portion is avoided By disposing the predetermined information in the, it is possible to prevent the predetermined information from appearing unintentionally from the front side of the gaming machine. As a result, it is possible to appropriately express the predetermined information, execute a production without discrepancies, and accurately suggest information about the game to the player, so that the attention of the game can be increased. There is.

In the gaming machine I1,
The light guide means,
A gaming machine I2, wherein the first predetermined information as the predetermined information is arranged across the flat plate-shaped portion and the first bent-shaped portion.

According to the gaming machine I2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine I1, the following effects are achieved. That is, the first predetermined information as the predetermined information is arranged across the flat plate-shaped portion and the first bent-shaped portion of the light guide means. The light guided in the flat plate-shaped portion of the light guide means is likely to have a uniform reflection angle, and even in the first bent shape portion continuously formed from the light, the light guided from the flat plate-shaped portion is to some extent. The light is evenly guided. As a result, there is an effect that it is possible to raise the degree of attention to the game by appropriately expressing the predetermined information and accurately suggesting the information about the game to the player.

In the gaming machine I1 or I2,
The light guide means,
Second predetermined information different from the first predetermined information (for example, a second decorative pattern group 411) is arranged in the second bent shape portion,
The second predetermined information is
A gaming machine I3, which is arranged so as not to straddle the first bent shape portion.

According to the gaming machine I3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine I1 or I2, the following effects are achieved. That is, in the light guide means, second predetermined information different from the first predetermined information is arranged in the second bent shape portion, and the second predetermined information is arranged so as not to straddle the first bent shape portion. The light guided in the second bent shape portion of the light guide means has a stable reflection angle, while the light guided from the continuously formed first bent shape portion via the switching portion is as described above. As described above, the reflection angles are not uniform, and the amount of colliding light tends to be sparse (coarse). Therefore, by appropriately expressing the second predetermined information arranged within the range of the second bent shape portion where the reflection angle of the guided light is stable, and accurately suggesting information about the game to the player, There is an effect that the degree of attention to the game can be increased.

In gaming machine I3,
A predetermined information lottery means (for example, MPU 221) for performing a lottery on the execution of suggestion by the predetermined information based on the determination result by the determination means,
The light guide means,
Based on the lottery result of the predetermined information lottery means, the suggestion by the predetermined information is configured to be executable,
The predetermined information is
The second predetermined information is configured to be able to suggest to the player that the second predetermined information has a higher degree of expectation that the predetermined game value will be given, than the first predetermined information.
The light emitting means is
A first light emitting unit (for example, front right LED 415c and front left LED 416c) that emits light in a predetermined first direction (for example, left-right direction);
A second light emitting portion (for example, a front lower LED 414c) that emits light in a second direction (for example, an upward direction) different from the first direction,
The light guide means,
When the light emitted from the first light emitting unit is incident from a predetermined first portion (for example, a flat plate portion below the front light guide plate 410 and an end face in the left-right direction of the lower inverted R-shaped portion), the first predetermined information. Is visible from the front side of the gaming machine, and the light emitted from the second light emitting portion is from a second portion different from the first portion (for example, the lower end surface of the flat plate portion below the front light guide plate 410). When incident, the second predetermined information is made visible from the front side of the gaming machine,
The production means is at least
And a directivity improving unit (for example, a front right condenser lens 415d or a front left condenser lens 416d) that enhances the directivity of the light emitted from the first light emitting unit. Gaming machine I4.

According to the gaming machine I4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine I3, the following effects are produced. That is, the predetermined information lottery means performs lottery for suggestion based on the predetermined information based on the determination result of the determination means. Then, based on the lottery result of the predetermined information lottery means, the suggestion by the predetermined information can be executed by the light guide means. Further, the second predetermined information is configured to be able to suggest to the player that the second predetermined information has a higher degree of expectation that a predetermined game value will be given than the first predetermined information. Here, the first light emitting unit provided in the light emitting unit emits light in a predetermined first direction, and the second light emitting unit also provided in the light emitting unit emits light in a second direction different from the first direction. Is irradiated. Further, in the light guide means, when the light emitted from the first light emitting portion is incident from a predetermined first portion, the first predetermined information is configured to be visible from the front side of the gaming machine and emitted from the second light emitting portion. When the emitted light is incident from the second part different from the first part, the second predetermined information is configured to be visible from the front side of the gaming machine. Then, the directivity of the light emitted from the first light emitting unit is at least enhanced by the directivity improving unit provided in the rendering unit. Thereby, when the light guide means is provided with a plurality of predetermined information, at least the first predetermined information that can suggest to the player that the degree of expectation that a predetermined game value is given is lower than the second predetermined information is suggested. Even when it is executed by the light guide unit, the light emitted from the first light emitting unit is accurately emitted to the position where the first predetermined information is provided and does not reach the position where the second predetermined information is provided. By making it difficult to do so, it is possible to prevent the second predetermined information from being made visible by the light emitted from the first light emitting unit. As a result, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of production discrepancies, to accurately suggest information about the game to the player, and to increase the attention to the game.

In any of the gaming machines I2 to I4,
The first predetermined information is
In the light guide unit, a position where an optical path of light emitted in the first direction and an optical path of light emitted in the second direction intersect (for example, a lower flat plate portion of the front light guide plate 410 and a lower inverted R shape). A game machine I5.

According to the gaming machine I5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines I2 to I4, the following effects are produced. That is, the first predetermined information is provided in the light guide means at a position where the optical path of the light emitted in the first direction and the optical path of the light emitted in the second direction intersect. That is, the first predetermined information capable of suggesting to the player that the degree of expectation that a predetermined game value is given is lower than the second predetermined information is the light emitted from both the first light emitting unit and the second light emitting unit. Is formed on the optical path of. Here, even if the first predetermined information becomes visible due to the light for the second predetermined information, the light for the second predetermined information is given a predetermined game value from the first predetermined information. The second predetermined information having a high degree of expectation is made visible, and even if the first predetermined information becomes visible when the second predetermined information becomes visible, there is little discrepancy in production. .. Thereby, the degree of expectation that a predetermined game value is given to the portion where the optical path of the light in the second direction with respect to the second predetermined information and the optical path of the light in the first direction corresponding to the first predetermined information intersect are second. By providing the first predetermined information lower than the predetermined information, even if the first predetermined information becomes visible from the front side of the gaming machine at an unintended timing, the discrepancy in the production is minimized, There is an effect that it is possible to provide the player with a game that is comfortable to the player.

In gaming machine I4 or I5,
The production means is
A gaming machine I6, which is provided with a second directivity improving means (for example, a front lower condensing lens 414d) that enhances the directivity of the light emitted from the second light emitting section.

The gaming machine I6 has the following effect in addition to the effects of the gaming machine I4 or I5. That is, the directivity of the light emitted from the second light emitting unit is enhanced by the second directivity improving unit provided in the rendering unit. Thereby, when a plurality of predetermined information is provided in the effector, the effector executes the second predetermined effect capable of suggesting to the player that the degree of expectation that a predetermined game value is given is higher than that of the first predetermined information. Even in the case, by irradiating the light emitted from the second light emitting unit to the position where the second predetermined information is accurately provided so that the second predetermined information can be visually recognized from the front side of the gaming machine, There is an effect that information can be accurately suggested to the player and the degree of attention to the game can be increased.

In any of the gaming machines I4 to I6,
The light guide means,
Light emitted toward the first direction is easily emitted to the front side of the gaming machine, and light emitted toward the second direction is not emitted to the front side of the gaming machine or is difficult to emit. A part (for example, a vertical groove forming each bubble pattern of the fourth decorative symbol group 413),
Light emitted toward the second direction is easily emitted to the front side of the gaming machine, and light emitted toward the first direction is not emitted to the front side of the gaming machine or is difficult to emit. A part (for example, a sunfish symbol of the third decorative symbol 412 or a lateral groove forming each cherry symbol symbol group of the second decorative symbol group 411), and a gaming machine I7.

According to the gaming machine I7, the following effects are produced in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines I4 to I6. That is, the light emitted in the first direction is easily emitted or emitted toward the front side of the gaming machine by the first emission portion provided in the light guide unit, and the light emitted in the second direction is emitted. It is configured so that it does not emit to the front side of the gaming machine or is hard to be emitted. In addition, the light emitted in the second direction is easily emitted or emitted toward the front side of the gaming machine by the second emitting portion provided in the light guide unit, and the light emitted in the first direction is emitted. It is configured so that it does not emit to the front side of the gaming machine or is hard to be emitted. That is, the rendering means makes the first predetermined information visible by the light from the first direction and makes the second predetermined information invisible or difficult, and makes the second predetermined information visible by the light from the second direction. On the other hand, by making the first predetermined information invisible or difficult, a plurality of predetermined information can be expressed even by one effect means. Thereby, even when a plurality of predetermined information is provided in the effect production means, each of the predetermined information can be distinguished and made visible by controlling the light emission of the first light emitting unit or the second light emitting unit, There is an effect that it is possible to increase the degree of attention to the game by increasing the effect of the effecting means by allowing the effecting means to express a plurality of predetermined information.

<Group J: Cover for preventing abnormal lighting due to light from the front side of the strong notice light guide plate (sunfish/foam light guide plate, slit part of display area forming member)>
Conventionally, a lottery such as a win is performed based on the establishment of a predetermined start condition, and for example, when a win is won, a game in which a predetermined game medium is paid out to a player according to the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition. There is an opportunity.

This gaming machine is provided with a display unit capable of changing a design or the like visible from the front of the gaming machine, and a production unit such as a light emitting unit capable of changing a single color or a luminescent color. By changing the display mode of the rendering means, it is configured to enhance the rendering effect during the game (for example, Patent Document 1 (JP-A-2018-126296)).

For such a gaming machine, in order to improve the interest of the game, it is necessary to raise the attention of the game by enhancing the effect of the effecting means, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

The invention of the group J is made in view of the above circumstances, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of appropriately increasing the degree of attention to the game.

A first effect means (for example, a light guide unit 400) that performs a first effect (for example, lighting or non-lighting of the first decorative symbol group 421) as the game progresses,
And a second effect means (for example, the confirmation lamp unit 310) for performing a second effect (for example, lighting or non-lighting of the confirmation lamp 311) different from the first effect as the game progresses,
The first effect means,
A first light emitting means (for example, a lower LED unit 414) having a first light emitting portion (for example, a rear lower LED 424) that emits light;
When the light emitted from the light emitting means is incident from a predetermined portion, a light guide means (for example, a rear side) that makes the predetermined information regarding the game (for example, the first decorative symbol group 421) visible from the front side of the gaming machine. And a light guide plate 420),
The second effect means,
A second light emitting unit (for example, the confirmation lamp 311) having a second light emitting unit (for example, an LED for lighting the confirmation lamp 311) for emitting light,
Between the predetermined information and the second light emitting means, a cover portion (for example, a lens cut 432) that reduces light from the second light emitting means with respect to the light guide means is provided, and a game characterized by the above. Machine J0.

According to the gaming machine J0, the first effect is performed by the first effect means as the game progresses. Also, the second effect means performs a second effect different from the first effect as the game progresses. And the 1st light emission means provided in the 1st production|generation means has the 1st light emission part which light-emits, and the light emitted from the 1st light emission means injects into a light guide means from a predetermined site|part. In this case, the predetermined information regarding the game can be viewed from the front of the game machine. Further, the second light emitting means provided in the second effect production means has a second light emitting portion which emits light. Here, the light from the second light emitting means with respect to the light guide means is reduced by the cover part provided between the predetermined information and the second light emitting means. As a result, it is possible to suppress malfunction of the predetermined information due to irradiation of the predetermined information with the light from the second light emitting means, and to suppress the occurrence of production discrepancies due to the abnormal expression to accurately provide the player with information regarding the game. There is an effect that it is possible to raise the attention degree to the game.

In a gaming machine provided with a first effect (for example, a light guide unit 400) capable of performing a first effect (for example, lighting or non-lighting of the first decorative symbol group 421) as the game progresses,
The first effect means,
A first light emitting means (for example, a lower LED unit 414) having a first light emitting portion (for example, a rear lower LED 424) that emits light;
When the light emitted from the first light emitting means is incident from a predetermined portion, first light guide means that makes predetermined information regarding the game (for example, the first decorative symbol group 421) visible from the front side of the gaming machine ( For example, the rear light guide plate 420),
A gaming machine J1 comprising a cover section (for example, a lens cut 432) that reduces the amount of light with respect to the position where the predetermined information is provided in the light guide unit.

According to the gaming machine J1, the first effect means can execute the first effect as the game progresses. Further, the first light emitting means provided in the first effecting means is provided with a first light emitting section for emitting light, and when the light emitted from the first light emitting means enters from a predetermined portion, The first light guide means provided in the rendering means makes it possible to visually recognize the predetermined information regarding the game from the front side of the gaming machine. Here, the cover section reduces light to the position where the predetermined information is provided in the first light guide means. Thereby, it is possible to suppress the malfunction of the predetermined information due to the irradiation of the predetermined information with light from other than the first light emitting means, and to suppress the occurrence of the production discrepancy due to the abnormal expression to the player to receive the information about the game. There is an effect that it can be accurately suggested and the degree of attention to the game can be increased.

In gaming machine J1,
Second production means (for example, the confirmation lamp unit 310) capable of executing a second production different from the first production (for example, lighting or non-lighting of the confirmation lamp 311) as the game progresses, the second production The means is
A second light emitting unit (for example, the confirmation lamp 311) having a second light emitting unit (for example, an LED for lighting the confirmation lamp 311) for emitting light,
The cover portion is
A game machine J2, which is arranged between the second light emitting means and the predetermined information.

The gaming machine J2 has the following effect in addition to the effect of the gaming machine J1. That is, the second effect means allows the second effect different from the first effect to be executed as the game progresses. Further, the second light emitting means provided in the second effecting means is provided with a second light emitting section for emitting light. Then, the cover portion is arranged between the second light emitting means and the predetermined information. Accordingly, it is possible to prevent malfunction of the predetermined information due to the light from the second light emitting means being applied to the predetermined information in a state where the first light emitting means is not emitting light, and to prevent the production discrepancy due to the abnormal expression. By suppressing the information, there is an effect that information about the game can be accurately suggested to the player, and the degree of attention to the game can be increased.

In gaming machine J2,
The gaming machine J3, wherein the second light emitting means emits light stronger than the emission brightness of the first light emitting means when the second effect is executed.

The gaming machine J3 has the following effect in addition to the effect of the gaming machine J2. That is, the second light emitting means emits light having a higher intensity than the emission brightness of the first light emitting means when the second effect is executed. That is, when the second light emitting means emits light, the predetermined information in the first effecting means may be affected. Therefore, in a state where the first light emitting means is not emitting light, it is possible to suppress a malfunction of the predetermined information due to the light from the second light emitting means being applied to the predetermined information, and to prevent the production discrepancy due to the abnormal expression. By suppressing the information, there is an effect that information about the game can be accurately suggested to the player, and the degree of attention to the game can be increased.

In any of the gaming machines J1 to J3,
The cover portion is
A game machine J4, which is arranged on the front side of the game machine with respect to the first effect means.

According to the gaming machine J4, the following effects are produced in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines J1 to J3. That is, the cover portion is arranged on the front side of the game machine with respect to the first effect means. Accordingly, the light from the front side of the game machine, which is emitted by the illumination of the game hall and the effect on the other game machine, is reduced by the cover portion, and the light other than the first light emitting means is emitted to the predetermined information. It is possible to suppress the malfunction of predetermined information due to that, and to suppress the occurrence of production discrepancies due to abnormal expressions, it is possible to accurately suggest information about the game to the player and increase the attention to the game. effective.

In any of the gaming machines J1 to J4,
Third light emitting means (for example, lower LED unit 414) having a third light emitting portion (for example, front lower LED 414c) for emitting light;
When the light emitted from the third light emitting means is incident from a predetermined second portion, second predetermined information regarding the game (for example, the second decorative symbol group 411) is made visible from the front side of the gaming machine. A light guide means (for example, a front light guide plate 410),
The gaming machine J5, wherein the cover portion is the second light guide means.

According to the gaming machine J5, the following effects are produced in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines J1 to J4. That is, the third light emitting unit is provided with a third light emitting unit that emits light, and when the light emitted from the third light emitting unit enters from a predetermined second portion, the second light guiding unit causes the game to be played. The second predetermined information regarding is configured to be visible from the front side of the gaming machine. Here, the second light guide means is used as the cover part. As a result, the second light guide unit configured to make the second predetermined information visible is configured as a cover unit to reduce light to the position where the predetermined information is arranged in the first light guide unit. With this, the second light guide unit provided with the second predetermined information can suppress malfunction of the predetermined information due to irradiation of light from other than the first light emitting unit on the predetermined information, and a plurality of effects can be produced. By suppressing the occurrence of the production discrepancy due to the abnormal expression while executing the game, it is possible to accurately suggest the information about the game to the player and increase the attention to the game.

<K group: 1 light guide plate has strong and weak effects, and at least irradiation for weak areas has high anisotropy (good straightness, no diffusion, condenser lens)>
Conventionally, a lottery such as a win is performed based on the establishment of a predetermined start condition, and for example, when a win is won, a game in which a predetermined game medium is paid out to a player according to the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition. There is an opportunity.

This gaming machine is provided with a display unit capable of changing a design or the like visible from the front of the gaming machine, and a production unit such as a light emitting unit capable of changing a single color or a luminescent color. By changing the display mode of the rendering means, it is configured to enhance the rendering effect during the game (for example, Patent Document 1 (JP-A-2018-126296)).

For such a gaming machine, in order to improve the interest of the game, it is necessary to raise the attention of the game by enhancing the effect of the effecting means, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

The invention of the K group has been made in view of the above circumstances, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of appropriately increasing the degree of attention to the game.

An acquisition unit (for example, the reserved ball execution area 203f) that acquires lottery information (for example, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1) upon the establishment of a predetermined starting condition.
Determination means (for example, MPU201) that makes a determination based on the lottery information acquired by the acquisition means,
Based on the determination result by the determination means, in a gaming machine that gives a player a predetermined game value,
Based on the determination result by the determination means, at least first suggestion information (for example, a fourth decorative symbol group 413) capable of suggesting to the player the degree of expectation that the predetermined game value is given, or the first. Suggestion information lottery means (for example, MPU 221) that draws the execution of the second suggestion information (for example, the third decorative pattern 412) capable of suggesting to the player that the degree of expectation that the predetermined game value is given is higher than the suggestion information. )When,
Based on the lottery result of the suggestion information lottery means, the production means capable of executing the first suggestion information or the second suggestion information (for example, the light guide unit 400),
The production means is
A first light emitting means (for example, front right LED 415c or front left LED 416c) capable of irradiating the first suggestion information with light;
A second light emitting means (for example, a front lower LED 414c) capable of irradiating the second suggestion information with light;
When the first light emitting means emits light, the first suggestion information is made visible from the front side of the gaming machine, and when the second light emitting means emits light, the second suggestive information is obtained from the front side of the gaming machine. A light guide means (for example, the front light guide plate 410) that is visible,
At least, a condensing unit that condenses the light from the first light emitting unit and irradiates the first suggestion information (for example, a front right condensing lens 415d or a front left condensing lens 416d). A gaming machine K0 that is characterized by:

According to the gaming machine K0, the acquisition means acquires the lottery information when the predetermined start condition is satisfied, and the determination means makes the determination based on the lottery information acquired by the acquisition means. Then, a predetermined game value is given to the player based on the judgment result by the judging means. Here, the suggestion information lottery means, based on the determination result by the determining means, at least the first suggestion information capable of suggesting to the player the degree of expectation that a predetermined game value is given, or a predetermined value based on the first suggestion information. The execution of the second suggestion information capable of suggesting to the player that the degree of expectation that the game value will be given is high is drawn. Then, based on the lottery result of the suggestion information lottery means, the effector is configured to execute the first suggestion information or the second suggestion information. Here, the first light emitting means provided in the rendering means is configured to be able to emit light to the first suggestion information, and the second light emitting means also provided in the rendering means responds to the second suggestion information. It is configured to be able to emit light. The light guide means allows the first suggestion information to be visually recognized from the front side of the gaming machine when the first light emitting means emits light, and the second suggestion information when the second light emitting means emits light. Can be seen from. Here, at least the light from the first light emitting means is condensed by the condensing means and is irradiated to the first suggestion information. Thereby, when the first suggestion information provided in one light guide means can be visually recognized by the light emission of the first light emitting means, the light of the first light emitting means is condensed by the condensing means, and the same light guide is performed. It is possible to irradiate only the first suggestion information with light without irradiating the second suggestion information provided in the means with light. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the malfunction of the second suggestion information when making the first suggestion information visible, and to accurately suggest information about the game to the player by suppressing the occurrence of the production discrepancy due to the abnormal expression, There is an effect that the degree of attention to the game can be increased.

An acquisition unit (for example, the reserved ball execution area 203f) that acquires special information (for example, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1) upon the establishment of a predetermined start condition,
Determination means (for example, MPU 201) that makes a determination based on the special information acquired by the acquisition means,
Based on the determination result by the determination means, in a gaming machine that gives a player a predetermined game value,
A suggestion information lottery means (for example, MPU 221) that draws the suggestion by suggestive information that can suggest the degree of expectation that a predetermined game value is given to the player based on the determination result by the determination means,
Based on the lottery result of the suggestion information lottery means, the production means capable of executing the suggestion by the suggestion information (for example, the light guide unit 400),
The suggestive information is at least
The first suggestion information (for example, the fourth decorative symbol group 413) capable of suggesting a predetermined degree of expectation that the predetermined game value is given to the player, and the predetermined game value is given from the first suggestion information. And second suggestion information (for example, a third decorative pattern 412) capable of suggesting to the player that the degree of expectation is high.
A first light emitting means (for example, front right LED 415c or front left LED 416c) capable of irradiating the first suggestion information with light;
A second light emitting means (for example, a front lower LED 414c) capable of irradiating the second suggestion information with light;
When the first light emitting means emits light, the first suggestion information is made visible from the front side of the gaming machine, and when the second light emitting means emits light, the second suggestion information is obtained from the front side of the gaming machine. A light guide means (for example, the front light guide plate 410) that is visible,
A gaming machine K1 characterized in that the directivity of the light emitted from the first light emitting means is higher than the directivity of the light emitted from the second light emitting means.

According to the gaming machine K1, the acquisition means acquires the special information triggered by the establishment of the predetermined start condition, and the determination means makes the determination based on the special information acquired by the acquisition means. Further, a predetermined game value is given to the player based on the judgment result by the judgment means. Here, based on the determination result by the determination means, the suggestion information lottery means performs a lottery to perform suggestion by suggestive information capable of suggesting a degree of expectation that a predetermined game value is given to the player, and the suggestion information lottery means. Based on the result of the lottery, the suggestion is configured to be executable by the rendering means. Then, as the suggestion information, at least the first suggestion information capable of suggesting to the player a predetermined expectation degree that a predetermined game value is imparted, and the expectation degree that a predetermined game value is imparted from the first suggestion information. Second suggestion information capable of suggesting a high price to the player is provided. Here, the first light emitting means provided in the production means emits light to the first suggestion information, and the second light emitting means also provided in the production means emits light to the second suggestion information. To be done. When the first light emitting means emits light, the first suggestion information is made visible from the front side of the gaming machine by the light guide means provided in the rendering means, and when the second light emitting means emits light, the second suggestion information is displayed. The suggestion information is made visible from the front side of the gaming machine. Here, the directivity of the light emitted from the first light emitting means is configured to be higher than the directivity of the light emitted from the second light emitting means. When it is attempted to make the first suggestion information, which has a lower expectation of being given a predetermined game value than the second suggestion information, it is provided in the same light guide means, and the predetermined game value is given from the first suggestion information. If the second suggestion information that indicates that the expected degree to be performed is high becomes visible, there is a possibility that the effect content may be inconsistent and the game performance according to the game specification may not be realized. Therefore, at least by increasing the directivity of light with respect to the first suggestion information having a low expectation that a predetermined game value is provided, and irradiating the first suggestion information without diffusing the light, There is an effect that it is possible to display only the 1 suggestion information at an appropriate timing, and it is possible to make it difficult for the discrepancy in the effect contents to occur.

In the gaming machine K1,
At least a first directivity improving unit that enhances the directivity of the light emitted from the first light emitting unit and irradiates the first suggestion information (for example, the front right-side condenser lens 415d or the front left-side condenser lens 415d). A lens 416d), and a gaming machine K2.

The gaming machine K2 has the following effect in addition to the effects of the gaming machine K1. That is, at least the directivity of the light emitted from the first light emitting means is enhanced by the first directivity improving means, and the first suggestion information is emitted. When it is attempted to make the first suggestion information, which has a lower expectation of being given a predetermined game value than the second suggestion information, it is provided in the same light guide means, and the predetermined game value is given from the first suggestion information. If the second suggestion information that indicates that the expected degree to be performed is high becomes visible, there is a possibility that the effect content may be inconsistent and the game performance according to the game specification may not be realized. Therefore, at least the light for the first suggestion information having a low degree of expectation that a predetermined game value is given is enhanced by the first directivity improving means and is radiated toward the first suggestion information without being diffused. By doing so, it is possible to display only the first suggestion information at an appropriate timing, and it is possible to make it difficult for the discrepancy in the effect contents to occur.

In the gaming machine K1 or K2,
A second directivity improving unit (for example, a front-side lower condenser lens 414d) that enhances the directivity of the light emitted from the second light emitting unit and irradiates the second suggestion information. A gaming machine K3.

According to the gaming machine K3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine K1 or K2, the following effects are produced. That is, the second directivity improving means enhances the directivity of the light emitted from the second light emitting means and irradiates the second suggestion information. Thus, in the light guide unit provided with the two pieces of suggestion information, the light for each piece of suggestion information is configured not to be diffused by each condensing unit, so that each piece of suggestion information can be displayed at an appropriate timing. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the discrepancy in the effect contents from occurring.

In gaming machines K1 to K3,
A second effect means (for example, a drum display device 81) capable of executing a predetermined effect related to the game,
The light guide means,
At least a predetermined flat plate portion (for example, an upper flat plate portion or a lower flat plate portion),
A front side portion which is formed continuously from the flat plate-shaped portion and is located on the front side of the game machine with respect to the second effect means (for example, an upper inverted R-shaped portion, a normal R-shaped portion or a lower inverted R-shaped portion), Equipped with
The first light emitting means,
Disposed at a position corresponding to a predetermined first portion of the flat plate-shaped portion,
The second light emitting means,
A gaming machine K4, which is disposed at a position corresponding to a second part different from the first part in the flat plate-shaped part.

According to the gaming machine K4, the following effects are produced in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines K1 to K3. That is, the second effect means is configured to be able to execute a predetermined effect related to the game. Further, the light guide means is provided with at least a predetermined flat plate-shaped portion and a front side portion which is formed continuously from the flat plate-shaped portion and is located on the front side of the gaming machine with respect to the second effect producing means. Then, the first light emitting means is arranged at a position corresponding to a predetermined first portion in the flat plate-shaped portion, and the second light emitting means is arranged at a position corresponding to a second portion different from the first portion in the flat plate shaped portion. Is set up. That is, the light is configured to be incident on the light guide means not from the front side portion but from each portion of the flat plate-shaped portion. This is because when light is attempted to enter the light guide means from the front side portion located on the front side of the gaming machine with respect to the second effect means, the incident light changes its traveling direction by the front side portion. There is a possibility that the predetermined information cannot be expressed in a desired manner or is difficult to express. Further, the light emitting means and the like must be arranged (correspondingly) along the shape of the front side portion, which may reduce the degree of freedom in design. Therefore, in the light guide means having the front side portion, it is possible to preferably solve the above-mentioned problems and increase the degree of freedom in designing the light guide means by allowing light to enter from the respective parts of the flat plate-shaped portion. effective.

In the gaming machine K4,
The front side is
A gaming machine K5, which is an outer shape-related portion related to the outer shape of the second effect means.

According to the gaming machine K5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine K4, the following effects are produced. That is, the front side portion is formed as an outer shape-related portion related to the outer shape of the second rendering means. This is because when light is attempted to be incident on the light guide means from the outer shape-related portion, the advancing direction of the incident light changes due to the outer shape-related portion, and the suggestion information cannot be expressed in a desired manner. It may be difficult to do. In addition, the light emitting portion and the like must be arranged (correspondingly) along the shape of the outer shape related portion, which may reduce the degree of freedom in design. Further, the outer shape-related portion is configured to have a shape that conforms to the outer shape of the second effect means, and when the light-emitting portion or the like is arranged so as to correspond to the outer shape-related portion, the first effect means (light guide). There is a risk of limiting the degree of freedom in designing the means). Thereby, in the first effect means having the outer shape-related portion related to the outer shape of the second effect means, the light is incident from the part of the flat plate-shaped portion which is not the outer shape-related portion, thereby suitably solving the above problem. However, there is an effect that the degree of freedom in designing the first effect means can be increased.

<L group: 1 light guide plate with strong/weak effect, at least high intensity irradiation is isotropic (diffuse lens, 3-way lens)>
Conventionally, a lottery such as a win is performed based on the establishment of a predetermined start condition, and for example, when a win is won, a game in which a predetermined game medium is paid out to a player according to the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition. There is an opportunity.

This gaming machine is provided with a display unit capable of changing a design or the like visible from the front of the gaming machine, and a production unit such as a light emitting unit capable of changing a single color or a luminescent color. By changing the display mode of the rendering means, it is configured to enhance the rendering effect during the game (for example, Patent Document 1 (JP-A-2018-126296)).

For such a gaming machine, in order to improve the interest of the game, it is necessary to raise the attention of the game by enhancing the effect of the effecting means, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

The invention of the L group has been made in view of the above circumstances, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of appropriately increasing the degree of attention to the game.

An acquisition unit (for example, the reserved ball execution area 203f) that acquires lottery information (for example, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1) upon the establishment of a predetermined starting condition.
Determination means (for example, MPU201) that makes a determination based on the lottery information acquired by the acquisition means,
Based on the determination result by the determination means, in a gaming machine that gives a player a predetermined game value,
Based on the determination result by the determination means, at least first suggestion information (for example, a fourth decorative symbol group 413) capable of suggesting to the player the degree of expectation that the predetermined game value is given, or the first. Suggestion information lottery means (for example, MPU 221) that draws the execution of the second suggestion information (for example, the third decorative pattern 412) capable of suggesting to the player that the degree of expectation that the predetermined game value is given is higher than the suggestion information. )When,
Based on the lottery result of the suggestion information lottery means, the production means capable of executing the first suggestion information or the second suggestion information (for example, the light guide unit 400),
The production means is
A first light emitting means (for example, front right LED 415c or front left LED 416c) capable of irradiating the first suggestion information with light;
A second light emitting means (for example, a front lower LED 414c) capable of irradiating the second suggestion information with light;
When the first light emitting means emits light, the first suggestion information is made visible from the front side of the gaming machine, and when the second light emitting means emits light, the second suggestive information is obtained from the front side of the gaming machine. A light guide means (for example, the front light guide plate 410) that is visible,
At least a diffusing unit (for example, a rear upper diffusing lens 423 or a rear lower diffusing lens 425) that diffuses the light from the second light emitting unit and irradiates the second suggestion information. Characteristic gaming machine L0.

According to the gaming machine L0, the acquisition means acquires the lottery information when the predetermined start condition is satisfied, and the determination means makes the determination based on the lottery information acquired by the acquisition means. Then, a predetermined game value is given to the player based on the judgment result by the judging means. Here, the suggestion information lottery means, based on the determination result by the determining means, at least the first suggestion information capable of suggesting to the player the degree of expectation that a predetermined game value is given, or a predetermined value based on the first suggestion information. The execution of the second suggestion information capable of suggesting to the player that the degree of expectation that the game value will be given is high is drawn. Then, based on the lottery result of the suggestion information lottery means, the effector is configured to execute the first suggestion information or the second suggestion information. Here, the first light emitting means provided in the rendering means is configured to be able to emit light to the first suggestion information, and the second light emitting means also provided in the rendering means responds to the second suggestion information. It is configured to be able to emit light. The light guide means allows the first suggestion information to be visually recognized from the front side of the gaming machine when the first light emitting means emits light, and the second suggestion information when the second light emitting means emits light. Can be seen from. Here, at least the light from the second light emitting means is diffused by the diffusing means, and the second suggestion information is irradiated. As a result, the second suggestion information important for the game is surely illuminated with light so that it can be clearly recognized, so that information about the game can be accurately suggested to the player, and the attention to the game is increased. The effect is that you can.

An acquisition unit (for example, the reserved ball execution area 203f) that acquires special information (for example, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1) upon the establishment of a predetermined start condition,
Determination means (for example, MPU 201) that makes a determination based on the special information acquired by the acquisition means,
Based on the determination result by the determination means, in a gaming machine that gives a player a predetermined game value,
A suggestion information lottery means (for example, MPU221) that draws lots of execution of suggestion information that can suggest the degree of expectation that a predetermined game value is given to the player based on the determination result by the determination means,
Based on the lottery result of the suggestion information lottery means, the production means capable of executing the suggestion by the suggestion information (for example, the light guide unit 400),
The suggestive information is at least
The first suggestion information (for example, the fourth decorative symbol group 413) capable of suggesting a predetermined degree of expectation that the predetermined game value is given to the player, and the predetermined game value is given from the first suggestion information. And second suggestion information (for example, a third decorative pattern 412) capable of suggesting to the player that the degree of expectation is high.
A first light emitting means (for example, front right LED 415c or front left LED 416c) capable of irradiating the first suggestion information with light;
A second light emitting means (for example, a front lower LED 414c) capable of irradiating the second suggestion information with light;
When the first light emitting means emits light, the first suggestion information is made visible from the front side of the gaming machine, and when the second light emitting means emits light, the second suggestion information is obtained from the front side of the gaming machine. A light guide means (for example, the front light guide plate 410) that is visible,
At least a diffusing unit (for example, a third upper diffusing lens 473) for diffusing light from the second light emitting unit and irradiating the second suggestion information, a gaming machine L1.

According to the gaming machine L1, the acquisition means acquires the special information triggered by the establishment of the predetermined start condition, and the determination means makes the determination based on the special information acquired by the acquisition means. Further, a predetermined game value is given to the player based on the judgment result by the judgment means. Here, based on the determination result by the determination means, the suggestion information lottery means performs a lottery to perform suggestion by suggestive information capable of suggesting a degree of expectation that a predetermined game value is given to the player, and the suggestion information lottery means. Based on the lottery result, the suggestion information is configured to be executable by the rendering means. Then, as the suggestion information, at least the first suggestion information capable of suggesting to the player a predetermined expectation degree that a predetermined game value is imparted, and the expectation degree that a predetermined game value is imparted from the first suggestion information. Second suggestion information capable of suggesting a high price to the player is provided. Here, the first light emitting means provided in the production means emits light to the first suggestion information, and the second light emitting means also provided in the production means emits light to the second suggestion information. To be done. When the first light emitting means emits light, the first suggestion information is made visible from the front side of the gaming machine by the light guide means provided in the rendering means, and when the second light emitting means emits light, the second suggestion information is displayed. The suggestion information is made visible from the front side of the gaming machine. Here, at least the light from the second light emitting means is diffused by the diffusing means, and the second suggestion information is irradiated. Since the second suggestion information is an effect that is expected to be given a predetermined game value at least higher than the first suggestion information, the second suggestion information is comprehensively irradiated with light by the diffusion means, 2 It is necessary for the player to clearly recognize the suggestion information. Further, when making the first suggestion information visible, if the second suggestion information having a higher expectation that a predetermined game value is given than the first suggestion information is made visible, a production discrepancy may occur. When making the second suggestion information visible, even if the first suggestion information, which has a lower expectation of being given a predetermined game value than the second suggestion information, becomes visible, the player keeps the predetermined indication. Focusing on the execution of the second suggestion information having a high expectation of a game value, and not paying much attention to the execution of the first suggestion information having a low expectation of a predetermined game value. No discrepancies are likely to occur. Therefore, by adopting the diffusing means for the second suggestion information that is highly expected to be given a predetermined game value, it is possible to enhance the effect of the light guide means and increase the degree of attention to the game. effective.

In the gaming machine L1,
Directivity improving means for increasing the directivity of the light emitted from the first light emitting means and irradiating the first suggestion information (for example, a third rightward condenser lens 475b and a third leftward condenser lens 476b). ), and a gaming machine L2.

The gaming machine L2 has the following effect in addition to the effect of the gaming machine L1. That is, the directivity improving means increases the directivity of the light emitted from the first light emitting means and irradiates the first suggestion information. When it is attempted to make the first suggestion information, which has a lower expectation of being given a predetermined game value than the second suggestion information, it is provided in the same light guide means, and the predetermined game value is given from the first suggestion information. If the second suggestion information that indicates that the expected degree to be performed is high becomes visible, there is a possibility that the effect content may be inconsistent and the game performance according to the game specification may not be realized. Therefore, at least the light for the first suggestion information having a low expectation that a predetermined game value is given is radiated toward the first suggestion information without being diffused by the directivity improving means. There is an effect that it is possible to display only the 1 suggestion information at an appropriate timing, and it is possible to prevent the discrepancy in the effect contents from occurring.

In the gaming machine L1 or L2,
A second effect means (for example, a drum display device 81) capable of executing a predetermined effect related to the game,
The light guide means,
At least a predetermined flat plate portion (for example, an upper flat plate portion or a lower flat plate portion),
A front side portion which is formed continuously from the flat plate-shaped portion and is located on the front side of the game machine with respect to the second effect means (for example, an upper inverted R-shaped portion, a normal R-shaped portion or a lower inverted R-shaped portion), Equipped with
The first light emitting means,
Disposed at a position corresponding to a predetermined first portion of the flat plate-shaped portion,
The second light emitting means,
A gaming machine L3, which is disposed at a position corresponding to a second portion different from the first portion in the flat plate-shaped portion.

The gaming machine L3 has the following effect in addition to the effect of the gaming machine L1 or L2. That is, the second effect means is configured to be able to execute a predetermined effect related to the game. Further, the light guide means is provided with at least a predetermined flat plate-shaped portion and a front side portion which is formed continuously from the flat plate-shaped portion and is located on the front side of the gaming machine with respect to the second effect producing means. Then, the first light emitting means is arranged at a position corresponding to a predetermined first portion in the flat plate-shaped portion, and the second light emitting means is arranged at a position corresponding to a second portion different from the first portion in the flat plate shaped portion. Is set up. That is, the light is configured to be incident on the light guide means not from the front side portion but from each portion of the flat plate-shaped portion. This is because when light is attempted to enter the light guide means from the front side portion located on the front side of the gaming machine with respect to the second effect means, the incident light changes its traveling direction by the front side portion. There is a possibility that the predetermined information cannot be expressed in a desired manner or is difficult to express. Further, the light emitting means and the like must be arranged (correspondingly) along the shape of the front side portion, which may reduce the degree of freedom in design. Therefore, in the light guide means having the front side portion, it is possible to preferably solve the above-mentioned problems and increase the degree of freedom in designing the light guide means by allowing light to enter from the respective parts of the flat plate-shaped portion. effective.

In the gaming machine L3,
The front side is
A gaming machine L4, which is an outer shape-related portion related to the outer shape of the second effect means.

The gaming machine L4 has the following effect in addition to the effect of the gaming machine L3. That is, the front side portion is formed as an outer shape-related portion related to the outer shape of the second rendering means. This is because when light is attempted to be incident on the light guide means from the outer shape-related portion, the advancing direction of the incident light changes due to the outer shape-related portion, and the suggestion information cannot be expressed in a desired manner. It may be difficult to do. In addition, the light emitting portion and the like must be arranged (correspondingly) along the shape of the outer shape related portion, which may reduce the degree of freedom in design. Further, the outer shape-related portion is configured to have a shape that conforms to the outer shape of the second effect means, and when the light-emitting portion or the like is arranged so as to correspond to the outer shape-related portion, the first effect means (light guide). There is a risk of limiting the degree of freedom in designing the means). Thereby, in the first effect means having the outer shape-related portion related to the outer shape of the second effect means, the light is incident from the part of the flat plate-shaped portion which is not the outer shape-related portion, thereby suitably solving the above problem. However, there is an effect that the degree of freedom in designing the first effect means can be increased.

<M group: a plurality of light guide plates, at least a light guide plate with diffusion means>
Conventionally, a lottery such as a win is performed based on the establishment of a predetermined start condition, and for example, when a win is won, a game in which a predetermined game medium is paid out to a player according to the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition. There is an opportunity.

This gaming machine is provided with a display unit capable of changing a design or the like visible from the front of the gaming machine, and a production unit such as a light emitting unit capable of changing a single color or a luminescent color. By changing the display mode of the rendering means, it is configured to enhance the rendering effect during the game (for example, Patent Document 1 (JP-A-2018-126296)).

For such a gaming machine, in order to improve the interest of the game, it is necessary to raise the attention of the game by enhancing the effect of the effecting means, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

The invention of the M group has been made in view of the above circumstances, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of appropriately increasing the degree of attention to the game.

First effect means (for example, the rear upper LED unit 422) that performs the first effect as the game progresses,
And a second effect means (for example, the front right LED unit 415) that performs a second effect different from the first effect as the game progresses,
The first effect means,
A first light emitting means for emitting light (for example, a rear upper LED 422c);
When the light emitted from the first light emitting means is incident from a predetermined first portion, first predetermined information regarding the game (eg, the first decorative symbol group 421) is visually recognized from the front side of the gaming machine as the first effect. A first light guide means (for example, a rear light guide plate 420) that enables the
The second effect means,
Second light emitting means for emitting light (for example, front right LED 415c),
When the light emitted from the second light emitting means is incident from a predetermined second portion, the second predetermined information regarding the game (for example, the fourth decorative symbol group 413) is visually recognized from the front side of the gaming machine as the second effect. A second light guide means (for example, the front light guide plate 410) that enables the
At least a diffusion unit (for example, a rear upper diffusion lens 423 or a rear lower diffusion lens 425) that diffuses the light from the second light emitting unit and irradiates the second predetermined information is provided. Gaming machine M0.

According to the gaming machine M0, the first effect means gives the first effect as the game progresses, and the second effect means gives the second effect different from the first effect as the game progresses. Here, when light is emitted by the first light emitting means provided in the first rendering means, and in the first light guiding means, the light emitted from the first light emitting means enters from a predetermined first portion, As the first effect, the first predetermined information regarding the game can be visually recognized from the front side of the gaming machine. Further, when light is emitted by the second light emitting means provided in the second effecting means and the light emitted from the second light emitting means is incident from the predetermined second portion in the second light guide means, As the second effect, the second predetermined information regarding the game can be visually recognized from the front side of the game machine. Here, at least the light emitted by the second light emitting means is diffused by the diffusing means, and the second predetermined information is irradiated. Thereby, there is an effect that the second effect regarding the second predetermined information can be flashed by the irradiation of the light diffused by the diffusing means, and the degree of attention to the game can be increased.

First effect means (eg, front right LED unit 415) capable of executing the first effect as the game progresses,
A second effect means (for example, a rear upper LED unit 422) capable of executing a second effect different from the first effect as the game progresses,
The first effect means,
A first light emitting means for emitting light (for example, front right LED 415c);
When the light emitted from the first light emitting means is incident from a predetermined first portion, first predetermined information regarding a game (for example, a second decorative symbol group 411) is visually recognized from the front side of the game machine as the first effect. A first light guide means (for example, the front light guide plate 410) that enables the
The second effect means,
Second light emitting means for emitting light (for example, rear upper LED 422c);
When the light emitted from the second light emitting means is incident from a predetermined second portion, second predetermined information regarding the game (for example, the first decorative symbol group 421) is visually recognized from the front side of the gaming machine as the second effect. A second light guide means (for example, a rear light guide plate 420) that enables the
At least a diffusing unit (for example, a rear-side upper diffusing lens 423) for diffusing light from the second light emitting unit and irradiating the second predetermined information, the gaming machine M1.

According to the gaming machine M1, the first effect means is configured to be able to execute the first effect as the game progresses, and the second effect means provides the second effect different from the first effect as the game progresses. It is configured to be executable. Here, when light is emitted by the first light emitting means provided in the first rendering means, and in the first light guiding means, the light emitted from the first light emitting means enters from a predetermined first portion, As the first effect, the first predetermined information regarding the game can be visually recognized from the front side of the gaming machine. Further, when light is emitted by the second light emitting means provided in the second effecting means and the light emitted from the second light emitting means is incident from the predetermined second portion in the second light guide means, As the second effect, the second predetermined information regarding the game can be visually recognized from the front side of the game machine. Here, at least the light emitted by the second light emitting means is diffused by the diffusing means, and the second predetermined information is irradiated. Thereby, the second effect regarding the second predetermined information can be flashed by the irradiation of the light diffused by the diffusing means, and the degree of attention to the game can be increased.

In the gaming machine M1,
The second effect is
A gaming machine M2, which is a production having a higher expectation that a predetermined game value is given to the first production.

According to the gaming machine M2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine M1, the following effects are produced. That is, the second effect is set as an effect having a higher expectation that a predetermined game value will be given to the second effect. Thereby, by adopting the diffusing means for the second suggestion information, which is highly expected to be given a predetermined game value, it is possible to enhance the effect of the light guide means and increase the attention to the game. There is an effect.

In the gaming machine M1 or M2,
The predetermined part is
A predetermined end of the second light guide means,
The diffusion means is
A game machine M3, which is integrally formed at a predetermined end of the second light guide means.

According to the gaming machine M3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine M1 or M2, the following effects are produced. That is, the predetermined portion is the predetermined end portion of the second light guide means, and the diffusion means is integrally formed with the predetermined end portion of the second light guide means. As a result, in the second rendering means, the second light guide means and the diffusing means are integrally formed, and the number of parts is reduced, so that the degree of freedom in designing the second rendering means can be increased. There is.

In any of the gaming machines M1 to M3,
As the first effect,
A predetermined first predetermined effect (for example, a fourth decorative symbol group 413),
A first specific effect (for example, a second decorative symbol group 411) having a higher expectation that a predetermined game value is given to the first predetermined effect,
The first effect means,
It is characterized by comprising directivity improving means (for example, the front right condenser lens 415d or the front left condenser lens 416d) for enhancing the directivity of the light emitted from the first light emitting means. Gaming machine M4.

According to the gaming machine M4, the following effects are produced in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines M1 to M3. That is, as the first effect, a predetermined first predetermined effect and a first specific effect having a higher degree of expectation that a predetermined game value is given to the first predetermined effect are provided. Then, the directivity of the light emitted from the first light emitting means is enhanced by the directivity improving means provided in the first effect production means. Thereby, when the first effect means is configured to be able to execute a plurality of first effects, the light emitted from the first light emitting means is accurately applied to the position where the desired first effect is provided, and the other first effect is applied. By making it difficult or difficult to reach the position where the first effect is provided, it is possible to prevent the undesired first effect from being visible due to the light emitted from the first light emitting means. As a result, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of production discrepancies, to accurately suggest information about the game to the player, and to increase the attention to the game.

<N group: Pseudo stop symbol display control corresponding to the symbol arrangement>
Conventionally, a lottery such as a win is performed based on the establishment of a predetermined start condition, and for example, when a win is won, a game in which a predetermined game medium is paid out to a player according to the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition. There is an opportunity.

This gaming machine is provided with a display unit capable of changing a design or the like visible from the front of the gaming machine, and a production unit such as a light emitting unit capable of changing a single color or a luminescent color. By changing the display mode of the rendering means, it is configured to enhance the rendering effect during the game (for example, Patent Document 1 (JP-A-2018-126296)).

For such a gaming machine, in order to improve the interest of the game, it is necessary to raise the attention of the game by enhancing the effect of the effecting means, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

The invention of the N group is made in view of the above circumstances, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of appropriately increasing the degree of attention to the game.

An acquisition unit (for example, the reserved ball execution area 203f) that acquires lottery information (for example, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1) upon the establishment of a predetermined starting condition.
Determination means (for example, MPU201) that makes a determination based on the lottery information acquired by the acquisition means,
Dynamic execution means (for example, display control device 114) for dynamically displaying the identification information on the display means (for example, drum display device 81) based on the determination result by the determination means;
In a gaming machine that gives a predetermined game value to a player when a predetermined display result appears in the dynamic display executed by the dynamic execution means,
The display means is
Three rotating members (for example, a left reel LR, a middle reel CR, and a right reel RR) in which a plurality of types of the identification information are arranged,
Rotation driving means (for example, a motor) for rotating and rotating the rotating members,
Drive control means (for example, MPU of the display control device 114) for controlling the rotation drive means,
The rotating member is
A common rotating member (for example, a left reel LR and a right reel RR) configured only by the identification information common to the rotating members,
A non-common turning member (for example, a middle reel CR) including non-common identification information not included in the common turning member,
The drive control means,
A step changing means (for example, reach formation pattern is "5") for changing the previous step identification information forming a combination of the identification information in the previous step of the predetermined display result (for example, "reach display") → "6" → "7" change),
The step change means,
When changing the preceding stage identification information stepwise, changing the combination of the preceding stage identification information so as not to include the non-common identification information included in the non-common rotation member. Machine N0.

According to the gaming machine N0, the acquisition means acquires the lottery information when the predetermined start condition is satisfied, and the determination means makes the determination based on the lottery information acquired by the acquisition means. Then, based on the determination result by the determination unit, the dynamic execution unit dynamically displays the identification information on the display unit. In addition, when a predetermined display result appears in the dynamic display executed by the dynamic execution means, a predetermined game value is given to the player. Here, the display means is provided with three rotating members in which a plurality of types of identification information are arranged, the rotating members are driven to rotate by the rotation driving means, and the drive controlling means causes the rotating drive means to operate. Controlled. Then, as the rotating means, the common rotating member is configured only by the identification information common to the rotating member, and the non-common rotating member is configured including the non-common identification information not included in the common rotating member. To be done. Here, the previous-stage identification information forming a combination of the previous-stage identification information of the predetermined display result is changed stepwise by the step change means provided in the drive control means. Then, when the step changer changes the previous step identification information stepwise, the combination of the previous step identification information is changed so that the non-common identification information included in the non-common rotation member is not included. As a result, it is possible to execute a production that does not cause a production discrepancy and that does not cause a sense of discomfort, and it is possible to increase the degree of attention to the game.

<Na group: Excludes reach forming pattern by non-common identification information>
An acquisition unit (for example, the reserved ball execution area 203f) that acquires special information (for example, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1) upon the establishment of a predetermined start condition,
Determination means (for example, MPU 201) that makes a determination based on the special information acquired by the acquisition means,
Dynamic execution means (for example, display control device 114) that dynamically displays identification information on the rendering means (for example, drum display device 81) based on the determination result by the determination means;
In a gaming machine that gives a predetermined game value to a player when a predetermined display result appears in the dynamic display executed by the dynamic execution means,
The production means is
At least two or more rotating means (for example, left reel LR, middle reel CR, and right reel RR) in which a plurality of types of identification information are arranged,
Rotation driving means (for example, a stepping motor 600) for rotating each of the rotation means,
Drive control means (for example, MPU of the display control device 114) for controlling the rotation drive means,
The rotating means is
Common rotation means (for example, left reel LR and right reel RR) in which common identification information which is the common identification information is arranged,
Non-common turning means (for example, a middle reel CR) in which the common identification information and non-common identification information not included in the array of the common turning means are arranged,
The drive control means,
Step change means for changing stepwise the pre-stage identification information forming the combination of the identification information of the previous step of the predetermined display result (for example, "reach display") (for example, reach formation pattern is "1"). → "2" → "3" change),
The step change means,
When changing the preceding stage identification information stepwise, changing the combination of the preceding stage identification information so as not to include the non-common identification information included in the non-common rotation means. Machine Na1.

According to the gaming machine Na1, the acquisition unit acquires the special information when the predetermined starting condition is satisfied, and the determination unit makes the determination based on the special information acquired by the acquisition unit. Also, based on the determination result by the determination means, the dynamic execution means dynamically displays the identification information in the rendering means, and the predetermined display result is displayed in the dynamic display executed by the dynamic execution means. When issued, the player is given a predetermined game value. Here, the production means is provided with at least two or more rotation means in which a plurality of types of identification information are arranged, and the rotation means is rotated by the rotation drive means and rotated by the drive control means. The dynamic drive means is controlled. Further, the rotating means is arranged with common rotating means in which common identifying information, which is a common identifying method, is arranged, and common identifying information and non-common identifying information not included in the arrangement of the common rotating means. And a non-common rotation means. Then, the preceding stage identification information forming the combination of the preceding stage identification information of the predetermined display result is revealed by the preceding stage appearance means provided in the drive control means, and the step change also provided in the drive control means. By the means, the previous stage information is changed step by step. Here, when the previous step identification information is changed stepwise by the step changing means, the combination of the previous step information is changed so as not to include the non-common identification information included in the non-common rotation means. Accordingly, when the previous-stage identification information is changed stepwise, by causing the previous-stage identification information based on the non-common identification information that cannot exist other than the non-common rotation means not to appear, a discrepancy in performance occurs. There is an effect that it is possible to suppress the fact that the player feels uncomfortable and is aroused, and to improve the interest of the game.

In the gaming machine Na1, at least the common rotation means is
The identification information is arranged to form a predetermined permutation (eg, ascending or descending order of numbers),
The step change means,
A gaming machine Na2, wherein the combination of the preceding stage identification information is changed so as to correspond to the predetermined permutation.

The gaming machine Na2 has the following effect in addition to the effect of the gaming machine Na1. That is, at least the common rotation means is arranged so that the identification information forms a predetermined permutation. Then, the step change means changes the combination of the previous step identification information so as to correspond to the predetermined permutation. Thereby, in the case of changing the previous stage identification information stepwise so as to correspond to the predetermined permutation, by not causing the previous stage identification information by the non-common identification information that cannot exist other than the non-common rotation means to appear, There is an effect that it is possible to suppress the occurrence of discrepancies in the production, prevent the player from feeling awkward and arousing, and improve the interest of the game.

In the gaming machine Na1 or Na2,
The dynamic execution means is
No matter which of the identification information appears in the common rotation means, a dynamic display that continues the dynamic display when the non-common identification information appears in the non-common rotation means. A gaming machine Na3 characterized by comprising a continuation means.

The gaming machine Na3 has the following effect in addition to the effects of the gaming machine Na1 or Na2. That is, no matter what identification information appears in the common rotation means, when the non-common identification information appears in the non-common rotation means, the dynamic continuation provided in the dynamic execution means is performed. By means, the dynamic display is continued. As a result, it is possible to create a playability in which the dynamic display is continued depending on whether or not the non-common identification information appears, and to pay attention to the rotation mode of the non-common rotation means to improve the enjoyment of the game. There is an effect that you can.

In the gaming machine Na3,
The dynamic display means,
A predetermined first effect,
And a second effect in which the predetermined display result is more likely to appear than the first effect,
The dynamic continuation means is
A gaming machine Na4, wherein the second effect is executed when the non-common identification information appears in the non-common rotation means.

According to the gaming machine Na4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine Na3, the following effects are produced. That is, the dynamic display unit is configured to be able to execute the predetermined first effect and the second effect in which the predetermined display result is more likely to appear than the first effect, and the non-common identification information in the non-common rotation means. When appears, the second effect is executed by the dynamic continuation means. This creates a game in which the second effect in which the predetermined display result is easily displayed is executed depending on whether or not the non-common identification information appears, and the non-common identification is performed in the rotation of the non-common rotation means. There is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved by paying attention to whether or not the information appears.

In any of the gaming machines Na1 to Na4,
The dynamic execution means is
In the dynamic display, a plurality of the identification information can be revealed by one of the rotating means, and two common rotating means can be stopped before the non-common rotating means. Then
The common rotation means is
The arrangement order (for example, descending order) of the common identification information in the one common rotation unit and the arrangement order (for example, ascending order) of the common identification information in the other common rotation unit are arranged in reverse order. A gaming machine Na5 characterized by that.

According to the gaming machine Na5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines Na1 to Na4, the following effects are produced. That is, in the dynamic display, the dynamic execution means is configured such that a plurality of pieces of identification information can appear in one rotating means, and the two common rotating means are stopped before the non-common rotating means. The common rotation means is arranged so that the arrangement order of the common identification information in one common rotation means is opposite to the arrangement order of the common identification information in the other common rotation means. There is. This makes it possible to generate a plurality of pre-stage identification information in the common turning means that can be stopped first, and to enrich the variation of the appearance position of one pre-stage identification information. The effect is that it can be improved.

In any of the gaming machines Na1 to Na5,
The non-common rotation means,
At least one of the identification information is arranged in the same arrangement order (for example, ascending order) as the arrangement order (for example, ascending order) of the identification information in one of the common rotating means.

The gaming machine Na6 has the following effect in addition to the effects of the gaming machines Na1 to Na5. That is, in the non-common rotation means, at least the identification information is arranged in the same arrangement order as the arrangement order of the identification information in one common rotation means. This makes it possible to share the appearance order of the identification information in the one common rotation means and the non-common rotation means, and to make it easier for the player to recognize the appearance order of the identification information. effective.

In any of the gaming machines Na2 to Na6,
The non-common identification information is
A gaming machine Na7 arranged in the middle of the predetermined permutation in the non-common rotation means.

The gaming machine Na7 has the following effect in addition to the effects of the gaming machines Na2 to Na6. That is, the non-common identification information is arranged in the middle of the predetermined permutation in the non-common rotation means. Thereby, regarding the appearance of the non-common identification information not included in the common rotation means, unexpectedness is created in the predetermined arrangement of the identification information in the non-common rotation means, the variation of the game is enriched, and the interest of the game is improved. There is an effect that can be achieved.

<Nb group: Excludes reach forming symbols due to identification information that has a large profit that can be given to the player>
An acquisition unit (for example, the reserved ball execution area 203f) that acquires special information (for example, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1) upon the establishment of a predetermined start condition,
Determination means (for example, MPU 201) that makes a determination based on the special information acquired by the acquisition means,
Dynamic execution means (for example, display control device 114) that dynamically displays identification information on the rendering means (for example, drum display device 81) based on the determination result by the determination means;
In a gaming machine that gives a predetermined game value to a player when a predetermined display result appears in the dynamic display executed by the dynamic execution means,
The production means is
At least two or more rotating means (for example, left reel LR, middle reel CR, and right reel RR) in which a plurality of types of identification information are arranged,
Rotation driving means (for example, a stepping motor 600) for rotating each of the rotation means,
Drive control means (for example, MPU of the display control device 114) for controlling the rotation drive means,
The drive control means,
Pre-stage revealing means for revealing pre-stage identification information forming a combination of the identification information in the previous stage of the predetermined display result (for example, "reach display"),
Step changing means for changing the previous step information stepwise (for example, the reach formation pattern is changed to "1" → "2" → "3"),
The identification information is
When it appears as the predetermined display result, first identification information (for example, "2" symbol) that can give a predetermined first profit to the player,
When it appears as the predetermined display result, the player is provided with second identification information (for example, a “7” symbol) capable of giving the player a second profit larger than the first profit,
The step change means,
A game machine Nb1, wherein a combination of the preceding stage identification information is changed so as not to include the preceding stage identification information by the second identification information while changing the preceding stage identification information stepwise.

According to the gaming machine Nb1, the acquisition unit acquires the special information triggered by the establishment of the predetermined start condition, and the determination unit makes the determination based on the special information acquired by the acquisition unit. Also, based on the determination result by the determination means, the dynamic execution means dynamically displays the identification information in the rendering means, and the predetermined display result is displayed in the dynamic display executed by the dynamic execution means. When issued, the player is given a predetermined game value. Here, the production means is provided with at least two or more rotation means in which a plurality of types of identification information are arranged, and the rotation means is rotated by the rotation drive means and rotated by the drive control means. The dynamic drive means is controlled. Further, the pre-stage identification information forming a combination of the pre-stage identification information of the predetermined display result is presented by the pre-stage revealing means provided in the drive control means, and the stage change also provided in the drive control means. By the means, the previous stage information is changed step by step. Here, when the identification information appears as a predetermined display result, first identification information that can give a predetermined first profit to the player, and when it appears as a predetermined display result, the game Second identification information capable of giving a second profit larger than the first profit to the person. Then, the step changing means changes the combination of the previous step information so that the previous step information by the second identification information is not included while the previous step identification information is stepwise changed. As a result, when the pre-stage identification information is changed stepwise, the second identification information that can give a greater profit to the player than the first identification information can be changed step by step. By not revealing, it is possible to suppress the excitement to the game due to the player's feeling that the profit that can be given is reduced, and to improve the interest of the game.

In the gaming machine Nb1, the rotating means is
The identification information is arranged to form a predetermined permutation (eg, ascending or descending order of numbers),
The step change means,
A gaming machine Nb2, wherein a combination of the preceding stage identification information is changed so as to correspond to the predetermined permutation.

The gaming machine Nb2 has the following effect in addition to the effects of the gaming machine Nb1. That is, the identification information is arranged on the rotating means so as to form a predetermined permutation. Then, the step change means changes the combination of the previous step identification information so as to correspond to the predetermined permutation. As a result, when the previous-stage identification information is changed stepwise so as to correspond to the predetermined permutation, the second identification information that can give a greater profit to the player than the first identification information can be changed stepwise. By not showing the middle stage of the stage identification information, it is possible to suppress the excitement to the game due to the player's feeling that the profit that can be given is reduced, and to improve the interest of the game.

In the gaming machine Nb1 or Nb2,
The rotating means is
Alternate arrangement means for alternately arranging the first identification information and the second identification information (for example, a portion of “1”→“2”→“3” or “5”→“6”→“7”). →"8" portion), a gaming machine Nb3.

The gaming machine Nb3 has the following effect in addition to the effect of the gaming machine Nb1 or Nb2. That is, in the alternating arrangement means of the rotating means, the first identification information and the second identification information are arranged alternately. As a result, when the first identification information and the second identification information are alternately displayed in the dynamic display to enrich the variation of the game and the previous identification information is changed stepwise, the first identification information By making the second identification information, which can give a greater profit to the player, the intermediate stage of the previous stage identification information that can change in stages, the player feels that the profit that can be given is reduced. There is an effect that it is possible to suppress the excitement to the game and improve the interest of the game.

In any of the gaming machines Nb1 to Nb3,
The step change means,
At least a second pre-stage identification information, which is the pre-stage identification information, is displayed, and then the first pre-stage identification information is rotated to form a part of the predetermined display result. The stage identification information is configured to be exposed,
The step change means,
A gaming machine Nb4, characterized in that, as the first front-stage identification information, the front-stage identification information based on the second identification information is not displayed.

The gaming machine Nb4 has the following effect in addition to the effects of the gaming machines Nb1 to Nb3. That is, after at least the predetermined first pre-stage identification information, which is the pre-stage information, is revealed by the stage changing means, the first pre-stage identification information is rotated to form a part of the predetermined display result. The second pre-stage identification information to be obtained is configured to be able to appear. Then, the stage changing means is configured so that the first stage identification information does not appear as the first stage identification information based on the second identification information. As a result, when the pre-stage identification information is changed stepwise, the second identification information that can give a greater profit to the player than the first identification information can be changed step by step. By not revealing, it is possible to suppress the excitement to the game due to the player's feeling that the profit that can be given is reduced, and to improve the interest of the game.

In the gaming machine Nb4,
The step change means,
A gaming machine Nb5, wherein the previous stage identification information based on the second identification information can be revealed as the second previous stage identification information.

The gaming machine Nb5 has the following effect in addition to the effects of the gaming machine Nb4. That is, the step changing means is configured to be able to present the previous step identification information based on the second identification information as the second previous step identification information. When the second identification information can appear as the previous identification information that constitutes a part of the predetermined display result, by exposing the previous identification information based on the second identification information that has a large profit that can be given to the player, There is an effect that the variety of games can be abundant, the profit that can be given to the player does not decrease, the arousal of the game can be suppressed, and the interest of the game can be improved.

In any of the gaming machines Nb1 to Nb5,
The dynamic execution means is
When it is determined by the determination means that the predetermined display result does not appear, it is configured such that it is difficult for the previous identification information based on the second identification information to appear.
A gaming machine Nb6, which is configured so as to easily reveal the preceding stage identification information based on the second identification information when the determination means determines that the predetermined display result appears.

The gaming machine Nb6 has the following effect in addition to the effects of the gaming machines Nb1 to Nb5. That is, when the dynamic execution means determines that the predetermined display result does not appear, the second stage identification information based on the second identification information is configured to be hard to appear, and the determination means determines the predetermined display result. When it is determined that the display result of 1 is displayed, the previous-stage identification information based on the second identification information is easily displayed. With this, at the stage where the previous stage identification information appears, it is possible to suggest the degree of expectation for a predetermined display result, and when changing the previous stage identification information stepwise while enriching the variation of the game, It is said that the profit that can be given to the player is reduced by not allowing the second identification information that can give a greater profit to the player than the first identification information to show the intermediate stage of the previous stage identification information that can change in stages. There is an effect that it is possible to suppress the excitement to the game caused by feeling and to improve the interest of the game.

<Nc group: Excludes reach formation pattern by identification information that triggers development production>
An acquisition unit (for example, the reserved ball execution area 203f) that acquires special information (for example, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1) upon the establishment of a predetermined start condition,
Determination means (for example, MPU 201) that makes a determination based on the special information acquired by the acquisition means,
Dynamic execution means (for example, display control device 114) that dynamically displays identification information on the rendering means (for example, drum display device 81) based on the determination result by the determination means;
In a gaming machine that gives a predetermined game value to a player when a predetermined display result appears in the dynamic display executed by the dynamic execution means,
The production means is
At least two or more rotating means (for example, left reel LR, middle reel CR, and right reel RR) in which a plurality of types of identification information are arranged,
Rotation driving means (for example, a stepping motor 600) for rotating each of the rotation means,
Drive control means (for example, MPU of the display control device 114) for controlling the rotation drive means,
The drive control means,
Pre-stage revealing means for revealing pre-stage identification information forming a combination of the identification information in the previous stage of the predetermined display result (for example, "reach display"),
Step changing means for changing the previous step information stepwise (for example, the reach forming pattern is changed to "1" → "2" → "3"),
The identification information is
When developed in a plurality of the rotating means, the development identification information (eg, "chance" symbol) that can be the previous stage information by the previous stage displaying means is provided,
The step change means,
A game machine Nc1 wherein a combination of the preceding stage identification information is changed so as not to include the preceding stage identification information based on the development identification information while changing the preceding stage identification information stepwise.

According to the gaming machine Nc1, the acquisition means acquires the special information triggered by the establishment of the predetermined starting condition, and the determination means makes the determination based on the special information acquired by the acquisition means. Also, based on the determination result by the determination means, the dynamic execution means dynamically displays the identification information in the rendering means, and the predetermined display result is displayed in the dynamic display executed by the dynamic execution means. When issued, the player is given a predetermined game value. Here, the production means is provided with at least two or more rotation means in which a plurality of types of identification information are arranged, and the rotation means is rotated by the rotation drive means and rotated by the drive control means. The dynamic drive means is controlled. Further, the pre-stage identification information forming a combination of the pre-stage identification information of the predetermined display result is presented by the pre-stage revealing means provided in the drive control means, and the stage change also provided in the drive control means. By the means, the previous stage information is changed step by step. Here, when the identification information is revealed by the plurality of rotating means, the development identification information is provided which can be the previous stage information by the previous stage displaying means. Then, the stage changing means changes the combination of the previous stage information so that the previous stage information based on the development identification information is not included while the previous stage identification information is being changed stepwise. Thereby, in the case of changing the previous-stage identification information stepwise, the development identification information that is only a part of the previous-stage identification information, by not revealing the intermediate step of the previous-stage identification information that can change stepwise, Despite the fact that the previous stage identification information has appeared, it is possible to suppress the excitement of the game due to the development identification information appearing and the progress of the production becomes unclear, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. effective.

In the gaming machine Nc1, the rotating means is
The identification information is arranged to form a predetermined permutation (eg, ascending or descending order of numbers),
The step change means,
A gaming machine Nc2, wherein a combination of the preceding stage identification information is changed so as to correspond to the predetermined permutation.

The gaming machine Nc2 has the following effect in addition to the effects of the gaming machine Nc1. That is, the identification information is arranged on the rotating means so as to form a predetermined permutation. Then, the step change means changes the combination of the previous step identification information so as to correspond to the predetermined permutation. As a result, when the previous-stage identification information is changed stepwise so as to correspond to the predetermined permutation, the development identification information that is only a part of the previous-stage identification information can be changed stepwise. By not revealing the stage identification information, it is possible to suppress the arousal of the game due to the development identification information appearing due to the development identification information appearing, and to improve the enjoyment of the game. The effect is that it can be achieved.

In the gaming machine Nc1 or Nc2,
The step change means,
At least a second pre-stage identification information, which is the pre-stage identification information, is displayed, and then the first pre-stage identification information is rotated to form a part of the predetermined display result. The stage identification information is configured to be exposed,
The step change means,
A gaming machine Nc3, wherein the previous stage identification information based on the development identification information is not displayed as the first previous stage identification information.

The gaming machine Nc3 has the following effect in addition to the effects of the gaming machine Nc1 or Nc2. That is, after at least the predetermined first pre-stage identification information, which is the pre-stage information, is revealed by the stage changing means, the first pre-stage identification information is rotated to form a part of the predetermined display result. The second pre-stage identification information to be obtained is configured to be able to appear. Then, the stage changing means is configured so that the previous stage identification information based on the development identification information does not appear as the first previous stage identification information. Thereby, in the case of changing the previous-stage identification information stepwise, the development identification information that is only a part of the previous-stage identification information, by not revealing the intermediate step of the previous-stage identification information that can change stepwise, Even if the stage identification information appears, it is possible to suppress the excitement of the game due to the development identification information appearing and the progress of the production becomes unclear, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. There is.

In the gaming machine Nc3,
The step change means,
A gaming machine Nc4, wherein the stage identification information based on the development identification information is not displayed as the second stage identification information.

The gaming machine Nc4 has the following effect in addition to the effects of the gaming machine Nc3. That is, the stage changing means is configured so that the previous stage identification information based on the development identification information does not appear as the second previous stage identification information. Accordingly, when the previous-stage identification information is changed stepwise, the development identification information which is only a part of the previous-stage identification information is changed to the second previous-stage identification which is the final step of the previous-stage identification information. By not showing information even, even if the stage identification information appears, the development identification information appears and suppresses the excitement of the game due to obscuring the progress of the production, improving the fun of the game There is an effect that can be achieved.

In any of the gaming machines Nc1 to Nc4,
The step change means,
A gaming machine Nc5, characterized in that, when the preceding stage identification information is changed stepwise, the development identification information is omitted and the combination of the preceding stage identification information is changed stepwise.

The gaming machine Nc5 has the following effect in addition to the effects of the gaming machines Nc1 to Nc4. That is, when the step changer changes the previous step identification information stepwise, the combination of the previous step identification information is stepwise changed by omitting the development identification information. As a result, when the pre-stage identification information is changed stepwise, the development identification information which is only a part of the pre-stage identification information is omitted from the pre-stage identification information that can be changed stepwise to change the pre-stage identification information. In this way, it is possible to suppress the excitement to the game due to the development identification information appearing in spite of the appearance of the previous-stage identification information and the progress of the production becomes unclear, and to improve the interest of the game. There is an effect that you can.

In any of the gaming machines Nc1 to Nc5,
The dynamic display means,
A predetermined first effect,
And a second effect in which the predetermined display result is more likely to appear than the first effect,
The dynamic execution means is
A gaming machine Nc6, wherein the second effect is executed when the development identification information appears in all of the rotating means.

The gaming machine Nc6 has the following effect in addition to the effects of the gaming machines Nc1 to Nc5. That is, the dynamic display means is configured to be able to execute a predetermined first effect and a second effect in which a predetermined display result is more likely to appear than the first effect, and the development identification information is provided in all the turning means. When it appears, the dynamic execution means executes the second effect. As a result, a game performance is created in which the second effect in which a predetermined display result is easily displayed is executed depending on whether or not the development identification information appears in all the turning means, and the development is performed in all the turning means. There is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved by paying attention to whether or not the identification information appears.

In the gaming machine Nc6,
The dynamic execution means is
A gaming machine Nc7, wherein at the stage where the development identification information appears as the previous stage identification information, the development does not progress to the second effect.

The gaming machine Nc7 has the following effect in addition to the effects of the gaming machine Nc6. That is, the dynamic execution means is configured not to develop into the second effect when the development identification information appears as the previous identification information. That is, unless the development identification information appears in all the rotating means, the second effect is not developed. As a result, a game performance is created in which the second effect in which a predetermined display result is easily displayed is executed depending on whether or not the development identification information appears in all the turning means, and the development is performed in all the turning means. There is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved by paying attention to whether or not the identification information appears.

<Group O: Delay synchronization control of the left symbol row at full rotation and measurement of sound>
Conventionally, a lottery such as a win is performed based on the establishment of a predetermined start condition, and for example, when a win is won, a game in which a predetermined game medium is paid out to a player according to the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition. There is an opportunity.

This gaming machine is provided with a display unit capable of changing a design or the like visible from the front of the gaming machine, and a production unit such as a light emitting unit capable of changing a single color or a luminescent color. By changing the display mode of the rendering means, it is configured to enhance the rendering effect during the game (for example, Patent Document 1 (JP-A-2018-126296)).

For such a gaming machine, in order to improve the interest of the game, it is necessary to raise the attention of the game by enhancing the effect of the effecting means, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

The invention of the O group has been made in view of the above circumstances, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of appropriately increasing the degree of attention to a game.

An acquisition unit (for example, the reserved ball execution area 203f) that acquires lottery information (for example, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1) upon the establishment of a predetermined starting condition.
Determination means (for example, MPU201) that makes a determination based on the lottery information acquired by the acquisition means,
Dynamic execution means (for example, display control device 114) for dynamically displaying the identification information on the display means (for example, drum display device 81) based on the determination result by the determination means;
In a gaming machine that gives a predetermined game value to a player when a predetermined display result appears in the dynamic display executed by the dynamic execution means,
The display means is
Three rotating members (for example, a left reel LR, a middle reel CR, and a right reel RR) in which a plurality of types of the identification information are arranged,
Rotation driving means (for example, a motor) for rotating and rotating the rotating members,
Drive control means (for example, MPU of the display control device 114) for controlling the rotation drive means,
The drive control means,
At least, in a state where the identification information of the two rotating members is aligned, two-member synchronous drive means for driving the rotating members while synchronizing (for example, the symbols of the middle reel CR and the right reel RR are aligned and synchronized). Fluctuation) and
The rotating member is synchronized in a state where the identification information of the rotating member that is rotationally driven while being synchronized by the two-member synchronizing drive unit and the identification information of the remaining one rotating member are aligned. And a three-member synchronous drive means (for example, synchronous fluctuations in which the symbols of the reels LR, CR, and RR are aligned) are driven,
A music synchronizing means for outputting music in synchronization with the rotational driving of the rotating member which is synchronously driven by the three-member synchronous driving means (for example, music output at a temporary stop during full rotation). Playing machine O0.

According to the gaming machine O0, the acquisition means acquires the lottery information when the predetermined start condition is satisfied, and the determination means makes the determination based on the lottery information acquired by the acquisition means. Then, based on the determination result by the determination unit, the dynamic execution unit dynamically displays the identification information on the display unit. In addition, when a predetermined display result appears in the dynamic display executed by the dynamic execution means, a predetermined game value is given to the player. Here, the display means is provided with three rotating members in which a plurality of types of identification information are arranged, the rotating members are driven to rotate by the rotation driving means, and the drive controlling means causes the rotating drive means to operate. Controlled. Then, in the drive control means, the rotating members are driven while being synchronized by the two-member synchronizing driving means with at least the identification information of the two rotating members being aligned, and the three-member synchronizing driving means performs the two-member synchronizing. The rotation member is driven in synchronization with the identification information of the rotation member that is rotationally driven in synchronization by the drive unit and the identification information of the remaining one rotation member being aligned. Here, the music synchronizing means outputs music in accordance with the rotational driving of the rotary member that is synchronously driven by the three-member synchronous driving means. As a result, there is an effect that a powerful and rhythmical effect can be executed and the degree of attention to the game can be increased.

An acquisition unit (for example, the reserved ball execution area 203f) that acquires special information (for example, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1) upon the establishment of a predetermined start condition,
Determination means (for example, MPU 201) that makes a determination based on the special information acquired by the acquisition means,
Dynamic execution means (for example, display control device 114) that dynamically displays identification information on the rendering means (for example, drum display device 81) based on the determination result by the determination means;
In a gaming machine that gives a predetermined game value to a player when a predetermined display result appears in the dynamic display executed by the dynamic execution means,
The production means is
At least two or more rotating means (for example, left reel LR, middle reel CR, and right reel RR) in which a plurality of types of identification information are arranged,
Rotation driving means (for example, a stepping motor 600) for rotating each of the rotation means,
Drive control means (for example, MPU of the display control device 114) for controlling the rotation drive means,
The drive control means,
First rotating means for rotating at least one of the rotating means (for example, rotating the middle reel CR and the right reel RR),
Second rotating means (for example, rotating the left reel LR) for rotating the other rotating means after one of the rotating means is rotated by the first rotating means,
Music output means for outputting music corresponding to the rotation of the rotation means rotated by the first rotation means and the second rotation means (for example, music output during temporary stop at full rotation) A gaming machine O1 characterized by comprising:

According to the gaming machine O1, special information is acquired by the acquisition means upon establishment of a predetermined starting condition, and the judgment is made by the judgment means based on the special information acquired by the acquisition means. Then, based on the judgment result by the judgment means, the dynamic execution means dynamically displays the identification information in the rendering means, and a predetermined display result appears in the dynamic display executed by the dynamic execution means. If so, a predetermined game value is given to the player. Here, the production means is provided with at least two or more rotating means in which a plurality of types of identification information are arranged, each of the rotating means is rotated by the rotating drive means, and the drive control means performs the rotational drive. The means are controlled. Further, at least one rotating means is rotated by the first rotating means provided in the drive control means, and the first rotating means is provided by the second rotating means also provided in the drive control means. After the turning means is turned, the other turning means is turned. Here, the music output means outputs the music corresponding to the rotation of the rotating means rotated by the first rotating means and the second rotating means. Thereby, the music is output so as to correspond to the rotation of the rotating means that is respectively rotated, and an effect with a sense of unity between the rotating means that is rotated and the output music is performed, and thus different timings are obtained. There is an effect that it is possible to suppress an uncomfortable feeling due to the turning of the turning means that is turned by and to raise the degree of attention to the game.

In the gaming machine O1,
The first rotation means is at least a two-means synchronization rotation means (for example, a middle reel CR and a right reel RR) that rotates while synchronizing the predetermined first identification information in the two rotation means in synchronization. (Synchronous fluctuations by aligning the pattern of),
The second rotating means is
Three-means synchronous rotation in which the first identification information that is rotated while being synchronized by the two-means synchronization rotation means and the first identification information in the other rotation means are synchronized while being synchronized A moving means (for example, the reels LR, CR, and RR are arranged in synchronization with each other to change the synchronization),
The music output means is
A music synchronizing means for outputting music corresponding to the start of rotation of the rotating means that is rotated in synchronization by the two-means synchronous rotating means and the three-means synchronous rotating means (for example, during full rotation). A game machine O2, which is provided with a music output at the time of temporary stop).

According to the gaming machine O2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine O1, the following effects are achieved. That is, the two-means synchronous rotation means provided in the first rotation means causes the two rotation means to rotate at the same time while synchronizing the predetermined first identification information. Also, the first identification information rotated by the two-means synchronous rotation means while being synchronized by the three-means synchronous rotation means provided in the second rotation means, and the first identification information in the other rotation means. It is rotated while synchronizing in the state of aligning. Then, the music is output by the music synchronizing means provided in the music outputting means so as to correspond to the start of rotation of the rotating means which is rotated in synchronization by the two-means synchronous rotating means and the three-means synchronous rotating means. To be done. As a result, the music is output so as to correspond to the rotation of the rotating means that is rotated in synchronization with each other, and an effect with a sense of unity between the rotating means that is rotated in synchronization and the output music is executed. By doing so, it is possible to suppress an uncomfortable feeling that may occur due to the rotation of the rotating means that is rotated at different timings, and to increase the degree of attention to the game.

In the gaming machine O1 or O2,
The first rotation means is
A gaming machine O3, wherein at least one of the rotating means is rotated from a state where all the rotating means are not rotated.

According to the gaming machine O3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine O1 or O2, the following effects are achieved. That is, at least one rotating means is rotated by the first rotating means from a state where all the rotating means are not rotated. With this, by outputting the music corresponding to the start of the rotation of the one rotating means, the music is output so as to correspond to the rotation of each of the rotated rotating means, and the music is rotated. By executing an effect with a sense of unity between the moving means and the output music, it is possible to suppress the discomfort that may occur due to the rotation of the rotating means that is rotated at different timings, and increase the degree of attention to the game. There is an effect.

In any of the gaming machines O1 to O3,
The music output means is
From the start of the rotation of the rotation means by the first rotation means to the timing when the rotation of all the rotation means is stopped, a predetermined predetermined music is continuously output. Machine O4.

According to the gaming machine O4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines O1 to O3, the following effects are produced. That is, the music output means continuously outputs a predetermined music piece from the start of the rotation of the rotation means by the first rotation means to the timing when the rotation of all the rotation means is stopped. As a result, the predetermined music is output so as to correspond to the start of the rotation of one rotation means, and the output of the predetermined music is continued until the rotation of all the rotation means is stopped. It is possible to create a sense of unity between the rotation of and the output of the music. As a result, the sense of unity can suppress an uncomfortable feeling that may be caused by the rotation of the rotating means that is rotated at different timings, and can increase the degree of attention to the game.

In gaming machine O4,
The music output means is
Outputting a first sound constituting the predetermined music at a timing at which the rotation means starts rotation by the first rotation means,
A gaming machine O5, which outputs a second sound that is different from the first sound and is a sound that constitutes the predetermined music at the timing when the second rotation means starts the rotation of the rotation means. ..

According to the gaming machine O5, the following effects are produced in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines O1 to O4. That is, the music output means outputs the first sound constituting the predetermined music at the timing when the first rotating means starts rotating the rotating means, and the second rotating means starts rotating the rotating means. A second sound that is different from the first sound and is a sound that forms a predetermined music is output at a timing. As a result, the first sound constituting the predetermined music is output so as to correspond to the start of rotation of one rotating means, and the predetermined music is arranged so as to correspond to the start of rotation of the other rotating means. By outputting two tones, it is possible to create a sense of unity due to the completion of the music corresponding to the rotation of the rotating means. As a result, the sense of unity can suppress an uncomfortable feeling that may be caused by the rotation of the rotating means that is rotated at different timings, and can increase the degree of attention to the game.

In gaming machine O5,
The music output means is
Outputting the first sound and the second sound in synchronism with a beat (for example, the first beat and the second beat in one bar) at a predetermined tempo (for example, the quarter beat of BPM120). Characteristic game machine O6.

According to the gaming machine O6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine O5, the following effects are achieved. That is, the music output means outputs the first sound and the second sound in synchronization with the beat at the predetermined tempo. As a result, the first sound constituting the predetermined music is output in synchronization with the beat at the predetermined tempo so as to correspond to the start of the rotation of one rotating means, and the start of the rotation of the other rotating means is also responded to. By outputting the second sound that constitutes the predetermined music in accordance with the beat at the predetermined tempo, a sense of unity of the music is created by the completion of the music of the predetermined tempo corresponding to the rotation of the rotating means. be able to. As a result, the sense of unity can suppress an uncomfortable feeling that may be caused by the rotation of the rotating means that is rotated at different timings, and can increase the degree of attention to the game.

In any of the gaming machines O5,
The music output means is
A game machine O7, wherein a special sound (for example, a chord) that produces a predetermined harmony is formed by the first sound and the second sound.

According to the gaming machine O7, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine O5, the following effects are achieved. That is, the music output means forms a special sound that produces a predetermined harmony between the first sound and the second sound. Thus, the first sound that constitutes the special sound is output so as to correspond to the start of the rotation of one rotating means, and the special sound is constituted such that it corresponds to the start of the rotation of the other rotating means. It is possible to create a sense of unity by outputting two sounds and completing a special sound having a predetermined harmony so as to correspond to the rotation of the rotating means. As a result, the sense of unity can suppress an uncomfortable feeling that may be caused by the rotation of the rotating means that is rotated at different timings, and can increase the degree of attention to the game.

It should be noted that any one of the gaming machines B0, C0, D0, E0, F0, G0, H0, I0, J0, K0, L0, M0, N0, O0 with respect to the configuration of any of the gaming machines A0-A9. The configuration limited to 1 may be applied.

In addition, with respect to any configuration of the gaming machine B0, any one of the gaming machines A0 to A9, C0, D0, E0, F0, G0, H0, I0, J0, K0, L0, M0, N0, O0 The configuration limited to 1 may be applied.

In addition, with respect to any configuration of the gaming machine C0, one of the gaming machines A0 to A9, B0, D0, E0, F0, G0, H0, I0, J0, K0, L0, M0, N0, O0 The configuration limited to 1 may be applied.

In addition, with respect to any of the configurations of the gaming machine D0, any of the gaming machines A0 to A9, B0, C0, E0, F0, G0, H0, I0, J0, K0, L0, M0, N0, O0 The configuration limited to 1 may be applied.

In addition, with respect to any configuration of the gaming machine E0, any one of the gaming machines A0 to A9, B0, C0, D0, F0, G0, H0, I0, J0, K0, L0, M0, N0, O0 The configuration limited to 1 may be applied.

In addition, with respect to any of the configurations of the gaming machine F0, any one of the gaming machines A0 to A9, B0, C0, D0, E0, G0, H0, I0, J0, K0, L0, M0, N0, O0 The configuration limited to 1 may be applied.

In addition, with respect to any of the configurations of the gaming machine G0, any one of the gaming machines A0 to A9, B0, C0, D0, E0, F0, H0, I0, J0, K0, L0, M0, N0, O0 The configuration limited to 1 may be applied.

In addition, with respect to any configuration of the gaming machine H0, any of the gaming machines A0 to A9, B0, C0, D0, E0, F0, G0, I0, J0, K0, L0, M0, N0, O0 The configuration limited to 1 may be applied.

In addition, with respect to any of the configurations of the gaming machine I0, any one of the gaming machines A0 to A9, B0, C0, D0, E0, F0, G0, H0, J0, K0, L0, M0, N0, O0 The configuration limited to 1 may be applied.

In addition, with respect to any of the configurations of the gaming machine J0, any one of the gaming machines A0 to A9, B0, C0, D0, E0, F0, G0, H0, I0, K0, L0, M0, N0, O0 The configuration limited to 1 may be applied.

In addition, with respect to any configuration of the gaming machine K0, any one of the gaming machines A0 to A9, B0, C0, D0, E0, F0, G0, H0, I0, J0, L0, M0, N0, O0 The configuration limited to 1 may be applied.

In addition, with respect to any of the configurations of the gaming machine L0, any one of the gaming machines A0 to A9, B0, C0, D0, E0, F0, G0, H0, I0, J0, K0, M0, N0, O0 The configuration limited to 1 may be applied.

In addition, with respect to any of the configurations of the gaming machine M0, any of the gaming machines A0 to A9, B0, C0, D0, E0, F0, G0, H0, I0, J0, K0, L0, N0, O0 The configuration limited to 1 may be applied.

In addition, with respect to any of the configurations of the gaming machine N0, any one of the gaming machines A0 to A9, B0, C0, D0, E0, F0, G0, H0, I0, J0, K0, L0, M0, O0 The configuration limited to 1 may be applied.

In addition, with respect to any of the configurations of the gaming machine O0, any one of the gaming machines A0 to A9, B0, C0, D0, E0, F0, G0, H0, I0, J0, K0, L0, M0, N0 The configuration limited to 1 may be applied.

In addition, with respect to any of the configurations of the gaming machines A0 to A9, the gaming machines B0 to B8, C0 to C11, D0 to D8, E0 to E7, F0 to F6, G0 to G7, H0 to H6, I0. The configuration limited by any one of I7, J0 to J5, K0 to K5, L0 to L4, M0 to M4, N0, Na1 to Na7, Nb1 to Nb6, Nc1 to Nc7, and O0 to O7 may be applied. ..

In addition, with respect to any one of the configurations of the gaming machines B0 to B8, the gaming machines A0 to A9, C0 to C11, D0 to D8, E0 to E7, F0 to F6, G0 to G7, H0 to H6, I0. The configuration limited by any one of I7, J0 to J5, K0 to K5, L0 to L4, M0 to M4, N0, Na1 to Na7, Nb1 to Nb6, Nc1 to Nc7, and O0 to O7 may be applied. ..

In addition, with respect to any of the configurations of the gaming machines C0 to C11, the gaming machines A0 to A9, B0 to B8, D0 to D8, E0 to E7, F0 to F6, G0 to G7, H0 to H6, I0. The configuration limited by any one of I7, J0 to J5, K0 to K5, L0 to L4, M0 to M4, N0, Na1 to Na7, Nb1 to Nb6, Nc1 to Nc7, and O0 to O7 may be applied. ..

In addition, with respect to any of the configurations of the gaming machines D0 to D8, the gaming machines A0 to A9, B0 to B8, C0 to C11, E0 to E7, F0 to F6, G0 to G7, H0 to H6, I0. The configuration limited by any one of I7, J0 to J5, K0 to K5, L0 to L4, M0 to M4, N0, Na1 to Na7, Nb1 to Nb6, Nc1 to Nc7, and O0 to O7 may be applied. ..

In addition, with respect to any of the configurations of the gaming machines E0 to E7, the gaming machines A0 to A9, B0 to B8, C0 to C11, D0 to D8, F0 to F6, G0 to G7, H0 to H6, I0. The configuration limited by any one of I7, J0 to J5, K0 to K5, L0 to L4, M0 to M4, N0, Na1 to Na7, Nb1 to Nb6, Nc1 to Nc7, and O0 to O7 may be applied. ..

In addition, with respect to any one of the configurations of the gaming machines F0 to F6, the gaming machines A0 to A9, B0 to B8, C0 to C11, D0 to D8, E0 to E7, G0 to G7, H0 to H6, I0 to The configuration limited by any one of I7, J0 to J5, K0 to K5, L0 to L4, M0 to M4, N0, Na1 to Na7, Nb1 to Nb6, Nc1 to Nc7, and O0 to O7 may be applied. ..

In addition, with respect to any of the configurations of the gaming machines G0 to G7, the gaming machines A0 to A9, B0 to B8, C0 to C11, D0 to D8, E0 to E7, F0 to F6, H0 to H6, I0. The configuration limited by any one of I7, J0 to J5, K0 to K5, L0 to L4, M0 to M4, N0, Na1 to Na7, Nb1 to Nb6, Nc1 to Nc7, and O0 to O7 may be applied. .

In addition, with respect to any of the configurations of the gaming machines H0 to H6, the gaming machines A0 to A9, B0 to B8, C0 to C11, D0 to D8, E0 to E7, F0 to F6, G0 to G7, I0. The configuration limited by any one of I7, J0 to J5, K0 to K5, L0 to L4, M0 to M4, N0, Na1 to Na7, Nb1 to Nb6, Nc1 to Nc7, and O0 to O7 may be applied. ..

In addition, with respect to any one of the configurations of the gaming machines I0 to I7, the gaming machines A0 to A9, B0 to B8, C0 to C11, D0 to D8, E0 to E7, F0 to F6, G0 to G7, H0. The configuration limited to any one of H6, J0 to J5, K0 to K5, L0 to L4, M0 to M4, N0, Na1 to Na7, Nb1 to Nb6, Nc1 to Nc7, and O0 to O7 may be applied. ..

In addition, with respect to any of the configurations of the gaming machines J0 to J5, the gaming machines A0 to A9, B0 to B8, C0 to C11, D0 to D8, E0 to E7, F0 to F6, G0 to G7, H0. The configuration limited by any one of H6, I0 to I7, K0 to K5, L0 to L4, M0 to M4, N0, Na1 to Na7, Nb1 to Nb6, Nc1 to Nc7, and O0 to O7 may be applied. ..

In addition, with respect to any of the configurations of the gaming machines K0 to K5, the gaming machines A0 to A9, B0 to B8, C0 to C11, D0 to D8, E0 to E7, F0 to F6, G0 to G7, H0. The configuration limited by any one of H6, I0 to I7, J0 to J5, L0 to L4, M0 to M4, N0, Na1 to Na7, Nb1 to Nb6, Nc1 to Nc7, and O0 to O7 may be applied. ..

In addition, with respect to any of the configurations of the gaming machines L0 to L4, the gaming machines A0 to A9, B0 to B8, C0 to C11, D0 to D8, E0 to E7, F0 to F6, G0 to G7, H0. The configuration limited by any one of H6, I0 to I7, J0 to J5, K0 to K5, M0 to M4, N0, Na1 to Na7, Nb1 to Nb6, Nc1 to Nc7, and O0 to O7 may be applied. ..

In addition, with respect to any one of the configurations of the gaming machines M0 to M4, the gaming machines A0 to A9, B0 to B8, C0 to C11, D0 to D8, E0 to E7, F0 to F6, G0 to G7, H0. The configuration limited by any one of H6, I0 to I7, J0 to J5, K0 to K5, L0 to L4, N0, Na1 to Na7, Nb1 to Nb6, Nc1 to Nc7, and O0 to O7 may be applied. ..

In addition, with respect to the configuration of any one of the gaming machines N0, Na1 to Na7, Nb1 to Nb6, Nc1 to Nc7, the gaming machines A0 to A9, B0 to B8, C0 to C11, D0 to D8, E0 to E7, The configuration limited by any one of F0-F6, G0-G7, H0-H6, I0-I7, J0-J5, K0-K5, L0-L4, M0-M4, O0-O7 may be applied. ..

In addition, with respect to any of the configurations of the gaming machines O0 to O7, the gaming machines A0 to A9, B0 to B8, C0 to C11, D0 to D8, E0 to E7, F0 to F6, G0 to G7, H0. The configuration limited to any one of H6, I0 to I7, J0 to J5, K0 to K5, L0 to L4, M0 to M4, N0, Na1 to Na7, Nb1 to Nb6, and Nc1 to Nc7 may be applied. ..

The configuration limited to any one of the gaming machines A1 to A9 may be applied to the configuration of the gaming machine A0.

The configuration limited to any one of the gaming machines B1 to B8 may be applied to the configuration of the gaming machine B0.

The configuration limited to any one of the gaming machines C1 to C11 may be applied to the configuration of the gaming machine C0.

The configuration limited to any one of the game machines D1 to D8 may be applied to the configuration of the game machine D0.

The configuration limited to any one of the gaming machines E1 to E7 may be applied to the configuration of the gaming machine E0.

The configuration limited to any one of the gaming machines F1 to F6 may be applied to the configuration of the gaming machine F0.

The configuration limited to any one of the gaming machines G1 to G7 may be applied to the configuration of the gaming machine G0.

The configuration limited to any one of the gaming machines H1 to H6 may be applied to the configuration of the gaming machine H0.

The configuration limited to any one of the gaming machines I1 to I7 may be applied to the configuration of the gaming machine I0.

The configuration limited to any one of the gaming machines J1 to J5 may be applied to the configuration of the gaming machine J0.

The configuration limited to any one of the gaming machines K1 to K5 may be applied to the configuration of the gaming machine K0.

The configuration limited to any one of the gaming machines L1 to L4 may be applied to the configuration of the gaming machine L0.

The configuration limited to any one of the gaming machines M1 to M4 may be applied to the configuration of the gaming machine M0.

The configuration limited to any one of the game machines Na1 to Na7 may be applied to the configuration of the game machine N0.

The configuration limited to any one of the gaming machines Nb1 to Nb6 may be applied to the configuration of the gaming machine N0.

The configuration limited to any one of the gaming machines Nc1 to Nc7 may be applied to the configuration of the gaming machine N0.

The configuration limited to any one of the gaming machines O1 to O7 may be applied to the configuration of the gaming machine O0.

In these cases, it is possible to obtain further effects by applying each configuration.

Gaming machines A0 to A9, B0 to B8, C0 to C11, D0 to D8, E0 to E7, F0 to F6, G0 to G7, H0 to H6, I0 to I7, J0 to J5, K0 to K5, L0 to L4, A gaming machine Z1 characterized in that in any one of M0 to M4, N0, Na1 to Na7, Nb1 to Nb6, Nc1 to Nc7, O0 to O7, the gaming machine is a slot machine. Among them, as a basic configuration of the slot machine, "variable display means for dynamically displaying the identification information sequence consisting of a plurality of identification information and then confirming and displaying the identification information is provided to operate the starting operation means (for example, the operation lever). Due to the start of the dynamic display of the identification information, the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time elapses. It is a gaming machine provided with special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player, provided that the confirmed identification information is the specific identification information. In this case, coins, medals, etc. are typical examples of the game medium.

Gaming machines A0 to A9, B0 to B8, C0 to C11, D0 to D8, E0 to E7, F0 to F6, G0 to G7, H0 to H6, I0 to I7, J0 to J5, K0 to K5, L0 to L4, A gaming machine Z2, wherein in any one of M0 to M4, N0, Na1 to Na7, Nb1 to Nb6, Nc1 to Nc7, O0 to O7, the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the pachinko gaming machine is provided with an operation handle, which shoots a ball to a predetermined game area in response to the operation of the operation handle, and the ball is moved to an operating port arranged at a predetermined position in the game area. As a necessary condition for winning a prize (or passing through an actuation port), there is one in which the identification information dynamically displayed on the display means is fixedly stopped after a predetermined time. Also, when a special game state occurs, a variable winning device (major winning opening) arranged at a predetermined position in the game area is opened in a predetermined manner to make it possible to win a ball, and the value depending on the number of winning prizes. The value (including not only the gift ball but also the data written to the magnetic card, etc.) is given.

Gaming machines A0 to A9, B0 to B8, C0 to C11, D0 to D8, E0 to E7, F0 to F6, G0 to G7, H0 to H6, I0 to I7, J0 to J5, K0 to K5, L0 to L4, In any one of M0 to M4, N0, Na1 to Na7, Nb1 to Nb6, Nc1 to Nc7, O0 to O7, the gaming machine is a combination of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Machine Z3. Among them, the basic configuration of the fused gaming machine is "provided with variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying the identification information sequence consisting of a plurality of identification information, and starting operation means (for example, operation lever). The fluctuation of the identification information is started due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined time elapses. It is provided with a special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on condition that the fixed identification information at the time of stop is the specific identification information, and a ball is used as a game medium, and the identification information is provided. It requires a predetermined number of balls to start the dynamic display of, and a large amount of balls are paid out when a special game state occurs.

10 Pachinko machines (gaming machines)
60a Board surface first decorative symbol group 60b Board surface second decorative symbol group 81 Drum display device (part of display means, part of rendering means, part of second rendering means)
110 main control device 113 audio lamp control device (part of sequential lighting means, part of music output means, part of music synchronization means)
114 display control device (part of dynamic execution means, part of drive control means, part of previous stage appearance means, part of stage change means)
201 MPU (a part of judgment means)
203f Reserved ball execution area (part of acquisition means)
221 MPU (part of suggestion information lottery means)
222e Light guide plate lighting pattern table 222f Confirmation lamp lighting pattern table 223d Light guide pattern lottery counter 223e Confirmation lamp timing lottery counter 310 Confirmation lamp unit (part of second effect means)
311 Confirmation lamp (part of second effect means, part of second light emitting means)
400 Light guide unit (part of effect means, part of first effect means)
410 Front light guide plate (part of first effect means, part of second light guide means)
411 Second decorative pattern group 412 Third decorative pattern (part of second suggestion information)
413 Fourth decorative symbol group (part of first suggestion information, part of second predetermined information)
414 Lower LED unit (a part of the light emitting means, a part of the first light emitting means)
414c LED for the lower front side (a part of the second light emitting means)
414d front lower condensing lens 415 front right LED unit (part of second effect means)
415c Front right LED (part of the first light emitting means, part of the second light emitting means)
415d front right condenser lens (a part of condenser means)
416c Front left LED (part of the first light emitting means)
416d Front-side left-side condenser lens (part of condenser means)
420 Rear light guide plate (part of light guide means, part of second rendering means, part of first light guide means)
421 First decorative symbol group (part of predetermined information, part of third suggestion information, part of first predetermined information)
422 Rear upper LED unit (part of the first effect means)
422c Rear upper LED (part of first light emitting means)
423 Diffusion lens for upper rear side (a part of diffusing means, a part of multi-direction irradiation means)
424 LED on the lower rear side (part of light emitting part, part of first light emitting part, part of second light emitting part, part of third light emitting part)
425 Rear lower diffusing lens (part of diffusing means, part of multi-directional irradiating means)
425a Leftward diffusion part (a part of first direction irradiation part)
425b Front direction diffusion part (a part of second direction irradiation part)
425c Rightward diffusion part (a part of third direction irradiation part)
430 Display Area Forming Member 431 Central Opening 432 Lens Cut (Part of Cover)
C1 jackpot random number counter (part of special information)
CR middle reel (part of rotating means, part of common rotating means, part of second rotating means, part of three-means synchronous rotating means)
LR left reel (part of rotating means, part of non-common rotating means, part of first rotating means, part of two-means synchronous rotating means)
RR right reel (part of rotating means, part of common rotating means, part of first rotating means, part of two-means synchronous rotating means)
600 stepping motor (part of rotation driving means)

Claims (5)

Equipped with effect means for performing a predetermined effect as the game progresses,
The production means is
A light emitting means having at least a first light emitting portion which emits light and a second light emitting portion which is arranged on the predetermined direction side of the first light emitting portion,
When light is emitted from the light emitting means, a light guide means for making predetermined information regarding a game visible from the front side of the gaming machine,
A gaming machine comprising: the light emitting means, which sequentially emits light from the first light emitting portion toward the predetermined direction. A sequential extinguishing unit for sequentially extinguishing the light emitting unit sequentially emitted from the first light emitting unit toward the predetermined direction by the sequential light emitting unit, The gaming machine according to claim 1. The sequential light emitting means,
3. The game according to claim 1 or 2, further comprising: a light emission color inheriting unit that emits light in the light emission color emitted by the first light emitting portion when the second light emitting portion emits light. Machine. The sequential light emitting means,
The gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 3, further comprising: a different-color light emitting unit that causes the first light emitting unit and the second light emitting unit to emit different colors. The different color light emitting means,
After the predetermined first emission color is emitted from the first emission unit, the second emission unit emits the first emission color and the first emission unit emits the second emission different from the first emission color. The gaming machine according to claim 4, wherein the gaming machine emits light in colors.

Images